ΜΑ S TER Ν EGA Τ IV Ε NO. 92-81119 MICROFILMED 1993 COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES/NEW YORK as part of the "Foundations of Western Civilization Preservation Project" Funded by the NATIONAL ENDOWMENT FOR THE HUMANITIES Reproductions may not be made without permission from Columbia University Library COPYRtGHT STATEMENT The copyright law of the United States - Titie 17, United States Code - concerns the maldng of photocopies or other reproductions of copyrighted materiai. Under certain conditions specified in the law, libraries and archives are authorized to furnish a photocopy or other reproduction. One of these specified conditions is that the photocopy or other reproduction is not to be "used for any purpose other than private study, scholarship, or research.'* If a user makes a request for, or later uses, a photocopy or reproduction for pui use," that user may be liable for copyright infringement. This institution reserves the right to refuse to accept a copy order if, in Its judgement, fulfillment of the order would involve violation of the copyright law. AUTHOR: TITLE: THE FIRST FOUR BOOKS OF XENOPHON'S... PLACE: BOSTON DA Τ Ε : 1894 COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES PRESERVATION DEPARTMENT BIBLIOGRA PHIC MTCRnFORM TARHFT Master Negative # Original Material as Filmed - Existing Bibliographic Record 88XM IE942 Restrictions on Use: Anabasis. 1894. Xenophon. The first four books of Xcno,,l,on'.s Anabasis, witli notes by lAil.ai AA . Goo.Iu.n ... and John AVilliams AVhite m -ii p^'f!:^;:;'• t^ ΪΊ'^ •^'*^••' «i"» »"J company ,ηβοϊ, III, -i*i p. iroiit.. illii.^., tlouble map 19™ ^ ^ to xonolt^s A"!;..;™V;;.U'«n.r o^ ')" "'."""•"'-' "-""-y John Willlam.W e nn l v^.Wc i, iV"*' •''J">"O«icallj relatetl. I.y «etc., Glnn T'-omy^luv 'i'^im, ^'"""^ "' -'"'^^"° •• «»«'<>". New York ΛΜ ll„„,s ,841K1..17. Joint ..... ....>,;„.«„„. M^ w^ -τγτ ΤΐΤ^, ^ τ^'^ rT,^gg^w?»T'"*T ΙΜ! ifc 'flEiuSiWE^i^^l&ri 4\ s^jKua^ ^LitMdL -Λ .ΐϊί14ά'3 :.-*,,*6»ΐΐ^•> riff—j -ιττι •ν^- ?*^' LS »•■■ ^ίϊ ^»ί'. ^ *■;' ?>*! Λ™« .-sSff^ !^ 1»•>νν '^f^l^^i «ί^Λΐ 'Χ,ν Jlityt^ ■%ί ^.^r-^; --'^?fei^ (HohmdAH 3lnluejr g llg Hibrarg Mmnmt Vmmm iEark BORN 1864-OIEO 1909 PROFESeoW OF CLAeSICAL PHILOLOGY IN COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY SCHOLAR AUTHOR TIAOHM AS A MEMORIAL OF HIS LIFE AND WORK HIS STUDENTS AND FRIENDS QAVfi. HIS LIBRARY TO HIS ALMA MATIR A.D. 1907 KActvo? δ' 6 πόνος μοι uwuTiv hovXav χψ cvc». ILE ■I ] THK FIRST FOUR BOOKS ow ' M^ XENOPHON'S ANABASIS 4VV OTitb flotee ADAPTED TO THE LATEST EDITION OF GOODWIN'S GREEK GRAMMAR, AND TO HADLEY'S GREEK GRAMMAR (REVISED BY ALLEN). EDITED BY WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, LL.D. and D.C.L., ELIOT PROFESSOR OF GREEK LITERATURE, AND JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE, Ph.D. PROFESSOR OF GREEK, 12i HARVARD UNIVERSITY. REVISED EDITION, Wlk. BOSTON : PUBLISHED BY GINN & COMPANY. 1894. \ »' hm, ^1 •4 ' /...^ 1. ^ » ^ COPYKIQHT, 1894 By William W. Goodwin and Johk Willlims White. ALL RIGHTS B£SEKV£D. la / PREFACE. -•o•- I This volume contains the first four books of Xenophon's lAnabasis, edited for the use of schools. These books include bhe mustering of the Greek army which invaded Persia in the service of Cyrus the Younger, the march into the Great King's jountry, the battle of Cunaxa, and the death of Cyrus ; and they carry the narrative of the retreat of the Ten Thousand down to their arrival at Trapezus after their perilous march from the neighborhood of Babylon. The editors believe that ;his is as much of the Anabasis as it is advisable for pupils ;o read before entering college, and no more than is needed to wepare them for the study of more difficult Greek prose. No )tlier work is, on the whole, so well adapted to the needs of )eginners in Greek as the Anabasis ; but, if the standard of fcholarship in our classical schools is ever to approach that ►f similar institutions in other countries, they must extend heir teaching of Attic prose to other authors than Xenophon. The present edition contains an Introduction, written by r. White, which seeks to give the information on history -nd on military antiquities which is needed for the under- tanding of the Anabasis. The editors have not added a iography of Xenophon, as this is easily found in the ency- ilopaedias and classical dictionaries which are accessible to II. The new Dictionary to the Anabasis, prepared by Messrs. AVhite and Morgan, is an important part of this volume ; and to this the pupil is constantly referred, not only for the meaning and use of words, but also for many matters of %' PREFACE. PREFACR Msloiy «nil anticiiiitiee whicb are not discussed in the Intro- duction. As the notes have been written for those who can always refer to this Dictionary and to the Introduction, much information which wouhl otherwise be found in the notes has there been omitted. It is feared that tliis may give tlie notes, especially those on the earlier books, the appearance of being exclusively grammatical ; but the constant reference to the Introduction and the Dictionary will, it is hoped, correct this impression. The notes on the first two books have been prepared chiefly by Mr. AVhite, those on the last two chiefly by Mr. Goodwin. It will be seen that these notes make no pre- tension to learning, and aim merely at aiding beginners in laying a solid foundation for future scliolarship. The gram- matical aid is given in great measure through references, in which form alone it can be systematic. Young students need to be referred to more detailed statements of the general principles involved in the new constructions which they constantly meet in reading, than can be given in a commentary; and frequent reference to the grammar is the only sure means of fixing in the mind the important principles of syntax. At the same time, the grammatical references are seldom given without at least some hint of the point of construction which is involved: this will help those to whom a construction is new, while it will save others the trouble of looking up an explanation of what they already understand, Keferences to parallel passages are freely given, as the comparison of similar expressions is one of the best ways of fixing in the mind the knowledge of even familiar idioms. This is often highly useful, even, when it has the appearance of tedious repe- tition. It will be seen that the notes on the first book, which it is assumed will be used for giving a solid founda- tion in the general principles of Greek syntax, are especially copious ; while those on the three following books are written for pupils who are supposed to have mastered the rudiments of Greek. In the opinion of the editors it is highly desir- able to use as small a portion as possible of classic literature as a co7*pus vile for the more minute dissection, and to enable pupils at the earliest possible moment to read Greek and Latin with an appreciative mind. It is of course impossible in a school-book like this to give special credit for every remark which is wholly or partly borrowed. The editors must therefore express, once for all, their obligations to the long and familiar line of commentators on Xenophon, whose diligence has rendered further originality well-nigh impossible. American scholars will long remember gratefully the learning and fidelity with which the late Professor Alpheus Crosby devoted himself to the interpreta- tion of the Anabasis. The text of this edition is based on that of Hug, in the Teubner text-edition of 1889, so far as this is determined by Hug's valuable recension of the Paris Codex C ; the editors have, however, used their own discretion with regard to many conjectural emendations which Hug has introduced into his text. They have attempted to follow the best ancient tradition and at the same time to put a readable and consistent text into the hands of school-boys. The map of the march of the Ten Thousand Greeks in this volume is copied chiefly from Kiepert's map in Kehdantz's Anabasis. Cambridge, Mass., May, 1894. ) 4 INTRODUCTION. XENOPHON'S ANABASIS. 1. The Anabasis of Xenophon tells the story of the Expe- dition of Cyrus the Younger against his brother Artaxerxes to wrest from his possession the throne of Persia, of the retreat to the Black Sea, after the death of Cyrus, of the Greeks whom he had gathered under his command, and of their subsequent return to western Asia Minor. The expe- dition set out from Sardis in the spring of 401 b. c, and six months later a battle was fought at the village of Cunaxa, some forty or fifty miles from Babylon. In this battle Cyrus was killed in a hand-to-hand encounter with' his brother ; and the Greeks, although they twice met and twice routed in a single day the vast forces which Artaxerxes brought against them, suffered virtual defeat in losing their leader. 2. Their march from Sardis to Cunaxa had lain through southern Asia Minor and across the desert of Arabia. But this route, the only one with which they were acquainted,, was closed to them ; for if they had undertaken to return as they came, they would have perished of hunger in the desert. They set out, therefore, northward under the guidance of Ariaeus, who had been the commander of the barbarian forces of Cyrus ; but after a single day's march, they entered into negotiations with the king which led to a treaty. By the terms of this treaty, Tissaphernes, one of the king's four generals in the battle, was to lead them back in safety to Ionia. At the river Zapatas, however, Tissaphernes treacher- ously entrapped five of the generals, four of whom were soon after put to death. VUl INTRODUCTION. p3. 3. Great dejection in consequence fell upon the army ; but, recovering their courage, especially under the exhorta- tions of Xenophon, they elected new generals, and began their retreat along the upper waters of the Tigris and through the highlands of Armenia to the Greek colonies on the Black Sea. This " Retreat of the Ten Thousand " from the river Zapatas to Trapezus, the modern Trebizond, was one of incred- ible hardship, — a nearly constant fight for over three months tlirough an enemy's country in the winter time. Xenophon's narrative of it contains by far the most vivid picture that has ever been given of the temper, discipline, and endurance of those citizen-soldiers who constituted the armies of Greece ; and along Λvith that an authentic and most interesting account of the tribes of Asiatic mountaineers who lived just outside the circle of the civilized world. The story of the advance, of the battle, and of the retreat to Trapezus is told in the first four books of the Anabasis, These books are included in the present edition. 4. The Greeks reached Trapezus at the end of the winter in 400 B. €., and after a month's halt proceeded westward, partly by land and partly by sea, to Chrysopolis on the Thracian Bosphorus, opposite Byzantium, which they reached in the summer. After passing over into Thrace and subse- quently returning to Asia, in the spring of 399 b. c. they joined the army of Thibron, the general then in command of the Lacedaemonian forces on the coast of Asia Minor. The last three books of the Anabasis contain the account of the return of the Greeks from Trapezus to Chrysopolis, and of their subsequent operations until they joined forces with Thibron, when, as the "Ten Thousand," they disappear from history.^ iln chapters LXIX., LXX., and LXXI of his History of Greece, Grote gives an account of the events covered by the Anabasis, which in its interest rivals the original. Grote's chapters constitute an excellent running commentary on Xenophon^s text. δ β.] PERSIA AND THE PERSIANS. IX ^1 5. Such, in brief, is the story of the Anabasis. The expe- dition failed, but it produced a profound impression on the contemporary Greek world. It proved that an army of disciplined Greeks, under the command of skilful leaders, might penetrate even to the heart of the empire of the Great King and work its will against whatever odds. It showed the impotence of Persia, and confirmed the contemptuous judgment of the Younger Cyrus, who said to the Greek generals and captains assembled at the last council of war, before the battle at Cunaxa, that he was ashamed to think how worthless they would find his countrymen to be. To the modern reader interested in Greek studies, Xenophon's graphic narrative is a new revelation of the marvellous strength and force of the Hellenic character. It also gives him glimpses of that older oriental civilization, with which the Greeks here came into conflict on its own soil. Some previous knowledge of the history and institutions of Persia, the scene of the action of the Aimbasis, is necessary to a proper understanding of Xenophon's narration. PERSIA AND THE PERSIANS. 6. The Persian empire was founded by Cyrus the Great (y. Κΰρος).^ He himself tells us who he was. " I am Cyrus," he says on one of the Babylonian cylinders, " king of hosts, great king, mighty king, king of Babylon, king of Sumer and Akkad, king of the four regions; son of Cambyses, great king, king of Anshan ; grandson of Cyrus, great king, king of Anshan ; great-grandson of Te'ispes, great king, king of Anshan." It is probable that his ancestors were of Iranian stock, like the Medes, and that they had come from the north 1 When a Greek word is thus cited in parentheses in the Introduction, read the corresponding article in the Dictionary at the end of this book. INTRODUCTION. [5 6. S9.] PERSIA AND THE PERSIANS. XI to settle in that rugged but fruitful country on the Persian Gulf, which the Greeks called Persis, and the Romans Persis or Persia (y. ΙΙψσψ). The first great leader of the race was Achaemenes, and the earliest royal city was Pasargadae, near which grew up Persepolis. Ancient Persis is in the same latitude with lower Egypt, but is high land. The early Persians who made it their home were a hardy race, born to conquest. They came into possession of Elam, or Susiane (v. 2οΰσα) ; and Teispes, son of Achaemenes, became king of Anshan, in Elam, as well as of Persis. On his death the royal house of the Achaemenidae divided into two branches. One ruled in Anshan, the other in Persis. The line of Anshan embraced Cyrus I., son of Teispes, Cambyses I., and Cyrus the Great (Cyrus II.) ; the line of Persis, Ariaramnes, son of Teispes, Artames, and Hystaspes, a contemporary of Cyrus the Great. 7. These genealogical facts, established by records contem- porary with Cyrus the Great and Darius I., his successor once removed, were not known to the Greeks. Among them many legends grew up about the name of the great Cyrus. The best known is recorded by Herodotus with minute details. This made Cyrus the grandson of Astyages, king of Media, who had married his daughter Mandane to Cambyses, a Persian of middle rank, in fear of a dream. This dream the Magi interpreted to mean that his daughter would bear a son who would one day become the ruler of all Asia. But we now know that Cambyses, father of Cyrus, was a king, reign- ing in Elam ; and there is no proof of any blood relationship between him and the royal house of Media. . 8. When Cyrus came to tlie throne, there were three great kingdoms in Asia, the Median, the Lydian, and the Baby- lonian. The kings of Elam and of Persis were at this time vassals of Astyages the Mede. But in 549 b. c, when Media and Babylon were at war, Cyrus raised the standard of revolt \ and defeated Astyages in battle. The latter was deposed by his own subjects and delivered to the conqueror in chains. The kings who had been his vassals, the king of Persis included, acknowledged the sovereignty of Cyrus. Thus was founded the great empire of the Persians. Cyrus swept on from conquest to conquest. In 546, Sardis, the capital of the kingdom of Lydia, fell before an irresistible assaidt. The Greek cities of the coast yielded to force of arms. In upper Asia Cyrus carried the bounds of his empire eastward to the borders of India, and in 538 b. c. he overthrew the kingdom of Babylon. He died in 529 b. c. and was buried at Pasargadae. The ruins of his tomb still exist, a grave- chamber standing on a base of seven retreating steps, all of solid blocks of white marble. On it was the simple inscription, " Man ! I am Cyrus, son of Cambyses, who founded the greatness of Persia and ruled Asia. Grudge me not this monument." 9. Cyrus was succeeded by his son Cambyses, a man of suspicious and ungovernable temper. His reign is marked by the conquest of Egypt and Libya, against which Cyrus had not turned his arms. Cambyses had a yoimger brother, Bardes, called Smerdis by the Greeks, whom in jealousy and distrust he had had secretly assassinated before he set out on his Egyptian campaign. He tarried long in the west, and a Magian priest, who chanced to resemble the murdered man, knowing how Cambyses was hated by his subjects, proclaimed himself to be the missing Bardes and usurped the throne. When Cambyses heard the news, he called together the noblest of the Persians, confessed his crime, and slew himself. His reign had lasted but a few years, and he left no son. Justice quickly overtook the usurper. Darius, the son of Hystaspes, of that branch of the house of Achaemenes that had ruled in Persis (see § 6), formed a conspiracy, and with the help of six faithful followers, soughlfout the impostor in Xll mTRODTJCTION. [«a 512.] PERSIA AND THE PERSIANS. XIU Media, got access to his presence by stratagem, and slew him in the night time in the castle to which he had withdrawn for safety. The false king had ruled but seven months. 10. Darius proclaimed himself king, but he was met by resistance on all sides. The first six years of his reign, which began in 521 b. c, were a continuous struggle against revolt. In these years he fought nineteen pitched battles. He was often in desperate straits. But he was a man of extraor- dinary resource and finally overcame all obstacles. He him- self records the names of thirty countries of which he had become king. The empire which he established was bounded on the north by the Danube, the Black sea, the Caucasian mountains, the Caspian sea, the sea of Aral, and the river Sir ; on the east by Eastern Turkestan, the eastern limit of the Punjaub, and the Indus ; on the south by the Arabian sea, the Persian gulf, the desert of Arabia, the Bed sea. Nubia, and the Libyan desert ; and on the Avest by the gulf of Sidra, the Mediter- ranean and Aegean seas, and the western limit of Eastern Roumelia and Bulgaria. The area of this vast empire has been estimated to have been over 2,000,000 square miles, ten times that of the German Empire. Its population has been estimated to have numbered 80,000,000, nearly twice that of Germany in 1885. 11. When Darius had securely established his authority over all parts of his empire, he set to work on the reorganiza- tion of its administration. The principle he adopted was that of uniformity of control, a principle as difficult of application as it was necessary in an empire composed of such diverse nationalities. He divided the empire, as he himself tells us, into twenty-three satrapies or provinces. These satrapies were in fact kingdoms. Territorially, each of them, on the average, was one fourth larger than all New England. Each province was under fhe government of three officers, a satrap Ί \ or viceroy, who had the entire charge of the civil administra- tion of his satrapy, a military commander, who received his orders from the king but looked to the satrap for the pay and maintenance of his troops, and a royal secretary, whose duty was to keep the king informed of the conduct of his two colleagues, while all the orders of the satrap passed through his hands. These three powers balanced one another ; real authority remained vested in the king. High officials of the court also were frequently sent out to inspect the provinces. The satraps were selected with care, and the sons of the noblest Persians were specially trained at court to be governors. From the first, great discretionary powers were given the satraps. Many of them were far removed from the central government, and might be called upon to act in cases where delay would have been dangerous. The fact that they were often relatives or special favorites of the king increased their power. Little by little they encroached upon the func- tions of the two other officers, until by the end of the fifth century b. c. their authority within their own provinces was almost absolute. 12. The system of government established by Darius worked well in practice. In particular, the revenues of the government increased rapidly. Darius was thrifty, and im- posed tribute (δασ/χό?) in money and kind on all his subjects except the inhabitants of Persis, the cradle of the race. His predecessors had been content to accept voluntary gifts. Herodotus tells us that his subjects were wont to say that " Cyrus had the soul of a father, Cambyses that of a master, Darius that of a huckster." But his tax, which was based upon the productiveness of the land, was impartially imposed. The annual royal revenue has been estimated to have amounted to $175,000,000. Darius also endeavored to intro- duce a uniform gold and silver coinage throughout the empire (v. 8apctKos), but did not meet with complete success. 'JmX ψ INTRODUCTION. [§12. To facilitate trade and tlie quick movement of troops, he improved existing roads and built new ones throughout the empire. The "Royal Road," doubtless in existence before his time, ran from Susa to Nineveh, thence west to the Cilician Gates, thence north through Tyana and Mazaca to Pteria, thence west ax^ross the Halys by a fortified bridge (the other rivers being crossed by boats) to Ancyra, thence southwest through Pessinus and Ceramon Agora to Sardis and Ephesus. This was called the " Royal Road " because the service of the " Great King " passed over it. Along this road, between Susa and Sardis, Darius established 111 stations, where mounted couriers were kept ready day and night to forward the royal despatches. Orders were trans- mitted by this simple device, the first postal service of which we have any knowledge, with astonishing rapidity. 13. Darius died in 486 b. c. after a reign of 36 years. Its •last years were made memorable by the revolt in 500 b. c. of the Greek cities of Asia Minor along the entire Mediterranean coast, which it took five years to subdue, and by the two fruitless expeditions which Darius sent against the Greeks on the continent. The defeat of the Persians at Marathon in 490 B. c. was a momentous event in the history of Greece. Darius was succeeded by his son Xerxes, whose humiliating defeat at Salamis in 480 b. c. forever freed the Greeks from the danger of Persian conquest. Xerxes was at once weak and arrogant, cowardly and cruel, and most of his successors were of the same type. Nothing prevented the dissolution of the empire but the ingenuity and skill with which Darius had consolidated it. Xerxes was assassinated in his chamber in 465 B. c. His successor Artaxerxes reigned 40 years, and left the kingdom to his only legitimate son, Xerxes II. The latter after a reign of six weeks, was murdered by his illegit- imate brother Sogdianus. He ruled six months and was in turn murdered by another brother, Darius II., who came to §14.] PERSIA AND THE PERSIANS. XV the throne in 425 b. c. This Darius was the father of the two brothers whose struggle for the throne is recorded in the first book of the Anabasis. 14. At the time of the expedition of Cyrus the Younger, the Persian army consisted of infantry, cavalry, and war- chariots. Their commander-in-chief was the king. Under hiin were four 'generals, each in command of a great division which comprised different ethnic divisions and numbered at the battle of Cunaxa 300,000 men. Each of the smaller ethnic divisions had also its own tribal commander, and was separately organized. The infantry was divided into regi- ments of 1000 and companies of 100 men, and the cavalry into squadrons of 70. Each regiment, company, and squadron had its own commanders. The Persian foot-soldier carried for defense a wicker-shield (yippov). Unlike the Greek infantry man, he had neither helmet, cuirass, nor greaves, but wore in their stead cap, jacket, and trousers of leather. His offensive weapons were a great bow (τόίον) and quiver (ψαρβτρα), a spear (παλτόν), a short sword (ακινάκψ), and sometimes a battle-axe (σάγα /ois). The slingers {v. σφ€ν^νητψ), an important division of the military force, were separately organized. While the general equipment was as described above, some ethnic divisions were armed after their own peculiar fashion. The Egyptians, for example, at the battle of Cunaxa carried wooden shields that reached to their feet ; and the Chabyles, a brave and warlike tribe in Pontus on the frontier of Armenia, wore linen cuirasses, had greaves and helmets, and carried spears which, on the testimony of Xenophon, were fifteen cubits long. The cavalry were equipped with helmets, cuirass (XtvKo- θωραί), and armor for the thighs (τταραμηρί^ια), and each cavalryman carried two spears and a sword. The head and body of the horse also were protected (v. 7Γρο/Α€τωπιδιον, προ- oTcpvtStov). The war chariots carried scythes (v. Βρεπανηφόρος), ί XVI INTRODUCTION. [§U. and in battle were posted at intervals in front of the ti oops of tlie line, the cavalry being stationed on the wmgs. CYRUS THE YOUNGER. 15 Darius II. (v. Aapcibs), a natural son of Artaxerxes I., came to the throne by the murder of his brother (§ 13). He was himself a man of feeble charaxiter, and was instigated to the deed by his wife and half-sister Parysatis, a woman of a bold intriguing, and cruel disposition, who exercised great influence over her husband. Their oldest son was Artaxerxes II (v. Άρταϋρίψ), surnamed Mnemon on account of his great memory, who was born before the accession of Darius to the throne Their second son was Cyrus the Younger (v. Κύρος), usually so called to distinguish him from Cyru^ the Great, the founder of the empire (§ 6). The younger son was born in the purple. . . 16. After the disastrous defeat of the Athenians m Sicily in 413 B. c, the Feloponnesian war had broken out afresh. For over 60 years the Greek cities on the coast of Asia Minor had been practically indei>endent of Persian control, but Darius now determined, if possible, to reestablish the imperial authority. He gave orders to Tissaphernes, satrap of Lydia and general commander of the military forces of western Asia Minor, and to Pharnabazus, satrap of Phrygia on the Hellespont, to collect the tribute that had once been imposed on the Greek cities. . Though at enmity with one another, the two satraps joined, in 412 b. c, in seeking the intervention of Sparta, in order to wrest the Ionic cities of the seaboard from Athenian control. Sparta received heavy subsidies. But Tissaphernes was a doubWealer, and his real policy was not to render efficient help to Sparta in her war with Athens, but to weaken both. " He wished to see no Greek state grow §18.] CYRUS THE YOUNGER. xvn strong at the expense of the others, but to keep them all weak alike, distracted by internecine strife." 17. In 407 b. c. occurred an event of great importance to the cause of Sparta. The yoiinger Cyrus was sent down to the coast by his father as satrap of Lydia, Phrygia the Greater, and Cappadocia, and military commander of the forces that mustered at Castolus. He was at this time only 17 years of age. Xenophon gives his commission in the JfeUenica ^ : καΧ Κνρος (sc. αντοίς άπήντησεν)^ αρξων πάντων των €7γΙ ^αλάττι; καΐ συμιτολεμήσων AaiccSat/xovtots, €τηστολήν Τ€ ίφερε τοις κάτω ττάσι το βασιλέων σφρά-γισμΛ Ιχουσαν, iv y €νην και τάδε • ΚαταΐΓ€/χ7Γω Κυρον κάρανον των eU Καστωλον αθροιζόμενων. Tissaphernes retained authority over the Greek cities of the sea-board, so far as they were under Persian control, and was made satrap of Caria. But after the accession of Artaxerxes, when trouble arose between Cyrus and Tissaphernes, the Greek cities of the coast revolted to Cyrus, with the single exception of Miletus. Cyrus and Tissaphernes were at this time at open war with one another ; there had long been real enmity between them. 18. The policy adopted by Cyrus was in marked contrast to that of Tissaphernes, who had played fast and loose with the Spartans. The latter sent out Lysander as admiral in 407 B. c. ; and he at once proceeded to Ephesus, and there Avith seventy sail awaited the coming of the young prince. AVhen Cyrus arrived at Sardis, Lysander went up to pay him a visit, Avith the ambassadors from Lacedaemon. He begged Cyrus to show zeal in the prosecution of the war against the Athenians, that ancient enemy by whom the Persian arms had been so signally defeated. The answer of the youthful ruler is memorable ^ : Κνρος Sc τον tc ττατίρα Ιφη ταντα €7Γ€σταλ- 1 Hellen. I 4. 3. The persons whom Cyrus met as he came down to the coast were Greek ambassadors on their way to the Great King. 2 Hellen. i. 5. 3. mSk, ψ JLiJL.JL INTRODUCTION. [518. §20.] CYRUS THE YOUNGER. .A.XJV h ■ Kcrni Kol ah-^ ούκ SXk" €>F' od €κάθητο, 5ντα άργυρονν καΐ χρνσονν. After dinner, when Cyrus drank to the health of the Spartan admiral and asked him what he could do to gratify him most, Lysander replied, "Add an obol to the sailors' pay." Cyrus did this, and raised their pay to four obols a day, paid all arrears, and gave them a month's pay in advance. The enthusiasm of the Spartan army was great, and the Athenians were correspondingly depressed. The latter sent ambassadors to Cyrus, but he refused to receive them, and repulsed with contempt the advice of Tissaphernes to render efficient aid neither to Athens nor to Sparta. The interest of Cyrus in the Lacedaemonian cause was strengthened by the personal regard which he conceived for Lysander. He felt great admiration for the character and abilities of this able com- mander, and bestowed upon him later a signal mark of confidence. 19. Cyrus was energetic and ambitious, and seems to have believed from the first that his father would name him as his successor, to the exclusion of his older brother Artaxerxes, who was of a timid disposition. His expectation was not unreasonable. The law of succession to the Persian throne was at best uncertain. He was the favorite son of the queen, whom indeed he much resembled in disposition. He was born after his father's accession to the royal power. He bore the name of the great founder of the empire. So great was his confidence that even before his father's death he assumed royal prerogatives. It was a Persian custom that those who appeared in the presence of the king should thrust their hands into certain long sleeves which rendered the hands for the moment incapable of use. In 405 b. c, two first-cousins of Cyrus met him and neglected thus to conceal their hands. He had them put to death. The parents in grief and anger urged upon Darius the danger of overlooking such insolence, and on the plea of illness, which was indeed well founded, the king summoned Cyrus to his bedside. Darius then lay ill at Thamneria, in Media, near the territory of the Cadusians, against whom he had marched to put down a revolt. 20. Cyrus realized the importance of obeying tliis summons at once, for his brother and rival was already with the king. Lysander happened to be with him when he received the message. To him Cyrus turned over the treasure which he had in hand, and he assigned to him also his entire personal revenue from the province of which he was satrap, to be used in prosecution of the war. The timely aid thus rendered to the Lacedaemonians did much to hasten the end of the Peloponne- sian War. He then set out from Sardis with a body-guard of 300 Greeks under the command of Xenias the Parrhasian. This was the first time that a Persian had ever appeared at court with a Greek escort. They were so well remunerated that the rate of their pay became celebrated. Cyrus took with him also Tissaphernes, ostensibly as a friend, but in reality because he feared to leave him behind. He proved to be a dangerous companion. Darius died soon after the arrival of the younger son. The hopes of the ambitious young prince were destroyed at one blow. Notwithstanding the intercession of Parysatis, Darius had failed to name Cyrus as his successor to the throne, and Artaxerxes became king. Xenophon evidently discredits a story current in antiquity, but which nevertheless may well be true. It was an ancient Persian custom that the king on coming to the throne must go to Pasargadae (§ 6), and there, in the temple, with solemn ceremonial lay aside his robe and put on that of Cyrus the Great. The story relates that Tissaphernes appeared before the king in the temple, with a priest who charged Cyrus /■ XX INTRODUCTION. [$20. 5 23.] MILITARY MATTERS. XXI with the intention of concealing himself there and falling njion his brother and slaying him in the midst of tlie solemn rites. According to another version of the story, Cyrus was actually discovered hidden in the temple. He was arrested, and was about to be put instantly to death when Parysatis threw her arms about him and saved his life. He returned in disgrace to his satrapy. The first book of the Anabasis gives an account of the ambitious young ruler from this time until his ill-fated death on the battle-field of Cunaxa. 21. The employment of Greek mercenaries, by either foreign or Greek states, was comparatively rare before the close of the Peloponnesian War. The first considerable body of Greek mercenary troops of which we have definite knowl- edge was that collected by Cyrus the Younger, the "Ten Thousand,'* who made the memorable advance and retreat described in the Anabasis. At least five thousand of these, after their return in 399 b. c, were taken into the pay of the Lacedaemonian general Thibron, who was then about to prosecute in Asia Minor the war which Sparta had under- taken against Persia in behalf of the Greek cities of• the ciast. They returned to Greece with Agesilaus in 394 b. c, took part in the stubborn fight at Coronea, and were then dismissed from his service. But they were veritable soldiers of fortune ; and they seem to have held together, and to have formed part of the mercenary troops that played so important a Γδΐβ in the Corinthian war. Ϊ The miUtary organization of the "Ten Thousand" was in some respects peculiar. The student is warned that the following is not an account of either the Athenian or Spartan military systems, but is intended to interpret in particular the first four books of the Anabasis. 22. The Greek troops enlisted by Cyrus, with their com- manders, were the following Xenias, an Arcadian . . Proxenus, a Boeotian Sophaenetus, an Arcadian Socrates, an Achaean Pasion, a Megarian . . Menon, a Thessalian . . . . 4000 hoplites. . . 1500 (C 500 gymnetes . . 1000 (( . . 500 a . . 300 u 300 peltasts. . . 1000 500 ' 800 11 . 1000 i ' 200 bowmen. . 40 horse. . . 300 (( . . 1000 u ian 700 4.ΠΠ Clearchus, a Lacedaemonian Sosis, a Syracusan . . Agias,^ an Arcadian . Chirisophus, a Lacedaemonian Deserters from the king . 23. There were ten generals. Two of them deserted on the march inland, Xenias and Pasion ; five of the others were entrapped by Tissaphernes at the Great Zjib (the Zapetas), Proxenus, Socrates, Menon, Clearchus, and Agias. In their places were chosen respectively Xenophon, an Athenian, Xanthicles, an Achaean, Philisius, an Achaean, Timasion, a Dardanian, and Cleanor, an Arcadian. The general most trusted by Cyrus was Clearchus, a soldier of great ability and experience. He was in command of the Greek troops in the battle at Cunaxa ; and after the death of Cyrus he became by common consent their leader, until he was captured and slain. In the retreat from the Great Zab to Trapezus, the command was held by Chirisophus and Xenophon in common. 1 The MSS. say " Sophaenetus, the Arcadian " (i. 2. 9) ; but Sophae- netus had already joined Cyrus with 1000 hoplites at Sardis (1. 2. 3). The text is probably due to a copyist's error, who should have written 'kyias. Agias was one of the five generals entrapped and put to death by Tissaphernes after the battle at Cunaxa (ii. 5. 31 ff.)» and it is incred- ible that Xenophon should not have named hira, with his contingent, in the enumeration of the forces brought together by Cyrus. 1 1 Tik V ^ XXll INTBODUCTION. [5 23. The total number of hoplites was 11,700, of light armed troops 2,300, of cavalry 40. But definite losses occurred. Two companies of Menon's hoplites, numbering 100 or 200 men,^ were lost in the passage over the mountains into Cilicia. The 40 horse and 300 light armed troops, mostly Thracians, deserted to the king after the battle at Cunaxa. Nicarchus, a captain, with 20 men, went off between dark and daylight at the Great Zab. There were other heavier losses, whose numbers are not recorded, by disease, by the snow, and by the hands of the enemy. At the time when the Greeks forced their way into Colchis, when they were within two days march of the sea at Trapezus, they were able to muster for active duty only about 9,800 men, — 8000 hoplites and 1800 light armed. 24. With the exception of the 700 hoplites under Chiriso- phus, whom the Ephors at Sparta sent out to the aid of Cyrus, these troops were mercenaries. They were commis- sioned by no state. They were soldiers of fortime in search of adventure and a well-filled purse. The close of the Pelo- ponnesian War, by the extinction of the power of Athens, had thrown many men, inured to arms, out of employment. Many of them were men of ability. Cyrus already had Greeks in his employ, in the different garrisons of his satrapy ; and such was his reputation for generosity and upright dealing, that others enlisted in numbers when it was known that he was about to undertake a campaign against the Pisidians, which was his announced purpose. Xenophon says that the majority of them had left home not because their means were scanty, but attracted by the fame of Cyrus's virtues ; that many of them brought followers with them, and that others had expended money on the expedition. The majority of them were Peloponnesians ; more than one-half were Arcadians and Achaeans. The 4000 1 See I 2. 25. 25.] MILITARY MATTERS. XXIU under Xenias had been enlisted by the commanders of the garrisons. The others, except those with Chirisophus, were brought together by generals whom Cyrus commissioned and to whom he furnished the necessary funds. These in turn appointed captains, who enlisted companies. The members of a company generally came from the same neighborhood, and were united by ties of race and previous friendship. 25. These mercenaries brought with them their own arms, but received pay and means of daily support from Cyrus (v. μισθός). At first this amounted to a daric a month for each man, or 4 obols a day. Later Cyrus promised to raise the pay to a daric and a half a month, or 6 obols a day. A captain received twice and a general four times the amount paid to the common soldier. One half of this amount was the soldier's pay for service ; the other half went for daily rations (σιτηρίσιον), since the army had no commisariat in the modern sense, but each soldier bought his own provisions (§ 26). With the rate of pay at a daric and a half, the pay- roll of the Greeks amounted, when the complement of mer- cenary troops was greatest, to over 20,000 darics a month (y. δαρακός), at a time when the buying-power of money was much greater than it is now. Cyrus seems to have offered no bounties to induce men to enlist, but his promises after they joined him were alluring. When he reached the Euphrates and the real object of his expedition was made known, he promised ea<}h man five minas of silver {v. μνα) when he got to Babylon, and he agreed to continue the pay of the Greeks until their return to Ionia. In a later time the Greek mercenary received pay only until the object of the expedition on which he had enlisted was accomplished. He got home as best he could. Just before the battle at Cunaxa, Cyrus's promises were profuse, though doubtless sincere. He purposed, he said, to put his friends in places of power and profit, and only feared that his friends ( V XXIV INTRODUCTION. [$2δ. i would be too few. He added specifically that in the event of victory he would give each of the Greeks a golden crown. The soldiers were elated. But his premature death in the battle that immediately followed destroyed all their hopes of gain. 26. Rations were not supplied the soldier after the modern fashion. A market (αγορά) was set up in camp, where he bought his supplies. On the advance this market was estab- lished in the barbarian contingent of Cyrus's troops, and was conducted by regular dealers, mainly Lydians, who accom- panied the army on the march. The supplies consisted chiefly of grain in the form of flour, and wine. Allowing a choenix (χοΐνι() of grain per diem to each man, the daily amount consumed by the Greek contingent was over 400 bushels. These supplies were carried on wagons and beasts of burden, and were renewed by the dealers from the sur- rounding country by purchase on the days when the army rested from its march. Sometimes the ordinary supplies failed altogether, and the soldiers subsisted on meat. This was accounted a hardship. Cyrus had with him a special train of 400 wagons loaded with flour and wine, in order that, if provisions failed, he might be able to supply the Greeks. The soldiers were, of course, free to make their purchases where they saw fit, and a market was sometimes furnished by the inhabitants of the country through which they were passing. Occasionally on the march inland they resorted to plunder. This happened once also just before they reached the Great Zab. The Greeks were in straits for supplies after the battle at Cunaxa, and the first demand which they made on the king was for provisions. In the subsequent compact with Tissa- phernes, who was to lead them back to the coast, it was specially agreed that the Greeks should purchase their food from the market furnished by the barbarians ; only when the §27.] MILITARY MATTERS. XXV barbarians failed to supply a market were they to " take " Avhat they needed from the surrounding country. From the Great Zab to the sea they lived exclusively by plundering. During this time each soldier received what he needed for daily support ; also other booty, especially captives, became common property (κοινόν). 27. The men enlisted by Cyrus were naturally independent in disposition, and the maintenance of military discipline among them proved to be difticult. They demanded to be consulted or informed before measures were taken. Cyrus himself, their commander, whose control of his own troops was absolute, realized that he had no real authority over these Greeks, and used with great skill the only argument available for liim. He appealed to their love of gain. They paid scant respect also to their own generals. More than 2000 of them at one time took their kits and baggage and transferred them- selves bodily to another leader. They expressed publicly and Avithout fear their opinion of the conduct of their commanders, and remonstrated with them to their faces. Once when Clearchus, the Spartan, a severe disciplinarian, whose soul must have been tried by the spirit of independence among his men, attempted to force his division forAvard against their will, they pelted him and his baggage train with stones. Realizing his impotence, he then called them together in assembly, and argued the matter with them in two meetings. The government of these Greek troops was in fact democratic. The generals and captains constituted a deliberative council. In case of all important measures about which there might be difference of οχ^ηίοη, proposals were submitted to a general assembly of the soldiers, before whom arguments were offered in favor of the measures proposed and with whom rested their ratification or rejection. Anybody was free to express his views. The final vote was taken by show of hands. It seems probable that, in case of a vacancy, the soldiers chose their XXVI INTEODUCTION. [5 27. §29.] MILITARY MATTERS. XXVll own commanders, under the direction of their superior officers. 28. But although independent in spirit, these men were not captious, and they realized, especially after the battle at Cunaxa, the gravity ot their situation and the importance of discipline. They were certainly brave. They had too a saving sense of humor, and were in general humane to their foes and kindly to one another. At Tyriaeum Cyrus held a show review at the request of the Cilician queen. The Greeks had small opinion of the prowess of Cyrus's barbarian contin- gent ; and in the review, when ordered to charge as in battle, they spontaneously made a mock attack on the barbarian camp. Cyrus's native troops were panic-stricken, the queen fled precipitately in her carriage, and the market people abandoned their wares and took to their heels. The Greeks, we are told, dispersed to their own camp with a roar of laughter. A couple of good jests are recorded, made publicly by Chirisophus and Xenoplion, at times when the situation was grave. In the battle at Cunaxa the Greeks did not indiscriminately slaughter the flying Persians, although these were completely at their mercy, but simply compelled them to throw away their arms. It is signiflcant that Xenophon says nothing about the Persian losses in the battle. The slaughter of the Carduchian before the eyes of his fellow, and the mutilation of the bodies of the enemy slain at the ravine, were acts which seemed sternly demanded by the circumstances. When, on the capture of the stronghold of the Taochi, the women in their terror threw their children over the cliffs and leaped after them, and the men followed, Xenophon records that the sight was " fearful.'' In the mountains of Carduchia, the Greeks set their newly acquired captives at liberty, although every addition to the numbers of the implacable foe by whom they were surrounded diminished their own chances of escape. Fifteen years before this, Athenians had massacred in cold blood the whole adult male population of the island of Melos, Greeks slain by Greeks. In their treatment of one another, in times of danger, these soldiers of fortune proved themselves trusty comrades. They cared solicitously for the sick and wounded, and under the most trying circumstances refused to abandon them to the foe Xenophon's life was once saved by a brave Arcadian at the imminent risk of his own. And they were companionable. Gathered about the camp-fires above the banks of the Cen- trites, they recalled the hardships, just happily ended, of their incredible seven days' march through the mountains of the Carduchians. In the Armenian highlands they quartered themselves in different villages, and gave themselves over to feasting and drinking for a week. Visitors had to take break- fast wherever they turned in, and to drink from the common bowl And when at last they came in sight of the sea, on the summit of Mt. Theches, " they fell to embracing one another, generals and captains and all, and the tears rolled down their cheeks." 29 These men -were controlled by a strong religious senti- ment, which made itself manifest both in their lives and in their formal observance of religious rites. A thoroughly depraved man like Menon stood out conspicuously among them by reason of his wickedness. They felt gratitude to the Gods when they had escaped a danger, and feared to commit an unworthy a*t through dread of their anger. They swore in the name of the Gods, and imprecated the divme wrath upon their foes. They had faith in omens, made vows, believed in dreams, poured libations, and offered prayers. The burial of their fallen comrades was a sacred duty, to be fulfilled at any cost. They offered frequent sacrifice to the Gods in order to learn their will and to propitiate their favor, and in gratitude for their protection. The rite was sometimes XXVIU INTRODUCTION. [§29. §31.] MILITARY MATTERS. XXIX I especially impressive, as when at tlie Cent rites the army was gathered on the southern bank of the river, with the enemy in full view on the other side, and the seers slaughtered the victims over the stream. A compact was sealed with a solemn oath, sworn in the name of the Gods, and with the slaughter of victims, or with oath and the giving and taking of right hands, or, as when they made compact with the Macronians, with oath and the exchange of spears. "The Gods will be our allies,'' said Xenophon at the Great Zab, " for we have kept our oaths sworn in their name, the Gods, who are able in a moment to make the great small, and who at will can save the lowly with ease, even though they be in sore straits." The language of Clearchus, in his conference with Tissaphernes, is still more remarkable. " Our oaths," he said, " sworn in the name of the Gods, forbid us to be enemies. I envy not the man whose conscience tells him that he has disregarded these. A war with the Gods ! With what speed may one flee from them and escape ? Into what darkness may he slink away ? Into what strong place may he withdraw himself ? All things are in all ways subject to the Gods, and everywhere the Gods are the masters of all alike." 30. Cyrus's Greek troops consisted of heavy armed infantry (v. oirAiTiys), light-armed infantry (v. γνμ,νη^:), and cavalry (v, cmrciis). ^ The light-armed troops were principally peltasts (v. ΐΓ€λ.ταστιί?), but comprehended also bowmen (ικ τοξότψ) and javelin throwers (v, άκοντιστψ). The last were unimportant, and there were no slingers (v. σφα^ονητης) in the army until necessity compelled the Greeks, when on tlie retreat, to organize a company of 200 of them. The 40 cavalrymen originally brought by Clearchus deserted after the battle at > Cyrus had triremes (v. τμιήρψ) also at his command, 25 of his own, and S5 sent to his aid by the Spartans. But these, in the nature of the case, were but of slight service in the expedition against his brother. Cunaxa, but a new troop of 50 horse was organized on the retreat at the same time with the company of 200 slingers. The heavy infantry was organized in battalions of varying strength (V. τά^ις), consisting of the hoplites under the com- mand of a general, and in companies, with a normal strength of 100 (ti. λόχος). The company consisted of two divisions of 50 {V. 7Τ€ντηκοστύ^), and four of 25 (v. ένωμ,οτία), each larger division containing two smaller ones. The officers of the heavy infantry were the general (v. στραττ/γο'ς), lieutenant general (v. Ιττοστρατηγός), captain (v. λοχαγός), lieutenant (v. υπολοχαγός), commander of a half company (v. ττεντηκοντηρ), and commander of a quarter company (v. ^νωμ,οτάρχψ). It seems probable that there were but two enomotarchs, in com- mand of the second and fourth enomoties, the two pente- conters being at the head of the first and third enomoties. (See § 32 «.) Of the organization of the light-armed troops in the Anabasis little can be affirmed with certainty, and the body of horse was small. The commanders of the divisions of the former were apparently called taxiarchs (v. ταξίαρχος), and the pel- tasts seem to have been organized in companies. In the battle at Cunaxa, the whole body of peltasts was drawn up together under the command of Episthenes. In the retreat to Trapezus, they were assigned to different generals, accord- ing to need. Both the bowmen and slingers were under their own commanders. The commander of the 50 horse was Lycius, an Athenian. 31. The heavy infantry (v. όττλιττ^ς) carried six pieces of armor, — four for defence, helmet (κράνος), cuirass ^ (θώραί, 1 The view hae been advanced that the hoplites m the army of Cyrus wore no cuiraas, and i. 2. 16 ha^ been cited in proof. But the argument is based on a probable misinterpretation of the passage (see the note), and is contradicted by the fact that elsewhere in the Anabasis cuirasses are specifically mentioned as worn by Greeks. I* , t < XXX INTRODUCTION. [5 31. § 32.] MILITARY MATTERS. XXXI h ' !■; σίΓολάς), shield (SuuirC^), and greaves (κνημί^), and two for offence, spear (δόρυ) and sword (ξίφος). Of the light infantry, the peltasts (v. πελταστ,^ς) carried for defence the target (πίλτη), and were armed with sliort spears for hurling and probably with a sword j the javelin throwers (v. ακοντιστής) were armed only with javelins (v. ακόντιον) ; the bowmen (y. τοξότης) were generally without defensive armor, and carried only bow (τοξον)^ quiver (φαρίτρα), and arrows (v. TOicvpjo) ; the slingers (v. σφ€ν8ονητψ) had only their slings and missiles (v, σφ€ν86νη). The cavalry (v. ίπττενς) were protected by helmet, cuirass, and cavalry boots, but carried no shield. Their offensive armor consisted of spear and sword. ^ We have some slight evidence as to the effectiveness of the armor carried by the Greeks and the foes opposed to them. A Greek metal shield and metal or leathern cuirass could not withstand an arrow, but both might be pierced by it and the wearer might be killed. The javelin carried the least distance, the arrow and missile from the sling farther. The Rhodian slingers, with their lead bullets, shot twice as far as the Persian slingers, who used big stones. When the Greeks were about to cross the Centrites, 200 Greek feet in width, we are told that the light-armed troops of the enemy, posted on bluffs distant 300 or 400 feet from the other side of the river, were not able to reach them with bow and sling, that is, the arrows and slingstones of these barbarians failed to carry 500 or 600 feet. 32. The tactical unit of the Greek heavy infantry in the Anabasis seems to have been the enomoty (ίνωμοτία), con- sisting of 24 men with their leader (€νωμοτάρχψ). When 1 The protection of the horse by frontlet and breastplate {τρομετωτί- Stov, vpwrrtpvibtov), although specially commended by Xenophon in his Treatise on Horsemanship, seems to have been the practice not of the Greeks but of the orientals. ranged in order of battle they were in rank and file, with a front of three and depth of eight. See Fig. 1. The first man in the tile had a post of honor, since he was the first to meet the enemy. The last man in the file (ούρα-γός) was also in an important position, since he became the leader of the file when it faced about. Since the hoplite was heavily armed, he needed space to move in, both in front and at the side. We have no information as to the space allowed in classical times ; but later military writers state that in march order the ranks and files were six Greek feet (v, τΓούς) apart, and that in order of battle the files were three and the ranks two Greek feet apart.* Four enomoties constituted the company of 96 men. The four enomotarchs, or the two penteconters and two enomo- tarchs (§ 30^, completed the full number of 100 men (λόχος). When the four enomoties were ranged side by side ί S S ί ί ί Fig. Ι . — Enomoty in Order ot Battle. i S S ε ί ί ί i ί ί ί ί S S ί ί S S ί S S S ί S ί i• t ί S S ί ί ί S ί ί ί ί ί ί i• ί• i- S ί ί ί i• ί• S i• ί ί• ί S ί ί- ί ί S ί ί ί- S t ί ί- ί ί- ί Fig. 2. — Company (four Enomoties) in Order of Battle. with a depth of eight, the company was in order of battle. Companies so ranged constituted the line of battle (φάλαγί). See Fig. 2. Each company then consisted of 12 files and The phalanx has the epithet τνκνή in ii. 3. 3. k' «■■IP -WW' ΊΒ|Τ '* m INTRODUCTION. [132. §34.] MILITARY MATTERS. XXXIU ϊ\ ί i : VS.. 8 ranks.* The oiRcers of the company (§ 30 '^, marching on foot, probably had their places in front of their respective divisions, but exact information on this point is lacking. The general, also, was probably in front of his division. We know that he was mounted. The phalanx was divided into the right wing, the centre, and the left wing. The right wing \vas the post of danger, and therefore of honor, since tlie right side of those in the right wing was exposed (the sliield being carried on the left arm) if the enemy outflanked. 33. Evolutions without individual change of place were made to the right, im δόρυ (the spear being carried in the right hand), or to the left, iir axnriha (the shield being carried on tlie left arm), eitlier with tlie cpiarter turn, ' right face,' 'left face,' or with the half turn, ' right about fiice,' ' left about face.' Evolutions of entire divisions, such e.g. as the company, were made with- out cliange of front, also to the right and left, by wheeling, the leader of the right or left file maintaining his place \^ ^ "^ and serving as the pivot on which the \i Η 4 entire body turned. To effect a complete change of front in a body of troops in line, such as the phalanx, so that it faced in the oj)- posite direction, the troops counter- ί > Front. Ε oupayol, 3 ? ? Fig. 3. the Counter-March. ί j* New Front, marched. The counter-march was Enomoty executing cxccuted by tlic Lacedaeuioniaus as follows (Fig. 3). The troops made 1 The depth of the phalanx was usually, but not always, 8 men. When Cyrus exhibited his troops to Queen Epyaxa at Tyriaeum, the Greek phalanx was drawn up four deep (i. 2. 15), in order to make the greater show. The 10,600 hoplites that he had with him at this time, drawn up four deep (106 companies each with a front of 24), made a line nearly a mile and a half long. the half turn, * left about face.' The ovpayoC then remained where they were. Each file leader next passed to the right of his file to the new front. The second, third, etc. ranks followed in order and placed themselves behind the front rank, until finally the seventh rank had taken position behind the sixtli and in front of the ουραγοί, who were now in their proper place in the rear.^ 34. In contrast with the order of battle, or phalanx (§ 32^), was the order of march, in column (κατά κίρας), Avith narrow front and great depth, in which the separate parts of tlie force (enomoty, company, taxis) followed one another. An entire force might thus march in single, double, triple file, etc., as circum- stances rendered advisable. A body of troops marching three abreast, in column, formed in line of battle, if the enemy appeared in the front, as follows (Fig. 4). The first eno- moty of 24 men, 3 abreast and 8 deep, (e^ght EnTml'Iies^^rcoTumn halted, and the other enomoties marched ('•) reformed in Une of in order to the left (trap* άσττιδα) into position, the second beside the first, the third beside the second, etc. A body of troops in battle line formed in column for marching, three abreast, if the march was to be straight for- ward and if the change of formation began at the right, as follows (Fig. 5). The first enomoty on the right marched directly forward, the second enotomy took position behind it, and the others followed in order. The right wing then led ^ Cf. i. 10. 6, where the Greeks used the counter-march {<ττραφ4ντ€ί) in changing front to meet the king, who was advancing with the apparent intention of attacking them in the rear. 8 7 6 6 4 3 2 1 u I 2 "F 4 5 6 7 .# 8 XXXIV INTRODUCTION. [§34. $34.] MILITARY MATTERS. XXXV the column. The change of formation might begin at the left, the left wing leading the column. Shortly before the second charge of the Greeks at the battle at Cunaxa, the Greeks were in battle-line, at right angles to the Euphrates, facing upstream. They feared that the army of the king, who was advancing against them with his right wing over against their right wing (§ 45*), would take them in the right flank and enfold them on both sides. They therefore deliberated whether they should not retire their right wing and bring their whole line into position parallel with the river, which would then be a defence in their rear. This change, by which the new line would have been put at right angles to the original line, would probably have been executed ^ as follows (Fig. 6). The first company on the left of the line (No. 10) would have advanced a distance Fig. 5. -Two Companies ^qual to nearly one half of the length of (eight Enomoties) in Line of thc liuc, and quartcr whccled to the fhr'ill^ril^re' ding^'o'iT"' ^%^^ ; *^^ «^««^*1 company (No. 9) would have fallen in behind, halted 36 feet (the length of front of a company) from the first company, and also quarter wheeled to the right ; the manoeuvre would have been made by each of the eight remaining companies in order, so that all would have stood in a continuous line. The line as now formed would have faced directly away from the river and rested upon it.* 1 The manoeuvre was not in fact executed, although the contrary view is held by many commentators. See note on § 45 *. 2 Xenophon says in the passage under consideration, καΐ έδ6κ€ΐ ούτοΓι άραττνσσ^ιρ τά κ4ρα^ καΐ ττοι-ήσασθαιότισθίν τόν ■ποταμόρ (i. ίο. 9). The word AmiTTwrire»', which means 1. unfold, 2. fold back, has here been variously 1 2 "Γ" Π I 8 7 β 6 4 %3 2 m f / i5 / « / Ί? 1 oo / "V 1 •l / 7 ( o» /' - \ 1 ■ 9 8 Γ ?" J 5" 4" 3" 2T 1 o> F g. 6. / -I" / :i^ / Ί' / &β / -t — Ten Connpanies executing the contemplated / '»0 manoeuvre at the Euphrates. / ^ / Μ l' interpreted. Three principal explanations of the change of position contemplated by the Greeks deserve consideration. First, as explained above, they planned to retire (' fold back ') their exposed right wing, and to put the river, as a defence, behind their entire force. Secondly, it is thought that their pui-pose was to deploy or extend ('open out') their right wing. This deployment of the right wing would have made the subsequent change of position more difficult, and we fail to see its object if the whole force was ultimately to be brought into position parallel to the river. Thirdly, the plan of the Greeks is thought to have been to wheel their right wing toward the rear, so that it should be at an angle of not more than ninety degrees to its original position, and so that it would, in a sense, have had the river behind it, the centre and left wing remaining as before. The Greeks would thus have presented to the enemy a front and a defensive flank. The position would, in fact, have been solely a defensive one, in which it would have been impossible for the Greeks to charge ; the troops posted at the angle, moreover, would have been peculiarly exposed in case ©f the enemy's attack. Ν t ii Li u Γ XXXVl INTBODUCTION. [§35. r I 35. The common order of march was in column (§ 34^), the right wing leading. The column commonly marched two abreast,* and was very long. Ten thousand men marching thus, with six feet of space between each pair (§ 32 *), would form a line nearly six miles long. Each general was at the head of his own division on horseback. The light-armed troops went before and on each side, to make observation of the country and as a protection against surprises, or were placed wherever the special circumstances demanded. The discipline was not rigid, and many soldiers left the ranks. Nor were those in the ranks fully armed, since much of the armor was carried on wagons and by the beasts of burden. If the enemy appeared, the column was formed into line of battle (34 ^. This took time, and if the enemy's api)earance was unexpected, it was often attended with great confusion.^ Occasionally the march was made in line of battle, some- times even for an entire day ; but this was unusual, and \m^ pened only when an attack of the enemy was imminent or the situation was otherwise full of danger. The discipline was not rigid even in this case, and the men sometimes left the ranks. If indications of the presence of the enemy appeared, scouts were sent out. 36. A peculiar formation for battle, to which the Greeks resorted on the retreat, was the λόχοι όρθιοι or companies in column (op^to?). This formation was especially serviceable in attacking a height. The enemy was in front and above, and the attacking force was in line. (See Fig. 7.) Each com- 1 The enomoties were here ranged in order one behind the other. In single file the cnomoty would be 24 men deep, in double file 12, in triple file 8, etc. The formation of the enomoty in any desired order of arrangement was easy, since the number of men was small. If the order of march was two abreast, the enomoty would have to be re-formed in 3 files and 8 ranks before the evolution described in 5 34 2. 2 This happened before the battle at Cunaxa. C/. i. 8. 2-4, 14. 5 36.] MILITARY MATTERS. XXXVU pany was brought into column by itself by deploying the second, third, and fourth enomoties in order behind the first. Each company thus formed had a front of 3 and a depth of 32, or, if the front was doubled, a front of 6 and a depth of 16. II II π II 13 9 6 14 10 β "Τ" 15 11 7 ^ 16 12 8 le 15 U 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 β δ 1 3 2 Fig. 7. — Four Companies (sixteen Enomoties) in Une (I.) re-formed in Company Columns (If.). The company thus formed a compact body, with greater depth than front (therefore called όρθιος). It was in line with the companies on each side of it, but separated from them by a considerable interval of space. These intervals between com- panies could be increased by extending the line of companies to the right and left. The superiority of this formation to the ordinary phalanx in certain situations was found to be very great. ^ It was once used by the Greeks on the retreat in crossing a river, when the cavalry of the enemy was in force on the opposite bank and their infantry was on higher ground in the rear of the cavalry. On this occasion the rear guard, who had formed in λόχοι op^tot, were compelled to re-form in line of battle to repel the attack of an enemy in the rear. This was done by reversing the evolution just described. The companies in column, with space between them, halted facing the enemy. The second, third, and fourth enomoties were then moved to the left (παρ* άσττιδα) into position by the side of the first (cf. § 34^. 1 Xenophon himself gives a graphic enumeration of these advantages in iv. 8. 10-13. XXXVlll INTBODUCTION. [§37. $87.] MILITABY MATTERS. J^^L.Jm.JLJm i V i 37. When five of their generals were entrapped at the Great Zab by the treachery of Tissaphernes, the Greeks realized that their retreat would have to be made under a running fire. They therefore adopted, on the advice of Xenophon, the hollow square (πλαισιοί') as their order of march. By means of this formation, they pre- sented a front to the enemy on all sides. ^ See Fig. 8. The square was formed of the hoplite forces. If we assume that the hop- lites available at this time for this service numbered 10,000 (§ 23) and that they were as- signed in equal numbers to each of the four sides of the square, each divi- sion contained 25 com- panies of 100 men. If the troops were ranged 8 deep, the length of each division, with 300 men in the line, was a trifle less than 900 Greek feet, if we allow (§ 32 1) 3 feet to each man. We have incidental confirmation that the square was very large. Just before the Greeks reached the confines of Carduchia, the barbarians seized a height on their right commanding the pass through which lay their way. But the peak of the mountain, from which was an approach to the height held by the barbarians, was not yet occupied, and the 1 See ill. 2. 36 and 37. frig. 8.^. The Hollow Square. I. στόμα. 2. wXevpa. 3. οίφά. 4. Light-armed troops in four division•. XXX Baggage Train. Greeks determined to seize it. Quick action was necessary, in order to anticipate the enemy ; and Xenophon, who had come to the front of the square to consult with Chirisophus, asked the latter to send troops with him from the van, * since it was a long way to fetch men from the rear.* ^ The front (στόμχι) was drawn up in the order of the phalanx, with a front of 300 and a depth of 8. The rear (oipa) was similarly arranged, but with the order of ranks reversed, the file leaders (§ 32 ^) and the officers being on the outside and the ουραγοί on the inside. On the march, therefore, the ovpayoi led the ονρά ; but if an attack was made from the rear, the whole body of the rear turned 'right about face' to the enemy. The flanks (πλ€νρα) were also arranged with the first rank and the officers on the outside and the ovpayoi on the inside. On the march, each flank formed a column, with a front of 8 and a depth of 300. In case of attack on either side, they faced the enemy by making the quarter-turn ('right face,' 'left face') to the right or left, thus presenting the regular phalanx to the enemy. Chirisophus was put in com- mand of the base of the square, and Xenophon and Timasion of the rear, and the two oldest of the other generals had charge of the two flanks. The peltasts were probably arranged in four divisions. These supported the four divisions of the hoplites, and had their places either inside or outside of the square as circum- stances demanded. "The baggage, which had been reduced to the smallest possible amount (§ 39 1), and the camp followers were inside the square, with the heaviest part of the train probably so arranged that it could follow the road over which the square was travelling. The enemy attacked the square at long range with mounted bowmen, bowmen on foot, and slingers. In order to repel these more effectually, the Greeks organized a body of 200 slingers and a troop of 50 horse. 1 See iii. 4. 37-43. xl INTRODUCTION. Ρ 37. §39.] MILITARY MATTERS. xli The Greek slingers, skirmishing at long range, proved to be superior to those of the Persians. The bowmen also were of service, but the range was too great for the javelin throwers and peltasts. When, however, the Greeks charged the enemy, as was occasionally necessary, the attacking force consisted of hoplites, peltasts, and (after its organization) the cavalry. When skirmishing, the slingers and bowmen were posted, outside the square. 38. This order of march was in the main effective, but it was found to have its disadvantages with an enemy in the rear. When the Greeks came to a bridge or a ford, and the wings pressed in, there was great confusion. Everybody was in a hurry to get on. Again, when the obstruction was passed and the wings separated, a vacant space was left at the rear between the flanks, where the rear division reformed with difficulty. The men lost confidence, and the whole force was in danger. To remedy this evil, the generals organized six special com- panies of 100 men,^ each under command of a captain, pente- conters (§ 30*), and enomotarchs. When on the march the flanks closed in, these six companies fell to the rear, so as to free the wings. When the flanks opened again, they filled up the gap. If the gap was narrow, they filled it by companies, that is with the companies in column, probably with a front of 3 and a depth of 32, so that the six companies had a front of 18 ; if broader, by fifties, each company having a front of 6 and a depth of 16 ; if still broader, by enomoties, each com- pany being ranged in ordinary line of battle with a front of 12 and a depth of 8. These companies were in fact a picked body of 600 men, intended not only to relieve the pressure caused by the closing in of the wings, but also to form an eflicient guard at the rear (doubtless assisted by the skirmishers, that is, the slingers > See iii. 4. 1^23. and bowmen), while the main force defiled in order through the narrow pass. The wings could march at the same time, with narrow masses of the baggage-train between them, over an ordinary bridge ; but the van and rear were obliged to defile. Xenophon says that the presence of the six companies at the rear prevented confusion, and that, if any part of the force needed help, they came to its assistance. Three hundred of them were subsequently stationed in the van. The use of the hollow square was abandoned when the Greeks got out of Assyria and began their seven days' march through the mountains of the Carduchians. Tissaphernes and Ariaeus here abandoned the pursuit, giving the Greeks up as lost, and returned to Asia Minor. Through the mountains the Greeks were forced to march in column (§ 35^), the passes being narrow. Through the plain of Armenia and during their subsequent course to the sea, they marched either in column or in line of battle (§ 35 *) as circumstances demanded. 39. The baggage-train of the Ten Thousand was of formi- dable dimensions. Wagons and sumpters carried the tents and much personal property of the soldiers (σκ€νη\ including often even their arms. At the Great Zab the Greeks burnt their tents and Avagons and all superfluous baggage ; but even then the train was heavy, including the necessary equipment of 10,000 or 12,000 men (§ 23*), the beasts of burden used for its transport, booty in cattle and captives, women and boys, the sick and wounded, and those needed to take charge of all this. The non-combatants (όχλος) were thus a numerous body. The day after the Greeks entered the fastnesses of the Carduchians, they determined to take only the best of the sumpters and to let all the recently captured slaves go free. The reason for this was that " with so many mouths to feed, twice the amount of provisions had to be provided and carried" (iv. 1, 13). xlii INTRODUCTION. [§39. Ml.] MILITARY MATTERS. xliii On the march inland to Cunaxa, each general seems to have had the baggage of his division under his own charge. The wagons that transported the provisions during this time were a part of the baggage-train of Cyrus's barbarian contingent (§ 26^). During the battle at Cunaxa the baggage-train and camp-followers were all gathered in the camp, which was hastily pitched not far from the rear of the phalanx. On the march to join forces with Ariaeus, on the second night after the battle, the baggage-train was placed on the left, between the troops and the Euphrates. On the retreat to the Black Sea, at first the baggage and non-combatants were put inside the hollow square (§ 37^*) ; when the square was abandoned, they were placed between the van and rear of the force. The train was here at all times an impediment to rapid marching, and frequently compelled the Greeks to take the longer way. 40. The march began betimes in the morning. The tents were struck, tlie baggage and tents were packed and put on the wagons and sumpters, the men fell in, and the army got imder way. It is not possible to determine whether, on the advance to Cunaxa, the generals with their respective divisions led the column in turn on successive days ; on the retreat from the Great Zab, Chirisophus led the van and Xenophon commanded the rear. There was, however, daily change in the company that led the column, and the captain in command was accounted to have a position of special honor and responsibility. Towards the end of the forenoon a halt was called, and breakfast (άριστον) was taken. After break- fast the march was resumed. There were occasional marches by night, and then the army got under way with special care. After dinner, at the first signal of the trumpet, the men packed up ; at the second signal, the baggage was put on the beasts of burden ; at the third, the march began. When the day's march was ended, the army halted and encamped. The different divisions of the Greek force encamped separately, except in times of danger, and even when they were all in one camp each division had its own place. On the march to Cunaxa the barbarian troops of Cyrus encamped apart from the Greeks. When the halt was made, the cattle were unyoked, the baggage unpacked, and the tents pitched. The latter were made of hides stretched on a wooden framework. When the Greeks had burnt their tents at the Great Zab, they encamped in villages wherever this was possible. The Anabasis gives us no information in regard to the form of the camp or in regard to its inner arrangement, but it was not fortified. There was a place in the camp where the arms were stacked, but its precise situa- tion cannot be determined. After the tents had been pitched and the arms had been stacked, fuel and fodder were gathered, fires were built, and dinner was prepared. This was the chief meal of the day. Sentinels, who had been given the pass-word, were posted, and the men turned in. Whether the night was divided into three or four watches is uncertain. The last watch began at early dawn. A panic in camp at night was a serious matter. Announcements were made by a herald, or the word was passed along. 41. A day's march, or * stage ' (σταθμός), varied in length according to circumstances. Xenophon enumerates 84 stages, with a total distance of 517 parasangs, between Sardis and the vicinity of Cunaxa. This makes the average length of the day's march a little more than six parasangs. The longest stages were 10 parasangs. If the parasang (ιταρασάγγης) is reckoned as equal to 30 stadia and the stadium (στάδιο^) at 582.5 English feet, the parasang was equal to about 3.3 ordinary English miles. The average day's march, on this calculation, would be about 20 miles. And this probably represents about what Xenophon thought to be a fair day's march. xliv INTRODUCTION. Ρ 41. M3.] MILITARY MATTERS. xlv Μ I \\'i |i I' But it is evident from various considerations, that Xeno- phon did not mean by 'parasang* an exact and invariable distance. In the first place he had no means, except just at the first, of measuring accurately the day's march. Again, the daily rate of speed, as he reports it, was greater by nearly one half, when the Greeks were travelling, in the month of January, through the territory of the Chalybes, — ^who were the bravest people that they met, were heavily armed, fought with them hand to hand, and kept up the fight for seven days, — than between Celaenae and Peltae in the month of April, where there was no hindrance. Xenophon probably measures parasangs by time rather than by distance, as Grote first suggested.^ He had opportunity in the early marches, where the army after leaving Sardis travelled at first over a measured road, to observe how long it took them to march one, two, or three parasangs, and in the subsequent marches he called that lefigth of time one, two, or three parasangs. A cei*tain number of hours of marching meant to him a certain number of parasangs. 42. Although Cyrus was anxious to join issue with his brother in battle, «and made his march inland to Cunaxa as rapidly as possible, nevertheless between Sardis and Cunaxa he spent 96 days in camp. His longest halt, 30 days, was at Celaenae, where he waited for reinforcements. He was detained 20 days at Tarsus by the refusal of his Greek troops to advance. His other halts lasted from 3 to 7 days, and were made mainly to rest his troops ; although they were utilized for other purposes, such as provisioning, review, enumeration of the troops, and celebration of festivals and games. Some of the marches without days of rest were long. That between Myriandus and Thapsacus lasted 12 days, but the troops were in camp 7 days before it began and 5 days after it was finished. Twice the force marched 9 days con- 1 History of Greece^ vol. VIII. p. 316, note 3 (chap. lxix). tinuously. Just before the battle at Cunaxa they were on the march 19 days, 13 through the desert and 6 in Babylonia, ivith a review held at midnight on the third night before the battle. But the hardships of the march inland to Cunaxa were slight compared with those of the retreat to Trapezus. The Greeks spent 132 days in getting from the villages near Babylon, where they began their march northward under the guidance of Tissaphernes, to the Black Sea at Trapezus. Only 24 of these were spent in camp ; and the halt was forced in every instance by lack of supplies, by exhaustion, by sick- ness, or by other causes. During the month of November they marched 22 days without a day of rest in camp, including 7 days of continuous fighting in the mountains of the Cardu- chians. In December and January they were 31 days contin- uously on the march. We know with certainty from the narrative of Xenophon that the march from Sardis to the battle-field took 182 days. If September 3, 401 b. c, is accepted as the date of the battle, the march from Sardis began on March 6, 401 b. c. We know with less certainty, since the narrative is not always clear, that the Greeks were 158 days in reaching Trapezus, reckoning from the day after the battle, and including the 26 days which elapsed before they began their march northward. This calculation brings them to Trapezus on February 8, 400 B. c. 43. The Greeks fought one great battle in this memorable campaign, and many smaller ones. During the retreat they showed great resource in meeting peculiar conditions. Xeno- phon's invention, for example, of the όρθιοι λόχοι (§ 36) was admirably adapted for storming a height, and it seems sin- gidar that it should not have beea adopted by commanders in later times. Their almost total lack of cavalry forced the Greeks to devise substitutes, such, for example, as the 600 xlvi INTRODUCTION. [$43. i t picked hoplites who protected their hollow square (§ 38^. Their light-armed troops were employed with effect in various ways. In the battle at Cunaxa they were placed in a body at the right of the phalanx, the barbarian troops of Cyrus being stationed at the left. When the Greeks were about to storm the position of the Colchians and had reformed the phalanx in company columns, the peltasts to the number of 1800 were posted in three divisions at the right and left and centre. But they depended chiefly on their heavy infantry, and the normal order for battle was the phalanx. In battle the phalanx presented a solid array of heavily armed men, eight ranks deep, divided into the right and left wings and centre (§ 32^). When the army was already in line, sacrifice was offered and the omens were taken. The men went into the fight unwillingly if the auspices were not favorable. Sometimes a simple prayer was offered. The commander meanwhile might address his men, seeking to rouse their courage. The watch-word (σύνθημα), the means by which friend was to be distinguished from foe in the battle, was given out and passed down the ranks and returned again. In the battle at Cunaxa the watch-word was Zck 2ωτήρ καΐ ^ικψ The paean was raised, all the men joining in it, and, under its inspiring strains, the advance began in even line. At the sound of the trumpet, with shields forward and spears in rest, the men raised the battle-cry, the pace quick- ened to a run, and the phalanx charged. If the enemy gave way, the victors pursued, preserving their line. The recall was sounded with the trumpet. Sacrifice was offered to the Gods in thanksgiving and a trophy (τρόπαιον) was erected. 44. The battle at Cunaxa was fought on the left bank of the Euphrates. In their first position the forces of Cyrus were drawn up at right angles to the river, facing down stream. The Greek phalanx had a front of about three quarters of a mile in length. Clearchus had the right wing §44.] MILITARY MATTERS. xlvii 1 t .a η D '111 •■•• — — — — — α 8 9 10 11 ---"-*_ IS 1 9 10 ml 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Μ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1 1 7 IT-- - 1. — First position of Cyrus facing down stream. II. — First position of King facing up stream. III. — Second position t)f King facing down stream. IV. — Second position of Greek Troops facing up stream. Paphlagonian Cavalry. Greek light-armed Troops. Greek Phalanx. Native Troops of Cyrus. Position of Cyrus. Cyreian Camp. 7. Position of King. 8. Troops of Tissaphernes. 9. Troops of Gobryas. 10. Troops of Arbaces. 11. Hill. 12. Cunaxa. The dotted lines indicate the scythe-bearing chariots, posted in front of the Persian forces in both armies. xhriii INTRODUCTION. [§44. §45.] MILITARY MATTERS. xlix I ". '•■■ Ί l• ' i of the phalanx. Menou commanded the left wing ; the other generals were posted at the centre. On the right of the phalanx the Greek light-armed troops were jwsted. On their right and next to the river was Cyrus's Paphlagonian cavalry. On the left of the phalanx were the barbarian troops of Cyrus, under his own command, and probably arranged like the forces of the king, in solid squares. This diminished greatly the length of their front. Tliere were 100,000 of these. Cyrus with his body guard of 600 horse, was probably at the centre. In front of these troops were drawn up his twenty scythe-bearing chariots. Xenophon records that the king brought 900,000 men and 150 chariots into the battle, in three divisions, under the command of Tissaphernes (who was at the left), Gobryas, and Arbaces. Tlie king's troops were drawn up in solid squares, race by race. He himself was posted at their centre, with a guard of 6000 horse under the command of Artagerses. These forces were so vast that, notwithstanding their arrangement in solid squares, the king himself at the centre was beyo^id the left wing of Cyrus, and practically out of the battle. And yet the front of the entire force of Cyrus must have measured more than a mile, at the lowest calculation.^ 45. When the army of the king had advanced so far that it was only three or four stades (two fifths of a mile) from the army of Cyms, the Greeks also began to move forward. 1 We cannot determine the exact length of the line because we do not know how the 2300 or 2500 light-armed troops of Cyms were drawn up. From the fact recorded by Xenophon (i. lo. 7), that when Tissaphernes charged through them with his horse they made a gap and let him pa^, they would seem to have been in line. The length of the line of the hoplites can be determined with approximate accuracy. This line was very thin (8 men deep), as contrasted with the solid squares of the king's forces (which must have had an average depth of some 185 men), and so faced at least one third of the king's army. These last were the troops that took to flight in the first charge, some 300,000 men. Their line was long and thin, and a part of it bellied out in front. The part left behind quickened its pace to a run. All then charged double quick, and the left of the barbarians under the command of Tissaphernes, which was opposed to them, took to flight. Cyrus did not join in the pursuit, but waited to see what the king would do. The latter, finding tliat the enemy did not engage him, began to wheel his centre and right wing to the left. Cyrus, fearing that he would thus get in the rear of the Greeks, charged him, and was slain in the hand to hand engagement that followed. The king advanced, the troops of Ariaeus flying before him, as far as the Cyreian camp. The king, with his centre and right wing, was now plunder- ing the camp, and the Greek heavy and light-armed infantry had pursued the king's left wing far down the river. The opposing forces were thus at this time over three miles apart. The king now first learned that his left had been put to rout, and at once massed his troops in line and advanced in the direction of the Greeks. The Greeks thereupon changed front by counter-marching (§ 33 ^), so that the troops under Clearchus now constituted the left wing of their phalanx. The king, however, did not advance against the Greeks straight down the river from the Cyreian camp, as at first he seemed to intend to do, but took the course by which he had passed earlier in the day outside their right (original left) wing. This carried him away from the river, and brought his right wing over against the right wing of the Greeks. The Greeks feared that if he advanced in this manner he would take them in the right flank, enfold them on both sides, and cut them down ; and they made up their minds that they must retire the wing that was specially exposed and bring their whole line into position parallel with the river, which would be a defense in their rear. But they mistook the king's real intention, and the contemplated change of position was ί 1 INTRODUCTION. [5 45. 1 I never executed.^ While they were deliberating, the king, doubtless elated by the death of Cyrus, of which he supposed the Greeks had been informed, and confident in his numbers, so moved his line toward the Euphrates as he advanced that his riglit wing, when he finally came into position, rested on the river. The two armies were now again face to face, at right angles to the Euphrates, as in their first encounter, but with positions relatively reversed. The Greeks charged, put the barbarians again to flight, and remained the masters of the field. It was now nearly sunset. 1 Observe the language of the historian in i. lo. 10. iv φ δέ ταΰτα έβον\€ύορτο, while they were delU)erating about this. For the manner m which the contemplated manoeuvre would probably have been executed, see § 34*. Η KEMARKS ON ANABASIS W. i. §§20-28 and 2. §§1-22 (pp. 118-123). The Greeks were approaching a hill, which had a steep road, aabb (p. 118, 22) ascending its side. This was the only road visible to the Greeks, and it is called i, φανερά ms (p. 119, 6 ; p. 121, 5 and 15). This road passed into a plain at the top of the hill (τό όμα\6ν, p. 122, 29) through a defile or outlet, bb, call- ed η Ιίκβαα -is, which was seen to be guarded by the enemy posted at the end of a narrow path, eee, at the point /(p. 121, δ; cf p. 118, 24). The guide told the generals of a circuitous road, cccc, by which the summit could be reached without pass- ing through the Ιίκβασι$ (ρ 119, 12). The volun- teers set out late in the afternoon by this road, intending to capture a height (3) at a critical point on the pass (p. 119, 14), and at daybreak to attack the enemy at / (p. 120, 6), while the rest of the army should co- operate with them from below. After the depart- ure of the volunteers, Xenophon tried to divert aabb: steep road to top of the hill ; bb heing the ^«/3α<Γίί, guarded by the enemy at /. dd: ravine (p. 120, 13). cccc: circuitous road to top of the hill. eee: narrow path, taken by the volunteers, leading to /. 4 : position seized by the volunteers at night. 1 : llrst hill captured by Xenophon (p. 121, 29). 2 : second hill captured by Xen. (p. 122, 6). 3 : the άκρον of p. 121, 2, the third hill captured by Xen. (p. 122, 18). 5 : hill opposite 3 (p. 123, 7), occupied by the enemy. the attention of the enemy from the attack on the height, by marching up the main road towards the Ιίκβασι^ (p. 120, 11) ; but his way led across I :/ f '■■^\ i 111 REMARKS. a ravine (p. 120, 13), down which the enemy hurled stones, so that he was unable even to approach the entrance («Γσοδο?) of the Ιίκβασι$. In the meantime the volunteers with the guide ascended the road cc, but turned off into the narrow path ee, which led them to 4, where they surprised some guards of the enemy. They thought this position was the Ακρον (3) which they had hoped to capture : but this proved to be a still higher point which the enemy held. But from their position (4) there was a path (^ψοδο5, p. 121, 4) leading to the important point/, where the enemy was posted on the main road. In the morning the volunteers attacked and routed the enemy on the main road, which Chirisophus now began to ascend, while other Greeks climbed up the side of the hill as they best could, to join the volunteers on the height (p. 121, 14-19). Xenophon in the meantime, with the rear-guard and the baggage, began to mount the road cc. He was unable to take the narrow path ee, which the volunteers had taken, because this was not fit for the cattle (p. 121, 27 ; cf. p. 119, 12) ; so that he was obliged to proceed by the same road cc. This led him to a hill (1) held by the enemy (p. 121, 24), which he capt- ured • leaving a guard to hold this, he proceeded to a second hill (2) and captured this. He next came to the hill (3) which the volunteers thought they had taken in the night (p. 122, 19), but which the enemy still held. This position was unexpectedly evacuated by the enemy, who had seen the capture of the first hill and were eager to recover it : this they did, putting to death or flight the guard left there by Xenophon (p. 123, 3). In the meantime Xenophon, with his youngest troops, took possession of the hill (3) which the enemy had left, and ordered the rest of his men to proceed by the road cc to the plain (όμαλόΐ') on the summit (p. 122, 29). The enemy then appeared on a hill (6) opposite to the height (3) on which Xenophon stood, and before long a great crowd of Carduchians had assembled. When Xenophon and his men left their position on the hill to Join their comrades on the summit (p. 123, 13-15), the enemy mounted the hill (3) and rolled stones down upon the departing Greeks. With some difficulty the Greeks escaped, and soon all parts of the army were united on the summit, where comfortable quarters awaited them. / fir•»• d I/» : tJ. . Pi*A φ, ^H.#» t . / ^ «βίΙ.^«. /ι "i/V ' «•*-' •βΊ-Λ..* • ^Xa,/ . 1 i . y, SSZ A \ f. II. , 3 ΚΕΝΟΦΩΝΤΟΣ i ' '-" ' i'v. w ο < 'eejj X'/- KaxO-yOA trie ^ KTPOT ANABASIS BOOK I. Darius summons his two sons to Thamneria. I. Aapeiov καΐ ΙΙαρνσάηΒος yiyvovrai τταΓδες δυο, 7Γρ€σβύτ€ρος μέρ "Αρταξέρξης, νεότερος 8c Κνρος • inel δέ ησθένει Ααρεΐος καΐ νπώτττενε τελευτηρ τον βίου, Ιβονλετο^τώ παιδβ άμφοτέρω napeivoL. 6 μ€ν 5 ονν πρεσβίπβρος παρών ετύγχανε ' Κνρον δβ μβτα- πέμπεται άπο της άρχης ης αντον σατράπτην εποίησ^ και στρατηγον δε αντον άπεΒειξε πάντων όσοι εις ΚαστωΚον πεδίον άθροίζοντα2. άι/α^αύ /et ονν 6 Κνρος λαβών Ύισσαφερντ{ν^ ώς φίλον, και των *Ελ- 10 ληνων^βχων οπλίτας άνεβη τριακοσίονς, άρχοντα δε αντών Βενίαν ΤΙαρράσιον» t'*i.u. «^1 /'^.^e,.,«^ Darius dies and Artaxerxes is made king. Cyrus is arrested and t his life is in danger. Έπεί δε ετελεύτησε Ααρεΐος και κατέστη εΙς την βασιΚείαν ^Αρταξέρξης, Τισσαφέρνης δια)3αλλει τον Κνρον προς τον ά^ελφον ως επιβονλενοι αύτω. 6 δε Ιδ πείθεται και συλλαμβάνει Κνρον ως άποκτενών' η δε μητηρ εξαιτησαμενη αντον αποπέμπει πάλιν επΙ την άρχην. »/ Λνι.•^. ί.η^2> , ι ' > C -ί. . / , 'Τ -*J ;νη L if 0^ . ιίίΛ''^•, ΡνΙ i , I ^Λ-ί . „ „ '^ , .• ( • t ί. ( " r , "* ". " <* "Ί/ ^ .J \\ Α • te£. ,Λΐΐϋ 1 Ι n ί• ί! i ι ι t ί C ι 2 ANABASIS I. ι. 4-7. Cyrus plots Ms brother's overthrow, and wins Persian support. *0 δ * 0)9 άττηλθε KLvSvpevaas καΐ ατιμασθώ, βον 4 Xci/crat δπως μήπσΓ€ en iarcu iwl τω ά8€λφω, άλλα, ηρ ^νιτηται, βασιλεύσει, άντ εκείνον. Παρνσατις μεν δι) η μητηρ ύπηρχε\τω Κν ρω, φιλούσα αντον μάλλον 5 η τον βασΙλενοντα'Αρταξερξηί}/ δστις δ ' άφικνεΐτο 5 των πάρα βασίλεω<ζ προς αυτόν, πάντας οντω διατι- , . θείς άπεπεμπετο ώστε αύτω μάλλον φίλους εΐναυ η βασιλεΖ καΐ των παρ' έαντω δέ βαρβάρων επεμετ • λεΐτο ως πολεμεΐν τε Ικανοί εΐησαν καϊ εύνοϊκώς Ιθ€χοιεν αύτω. Cyrus collects also a Greek armament. He strengthens his garrisons. Siege of Miletus. Ίην δ€ 'Έλληνίκην Βύναμιν ηθροιζεν ως μάλιστα β εΒύνατο επικρυτττόμενος, δπως ort άπαρασκευοτατον λάβοι /8ασιλ€α. ωδ€ ουν εποιεΐτο την σ-υλλογην. οπόσας είχε φύλακας εν ταΐς πάλεσι παρήγγειλε τοις ΐ&φρουράρχοις εκάστοις λαμβάνειν άνδρας Τίελοπον νησίους στι πλείστους καΐ βελτίστους, ώς επιβουλεύ- οντος Τισσαφέρνους ταΐς πόλεσι. και γαρ ήσαν αί *ΙωνικαΙ πόλεις Τισσαφέρνους το άρχαΐον^ εκ βασι- λέως ^εΒομεναι, τότε δέ άφειστηκεσαν προς Κυρον 20 7Γασαι πλην Μίλητου• εν Μιλήτω δέ Τισσαφέρνης 7 προαισθόμενος τα αυτά ταύτα βουλευο μένους, "απο- στηναι προς Kυpov,JToύς μεν άπέκτεινε τους δ' εξέ- βαλεν. 6 Βέ Κύρος υπολαβων τους φεύγοντας συλ- λεξας στράτευμα επολιόρκει Μίλητον και κατά γην 2^ και κατά θάλατταν και έπειρατο κατάγειν τους εκπε- ^ ; πτωκάτας. και αύτη αυ άλλη πρόφασις ην αύτω του αθροίζειν στράτευμα. "'"^^ "y"" *' τΓύΐνοί ν / %^mi^^ 1 ν ο U lit •ι-] ν" Ν. |lt •ι•ι Κ U τ ο ν ι ANABASIS Ι. ι. δ-ΐα 8 The king hoodwinked. ΙΙρος 8ε ^δασιλώ, πέμπων ηζίου αδελφός ων αυτού 8 8οθηναι οι ταύτας τας πόλεις μάλλον η Τισσαφέρνη)/ - αρχειν αύτων, και ή μητηρ συνεπραττεν αύτω ταύτα ' ώστε ^βασιλεύς την μεν προς εαυτόν επιβουλην ούκ ^ησθάνετο, Τισσαφέρνει δβ ενόμιζε πολεμούντα αύτον άμφι τα στρατεύματα δαπαι^άϊ' * ώστε ού8έν ηχθετο αύτων πολεμούντων. και γαρ 6 Κύρος άπεπεμπε • τους γιγνομένους δασμούς βασιλεΐ εκ των πόλεων ων Τισσαφέρνους έτύγχανεν έχων. * . Α third contingent is collected by Clearchus in the Chersonese. 10 *Αλλο 8έ στράτευμα αύτω συνελεγετο εν Χερρονη- 9 σω τη κατ άντιπερας *Αβύ8ου τόν8ε τον τρόπον. Κλέαρχος Αακε8αιμόνιος φυγάς ην • τούτω συγγε- νόμενος 6 Κύρος ηγάσθη τε αύτον καΧ ^ί^ωσιν αύτω μυρίους 8αρεικούς. 6 Se λαβών το χρυσίον στρά- Ι^τευμα συνελεζεν άπο τούτων των χρημάτων και επο- λεμει εκ Χερρονησου ορμώμενος τοις Θραξι τοις υπέρ Έλλησποντον οικούσι και ωφελεί τους 'Έλλι;-• νας ' ώστε και χρήματα συνεβάλλοντο αύτω εΙς την τροφην των στρατιωτών αί 'ΈΧλησποντιακαι πόλεις 20 εκούσαι.\ τούτο δ' αν ούτω τρεφόμενον ελάνθανεν : αύτω το στράτευμα. Aristippus also enlists mercenaries in Thessaly. Αρίστιππος hk 6 %ετταλος ζενος ων έτύγχανεν 10 αύτω, και πιεζόμενος ύπο των οίκοι άντιστασιωτων έρχεται προς τον Κυρον και αΐτεΐ αύτον εις δισχιλι- 25 ους ζενους καΐ τριών μηνών μισθόν, ώς ούτως περί- γενόμενος αν τών άντιστασιωτων. ο δέ Κύρος δίδω- *■ i ' ' ■ % #' , ,. Ι , •»! * τ £ , «τ Λ Κ.Α.4 pjt ,;: . ■/,. \ Α^ t ...ϊ ι> C..«-^ J '-f «I -'(Γ m* I I C I*•**' ,. OtA'T'i*•* *■ c Mil 4. „ V *^ * * j.-v A jV. 1 1 I. Μ CMiTtHI 4 ANABASIS I. i• U "«1 »• l"*- σιν αντ^ «5 τεΓρακωχι.λίου<; και e^^ /χηνΰΐ' μισθόν, καΐ δίίτάι αΰτοΟ ^ιή πρόσθ^ν καταλΟσαι irpos Toi)s άντ«7τασι«άΓα5 irplv ίν'αχηψ'σνμβον\εύσψω.. ^ ούτω 8e aS το ev θειταλία έλάρθανΐν αντω τρίφόμενον 5 στράτευμα. Other Greek generals are summonea. npoi^evoi' Se τοι/ Βοιώτιον feVov orra 4κ€λενσΐ λα -U ^<5irra άνδρα? ότι πλείστοι;? ναραγενέσθω., ο5? ei? Πισ-ίδα? βον\όμ€Ρθ^ στρατεύ^σθαχ, ο5? πράγματα ιταρεχόντων των Πισ-ιδών ry έαυτον χώρφ. ^ Σοφαΐτ 10 verov 8e τον %τνμφάλιον και ^ωκράτην τον Άχαιόν, ξινούς orra? και τοντου?, eKeXevatv άνδρα? \αβόντα<; έλθεΐν ότι irXeUTTOw?, ώ? πολβ^τίσων Τισσαψφνει συν τοΐ? φυγάσι τοϊ? Μιλησίων. και eVotovi/ ούτω? ούτοι. Uuster of the troops at Sardis. n. 'Ettci δ ' εδόκίΐ αύτω ηδη iropeueaOai άνω, την 1 ΐ&μεν πρόφασιν eVoieiTO α5? Πισίδα? βονΧόμΐνος έκβα- \€Ϊν παντάπασιΐ' « τ^? χωρά•; ■ και άθροιζα ω? ewi τούτου? τό Τ£ βαρβαρικον και το Έλληνικόν. ενταύ- θα καΐ ιταραγγε'λλβι τω τ€ Κλεάρχω \αβ6ντι ηκαν 5σον Tjv αντψ στράτευμα, και τω Άριστίππο) συναλ- 20 λαγεκΓΐ προ? τους οίκοι άττοπε/χψαι ιτρος kavrov ο €ίχ€ στράτευμα- και Ηενώι τ^ 'Αρκάδι, ό? αύτω νροειστηκα του iv ταϊ? πόλεσι γενικού, ηκειν παραγ- γέλλει λα)8όι^α του? άλλου? πλι^" όπόσοι Ικανοί ^σαν τάζ άκροπόλει? ψυλάττειν. ε'κάλεσε^ δε και 2 25 του? Μίλητοι/ πολιορκουντα?, και του? ψυγάδα? εκε- λευσε σνν'αντω στρατενεσθοί, υποσχόμενος αΰτοΓ?, ει καλώ? καταπράίειεν εψ ά εστρατευετο,' ρ.η -προ- ANABASIS I. a. 3-6. 5 a0€v ττανσασθαι πρΙν αυτούς καταγάγοι οικαδε. οί δέ η^βως επείθοντο • έπίστενον γαρ αύτω ' και λα- βόντ€ς τα όπλα παρησαρ els SctpSet?. Έ^-νίας μ€ν 8η τους €Κ των πόλεων λαβών irapeye- 3 5 veTO άς ΧάρΒβίς οπλίτας άς τετρακυσχιλίονς, ΤΙρόξετ νος δε παρην ίχων οπλίτας μεν εις πεντακόσιους και χίλιους γυμνητας δέ πεντακόσιους, ^οφαίνετος θέ 6 Χτυμφάλυος οπλίτας έχων χίλιους, Σωκράτης οε 6 Άχαιο? οπλίτας έχων ως πεντακόσιους ΙΙασίων οε ο 10 Μεγαρευς τριακόσιους μεν οπλίτας τριακόσιους δε πελταστας έχων παρεγενετο • ^ν δε καΐ ούτος και ο Σωκράτης των άμφι Μίλητον στρατευομένων. Tissaphernes warns the king. Ούτοι μεν εΙς Χαρίεις αύτω άφίκοντο. Τισσα- 4 φερνης δε κατανοησας ταύτα, καΐ μείζονα ηγησάμε- 15 νος εΐι/αι η ως επΙ ΙΙισίΒας την παρασκευην, πορεύε- /^• ται ως )8ασιλεα η ε^ύνατο τάχιστα ίππεας έχων ως πεντακόσιους, και /8ασί,λεύ9 μεν 8η επει ηκουσε 5 Τισσαφέρνους τον Κύρου στόλον, άντιπαρεσκευά- ζετο. March through Lydia and Phrygia to Colossae and Celaenae. 20 Κύρος δε έχων ους εΐρηκα ώρματο άπο Χάρ8εων • και εξελαύνει δια της Λυδίας σταθμούς τρεις παρα- σάγγας είκοσι και 8ύο επΙ τον Μαίαν8ρον ποταμόν. τούτου το εύρος δυο πλέθρα • γέφυρα οε εττην επτά εζευγμενη πλοίοις. τούτον δια^άς εζελαύνει δια 6 1 1 Φρυγίας σταθμον ενα παρασάγγας οκτώ εΙς Κολοσ- σάς, πόλιν οίκουμενην, εύ8αίμονα και μεγαλην. εν- ταύθα εμεινεν ημέρας επτά • και ηκε Μένων 6 Θετ- 1™ 6 ANABASIS I. a. 7-9. ταλο9 οπλίτας εχωρ χίλιους και πελταστάς ττεντακοτ σιους, Δόλοττας και Αιι/ιάι/ας και Όλυϊ/^ίους. cWcS- 7 0ev iieXavvei σταθμούς τρ€Ϊς παρασάγγας €Ϊκοσιν / €19 Κ€λαιι/ά9; τ^9 Φρυγίας πόλιν οίκουμένην, μ€γά\ην . , 6 και €ν^αίμονα. Royal palaces at Celaenae. The myth of Marsyas. *Έντανθα Κνρω /3ασίλ€ΐα ^p και παράδεισος μ€γας άγρίωι/ Ι^τ^ρίωι/ τιλτ^ργ^ς, α έκ€Ϊνος ίθηρενεν άττο ιττ- ΊΓον οττστε γνμνάσαι βουλοιτο εαυτόν τ€ και τους ίππους. { δια μέσου 8e του παραδείσου pet ο Μαίαν- 10 δρος ποτα/χός • αί he πηγαΐ αύτου είσιν εκ των βασι- λείων • ρεΐ δέ και δια της Κελαιι/ώΐ' πόλ€ω9. \ εστί 8 δί και μεγάλου βασιλέως )8ασίλ€ΐα cV KcXaiJ^at9 Ερυ/χΐ'ά cVi ταΓ9 πηγαΐς του Μαρσύου πσταμου ύπο τ^ άκροπόλεΐ' ρεΐ hk και ουτο9 δια της πόλεως και U εμβάλλει εΙς τον Μαίαν^ρον του 8ε Μαρσύου το ευρός εστίν είκοσι και πέντε ποΒων. cWaS^a Xeycrai 'Απόλλων εκΜραι Μαρσυαν νικησας ερίζοντά οΐ περί σοφίας, και το 8ερμα κρεμάσαι εν τω άντρω δθεν αί πηγαί' δια δε τούτο ο πσταμος καλείται Μαρ- 20 συα9. ενταύθα Βερξης, οτε εκ της Έλλαδο9 ηττη-^ 9 ^€19 τη μάχη άπεχώρει, λέγεται οΙκοΒομησαι ταυτά τε τα )8ασίλ€ΐα και την Κ€λαιι/ώι/ άκρόπολιν. Review and numbering of the Greek forces. Έκταυ^α έμεινε Κύρος ημέρας τριάκοντα • και ηκε Κλέαρχος έχων οπλίτας χίλιους και 7Γ€λταστά9 ^ρψ' 25κα9 όκτακοσίου9 και τοίοτα9 Κρητας διακόσιους. -ο^ άμα δέ και %ωσις παρην 6 %υρακρυσιος έχων όπλι- τα9 τριακόσιους, και ^οφαίνετος 6 'Αρκάς έχων οπλί- ■fit ANABASIS I. 2. 10-12. ^ 7 τα9 χιλίου9. και ενταύθα Κύρος εξετασιν και αριθ- μόν των 'Έιλληνων εποίησεν εν τω παραΒείσω, και εγένοντο οΐ σύμπαντες οπλΐται μεν μύριοι και χίλιοι, πελτασταΐ 8ε άμφι τους Β^σχιλίους. March to Peltae. Celebration of the Lycaea. March continued to the borders of Mysia. 5 Εντεύθεν εξελαύνει σταθμούς δυο παρασάγγαςΐ(^ δέκα €19 Π€λτα9? πόλιν οίκουμενην. ενταυθ' εμεινεν ημέρας τρεις- εν αΐς ξενίας 6 'Αρκάς τα Λυκαια εθυσε και άγώϊ/α εθηκε- τα Se α^λα ήσαν στλεγγί- δες χρυσαΐ • εθεώρει δέ τον άγωνα και Κΰρο9. εν- ν^τ^ϋθεν εζελαύνει σταθμούς δυο παρασάγγας δώδ€κα €19 Κεράμων άγοράν, πόλιν οίκουμενην, εσχάτην προς τη Μυσία χωρά. Thence eastward. Pay of the troops in arrears. Visit of Epyaza. 'Έιντευθεν εξελαύνει σταθμούς τρεις παρασάγγα911 τριάκοντα εις Καύστρου πε8ίον, πόλιν οικουμενην. 15cWai)^* εμεινεν ημέρας πέντε • και Τ0Γ9 στρατιώταις ωφείλετο μισθός πλέον η τριών μηνών, και 7Γθλλάκΐ9 ^ ίό^'Τ€9 επί τά9 θύρας άπητουν. 6 8ε ελπί8ας λέγων 8ιηγε και δ'ί7λθ9 ην άνιώμενος • ου γαρ ην προς του Κύρου^ρόπου^ έχοντα μη άπο8ι8όναι. ^ενταύθα άφι-ΐ2 20 κνεΐται Έττυα^ α 17 2υ€ΐ/ι/€σΐ09 γυνή του Κιλίκων βασι- λέως πάρα Κυρον • και ελεγετο Κύρω 8ουναι χρήμα- τα πολλά, τη δ ' ουν στρατιά τότε άπ&ωκε Κύρος μισθον τεττάρων μηνών, είχε 8ε η Κιλκτίτα φυλα- κην περί αυτήν Κίλικας και *Ασ"π€ΐ/δίου9• ελ^γετο 2 3 δε και συγγενέσθαι Κυρον τη Κιλίσσ^/. f Μ Ο" ν . & ν•*- ftS Ηψ < » τ " 8 ANABASIS I. a- 13-17. Γ March continued through Phrygia, and review of aU the troops at Tyriaeum. 'Εντάθα^ iieXawei. σταθμουί δυο τταρασάγγα? 18 SeW el5 €^ύμβρ^ον, πάλιν οίκουμ-^νην. ενταύθα Τ,ν irapa τί,ν 6hhv κρήνη ή MiSov καΚονμ.ίνη του Φρυγων βασιλέων, ef § Xeyerot Μίδας rhv tarvpov θηρ^σσχ δοΓνω κβράσας αύττ,'ν. eWeS^ev e'feXaiim οτα^μονςΜ διίο παρασάγγας δ«α eis Τυριαΐον, πάλι»- οικούμε ^ν. cWaS^a l/Acw'ev ή/χφα? rpei?. καΐ Xeyeroi δίτ,^ηΐΌΐ ή Κίλισσ-α Kvpov'eViSeifai το στράτευμα avrri- βονλόρίνος οΐν έπι^ίΐξαι ίξέτασιν ποιείται cV 10 τω πίδίω των Έλλτί.'ω»' και των βαρβάρων. ^ έκίλευσεΙΒ ύ Toxxs' "Έλληνας ως νό/Αος αΰτοΐς €ΐς μ,άχην ούτω ταχ^ηναΓκαΙ στή.'αι, συντάξαι δ' Ικαστον τους ίατ^ τόΰ. ετάχθησαν otv eVi τεττάρων είχε Bk το μεν δε^ιον Μένων και οι συν αϋτώ, το δε είώνυμον Κλε- 15 άρχος (cai οι εκείνου, το δέ μέσον οι άλλοι στρατη- γοί, έθεώρει oSv ό Κΰρος πρώτον μεν τους βαρβά -ie ρους ■ οί δε παρτ/'λαυνον τεταγμένοι κατά ιλας και κατά τάζεις- είτα δέ τους 'Έλληνας, τταρελαύνων εψ' άρματος καΐ η Κίλισσα ίφ' άρμαμάξης. εΤχον δέ 20 ττάντες κράντ, χαλκά καΐ χιτώνας φοινικους κοί κνψ Ι*ιδας και τάς ασπίδας ίκκεκαλυμμενας. Hock charge of the Greeks. The barbarians panic-etricken. Επειδή δε πάντας παρτ;λασε, στ»;σας το όρρ,αΚ irph της φάλαγγος μέσης, περψας Πίγρητα τδν έρ- ρτ,νε'α παρά τους στρατηγούς των 'Ελλι,'νων εκέλευσε 2&προβαλέσθω. τά όπλα και επιχωρησαι δλην την φάλαγγα, οί δέ ταΰτα προείπον τοΓς στρατιωτοις- κοΙ ε'πεί εσάλπιγ^ε, προβαλλόμενοι τά 5πλα επψτα^. ANABASIS I. a. 18-21. < TT '^ 9 •• / έκ Sc τούτου θαττον προϊόντων σνν Kpavyrj άπό τον αυτομάτου 8ρόμος lyivero τοΙς στρατυωταις eVl τάς σκηνάς, των δε βαρβάρων φόβος πολύς, καΐ η tc 18 Κιλισσα εψυ^'^ΐ' eVl της άρμαμάξης καΐ οΐ έκ της β αγοράς καταλιπόντες τά ωνια^ίφυγον^ οΐ δβ Ελλτ^- ν€ς συν γελαπί έπΙ τάς σκηνάς ηλθον. ή δέ Κιλισ- σα ίδουσα την λαμπρότητα καΐ την τάξιν του στρα- τεύματος Ιθαύμασε, Κύρος δέ ησθη τοι^ έκ των Ελλήνων €19 τους βαρβάρους φόβον ίδώι/. March through Lycaonia and Cappadocia. Epyaxa returns home. 10 'Εντεύθεν έξελαύνεί σταθμούς τρεΐς παρασάγγαςΐ9 είκοσιν εις 'Ikovlovj της Φρυγίας πόλιν εσχάτην. ^ ενταύθα έμεινε τρεΐς ημέρας, εντεύθεν έξελαύνει δια της Αυκαονίας σταθμούς πέντε παρασάγγας τριά- κοντα, ταύτην την χώραν έπέτρεφε Βιαρπάσαι τοΐς Ι^^Ελλησιν ως πολεμίαν ουσαν. εντεύθεν Κύρος την 20 Κίλισσαν εις την Κιλικιαΐ' αποπέμπει την ταχίστην 680V' και συνέπεμ^εν αυτηΤτούς στρατιώτας} ους Μένων είχε και αυτόν. Κύρος 8έ μετά των άλλων έξελαύνει δια Καππαδοκίας σταθμούς τέτταρας πα- 20 ρασάγγας είκοσι καΧ πέντε προς Δάι/α, πόλιν οίκον- μένην, μεγάλην καΐ ευ^αίμονα. ενταύθα e/xet^ai/ ημέρας τρεΐς • εν ω Κΰρος άπέκτεινεν avhpa Ιίέρσην Μεγαφέρνην, φοινικιστην βασίλειον, και ετερόν τίνα των υπάρχων ^υνάστην, αΐτιασάμενος έπιβουλευειν Syennesis abandons the Pass into Cilicia. ^Εντεύθεν έπειρωντο εισβάλλειν εις την ΚιλικΙαν 21 η δέ εισβολή ^ν όδος αμαξιτός όρθία Ισχυρώς καΐ %•%».■ . -trir-. t ν ΛΟΎσ 5" NILS » / Λ C 1 Λ•Τ''" 25 αντω. 4 α. ϋ τ «α t y^-T• f ^-h Τ ^', iF J / , *, 10 Ί^β. ti*-t 4vt-*4^ ** i..t„«,-c - 'fi ii' c t II I I if I] It i . A , „ , 'TT , ANABASIS I. 2. 22-25. αμήχανος eiaeXOelp στρατεύματί, ct τις €κώλν€ν. €λ€γ€Τθ he καΐ %ν€ρρεσις ehai inl των άκρων φνλάτ- των την είσβολην • 8ώ ίμειναν ημέραν iv τω π€όίω. τη S* νστεραία ηκ€ν άγγελος λέγων οτι λελοιπώς 5 εΐη tvevveaL^ τα άκρα, επεί ησθετο στι το Μενωνος στράτευμα η^η εν Κιλικία ην εΐσω των ορέων, καΐ οτι τριήρεις ήκουε περιπλέουσας απ* 'Ιωι^ας εις Κιλικιαι/ ^ ί»ΐΜ•#• ^γάς Αακε^αιμονίων και αύτου Κυρου, Cyrus crosses the mountains and descends to Tarsus. Κύρος δ' ουν άνεβη επΙ τα ορη ού^ενος κωλύον-^ Ζ 10 τος, καΧ cISc τας σκηνάς ου οι Κίλικες εφύλαττον. εντεύθεν 8c κατεβαινεν εις πεΒίον μέγα και καλόν, επίρρυτον^) και ^εν^ρων παντο^απων συμπλέων και αμπέλων ' πολύ Βε και σησαμον και μελίνην και κεγχρον καΐ πύρους καΐ κριθάς φέρει J οροςΒ^' αύτο -^ U περιέχει οχυρον και ύφηλον πάντη εκ θαλαττης εις j.. θάλατταν. καταβάς 8ε δια τούτου του πεδίου ήλασε^ σταθμούς τέτταρας παρασάγγας πέντε και εΐκοσιν ίΊ εΙς Ταρσούς^ της Κιλικίας ^πόλιν μεγάλην και εύ8αί- /ϋίοι^α, ένθα ην τα %υεννεσιος )8av αύτον στρατιωτών, καΐ πρώτο. pe. ^δακρυβ Γχν. χρ^,ο/ ίστώ. • οΐ Ik 6pS>vres iOav^aCo. κα. 5 έσιώπων ■ elra U e'Xe^e ToiaSe. Speech oi Clearchus : " Cy«s has been my fnend. Ά.δρ« στραηώτα., ^η ^-^.άζβτβ 5τ. χαλβπω, 3 ρο. βγή'.το καί ^^ φeύγovra ίκ ρ. πατρώο, τα « 'aXa We - Fvpiov, Ιδωκ. δαρ^κον, ^ ον. e,^ ΐολαβώ. ούκ «. τί. Ιδ^ο. κατ^θ4ρ.η. βμο. ονδβ καβηδν- πά^ησα, άλλ' eU i^a. βδαπά.'ωΐ'. " When he summoned me from Thrace, I obeyed." ΚαΙ πρώτο, ^v προ, τού, θράκα, eyoXc>^^o. 4 καΐ υπέρ τη? 'Ελλάδος έτψωρονμ.ην fied νμων, £Κ της yieppovησov αυτουξ ίξεκαννων ρ r Jsa^pZa. τους β^οικοΰκτας "Ελλη.ας τη. γη- Ιπ4 δβ Κίρος «άλ«, λαβώ. V« -^ΓΧ Ια el η δβο.το ώφ.λοίη. αύτί,ν ά.^ - .. επα^- .< But now, as between him and you, I choose you. ^ ^ ... 'ΕπίΙ δε i^el, ov fioi^eaO. συ,χπορεν^^αι, ανάγκη 6 ^δη P.O. ^ νρά. προδ^ντα r% Κνρον ^^ ΧΡ^σ^- η δ^α ποιήσω ούκ οίδα, αίρησο^χαι δ - ν^ας και ^, νϊ" Ό τι ά^ ScT, πβίσομαι και ονποτ. epei ον- δ,Ις ώς εγώ, Έλληνας ^γαγών "ς τονς,^^αρ^αΡ^^^^ .5προδούς τους 'Ελληνας τή. -ν β-Ρβ'^Ρ'^^ J^'^^^ ^ elKOpvv, άλλ' eVel V"^ e>ol ούκ ε'^ελετε πειβεσ^αι,^ ANABASIS Ι. 3• 7-10. 13 έγώ σνν υμίν εφομαι καΐ δ τι αν Sey ττ^ίσομαι. νομίζω yap νμας έμοί elvai καΐ πατρίδα και φίλους και συμμάχους^ καΧ σνν νμΖν μ€ν αν οΐμαι eivaL Τίμιος οπού αν ω, υμών δβ Έρημος ων ουκ αν ίκανο% eivai ^οΰτ αν φίλον ώφβλησαι ουτ αν εχθρον άλε^ασ^αι. ως εμού ουν Ιόντος δπτ} αν καΐ ύμεΐς, ούτω την γνώ- μη ν εχετε4 The soldiers are pleased. Clearchus refuses to go to Cyrus. , Ταντα εΐπεν οι 8e στρατιωται οι re αυτού εκείνου 7 καΐ οΐ άλλοι ταύτα άκούσαντες επηνεσαν • πάρα δέ 10 Βενίου καΐ ϋασίωνος πλείους η 8ισχίλιοι λαβόντες τα δπλα καΐ τα σκενοφόρα εστρατοπεΒενσαντο παρά Κλεαρχον. Κύρος δε τούτοις άπορων τε και λυπού- 8 μένος μετεπεμπετο τον Κλεαρχον • 6 δέ Ιεναι μεν ουκ ήθελε, λάθρα hk των στρατιωτών πέμπων αύτω αγγε- ία) λον έλεγε θαρρείν ως καταστησομενων τούτων εις το 8εον. μεταπέμπεσθαι δ ' έκέλευεν αυτόν • αύτος δ ' ουκ εφη teVat. Second speech of Clearchus: "We must be on our guard, and take good counsel." Μ era δβ ταύτα συναγαγων τους θ εαυτού στρα- 9 τιώτας και τους προσελθόντας αύτω και των άλλων 20 τον βουλόμενον, ελεζε τοιάΒε. 'ΆνΒρες στρατιωται, τα μεν hrj Κύρου 8ηλον αη ούτως έχει προς ημάς ωσπερ τα ημέτερα προς εκείνον • ούτε γάρ ημείς εκείνου ert στρατιωται, επεί γε ου συνεπόμεθα αύτω, ούτε εκείνος ert ημιν μισθο^ότης. δτι μεντοι άδι-ιθ 25 κεισθαι νομίζει ύφ* ημών οίδα * ώστε και μεταπεμ- πομενον αυτού ούκ εθελω ελθειν, το μεν μέγιστον αίσχυνόμενος στι σύνοιΒα εμαχττω πάντα εφευσμενος Ilii"' ί• ^ ^L•. iillci t^ **^^ ^' <- ^* 14 £. i-f***»"»*- 0lu0%0m0' tst, irtx..4<#* •/ ANABASIS I. 3. H"!^ ί%Λ,1£• I Ini ■i;;f αυτό»', eVeiTa καΐ δ^διώς /λ^ λαβών /te Βίκην imOji ^ &ν νομίζν. im Ιμσν ή^ικησθαι. έμοί otv So/cel ούχΐΐ ώρα ehai ημΐν KaOevBuv oiB' a/ieXcIi' ήμων αΰτώ»-, άλλα βουλεύ^σθαιδ η χρή iroieir εκ τούτων. ^ και 6 €0)5 TC μίνομ^ν αντου σκίτηίον μοι hoKel ehat. όπως ^ ώς .ίσφαλ€στατα μά,ωμ^ν, €t τ€ ηδι, δοκεΐ άπιά'αι, * 5πο)5^ώ?>άσψαλ€στατα άπι/Αεν και όπω? τά επιτι,- δ€ΐα e^o/iei/ • avev γαρ τούτων oxnt στρατηγού ουτ€ ίδιώτου όφελος ovhev- " Cyrns can be severe, and he has great resources." ; .<■>., 10 Ό δ * ίν^ρ πολλοί μίν άξιος φί\ος φ iv φίλος |, 12 χαλεπώτατο? δ' Ιχθρϊ>ς ώ άρ πολέμιος ]}, 9(« f δ,ίνα,χιν καΐ πεζί,ν καΐ ιππική»' καΐ »'avTiKV ή»' πάντες 6μοίως 6ρωμέν τε καΐ επιστάμεθα ■ καΐ γαρ ούδε πόρρω δοκοί/ϋΐή' μοι αντον καθησθαι. ώστε 16 ώρα λέγειν 5 τι tis γιγ»'ώο-κα άριοτο,' είναι, ταίτο εΐπώΐ' επανσατο. Other speakers come forward. Έκ δ€ τούτου άνίσταντο οι μεν εκ τοΰ αυτομάτου, 13 λεξοντες ά εγίγνωσκον, οι δε και υπ' εκείνου εγκ^ λευστοι, έπι^εικννντες οία εΐη η απορία άνευ της ΚΟ- 20 ρου γνώμης και μένειν και άπιό'αι. εΐς δέ ^ είπε, 14 προσποώνΐίενος σπευδειν ώς τάχιστα πορενεσθα-ι εΐς την Έλλοίδα, στρατηγούς /Αε»/ ελεσ^αι άλλους ως τάχιστα, εί μή ιδοΰλεται Κλέαρχο? απάγει»- • τά δ ' ^πιτηδει' άγοράζεσ^αι — ή Β' αγορά ^ν έν τω βαρ- 2&βαρικφ στρατεύματι—και συσκευάζεσθαι- βλ^ό'^^ας δε Κίρο»- αίτεϊΐ' πλοΓα, ώς άποπλέοιεν ■ εαν δε μη c^ διδώ ταίτα, ίτ/^μόνα αΐτεΐ/κϋρον 5σης διά ψιλίας ANABASIS Ι. 3. 15-ia 15 «%% . της χώρας άπάξ€υ. iav δβ /χτ/δβ ηγεμόνα διδώ, σνν- τάττ€σθαί την ταχίστην, πψφαι δβ καΙ προκαταλψ }Ρομ€Ρους τα άκρα, όπως μη φθάσωσι μητ€ Κνρος μητ€ οί Κίλικ€ς καταλαβόντ€ς, ωρ πολλούς καΐ πολλά S χρήματα €χομ€ν άρηρπακότ€ς. οντος μ€Ρ τοιαύτα €ΐπ€ ' μ€τά δε τούτον Κλ€αρχος είπε τοσούτον, Clearchus refuses to take the lead. 'il9 μ€ν στρατηγησοντα e/xe ταντην την στρατη- 15 yiav μη^άς υμών λ€γ€τω • πολλά yap €νορώ Sl α €μοΙ τοντο ου ποιητέον • ώς δε τω αν^ρΐ ον αν €λησθ€ 10 πείχτομαι η Ζννατον μάλιστα, Ινα €ΐ8ητ€ δτι και dp- f . χεσ^αι έπίσταμαι ως τις :<αΙ άλλος μάλιστα άνθρώ- ^^^* Counter-proposals. Μετά τούτον άλλος ανέστη^ ΙπιΖ^ικνυς μ€ν τηνίβ €vTJ0€iav τον τά πλοία αΐτεΐν κελεύοντος, ώσπερ Ιδττάλιι/ τον στόλον.Κνρον ποιούμενου, έπιδεικνυς δε ώς ενηθες εΐη ηγεμόνα αΐτεΐν παρά τούτου ω λυ/χαι,- νόμεθα την πράξιν. ει δε και τω ήγεμόνι πιστεύσο- μεν ον αν Κΰρος δώ, τι κωλύει και τά άκρα ημιν κελευειν Κΰρον προκαταλαβεΐν ; εγώ γάρ οκνοίην 17 20 ^έ^ αν εΙς τά πλοία εμβαίνειν α ημΙν 8οίη, μη ημάς τοις τριηρεσι κατάδυση, φοβοίμην 8^ αν τω ήγεμόνι ω 8οίη εττεσ^αι, μη ημάς άγάγη όθεν ουκ εςτται εξελθείν βουλοίμην δ' αν άκοντος άπιών Κύρον λαθεΐν αυτόν άπελθών • ο ον 8υνατόν εστίν. "Let us address ourselves directly to Cyrus." 25 Άλλ' εγώ φημι ταύτα μεν φλυαρίας είναι- 8οκεΐι% δε μοι αν8ρας ελθόντας προς Κυρον οΐτινες επι- τή8ειοι συν Κλεάρχω ερωτάν εκείνον τι βονλεται « see»» . per»»' J τ α ι r If Ci OtftV w'tp .' tj.•!} 4yM* . OX«J'ijr'- / I " IPI I C*"tt f if Sm ^L '•- I I m i I i 1 1| 16 ANABASIS I. 3• 1^21 and 4. 1. •P|| _ ^ ,. ^ - νμΐν χρη<τθαι ■ καΧ iav μ^ν η ■πραξί': g παραπλήσια οΙατΓψ καΧ πρ6σθ^ν 4χρητο τοΐ^ ξ^Όκ;, επβσ^αι και ■^^a? καΧ μη κακίου^ elvai, των Ίτρόσθίν τοντω σνν αναβάντων ■ Ιίν δέ μείζων ή ηράξΐί της πρόσθε,^ φαί -W 5 νηται (cal imiTovorrepa. καΧ imKivBworepa, αξυονν η νείσαιτα ημί'; άγίΐ,ν η ιηισθέντα ττρο•; φιΧίαν^ άφιί- νω. ■ οντω γαρ και ίπόμενοι άν φίλοι, αύτψ και πρό- θυμοι, ίηοίμεθα και άπιό^τίς άσφαλώ•; άν άττίοψ»• StiS' άν τΓ/ίο? ταΰτα λεγτ? aTrayyelXai hevpo • ήμας 10 δ ' άκοιίσαι^ας προς ταύτα βουλενεσθαι. The .nggeetion is adopted. Cyrus expUins his pUn and promises more pay. 'Εδο^ί ταΰτα, και άνδρα? έλόμενοι συν Κλεάρχφ^ πψπουσιν οί ηρώτων Kipov τά ^όξαντα ry στρατί^. 6 δ' άπίκρίνατο ση ακούει Άβροκόμαν Ιχθρον αν- ■ δρα επι τψ Έάφράτη ησταμω είναι, απέχοντα δώδίκα It σταθμούς- προς τούτον οΖν εφη βονλεσθαι έ\θεΐν^ κάν μεν § εκεί, την δίκηκ εφη χρ^ζ"" επιθεΐναι αύτω, ■ήν δ€ φεύγη, ημείς εκεΐ προς ταΰτα βουλενσόμεθα. άκούσαντες δέ ταΰτα οί α'φετοί ^άγγελλουσι τοις 21 στρατιώταις • τοϊς δέ υποψία μίν ^v^Srt άγει προς W βασιλέα, δμως δέ ^δόκ€ΐ Ιπβσ^αι. προσαιτοΰσιδ^ μισθόν ■ ό δε Κΰρος wicrxmTai ημιόλιον^ πασι ^ώσειν ο5 πρότερον εφερον, άντι δαρίΐκοΰ τρία ημι- δαρ«κά τοΰ μηνός τψ στρατιώτη • στι δέ £πί ^ασιλία άγοι ούδε ei /ταΰ^α ηκουσεν ουδείς εν γε τω φανερψ. Adyance. Arrival of the ships at Issus with reinforcementa. 25 rV. Εντεύθεν εξελαύνει σταθμούς δυο παρασάγ- 1 γος δήοο eVi τον Ψάρον πσταμόν, ου :;}ΐ' το εύρος τρία πλεθρα. εντ^θεν εξελαύνει σταθμον ενα παρασάγ- ANABASIS Ι. 4• 2-5• 17 "> .(.. Si, it.r t.^A4* ' € ■»•■ γας ττέντε Ιπί τον ΤΙνραμον ττοταμόρ, ον ην το €νρος στάΒίον. ivrevdev i^eXavveu σταθμούς δυο παρα- σάγγας π€ντ€καί8€κα €ΐς Ίσσονς^ της Κίλυκίας ^(τχά- Χ ^ την πόλιν/^€πΙ τη θαλάττηΑοΙκονμ€νην, μ€γάλην και ( , β €ν8αίμονα. Ιντανθα €μ€ίναν ημέρας τρεις • και Κύρω 2 παρησαν αί €κ ΙΙελοποννησον νηες τριάκοντα καΧ πέντε καΧ επ ανταΐς ναύαρχος ΙΙνθαγόρας Αακετ Βαιμόνίος. ηγεΐτο δ ' αύταΐς Ύαμώς Αίγυιττιος εζ ^ *Έφέσον, έχων ναυς ετέρας Κύρον πέντε καΐ εΐκο- 10 σ«^, αΐς εποΧιόρκει Μίλητον. παρην Βέ και Χεψίσο- 3 k»^ φος Αακεύαιμονιος επι των νέων, μεταπεμπτος νπο ρ^ Κνρου, επτακόσιους έχων οπλίτας, ων εστρατηγει πάρα Κύρω. αί 8έ νηες ωρμονν παρά την Κύρον σκηνην. ενταύθα και οΐ πάρα ^Αβροκόμα μισθοφό- ί{) poL ''ΈΧληνες άποστάντες ηλθον πάρα Κνρον τετρα- κόσιοι οπλΐται καΐ σννεστρατευοντο επι βασιΚέα. Advance. Safe passage of the " Syrian Gateway.^ ^Έιντευθεν εξελαύνει σταθμον ένα παρασάγγας 4 πέντε έπΙ τπίλας^τ^ς Κιλικίας fcat της ουρίας, ησαν^,/^χ'^ς'γ δέ ταΰτα δυο τείχη, καΐ το μεν έσωθεν το προ της 20 Κιλικίας Χυέννεσις είχε και Κιλίκων φυλακή, το δέ έζω το προ της ουρίας )8ασ"ΐλ6ως ελέγετο φυλακή φυλάττειν,\ δια μέσου δε ρεΐ τούτων ποταμός Κάρ- Ιΐ σος όνομα, εύρος πλέθρου/ άπαν δέ το μέσον των ' Τ€ΐ^ώϊ' ήσαν στάδιοι τρεις • και παρελθεΐν ουκ ην 2b βία- ην γαρ η πάροδος στενή και τα τείχη εις την Ι^ θάλατταν καθήκοντα, υπερθεν δ ' '^οται^ πέτραι ήλί- βάτοι ' επι δέ τοις τείχεσιν άμφοτέροις έφειστηκεσαν τπ/λαι. ταύτης ένεκα της παρόδου Κύρος τάς ναυς 5 'i>t - „> oi . ι ,2 , 2.β 1 ,. ft. t r r t> t lii 18 ANABASIS I. 4- ^^ |Λ€ΤθΓ4ιψατο, όπως οπλιτας αποβιβασ€ΐ€Ρ βισω και ef ω ^1/ ττυλώ^/ βιασομ€Ρονς του? πολψίονς el φν- λάττοΐ€ν eVl ταΓ? Svptat? ττνλαις, οττερ ωετο ττοιησ^ιν * ο Κίρο9 τον "Αβροκόμαρ, ίχοντα πολύ στράτευμα, 5 "Αβροκόμας δέ ου τουτ' Ιττοίησεν, αλλ' eVcl 17'^ o^^•^ KOpoi; eV Κιλικία orra, άραστρεφας €Κ Φουρίκης πάρα βασιλέα άπηλανΡ€Ρ, €χωρ, ώς iXeyeTO, τριάκορτα μν ριάδας στρατιάς. Advance. Xenias and Pasion abandon the expedition. *Ερτ€νθ€ν iieXavpei δια Συρίας σταθμον epa πάρα- 6 10 σάγγας π€ΡΤ€ eU Mvpiaphop, πόλιρ οΙκονμ€ρηρ νπο Φοιρίκωρ ΙπΙ τύ) θαλάττχι • Ιμπόριορ S" ηρ το χωρίον και ωρμονρ αυτόθι 6λκά^€ς ττολλαί. ίι^ταυ^ ' €μ€ΐραν 7 ημ€ρας Ιπτά ■ και Sci'ia? 6 "Αρκάς και Πασίωϊ/ 6 . Μεγαρευς ίμβάρτβς els πλοΐορ και τα ττλείστου α^ια 15 €ρθ€μ€Ρθΐ άπ€πλ€υσαν^ ως μ€Ρ τοις πλείστοις εδοκουι/, φιλσημηθ€ΡΤ€ς οτι τους στρατιώτας αύτώι/ τους παρά Kkeapxop άπελθόντας ως άπιόρτας εις τ-^ι/ Ελλάδα πάλιι/ και ου προς )8ασιλ€α efa Κΰρος τόϊ/ Κλεαρχορ €χ€ΐρ. ΙπεΙ δ ' ησαρ άφαρ^ΐς, δι^λ^€ λόγος ατι διώ- 20 κοι αυτούς Κύρος τριηρεσι • και οί ^έϊ' -ηύχορτο ως δειλούς οι/τας αυτούς ληφθηραι, οί δ' ωκτ€ΐρορ ci <ίλ€5θ-ΟΙΓΤΟ. Cyrus refuses to pursue the deserter». The Greeks are pleased. Κύρος δέ συγκαλεσας τους στρατηγούς ειπεί/• 8 Άπολελοίπασιι/ ΐ7/^ας 3ει/ίας και Πασίωι/. αλλ' ευ 25 γε ^εντοι Ιπιστάσθων οτι ούτε άποδεδράκασιΐ', οΐδα γάρ οπτ? οΓχοϊ^αι • ουτ€ άποπεφεύγασιν, ίχω^ γαρ τριήρεις ώστε ελειι/ το Ικύρωρ πλοΐον. άλλα ρ,α ANABASIS Ι. 4. »-11. 19 C^jH^, . )< rrtyonvyiir-evret./ "^t μ.ι? Λ,' τους σεους ουκ εγωγε αυτούς οιωςω, ουο ερει ουοεις >ic.if <»α* ως εγώ εως μερ αρ παργ) τις χρωμαι, επει^άρ δε άπιεραι βούληται, συλλαβώρ και αυτούς κακώς ποιώ και τά χρήματα άποσυλώ. άλλα Ιόρτωρ, είδότες οτι 5 κακίους είσΐ περί ήμας η ημείς περί εκείρους. καίτοι εχω γε αύτωρ και τεκρα και γυραΐκας ερ Ύράλλεσι φ ρου ρου μέρα- άλλ' ουδέ τούτωρ στερησορται, άλλ' άποληφορται της πρόσθερ ένεκα περί εμε αρετής, και 6 μερ ταύτα εΐπερ- οι δε "Ελλτ^ϊ^ες, ει τις και 9 10 άθυμότερος ηρ προς την άνάβασιν, άκούοντες την Κνρου άρετην η^ιον και προθυμότερον συνεπορευ-^ fc * ΟΡΤΟ. t-^-wf'ti.*»••-^ Advance to Thapsacus on the Euphrates. Μετά ταύτα Κύρος εξελανρει σταθμούς τετταρας παρασάγγας εΐκοσιρ επί top Χάλορ ποταμορ, ορτα 15 το εύρος πΧεθρου, πΧηρη δ' Ιχθυωρ μεγάΚωρ και πραεωρ, ους οΐ Σύροι ^εούς ερόμιζορ και ά8ικεΐρ ουκ εΐωρ, ουδέ τάς περιστεράς, αί δέ κωμαι ερ αΐς εσκηρουρ Παρυσ"άτιδος ησαρ εις ζώρηρ δεδο/Αβ/αι. ερτευθερ εζελαύρει σταθμούς περτε παρασάγγας τρι-ιθ 20 άκορτα επι τάς πΎ)γάς του Δάρδατος ποταμού, ου το εύρος πλεθρου. Ιρταύθα ησαρ τά Βελείτυος ^βασίλεια - του Συρίας άρζαρτος^)ΚαΧ παράδεισος πάι^ μέγας και καλός, έί^^ωΐ' πάρτα οσα ωραι φύουσι. Κύρος δ' αύτοί' εζέκοφε και τά βασίλεια κατέκαυσερ. ερτευθερ 11 25 If ελαύΐ'ει σταθμούς τρεις παρασάγγας περτεκα&εκα επι TOP Έίύφράτηρ ποταμορ, ορτα το εύρος Τ€ττάρωρ σταΒίωρ- και πόλις αυτόθι ωκεΐτο μεγάλη και εύδαί- μωρ Θάψακος ορομα. ενταύθα εμειρερ ημέρας πέρτε. J. at Ρ'"' 'β /,<κ** y e.'*/'««s 20 ANABASIS I. 4. li^-15. iVirt tK»J - ■it m The real object of the expedition is disclosed. The soldiers are / angry. Promises of Cyrus. " ΚαΙ Κύρος μ€τα7Γ€μ\(βάμ€ν(Κ τους στρατηγούς των 'Ελλήνων. cXcyci^ οτι η όδος ίσοιτο προς βασιλέα μέγαν ct? Βα/3υλώι/α• καΐ Κ€λ€ν€ΐ αυτούς λέγειν ταύ- τα τοις στρατιύταις καΐ άναπ€ίθ€ΐν ίπ^σθαι. οΐ 8ei2 5 ποη/σ"α^Τ€ς €κκλησίαν ά7τηγγ€λλον ταύτα- ot oe στρατιωταχ ίχαλέπαχνον τοις στρατηγοΐς^ και €φα- σαν αυτούς πάλαι ταύτ βίδότας κρύπΎ€ΐν, και ουκ ^.^φασαν Uvol lav μη τις ayroW χρήματα δίδω, crc. r ^^^^^ ^qJ^ πρστέροις μ€τα Κύρου άι/α^ασ%ι και - 10 ταύτα ουκ ίπι μάχην Ιόντων, άλλα καλούντος του '^«^ re Ciri. πατρός Κυρον. ταύτα οι στρατηγοί Κυρω απηγ- 13 γάλλοι/ • ό δ' ύπ€σχ€Το avSpl ίκάστω ^ώσ€ΐν πέντε αργυρίου μνάς, ίπην as Βαβυλώνα ηκωσι, και τον μισθον εντελή μέχρι αν καταστηση τους ''Έλληνας 16 €19 Ίωνίαν πάλιν, το μεν 8η πολύ του 'Ελληνικού ούτως επείσθη. Clever device of Menon to win the favor of Cirrus. • Μένων δ€ πρΙν 8ηλον είναι τι ποιησουσιν οι άλλοι στρατιωτοΛ, πστερον έφονται Κυρω η ου, συνέλεξε το αυτού στράτευμα χωρίς των άλλων και ελεξε τάοε. ιο'Άν^ρες, εάν μοι πεισθητε, ούτε κιν^υνεύσαντες ουτεα πονησαντες των άλλων ^ πλέον προτιμησεσθε στρα- τιοπων ύπο Κύρου. τι ούν κελεύω ποιησαι; νύν Κείται Κύρος έπεσθαι τους ''Έλληνας επΙ )8ασιλ€α • εγω ούν φημι υμάς χρηναι δια^^ι^αι τον Έύφράτην ΐ2^ποταμον πρΙν 8ηλον έιναχ ο τι οι άλλοι Ελλτ7ΐ'€9 . άποκρινούνται Κύρω. ην μεν γαρ ψηφίσωνται C7rei5 σβαι, ύμεΐς Βόξετε αίτιοι cli^ai αρξαντες τού δια)8αί- /ΐ ^ - \* '. - σ-τοΎΛΎ β/*, ANABASIS I. 4. 1^19. 21 ^l-f.^^L•, Q» 4 A β tf Cl.. ■' νειν, και ως προθυμοτάτοις ούσιν ύμΐν χάριν εΐσεται Κύρος και άποΒώσει • επίσταται δ ' ει τις καΧ άλλος • ην δε άποφηφίσωνται οι άλλοι, άπιμεν μεν άπαντες t !ς ( ώ4.^, τούμπαλιν, ύμΐν 8ε ως μόνοις πειθομένοις πιστοτά- 5Τ019 χρησεται και εις φρούρια καΐ εΙς λοχαγίας, και άλλου ούτινος αν 8έησθε οΤδα οτι ως φίλοι τεύξεσθε Κύρου. Άκούσαντες ταύτα επείθοντο καϊ δΐ€)37;σαι/ πριν 16 τους άλλους άποκρίνασθαι. Κύρος δ' €π€ΐ ησθετο <^" ΐθ8ιαβεβηκότας, ησθη τε καΐ τω στρατεύματι πέμφας ^.^^^ Τλούν εΐπεν • 'Εγώ μέν, ω άν8ρες, η8η υμάς επαιι^ώ • όπως 8έ καϊ ύμεΐς εμέ επαινέσετε εμοί μελησει, η μηκέτι με Κύρον νομίζετε, οι μεν 8η στρατιωται εν 17 ελπίσι ^ιιβγάλαις οντες ηύχοντο αύτον εύτυχησαι, 15 MeWt'i δε και δώρα ελέγετο πφψαι μεγαλοπρεπώς. Passage of the Euphrates, and advance to the Araxes. Ταύτα δε ποιησας 8ιέβαινε' συνείπετο δε και το άλλο στράτευμα αύτω άπαν. και των 8ιαβαινόντων τον ποταμον ουδείς εβρέχθη ανωτέρω των μαστών ύπο τού ποταμού. Ι οι δε θαφακηνοι ελεγον οτι ου- 18 20 πωποθ ' ούτος 6 ποταμός 8ιαβατος γένοιτο πεζή ει μη ^ τότε, άλλα πλοίοις, α τότε Άβροκόμας προϊών κατε- καυσεν, ΐνα μη Κύρος δια^τ?• εδόκει 8η θείον είναι και σαφώς ύποχωρησαι τον ποταμον Κυρω ως )βασι- λευσοί^ι. εντεύθεν εζελαύνει δια της Συρίας στα^-19 25 μούς εννέα παρασάγγας πεντήκοντα • και άφικνούν- ται προς τον *Αράζην ποταμον. ενταύθα ήσαν κώμαι πολλλαι μεσταΐ σίτου και οίνου, ενταύθα ε/χ,ειι^αι^ % ημέρας τρεις και επεσιτίσαντο. r^4-. ML ι \] I|>— 4.Λ»'^ « **"■' ίΛ.\.ψ• ... . /' «•^.^Li*•*.. r''**\ # t ■**«l"**%H«r A. β ^ f» ttw• ft/VX» ο I ν 'f»^ » Γ » • / ■I 22 ANABASIS I. 5- ^"^ ■ f ρ ,ιγΛ k £ C Advance through the desert of Arabia. The cavalry go hunting. ^ V. 'Ea^eiOeu efcXavm διά τη? 'Αραβία<:, το»- Ευ- 1 ψράτην πσταμον h Sefia £χο>»', στα^,χού? ψ^>ονς πό^€ Trapaadyyas τριάκοντα καΐ ττό^ε. ei/ τουτς) oe τώ τόπω ^ν μίν η γη nSiov άπαν ομαλέ? ωσιτερ ί'α- 5 \αττα, 'ά^Ι,ινθίου δέ πληρ£? • el Se τι καΐ άλλο ίνην ί\ης ^ καλάμου, άπαντα ijaav βύώδτ, ώσπφ άρω/χατα• δό'δρο»' δ' ουΒέν ίνην, θηρία δε παντοία, πλείστοι 2 5ν<Η (Ζγριοι, πολλαΐ Βέ στρονθοΧ αϊ /.εγάλαι • Ινησαν^ hk καΧ ί^ίδε? καΐ δορκάδε? • ταΟτα δέ τά θηρω. οι 10 ίιτπεΓ? ενίοτε εδίωκον. καΐ οί μέ»- 5νοι, ειτεί τι? διω- κοι, προδ/>αμ(ί^ε?,Ιστασαν• ττολύ yip των ίππων ίτρεχον θάττον ■ και πάλιν, επει πλησιάζοιεν οι ίπποι, rairrhv Ιποίουν, και ουκ ?,ν λαβείν ά μη διαστάντε? οί ίππεΓ? θηρωβν διαδεχόίίενοι, τά δέ κρεα των ιβάλισκομενων^^ν παραπλήσια τοΐ? ελαψείοι?, απαλο>- τερα δε. στρου^ο.. U ούδεί? Ιλα^εν • οι δε διο^α.^ ^ τε? των Ιππέων ταχύ ίπαύοντο ■ πολύ yap άπεσπα φενγσνσα, τοΓ? μεν ποσΐ Βρόμω, ταί? δέ πτερυ^ιν αΓρονσα ωο-περ ίστίω χρωμένη. τά? δί ωτιδα? αν 20 τι? ταχύ άνιστη εστί λα/χ^δάνειν π^ονται γαρ^ραχυ ώσπερ περδικε? καΐ ταχύ άπαγορειίονσι. τα he κρεα αυτών ηίδιστα ην. March to Corsote and PyUe. Cattle perish in the desert. The supply of grain fails. ηορενάμενοι hk διά τατ^τη? τη<; χώρα? άφικνοΰνται 4 ε'πΐ τον Μάσκαν ποταμόν, το εδρο? πλε^ριαιον^ 25ίνταν^α ^ν π6λι? ίρημη, μεγάλη, όνομα δ' α*ΓΒ Κορσα^,'• περιερρείτο δ* αύτη ύπέ τοί Μάσκα κύκλω. Ιιηανθ' Ιμειναν ήμερα? τρει? και επεσιτίτ ANABASIS I. 5. 5-& 23 σαντο. €ντ€νθεν efcXawet σταθμούς ίρημονς τρεισ- 5 καίδεκα παρασάγγας ενενήκοντα τον Εύφράτην ποταμορ iv Se^ia ίχων^ καΧ αφικνειται επί Πυλας. €v τούτοις τοις σταθμοΐς πολλά των υποζυγίων απώ- 5 \€Τθ ύπο λυμου • ου γαρ ην χόρτος ουδέ άλλο oiSev oevOpov, άλλα φίλη ην άπασα η χωρά • οί Se €ϊ/οι- Koii^e? οι^ονς άλετας παρά τον ποταμον ορύττοντες και ποίουντες εΙς Βα/3υλώϊ^α ηγον καΐ επώλουν καΐ άντ αγοράζοντες σίτον εζων. το δε στράτευμα 6 σίτος 6 ΐοεπελιπε, καΐ πρίασθαι ουκ ην εΐ μη εν τη Λνδία^ άγορα εν^ω Κύρου βαρβαρικω, την καπίθην αλεύρων η ά\φίτωύ τεττάρων σίγΧων. 6 δε σίγΧος Βύναται επτά οβολούς καΐ ημιωβοΚιον * Αττικούς • η 8ε καπίθη δι/ο χοίνικας Άττικάς εχώρει. κρεα ουν εσθίοντες οί 15 στρατιώται 8ιεγίγνοντο. ην δε τούτων των σταθμών 7 ους πάνυ μακρούς ηλαυνεν, οπότε η προς ϋΒωρ βού- λοιτο δί,ατελεσαι η προς χιλόν. Splendid discipline of the Persian nobles. Kat δτ; ποτέ στενοχώριας και ττηλου φανεντος ταΐς άμάξαχς Βυσπορεντου, επέστη 6 Κύρος συν τοις ^ 20 περί αυτόν άρίστοις καΧ ευ^αιμονεστάτοις και έταζε ν\ούν και Τι ίγ ρητά λαβόντας του βαρβαρικού στρα- τού συνεκβιβάζειν τάς άμαξας, επεί δ ' εΒόκουν 8 αύτω σχολαίως ποιεΐν, ωσπερ όργη εκελευσε τους περί αυτόν Πέρσας τους κρατίστους συνεπισπευσαχ ! 25 τάς άμαξας, ένθα 8η μέρος τι της ευταξίας ^ν θεά- σασ^αι. ρίφαντες γαρ τους πορφυρούς κάνΒυς οπού ετυχεν έκαστος εστηκώς, ΐεντο ωσπερ αν 8ράμοι τις περί νίκης καΐ μάλα κατά πρανούς γηλόφου, έχοντες Hm C*##*. - Χ¥ ΐ "*-' Χ. Γ. 1- 24 ANABASIS I. 5. 9-11. 1 . X*! . i-t τοιίς T€ πολντ€λ€Ϊζ χιτώνας καΐ τας ποικίλας αναςν ριδας, «/tot Sc καΧ στρζπτονς wepl τοις τραχηλοις καΐ ψελια π€ρΙ ταΐς χ€ρσίν • €νθνς 8c συν τούτοι*; ζΐσττη^ησαντες ct9 τον ττηλον θαττον η ως τις αν ω€Τθ Βμ€Τ€ώρονς εξβκόμισαν τας άμαξας. Rapidity of the march explained. Traffic with Charmande. To Sc σύμπαν 8ηλος ην Κύρος ως σπεύ&ων πάσαι/ 9 την 68ον και ου διατριβών δπου μη Ιττισνησμου €ν€κα η τίνος άλλου αναγκαίου Ικαθέζετο, νομίζων, δσω μέν θαττον cX^ot, τοσούτω ατταρασκ€νοτέρω βασιλ€Ϊ 10/btαχctσ^αt, οσω 8c σχολαίτ€ρον^ τοσούτω πλέον συναγείρζσθαι βασιλ€Ϊ στράτ€υμα. και συνι^εΐν δ' ^ν τω προσέγοντι τον νουν η /Sασtλcως αρχή πληθει μ€ν χώρας και ανθρώπων ισχυρά ούσα, τοις 8c μηκ€σι των ο^ών και τω ^ι^σπάσθοΛ τας 8υνάμ€ΐς Ιδάσθ€νης €t τις Sta ταχέων τον πόλεμον cVotctTO. πέραν δέ του Εύφράτου ποταμού κατα τους έρημους 10 σταθμούς ην πόλις Ευδαίμων και μεγάλη, όνομα ok Χαρμάν^η • έκ ταύτης οΐ στρατιωται ήγόραζον τα - iifiTT/jBeia, σχcδtαt9 διαβαίνοντας ώδβ. Βιφθέρας ας 2θ€ΐχον^στ€γάσματα"€πίμπλασαν χόρτου κούφου, ctra συνηγον και συνέσπων, ως μη απτ€σθαι της καρφης το ύδωρ ■ έπΙ τούτων Ζιέβαινον καΧ έλάμβανον τα επιτήδεια, οίνόν Τ€ ίκ της βαλάνου πεποιημένον της άπο του φοίνικος και σΐτον μηλίνης ' τούτο γαρ ην 2b έν τη χώρα πλείστον. Α quarrel at the ford. Clearchus attacked. *Αμφιλ€ξάντων δε rt ενταύθα των τ€ του}Μένωνοςΐ1 στρατιωτών και των Κλεάρχου, 6 Κλέαρχος κρίνας ANABASIS Ι. 5. 12-14. 25 άΒικέΐν τον του Μένωνος πληγάς ένέβαλεν • ό δέ ελθων προς το έαχπου στράτευμα ίλεγεν * άκουσαν τες 8ε οι στρατιωται εχαλέπαινον και ώργίζοντο Ισχυρώς τω Κλεάρχω^ τη δε αύτη ημέρα Κλέαρχος 5 ελθών επι την δtάy8ασtI/ του ποταμού και εκεί κατα- σκεφάμενος την άγοράν άφιππεύει επι την εαυτού σκηνην δtά του Μένωνος στρατεύματος συν ολίγοις τοΙς περί αύτον • Κύρος δε ούπω ηκεν, αλλ' ert προσ- ηλαυνε • τών δε Μένωνος στρατιωτών ξύλα σχίζων 10Tt9 ως είδε Κλέαρχον 8ιελαύνοντα, ΐησι τη άξίνη- και ούτος μεν αΰτου ημαρτεν • άλλος δε λίθω 'και άλλος, εtrα πολλοί, κραυγής γενομένης, Clearchus advances with his horse against Menon's troops. Proxenus interposes. Ό δε καταφεύγει εΙς το εαυτού στράτευμα, και ευθύς παραγγέλλει εΙς τα όπλα • fcat τους μεν οπλίτας 15 αυτοί) εκέλευσε )Ltεtz/αt τάς άσ^πίδας προς τα γόνατα θέντας, αΰτο9 δε λαβών τους Θράκας καΐ τους ίππεας οι ήσαν αύτώ εν τω στρατεύματι πλείους η τετταρά- κοντά — τούτων δε ot πλεtσrot θράκες — ηλαυνεν επι τους Μένωνος, ώστ εκείνους έκπεπληχθαι καΐ αύτον 20 Μά/ωι/α, και τρέχειν επι τα όπλα • ot δε /cat εστασ-αζ/ : άποροί)ι/τε9 τω πράγματι. 6 δε ΙΙρόξενος — έτυχε γαρ ύστερος προσιών και τάξις αύτώ επομένη τών οπλιτών — ευθύς ουν εΙς το μέσον αμφοτέρων άγων εθετο τα όπλα και εδεΓτο του Κλεάρχου μη ποιεΐν 25 ταύτα. 6 δ' ε^αλεπαtI/ει/ ort αυτοί ολίγου 8εησαν τος καταλευσθηναι πράως λέγοι το αυτού πάθος, εκέλευσε τε αύτον εκ του μέσου έξίστασθαι. 12 1 ' ' J tv. ., All 13 i, t - ΛΛΙ.Ι1 14 26 ANABASIS I. 5. 15-17 and 6. 1-2. ii.m%0^t'' , Cyras comes up and quickly stops the quarrel. *Ei/ τοντω Be iTrrjei /cat Κνρος καΐ ίττύθετο το 15 πράγμα • €υθυς δ' eXaySe τα παλτά €ΐς τάς χ€Ϊρα<; καΐ arifv τοις παρονσι των πιστών ηκ€ν ίλαννων εΙς το μέσον J καΧ Xcyet TctSe. Κλ€α/3;(€ καΧ ΤΙρόζενε καΐ οίΐ6 δ άλλοι οί παρόντ€ζ ''ΈΧληνες, ουκ ΐστ€ ο τι ποιείτε, εΐ γαρ τίνα άλληλοις μάχην σννάφετε, νομίζετε εν ττ^Βε Τ]} ημέρψ c/xc τε κατακεκά^εσθαι καΧ ν μας ον πολύ εμον ύστερον • κακώς γαρ των ημέτερων εχόντων πάντες οντοι ους οράτε βάρβαροι πολεμιωτεροι ημΐν ΐΟ«Γθΐ^αι των παρά )8αοΓΐλ€Γ όντων, άκουσας ταύτα π 6 Κλέαρχος εν εαντω εγενετο • και παυσάμενοι αμφό- τεροι κατά χώραν εθεντο τά όπλα. Treacherous proposal of Orontas. VI, *Έ>ντ€υθεν προϊόντων εφαίνετο ΐχρη ίππων και 1 '»;t- κόπρος- άκάζετο 8' cli/at 6 στίβος ώς Βισχιλίων Ι&ΐππων. οντοι προϊόντες εκαον καΐ χιλον καΐ ει τι άλλο χρησιμον ijv. *Ορόντας 8έ ΙΙερσης άνηρ, γένει τε προσήκων ^δασιλβΐ καΐ τά πολέμια λεγόμενος εν τοις άρίστοις ΙΙερσών, επιβουλενει Κνρω, καΐ πρόσθεν πολεμησας, /€αταλλαγ€ΐ9 8c. οντος Κνρω εϊπεν, ει 2 20αντω 8θΜ7 tirircas χιλίονς, οτι τους προκατακάοντας Ιππέας η κατακάνοι αν ενεΒρενσας η ζώντας πολ- λούς αντών αν ελοι και κωλνσειε τον κάειν επιόντας, καΐ ποιησειεν ώστε μηποτε Siii/acr^at αντονς ΙΒόντας το Κιίρον στράτενμα βασιλεΐ 8ιαγγ€Γλαι. τω Βε 25 Κνρω άκονσαντι ταντα εΒόκει ωφέλιμα cTi^at, και εκελεχΗτεν αντον λαμβάνειν μέρος παρ* εκάστου τών ηγεμόνων. ANABASIS Ι. 6. 3-6. 27 1 The traitor betrayed, and brought to trial. Ό 8' Όρόντας νομίσας ετοίμονς eTi/at αύτω τονς 3 ιππέας γράφει επιστολην παρά /βασ-ί,λβα ότι ηξοι έχων ιππέας ώς αν Βννηται πλείστονς • άλλα φράσαι τοις εαντον ίππενσιν εκέλενεν ώς φίλιον αντον νπο^ 5 Βέχεσθαι. \ ενην Βέ εν τη επιστολή και της πρόσθεν φιλίας υπομνήματα και πίστεως, ταντην την επι- στολην 8ίδωσι πιστώ άνΒρί, ώς ώετο • 6 Βέ λαβών Κνρω ΒίΒωσιν. άναγνονς Βέ αντην 6 Κνρος σνλλαμ- 4 βάνει ^Ορόνταν, και σνγκαλεΐ εΙς την εαντον σκηνην 10 ΙΙέρσας τονς άρίστονς τών περί αντον έτττά, και τονς τών Ελλήνων στρατηγούς εκέλενσεν όπλίτας άγα- γεΐν, τοντονς Βέ ^βσ^αι τά όπλα περί την αντον σκηνην. οι Βέ ταντα εποίησαν, άγαγόντες ώς τρισ- χιλίονς οπλίτας. Κλέαρχον Βέ καΐ εΐσω παρεκάλεσε 5 15 σνμβονλον, ος γε καΐ αντώ και τοις άλλοις εΒόκει προτιμηθηναι μάλιστα τών Ελλήνων, επει δ' ε^^λ- θεν, εξήγγειλε τοις φίλοις την κρίσιν τον Όρόντα ώς έγένετο • ου γάρ απόρρητον ην. έφη Βέ Κνρον άρχειν τον λόγον ώΒε. Speech of Cyras : " Twice before has this man been false to me, and twice have I forgiven him." m ΤΙαρεκάλεσα νμάς, άνΒρες φίλοι, όπως σύν νμΐν 6 βονλενόμενος δ τι Βίκαιόν εστί και προς θεών και προς ανθρώπων τοντο πράξω περί ^Ορόντα τοντονί. τοντον γάρ πρώτον μέν ο έμος πατήρ έΒωκεν νπη- κοον είναι εμοί • επει Βέ ταχθείς, ώς έφη αντός, νπο ; 25 του εμον άΒελφον οντος επολέμησεν έμοι έχων την εν ΧάρΒεσιν άκρόπολιν, και εγώ αντον προσπολεμών εποίησα ώστε Βόξαι τούτω του προς έμέ πολέμου ANABASIS I. 6. 7-9. (ΐμμίΛ-ι ^ * it πανσασθαι, καΐ Se^iav ίλαβον καΐ εδωίΓα, /χ€τά ταύτα, 7 ίφη, ω Όρόρτα, ίστιρ ο τι σ*€ -ΐβίκ-ησα ; άπεκρίνατο ση ον. πάλιρ δέ 6 Κνρος ήρώτα, Ονκουρ ύστερον, ώ^ αΰτος συ oftoXoyci^s ovSci^ νπ Ιμον αδικούμενος &άποστάς εΙς Μνσονς κακώς εποίεις την εμην γωραν δ τι ε^ννω ; εφη 6 *Ορόντας, Ονκονν, εφη 6 Κνρος, οπότ αν εγνως την σαχπον 8ύναμυν, ελθών επΙ τον της ^Αρτεμι8ος βωμον μεταμεΚειν τέ σοι εφησθα, καΐ ττείσας εμε πίστα πάλιν ε^ωκάς μοι καΐ έλαβες παρ* 10 εμού ; καΧ ταυθ^ ώμολόγει 6 Όρόντας. " He confesses that he has no excuse for this third attempt, cannot be trusted. What shall be done with him ? " He Tt ovvp εφη ό Κνρος, ά8ικηθεΙς νπ* εμού νυν το g τρίτον έπιβονλευων μοι φανερός γεγονας ; ειπόντος δέ τον ^Ορόντα δτι ovhkv ά8ίκηθείς^ ηρωτησεν 6 Κια- ρος αντάν, ^Ομολογείς ονν περί εμε άδικος γεγενη- 15 σ-^αι ; *Η γαρ ανάγκη, εφη 6 ^Ορόντας, εκ τούτον πάλιν ηρωτησεν ο Κνρος, ''Έ/τι ονν αν γενοιο τω εμω άΒελφω πολέμιος, εμοι 8ε φίλος και πιστός; 6 οε απεκρίνατο δτι ουδ' εΐ γενοΐμην, ω Κνρε, σοι γ* αν 1Γ0Τ€ €τι δό^αι/ιι. προς ταύτα Κύρος είπε τοις παρ- 9 2Χ)ονσιν, Ό μεν άνηρ τοιαντα μεν πεποίηκε, τοιαντα 8ε λέγει • νμων δέ σν πρώτος, ω Κλέαρχε, άπόφηναι γνώμην δ τι σοι 8οκεΐ. Clearchus advises that he be put to death. The others concur, and Orontas is led away. Κλέαρχος 8ε εΐπε τά8ε, %νμβονλενω εγώ τον av8pa τοντον εκπο8ών 7Γ0ΐ€Γσίαι ως τάχιστα, ως 2,μηκέτι 8εη τοΰτον φνλάττεσθαι, άλλα σχο\^ ζ -fjpZv το κατά τοντον εΐνοΑ, τονς εθελοντάς φίλονς εν ποιεΐν. ΙΙΙΙΙΜ^^^^^^^^^^^^ ANABASIS Ι. 6. 10-11 and 7. 1-3. 29 ταιίττ^ 8ε τη γνώμη εφη και τοίίς άλλους προσθεσθαι. 10 μετά ταύτα, εφη, κελενοντος Κνρον ελαβον της ζώνης τον Ορόνταν επι θανάτω άπαντες άναστάντες και οι σνγγενεΐς ' εΐτα δ' εξηγον αυτοί/ οΓς προσετάχθη. 5 επεί 8ε εΙΖον αντον οΐπερ πρόσθεν προσεκννονν, και τότε προσεκννησαν, καίπερ ε18ότες δτι επΙ θάνατον αγοιτο. επεί 8ε εις την Ά/οταπατου σκηνην εισήχθη ιι τον πιστοτατον των Κνρον σκηπτονχων, μετά ταύτα οντε ζώντα ^Ορόνταν οντε τεθνηκότα ον8εις εΐ8ε πώ- 10 ποτε ουδέ δπως άπεθανεν ον8εΙς βίδώς ελεγεν • εΐκαζον 8ε άλλοι άλλως • τάφος 8ε ουδείς πώπστε αντον εφάνη. Advance. Midnight review. Council of war. VII. Έντενθεν εξελαννει δια της Βαβνλωνίας σταθ- 1 μονς τρεις παρασάγγας δώδεκα, εν 8έ τω τρίτω 15 σταθμω Κνρος εξέτασιν ποιείται των Ελλήνων και των βαρβάρων εν τω πε8ίω περί μεσας νύκτας* ε8όκει γαρ εΙς την επιονσαν εω ηξειν ^βασιλέα σνν τω στρατενματι μαχούμενον • και εκελενε Κλεαρχον μεν τον 8εξιον κερως ήγεΐσθαι, Μή^ωϊ/α δε τον εΰω- 20 νύμον, αντος 8ε τονς εαντον διέταζε, μετά δε την 2 εξέτασιν άμα τη επιούση ήμερα ηκοντες αυτόμολοι παρά μεγάλον )8ασιλεως άπΊίγγελλον Κύρω περί της /βασιλέως στρατιάς. Κνρος δε συγκαλεσας τονς στρατηγονς καΐ λοχαγονς των ^ΈΧληνων σννεβον- 25 λεύετό τε πώς αν την μάχη ν ποιοΐτο και αντος παρη- νει θαρρύνων τοιάδε. Speech of Cyrus encouraging the Greek generals and captains. il άν8ρες ''Έιλληνες, ονκ ανθρώπων άπορ'ών βαρ- 3 βάρων σνμμάχονς νμάς άγω, άλλα νομίζων άμείνονς 30 ANABASIS I. 7. 4-7. ANABASIS I. 7. &-12. 31 1 >-i Λ|"ν\ καΐ κρ€ίττονς πολλωρ βαρβάρων νμας cli/at, δια τοντο Ίτροσέλαβον. οττως ονν ίσ€σθ€ αι/δρ€9 άξιοι της €λ€νθ€ρίας ης κΈκτησθε καΐ ης νμας εγώ evSai- μονίζω • €v yap ΐστ€ ση την ΙΧ^υθ^ρίαν ίλοίμην αν 5 αντί ων ενω πάντων και άλλων πολλαπλάσιων, όπως Sc και eihrJTe €ΐς οΐον €ρχ€σθ€ άγωνα^ νμας €ΐδώς διδάξω, το μ€ν γαρ πλήθος πολύ και κραυγή πολλή ίπίασιν • αν δέ ταύτα άνάσχησθε, τα άλλα και αίσχννεσθαί μοι δοκώ οίους ημίν γνώσ€σθ€ τους iv 10 τί} χώρα οντάς ανθρώπους, υμών δέ άντρων όντων καΧ €υ των €μων γ^νομένων^ Ιγώ υμών τον μεν oiKahe ^^βουλόμενον άπιει/αι- τοις οίκοι ζηλωτον ποιήσω άπελ- θεΐν, πολλούς he οΐμαι ποιησειν τα παρ' €μοι cXeV^at άντΙ των ΟΙΚΟΙ. Objection of Gaulites. Answer of Cyrus. 15 'Ενταύθα Ταυλίτης παρων^ή>υγάς ^άμιος^ πιστός 5 δέ Κνρω, €ΐπ€ • Και μην, ω Kvpc, λίγουσί τίνες δτι πολλά υπισχνεΐ νυν δια το iv τοιούτω elvai του κιν- δύνου προσιόντος, αν δε c5 γενηταί τι, ου μψνησε- σθαί σεφασιν • evioi δε οΰδ' ει μεμνηό τε καΐ βούλοιο 2θδι;ΐ'ασ0αι αν άπο^ουναι οσα ύπισχνει. άκουσας 6 ταΰτα ίλεξεν 6 Κύρος • Άλλ' ίστι μεν ήμΐν, ω άνδρες, η άρχη ή πατρώα προς μεν μεσημβρίαν μέχρι ου δια καύμα ου δύνανται οικείν άνθρωποι, προς δε άρκτον μέχρι ου δια χει/χώι/α • τα δ ' εν μέσω τούτων 2b πάντα σατραπεύουσιν οι του εμού ά8ελφου φίλοι, 'ήν δ' ημείς νικησωμεν, ημάς δει τους ημετέρους 7 φίλους τούτων εγκρατείς ποιησαι. ώστε ου τούτο δίδοικα μη ουκ εχω ο τι δω έκάστω των φίλων αν ευ γένηται, αλλά μη ουκ εχω ικανούς οΐς δω. υμών δε των Ελλήνων και στέφανον έκάστω χρυσουν δώσω. More promises. Cyrus confident that the king will fight. Oi δε ταντα ακονσαϊ^τες αύτοι τε ήσαν πολύ προ- 8 θυμότεροι και τοις άλλοις εξηγγελλον. είσησαν δε 5 παρ' αυτόν οι τε στρατηγοί καΐ των άλλων Ελλήνων τινές άξιουντες είδει/αί, τί σφίσιν εσται εάν κρατή- σωσιν. 6 δε έμπιπλάς απάντων την γνώμην άπέ- πεμπε. παρεκελεύοντο δε αύτω πάντες οσοιπερ διε- 9 λέγοντο μη μάχεσθαι, αλλ' όπισθεν εαυτών τάττε- 10 σ^αι. εν δε τω καιρώ τούτω Κλέαρχος ώδε πως ηρετο τον Κυρον ' ΟΓει γάρ σοι μαχείσθαι, ώ Κυρε, τον ά8ελφάν; Νί7 Αί% έφη 6 Κύρος, ειπερ γε Ααρείου και ΪΙαρυσάτιΒός εστί παις, εμος Sk αδελφός, ουκ α/χαχεί ταΰτ' εγώ ληφομαι. Numbers of the opposing forces. 15 ^Ενταύθα 8η εν τη εξοπλισί^ αριθμός έγένετο τών 10 μεν Ελλήνων άσπις μυρίακαι τετρακόσια, πελτασταί δε 8ισχίλιοι και πεντακόσιοι, τών δε μετά Κύρου βαρβάρων δέκα μυριάδες και άρματα 8ρεπανηφόρα άμφι τα είκοσι• τών δε πολεμίων ελέγοντο εΐζ^αιίΐ 20 εκατόν και είκοσι μυριάδες και άρματα 8ρεπανηφόρα διακόσια, άλλοι δε ήσαν έξακισχίλιοι ιππεΐς, ων Άρταγέρσης ηρχεν • ούτοι δ' αυ προ αυτού βασι- λέως τεταγμένοι ήσαν. του δε ^βαοτιλεως στρατεύ-η ματος ήσαν άρχοντες και στρατηγοί και ηγεμόνες 25τεττα/)ε9, τριάκοντα μυριάδων έκαστος, Άβροκόμας, Τισσαφέρνης, Τωβρύας, Άρβάκης. τούτων δε πάρε- γένοντο εν τη μάχη ενενηκοντα μυριάδες και άρ- Ι Ι um ANABASIS 1. 7. 13-17. ANABASIS I. 7. 18-20 and 8. 1-3. 33 iii ματα ξρ€πανηφόρα ίκατον καϊ πεντήκοντα • Ά/3/)ο- κομ,α^ζ 8e υστέρησε τη^ μό,χης ημεραις ttcVtc, εκ Φοινίκης ελαννων. ταντα δέ ηγγελλον προς Κνρον οί 13» αντομολησαντες παρά μεγάλου βασιλέως προ της 6 μάχης, καΐ μετά την μάχην οί ύστερον ελήφθησαν των πολεμίων ταυτά ηγγελλον. Advance. The great trench. Traces of the king's retreat. "Εντεύθεν Sc Κύρος εξελαύνει σταθμον ενα πάρα- u σάγγας τρεις συντεταγμένα) τω στρατεύματι παντι καΧ τω "Έλληνικω καΧ τω βαρβαρικω • ωετο γαρ 10 ταύτη τη ημ^ρα μαχείσθαι /3ασιλ€α • κατά γαρ μέ- σον τον σταθμον τούτον τάφρος ην ορυκτή βαθεΐα^ το μεν εύρος οργυιαί πέντε, το U βάθος οργυιαΐ τρεις, παρετέτατο δε 17 τάφρος άνω δια του πεδίου επι δω- 15 δ€κα παρασάγγας μέχρι του Μτ^δίας τείχους, [«/^α 16 αί Βιώρυχες, άπο του Ίίγρητος ποταμού ρέουσαι • είσΐ δε τέτταρες, το μεν εύρος πλεθριαΐαι, ^α^ειαι δε Ισχυρώς, και πλοία πλει εν αυταίς σιταγωγά • είσ- βάλλουσι δε εις τον Εύφράτην, διαλείττονσι δ ' εκά- στη παρασάγγην, γέφυραι^* επεισίϊ'.] ην δε παρά 20 τον Ευφράτην πάροδος στενή μ€Γαξ\) του ποταμού και της τάφρου ως είκοσι ποΒων το εύρος • ταύτηνίβ δε την τάφρον βασιλεύς ποιεί μέγας άντΙ ερύματος, ^ επειδή πυνθάνεται Κυρον προσελαύνοντα. ταύτην 8η την πάρο^ον Κυρός τε και η στρατιά παρήλθε 25 και εγένοντο εΐσω της τάφρου, ταύτη μεν ουν τηΙΊ ημέρα ουκ έμαχέσατο βασιλεύς, αλλ" υποχωρούντων φανερά ^σαν και ίππων και ανθρώπων ίχνη πολλά. Α soothsayer rewarded. Cyrus advances with less caution. "Ει^αυθα Κύρος Χιλανον καλέσας τον "Αμπρακιώ -lS την μάντιν ε8ωκεν αύτω δαρεικούς τρισχιλίους, οτι τη ενΒεκάτη απ" εκείνης ημέρα προθυόμενος εΐπεν αύτω ΟΤΙ βασιλεύς ού μαχεΐται δέκα ήμερων, Κύρος 5 δ' ειπεί/, Ούκ άρα ετι μαχεΐται, εΐ εν ταύταις ού μαχεΐται ταΐς ημέραις • εάν δ ' άληθεύσης, ύπισ- χνούμαι σοι δέκα τάλαντα, τούτο το χρυσίον τότε άπέ^ωκεν, επει παρηλθον αί δέκα ημέραι. ' επει 8" 19 επΙ τη τάφρω ούκ εκώλυε ^βασιλεύς το Κύρου στρά- ΙΟτευμα δια/3αινειι/, εΒοξε και Κύρω και τοις άλλοις άπεγνωκέναι τού /χ<χχε<τ^αι • ώστε τη ύστεραία Κύρος επορεύετο ήμελημένως μάλλον! τη δε τρίτη επί τε20 - τού άρματος καθήμενος την πορείαν έποιεΐτο και ολί- γους εν τάζει έχων προ αυτού, το δε πολύ αύτω 15 άνατεταραγμένον επορεύετο και των δπλων τοΐς στρα- τιώταις πολλά επι άμαζων ηγετο και υποζυγίων. " The king is coming I " The call to arms. ^ VIII. Και η8η τε ην άμφι άγοράν πληθουσαν και 1 πλησίον ην 6 σταθμός ένθα έμελλε καταλύειν, ηνίκα ' ' Παττ^νιίας άνηρ ΙΙέρσης των άμφι Κύρον πιστών 2οττροφαίνεται έλαύνων άνά κράτος ιορούντι τω ιππω, . και εύ^νς πάσιν οΐς ενετύγχανέν εβόα και βαρβαρι- κως και έλληνικως οτι βασιλεύς σύν στρατεύματι ^:^^^ πολλω προσέρχεται ως εις μάχην παρεσκευασ μένος, ένθα 8η πολύς τάραχος έγένετο • αύτίκα γαρ έ86κουν 2 25 οί "Ελληνες και πάντες δε άτάκτοις σφίσιν ε'πιπε- σ-εισ^αι • Κύρος τε καταπη8ήσας άπο τού άρματος 3 τον θώρακα ένέ8υ και άναβάς επι τον ΐππον τα 'ΐ\ν ■u Μ ANABASIS I. 8. 4-9. ANABASIS I. 8. 10-13. 35 i II ί I I M. L € Γκ u, Γ ■\ τταλτά ci? τάς χ€Ϊρας cXajSc, τοΐς τ€ άλλοις ττασι παρηγγελλεν εξοπλίζεσθαι καΐ καθίστασθαι eU την έαντον τάζιν maarov. The order of battle. Armor of Cyrus and his body-guard. "Ένθα δή συν noWjj awovSjj καθίσταντο, Κλεαρ- 4 /<: r. J> 5 χο9 μ€ν τά ^εξια τον κέρατος ίχωνττρος^ τψ Ευφράτη ποταμω, ΙΙρόξενος he ίχόμενος, οΐ δ' άλλοι μετά τοντονί Μένων δέ και το στράτευμα το ενώγνμον κέρας εσχε τον Έλληνικον. τον δέ βαρβαρικον 5 Ιππείς μεν Παφλαγόνες εΙς χιλίονς παρά Κλεαρχον 10 έστησαν εν τω Βεξιω και το Έλληνικον πελταστίκόν, εν δέ τω ενωννμω Άριαιος τε 6 Κνρον νπαρχος και το άλλο βαρβαρικον. Κνρος δβ και οί Ιππείς τον- β τον όσον εξακόσιοι ωπλισμενοι θώραξι μεν αντοι- και παραμηρώίοις και κράνεσι πάντες πλην Κνρον 15 Κνρος δ€ ψιλ^ι/ ίχων την κεφαλήν εΙς την μάχην καθίστατο- λέγεται δε και τονς άλλους Πφσας ψιλαΓς ταις κεφαλαΐς εν τω πολεμώ Βιακιν^ννθίειν. οί δ' 7 ίπποι πάντες οΐ μετά Κνρον είχον και προμετωπί^ια ' και προστερν&ια • εΙχον δέ και μαχαίρας οί ιππείς 20 Έλλι^νικάς. In the afternoon the enemy appear, prepared for battle. Και ηΖη τε ?jv μέσον ημέρας καΧ ονπω καταφανείς 8 ^σαν οι πολέμιοι • ηνίκα δέ δ€ίλτ7 εγίγνετο, , εφάνη^ κονιορτος ωσπερ νεφέλη λενκη, χρόνω 8έ σνχνω ^ύστερον ωσπερ μελάνια τις εν τω πεδίω cVt πολύ. 25 δτ€ δ€ εγγντερον έγίγνοντο, τάχα ^ και χαλκός τις ηστραπτε και αι λόγχαι και αϊ τά^€ΐς καταφανείς εγίγνοντο* και ήσαν ίπττεις μεν λ€υκοθώρακες επι 9 4. ¥, ' τον ενωννμον των πολεμίων • Τισσαφέρνης ελέγετο τούτων άρχειντ εχόμενοι 8έ γερροφόροι, εχόμενοι 8ε οπλΐται σνΡπο8ηρεσι ζνλίναις άσπίσιν. Αίγύπτιοι δ ' ούτοι ελέγοντο €ΐϊ/αι • άλλοι δ ' ιππείς, άλλοι τοζά- 6 ται. πάντες 8 ' ούτοι κατά έθνη εν πλαισίω πληρει ανθρώπων εκαστον το έθνος έπορεύετο. προ 8έ αντων άρματα 8ιαλείποιη'α σνχνον απ" αλλήλων τά 8η 8ρεπανηφ6ρα καλούμενα • έΐχον 8έ τά 8ρέπανα έκ των αξόνων εΙς πλάγιον άποτεταμένα καΓίίπο τοις 10 8ίφροις εις γην βλέποντα, ως 8ιακ07Γτειν οτω έντνγ- χάνοιεν. η 8έ γνώμη ην ως εΙς τάς τάξεις των Έλ- ληνων ελώντα και 8ιακό\]βθντα. ο μέντοι Κνρος εΐπεν οτε καλέσας παρεκελεύετο τοις "Ελλτ^σ-ι την κρανγην των βαρβάρων άνέχεσθαι, έχίβενσθη τοντο • 15 ον γάρ κραυγή αλλά σιγή ως άννστον και η(τνχη εν ισω και βρα8έως προσησαν. '^'^■"^'^ ' '*^• • " '^--^ Clearchus refuses to attack the Persian centre. Και εν τούτω Κνρος παρελαύνων αντος σνν Πί- γρητι τω ερμηνεΐ και άλλοις τρισιν η τέτταρσι τω Κλεάρχω έβόα άγειν το στράτευμα κατά μέσον το 20 των πολεμίων, δτι έκεΐ ^βαοΊλεύς εΐη • καν τοντ, έφη, νικώμεν, πάνθ* ημΐν πεποίηται. ορών 8έ 6 Κλέαρ- χος το μέσον στίφος και άκούων Κύρον έξω οντά τον ενωννμον βασιλέα — τοσοντον γάρ πληθει περιην )8ασιλ€νς ώστε μέσον των εαντον έχων τον Κύρον ^^ ενωνύμον έξω ην — αλλ' όμως ο Κλέαρχος ονκ ηθελεν άποσπάσαι άπο τον ποταμον το 8εξιον κέρας, φοβούμενος μη κνκλωθ^ίη εκατέρωθεν, τω 8έ Κύρω άπεκρίνατο δτι άντω μέλοι όπως καλώς έχοι. 10 12 13 «t υ*'*' CI tr' ■r ft." i'* Τ" C*^ t• ι - it» 1 Γ". /v. flL<#* β «(C et,T Λ κ: g Φ ν truKAi χ •? J '" ϋ £ ^5, *Τ•Λ5 86 ANABASIS I. 8. 14-19. L^ AT Final preparations. The sacrifices favorable. The watchword. ΚαΙ ip τούτω τω καιρώ το /xci/ βαρβαρικον στρα-ΐ4 Tcv/xa ομαλως wpojJ€L, το Se Έλλτ^ΐ'ΐκοι^ ert ci^ τω αντω μένονι σνν€τάττ€Τ0 €κ των ert προσιοντων^ κσΧ 6 Κυροζ τταρ^Καύνων ον πάιη) προς αντω τω στρα- &Τ€υματί κατ€θ€ατο €κατ€ρωσ€ αποβλέπων €ts tc τους πολεμίους και τους φίλους. ΙΒών 8c αύτον άττ'ο του 15 Έλλτ^ϊ/ικοΰ Β^νοφώρ ^Αθηραΐος, πελάσας ως συναν- τησαι ηρ€το ct τι παραγγέλλοι ό δ ' ίπιστησας €Ϊπ€ καΐ Xeycti/ cKcXei/c πάοΊΐ/ ση και τα tcpa καλά και 10 τα σφάγια καλά. ταύτα he λέγων θορύβου ηκουσε 16 δια των τάξεων Ιόντος, και ηρετο τίς 6 θόρυβος εΐη. 6 δέ Κλέαρχος εΐπεν art σύνθημα παρέρχεται δεύτε- ρον η^η. και ος €^αυ/χασ€ τίς παραγγέλλει, και Tjpero δ τι εΐη το σύνθημα. 6 δ ' άπεκρίνατο, Ζευς Ιδσωτηρ και νίκη. 6 δέ Κύρος άκουσας. Άλλα 17 8€χομαί Τ€, εφη, καΐ τούτο έστω. The Greeks charge on the run. The left wing of the king's army takes to flight. His chariots are useless. Ταύτα δ' ειπών εΙς την αύτου χώραν άττηλαυνε- καΐ ουκέτι τρία η τετταρα στάδια 8ιειχετην τω φά- ' ' 8, λανν€ άπ' αλλήλων ηνίκα βτταιάι/ιζόι/ τε οι ΈΧληνες 20 και ηρχοντο άντίοι levai τοις πολεμίοις. ως δέΐβ ^ί. A\njk*. τΓορευομένων έζεκύμαινέ τι της φάλαγγος, το ύπολει- πόμενον ηρζατο Βρόμω θεΐν • και άμα εφθέγζαντο πάντες οίον τψ Έι/υαλίω ελελίζουσι, και πάντες 8ε εθεον. λέγουσι Βέ τίνες ως και ταΐς άσπίσι προς τα η. α 25 δόρατα εΒούττησαν φόβον ποιουντες τοις ΐπποις. πριν δέ τόξευμα εξικνεΐσθαι εκκλίνουσιν οΐ βάρβαΊ^ ροι καΐ φευγουσι' και ενταύθα Ζη εΒίωκον μεν κατά ^ -^ VV4.A.. 1 . • *' Φ W at. Λ. ι,.» "c e^>i/ Τ" «4.1 1'' ^ίΧίΛΟν' ^ Τ" Λ. «c χ***,/ (3^ κράτος oi "Έλληνες, εβόων δε άλληλοις μη θεΐν Spo- li(u, αλλ' εν τάξει επεσ^αι. τα δ * άρματα εφεροντο 20 τα μεν hi αύτων των πολεμίων, τα he και δια των 'Ελλήνων κενά ηνιόχων, οι δ' επει πpoιhoιεv, 5 hιίστavτo • εστί δ ' όστις και κατελήφθη ωσπερ εν ιππohpόμφ εκπλαγείς • και oύhεv μέντοι oύhε τού- τον παθεΐν εφασαν, ουδ ' άλλος δέ των Ελλήνων εν^ ταύτη τη μάχη επαθεν oύhεlς oύhέv, πλην επι τω εύωνύμω τοξευθηναί τις ελέγετο. The king himself holds the centre, and begins to more. 10 Κυρρς h ' ορών τους "Έλληνας νικώντας το καθ ' 21 αυτούς και hιώκovτaς, ηhόμεvoς και προσκυνούμενος ηοη ως βασιλεύς υπο των αμφ αυτόν, oύh ως εξψ *^-'j • - χθη Ζιώκειν, άλλα συνεσπειραμένην έχων την των συν έαυτω εξακοσίων ιππέων τάξιν επεμελεΐτο ο τι U ποιήσει βασιλεύς, και γαρ Ύjhει αύτον ότι μέσον ίχοι του ΙΙερσικου στρατεύματος^ και πάντες δ' οί22 / λ.. των βαρβάρων άρχοντες μέσον έχοντες τί> αύτων ^'"^" ηγούνται, νομίζοντες ούτω και εν άσφαλεστάτω ctj^at ^ , ην η η ισχύς αύτφν εκατέρωθεν, καΐ ει τι τίαραγ- 20 γεΓλαι χρηζοιεν, ήμίσει αν χρόνω αίσθάνεσθαι Το στράτευμα^ καΐ ^βασ-ιλενς δΐ7 ''"ore μέσον έχων τ^9 23 αύτον στρατιάς όμως έξω έγένετο του Κύρου ευωνύ- μου κέρατος, επέι δ' oύhεις αντω έμάχετο εκ του άντίου oύhε τοις avjpv τεταγμένοις έμπροσθεν, έπέτ ψκαμπτεν ως εις κύκλωσιν. *^ Vf"^ '.'*' Cyrus charges, and attacks the king in person. Ενθα hrj Κύρος hείσaς μη όπισθεν γενόμενος 2i κατακόφη το Έλληνικον ελανι/βι άντίος • και έμβα- \ '*! ι 5 /f 08 ANABASIS I. 8. 2&-29, ANABASIS I. 9. 1-6. 89 et t ^1, ..'t . α \ών συν τοις Ιξακοσίοις νίκα τους προ βασιλέως τεταγμένους καΧ et? φνγην έτρεφε τους εξακισχίλίονς, και άποκτεΐραι λέγεται αντος Tjj εαυτόν χειρι Άρτα- γερσην τον άρχοντα αύτων. ως δ' η τροπή eyeVcro, 25 5 διασπείρονται και οι Κνρου^εξακόσωι εΙς το 8ιώκειν ορμησαντες, πλην πάνυ ολίγοι αμφ' αυτόν κατε- λείφθησαν, σχεδόν οΐ ομοτράπεζοι καλούμενοι, συν^ τούτοις δέ ων καθορα βασιλέα καΐ το αμφ" εκείνον στίφος • καϊ εύθυς ουκ ήνεσχετο, αλλ" ειπών Ύον ΙΟαι/δρα 6 ρω ΐετο επ αυτόν και παια κατά το στέρνον καΐ τιτρώσκει δια του θώρακος, ως ψησι Κτησίας 6 Ιατρός,καΙ Ιασθαι αύτος το τραύμα φησι. Cyrus and his immediate followers are slain. ΊΙαίοντα δ' αύτον ακοντίζει τις παλτω υπο τονΖί οφθαλμον )8ιαιω9 • και cWaS^a )ϋΐαχό/χ€ΐ/οι καΐ ^ασι- 16 λει/ς και Κύρος καϊ οΐ άμφ' αυτούς υπέρ εκατέρου, οποσοι μεν των άμφΐ )8ασιλ€α άπεθνΎ)σκον Κτησίας λέγει • παρ' εκείνω γαρ ην • Κνρος δε αυτός τε άπε- θανε και οκτώ οι άριστοι των περί αύτον εκειντο επ' αντω. Άρταπάτης δ' 6 πιστστατος αύτω των σκη-28 20 τΓΤούχων λέγεται, επειΒη πεπτωκότα είδε Κύρον, κατά- ττη^ησας άπο του ίππου περιπεσείν αύτω. και οί29 ρ,εν φασι βασιλέα κελευσαί τιι^α επισφάξαι αύτον ,ί. 1 Κύρω,οΙ 8''εαιπονεπισφάξασθαι σπασάμενον τον ' άκινάκην είχε γαρ χρυσούν • και στρεπτον δ' 25 εφόρει και ψελια και ταλλα ωσπερ οι άριστοι Περ- σων • ετετίμητο γαρ ύπο Κύρου δι' ευνοιάν τε και νιστστητα. So died Cyrus, the kingliest man since Cyrus the Great. IX. Κίρος μεν ούν ούτως ετελεύτησεν, άνηρ ων 1 ΙΙερσων των μετά Κυρον τον άρχαΐον γενομένων βασιλικώτατός τε και αρχειν άξιώτατος, ως παρά πάντων ομολογείται των Κύρου 8οκούντων εν πείρα 5 γενέσθαι. Reared at court, he was as a boy modest and brave. Πρώτοι^ μεν γάρ ετι τταις ων οτ* ε'παιδευετο και 2 σύν τω ά8ελφω και σύν τοις άλλοις παισί, πάντων πάντα κράτιστος ενομίζετο. πάντες γάρ οΐ των 3 άριστων ΤΙερσων παίδες ε'πι ταις ^αοτιλεως θύραις 10 παιοεύονται • ένθα πολλην μεν σωφροσύνην κατά- μάθοιάν τις J αίσχρον δ' ού8εν ούτ άκουσαι ούτ ^^ 18εΐν εστί. θεωνται δ' οι παίδες και τιμωμένους ύπο 4 )3ασΊλεως και άκούουσι, και άλλους άτιμαζομενους • ώστε ευθύς παίδες οντες μανθάνουσιν άρχειν τε και 15 αρχεσθαι. ένθα Κύρος αι8ημονεστατος μεν πρώτον 5 των ηλικιωτων ε'δόκει εΐί^αι, τοις τε πρεσβυτεροις και των εαυτού ύπο8εεστ4ρων μάλλον πείθεσθαι, έπειτα δε φιλιππότατος και τοις ΐπποις άριστα χρησθαι • εκρινον δ' αύτον και των εΙς τον πόλεμον έργων, 20 τοξικής τε και άκοΡτίσεως^ φιλομαθεστατον εΐϊ/αι και μελέτη ρότατον. επεί δε τη ηλικία έπρεπε, και 6 φιλοθηρότατος ην και προς τά θηρία μεντοι φίλο- κιν8υνότατος. καϊ άρκτον ποτέ επιφερομενην ούκ ετρεσεν, άλλα συμπεσών κατεσπάσθη άπο του 25 Γππου, και τά μεν επαθεν, ων και τάς ωτειλάς είχε, τέλος δε κατεκανε • και τον πρώτον μεντοι βοηθη- σαντα πολλοίς μακαριστον εποίησεν. '/ ' /. 1 40 ANABASIS I. 9. 7-18. ANABASIS I. 9. 14-19. 41 ■ !!^ PI* As governor on the coast, he kept faith with friend and foe. 'Ettci U κατ€π€μφθη ύπο τον πατρός σατράττης 7 Λνδιας Τ€ και Φρυγίας της μεγάλης καΐ Καππαδο- t::7^.,^3 ^^o.'^yJp"^P^Vy^'^ BlQcaX) πόρτων απεδείχθη οΐς καθψ - K€L eh Καστωλου πεΒίορ άθροίζεσθαι, πρώτον μ€ν oeVeSetfei' αυτοί/ art π€ρΙ πλείστον ποιοΐτο, ci τω σπείσαιτο καΧ el τω σννθοίτο καΐ €ΐ τω νπόσχοιτο τι, μηΒαμως ψ«;δ€σ^αι. και γαρ ονν επίστενον μεν 8 αύτω αί πόλεις επιτρεπόμεναι, επίστενον ο ου άνδρες • και €t τις πολέμιος έγενετο, σπεισαμενον 10 Κΰρου επίστενε μη8εν αν πάρα τας σπόντας παθεΐν. τοιγαρονν επεί Ύισσαφερνει έπολεμησε, πασαι αί 9 πόλεις εκονσαι ILvpov εΐλοντο άντΙ Ύισσαφερνονς πλην Μιλτ^σιωι/ • ούτοι δε , οτι ονκ ήθελε τοΐ)ς φεν- γοντας προέσθαι ^εφοβονντο αντόν. καΐ γαρ έργω χα 15 επε^είκνχπο και ελεγεν οτι ονκ αν ποτέ προοΐτο, επει airaf φίλος αντοΐς εγενετο, ούδ' ει ετι μεν μείονς γένοιντο, €τι δέ κάκιον πράξειαν- He rewarded his friends, requited his foes, and punished wrong-doers. Φανερός δ' ην καΐ ει τις τι άγαμοι/ η κακόν ποιψπ >= σειεν αντόν, νικαν πειρώμενος • και €ύχΐ7^ δ€ τίνες wavTOV έξεφερον ως ενχοιτο τοσοντον χρόνον ζηγ { εστε νικωη καΐ τονς εν καΐ τονς κακώς ποιονντας άλεξόμενος. και γαρ ονν πλείστοι 8η αντω ένί γεη άν^ρι των εφ* ημών επεθνμησαν καΐ χρήματα και πόλεις και τα εαυτών σώματα προεσθαι. ον μεν hrjlS 25 ούδ€ τοντ αν τις εΐποι ως τοίίς κακονργονς και άδι- K0V9 cia καταγελαν, άλλα άφειΒεστατα πάντων eri- μωρεΐτο • πολλάκις δ ' ^ν ΙΒεΐν παρά τάς στειβομενας οόονς και πο8ων και χειρών και οφθαλμών στερομε- νονς άνθρώπονς- ωστ εν τη Κνρον άρχη εγενετο και ΈΧληνι και βαρβάρω μη8έν ά^ικονντι ά8εως πορενεσθαι οπη τις ηθελεν, εχοντι δ τι προχωροίη. He especially honored the brave and upright. 6 Ύονς γε μέντοι αγαθούς εις πόλεμον ώμολόγητοΐ4 8ιαφερόντως τιμάν, και πρώτον μεν ην αντω πόλε- μος προς Πισ"ίδα9 και Μνσονς • στρατενόμενος ονν και αντος εις ταύτας τάς χώρας ονς έώρα εθελοντας κιν8νν€νειν, τοντονς και άρχοντας εποίει ης κατε- 10 στρεφετο χώρας, έπειτα δέ και άλλοις 8ώροις ετίμα • ώστε φαίνεσθαι τονς μεν αγαθούς εν8αιμονεστάτονς, 15 τους 8ε κακούς 8ονλονς τούτων άζιονσθαι είναι, τοιγαρονν πολλή ην αφθονία αντω των εθελοντών κιν8ννεύειν, οπον τις οΐοιτο Κνρον αίσ^τ^σ-εσ-^αι. εΓςΐβ 16 y€ μην 8ικαιοσύιτην ει τις φανερός γένοιτο επι8εί- κννσθαι βονλόμενος, περί παντός εποιεΐτο τούτονς πλονσιωτερονς ποιεΐν των εκ τον άδικου φιλοκερ- 8ούντων. Loyalty and honest service won from him reward. Και γαρ ονν άλλα τε πολλά δικαίως αύτω δΐ€χ€ΐ-ΐ7 20 ρίζετο και στρατενματι άληθινω εχρησατο, και γάρ στρατηγοί και λοχαγοί, οι χρημάτων €νεκα προς εκείνον επλενσαν, έγνωσαν κερ8αλεώτερον eiz^ai Κύρω καλώς πειθαρχεΐν η το κατά μήνα κερ8ος. άλλα 18 μην ει τις γε τι αντω προστά^αντι καλώς νττηρετη- 25 σειεν, ον8ενι πώποτε άχάριστον εΐασε την προθνμίαν. τοιγαρονν κράτιστοι 8η νπηρέται παντός έργον Κύρω ελέχθησαν γενέσθαι, ει 8ε τίνα ορωη 8εινον όνταχ^ 42 ANABASIS I. 9. 20-24. ANABASIS I. 9. 25-29. 43 οίκοράμον €κ τον δίκαιου και κατασκ€νάζοντά re ης άρχοι χώρας καΐ προσόδους ποιονντα, oiScVa αν ττώτΓοτε άφ€ίλ€το, αλλ' act πλείω irpoaehiSov • ώστε καΐ ijSco)? inovovv καΐ θαρραλεως €κτωντο καΧ δσα 5 Ιπέπατό τις ηκιστα Κνρορ ίκρντττεν • ου γαρ φθόνων τοις φανερώς πλοντονσιν εφαίνετο, άλλα πειρωμενος χρησθαι τοις των άποκρυπτομενων χρημασι. He served his friends, and in his benefactors studied their characters and needs. Φίλονς γ€ μτ]ν δσονς ποιησαιτο και ευνονς γνοιη 20 οντάς και ικανούς κρίν€ΐ€ συνεργούς εΐναί δ τι τυγχα- ΐονοι βουλόμενος κατεργάζεσθαι, ομολογείται προς πάντων κράτιστος hrj yci/co-^at θεραπεύειν. καΐ γαρ 21 αύτο τούτο ουπερ αυτός ένεκα φίλων ωετο δεισ^αι, ως συνεργούς €χοι, και αύτος επειρατο συνεργός τοις φίλοις κράτιστος είναι τούτου δτου αισθάνοιτο εκα- 15 στον επιθυμούντα, δώρα δέ πλείστα μεν οΐμαι εις 22 γε άνηρ ελάμβανε δια πολλά - ταύτα δέ πάντων ^ μάλιστα τοΙς φίλοις διεδίδου, προς τους τρόπους εκάστου σκοπών και δτου μάλιστα ορωη εκαστον ^εόμενον. He unselfishly shared everything with them, and delighted to show them personal attention. 20 ΚαΙ δσα τψ σώματι αύτου πεμποι τις η ως είς2Ά πόλεμον η ως εΙς καλλωπισμόν, καΐ περί τούτων λέγειν αύτον εφασαν δτι το μεν εαυτού σώμα ουκ αν Ζύναιτο τούτοις πασι κοσμηθηναι, φίλους δε καλώς κεκοσμημενους μεγιστον κόσμον avSpi νομίζοι. και 24 25 το μεν τα μεγάλα νικαν τους φίλους ευ ποιουντα ου^εν θαυμαστόν, επεώη γε καΐ Βυνατώτερος ην • το δε Tjj επιμέλεια περιεΐναι των φίλων καΐ τω προθν- γ]/^ μεΐσθαι χαρίζεσθαι, ταύτα εμοιγε μάλλον 8οκεΐ αγαστά εΐι^αι. Κύρος γαρ έπεμπε βίκους οίνου ήμι-^ 8εεΐς πολλάκις οπότε πάνυ η^υν λάβοι, λέγων δτι 5 ούπω 8η πολλού χρόνου τούτου η8ίονι οΐνω επιτύχοι • τούτον ουν σοΙ επεμφε και Κείται σου τημερον τούτον εκπιείν συν οΐς μάλιστα φιλεΐς. πολλάκις δε χηνας2Ι& ημιβρώτους έπεμπε και άρτων ημίσεα και άλλα τοι- αΰτα, επιλεγειν κελεύων τον φέροντα. Τούτοις ησθη 10 Κύρος • βούλεται ουν και σε τούτων γευσασ^αι. δπου δε χιλος σπάνιος πάνυ εΐη, αύτος δε δύ^'αιτο27 παρασκευάσασθαι δια το πολλούς εχειν ύττηρετας και δια την επι/υιελειαι/, 8ιαπεμπων εκελευε τους φίλους τοις τα εαυτών σώματα άγουσιν ΐπποις ε/χ- ΐόβάλλειν τούτον τον χιλόν, ως μη πεινώντες τους έαιπού φίλους αγωσιι/. ει δε 8η ποτέ πορεύοιτο και 28 πλείστοι μελλοιεν οφεσθαι, προσκαλών τους φίλους εσπουδαιολογειτο, ως Βηλοίη ους τίμα. No man was ever more beloved. His friends were loyal even to the last. ίΐστε εγω μεν γε εζ ων ακούω ού^ενα κρίνω ύπο 20 πλειόνων πεφιλησθαχ ούτε 'ΈΧληνων ούτε βαρβάρων, τεκμήριον δε τούτου και τόδε. παρά μεν Κύρους 8ούλου δντος ουδείς άπηει προς /βασιλέα, πλην Όρόντας επεχείρησε • και ούτος 8η ον ωετο πιστόν οι είναι ταχύ αύτον ηύρε Κύρω φιλαίτερον η εαυτω • 2δπαρά δε βασιλέως πολλοί προς Κύρον άπηλθον, επειδή πολέμιοι άλλτ^λοις εγενοντο, και ούτοι μεντοι οί μάλιστα υπ* αυτού άγαπώμενοι, νομίζοντες παρά It 44 ANABASIS I. 9. 30, 31 and 10. 1-3. ANABASIS I. 10. 4-β. 45 » / *.o y 0* IP•*, ο I' Κνρω ovres αγαθοί αξιοπέρα^ αν τιμής τύγχαναν η παρά βασιλεΐ μέγα 8c τεκμηριον και το iv rfjdO TeXevT^ του βίου αντω γ€νόμ€Ρον οτι καΐ αύτος ην αγαθός καΐ Kpivuv ορθώς Ι^ννατο τους πιοττούς καΐ Scvi/ovs και β€βαίους. αποθνήσκοντος γαρ αύτου31 πάντ€ς οΐ π€ρΙ αύτον φίλοι και συντράπεζοι αποθα- νόν μαχόμενοι πλην Άριαίου ' ούτος δε τεταγμένος Ιτύγγανεν έπΙ τω ενωνυμω του ιππικού άρχων • ως δ' ησθετο Κνρον πειττωκότα, ίφυγεν έχων και το 10 στράτευμα παν ου ηγειτό> Cyrus's camp plundered. The Greek guard makes a stand. X. Έι/ταυ^α ^ Κύρου άποτέμνεται η κεφαλή και 1 η χεΙρ η ^εξιά. )8ασιλ€ν9 δε και οΐ συν αύτω ^ιώκων είσπίπτει εχς το Υίύρ^ιον στρατόπεΒον • και οί μεν μετά Άριαίον ουκετι ΐστανται, άλλα φενγουσι δια του ΐδ αύτων στρατοπ&ου άς τον σταθμον ένθεν ωρμηντο • τέτταρες δ' έλέγοντο παρασάγγαι cii/ai της όδου. )8ασιλ€νς δε και οί συν αύτω τά τε άλλα πολλά δια/χ- 2 νάζουσι, και την Φωκαίδα την Κύρου παλλακίδα την σοφην και καλην λεγομένην ειι^αι λαμβάνει, η &έ ^ 2θΜιλτ;σία η νεαπέρα ληφθείσα ύπο των άμφι βασιλέα εκφεύγει γυμνή προς των "Ελλήνων^ οί έτυχον εν τοις σκευοφόροις όπλα έχοντες και άντιταχθέντες πολλούς μεν των αρπαζόντων άπέκτειναν, οι δε και *? αντώι/ άπέθανον • ου μην έφυγαν γε, άλλα και ταυ- 25 την έσωσαν και άλλα οπόσα εντός αύτων και χρή- ματα και άνθρωποι εγένοντο πάντα έσωσαν. The king masses his troops in line. The Greeks face right about, ready for attack, but he withdraws to their right. ^Έαηαύθα ^ιέσχον αλλήλων ^βασιλεύς τε και οι 4 "Έλληνες ως τριάκοντα στάδια, οι μεν 8ιώκοντες τους καθ* αυτούς ως πάντας νικώντες, οΐ δ' αρπάζοντες ως η8η πάντες νικωντες. επεί δ' ησθοντο οι μεν 5 ^'Έλληνες οτι βασιλεύς σύν τω στρατεύματι εν τοις σκενοφοροις εΐη, ^βασιλεύς δ' αδ ηκουσε Τισσαφέρ- νους οτι οί Έλληνες νικωεν το καθ* αυτούς και εις το πρόσθβν οΐχονται Βιώκοντες, ένθα ^η /βασιλεύς μεν αθροίζει τε τους εαυτού και συντάττεται, 6 δε 1θΚλεα/3χο9 εβουλεύετο ΙΙρόξενον καλέσας, πλησιαί- τατος γαρ ην, ει πέμποιέν τινας η πάντες ιοιεν έπι το στρατόπεδο^/ άρηξοντες. εν τούτω και βασιλεύς 6 δ^λος ην προσιών πάλιν ως εδόκει όπισθεν, και οι μεν Έλληνες στραφέντες παρεσκευάζοντο ως ταύτη 15 προσιόντος και ^εξόμενοι, 6 δε /βασιλεύς ταύτη μεν ουκ ηγεν, η δε παρηλθεν έζω του ευωνύμου κέρατος ταύτη και άττηγεν, άι/αλα)βώι/ και τους εν τη μάχη προς τους Έλληνας αύτομολήσαντας και Τισσα- φέρνην και τους σύν αύτω. How Tissaphemes had charged through the Greek line. 20 Ό γαρ Τισσαφέρνης εν τη πρώτη συνόλω ουκ 7 έφυγεν, άλλα διτ^λασε παρά τοι^ ποταμον κατά τους Έλληνας πελταστάς • Βιελαύνων δε κατέκανε μεν ούδό^α, διαστάι/τες δ' οι "Έλληνες έπαιον και^ήκόν- ^^' τιζον αυτούς • Έπισθένης δε *Αμφιπολίτης ηρχε των 25 πελταστων και έλέγετο φρόνιμος γενέσθαι. 6 δ' ουν 8 Τισσαφέρνης ως μείον έχων απηλλάγη, πάλιν μεν Λ ^ ίΚ 46 ANABASIS I, lo. 9-14. ANABASIS I. lo. 15-19. 47 II ,„■:„/ ■**%V»iV^ ■ C*»1-f oifK άραστρ€φ€ΐ, €ΐς δέ το aTparoneSov άφίκόμενος το των ^Ελλήνων €Κ€Ϊ σνντνγχάνει βασιΚ^Ι^ και ομον Srj πάλιν σννταξάμενοι έπορ^νοντο. The king's flank movement a failure. His troops are routea. 'Ettci δ' ήσαν κατά το €νώννμον των Ελλήνων 9 5 Κ€ρας, iSeiaav οΐ "Έλληνες μη ττροσάγοιεν προς το κψας καΐ π€ρηττνξαντ€ς άμφοτέρωθεν αντονς κατά- KO^euav ' καΐ i80K€i αντοΐς αναπτνσσειν το κέρας καΧ ποιησασθαι όπισθεν τον ποταμόν. iv ω δβΙΟ ταύτα εβονλενοντο, καΐ 8η βασιλεύς παραμειφάμενος 10 €15 το αντο σχήμα κατέστησεν άντίαν την φάλαγγα ωσπερ το πρώτον μαχονμενος σννηει. ως δβ €ίδοι/ οί Ελλΐ7ΐ^€9 εγγύς τε οντάς καΐ παρατεταγμένους, αΖθις παιανίσαντες επησαν πολν έτι προθνμάτερον η το πρόσθεν. οί δ ' α5 βάρβαροι ουκ ε8έχοντο, άλλα ιι 15 cV πλείονος η το πρόσθεν έφευγον οι δ' έπεΒίωκον μέχρι κώμης τινός • ενταύθα δ ' έστησαν οι "Έλληνες • νπερ γαρ της κώμης γηλοφος '^ν, εφ' ου άνεστράφη-^ σαν οΐ άμφΐ βασιλέα, πεζοί μ^ν ούκέτι, των 8έ Ιπ- πεών ο λόφος ενεπλησθη, ώστε το ποιον μενον μη 20 γιγνώσκειν. καΐ το βασΐλειον σημεΐον οράν έφασαν, άετόν τίνα χρνσοννίεπι πέλτη επι ξύλου άνατεταμέ- νον. επει 8ε καΐ ενταυθ* εχώρουν οΐ "Ελληνες, λεί-ΙΖ i,iL πούσι οη και τον Κοφον οι 47Γπ€ΐς • ου μην ert αθρ&ύι αλλ' άλλοι αλλο^€ΐ^ • εφιλουτο 8 ' ό λόφος των Ιττ- 25 πέων • τέλος 8έ και πάντες απεχώρησαν. 6 ουν 14 Κλ€αρχος ουκ άνεβίβαζεν επι τον λόφον, αλλ' υπ* αντον στησας το στράτευμα πέμπει Αύκιον τον ^υρα- κόσιον και άλλον επι τον λόφον καΐ κελεύει κατώόν τας τα ύπερ του λόφου τι εστίν άπαγγεΐλαι. και 6 15 Αύκιος ηλασέ τε και ιδώϊ/ άπαννβλλβι δτι φεύγουσιν <^*--'' άϊ^ά κράτος. * drjv Ι At sunset the Greeks retire to their plundered camp. Χχε8ον 8 ' οτε ταύτα ην καΐ ήλιος ε8ύετο. ενταύθα 16 5 δ' έστησαν οΙ'Έλληνες και θέμενοι τα όπλα άνεπαύ-ν^ΐ οντο' και άμα μεν έθαύμαζον οτι ού8αμου Κύρος φαίνοιτο ούδ ' άλλος απ' αΰτου ούδβΐς παρείη • ου γαρ η8εσαν αύτον τεθνηκότα, αλλ' εΐκαζον η 8ιώκοντα οΐχεσθαι η καταληφόμενόν τι προεληλακέναι • και Π ΙΟαύτοι εβουλεύοντο ει αύτου μείναντες τα σκευοφόρα ενταύθα αγοιντο η άπίοιεν επι το στρατόπε8ον. €δο- ζεν αύτοΐς άπιή'αι • και άφικνουνται άμφι 8ορ7Γη- στον επι τάς σκηνάς. ταύτης μεν της ημέρας τούτο 18 το τέλος εγένετο. καταλαμβάνουσι 8ε των τε άλλων J, 15 χρημάτων τα 'πλείστα 8ιηρπασμένα και ει τι σιτίον η ποτον ^ν, και τάς άμαξας μεστάς αλεύρων και οίνου, άς παρεσκευάσατο Κύρος, ίνα ει ποτέ σφο8ρά το στράτευμα λάβοι βνδεια, διαδοίτ; '^^^^ "Έλλησιν — ί)σαν δ* ανται τετρακόσιαι ως ελέγοντο α^χ,α^αι — και ^0 ταύτας τότε οΐ συν βασιλεΐ 8ιηρπασαν. ώστε άδει- 19 πνοι ήσαν οι πλείστοι των Ελλήνων * ήσαν 8ε και άνάριστοι • πριν γαρ 8η καταλυσαι το στράτευμα προς άριστον /βασιλεύς εφάνη. ταύτην μεν ουν την νύκτα ούτω 8ιεγένοντο. Λ-νι. - >Ι ί 48 ANABASIS II. ι. 1^ yji, ■!< ι„τ•»•χ- »■*•■*-• Αλ-/ β»*•!*..••*» /■■«?,■• -'"λ*, -ίί"'•^• — ΙΡ f i' Λ ..?/μ. /ί %» *•1 !■% ». /"ι , . - π. } *•»'ν*- Α Tidings reach the Greeks of the death of C3mis. Ι,ΓίΙς μΑν ovv ήθροίσθη Κνρω το Έλληρικορ οτ€ 1 €πΙ τον άΒελφον ^Κρίταξίρζην €στρατ€ν€το, καΐ δσα iv Tjj άνό8ω €πράχθη καΐ (is η Ρ'οίχ^ iyeveTO καΐ ώς Κύρος iTekevrqae καΐ ώς inl το στρατόπε^ορ έλθόρ- 5 Τ€ς οΐ *Έλληρ€ς €κοίμηθησαρ οΙόμ€Ρθΐ τα πάρτα plkolp καΐ Κνρορ ζηρ, ip τω πρόσθ€Ρ λόγω Β€8ηλωταιΛ αίμα 2 8c Tjj τ}μ€ρα σνρ€λθόρτ€ς οΐ στρατηγοί εθανμαζορ otl Κύρος οντ€ άλλορ πέμποι σημαρουρτα δ τι γβη ποΐ€Ϊρ οντ€ αντος φαίροιτο. cSofci^ ovp αντοΐς σν 10 σκ€νασαμ€Ρθίς α el^op καΐ ΙζοπΚισαμένοις πρόϋραι ας το ΤΓρόσθ€Ρ €ως Κνρω σνμμ^ζ^ιαν, τβη hk cV 3 ορμΎ} ορτωρ α/χα ι^λίω αρέχοιηι ηΧθ^ TipoKkrjs ο Ύ€νθραρίας αργωρ, γ^γορως άπο Ααμαράτου του Αάκωρος, καΐ Τλονς 6 Ύαμώ, οίίτοί ekeyop otl Κυ- 15 ρος μ€Ρ τ€θρηκ€Ρ, ΆριαΓος δέ π€φ€νγώς ip τω σταθ- μω €117 μ€τα τωρ αλλωρ βαρβάρωρ oOep τ^ frpore• 4 Α-Λ**- ραία ωρμηρτο, καΐ λ€γοι οτι ταντηρ μ€Ρ τηρ ημεραρ ^^ * ^ ^π€ρψ€Ρθΐ€ν αυτούς ct μ€λ\οί€ρ 7Jk€lp, Ty δέ aWrj ατΓΐέραι φαίη έπΙ Ίωρίας, oOepwep ^λθ€. They offer to make Ariaeus king. Slaughter of the baggage-cattle. 20 Ταντα άκονσαντ€ς oi στρατηγοί καΐ ol aWoL *Ελ- 4 ληρ€ς τΓνρθαρ6μ€Ρ0ΐ βαρέως €φ€ρον. Κλέαρχος he τάδ€ cIttci/. Άλλ' ωφ€\€ μ€Ρ Κύρος ζηρ • cttcI δέ Τ€Τ€\€ύτηκ€Ρ, άπαγγ€λλ€Τ€ *Αριαίω otl ημ€Ϊς ρικωμέρ Τ€ βασιΚέα καΧ ως ορατ€ ουδείς crt ημίρ μάχεται, καΧ 25 ct μη νμ€Ϊς ηλθ€Τ€, €πορ€νόμ€θα άρ im βασι\4α. ANABASIS Π. ι. 5-8. 49 Ιπαγγ€\\6μ€θα hk Άριαίω, έάρ €ρθά8ε ίλθη, εις τον θρόρορ TOP βασί\€ΐορ καθιείρ αντόρ • τωρ γαρ μάχτ} ρικώρτωρ καΧ το άρχειρ εστί. ταύτα είπώρ άποστελ- 5 λει TOifg αγγέλους καΐ συρ αύτοΐς Χειρίσοφον τον 6 Αάκωνα και Μενωρα top θετταλόρ • και γαρ αύτος Μερωρ εβούλετο • ηρ γαρ φίλος και ζενος Άριαιου. οι μερ ωχορτο, Κλέαρχος 8ε περιεμερε • το 8έ στρά- 6 τευμα επορίζετο σιτορ δπως εΒύνατο εκ των υποζυ- γίων κότΓΤοντες τους βους και όνους ί ζύλοις δέ 10 εχρωντο μικρόν προϊόντες άπο ττ^ς φαλαγγος ου η μάχη εγεν€Γο τοις τε οίστοΐς πολλοΓς ουσιν, ους ήνάγκαζον οΐ "ΈΧληνες εκβαλλειν τους αυτομολούν- τας παρά βασιλέως, και τοις γερροις και ταΐς άσπίσι τάΐς ^υλ«/αις ταις Αίγυπτίαις • ττολλαΐ δβ 15 και πελται και ά /jia^ai ήσαν φερεσθαι έρημοι ' οΐς πάσι χρώμενοι κρεα εφοντες ησθιον εκείνην την ημέραν. The king demands the unconditional surrender of the Greeks. Και η8η τε ην περί πληθουσαν άγοράν και ερχον- 7 ται παρά /βασιλέως και Τισσαφέρνους κηpυκεςyOι / 20 μεν άλλοι βάρβαροι, ην δ ' αυτών ΦαλΓι^ος εις "Ελλτ^ϊ', ος ετύγχανε παρά Ύισσαφερνει ων καΐ εντίμως έχων • και γάρ προσεποιεΐτο επιστήμων εΤι/αι των άμφι τάζεις τε καΐ οπλομαχίαν. ούτοι δε προσελθόντες 8 και καλεσαντες τους των 'Ελλήνων άρχοντας λεγου- 25 σιν ΟΤΙ βασιλεύς κελεύει τους '^Έ,λληνας, επει νικών τυγχάνει και Κυρον άπεκτονε, παράγοντας τα δπλα ιόντας επί τάς βασιλέως θύρας ενρίσκεσθαι άν τι 8ύνωνται άγαμοι/. II 50 ANABASIS Π. ι. 9-12, The Greeks make answer. Phalinus replies to Proxenus. Ταίτα μ€ν elnov ol βασιΚέως κήρυκες • οί δβ 9 'Έλλτ7ϊ'€ς βαρέως μ€Ρ ηκονσαν, δμως 8e Κλέαρχος τοσοΐττορ €Ϊπ€Ρ ση ου των νικώντων €νη τα όπλα παρα^ιΒόναι • αλλ', έφη, ύμ€Ϊς μέν, ω άνδρες στρα- δτηγοί, τούτοις αποκρίνασθε ο τι καλλιστον τε και άριστον έχετξ • έγώ he αντίκα ηζω. Ικαλεσε yap τις αυτόν των ύττηρετών, όπως Sot τα lepa έζ^ρψ μένα • €τυχ€ γαρ θυόμενος, ένθα hrj άπεκρίνατο 10 Κλεάνωρ 6 Αρκάς πρεσβύτατος ων δτι προσθεν αν Ιύάποθάνοΐ€ν η τα όπλα παραποίησαν • ] ΙΙρόξενος δέ 6 Θηβαίος, Άλλ' έγώ, έφη, ω Φαλιι/€, θαυμάζω πότερα ως κρατών )8ασ'4λ€ν9 atT€t τα οττλα η ως δια φιλίαν δώρα. €1 μεν γάρ ως κρατών, τι δβί αυτόν αΐτεΐν καΐ ου λαβείν ελθόντα ; ει δε πείχτας βούλεταχ 15 λαβείν, λεγέτω τι έσται τοις στρατιώταις έάν αύτω ταύτα χαρίσωνται. προς ταύτα Φαλΐνος είπε, Βασι-Ι1 λενς νικάν ηγείται, έπει Κυρον άπέκτονε. τις γάρ αντω έστιν δστις της άρχης αντιποιείται; νομίζει δε #cat υμάς εαυτού έΙναι, έχων έν μέση τη εαυτού χω/>α 20 #cat ποταμών έντος αδιάβατων, και πλήθος ανθρώπων έφ^ υμάς δυνάμενος άγαγείν όσον ονδ' ει παρέχοι ύμΐν δνϊ/αισ^ε άϊ^ άποκτεΐναι, Theopompus threatens, and Phalinus twits him. Conciliatory answers. Μετά τούτον Βεόπομπος * Αθηναίος εΐπεν, *ί1 Φα- 12 λΐνε, νυν, ώς συ οράς, ημίν ουΖεν έστιν άγαμοι/ άλλο 25 εί μη όπλα και άρετη. όπλα μεν ουν έχοντες οΙά- μέθα αν και τη άρετη χρησθαι, παράγοντες δ' αν ταίϊτα καΐ των σωμάτων στερηθηναι. μη ουν οίου ANABASIS π. ι. 13-ia 51 τα μόνα αγαθά ημϊν oma ύμΐν παραοώσειν, άλλα συν τούτοις και περί των υμετέρων αγαθών μάχου- μεθα^ άκουσας δε ταύτα 6 Φαλΐνος έγέλασε και 13 εΐπεϊ', Άλλα φιλοσοφώ μεν έοικας, ω νεανίσκε, και 5 λέγεις ουκ αχάριστα • ΐσθι μέντοι ανόητος ων, ει οιει την ύμετέραν άρετην περιγενέσθαι αν της ^βασιλέως δυνάμεως, άλλους δε τΐϊ^ας έφασαν λέγειν ύπομαΊ4 λακιζομένους ώς και Κύρω πιστοί έγένοντο και βα- σιλεΐ αν πολλού άξιοι γένοιντο ει βούλοιτο φίλος 10 γενέσθαι • καΧ είτε άλλο τι θέλοι χρησθαι εΐτ επ' Αιγι^τΓΤΟι^ στρατενειν, συγκαταστρέφαιντ αν αύτω, Clearchus appeals to Phalinus to advise them what to do. *Ev τούτω Κλέαρχος ηκε, και ηρώτησεν ει τβηνά άποκεκριμένοι εΐει^.. Φαλίι^ος δε ύπολαβών ειπεν, Ούτοι μέν, ω Κλέαρχε, άλλος άλλα λέγει • συ δ ' Ι^ήμΐν εΙπέ τι λέγεις. 6 δ' εΐπεν, 'Εγώ σε, ω ΦαλΓι/ε,ΐ6 άσ μένος έώρακα, οΧμαι δε καΧ οι άλλοι πάντες • σύ τε γάρ ^Έλλην εΐ και ημείς τοσούτοι οντες δσους συ οράς • έν τοιούτοις δε οντες πράγμασι συμβουλευότ μεθά σόι τι χρη ποιεΐν περί ων λέγεις, σύ ουν προς Π 2{)θεών συμβούλευσον ημΐν δ τι σοι οοκεΐ κάλλιστον καΧ άριστον έΙναι, και δ σοι τιμήν οΐσει εις τον έπειτα χρόνον άεΐ λεγόμεγον, οτι Φαλΐνος ποτέ πεμ- φθέίς παρά /βασιλέως κελενσωι^ τους ''Έλληνας τά δπλα παρα^ούναι συμβουλευομένοις συνεβούλευσεν 25 αυτοί? τάδε. οισ^α δε οτι ανάγκη λεγεσ^αι έν τη 'Ελλάδι ά αν συμβουλεύσης. δ δε Κλέαρχος ταύτα J8 ύπηγετο βουλόμενος κα,Ι αύτον τον παρά /βασιλέως πρεσβεύοντα συμβουλενσαι μη παρα^ούναι τά δπλα, Ν 52 ANABASIS II. I. 19-23. δπως eveXwiSeq μαλλορ eXev ol "Ελλτ^ι/ες. Φαλίι/ος 8c ύτΓοστρβ/ιας παρά την ^6ζαν αυτόν etwev, Εγω, €t 19 ^€1/ τώι^ μυρίων έλπιΒων μία τΐ9 ΰ/χΓΐ' ioTL σωθηναι 7Γθλ€μουντας βασι\€Ϊ, συμβουλεύω μη παρα8ί8όναυ 5 τα δπλα • ct δε rot μηΒεμία σωτηρίας ίστίν βλπίς άκοντος βασιλέως, συμβουλεύω σωζεσθαι ύμΐν οπίβ δΐίΐ/ατόι/. The Greeks refuse fo give up their arms. Phalinus proposes a truce. Κλέαρχος 8e προς ταύτα etwev, Άλλα ταντα μ€ν20 8η συ λέγεις • παρ* ημών δέ απάγγελλε τάδε οτι 10 ημείς οΐόμεθα, εΐ μεν δεοι βασιλεΐ φίλους εΐναι, πλεί- ονος αν αζιοι είναι φίλοι έχοντες τα δπλα η παρά- γοντες αλλω, εΐ δε δεοι πολεμεΐν, άμεινον αν πολεμεΐν εχοιηες τα δπλα η άλλω παράγοντες* 6 δε Φαλΐνος21 είπε, Ταύτα μεν 8η άπαγγελουμεν • άλλα και τάδε 15 ύμΐν εΙπεΐν εκελεχχτε βασιλεύς, δτι μενουσι μεν ύμΐν αύτου σπον^αΐ είησαν, προϊούσι δε και απιουσι πόλ- εμος* είπατε ουν καΧ περί τούτου πότερα μενεΐτε καΐ σπονΒαί είσιν η ως πολέμου δντος παρ* ύμων άπαγγελώ. Κλέαρχος δ' ελεξεν, * Απάγγελλε τοίνυν^ 20ical περΧ τούτου δτι καΧ ημΐν ταύτα δοκει άπερ και ^ασιλει. Τι ουν ταύτα εστίν ; εφη δ Φαλιι^ος. άπε- κρίνατο Κλέαρχος, *Ηι/ μεν μενωμεν, σπονΒαι, απι- ουσι δε και προϊούσι πόλεμος, 6 δε πάλιν ήρώτησε,23 Σποι/δάς 17 ^όλεμον άπαγγελώ ; Κλέαρχος δε ταύτα 25 πάλί.ΐ' άπεκρίνατο, %πονΒαι μεν μενουσιν, άπιούσι δε καΐ προϊούσι πόλεμος, δ τι δε ποιησοι ού 8ιεσψ μηνε. ANABASIS II. 2. 1^. 53 Ariaeus declines the offer of the Greeks, but invites them to join him. II. Φαλΐνος μεν Srj ωχετο και οι συν αύτω, οι δε 1 παρά Άριαιου ηκον ϋροκλης καΧ Χειρίσοφος • Με- νων δε αντοί έμενε παρά Άριαιω • ούτοι δε ελεγον δτι πολλούς φαίη *Αριαΐος εΐ^'αι Πέρσας εαυτού βελ- 5 τιους, οι?9 ούκ αν άι/ασχεσ^αι αύτου )8ασιλειίοι/τος • αλλ* ει βούλεσθε ση;ναπιή'αι, ηκειν η8η κελεύει της νυκτός, εΐ δε μη, αύριον πρω άπιό/αι φησίν. ό δε 2 Κλέαρχος είπε^, Άλλ' ούτω χρη ποιεΐν • εάν μεν ηκωμεν, ωσπερ λέγετε • ει δε μη, πράττετε οποίον 10 αν τι ύμΐν οΐησθε μάλιστα συμφερειν. δ τι δε ποιτ^- σοι ουδέ τούτοις είπε. Conference of the Greeks. The invitation accepted. Clearchus in command. Μετά ταύτα ΐ7δτ7 ΐ7λίοι; 8ύνοντος συγκαλεσας τους 3 στρατηγούς και λοχαγούς ελεζε τοιάΒε. Έρ,οι, ω άνδρες, θυομενω ιά/αι επι /βασιλέα ούκ εγίγνετο τά 15 ιερά. και εΐκότως άρα ούκ εγίγνετο • ως γαρ εγώ νυν πυνθάνομαι, εν μέσω ημών και /δασιλεως ο Τίγρης ποταμός εστί ναυσίπορος, ον ούκ αν Βυναί- μεθα άνευ πλοίων 8ιαβηναχ * πλοία δε ημείς ούκ ετχομεν. ού μεν 8η αυτού γε μένειν οΙόν τε • τά γάρ 20 επιτήδεια ούκ εστίν εχειν • ίει^αι δε παρά τους Κύρου φίλους πάνυ καλά ημΐν τά Ιερά ην. ωδε ουν χρη 4 ποιείΓ • άπιόΐ'τας Βειπνεΐν δ τι τις έχει - επειδάϊ^ δε σημηνη τΩ κερατι ως άι^απαύεσ^αι, συσκευάζεσθε • επειΒάν δε το δεύτερον, άνατίθεσθε επι τά υποζύγια • 25 cVi δε τω τρίτω επεσθε τω ηγουμένω, τά μεν υποζύ- για έχοντες προς του ποταμού, τά δε όπλα εςω. ταύτ άκούσαντες οι στρατηγοί και λοχαγοί άττηλ- 5 54 ANABASIS U. 2. ft-10. θον καΐ iwoLovp οντω. καΐ το λοιπόν 6 μ€Ρ ηρχ^ν, ύΐ 8e iweiOopTo, ονχ ίλόμενοί, άλλα 6ρώντ€ς ση μόνος ίφρόν€ΐ οΓα 8ct τον άρχοντα, οί δ' άλλοι άπαροί ήσαν. Γάριθμος της oSov ην ^λθον έξ Έψε- 6 5 σου της ^Ιωνίας μ^χρι της μάχης σταθμοί τρεις καΐ €ν€νηκοντα, παρασάγγαι τΓ€ντ€ καΐ τριάκοντα και πεντακόσιοι, στά8ιοι πεντήκοντα και εξακισχίλιοι και μύριοι • άπο δε της μάχης έλεγοντο cli^at εΙς Βα/8υλώι/α στά^ιοι έξηκοντα και τριακόσιοι. I- First desertion. The Oreeks join Ariaeus. Solemn covenant. 10 ^Εντεύθεν, επεί σκότος εγενετο, Μιλτοκνθης μεν 6 7 %ραξ έχων τους τε ίτΓττεας τους μεθ* εαυτού εις τετταράκοντα καΐ των πεζών θρακών ως τριακόσιους ηντομόλησε προς /8ασιλ€α. Κλέαρχος δε τοις άλλοις 8 ηγεΐτο κατά τα παρηγγελμενα, οΐ δ' εΐποντο- καΐ U άφικνουνται εΙς τον πρώτον σταθμον παρ' Άριαΐον και την εκείνου στρατιάν άμφι μεσας νύκτας • και εν τάξει θεμενοι τα όπλα συνηλθον οί στρατηγοί καΧ λοχαγοί των 'Ελλήνων παρ' Άριαΐον * και ωμοσαν οΐ τ€ ""Έλληνες και 6 Άριαΐος και των συν αύτω οι 20κράτιστοι μήτε προ8ώσειν αλλήλους σύμμαχοι τε εσεσθαι • οί δέ βάρβαροι προσώμοσαν και ηγησε- σθαι άδολως. ταΰτα δ ' ωμοσαν, σφάξαντες ταυρον 9 και κάπρον και κριον εΙς ασπίδα, οί μεν ''Έλληνες βάπτοντες ξίφος, οί δέ βάρβαροι λόγχην. Plan of retreat. 25 *Ε7Γ€ΐ δε τα πιστά εγένετο, Απεν ό Κλέαρχος, *AyclO 8η, ω Άριαΐε, επείπερ 6 αυτός ύμΐν στόλος εστί και ημίν, είπε τίνα γνώμην έχεις περί της πορείας, πότετ ANABASIS II. 2. 11-15. 55 ρον άπιμεν ηνπερ ηλθομεν η αλλην τινά εννενοηκέ- ϊ'αι δοκεις obov κρείττω. ό δ ' εΐπεν, ^Ην μίν ηλθομεν 11 άτΓΐόΐ'τες τται^ελώς αν υπο λιμού άπολοίμεθα • υπάρ- χει γαρ νυν ημΐν ού8εν των επιτηδείων, επτακαί&εκα 5 yap σταθμών των εγγυτάτω ουδέ δεΰρο Ιόντες εκ της χώρας ού8έν εΐχομεν λαμβάνειν • ένθα δε τι ην, ημείς 8ιαπορευόμενοι κατε8απανησαμεν. νυν δ' επινοουμεν πορεύεσθαι μακροτεραν μεν, των δ' επι- τη8είων ουκ άπορησομεν. πορευτεον δ* ημΙν τούςΐ2 10 πρώτους σταθμούς ως άν 8υνώμεθα μακρότατους, ίνα ως πλείστον άποσπάσωμεν του βασιλικού στρατεύ- ματος • ην γαρ άπαξ δυο η τριών ημερών 68ον από- σχωμεν, ούκετι μη 8ύνηται βασιλεύς ήμας καταλα- βεΐν. ολίγω μεν γαρ στρατεύματι ου τολμήσει εψe 15 πεσθαι • πολύι^ δ ' έχωι^ στόλοι/ ου 8υνησεται ταχέως πορεύεσθαι • ίσως 8ε και τών επιτη8είων (ΤΤΓαι/ιεΙ. ταύτην, εφη, την γνώμην €χω εγωγε. The retreat begins. Traces of the king's army. ^Ηϊ^ δε αύτη η στρατηγία ού8έν άλλο δυι/α^ιειη7 17 13 άπο8ράναι η άποφυγεΐν • η δε τύχη εστρατηγησε 20κάλλιον. επεΙ γαρ ήμερα έγενετο, επορ&ίοντο εν δε^ια έχοντες τον ηλιον, λογιζόμενοι ηξειν άμα ηλίω 8ύνοντι εις κώμας της Βα/βυλωϊ^ιας χώρας • και τούτο μεν ουκ έφξύσθησαν. έτι δέ άμφΐ 8είλην ε8οξαν14 πολεμίους όράν ίππεας • καΧ τών τε 'Ελλήνων οί μη 25 ετυχον εν ταΐς τάξεσιν δντες εις τάς τάξεις εθεον, και 'Αριαιος, ετύγχανε γαρ έφ' αμάξης πορευόμενος διότι ετετροπο, καταβάς εθωρακίζετο και οι συν αύτω. εν ω δέ ώπλιζοκτο ηκον λέγοντες οι προπεμΊ5 56 ANABASIS Π. a. 16-20. ι It f / φθ€ντ€ς σκοποί otl ovk Ιππ€Ϊς elep αλλ' υποζύγια ν€μοίτο. καΐ €νθνς έγνωσαν πάντες otl €γγνς που €στρατοπ€^€ύ€το βασίλεύς • καΐ γαρ καπνός €φαίν€το iv κώμαχς ου πρόσω. First encampment. The enemy terrified, δ Κλ€αρχος δέ έπΙ μ€ν τοίίς πολεμίους ουκ ^γεν • 16 ^δ« γαρ καΐ απειρηκότας τους στρατιωτας καΧ άσι- τους όντας * rjhri 8c καΧ οψέ riv • ου μέντοι ou8e άπε- κλίί^ε, φυλαττόμενος μη ^οκοίη φεύγειν, αλλ' ευθύοτ- ρον άγων α/χα τω ι^^ίω ^υομενω εΙς τας έγγυτάτω ΐοκώμας τους πρώτους ίχων κατεσκηνωσεν, ίξ ων Βιηρπαστο ύπο του βασιΚικου στρατεύματος καΐ αυτά τα άπο των οΙκιων ξύλα. οι μεν ουν πρώτοι 17 όμως τρόπω tlvl εστρατοπεΖεύσαντο, οΐ 8c ύστεροι σκοταΐοι προσιόντες ως ετύγχανον έκαστοι ηυλίζον 15 το, και κραυγην πολλην εποίουν καλούντες αλλή- λους, ώστε καΐ τους πολεμίους άκούειν • ώστε οΐ μεν εγγύτατα των πολεμίων και εφυγον εκ των σκηνών μάτων. ^ηλον 8ε τούτο Ty ύστεραία εγενετο • ούτε 18 γαρ ύποζύγιον er' ού^έν εφάνη ούτε στρατόπε8ον 20 ούτε καπνός ού^αμου πλησίον. εξεπλάγη δβ, ως εοικε, και βασιλεύς τη εφό8ω του στρατεύματος. ε8ηλωσε 8ε τούτο οΐς τη υστεραίΚ έπραττε. Panic in the Greek camp. ΙΙροϊουστ79 μεντοι της νυκτός ταύτης και τοις 19 'Ελλτ^σι φόβος εμπίπτει, καΐ θόρυβος καΧ 8ουπος ^ν 2^ οίον εικός φόβου εμπεσόντος γίγνεσθαι. ΚλέαρχοςίίΟ Sc Ύολμί^ην 'Ηλείοι/, όν ετύγχανεν έχων παρ* βαντω κήρυκα άριστον των τότε, άνειπεΐν εκελευσε σιγην ANABASIS II. 2. 21 and 3. 1-δ. 57 κηρύζαντα^ οτι προαγορεύουσιν οι άρχοντες, ος αν τον άφεντα τον ονον εις τα όπλα μηνύση, ότι ληφεται μισθον ταλαντον. επεί 8ε ταύτα εκηρύχθη, €γνωσαν21 οι στρατιώται οτι κενός 6 φόβος εΐη και οι άρχοντες ΰσώοι. άμα 8ε όρθρω παρηγγειλεν 6 Κλέαρχος εις τάξιν τα όπλα τίθεσθαι τους "ΈΧληνας ηπερ είχον στε ην η μάχη. ^ Heralds from the king propose a truce. ^ m. *0 δε δ"^ έγραφα οτι βασιλεύς εξεπλάγη τη 1 εφό8ψ, τωδε 8ηλον '^ν. τη μεν γαρ πρόσθεν ήμερα 10 πέμπων τα όπλα παραδιδόι^αι εκελευε, τότε δε άμα ηλιω άνατελλοντι κήρυκας επεμφε περί σπον8ων. οι 8* επεί ηλθον προς τους προφύλακας, εζητουν 2 τους άρχοντας. ε'πει,δΐ7 ^^ άτπ^γγελλοί' οι προφυ- λακές, Κλέαρχος τυχών τότε τάς τάξεις επίσκοπων 15 εΓττε τοΓς προφύλαξι κελεύειν τους κήρυκας περιμε- ι νειν άχρι αν σχολάση. επει δε κατέστησε το στρά- 3 ^ ^ τευμα ώστε καλώς εχειν όρασθαι πάντη φάλαγγα πυκνήν, έκτος τών όπλων δε /ϋΐτ/δό'α καταφανή είναι, εκάλεσε τους αγγέλους, και αντό? τε προήλθε τους 20 τε εύοπλοτάτους έχων καΐ ευει8εστάτους τών αύτου στρατιωτών και τοις αλλοΐ9 στρατηγοΐς ταύτα εφρα- σεν. επει δε ην προς τοις άγγέλοις, άνηρώτα τι 4 βούλοιντο. οι 8* ελεγον ότι περί σπον8ών ηκοιεν άν8ρες οΐτινες Ικανοί έσονται τά τε παρά /βασιλέως 25 τοις ΈΧλησιν απαγγείλαι καΧ τά παρά τών 'Ελλήνων )8ασιλεΓ. If the truce is made, the Greeks shall have supplies. *0 δε άπεκρίνατο. Απαγγέλλετε τοίνυν αύτω ότι 5 Ρ'άχης 8εΐ πρώτον άριστον γαρ ουκ έστιν ούδ' 6 58 ANABASIS Π. 3. β-ΙΛ ANABASIS U. 3. U-ia 59 τολμησωρ π€ρΙ σπορΒων Xiyeiv τοΐς "Ελλησι μη πορίσας άριστον, ταντα άκονσαντ€ς οί ayyekoL 6 άττήλανρον, και ηκορ ταχύ' ω καΐ ^λορ ηρ οτι cyyii? που βασιλ€νς ηρ η άλλος τις ω έττετετακτο h ταντα πράττ€ΐρ • ίλ^γορ 8e on €ΐκ6τα hoKolev λ€γ€ΐρ ^ασιλει, και ηκοΐ€Ρ ηγ€μάρας €χορτ€ς οΐ αυτούς, iap στΓΟΡ^αΙ γερωρται, αξουσιρ €ρΘ€ρ ίξουσι τα επιτήδεια. 6 δέ ηρώτα el αύτοΐς τοις aphpdai σπ€ρΒοιτο τοις 7 Ιονσι καΐ άπιουσιρ, η καΐ τοις άλλοις ίσοιρτο σπόρ- ιο δαι. οί Sc, "Απασιρ, ίφασαρ, μέχρι αρ ^ασιλβι τα παρ* υμών 8ιαγγ€λθη. The truce ia concluded, and the Greeks follow their guides. 'EttcI Sc ταύτα €Ϊπορ, μεταστησάμξρος αυτούς 6 8 Κλέαρχος ίβουλεύετο • και ihoKei τάς σπορΒας ποι- €Ϊσθαιταχύ Τ€ και καθ* ησυχίαρ έλθεΐρ τ€ έπι τα 15 €πιτη^€ΐα και λαβειρ. 6 δε Κλέαρχος εΐττε, Αοκεΐ 9 μ€Ρ κάμοι ταύτα • ου μερτοι ταχύ γε άπαγγελώ, άλλα διατρίψω εστ* αρ οκρησωσιρ οί άγγελοι μη άπο8όξη ημιρ τάς σποριάς ποιησασθαι • οΧμαί γε μέρτοι, €ψη, και τοις ημετέροις στρατιωταις top αυτοί/ φόβορ 20 παρέσεσθαι. ε'πεί δε εδόκει καιρός εΐι/αι, άτπ^γγελ- λεΐ' δτι σπενδοιτο, καΧ €νθυς ΐ7γεΙσ^α4 Ικέλενε προς τάπιττ^'δεια. καΧ οί μ€Ρ ηγουρτο, Κλέαρχος μερτοιΙΟ €πορ€ύ€Τθ τας μερ σποριάς ποιησάμερος, το δε στρά- Τ€υμα έχωρ έρ τάζει, και αύτος ωπισθοφυλάκει. και 26 ενετνγχαι/οι/ τάφροις και αύλωσιρ ύΒατος πληρεσιρ ως μη ^ύρασθαι Βιαβαίρειρ άρευ γεφυρωρ • άλλ' ετΓοιουκΓΟ εκ τωρ φοιρίκωρ οί ησαρ εκπεπτωκότες, τους δε icat έξέκοτττορ. Clearchus a vigorous commander. He suspects the king. Και ερταυθα ηρ Κλέαρχορ καταμαθειρ ως επεστά^ Ϊ1 τει, ερ μερ τη αριστερά χειρι το δόρυ εχωι^, ερ δε τη δε^ια βακτηρίαρ • καΧ ει τις αύτω 8οκοίη τωρ προς τούτο τεταγμέρωρ βλακεύειρ^ εκλεγόμερος top επιτη- 5 δειοι/ έπαισερ άρ, καΐ άμα αντος προσελάμβαρερ εις TOP πηλορ εμβαίρωρ • ώστε πάσιρ αίσχύρηρ ειραι μη ου συσπουΒάζείρ. και ετάχθησαρ προς αύτο οί 12 εις τριάκορτα ετηγεγορστες - επει δε καΧ Κλέαρχορ ■ εώρωρ σπουΒάζορτα, προσελάμβαρορ και οί πρεσβύ- 10 τεροι. πολύ δε μάλλορ 6 Κλέαρχος έσπευ^ερ, ύπο-13 πτεύωρ μη άει ούτω πλήρεις έΐραι τάς τάφρους ύδα- τος • ου γαρ ηρ ωρα οία τό πε8ίορ άρ8ειρ * άλλ' ιρα i η8η πολλά προφαίροιτο τοις ''ΈΧλησι 8ειρά εΙς τηρ ^ r πορειαρ, τούτου έρεκα βασιλέα υπώπτευερ επΙ το 1δ πε8ίορ το ύδωρ άφεικέναι, / Ample supplies secured. ^ Ιίορευόμεροι δε άφίκορτο εις κώμας δθερ άττεδει^ αι/ 14. οί ηγεμόρες λαμβάρειρ τά επιτήδεια, ερηρ δε σΐτος ΤΓολυς και οιρος φοιρίκωρ και όζος έφητορ άπο τωρ αύτωρ. αι;ται δε αί βάλαροι τωρ φοιρίκωρ οΐας μερ 15 20 ερ τοις Ελλησιρ έστιρ 18εΐρ τοις οικέταις άπέκειρτο, αί δε τοις δεσπόταις άποκείμεραι ησαρ άπόλεκτοι, ^αυ/ιάσιαι του κάλλους και μεγέθους, η δε όφις ήλεκτρου ουδει/ 8ιέφ€βε • τάς δε τιι^ας ξηραίρορτες τραγηματα άπετίθεσαρ. και ηρ και παρά πότορ ή8ύ 26μέρ, κεφαλαλγες δε. ερταυθα καΧ top εγκέφαλορίβ του φοίρικος πρωτορ εφαγορ οί στρατιωται, καΐ οί ΤΓολλοΙ έθαύμασαρ τό τε είδος και τηρ 18ιότητα της ("*> »"* :i 60 ANABASIS U. 3. 17-20. ηΒονης. Tjv 8e σφόδρα καΐ τοντο Κ€φαλαλγ€ς. 6 8c φοίνιξ oBev €ξαφεθ€ίη 6 €γκ€φαλος όλος avaivero. Conference with Tissaphemes. Έι/ταΰ^α €μ€ΐναν ημέρας rpeis • /cat πάρα μεγάλου 17 βασιλέως ηκ€ Τισσαφέρνης και 6 της βασιλέως ^γυναικός άΒελφος και άλλοι Πφσ-αι τρεις • δονλοι δέ πολλοί eiwovTO. iwei δέ άττηντησαν αύτοίς οι των ^ΈΧληνων στρατηγοί, ίλεγε πρώτος Τισσαφέρνης Βι ίρμηνέως τοιάδβ. 'Εγώ, ω άνδρες "Έλληνες, γείτων 18 οίκω Tjj Ελλαοι, και επει υμάς ειοον εις πολλά και χς^ αμήχανα πεπτωκότας, εύρημα εποιησάμην ει πως 8υναίμην παρά βασιλέως αίττ^σασ^αι 8ουναι εμοι άποσώσαι υμάς εις την Ελλάδα, οΐμαι γάρ αν ουκ άχαρίστως μοι έχειν ούτε προς υμών ούτε προς της πάσης 'Ελλάδος, ταντα Βε γνους ητούμην /8ασιλ€α, 19 15 λέγων αΰτω δτι δικαίως αν μοι χαρίζοιτο, οτι αύτω Κυρόν τε επιστρατεύοντα πρώτος tJtT^^^** '^^^ ySoiy- ^ctaj/ έχων άμα τη αγγελία άφικόμην, και μόνος τών κατά τους Έλληνας τεταγμένων ουκ εφυγον, ti - άλλα διτ^λασ-α και συνέμ^ξα ^αετιλει εν τω υμετέρω 20 στρατοπέ^ω, ένθα ^βασιλεύς άφίκετο έπεΙ Κυρον άπέ- κτεινε, και τους συν Κύρω βαρβάρους ε8ίωξα συν τοΐσ8ε τοις παρουσι νυν μετ εμού, οΐπερ αύτω είσι πιστότατοι. Why the Greeks undertook the expedition. Now they would return home. Και περί μεν τούτων ύπέσχετό μοι βουλεύσεσθαι • όο 25 ερέσθαι δε με υμάς εκέλευεν ελ^όι/τα τίνος ένεκεν εστρατεύσατε cV αυτόν. και συμβουλεύω ύμΐν μετρίως άποκρίνασθαι, ίνα μοι εύπρακτότερον η εάν ANABASIS II. 3-21-26. 61 Ι τι διίι/ω/χαί, άγαθον ύμΐν παρ* αυτού Βιαπράξασθαι. προς ταύτα μεταστάντες οι Έλληνες εβουλεύοντο • 21 και άπεκρίναντο, Κλέαρχος δ ' έλεγεν • *H/x€t9 ούτε συνηλθομεν ως βασιλεΐ πολεμησοντες ούτε επορευότ 5 μέθα έπΙ ^βασιλέα, άλλα πολλά? προφάσεις Κύρος ^ύρισκεν, ως και συ €5 οΐσθα, ίνα ύμας τε άπαρα- σκεύους λάβοι και ημάς ενθάΒε μγάγοι. επει μέντοι92 η8η αύτον εωρώμεν εν Βεινω οντά, ησχύνθημεν και θεούς και ανθρώπους προΒούναι αυτόν, εν τω πρό- Ι^σθεν χρόνω παρέχοντες ημάς αυτούς ευ ποιεΐν. επεΐ23 δέ Κύρος τέθνηκεν, ούτε )8ασ-ιλ€ΐ άντιποιούμεθα της άρχης ούτ εστίν δτου ένεκα βουλοίμεθα αν την ^βασιλέως χώραν κακώς ποιεΐν, οιίδ' αύτον άποκτεΐ- ϊ/αι αν εθέλοιμεν • πορευοίμεθα δ ' αν οΐκα^ε, εΐ τις 15 ημάς μη λυποίη * ά^ικούντα μέντοι πειρασόμεθα συν τοις θεοΐς ά^υινί^ασ^αι. εάν μέντοι τις ημάς και ευ ποιών ύπάρχη, και τούτου εις γε διίϊ/α/ϋΐί,ι^ ούχ ηττη- σόμεθα ευ ποιούντες. The king consents. Compact with Tissaphemes. Ό ^€1^ ούτως εΐπεν • άκουσας 8έ 6 Τισσαφέρνης, 24 20 Ταύτα, έφη, εγώ άπαγγελώ /δασιλεΓ και ύμΐν πάλιν τα παρ* εκείνου • μέχρι δ * αν εγώ ηκω αί σποι^δαι μενόντων • άγοράν δέ ημείς παρέξομεν. και εις μεν 25 την ύστεραίαν ούχ ηκεν • ωσθ* οι ΈΧληνες εφρόν- τιζον • τη δέ τρίτη ηκων έλεγεν δτι διαπεπραγμένος 2δηκοι παρά ^βασιλόος δο^'^ι^αι αΰτω σωζειν τους Έλληνας, καίπερ πολλών άντιλεγόντων ως ούκ άζιον ειη )8ασ•ι.λ€ΐ άφεΐναι τους εφ* εαυτόν στρατεύσαμε- νους. τέλος δέ έΙπε, ΚαΧ νυν έξεστιν ύμΐν πιστά 26 > OlU t 62 ANABASIS II, 3. 27-29 and 4. 1-a H ,jj. 0" I -Γ I.. «».. λαβ€Ϊν wap* ημών ij μηρ φιΚίαν παρ4ξ€ΐν νμΐν την χώραν καΐ άδολων αττάξειν eU την Ελλάδα άγοράν παρ€χοντας • οττον 8* αν μη η πρίασθαί, λαμβάνειν νμας €κ της χωράς έάσομεν τα επιτήδεια- νμας δ€27 δαυ ημΐν δβτ/σει ομόσαι η μην ττορεύεσθαι ώ<ζ δια φιλίας άσινως, σΐτα καϊ ποτά λαμβάνοντας οπόταν μη άγοραν παρέχωμεν • ην δε παρέχωμεν άγοράν, ώνονμένους ίξειν τα έπιτηΒεια. ταύτα εΒοξε, καΐ^ ίϋ/χ,οσαϊ' καΐ Βεξιάς €8οσαν Τισσαφέρνης καΐ 6 της 10 βασιλέως γυναικός αδελφός τοις των ^Ελλήνων στρατηγοΐς και λοχαγοΐς καΐ ίλαβον παρά των Ελ- λήνων. μ€τά δέ ταύτα Τισσαφέρνης είπε. Νυν μεν 29 8η απειμι ως /βασιλέα• επειδάϊ/ δε διαπρά^ω/χαι α 8εομαι, ηξω σνσκευασάμενος ως άπάξων υμάς εις Ι^την Ελλάδα καΧ αυτός άπιών επΙ την εμαυτου άρχην. ^ Ariaeus less friendly. The Greeks grow uneasy. Γν. Μετά ταύτα περιεμενον Τισσαφέρνην οι τ€ 1 Ελλτ^ι/ες καΧ 6 ^Αριαΐος εγγύς αλλήλων εστρατοπε- 8ευμά^οι ημέρας πλείους η εΐκοσιν. εν δε ταιίταις άφικνουνται προς Άριαΐον καϊ οι ά8ελφοΙ και οι 20 άλλοι αναγκαίοι και προς τους συν εκείνω ΙΙερσών τίνες, παρεθάρρυνόν τε και δεξιάς ενίοις παρά βασι- λέως εφερον μη μνησικακησειν /βασιλέα αντοΐς της συν Κύρω επιστρατείας μη8ε άλλου μη8ενος των παροιχομενων. τούτων 8ε γιγνομενων εν8ηλοι ίjσav 2 2δ οΐ περί Άριαΐον ήττον προσέχοντες τοΙς "Ελλτ/σι τον νοίυν ' ώστε και δια τούτο τοΙς μεν πολλοίς των Ελ- λήνων ουκ ηρεσκον, άλλα προσιόντες τω Κλεάρχω ελεγον και τοις άλλοις στρατηγοΐς, Τι μενομεν ; η 3 ANABASIS Π. 4- 4-7. 68 ^il ουκ επιστάμεθα οτι βασιλενς'ημάς άπολεσαι αν περί παντός ποιησαιτο, ίνα και τοις άλλοις ΈΧλησι φόβος εΐη έπι )8ασιλεα μεγαν στρατεύειν ; και νυν μεν ημάς υπάγεται μενειν δια το 8ιεσπάρθαι αυτω το 5 στράτευμα * επην 8ε πάλιν άλισθη αυτω η στρατιά, ουκ εστίν δπως ουκ έπιθησεταχ ημΐν. ίσως δε που 4 17 άποσκάπτει τι η άποτειχίζει, ως άπορος η η οδό?. ου γάρ ποτέ εκών γε βουλησεται ημάς ελθόντας εις την 'Ελλάδα άπαγγειλαι ως ημείς τοσοί8ε όντες 10 ενικωμεν /βασιλέα ε'πι ταις θύραις αυτού καΧ καταγε- λάσαντες άττηλθομεν* *Α ν'»'»' • fu^^^^^-^ - /ν 9 Α- " If we break the truce, we are lost. I have faith in the king." Κλέαρχος δε άπεκρίνατο τοις ταύτα λεγουσιν, 5 'Εγώ ενθυμούμαι μεν καΧ ταύτα πάντα • εννοώ δ* ΟΤΙ ει νυν άπιμεν, δό^ο/ιει/ επι πολεμώ άπιεζ^αι και 16 παρά τάς σπον8άς ποιεΐν. έπειτα πρώτον μεν άγο- ράν ουδείς παρεξει ημΐν ού8ε όθεν έπισιτιούμεθα • αδ^ΐ9 δε 6 ηγησόμενος ονδεις εσχαι • καΧ άμα ταύτα ποιούντων ημών ευθύς Άριαΐος άφεστηξει- ώστε φίλος ημΐν ουδείς λελεΐψεται, άλλα και οΐ πρόσθεν 20 οντες πολέμιοι ημΐν έσονται, ποταμός 8 ' ει μεν τις e και άλλος άρα ημΐν εστί 8ιαβατεος ουκ οιδα • τον δ' ουν Έ,ύφράτην ισμεν οτι άδυι^ατοι^ δια/βι^^^*- ί^ωλυόι/- των πολεμίων, ου μεν 8η αν μάχεσθαί γε 8εη ιππεΐς είσιν ημΐν σύμμαχοι, των 8ε πολεμίων ιππείς είσιι^ 25 οι πλείστοι και πλείστου άζιοι • ώστε νικωντες μεν τίνα αν άποκτείναιμεν ; ηττωμένων δε ού8ενα οΐόν τε σωθηναι ' εγώ μεν ουν /βασιλέα, ω ούτω πολλά εστί 7 τα ζτύμμαχα, εΐπερ προθυμεΐται ημάς άπολεσαι, ουκ Ιί! ι .1 64 ANABASIS Π. 4. &-13. t c4• - Λ*' I οίδα ο Tt Set αντορ ομόσαι και Se^Lap Sovpcu καΐ θ€ούς ίττιορκησαι καΐ τα eavrov πιστά άπιστα πονη- σοΛ "ΈΧλησί Τ€ και βαρβάροις, τοιαύτα πολλά Tissaphernes returns and the march begins. Mutual distrust. 6 Έϊ/ Be τούτω ηκ€ Ύισσαφψνης €χων την ίαυτον 8 i δυι/α /iti^ α5ς ct? οίκον άπιών καϊ ^Ορόντας την iavTOv Βνναμιν * ηγ€ 8c καΐ την θυγατέρα την βασιλέως €πι γάμω. ivTev0€v 8c η8η Τισσαφέρνους ηγουμέ- 9 νου και άγοραν παρέχοντος έπορενοντο • έπορ&ϋετο 10 §€ καΧ Άριαΐος το Κύρου βαρβαρικον έχων στρά- Τ€νμα αίμα Ύισσαφέρν€ΐ και *Ορόντα καΐ συν^στρα- τοπ€Β€ύ€Τθ συν έκ^ίνοις. οι 8c 'Έλλτ/ΐ'β? υφορωντες ίο τούτους αύτοΙ έφ* έαυτων έγώρουν ηγεμόνας έχοντες. έστρατοπεΒεύοντο Sc εκάστοτε απέχοντες αλλήλων 15 παρασάγγην και μείον • έφυλάττοντο δε αμφότεροι ωσπερ πολεμίους αλλήλους, και ευθύς τούτο ύποφίαν ο• .^,.. Η S 'τταρειχεν. ενίοτε οε και ςυΚιζομενοι εκ του αυτού ΊΙ και χόρτον και άλλα τοιαύτα συλλέγοντες πληγάς ίνέτεινον αλληλοις • ώστε καΧ τούτο έχθραν παρείχε. March to the Tigris. The Persians cross to the other side. m Αιελθόντες 8ε τρεις σταθμούς άφίκοντο προς τοΐ2 Μτ^διας καλούμενον τείχος, καΐ παρηλθον εΐσω αυτού. Tjv δέ ωκοΒομημένον πλίνθοις οπταΐς εν άσφαλτω κειμέναις, εύρος είκοσι πο8ων, ϋφος 8έ εκατόν ' μήκος δ ' ελέγετο είναι είκοσι παρασαγγών • 2δά7Γ€)(€ΐ δέ Βαβυλωνος ου πολύ. εντεύθεν δ' επορεύ -is θησαν σταθμούς δυο παρασάγγας οκτώ • και Βιέβψ σαν Βιώρυχας δνο, την μεν έπΙ γέφυρας, την 8έ (kui 15 ■VI . β/ν*. ANABASIS U. 4. 14-17. 65 Π εζευγμένην πλοίοις επτά • αύται δ' 'ί)σαν απο του Ύίγρητος ποταμού • κατετέτμηντο Βέ εζ αύτων και τάφροι επΙ την χώραν, αί μεν πρωται /icyaXat, έπειτα δε έλάττους • τέλος δε καΧ μικροί οχετοί, ωσπερ εν 6TW 'Ελλάδι επι τάς μελίνας • καΐ άφικνουνται επι τον Ύίγρητα ποταμόν • προς ω πόλις' Tjv μεγάλη και πολυάνθρωπος fj όνομα ^ιττάκη, απέχουσα του πο- ταμού σταΒίους πεντεκαί&εκα. οι μεν ουν Ελληνες 14 παρ' αύτην εσκηνησαν εγγύς παραδείσου μεγάλου 10 και κάλου και Βασέος παντοίων ΒένΒρων, οί δέ βάρ- βαροι Βιαβεβηκότες τον Ύίγρητα • ου μέντοι κατα- φανείς ήσαν. " Beware of a night attack, and guard the bridge I " Μετά δέ το Βεΐπνον έτυχον εν περιπατώ όντες προ 15 των οπλών ΙΙρόξενος και Βενοφίον • και προσελθών ΐδ άνθρωπος τις ήρωτησε τους προφύλακας που αν ίδοι ΙΙρόξενον η Κλέαρχον • Μένωνα δέ ουκ εζητει, και ταύτα παρ^' Ά/οιαίου ων του Μένωνος ξένου, επει δε 16 ΙΙρόξενος έΐπεν οτι αυτός εΙμι ον ζητείς, έιπεν 6 άν- θρωπος τάδε. 'Έπεμφέ με *Αριαΐος και ^Αρτάοζος, 20 πιστοί όντες Κύρω και ύμΐν ευνοι, και κελευουσι φυ- λάττεσθαι μη ύμΐν επι^ώϊ^αι της νυκτός οι βάρβα- ροι • εστί δε στράτευμα πολύ εν τω πλησίον παρα- δείσω. και παρά την γέφυραν του Ύίγρητος ποτά- π μου περ-ψαί- κελευουσι φυλακην, ως διαι/οείται αύτΐ7^ 25 λυσαι Ύισσαφέρνης της νυκτός, εάν Βύνηται, ως μη Βιαβητε αλλ' εν μέσω άποληφθητε του ποταμού και της Βιώρυχος, • ' *1 ' t1 ο :f ■» 66 ANABASIS II. 4. 18^23. The warning is seen to be inconsistent. *Ακούσαντ€<; ταντα αγονσιν αντορ πάρα top KXe-lS αρχορ και φράζονσιρ α Xcyct. 6 8c Κλέαρχος άκου- σας €ταράχθη σφόΒρα καΐ εφοββΐτο. Ρ€αρίσκος SclS τις τωρ παρόρτωρ έρροησας €Ϊπ€Ρ ως ουκ ακόλουθα δ €Ϊη τό Τ€ €πιθη&€σθαι και λύσειρ τηρ γέφυραρ. SrjXop γαρ ΟΤΙ Ιπιτιθ^μίρους rf ρικάρ Seyjaei η ηττασθαι. Γ lap μ€Ρ ουρ Ρίκωσι, τί δβΓ λύ€ίρ αυτούς τηρ γέφυραρ; oihc γαρ άρ πολλαί γέφυραχ ωσιρ ίχοψερ άρ οποί φιτγόρτες ημ.^ις σωθώμ€Ρ. έάρ 8c 'ημ€Ϊς ρικώμ€Ρ,90 Ιθλ€λυμ€ρης της γέφυρας ούχ ίζουσιρ ίκ^ιροι οποί φύ- γωσιρ • ουδέ μηρ βοηθησαι πολλωρ ορτωρ πίραρ ούδ€ΐ9 αυτοίς Βυρησεταχ λ€λυμ€ρης της γέφυρας. Its object becomes clear. The Greeks cross the river at daybreak. *Κκούσας hk ο Κλέαρχος ταύτα ηρετο top άγγ€λορ2ί πόση τις €ΐη χωρά η ip μέσω του Ύίγρητος καΐ της Ι^Βιώριτχος» ο δε ehrep οτι πολλή καΐ κωμαι ίρεισι καΐ πόλεις πολλαΐ καΐ μεγάλαι. totc δι^ '^^^ €γι/ώ-22 σθη OTL οΐ βάρβαροι top άρθρωπορ υποπέμ\\ιαΐ€Ρ^ οκρουρτες μη οι "Ελλτ^ϊ^ες Βιελόρτες τηρ γέφυραρ μ€ίραΐ€Ρ €Ρ τη ρησω έρύματα ίχορτες ίνθερ μ€Ρ top 2θΎίγρητα, €p0€p Be τηρ Βιωρυχα, τα δ' επιτήδεια ίχοιερ €κ της ip μεσψ χώρας πολλής και άγαθης ούσης και τωρ εργασομέρωρ ερόρτωρ, είτα δε καΐ αποστροφή γεροιτο ει τις βούλοιτο /δασιλεα κακώς ποιεΐρ. 25 Μετά δε ταντα άρεπαύορτο • επΙ μερτοι τηρ γεφυ-^ ραρ όμως φυλακηρ επεμφαρ • και ούτε επεθετο ουδείς ούδαμόθερ ούτε προς τηρ γέφυραρ ουδείς -^λ^ε τωρ ANABASIS II. 4. 2Φ-27. 67 πολεμίωρ, ως οι φυλάττορτες άιτηγγελλορ. επεώη2^ δε εως εγερετο, 8ιεβαΐΡ0Ρ τηρ γέφυραρ έζευγμέρηρ πλοίοις τριάκορτα και επτά ως οΐόρ τε μάλιστα πεφυλαγμέρως • εξηγγελλορ γάρ τιρες τωρ παρά 5 Ύισσαφέρρους ^Ελληρωρ ως διαβαιρόρτωρ μέλλοιερ επι^ι^σεσ^αι. άλλα ταύτα μερ ψευδ'^ ηρ • δια^αι- ρόρτωρ μέρτοι 6 Γλους αύτοΓς έπεφάρη μετ αλλωρ σκοπωρ ει Ζιαβαίροιερ top ποταμόρ • επεώη δε είδει/, ωχετο άπελαύρωρ. κ The march continued to the river Zapatas. 10 ΆτΓΟ δε του Ύίγρητος επορευθησαρ σταθμούς τετ- 25 τάρας παρασάγγας εΐκοσιρ επί top Φυσκορ ποταμορ, το εύρος πλέθρου • επι^*^ δε γέφυρα. καΧ έρταυθα •]• ώκεΐτο πόλι,ς μεγάλη ορομα ίίπις * προς ηρ απηρ- Λ τησε τοΙς^^ΈΧλησίΡ ο Κύρου και *Αρταξέρξου ρόθος J 4 1δ αδελφός άπο ^ούσωρ και ^Εκβατάρωρ στρατιάρ πολ- ^ ληρ άγωρ ως βοηθησωρ /βαοτιλει * καί επιστήσας το εαυτού στράτευμα παρερχομέρους τους "Ελληρας εθε- ώρει. 6 δε Κλέαρχος ηγεΐτο μερ εις δυο, επο/>ευετο 26 δε άλλοτε και άλλοτε εφιστάμερος • οσορ δε χρόρορ 20 το ηγούμερορ του στρατεύματος επιστησειε, τόσου- TOP ηρ άράγκη χρόρορ hi όλου του στρατεύματος γίγρεσθαι τηρ έπίστασιρ • ώστε το στράτευμα και αύτοΐς τοις "^Ελλτ/σι δό^αι πάμπολυ εΐραι, καΐ top ΙΙέρσηρ εκπεπληχθαι θεωρουρτα. 2δ Έρτενθερ δ' επορευθησαρ διά της Μτ^δίας σταθ-2Τ μούς έρημους εξ παρασάγγας τριάκορτα εις τας Παρυσάτιδος κώμας της Κύρου και /βασιλέως μη- τρός, ταύτας Ύισσαφέρρης Κύρω επεγγελωρ δια/}- ! 68 ANABASIS Π. 4. 28 and 5. 1-^. ττασαι τοις Έλλησιρ irrerpe^e πλην άν^ραποΒωρ. €ρηρ Sc σίτος πολύς καΐ πρόβατα καΐ άλλα χρή- ματα. €ΐ/τ€νθ€ν δ ' €πορ€νθησαρ σταθμούς έρημους 28 Τ€τταρας παρασάγγας €Ϊκοσι top Ύίγρητα ποταμορ &€Ρ αριστ€ρα €χορτ€ς. ip 8c τω πρώτω σταθμω πψαρ τον ποταμού πόλις ωκ€Ϊτο μζτγάλη καΐ evhaC- μωρ ορομα Καιραί, έξ ης οί βάρβαροι Βιήγορ eVt σχ€8ίαις Βίφθ^ρίραις άρτους, τυρούς, οΙρορ. Ckftrclius has a personal interview with Tissaphemes. V. Μ€τά ταύτα άφικρούρται έπΙ top Ζαπάταρ πο- ι Ιϋταμόρ, το €υρος τ€ττάρωρ πλέθρωρ. καΐ €ρταύθα €μ€ίραρ ημέρας τρ€Ϊς • ip 8c ταύταις ύποψιαι μέρ '^σαρ, φαρ€ρά Sc ovSc/xta έφαίρ€το επιβουλή. έΒοξερ 2 ο5ν τω Κλεάρχω συγγ€Ρ€σθαι τω Ύισσαφέρρ^ι και, €1 πως Βύραιτο^ παύσαι τάς ύποφίας πριρ έξ αύτώρ 16πάλ€μορ γ€Ρ€σθαι ' και ίπεμφέ τιρα έρούρτα οτι συγγ€Ρ€σθαι αύτω χρήζει. 6 δέ ίτοίμως €κέλ€υ€Ρ TJKeip. " Let us dispel, if possible, this growing distrust." *ΈαΓ€ΐΒη δέ συρήλθορ, Xcyct 6 Κλέαρχος τά&€. 3 Εγώ, ω Ύισσαφέρρη, οίδα μερ ήμιρ όρκους γ€γ€ρψ 2ϋμ€Ρους καΐ 8€ξιάς 8€8ομέρας μη ά8ικήσ€ΐρ αλλή- λους • φυλαττόμ€Ρ0Ρ δέ σέ τ€ ορώ ως πολ€μίους ημάς και ήμ€Ϊς 6ρώρτ€ς ταύτα άρτιφυλαττόμ€θα, CTTci δέ σκοπώρ ου Βύραμαχ ουτ€ σέ αίσθέσθαι π«- 4 ρώμερορ ήμας κακώς ποιειρ έγώ τ€ σαφώς 6ΐ8α δτι 25 ήμ€Ϊς γ€ ουδέ έπΐροούμ€Ρ τοιούτορ ού^έρ, €8οξ€ μοι €ΐς λόγους σοι €λθ€Ϊρ, όπως el Βυραίμζθα έξ€λοιμ€Ρ αλληλωρ τηρ άπιστίαρ. καΧ yap οΓδα άρθρώπονς 5 ANABASIS Π. 5. 6-10. 69 ή8η, τους μέρ έκ Βιαβολής τους δέ καΐ έξ υποψίας, οί φοβηθέρτες αλλήλους φθάςται βουλόμ€Ρθΐ πρΙρ πα- θ€Ϊρ έποίησαρ άρήκεστα κακά τους ούτ€ μέλλορτας ουτ αύ βουλομέρους τοιούτορ ούίέρ, τάς ούρ τοιαύτας 6 ΰάγρωμοσνρας ρομίζωρ συρουσίαις ^ciXt^ta άρ παύ- €σ^αι, ηκω καΧ 8ι8άσκ€ΐρ crc βούλομαι ως σύ ήμίν ουκ ορθώς άπιστ€Ϊς, " If we break our oaths, the gods will take vengeance on us." X ΤΙρώτορ μέρ γάρ και μέγιστορ οί θεώρ ημάς όρκοι 7 κωλυου€Γί, πολεμίους eipai άλλήλοις • όστις δέ τούτων 10 cnipoiSep αύτω παρημ^ληκώς, τούτορ έγώ ούποτ αν €ύ8αιμορίσαιμι. top γάρ θεώρ πόλεμορ ούκ οίδα ουτ άπο ποίου άρ τάχους φεύγωρ τις άποφύγοι oij €ΐς ποΐορ άρ σκότος άπο8ραίη ούθ* δπως άν €ΐς έχυρορ χωρίορ άποσταίη. πάρτη γάρ πάρτα τοις θεοΐς ύπο• Ι6χ€ίρια και παρταχη πάρτωρ ΐσορ οί θ€οι κρατούσι. " You, Tissaphemes, are now our only hope." Ilcpt μέρ Βή τώρ θ^ώρ τ€, καΧ τώρ ορκωρ ούτω γι- % γρώσκω, παρ ους ήμ€Ϊς τηρ φιλίαρ συρθέμεροι #care θέμεθα • τώρ δ * άρθρωπίρωρ σέ έγώ έρ τω παρόρτι ρομίζω μέγιστορ eipai ήμίρ άγαθόρ, σύρ μέρ γάρ 9 20 σοΙ πάσα μέρ 68ος εύπορος πάς 8έ ποταμός δια^α-' τός, τώρ τ€ έπιτηΒείωρ ούκ απορία • άρ€υ 8έ σου πάσα μέρ δια σκστους ή οδός • ούδέι^ γάρ αύτης έπιστάμεθα • πάς 8έ ποταμός 8ύσπορος, πάς 8έ όχλος φοβερός, φοβερώτατορ δ' έρημία- μεστή γάρ 25 πολλής απορίας έστίρ. ει 8έ 8ή καΧ μαρερτες crc ίο κατακτείραιμερ, άλλο τι άρ ή top εύεργέτηρ κατα- κτείναντες προς /SaatXca τον μέγιστον εφε8ρον άγωνι- Ji / §n 70 ANABASIS II. 5. 11-15, ζοίμ€θα; οσων δέ ^ καΧ οίων αν €λπιδωι/ €μαντον στερησαιμ.ι el σί τι κακόν Ιττιχ^ρησαιμι ποί€Ϊν, ταντα λ€ζω. έγώ γαρ Κνρον €π€θύμησά μοί φίλον 11 γ€ν€σθαι, νομίζων των τσΓ€ Ικανωτατον elvai ev 5 ΤΓθί€Ϊν 6ν βονλοίτο ' σ€ 8e νυν ορω την re Κύρου SwajLLti/ καΐ γωραν €χοντα και την σαντον χώραν σφζοντα, την δέ βασιλέως 8ύναμίν, y Κύρος ττολβμία €χρητο, σοΙ ταντην σνμμαχον ουσαν- τούτων δ€ΐ2 τοιούτων όντων τις ούτω μαίνεται όστις ον βούλεται 10 σοι φίλος etvai; άλλα μην ίρω γαρ καΐ ταντα έζ ων €χω ΙλπίΒας καΐ σ€ βονλησεσθαι φίλον ημΐν €Ϊναχ. " And an alliance with us would make you invincible. Who has persuaded you to doubt us ? " Οίδα μ€ν γαρ νμΐν Μνσονς λνττηροι/ς οι/τας, ου9ΐ3 νομίζω αν συν τη παρούση 8ννάμ€ΐ ταπεινούς νμΐν Ι^παρασχείν οίδα δε και Ι1ισί8ας - ακούω δε και άλλα €^1^7 ΤΓολλά τοιαύτα είΐ'αι, α οΐμαι αν πανσοΑ. ένοχλονντα άεΐ τη νμετέρα €ν8αιμονία. Αίγντττίονς δε, οΓς μάλιστα ν μας ννν γιγνώσκω τεθνμωμενονς^ ονχ ορώ ποία 8νναίμ€ΐ σνμμάγω χρησάμενοι μάλλον 20 αν κολάσ§σθ€ της ννν συν €μοϊ ονσης. άλλα μην 14 €v γ€ τοις πέριξ οίκονσι σύ, εί μ€ν βούλοιό τω φίλος εΐι/αι, ως μέγιστος αν εΐης, ει δε τις σε λνποίη, ως δεσπότης άναστρέφοιο ίχων ημάς νττηρετας, οι σοι ονκ αν τον μισθον €ν€κα μόνον νττηρετοΖμεν άλλα 25 και της χάριτος ην σωθέντες νπο σον σοι αν ίχοιμεν δικαίως, ε/χοι μεν ταντα πάντα ενθνμονμενω οντωΐΒ δοκει θανμαστον εΐϊ'αι το σε ημΐν άπιστεΐν ώστε και ηδιστ' άν άκούσαιμι το όνομα τις όντως εστί δειμος ANABASIS Π. 5- 1^2ί>• 71 λεγειΐ' ωστ€ σε ττεισαι λεγωι^ ως ημείς σοι επιβον λεύομεν. Κλέαρχος μεν ονν τοσαντα είπε • Τισσα- φερνης δε ώδε άττημείφθη, '\^ )/ " ΝΟΓ should you, Clearchus, distrust us. Think how complete!^ you are in our power." 'Αλλ' ηίομαι μεν, ω Κλέαρχε, άκούων σον φρονί- 16 ^μονς λόγονς• ταντα γαρ γιγνώσκων,ει τι εμοι κακόν βονλεύοις, άμα άν μοι δοκεις και σαυτω κακόΐΌυς είι/αι. ως δ' άν μάθης οτι ούδ' άν νμεΐς δικαίως οντε βασιλεΐ οντ εμοι άπιστοίητε, άντάκονσον. είΐ7 γαρ νμάς εβονλόμεθα άπολεσαι, πότερα σοι Sokov- 10 μεν ιππέων πληθονς άπορεΐν η πεζών η οπλίσεως εν η νμάς μεν βλάπτειν ικανοί εΐημεν άν, άντιπάσχειν δε ουδείς κίν^ννος ; άλλα χωρίων επιτηδείων νμΐν IS επιτίθεσθαι άπορεΐν άν σοι 8οκονμεν ; ον τοσαντα μεν πεδία α νμεΐς φίλια όντα σνν πολλω πόνω δια- 15 πορεύεσθε, τοσαντα δε όρη οράτε νμΖν όντα πορεν- τεα, α ημΐν εξεστι προκαταλαβονσιν άπορα νμΐν παρεχειν, τοσοντοι δ' εισι ποταμοί εφ* ων εξεστιν ημΐν ταμιεύεσθαι οπόσοις άν νμών βονλώμεθα μάχετ σ^αι; εισι δ' αυτών ονς ονδ' άΐ' παντάπασι δια- 20 ^δαίτ^τε εί μη ημεΐς νμάς 8ιαπορεύοιμεν. ει δ ' έν 1» ττάσι τοτίτοις ηττωμεθα, άλλα τό γε τοι πνρ κρεΐττον τον καρπον εστίν • ον ημείς Βνναίμεθ* άν κατακαύ- σαντες λι/χοι^ νμΐν άντιτάξαι, ω νμεΐς ούδ' ει πανν άγαθοι εΐητε /χάχεσ^αι άν 8ύναισθε. " We also are God-fearing and honorable men ; and to me personally the friendship of you Greeks is most important." 25 Πώς άν ονν έχοντες τοσούτονς πόρονς προς το 20 νμΐν πολεμεΐν, και τούτων μη^ενα ημΐν επικίν^ννον, 1 -h-S" ™ 72 AKABASIS Π. 5. 21-26. CTTCira 4κ τούτων πάντων τούτον άν τΐ>ν τρόπον €ξ€λοιμ€θα OS μόνος μ€ν προ<ζ θ^ων άσεβης, μόνος Se προς ανθρώπων αισχρός; παντάπασι he άπορων^ €στΙ και αμήχανων καΐ iv ανάγκη €χομ€νων, καΐ ^τούτων πονηρών, οίτινες Ιθέλουσι hC ίπιορκίας Τ€ προς θ€οΐίς καΐ απιστίας προς ανθρώπους πράττ€ΐν τι. ούχ όντως ημείς, ω Κλέαρχε, ούτε αλόγιστοι ούτε ηλίθιοι εσμεν. άλλα τί 8η υμάς εξόν άπολεσαι 22 ονκ επι τοντο ηλθομεν ; ευ Γσ^ι δτι 6 εμος έρως του- 10 του αίτιος το τοις "Έλλησιν εμέ πιστον γενέσθαι, και ψ Κύρος άνεβη ξενικω δια μισθοδοσίας πιστεύων τούτω εμε καταβηναι 8ι" ευεργεσίας ισχυρόν. οσα23 δ' εμοί χρήσιμοι ύμεΐς εστε τα μεν και συ εΐπας, το 8ε μεγιστον εγώ οίδα • την μεν γαρ επί τη κεφαλή UTiapav )SaatXct μόνω εξεστιν ορθην εχειν, την δ' επι τη καρ8ία Ισως άν υμών παρόντων καΐ έτερος ευπετ τώς €χοι. Clearchus is deceived by the crafty proposal of Tissaphemes for another interview. Ύαυτα ειπών ε8οζε τω Κλεάρχω άληθη λέγειν • 2Α και είπεν, Ούκουν, εφη, οΐτινες τοιούτων ημΐν εΙς 20 φιλίαν υπαρχόντων πειρώνται 8ιαβάλλοντες ποιησαι πολεμίους ημάς άξιοί είσι τα έσχατα παθεΐν ; Και 25 εγώ μεν γε, εφη 6 Τισσαφέρνης, ει βούλεσθέ μοι οι τε στρατηγοί και οι λοχαγοί έλθεΐν εν τω εμφανεΐ, λέξω τοι»ς προς εμε λέγοντας ως συ εμοι επιβουλευεις 2δ και τη συν εμοΙ στρατιά. 'Εγώ δ^, εφη 6 Κλέαρχος, 26 α^ω πάντας, και σοΙ αυ 8ηλώσω όθεν εγώ περί σθυ ακούω. ANABASIS π. 5. 27-32. 73 He persuades four other generals and twenty captains to accompany him. Έ /c τούτων 8η τών λόγων 6 Τισσαφέρνης φίλο- 27 φρονούμενος τότε μεν μένειν τε αυτόν εκέλευε και σύν8ειπνον εποιήσατο. τη 8ε ύστεραία 6 Κλέαρχος ελθών επι το στρατόπε8ον 8ηλός τ ην πάνυ φιλικώς βοΐόμενος διακβΓσ^αι τω Τισσαφέρνει καΐ α έλεγεν εκείνος άπηγγελλεν, εφη τε χρηναι Ιέναχ παρά Τισ- σαφέρνην ους εκέλευσε, καΐ οΐ άν ελεγχθώσι δια- βάλλοντες τών ^ΈΧλήνων, ως προ8ότας αυτούς και κακόνους τοΐς 'Έλλησιν οντάς τιμωρηθηναι. ύπώτ28 ΙΟΤΓτευε 8έ εΐι/αι τον 8ιαβάλλοντα Μβι/ωνα, βίδώς αυτόν και λάθρα συγγεγενημένον Τισσαφέρνει μετ Άρι- αίου και στασιάίοντα αύτω καΐ επιβουλεύοντα, όπως ^ το στράτευμα άπαν προς αυτόν λαβών φίλος η Τισ- σαφέρνει. εβούλετο 8ε καΧ 6 Κλέαρχος άπαν το 29 15 στράτευμα προς εαυτόν έχειν την γνώμην και τους παραλυπουντας εκπο8ών είναι, τών 8ε στρατιωτών άντέλεγόν τίνες αύτω μη teVat πάντας τους λοχαγούς καΐ στρατηγούς μη8ε πιστεύειν Τισσαφέρνει. ό δέδΟ Κλέαρχος ισχυρώς κατέτεινεν, εστε 8ιεπράξατο πέντε 20 μεν στρατηγούς teVai, είκοσι 8έ λοχαγούς • συνηκο- λούθησαν 8ε ως εΙς άγοράν καΐ τών άλλων στρατιω- τών ως 8ιακόσιοι. They are entrapped and either seized or slain. *Επ€ΐ 8ε ί)σαν επι ταΐς θύραις ταΐς Τισσαφέρνους, 31 οί μεν στρατηγοί παρεκληθησαν εΐσω, ΙΙρόξενος 26 Βοιώτιος, Μένων θετταλός, 'Ayias 'λρκάς, Κλέαρχος Αάκων, Σωκράτης Αχαιός • οί 8ε λοχαγοί επι ταΐς θύραις εμενον. ου πολλψ 8ε ύστερον άπο του αύτου^ C Λ ι 'ΤΕ tJ 74 ANABASIS II. 5- 33-3& ξΓημ€ίον οι τ* evSov (τνν€\αμβάνοντο καΧ οι ίζω /carc- κόττησαν. μ€τα he ταντα των βαρβάρων ην^ς ΙτπΓ€ων δια τον weSiov iXavvovres ωτινι €ντνγχάνου€ν "Έλληνι η δονλω 17 iXevdepiu πάντας €κτ€ΐνον. οί δε 33 δ'Έλλτ/ι/ες την Τ€ Ιππασίαν ίθανμαζον €Κ τον στρατο- ιτεδον 6ρωντ€ς καΐ δ τι έποίονν ήμφ€γνόονν, πρΙν ^ίκαρχος Αρκάς ι^*^^ φ€νγων τ€τρωμ€νος ct? την γαστ€ρα καΐ τα hnepa έν ταΐς χ€ρσΙν έχων, καΐ είπε πάντα τά γεγενημενα. Alarm in the Greek camp. Ariaeus comes up and calls for some general or captain. 10 Έκ τούτον Βη οί "Ελληνες εθεον εττΐ τα δπλα34 πάντες εκπεπληγμενοι καΧ νομίζοντες αντίκα ηζειν αντονς επΙ το στρατόπεΖον. οί δε πάντες μεν ονκ3δ '^λθον, *Αριαΐος 8έ καΐ ^Αρτάοζος καΐ Μιθρα8άτης, ot ήσαν Κνρω πιστότατοι • 6 8έ των Ελλήνων ερμψ 15 νενς εφη καΐ τον Ύισσαφερνονς άΒελφον σνν αντοΐς οραν και γιγνώσκειν σννηκολονθονν δε καΐ άλλοι ΙΙερσων τεθωρακισμένοι εΙς τριακοσίονς. οντοι επεΐ36 εγγνς ^σαν, προσελθεΐν εκελενον ει τις εΐη των Ελ- λήνων στρατηγός η λοχαγός, ΐνα άπαγγείλωσι τά 20 παρά βασιλέως, μετά ταντα εζηλθον φνλαττόμενοι^η των ^Ελλήνων στρατηγοί μεν Κλεάνωρ *Ορχομενιος και %οφαίνετος %τνμφάλιος, σνν αντοΐς δε αενοφων * Αθηναίος, όπως μάθοι τά περί ΙΙροξενον • Χειρίσσ- φος δε ετνγχανεν απών εν κώμη τινι σνν άλλοις 25 επισιτιζόμενος. His attempt to deceive the Greeks cleverly balked by Xenophon. Έττειδ-ή δε έστησαν εις εττηκοον, εΐπεν Ά/οιαΓος38 τάδε. Κλέαρχος μεν, ω άνδρες "Ελλι^^ες, εττεί επι- ANABASIS Π. 5- 39-42 and 6. 1. 75 ορκών τε εφάνη καΐ τάς σπον^άς λνων, έχει την Ζίκην καΧ τεθνηκε, Τίρόξενος δε και Μένων, ότι κα- τήγγειλαν αντον την έπιβονλην, εν μεγάλη τιμή είσιν. νμάς δε /βασιλεύς τά δπλα απαιτεί • εαυτοί) βγάρ είναι φησιν, έπείπερ Κνρον ήσαν τον εκείνον Βονλον. προς ταντα άπεκρίναντο οι 'Έλληνες, έλεγε 39 δε Κλεάνωρ 6 ^Ορχομένιος • ^ί1 κάκιστε ανθρώπων Άριαΐε και οΐ άλλοι όσοι ητε Κνρον φίλοι, ονκ αισχννεσθε οντε θεονς οντ άνθρώπονς, οΐτινες ό/χο- 10 σαντες ημΐν τονς αυτούς φίλονς και εχθρονς νομιείν, προϊόντες ημάς σνν Ύισσαφέρνει τω άθεοπάτω τε και πανονργοτάτω τονς τε άν8ρας αυτούς οΓς ωμνντε άπολωλέκατε και τονς άλλους ημάς προ8ε8ωκότες σνν τοις πολεμίοις εφ' ημάς έρχεσθε; 15 Ό δε Ά/οιαΓος είπε • Κλέαρχος γάρ π ρόσθεν επι- 40 βονλενων φανερός εγένετο Ύισσαφέρνει τε και *Ορόντα, και πάσιν ημΐν τοις σνν τούτοις, επι τού- τοις Βενοφών τάδε είπε• Κλέαρχος μεν τοίννν ει 41 παρά τονς δρκονς έλυε τάς σπον^άς, την Βίκην έχει • 20 δίκαιοι' γάρ άπόλλνσθαι τονς επιορκονντας • Πρό^ε- νος δε και Μένων επείπερ εΙσΙν υμέτεροι μεν ενεργέ' ται, ημέτεροι δε στρατηγοί, πέμφατε αυτούς hapo - 8ηλον γάρ ότι φίλοι γε όντες άμφοτέροις πειράσον ται και νμΐν και ημΐν τά βέλτιστα σνμβονλενσαι. 26 ττρος ταύτα οΐ βάρβαροι πoλ^fv χρόνον ^ιαλεχθέντες 42 άλλι^λοις άττηλθον ον^εν άποκρινάμενοι. Life and character of Clearchus. ^ VI. Οί μεν Βη στρατηγοί οντω ληφθέντες άνη- ι χθησαν ώς )8ασιλεα και άποτμηθέντες τάς κεφάλας Μ U 76 ANABASIS Π. 6. 2-6. €Τ€λ€ντησαν, ct? μίν αντων Κλέαρχος ομολογουμέ- νως €Κ πάντων των έμπζίρως αντον εχόντων δό^ας γενέσθαι άνηρ καϊ πολεμικός και φιλοπόλεμος εσχά- τως, καΐ γαρ 8η εως μεν πόλεμος ην τοις Λακβδαί.- 2 ^μονίοις προς τοίίς Αθηναίους παρεμενεν, επει8η Se εΙρηνη εγενετο, άναπείσας την αύτου πόλιν ως οι Θράκες ά^ικουσι τους 'Έλληνας και 8ιαπραξάμενος ως ε^ύνατο παρά των εφόρων, εζεπλει ως πολεμησων τοις ύπερ Χερρονησου και ΙΙερίνθου θραξίν. επει 3 10 Sc μεταγνόντες πως οι έφοροι η8η εζω όντος άπο- στρεφειν αυτόν επειρωντο εξ ^Ισθμού, ενταύθα ουκέτι πείθεται, αλλ' ψχ^το πλέων εις Έλλησποντον. εκ 4 τοντου καΧ εθανατώθη υπο των εν Σπάρτη τελών ως άπειθων. η8η 8έ φυγάς ων έρχεται προς Κυρον, και Ι^οποίοις μεν λόγοις έπεισε Κυρον άλλγ) γεγραπται, δίδωσι δέ αύτω Κύρος μύριους Βαρεικούς • ό δβ 5 λαβών ουκ επΙ ραθυμίαν ετράπετο, αλλ' άπο τούτων των χρημάτων συλλέξας στράτευμα επολέμει τοις θραζί, και μάχΐβ τε ενίκησε και άπο τούτου Βη έφερε 20 και ηγε τούτους και πολέμων Βιεγένετο μέχρι Κύρος έΒεηθη του στρατεύματος • τότε 8έ άπΎ^λθεν ως συν εκείνψ αυ πολεμησων. He was a born soldier, and an excellent though harsh disciplinarian. Ταντα ουν φιλοπόλεμου μοι 8οκεΐ άν8ρος έργα 6 clival, όστις εξόν μεν ειρήνη ν έχειν άνευ αΙσχύνης 25 και βλάβης αιρεΐται πολεμειν, εξόν 8ε ραθυμείν βού- λ€ται πονεΐν ώστε πολεμειν, εξόν 8ε χρήματα έχειν ακινδύνως αί/οείται πολέμων μείονα ταύτα ποιειν • εκείνος δέ ώσπερ εις παιδικά 17 εις αλλην τινά ANABASIS II. 6. 7-12. 77 η^ονην ήθελε δαπαΐ'άΐ' εχς πόλεμον. ούτω μεν φίλο- 7 πόλεμος ην • πολεμικός δέ αυ ταύτη έ^όκει eti^ai ότι φιλοκίν^υνός τε ην και ημέρας καΐ νυκτός άγων έπΙ τους πολεμίους και εν τοις Βεινοΐς φρόνιμος, ως οι 5 παρόντες πανταχού πάντες ώμολόγουν. καΐ αρχικός s δ' ελέγετο βΐΐ'αι ως δυνατόν εκ του τοιούτου τρόπου οίον κάκεΐνος έιχεν. ικανός μεν γαρ ώς τις και άλλος φροντίζειν ην όπως έχοι η στρατιά αύτω τα επιτήδεια και παρασκευάζειν ταύτα, Ικανός δέ και 10 εμποιησαι τοις παρούσιν ώς πειστέον εϊη Κλεάρχω. τούτο δ' εποίει εκ του χαλεπός cTi/at • και γάρ όράν 9 στυγνός ην και τη φωνή τραχύς, εκόλαζέ τε Ισχυ- ρώς, και οργή ενίοτε, ώς και αΰτω μεταμέλειν έσθ* ότε. και γνώμη 8' εκόλαζεν • ακολάστου γαρ στρα-10 Ι^τεύματος ού8έν ηγεΐτο όφελος €ti/at, άλλα και λέγειν αύτον έφασαν ώς δεσι τον στρατιφτην φοβεΐσθαι μάλλον τον άρχοντα η τους πολεμίους, εΐ μέλλοι η φύλακας φυλάξειν η φίλων άφέξεσθαι η άπροφασί- στως ieVat προς τους πολέμιους. His men believed in him, but did not love him. 20 'Ei/ μεν ουν τοις 8εινοΐς ηθελον αύτου άκούεινιι σφόδρα καΐ ουκ άλλον ηρούντο οι στρατιώται • και γάρ το στυγνον τότε φαι8ραν αυτού εν τοις άλλοις προσώποις έφασαν φαίνεσθαι και το χαλ£πον έρρωτ μένον προς τους πολεμίους ε^όκει clz/at, ώστε σωτη- 26ριον, ουκέτι χαλεπον έφαίνετο • ότε S' έξω του δεινού 12 γένοιντο και εξείη προς άλλον άρξομένους άπιβ^αι, πολλοί αύτον άπέλειπο^' το γάρ επίχαρι ούκ εΙχεν, άλλ' act χαλεπός ην και ^ώμός • ώστε 8ιέκειντο προς m ι; Γ 78 ANABASIS II. 6. 13-19. αντον ol στρατιωται ωσττερ iraiheq προς διδάσκαλοι/. καΐ γαρ ονν φιλία μ€ν καΐ evpoia επόμενους ού8€ποτ€ 13 €Ϊχ€ν • οΐτίΐ^€ς δέ 17 νπο πόλεως τεταγμένοι η νπο τον 8εΐσθαι η άλλτ) tlpl ανάγκη κατεχόμενοι παρείησαν 5 αύτω, σφόδρα πειθομένοις ίχρητο. hra U ηρξαντο 14 νικαν συν αντω τους πολεμίους, η8η μεγάλα ην τα χρησίμους ποιονντα cti'at τους συν αύτω στρατιώ- τας • το τε γαρ προς τους πολεμίους θαρραλεως εχειν παρην και το την παρ' εκείνου τιμωρίαν φοβεΐ- 10 σ^αι εύτακτους εποίει. τοιούτος μεν 8η άρχων ην • 15 αρχεσθαι δε ύπο άλλων ου μάλα εθέλειν ελεγετο, ην 8ε οτε ετελεύτα άμφι τα πεντήκοντα ετη. Proxenus was ambitious, but strictly upright. ΤΙρόξενος 8ε 6 Βοιύτιος ευθύς μεν μειράκιον ί3ι/ΐ6 επεθνμει yci^eo-^at άνηρ τά μεγάλα πράττειν Ικανός • 15 καΐ δια ταύτην την επιθυμίαν ε8ωκε Τοργίψ άργύ- ριον τω Αεοντίνω. επει 8ε συνεγενετο εκείνω, Ικανός 17 'Ρομίσας η8η είναι και άρχειν καΧ φίλος ων τοις πρώτοις μη ηττασθαι ευεργετών, ί}λθεν εις ταύτας τάς σύν Κύρω πράξεις • και ωετο κτησεσθαι εκ του- ρτών όνομα μέγα καΧ δύΐΌ^ιιι/ μεγάλην και χρήματα πολλά ' τοσούτων 8 ' επιθυμων σφό8ρα εν8ηλον αύ 18 καΧ τούτο είχεν στι τούτων ού8έν αν θελοι κτασθαχ μετά αοικιας, άλλα συν τω 8ικαίω καΧ καλώ ώετο . 8εΙν τούτων τυγχάνειν, άνευ 8ε τούτων μη. Am a conunander he failed to inspire his men with either .^.&^..vC^.J?7-?17 ^ respect or fear. 25 "Αρχειν 8έ κάλων μεν και αγαθών 8υνατος Ijv • 19 ον μεντοι ούτ αιδώ τοΓ? στρατιώταις εαυτού ούτε φόβον ικανός εμποιησαι, άλλα και ησχύνετο μάλλον ANABASIS 11. 6. 20-25. 79 τους στρατιωτας η οΐ αρχόμενοι εκείνον • και φοβού- μενος μάλλον ην φανερός το άπεχθάνεσθαι τοις στρατιώταις η οι στρατιώται το άπιστεΐν εκείνω, ωετο 8ε άρκεΐν προς το άρχικον eti^ai και 8οκεΐν τον2β 5 μεν καλώς ποιουντα επαινεΐν, τον 8ε ά8ικουντα μη επαινεΐν. τοιγαρουν αύτω οΐ μεν καλοί τε και αγα- θοί των συνόντων ευνοι ήσαν, οι 8ε άδικοι επεβού- λευον ως εύμεταχειρίστω όντι. δτε 8έ άπεθνησκεν ^ ην ετών ως τριάκοντα. Menon's greed for gain was appalling. He was a bad and shame- less man, without a single redeeming quality. 10 Μένων 8έ 6 Θετταλος διπλός ην επιθυμων /χ,€ΐ/21 πλουτείν Ισχυρώς, επιθυμων 8έ άρχειν, όπως πλείω λαμβάνοι, επιθυμων 8έ τιμάσθαι, ίνα πλείω κερ8αί- νοι • φίλος τε εβούλετο βΐϊ'αι τοις μέγιστα 8υναμετ νοις, ίνα ά8ικών μη 8ι8οίη 8ίκην. επι 8ε το κατερ-22 Ιδγάζεσ^αι ων επιθυμοίη σνντομωτάτην ωετο 68ον Clival δια του επιορκείν τε και ψευδεσ^αι και ε^απα- τάν, το δ' απλούν και άληθες το αύτο τω ηλιθίω είναι, στέργων 8ε φανερός μεν ην ού8ένα, δτω δε 23 φαίη φίλος είναι, τούτω εν8ηλος εγίγνετο επιβου- -Ολενωΐ'. και πολεμίου μεν ού8ενος κατεγελα, τών δε συνόιη'ων πάντων ως καταγελών αεί διελεγετο. και 24 τοΓ? μεν τών πολεμίων κτημασιν ουκ επεβούλευε- χαλεποί' γαρ ωετο είϊ/αι τά τών φυλαττομενων λαμ- βάνειν ' τά δε τών φίλων μόνος ωετο ε18εναι ραστον 25 ον αφύλακτα λαμβάνειν, και όσους μεν αίσθάνοιτο 25 επίορκους και άδικους ως ευ ώπλισ μένους εφοβεΐτο, τοις δε οσίοις και άλτ/^ειαι/ άσκουσίϊ^ ως άνάν8ροις επειράτο χρησθαι. • οοο t' Hi ί^ ■ 80 ANABASIS II. 6. 2^-30. *ίΙσ7Γ€ρ 8c Tts άγάλ\€ταυ €πΙ θ€οσ€β€ία και άλψ26 θ^ίακαΐ ^ικαιστητι, οϋτω Mevwv ήγάλλβτο τω Ιξαττα- ταν hvvaaOaij τψ πΧάσασθαι φύν^η, τω φίλους hiayekap • top Sc μη παρονργον τωρ άπαι8€ντωρ del 5 €ρόμίζ€Ρ cti/at. καΐ παρ* oh μ€Ρ €π€χ€ίρ€ί πρωτ€ν€ΐρ φίλία^ ^ιαβάλλωρ τους πρώτους τούτο ω€Τ0 help κτήσασθοΛ, το δέ π€ίθομ€Ρους Toifs στρατιώτας^Ι παρ€χ€σθαι €Κ του συρα8ίΚ€Ϊρ αύτοΐς ίμηχαρατο. τιμασθοΛ δέ καΧ θ€ραπ€ύ€σθαί ήξίου €πί8€ΐκρυμ€Ρος 10 on TrXcfcora Βύραιτο καΐ ΙθέΧοι αρ ά8ικ€Ϊρ» eiepye- σίαρ δέ κατ€\€γ€Ρ, 6πότ€ τις αύτου άφίστατο, οτι γ^ρώμ€Ρος αυτω ουκ άπώλ€σ€Ρ αύτόρ. καΐ τα μερ 8η 28 άφαρη efcoTi π€ρΙ αύτου φεύΒεσθαι, α δε πάρτες Ισασι τάδ' €στι. πάρα Αρίστιππου μ€Ρ en ωραίος ΙΒωρ στρατηγειρ Βιεπράξατο τωρ ξ€pωPJ Άριαίω δέ βαρβάρω optl, otl μειρακίοις κα\οΙς rjSerOj οΙκ€ΐό- τατος en ωραίος ωρ eyiveroj αυτός δέ παιδικά είχε θαρύπαρ άγ€Ρ€ΐος ωρ γερειωρτα. His end was fitting. — The other two generals. * Αποθρησκόρτωρ he τωρ συστρατηγωρ otl €(ττρά'2Β 20τ€υσαρ ίπΐ ^8ασιλ€α συρ Κύρω, ταύτα πεποιηκώς ουκ απέθαρ€, μετά δέ top τωρ άλλωρ θάρατορ στρα- τηγωρ τιμωρηθείς ύπο βασιλέως άπεθαρερ, ούχ ωσπερ Κλέαρχος καΐ οΐ άλλοι στρατηγοί άποτμη- θεντες τάς κεφάλας, δσπερ τάχιστος θάρατος δοκβι 25€ΐϊ/αΐ5 άλλα ζωρ αΐκισθεις εριαυτορ ως πορηρος λέγεται της τελευτης τυχειρ. * Αγίας δέ 6 ^ Αρκάς και Σωκράτης 6 * Αχαιός και 30 τούτω απεθαρετηρ. τούτωρ δέ ούθ* ώς ερ πολεμώ ANABASIS ΙΠ. ι. 1-3. 81 κακωρ ούΖεις κατεγέλα ούτ εις φιλίαρ αυτούς εμεμ- φετο. ηστηρ δέ άμφω άμφι τα περτε καΐ τριάκορτα ετη άπο γερεάς. BOOK III. Distress of the Greeks at the loss of their leaders. Ι.Γθσα μερ 8η ερ τη Κύρου άραβάσει οΐ "Έλληρες 1 5 επραξαρ μ^χρι της μάχης, και δσα επεί Κύρος ετε- λεύτησερ εγερετο άπιόρτωρ τωρ Έλλήρωρ συρ Τισ- σαφερρει ερ ταΐς σπορ8αΐς, ερ τω πρόσθερ λόγω δe δτ^'λωταιΠ €π€ΐ 8ε οι στρατηγοί συρειλημμενοι ησαρ 2 και τωρ λοχαγωρ και τωρ στρατιωτωρ οΐ συρεπόμε- 10 ροι άπωλώλεσαρ, ερ πολλή 8η απορία ησαρ οι Ελ- ληρες, ερροούμεροι μ€Ρ ση επι ταΐς )8ασιλ€ως θύραις ησαρ, κύκλω 8ε αύτοΐς πάρτη πολλά και εθρη και πόλεις πολεμιαι ζρ-αρ, άγοράρ όε ουόεις en παρεξειρ εμελλερ, άπεΐχορ δέ της Ελλάδος ού μεΐορ η μύρια 15 στάδια, ήγεμώρ δ' ονδβις της 68ού ηρ, ποταμοί 8ε 8ιεΐργορ ά8ιάβατοι ερ μέσω της οΓκαδε 68ού, πρου- 8ε8ώκεσαρ 8ε αυτούς και οΐ σύρ Κύρω άραβάρτες βάρβαροι, μόροι 8ε καταλελειμμεροι ησαρ ού8ε Ιππεα ού8ερα σύμμαχορ εχορτες, ώστε €υ8ηλορ ηρ 20 ΟΤΙ ρικωρτες μερ ού8ερα άρ κατακάροιερ, ηττηθεντωρ 8ε αύτωρ ουδείς άρ λειφθείη • ταύτ ερροούμεροι καΧ 3 άθύμως εχορτες ολίγοι μερ αύτωρ εις τηρ εσπεραρ σίτου εγεύσαρτο, ολίγοι 8ε πυρ άρέκαυσαρ, επΙ 8ε τα όπλα πολλοί ούκ ηλθορ ταύτηρ τηρ ρύκτα, άρεπαύ- 25 01^0 δε οπού ετύγχαρερ έκαστος, ού 8υράμεροι καθεύ- 8ειρ ύπο λύπης και πόθου πατρί8ωρ, γορέωρ^-γυραι- cf./^ α i> .1, ri?? > ; < 82 ANABASIS in. i. 4-θ. / IT Α.- V χ ΓΑ L.. £ κωρ, παίδων, ους ονπστ Ινόμιζον en οφ^σθαι. οντω μ€Ρ 8η 8ίακ€ίμ€Ρ0ΐ πάντ€ς άν€πανορτο, Xenoplion's connection with the expedition. Socrates and the Delphic oracle. Ήι/ δ€ τις ip Tjj στρατιά Β€Ρθφωρ ^Αθηροίος, ος 4 όντ€ στρατηγός οντ€ λοχαγός οντ€ στρατιώτης ώρ L• σνρηκοΚονθ^ι, άλλα ΙΙρόζερος αντορ /χ€Τ€7Γ€/χψατο oiKo0€p ξέρος ώρ αρχαίος • νπισχράτο δβ αύτω, ά iXdoiy φίλορ αντορ Κνρω ποιησειρ, ορ αντος ίφη κρζίττω €αι;τω ρομίζ€ΐρ της πατρίδος. 6 μ€ΡΤ0ΐ 5 Β€Ρθφωρ άραγρούς τηρ έπιστοληρ άρακοιρονται 2ω- 10 κράτ€ΐ τω Άθηραίω wepl της πορείας, καΐ 6 ^ωκρά- > της υττοπτεύσας μη τι προς της πόλεως νπαίτιορ €ΐη Κνρω φίλορ γ€Ρ€σθαι, δτι iSoKei 6 Κύρος προθνμως τοΙς Κακ^αιμορίοις ίπΐ τας *Αθηρας σνμπολεμησαι, συμβουλεύει τω Βεροφωρτι ελθόρτα εις Αελφούς άρα- ί^κοιρώσαι τω θεω περί της πορείας, ελθώρ 8' ο Έερο- 6 φώρ Ιπηρετο Thp Άπόλλω τίρι άρ θεωρ θύωρ καΐ ευχόμερος κάλλιστα και άριστα ελθοι τηρ 68ορ ηρ επιροεΐ και καλώς πρόζας σωθείη. καΧ αρεΐλερ αυτώ ο *Απ6λλωρ θεοΐς οΐς eSct θύειρ. επει 8ε παλιρ ^λθε, 7 2θλ€γ€ΐ τηρ μαρτείαρ τω %ωκράτει. ο δ' άκουσας ητι- ατο αυτορ οτι ου τούτο πρώτορ ήρώτα πότερορ λώορ εΐη αντω πορενεσθαι η μερειρ, αλλ' αντος κρίρας Ιτεορ είΡΟΛ τουτ επυρθάρετο δπως άρ κάλλιστα πο- ' ρ€υθείη. επει μερτοι ούτως η ρου, ταυτ\ εφη, χρη 2&ποιεΐρ δσα 6 θεός εκελευσερ. i* /τ'. '.' ^^.^ Xenophon had been led by false representations to join Cyrus. *0 μερ 8η Βεροφώρ ούτω θυσάμερος οΐς αρεΐλερ ο 8 θεος^ εξεπλει, καΧ καταλαμβάρει ερ %άρ8εσι ΙΙρόζερορ ANABASIS III. χ. 9-13. 83 και Κυρορ μελλορτας η8η ορμαρ τηρ άρω o86pj και συρεστάθη Κύρω. προθυμουμερου 8έ τουηροξέρου^ 9 και 6 Κύρος συμπρουθυμείτο μείραι αύτόρ, είπε 8ε στι επει8άρ τάχιστα η στρατεία λήξη, ευθύς άποπεμ- 6ψ€ΐ αύτάρ. ελεγετο 8ε 6 στόλος είραι εΙς Πισίδας:. εστρατεύετο μερ 8η ούτως εξαπατηθείς — ούχ ύποΙΟ ηροξερου • ου γαρ ηδει τηρ επι βασιλέα ορμηρ ου8ε^ άλλος οΰδβΐς τώρ Έλληρωρ πληρ Κλεάρχου- επει μερτοι εις Κιλικίαρ ^λθορ, σαφές πάσιρ η8η ε8όκει^ 10 εΙραι δτι 6 στόλος εΐη επΙ ^δασιλεα/ φοβούμεροι 8ε jl τηρ 68ορ καΐ άκορτες δμως οΐ πολλοί δι* αίσχύρηρ καΐ άλληλωρ καΐ Κύρου συρηκολούθησαρ • &ρ εΐς καΐ Βεροφωρ ηρ^ ' Xenophon*s dream. ..€1 8ε απορία ηρ, ελυπεϊτο μερ συρ τοις άλλοις 11 Ι^κα^ούκ ε8ύρατο καθεύ8ειρ • μικρορ δ' υπρου λαχώρ εΐ^ερ οραρ. ίδοξερ αύτω βρορτης γερομερης σκη- ΤΓΓος πεσειρ εις τηρ πατρωαρ οικίαρ, καΐ έκ τούτου λάμπεσθαι πάσα. περίφοβος 8\€νθύς άρηγέρθη,νζ καΐ το οραρ τη μερ εκριρερ άγαθόρ, οτι ερ πόροις^ ώρ^ 20 καΧ κΐρ8ύροις φώς μέγα εκ Δώς ι8εΙρ €δο£€ • τη 8ε καΧ Ιφοβείτο, στι άπο Δώς μερ βασιλέως το οραρ 48όκει αύτω εΧραι, κύκλω 8ε ε^όκει λάμπεσθαι το . πυρ, μη ού8ύραιτο Ικ της χώρας ΙξελθεΙρ της βασι- λέως άλλ' ειργοιτο πάρτοθερ υπό τιρωρ άποριώρ. 25 όποιοι/ τι μερ 8η εστί το τοιουτορ οραρ 18εΐρ εξεστιΐ3 σκοπεΐρ εκ τώρ συμβάρτωρ μετά το οραρ. γίγρετοχ γάρ τάδ€. €νθύς €7Γ€ΐδή άρηγέρθη πρώτορ μερ έρροια αύτώ εμπίπτει • τί κατάκειμαι ; η 8k ρύξ προβαίρει • 84 ANABASIS III. i. 14-ia αμα δέ Tjj ημψα €ΐκος τους πο\€μίονς ηξ^ιν. ά δέ γ€νησόμ€θα έπΙ βασίλ€Ϊ, τι ίμττο^ώρ μη ονχΐ πάντα μ€ν τα χαλεττώτατα iwiiopraq πάντα δέ τα heipa- τατα παθόρταζ υβριζομ4νονς άποθαν€ΐν ; όπως δ' ^άμννονμ^θα ούδ€ΐ5 παρασκευάζεται ουδέ cVt/xcXctrat, 5λλά κατακείμεθα ωσπερ Ιξον ήσνχίαν ayeiv. βγω 14 ουν τον Ικ ποίας πόλεως στρατηγον προσδοκώ ταντα πράξειν ; ποίαν δ' ηΚικίαν εμαντω ελθεΐν ai/a/AcW; οι; γαρ €γωγ* en πρεσβύτερος εσομαι, εάν τημερον 10 προ8ώ εμαυτον τοις πολεμίοις. Address of Xenophon to the captains of Proxenus. No hope of mercy from the king. Eic τούτον άνίσταταί καΐ συγκαλεί τους ΤΙροξενου 15 πρώτον λοχαγούς, επεί 8ε σννηλθον, ελεξεν • Έγώ, ω ανΒρες λοχαγοί, ούτε καθεύΒειν διίι/α^αι, ωσπερ ot/xat οι5δ' ύμεΐς, ούτε κατακεΐσθαί en, ορών εν οΐοις 15 εσμεν. οΐ μεν γαρ πολέμιοι ίηλον δτι ου πρότερον 16 προς ημάς τον πόλεμον εξεφηναν πριν cVo/xwrai/ καλώς τα εαυτών παρασκενάσασθαι, ημών δ' ού8εις ονσεν άντεπιμελεΐται όπως ως κάλλιστα άγωνιού- μεθα. και μην ει ύφησόμεθα και επι ^ασιλεΓ γένη- η 2ύσόμεθα, τί οΐόμεθα πείσεσθαι; δς και του ομομη- τρίου αδελφού και τεθνηκότος η8η άποτεμών την κεφαλήν καΐ την χείρα άνεσταύρωσεν • ημάς 8ε, οΐς κη^εμών μεν ον8εΙς πάρεστιν, εστρατ€υσαμεν 8ε επ* αντον ως 8ουλον άντΙ ^βασιλεω? ποιησοντες και άπο- 25 κτενονντες εΐ 8υναίμεθα, τί αν οΐόμεθα παθεΐν ; αρ* ig ουκ αν έπι παν ελθοι ως ημάς τα έσχατα αΐκισάμετ νος πάσιν άνθρώποις φόβον παράσχοι του στρατευ- ,£, ^ C L *' β * ^ > Ι — αυΤίτΐ ^. f f ANABASIS III. i. 19-23. 85 σαί ποτέ επ* αυτόν,' αλλ' όπως τοι μη επ εκεινω γενησόμεθα πάντα ποιητεον. Open war is better than treacherous peace. 'Ενώ μεν ουν εστε μεν αί σπον^αι ήσαν ουποτεΐ9 επαυόμην ημάς μεν οίκτ^ίρων, )3α<Γΐλ€α δέ και τους β συν αύτω μακαρίζων, Ζιαθεώμενος αυτών οσην μεν χώραν και οΐαν εχοιεν, ως δε άφθονα τα επιτήδεια, δσους δε θεράποντας, οσα δε κτήνη, χρυσον δε, εσθητα δε- τα δ' αυ τών στρατιωτών οπότε ενθυ-'ΐίβ μοίμην, ότι τών μεν αγαθών τούτων ούΒενος ημΐν ΐΟμετείη ει μη πριαίμεθα, ότου δ' ώνησόμεθα ySetv ^ en ολίγους έχοντας, άλλως δε πως πορίζεσθαι τα επιτήδεια η ώνουμενους όρκους ηΒη κατέχοντας ημάς- ταυτ ουν λογιζόμενος ενίοτε τάς σπονοάς ί~ μάλλον εφοβούμην η νυν τον πόλεμον, επεΙ /Λει/τοΐ21 15 εκείνοι έλυσαν τάς σπονΒάς, λελυοτβαι μοι οοκεΐ και η εκείνων ύβρις και η ημέτερα ασάφεια, εν μέσω γαρ ηΒη κείται ταύτα τα αγαθά α^λα οποτεροι αν ημών άνδρες άμείνονες ωσιν, άγωνοθεται δ' οί θεοί^^"^ είσιν, οί σνν ημΐν, ως το εΙκός, έσονται, ούτοι μεν 22 20 γάρ αυτούς έπιωρκηκασιν • ημείς δε ττολλά ορώντες αγαθά στερρώς αυτών άπειχόμεθα δια τους τών θεών όρκους • ώστε εζεΐναί μοι Βοκεΐ Ιεναι επι τον ίΐνώϊ^α πολύ σύν φρονηματι μείζονι η τούτοις. eri23 δ' εχομεν σώματα Ικανώτερα τούτων καΐ ψιίχτ^ '^^^^ 25 θάλπη καΐ πόνους φερειν • εχομεν δε και φυχάς συν τοις θεοίς άμείνονας • οί δε άνδρες και τρωτοί και θνητοί μάλλον ημών, ην οί θεοί ωσπερ το πρόσθεν νίκην ημΐν διδώοΊΐ^. χ^ ι Mt οι* it μιι,.^, Ο ■; " 'fJ' > 86 Al^ABASIS III. ι. 24-29. Xenophon urges immediate action. He will follow or lead. Άλλ' ίετως γαρ και άλλοι ταύτα ενθυμούνται, προς 24 των θ€ων μη άναμ€νωμ€ν άλλους Ιφ' ημάς iXOelv παρακαλουντας cm τα κάλλιστα €ργα, αλλ' ημ^ίς αρξωμεν τον ίξορμησαι καΧ τους άλλους Ιπί την 6 άρ€την * φάνητ€ των λοχαγών άριστοι και των στρατηγών άζιοστρατηγότ€ροι. κάγώ Si, ci μεν 25 υ/ϋΐ€ΐς €ϋ€λ€Τ€ €ξορμαν επι ταύτα, επεσυαι υμιν ρον λομαι, €1 δ' ύ/χ€Γς τάττετέ μ€ ηγείσθαι, ovSev προφα- σίζομαι την ηλικίαν, άλλα και άκμάζειν ηγούμαι 10 €ρύκ€ΐν απ c /χαυτου τα κακά. All urge Xenophon to take command, except ApoUonides. Xenophon's reply to him. *0 μ€ν ταντ ελεξεν, ol δε λο^^αγοί άκουσ-αι/τες 26 Ύfγ€ίσθ αι έκέλενον πάντες, πλην ^ ΚπολλωνίΖης τις ijv βοιωτιάζων τη φωνή. οντος δ' είπεν οτι φλυα- ροίη όστις λέγει άλλως πως σωτηρίας αν τυχεΐν η Ι&βαχτιλεα πείσας ει Βύναιτο • και άμα ηρχετο λέγειν τάς απορίας. 6 μεντοι Β,ενοφων μεταξύ ύπολαβων2ΐ ελεξεν ω8ε. *β θανμασιωτατε άνθρωπε, συγε ουδέ ορών γιγνωσκεις ουδέ άκουων μεμνησαι. εν ταντω γε μεντοι ησθα τούτοις δτε βασιλεύς, επεί Κύρος W απέθανε, καταφρονησας επι τούτω πέμπων εκελενε παραΒι86ναι τα όπλα. επεΙ 8ε ημείς ου παραΒόντες28 αλλ' εξοπλισάμενοι έλθόντες παρεσκηνησαμεν αύτω, τί ουκ εποίησε πρέσβεις πέμπων καΐ σπονΒάς αιτών και παρέχων τα επιτήδεια, εστε σπονδών ετυχεν ; 2ΒεπεΙ δ' αϊ οΐ στρατηγοί και λοχαγοί, ωσπερ 8η συ2Β κελεύεις, εις λόγους αντοΐς άνευ δπλων "^λθον πι- στεύσαντες ταΐς σπον^αΐς, ου ννν εκείνοι παιόμενοι^ ANABASIS III. ι. 30-34. 87 κεντούμενοι, ύβριζόμενοι ουδέ άποθανεΐν οΐ τλημονες δύνανται, και μάλ' οΐμαι ερώντες τούτου; α συ πάντα ει8ώς τους μεν άμύνεσθαι κελεύοντας φλυα- ρεΐν φχις^ πείθειν δέ πάλιν κελεύεις ιοντας ; εμοι, ω 30 5 άνδρες, δοκεΐ τον άνθρωπον τούτον μήτε προσίεσθαι εις ταυτον ημΐν αντοις, άφελομ4νους τε την λοχαγίαν σκεύη άναθέντας ως τοιούτω χρησθαι. ούτος γαρ καΐ την πατρίδα καταισχύνει και πάσαν την Ελ- λάδα, ΟΤΙ 'Έλλην ων τοιούτος εστίν* ApoUonides is expelled, and a meeting of officers is called. 10 ^Εντεύθεν ύπολαβών Άγασιας ^τυμφάλιος εΐπεν • 31 Άλλα τούτω γε ούτε της Βοιωτίας προσήκει ούδεν ούτε της 'Ελλάδος παντάπασιν, επει εγώ αυτόν εΊΖον ωσπερ Αυδον αμφότερα τα ωτα τετρυπημενον. και εΐχεν ούτως, τούτον μεν ουν άπηλασαν - οι δε άλ-32 15 λοι παρά τάς τάζεις ιόντες δπου μεν στρατηγός σώς εΐη τον στρατηγον παρεκάλουν, οπόθεν δε οΐχοιτο τον ύποστράτηγον, δπου δ' αυ λοχαγός σώς εΐη τον λοχαγόν. επει δε πάντες συνηλθον, εΙς το πρόσθεν 33 τών δπλων εκαθεζοντο • και εγένοντο οι συνελθόντες 20 στρατηγοί και λοχαγοί άμφΐ τους εκατόν, δτε δε ταύτα ην ^σχεδόν /teVai ήσαν νύκτες, ενταύθα Ίερώ-Μ νυμος ΉλεΓος πρεσβύτατος ων τών ΤΙροξένου λοχα- γών ηρχετο λέγειν ώδε. '"ΆμΙν, ω άνδρες στρατηγοί " ^ καΧ λοχαγοί, δρώσι τα παρόντα εδοξε και αύτοις 25σννελθεΐν καΐ υμάς παρακαλεσαι, δπως βουλευσαί- μέθα ει τι δυναίμεθα aya^oj'. λεξον δ% εφη, και συ, ω Β^νοφών, άπερ και προς ημάς. ι\ *ί ο ο ANABASIS III. ι. 35-38. Address of Xenophon. Great responsibility of the officers. 'Eic τούτου Xeyet τάδε Β€νοφών. Άλλα ταύτα μ€Ρ3δ 8η ΊΓάντ€ς ίπιστάμεθα ση βασίλ€νς καΐ Ίισσαφέρ- νης ους μέρ €8υνηθησαρ (Γυν€ί\ηφασι.ν ημών, τοις δ' άλλοίς 8ηλορ ση ίτηβουΧεύουσιν, ως ην 8ύνωνταί ^αποΧέσωσιν, ημΐν δε γ€ οΐμαι πάντα ττοιητέα ως μηποτ€ iwl τοις βαρβάροις γ€νώμ€θα, άλλα μάλλον €Κ€ΐνοι έφ' ημΐν. €υ τοίνυν έπίχττασθ^ ση ύμ€Ϊς3β τοσούτοι 6ντ€ς όσοι νυν συν€λη\ύθατ€ μέγιστον €χ€Τ€ καιρόν, οΐ γαρ στρατιωται ούτοι πάντβς προς ΙΟ υμάς β\4πουσι, καν μίν υμάς ορωσιν άθυμουντας, πάντ€ς κακοί ίσονται, ην δε υμ€ΐς αυτοί τε πάρα- σκ€υαζόμ€νοι φανεροί ητ€ €πι τοίίς πολεμίους καΐ τους άλλους παρακαλητε, εν Γστε ση ίήιονται ύμΐν και πειράσονται μιμεΐσθαι. ίσως δε τοι και 8ίκαιόν2^ l^ioTiv υμάς Βιαφερειν τι τούτων, ύμεις γαρ εστε στρατηγοί, ύμεΐς ταξίαρχοι και λοχαγοί- και οτ€ €ΐρηνη ην, ύμεΐς και χρημασι και τιμαις τούτων €πλ€ον€κτ€ΐτ€ * και νυν τοίνυν^ επεί πόλεμος εστιν^ αζιουν δει ύ^ια? αυτούς άμείνους τε του πλήθους 20εΙι/αί, καΐ προβουλεύειν τούτων και προπονεΐν ην που heQ. They must choose new officers and encourage the dejected soldiers. Και νυν πρώτον μεν οΤ/χαι αν υμάς μέγα ώφελη-38 σ-αι το στράτευμα, ει επιμεληθείητε όπως άντΙ των άπολωλστων φς τάχιστα στρατηγοί και λοχαγοί 2^αντικατασταθωσιν. άνευ γαρ αρχόντων ούΒεν αν οίτε καλόν ούτε αγαθόν γένοιτο ως μεν συνελόντι εΙπεΐν ουΒαμου, εν δε δι^ "^οϊ? πολεμικοΐς παντάπασιν. m ANABASIS LU. ι. 39-4δ. 89 ή μεν γαρ εχπαξία σωζειν 8οκεΐ, η δε αταξία πολλούς ηέη άπολώλεκεν. επεώάν δε καταστησησθε τους αρ-39 χοντας όσους δει, 171^ καΐ τους άλλους στρατιώτας συλ- λεγητε καΐ παραθαρρύνητε, οΐμαι αν υμάς πάνυ εν ^ καιρώ ποιησαι. νυν γαρ ίσως και ύμεΐς αισθάνεσθε40 ως άθύμως μεν ηλθον έπΙ τα όπλα, άθύμως δε προς τάς φύλακας • ώστε ούτω γ' εχόντων ουκ οίδα ο τι αν τις χρησαιτο αύτοΐς είτε νυκτός δεοι είτε και ημέρας, ην δε τις αυτών τρεφη τάς γνώμας, ως μη τούτο 41 10 μόνον εννοωνται τί πείσονται άλλα και τι ποιησουσι, πολύ ευθυμότεροι έσονται, επίστασθε γαρ 8η on 42 ούτε πληθός εστίν ούτε ισχύς η εν τω πολεμώ τάς νίκας ποιούσα, αλλ' οπότεροι αν σύν τοις θεοΐς ταΐς ψνχαι? ερρωμενεστεροι ΐωσιν έπΙ τους πολεμίους, 15 τούτους ως επΙ το πολύ οι άντίοι ου 8€χονται. εντε-43 ^υ/Ατ^/ϋΐαι δ' εγωγε, ω αν8ρες, και τούτο, ότι όπόσοι μεν μαστεύουσι ζην εκ παντός τρόπου εν τοΙς πολε- μικοΐς, ούτοι μεν κακίος τε καΐ αισχρως ως έπΙ το πολύ άποθνησκουσιν, όπόσοι δε τον μεν θάνατον 20εγνώκασι πάσι κοινον είι/αι καΐ άναγκαΐον άνθρώ- ποις, περί δε του καλώς άποθνησκειν αγωνίζονται, τούτους όρω μάλλον πως εΙς το γήρας άφικνουμενους και εως αν ζωσιν ευ8αιμονεστερον 8ιάγοντας. α και 44 ημάς δει νυν καταμαθόντας, εν τοιούτω γαρ καιρώ 25 εσμεν, αυτούς τε αν8ρας αγαθούς είναι και τους άλ- λους παρακαλεΐν. Speech of Chirisophus. Five new generals are chosen, Xenophon taking the place of Proxenus. Ό μεν ταύτα εΙπών επαύσατο. μετά δε τούτον 45 είπε Χειρίσοφος- *Αλλά πρόσθεν μεν, ω Βενοφων, 90 ANABASIS III. i. 46, 47 and a. 1-3. τοσούτον μόνον crc €γίγνωσκον όσον ηκουον *Αθψ ναΐον elvcu, νυν δε καΐ επαινώ ere Ιφ* otq Xeyeis Τ€ και πραττ€ίς καΐ βουλοίμην αν οτι πλείστους eivai τοιοντον<ζ • KOLVOV γαρ αν εΐη το αγαθόν, καΐ νυν, 46 ^€φη, μη μ€λλωμ€ν, ω avSpes, (χλλ* απ€λθόντ€ς τβη αΙρ€Ϊσθ€ οΐ Β€Ομ€νοί άρχοντας, καΐ €λόμ€νου ηκ€Τ€ €19 το μέσον τον στρατοπέδου /cat τους αίρ^θέντας aycTC • €7Γ«τ' c/cct σνγκα\ονμ€ν τους άλλους στρα- τιωτας. παρέστω δ' ημΐν, έφη, καΐ Ύολμί8ης 047 10 κήρυξ, καΐ άμα ταυτ €ΐπών ανέστη, ως μη μέλλοιτο άλλα irepalvoLTo τα Βέοντα. έκ τούτου ηρέθησαν άρχοντας άντΙ μ€ν Κλζάρχου Ύίμασίων Ααρ8αν€ύς, άντΙ δέ %ωκράτους Βανθικλης Άχαιο'ς, άνά U * Αγίου Κλζάνωρ Αρκάς, άντΙ δέ Μένωνος Φιλησίος 15 Ά;(αι09, άντΙ δέ ΙΙροξένου α€νοφών ^Αθηναίος. Assembly of the soldiers. Speech of Chirisophus. n. Έττεί δβ ηρηντο, ημέρα Τ€ σχεδοι/ ύττέφαινε ι καΐ €ΐς το μέσον ηκον οΐ άρχοντ€ς, καΐ ίΒοξζν αύ- τοΐς ττροφυλακάς καταστησαντας συγκαλέίν τους στρατιώτας. Ιπέί δε και οί άλλοι στρατιωται συν 2θηλθον, ανέστη πρώτος μ€ν Χ^ιρίσοφος 6 Λακεδαι- μόνιος καί eXcfei' ίδδε. "Ανδρος στρατιωται, χαλεπά 2 μ€ν τα παρόντα, 6πότ€ άν8ρών στρατηγών τοιούτων στ€ρόμ€θα και λοχαγών και στρατιωτών, προς δ' ert και οι άμφι *Αριαΐον οΐ πρόσθεν σύμμαχοι οντ€ς 2δ 7Γ/)oδcδc5ιcασtϊ' ημάς • όμως δε δει έκ τών παρόντων 3 άνδρας αγαθούς τέλέθειν καΐ μη υφίεσθαι, άλλα πει- ράσθαι όπως ην μέν δυνώμεθα καλώς νικώντας σωζώ- μ€θα ' €1 δε μη, άλλα καλώς γε άποθνησκωμ€ν, ANABASIS ΠΙ. 2. 4-7. t/X υποχείριοι δε μη8έποτ€ γενώμεθα ζώντες τοις πόλε- μιοις. οιμαι γαρ αν ημάς τοιαύτα παθεΐν οία τους εχθρούς οΐ θεοί ποιησειαν. Speech of Cleanor. Perfidy of the Persians. 'ΕπΙ τούτω Κλεάνωρ 6 ^Ορχομένιος ανέστη καΐ 4 5 ελεζεν ώδε. Άλλ' οράτε μέν, ω άνδρες, την βασι- λέως επιορκίαν καΐ άσέβειαν, οράτε δε την Τισσα- φέρνους άπιστίαν, όστις λέγων ως γείτων τε ειη της Έλλάδο? και περί πλείστου αν ποιησαιτο σώσ-αι ημάς, και επι τούτοις αύτος όμόσας ημΐν, αυτός 10 δεξιάς δούς, αύτος εξαπατησας συνέλαβε τους στρα- τηγούς, καΧ ούδε Αία ξένιον ηδέσθη, άλλα Κλεάρχω και ομοτράπεζος γενόμενος αύτοΐς τούτοις εξαπατη- σας τους άνδρας άπολώλεκεν. Άριαΐος δέ, ον ημείς 5 ηθέλομεν ^ασ"ΐ,λεα καθιστάναι, και εδώκαμεν και 15 έλάβομεν πιστά μη προδώσειν αλλήλους, καΧ ούτος ούτε τους θεούς δείσας ούτε Κύρον τεθνηκότα αΐδε- σθείς, τιμώμενος μάλιστα ύπο Κύρου ζώντος νυν προς τους εκείνου έχθίστους άποστάς ημάς τους Κύρου φίλους κακώς ποιεΐν πειράται, άλλα τούτους β 20 μ€ν οΐ θεοί άποτίσαιντο • ημάς δε δεϊ ταύτα ορώντας - ^ι μηποτε εξαπατηθηναι eri ύπο τούτων, άλλα μαχόμε- νους ώς αν δυνάμεθα κράτιστα τούτο δ τι αν δοκη τοις θεοΐς πάσχειν. / Xenophon, arrayed in his best armor, begins a long harangue (8-32). We must fight our way home and trust in the Gods. 'E/c τούτου Έενοφών άνίσταται εσταλμένος έπΧ 7 2^πόλεμον ώς έδύνατο κάλλιστα, νομίζων, είτε νίκην διδοΐεν οι θεοί, τον κάλλιστον κόσμον τω νικάν πρέ- πειν, είτε τελευτάν δέοι, ορθώς έχειν τών καλλίστων ■ ι ι i 1' ■ ft,i#X»i'^ ,_, T: β I J ,., Λα Τ S> I ί - fc ωχ »| J ANABASIS ill, a. 8-10. iavTOv αξιώσαντα iv τούτοις της τ€λ€ντης τνγχάν^ιρ • του \6yov δέ ηρχ€Τθ c58c. Την μ€Ρ των βαρβάρων 8 Ιτηορκίαν Τ€ kcCi άττιστίαν Xeyei μ€ν Κλεάνωρ, έπί- στασθε 8c καΧ νμ€Ϊς οΐ/ϋίαι. el ρΛν ουν βουλόμεθα ^Ίτάλίν αντοΐς δί-ά φιΧίας levai, ανάγκη ημάς πολλην άθνμίαν ίχειν, ορώντας καΧ τους στρατηγούς, οί δια πίστεως αντοΐς εαυτούς ενεχείρισαν, οΐα ττεπόνθασιν εΐ μεντοί ^ιανοούμεθα συν τοΙς οπΧοις ων τε πεποιψ κασι ^ίκην ειηθεΐναι αύτοΐς καΐ το λουπον δια παντός 10 πολέμου αύτοΐς Ιεναι, συν τοις θεοΐς πολλαΐ ημΐν καί καΚαΙ ελπίδες είσΐ σωτηρίας. Α sneeze is taken as a good omen, and Xenophon continues his speech. The Gods will be on our side. Ύουτο 8c λέγοντος αυτού πτάρνυταί τις, άκού- 9 σαντες δ' οΐ στρατιωται πάντες /ιια ορμή προσε- κύνησαν τον θεόν, καΐ 6 Βενοφών εΐπε • Αοκεΐ 15/jtot, ω ανΒρες, επεί περί σα/τηρίας ημών λεγόντων οΙωνος του Αώς του σωτηρος εφάνη, ευ^ασ^αι τω θεω τούτω θύσειν σωτήρια οπού αν πρώτον εις φιλίαν χωράν άφικώμεθα, συνεπεύξασθαι 8ε και τοις άλλοις θεοΐς θύσειν κατά δυι^α/Αί.!/. καΧ δτω 8οκεΐ ταύτ\ 20 εφη, άνατεινάτω την χείρα, καΐ άνετειναν άπαντες, εκ τούτου ηύζαντο και €παιαι/ισαΐ'. επει δέ τα των θέων καλώς εΐχεν, ηρχετο πάλιν ω8ε. ^Ετύγχανονιο λέγων οτι ττολλαΐ ιςαι καλαΐ €λ7Γΐδ€ς ημΐν εΐεν σωττ;- ρίας. πρώτον μεν γαρ ημείς μεν εμπεΒούμεν τους 25 των θέων όρκους, οί δέ πολφ,ιοι επιωρκηκασί τε καί τας σπόντας πάρα τους όρκους λελύκασιν. ούτω δ' εχόντων εικός τοις μεν πολεμίοις εναντίους είναι τους θεούς, ημΐν δέ συμμάχους, αΐπερ ικανοί €ίσι και ANABASIS III. 2. 11-15. 93 τους μεγάλους ταχύ μικρούς ποιεΐν καΐ τους μικρούς, καν εν Βεινοΐς ωσι, σωζειν ενπετως όταν βούλωνται. Our ancestors defeated the Persians at Marathon and Salamis, and you have done the same at Cunaxa. *Επ€ΐτα Βε^άναμνησω γαρ υμάς και τους των προ- 11 γόνων των ημέτερων κιν8ύνους, ίνα ει8ητε ως αγα- 6 ^019 τε ύμΐν προσήκει βΐϊ^αι σωζονταί τε συν τοΐς θεοΐς και εκ πάνυ Βεινων οι αγαθοί^ ελθόντων μεν γαρ ΙΙερσων καΐ των συν αυτοΐς παμπληθεΐ στόλω ως άφανιούντων τάς Άθηνας, ύποστηναι αύτοΙ ^Αθψ ναΐοι τολμησαντες ενίκησαν αυτούς, καΐ εύζάμενοι 12 10 ττ) *Αρτέμι8ι οπόσους κατακάνοιεν των πολεμίων τοσαύτας χιμαίρας καταθύσειν τη θεω, επει ουκ εΐχον ικανάς εύρεΐν, εΒοξεν αύτοΐς κατ ενιαυτον πεν- τακόσιας θύειν, και eri νυν άποθύουσιν. έπειτα δτε 13 Β,ερξης ύστερον άγείρας την άναρίθμητον στρατιάν Ι^ηλθεν επι την Ελλάδα, και τ^τε ενίκων οΐ ημέτεροι πρόγονοι τους τούτων προγόνους και κατά γην και κατά θάλατταν. ων ebri μεν τεκμήρια οράν τά τρό- παια, μέγιστον δ^ μνημεΐον η ελευθερία των πόλεων εν αΐς ύμεΐς εγενεσθε καί ετράφητε • ούδει^α γαρ ^ 20 άνθρωπον 8εσπότην αλλά τους θεούς προσκυνείτε, τοιούτων μεν εστε προγόνων, ου μεν hrj τουτό ye 14 ερω ως ύμεΐς καταισχύνετε αυτούς • αλλ' ούπω πολλαι ημεραι άφ* ου άντιταξάμενοι τούτοις τοΐς εκείνων εκγόνοις πολλαπλασίους ύμων ενικάτε συν 25 τοΐς θεοΐς. You have tried the Persians and found them cowards. Their cavalry are merely so many men. Και τστε μεν Srj περί της Κύρου βασιλείας άν8ρες 15 ^TC άγαμοι• νυν h* οπότε περί της υμετέρας σωτη- ff α.«.•τβΜ'5 94 ANABASIS m. 2. 16-19. ριας ο αγώι/ eWt πολν 8ηπον ύμας προσήκει καΐ άμείρορας καΐ 7ΓροθνμσΓ€ρονς etpcu, άλλα μηρ καΐ 16 0αρραλ€ωτ€ρονς ρνρ πρέτΓ€ΐ dpoi προς Toif^ woke- μίονς. TOTC μ€Ρ γαρ άπειροι ορτες αντωρ τό Τ€ πλη- &θος αμ€τρορ ορωρτες, όμως €τολμη(τατ€ σνρ τω πατριχύ φρορηματι Icpol ctg αύτονς • pvp δε 6πότ€ καΐ π€Ϊραρ 'η8η €χ€Τ€ αντωρ ση ου θέΧουσι καΧ ίγοΚ- λαττλάσιοι 6ρτ€ς ^εχεσθαι ν μας, τι en νμΐρ προ(Γηκ€ί τούτους φοβ€Ϊσθαι ; /χτ/δε μ4ρτοι τοντο μ€ΐορ Β6ξητ€ 17 10 €)(€LP, el οΐ KvpeiOL πρόσθ€Ρ σνρ ημΐρ ταττόμ€Ρθΐ pvp άφεστηκασίΡ, ετι γαρ ovtol κακίορές εισ-ι τωρ νφ* ημωρ ητΓημ€ρωρ • ίφατγορ γονρ προς €Κ€ίρονς κατά- λίπόρτ€ς ημάς, τονς δ' €θ4\ορτας φνγης αρχ€ΐρ πολν κρ€Ϊττορ σνρ τοις πολζμίοις ταττομέρονς η ίρ Ι&ΤΎ) ημετέρα τά^ει οραρ. εί δε τις νμωρ άθνμ€Ϊ ση 18 ημΐρ μ€Ρ ονκ €ΐσΙρ Ιππ€Ϊς, τοις δε πολεμίοις πολλοί πάρ€ΐσιρ, Ιρθνμηθητ€ δτι οΐ μύριοι ίππ€ΐς ovScp άλλο η μύριοι €ΐσιρ άρθρωποι • νπο μ€Ρ γαρ ΐππου €Ρ μάχη ούδεί? πωποτ€ οντ€ 8ηχθ€ΐς οντ€ \ακτισθάς 20 απέθαρ€Ρ, οι δε αρ^ρες είσιρ οΐ ποιονρτ€ς δ τι άρ ip ταΐς μάχαις γίγρηται. ονκονρ τωρ ιππ€ωρ πολν 19 Ύΐμ€ίς ε'π' ασφαΧ^στέρον οχήματος έσμερ -^ οΐ μ€Ρ γαρ €φ* ΐππωρ κρέμαρταχ φοβούμα/οι ονχ ημάς ^ ^ ' μόρορ άλλα και το καταπ€σ€ίρ • ημ€ίς δ' ε'πΐ γης 2ζ>βφηκσΓ€ς πολν μ€Ρ Ισχνρότ€ρορ παίσομ€Ρ ηρ τις προσίη, πολν δε μαλλορ οτον άρ βονλώμεθα τευξό- μ€θα. €ρΙ δε μόρω προ4χονσΐρ οι ιππείς ημάς • φ€ύγ€ΐρ αντοΐς άσφαλ€στ€ρόρ έστιρ η ημΐρ. ANABASIS III. 2. 20-23. 95 We can seize native guides who will be better than Tissapheraes ; it is cheaper to plunder than to buy provisions ; and no river is impassable at its source. Et δε δ^ τάς μ€Ρ μάχας θαρρείτε, δτι δε ούκετι 20 ημΐρ Ύισσαφερρης ηγησεται ουδέ ^βασιλεύς άγοράρ παρεξει, τοντο αχθεσθε, σκεφασθε πστερορ κρεΐττορ Ύισσαφερρηρ ηγεμόρα εχειρ, ος επιβονλεύωρ ημΐρ δφαρερός εστιρ, η ονς άρ ημείς άρ8ρας λαβόρτες τ^γεΓσβαι κελεύωμερ, οΐ εισορται οτι ηρ τι περί ημάς άμαρτάρωσι περί τάς εαντωρ ψνχάς καΐ σώματα άμαρτάρονσι, τα δε ε'πιττ^δεια πότερορ ώρεΐσθαι21 κρεΐττορ εκ της αγοράς ης οντοι παρεΐχορ, μικρά 10 μέτρα πολλον άργνρίον, μη^ε τοντο ετι εχορτας, η αντονς λαμβάρειρ, ηρπερ κρατωμερ, μετρώ χρωμέ- νονς οπόσω άρ έκαστος βούληται. ει δε ταύτα μερ22 γιγρώσκετε δτι κρείττορα, τοίίς δε ποταμοΐίς απορορ ρομίζετε εΐραι καΐ μεγάλως ηγεΐσθε εξαπατηθηροι Ι^^ιαβάρτες, σκεφασθε ει άρα τοντο καΐ μωρότατορ πεποιηκασιρ οΐ βάρβαροι, πάντες γαρ ποταμοί, εΐ και πρόσω τωρ πηγωρ άποροι είσι, προίονσι προς τάς πηγάς διαβατοί γίγρορται ουδέ το γόρν βρεχορ- τες. ει δέ μηθ' οι πσταμοί ^ιησονσιρ ηγεμώρ τε23 20μη8εΙς ημΐρ φαρεΐται, ούδ' ως ημΐρ γε άθνμητεορ. έπιστάμεθα μερ γάρ Μνσονς, ονς ονκ άρ ημωρ φαίη- μερ βελτίονς εΐραι, οί έρ τη )8ασιλεω9 χώρα πολλάς τε και εν^αίμορας καΐ μεγάλας πόλεις οικονσιρ, έπι- στάμεθα δέ Πισιδας ωσαύτως, Ανκάορας δέ και 25 αύτοι εΐ8ομερ δτι ερ τοις πε^ίοις τά ερνμρά καταλα- βόρτες τηρ τούτωρ χώραρ καρπονρται. : \ -Xtm . ΕΜ,'τν t, μ. φ i,tV ■••*f • 0m4', t*- jim ♦•* . tantmA .. vH. . m ANABASIS in. a. 24-27. ANABASIS III. 2. 28-32. 97 If we pretended that we wished to remain here, the king would do his best to help us home. But we must go home ourselves and send our poor friends here to get rich. Kat ημάς 8' αν ίφηρ €γωγ€ χρηναι μηπω φαρ€-^ ρους €LvaL OLKaSe ωρμημ€Ρονς, άλλα κατασκ€νάζ€' σθοΛ ως αντον που οίκησοιττας. οίδα γαρ οτι καΐ Μνσοΐς βασίλ€υ<; πολλούς μ€ρ ηγεμόνας αν 8οίη, 5 πολλούς 8' αν ομήρους του ά^όλως €κπ€μ\}β€ίν, καΐ 68οποιησ€ΐ€ γ* άν αυτοΐς καΐ el συν τεθρίπποις βού- λοίντο απιεναι. καΐ ημΐν γ* άν οίδ' οτι τ ρισάσ μέ- νος ταυτ έποίει, el εώρα ημάς μένειν κατασκευαζό- μενους, άλλα yap SeSoiKa μη^ αν απα£ μάθωμεν2δ 10 άργοΙ ζην καϊ εν αφθόνοις βιοτεύειν, καΐ Μτ^'δωι/ 8e και ΙΙερσων καλαΐς καΐ μεγάλαις γυναίξϊ καΐ παρθε- νοις oμιλειvJ μη ωσπερ οί λοποφάγοι επιλαθώμεθα της οΐκαΒε 68ου. 8οκεΐ ουν μοι εΙκος καΧ 8ικαίον2β elvoL• πρώτον εΙς την Έλλά8α /cat προς τους οΙκείους 167Γ€ψασ^αι άφικνεΐσθαι καΐ έπιΒεΐξαί τοις "Έλλησιν ση έκόντες πένονται, εξόν αύτο^ζ τους ^ νυν σκληρως €Κξΐ ,πολιτεύοντας ενθάΖε κομισαμένρυς πλουσίους οραν. άλλα yap, ω ανόρες, πάντα ταύτα τάγαθα 8ηλον ΟΤΙ των κρατούντων εστί. We must burn our tents and wagons and get rid of all superfluous ^Aggage. Finally, the officers must be more vigilant and the soldiers more obedient than ever before. ao Ύουτο 8η 8εΐ λέγειν, όπως άν πορευοίμεθά τε ως 27 ασφαλέστατα καϊ el fta^^ea^at 8εοι ως κράτιστα μαχοΐμεθα. πρώτον μεν τοίνυν, εφη, 8οκεΐ μοι κατα- καυσαι τάς άμαξας ας εχομεν, ίνα μη τα ζεύγη ημών στρατηγη, άλλα πορενώμεθα οπη άν τη στρα- 2δτιψ συμφερη- έπειτα και τάς σκηνάς συγκατακαυ- trt"^ σ-αι. αύται γαρ αυ οχλον μεν παρεχουσιν άγειν, συνωφελουσι δ' ου8εν ούτε εις το /χάχεσ^αι ούτ εΙς το τα επιτη8εια εχειν. ετι 8ε καΧ των άλλων σκευών 28 τα περιττά άπαλλάξωμεν πλην δσα πολέμου ένεκεν 5 η σίτων η ποτών εχομεν, ίνα ως πλείστοι μεν ημών εν τοις οπλοις ωσιν, ως ελάχιστοι 8ε σκευοφορωσι. κρατουμένων μεν γαρ επίστασθε δτι πάντα αλλό- τρια • ην 8ε κρατωμεν, καΧ τους πολεμίους 8εί σκευ- οφόρους ημέτερους νομίζειν, λοιπόν μοι εΙπειν όπερ 29 10 και μεγιστον νομίζω είναι, οράτε γαρ καΧ τους πο- λεμίους ότι ου πράσθεν εξενεγκεΐν ετόλμησαν προς ημάς πόλεμον πρΙν τους στρατηγούς ημών συνελα- βον, νομίζοντες όντων μεν των αρχόντων και ημών πειθομενων ικανούς cij/ai ημάς περιγενεσθαι τω πο- 16 λφ,ω, λαβόντες 8ε τους άρχοντας αναρχία άν και αταξία ενόμιζον ημάς άπολεσθαι. 8εΐ ουν πολύ μεν 20 τους άρχοντας επιμελέστερους yci'ecr^ai τους νυν των πρόσθεν, πολύ 8ε τους αρχόμενους ευτακτοτε- ρους και πειθομένους μάλλον τοις άρχουσι νυν η 20πρόσθεν' ην 8ε τις άπειθτ), χίτηφίσασθαι τον aciSl υμών εντυγχάνοντα σύν τω άρχοντι κολάζειν ούτως οί πολέμιοι πλείστον εφευσμενοι έσονται, τη8ε γαρ τη ημ€ρα μύριους οψοι^ται άνθ" ενός Κλεάρχους τους ού8ενΙ επιτρέποντας κακω €ΐϊ/αι. άλλα γάρ καϊ πε-32 25 ραίνειν η8η ωρα ' ίσως γάρ οί πολέμιοι αντίκα παρ- έσονται. ότω ουν ταύτα 8οκεΐ καλώς εχειν, επικυ- ρωσάτω ως τάχιστα, ίνα έργω περαίνηται. ^ ει 8ε τι άλλο βελτιον η ταύτη, τολμάτω και 6 18ιωτης 8ι8ά- σ•κ€ΐι^ • πάντες γάρ κοινής σωτηρίας δεό/χβ^α. ι ΑΜ>ϋ 1 98 l> ' ANABASIS III. 2, 20-38. Adoption of Xenophon's proposals. Vote to march to some neigh- boring villages for provisions. Mera ταντα Χειρίσοφος ehrev • Άλλ' ci μέν τιρος 33 άλλον Set προς τούτοις οΐς Xeyei 'Β^νοφων^ καΧ αντίκα Ιζέσται noielp - α δέ pvp €Ϊρηκ€ δο /cct μοί ως τάχιστα ψηφίσασθαι άριστον eivai ■ καΐ δτω 8οκ€Ϊ ταντα, ^ ανατ€ΐνάτω την γείρα. avereivav πάντ€ς. άναστάςΜ 0€ πάλιν ehre '3€νοφών • *Ω άρ8ρ€ς, άκονσατ€ ων προσΒοκ€Ϊ μοι. 8ηλον οτι πορ€ν€σθαι ημάς δβί οπον €ξομ€ν τα €πιτη8€ΐα • άκονω δβ κώμας cli/at καλάς ου πλέον είκοσι στα8ίων απέχουσας • ονκ αν ονν 35 Κ^θανμάζοιμι ct οί πολέμιοι, ωσπερ οι 8ειλοι κννες τοίίς μεν παριόντας 8ιώκονσί τε καΐ 8άκνονσιν ην Βννωνται, τονς 8ε διώκοντας φενγονσιν, εΐ και αντοι ημΐν άπιονσιν επακολουθοίεν. Ισως ουν άσφαλε-^β στερον ημΐν πορεύεσθαι πλαίσιον ποιησαμενους των Ι^δπλων, ίνα τα σκενοφόρα καΐ 6 πολύς όχλος εν άσφαλεστερω η. εΐ ουν νυν άποΒειχθείη τίνας χρη ijyct^^at τον πλαισίον καΧ τα πρόσθεν κοσμεΐν και TiVa? επΙ των πλενρων εκατερων elj/at, τίνας δ' όπι- σθοφνλακεΐν, ονκ αν οπότε οί πολέμιοι ελθοιεν βον 2θλ€ΐί€σ^α4 ημάς 8εοι, άλλα χρωμεθα αν ενθνς τοις τεταγμενοις. εΐ μεν ονν άλλο τις βελτιον ορά, άλλως 37 εχετω • ct &ε, Χειρίσοφος μεν ήγοΐτο, επει8η και ΑακεΒαιμόνιός εστί • των 8έ πλενρων εκατερων δυο τω πρεσβντάτω στρατηγώ επιμελοίσθην • οπισθο- 2Βφνλακοΐμεν δ' ημείς οΐ νεώτεροι εγώ και ΎιμασΙων το νυν είναι, το 8ε λοιπόν πειρώμενοι ταύτης της^ τάξεως βονλενσόμεθα ο τι αν άει κράτιστον 8οκη cli/oi. ci 8c' τις άλλο ορά βέλτιον, λεξάτω. 4πεΙ δ * ANABASIS ΠΙ. 2. 39 and 3. 1-3. 99 ον8εις άντελεγεν, ειπεν, "Οτω δο /cci ταντα, άνατει- νάτω την χείρα. ε8οξε ταντα. ^iv τοίννν, εφη,2& άπιοντας ποιεΐν 8εΐ τα 8ε8ογμενα. καΐ όστις τε υμών τονς οικείονς επιθνμεί ι8είν, μεμνησθω άνηρ 6 άγαθος είναι • ον γαρ εστίν άλλως τούτον τνχείν^ • όστις τε ζην επιθνμεί, πειράσθω νικάν • των μεν γαρ νικώντων το κατακαίνειν, των δε ήττωμενων το άττο- θνησκειν εστί • καΐ ει τις 8έ χρημάτων επιθνμεί, κρατεΐν πειράσθω • των γαρ νικώντων εστί και τα 10 εαυτών σώίειν και τα των ήττωμενων λαμβάνειν. The Greeks bum their wagons, etc. Mithridates offers his help, but is rejected as a spy. in. Τούτων λεχθέντων άνεστησαν καΐ απελθόντες 1 κατεκαον τάς άμαξας και τάς σκηνάς, των 8ε περιτ-^ τών δτον μεν 8εοιτό τις μετε8ί8οσαν άλληλοις, τα δε άλλα εις το πίρ ερρίπτονν. ταντα ποιησαντε^ ηρι- Ιβ στοποιονντο. άριστοποιονμένων 8ε αντών έρχεται ΜιθραΒάτης σνν ίττπευσιν ως τριάκοντα, καΐ καλε- σάμενος τοίίς στρατηγούς εΙς επηκοον λέγει ώ8ε. 'Εγώ, ω άν8ρες 'Έλληνες, καΐ Κύρω πιστός ην, ως 2 νμεΐς επίστασθε, και νυν νμίν εννονς • καΧ ενθά8ε 8" 20 ειμί σνν πολλω φόβω διάγωι/. ct οίν ορωην νμας σαπηριόν τι βονλενομένονς, ελθοιμι αν προς νμας και τονς θεράποντας πάντας έχων. λέξατε οίν προς με τί εν νω ίχετε ως φίλον τε καΐ ευνονν καΐ βονλότ μενον κοινή σνν νμΐν τον στόλον ποιείσθαι. βονλεν 3 26 ομενοις τοΙς στρατηγοΐς ε8οξεν άποκρίνασθαι τ(£δe και έλεγε Χειρίσοφος • 'ημΐν 8οκεΐ, εΙ μεν τις ca ημάς aTTtcVat οΐκα8ε, 8ιαπορενεσθαι την χώραν^ ώς &ν δυι/ώ/χ€^α άσινεστατα • ην 8ε τις ημάς της 68ου υ III ■■)ί \\ 100 ANABASIS ΐπ. 3. 4-θ. 7L4 Hi lP"'%»nil|| Jit ti" Ί άποκωλνγ}, 8ιαπολ€μ€Ϊρ τοντω ως αν Βυρώμ€θα κρά- τιστα. €κ τούτον cVctparo ΜιθραΒάτης 8ώάσκ€ΐν 4 ως άπορορ €Ϊη βασι\4ως άκοντος σωθηναχ. ένθα Βη *^ €γίγνώσκ€το otl νπόπζμτττος €Ϊη • καΐ γαρ των Ύισ- "' 5 σαφψνονς τις οΙκ€ίων παρηκολονθηκ€ί πίστεως ένεκα. και €κ τούτον eSo/cct τοΐς στρατηγοΐς βελτιον etvai 5 οόγμα ττοίήσασθαι τον πόλεμον άκηρνκτον eli /αι «ττ' €v Tji πολέμια etev • Βιεφθειρον γαρ προσιόντες τονς στρατίώτας, καΐ β/α γ€ λοχαγον ^ιέφθειραν ^ίκαρχον 10 Αρκάδα, καΐ ωχετο άπιών ννκτος σνν ανθρώποις ως είκοσι. The Greeks are attacked by Mithridates. Xenophon charges the enemy without success, and is censured by his colleagues. McTtt ταντα άριστησαντες και Βιαβάντες τον Ζα- 6 πατάν ποταμον επορενοντο τεταγμένοι, τα υποζύγια και τον οχλον εν μέσω έχοντες, ον πολν 8ε προελψ Ι^λνθότων αντών επιφαίνεται πάλιν 6 Μιθρα8άτης, iTTTTca? έχων ως Βιακοσίονς και τοξότας καΐ σφενΒο- νητας εις τετρακοσίονς μάλα ελαφρούς και ενζώνονς. καΐ προσίβει μεν ως φίλος ων προς τονς ''Έλληνας • 7 επει δ' εγγύς εγενοντο, εξαπίνης οΐ μεν αντων ετό- 20 ξένον και ιππείς και πεζοί, οΐ δ' εσφεν8όνων, και ετίτρωσκον. οΐ 8ε οπισθοφύλακες των Ελλήνων επασχον μεν κακώς, άντεποίονν δ' ον8εν • οι τε γαρ Κρητες βραχύτερα των Ιίερσών ετόξευον και άμα φιλοΙ οντες εΐσω των οπλών κατεκέκλειντο, οι τε %^άκοντισταΙ βραχύτερα ήκόντιζον η ως εξικνεΐσθαι των σφεν8ονητών. εκ τούτον Βενοφώντι ε8όκει 8ιω- 8 κτεον eli'at • και ε8ίωκον των οπλιτών και των πελτα- στων οι €Γνχον σνν αντω οπισθοφνλακονντες • διω- ANABASIS III. 3. ^1δ. 101 κοντές 8ε ον8ενα κατελάμβανον των πολεμίων, οντε 9 γαρ Ιππείς ήσαν τοις "Ελλησιν ούτε οι πεζοί τονς πεζούς εκ πολλού φεύγοντας ε8ύναντο καταλαμβά- νειν εν ολίγω χωρίω' πολύ γαρ ούχ οΐόν τε ην άπο δ τον άλλον στρατεύματος 8ιώκειν • οι 8έ βάρβαροι ίο ιππείς καΐ φενγοντες άμα ετίτρωσκον εΙς τούπισθεν τοξεύοντες άπο των Ιππων, οπόσον 8ε διώ^βιαϊ' οΐ Ελληνες, τοσούτον πάλιν επαναχωρειν μαχομενονς βδει. ώστε της ημέρας όλης 8ιηλθον ον πλέον πεντεΐΐ 10 και είκοσι στα8ίων, άλλα 8είλης άφίκοντο εΙς τας κώμας. ένθα 8η πάλιν άθνμία ην. καΐ Ιίειρίσοφος και οΐ πρεσβύτατοι των στρατηγών Ξ,ενοφώντα rfri- ώντο ort ε8ίωκεν άπο της φάλαγγος και αυτός τε εκιν8ύνενε και τονς πολεμίονς ον8εν μάλλον ε8ύ• 15 νατο βλάπτειν. Xenophon's defence. Adoption of his plan for providing slingers and cavalry. * Ακουσας 8ε Ξενοφών ελεγεν δτι ορθώς ητιώντοΐ2 και αντο το έργον αντοΐς μαρτνροίη, αλλ' εγώ, εφη, ηναγκάσθην 8ιώκειν, εττειδι^ ^ώρων ημάς εν τω μενειν κακώς μεν πάσχοντας, άντιποιειν 8ε ον8εν 2θ8νναμενονς. €π€ΐδι) 8ε ε8ιώκομεν, άληθη, εφη, νμεΐςί3 λέγετε • κακώς μεν γαρ ποιεΐν ού8έν μάλλον ε8ννά' μέθα τονς πολεμίονς, άνεχωρονμεν 8ε πάνν χαλεπώς. τοΐς ονν θεοΐς χάρις οτι ον σύν πολλή ρώμη άλλα 14 σνν ολίγοις ηλθον, ώστε βλάφαι μεν μη μεγάλα, 25 δτ^λώσαι 8ε ων δεό/ϋΐε^α. iwv γαρ οΐ μεν πολέμιοι 15 τοζεύονσι καΧ σφεν8ονώσιν όσον ούτε οι Κρητες άντιτοζεύειν δυι/αϊ/ται ούτε οι εκ χειρός βάλλοντες εζικνεΐσθαι • δταν 8ε αυτούς 8ιώκωμεν, πολύ μεν ούχ ι) 11 102 ANABASIS III. 3. 1β-20. οΓόΐ' Τ€ χωρίον άπο τον στρατ€νματο<; Βίώκ€ίν, iv ολίγψ δέ ούδ' ei ταχύς €Ϊη π€ζος π€ζορ αν 8ίώκων καταΚαμ,βάνοι €Κ τόξου ρνματος. 'ημ€Ϊς ονν ct /Α€λ-1β \οιμ€ν τούτους elpyeiv ωστ€ μη δυΐ'ασ^αι βλάτττ€ΐν ^ημας πορ€υομ€νους, σφ€ν8ονητων την ταχίστην Sel καΐ Ιτπτέων. ακούω δ' cti/at €v τω στρατεύματι ημών 'Ροδίους, ων τους ττοΚλούς φασιν ίπίστασθαι σφεν- 8οναν, καΐ το β€λος αΰτώϊ/ καΐ Βιπλάσιον φ4ρ€σθαι των Ίΐ€ρσικων σφ€ν&ονων. Ικ€ΐναι γαρ δια το χ€ν 17 10 ροτΓληθ€σί τοΐς λίθοις σφενΒοναν inl βραχύ εξικνούν- ται, οΐ δέ 'Ρόδιοι καΐ ταΐς μολυβ^ίσιν Ιπίστανταχ χρησθαι. ην ουν αύτων €'πισκ€}\ίώμ€θα τίν€ς ττώται^ΐβ τοΛ σφ€ν^όνας, καΐ τούτω μ€ν 8ωμ€ν αύτων άργύριον, τω δέ αλλάς πΚέκειν iOeXovTi άλλο άργύριον Τ€λώ- Ι^μεν, καΐ τω σφ€ν8οναν iv τω τεταγμένω ίθέ\οντι α\\ην τίνα aTcXeiav €υρίσκωμ€ν, ίσως τιν€ς φανούν ται ικανοί ημάς ωφ€λ€Ϊν. ^ορώ δβ ίππους οντάς ivl9 τω στρατεύματι, τους μέν τινας παρ* €μοί, τους δβ των Κλεάρχου καταλελειμμενους, πολλούς δέ καΐ 20 άλλους αιχμαλώτους σκευοφορούντας. αν ουν τού- τους πάντας ίκλέξαντες σκενοφόρα μ€ν άντι8ωμ€ν, τους Se ίππους €ΐς Ιππέας κατασκΈυάαωμεν, ίσως και ουτοί τι τους φεύγοντας άνιάσουσιν. eSofc και 20 ταύτα, και ταύτης της νυκτός σφεν^ονηται μεν εΙς 2ΰ διακοσ-ιους εγενοντο, ΐπποι 8ε καΐ ιππείς ε^οκιμάσθη- σαν τη ύστεραία εις πεντήκοντα, και σπολα&ες και θώρακες αύτοΐς επορίσθησαν, καΧ Ιππαρχος cπe στάθη Αύκιος 6 ΙΙολυστράτον * Αθηναίος. AKABASIS ΠΙ. 4. 1-ΰ. 103 The Greeks are again attacked by Mithridates, who is repulsed with loss. IV. Μείναντες δέ ταύτην την ημεραν τη άλλη εποτ 1 ρεύοντο πρωαίτερον άναστάντες • χαρά^ραν γαρ Ιδεί αυτούς δια^ι^^αι εφ* η εφοβούντο μη επιθοΐντο αύτοΐς 8ιαβαίνουσιν οι πολέμιοι, Βιαβεβηκόσι δέ αύτοΓς 2 &πάλιν φαίνεται 6 Μιθρα^άτης, έχων ίττπβας χιλίους, τοξότας δε καΐ σφεν^ονητας εις τετρακισχιλίους - τοσούτους γαρ ητησε Ύισσαφερνην, καΐ ελαβεν υπο- σχόμενος, αν τούτους λάβη, παρα^ώσειν αύτω τους "Ελληνας, καταφρονησας, ότι εν τη πρόσθεν προσ- 10 βολή ολίγους έχων έπαθε μεν ούΒεν, ττολλά οε κακά ενόμιζε ποιησαι. επεί δε ο£ "Ελληνες Βιαβεβηκότες 3 άπεΐχον της χαροί8ρας όσον οκτώ στα^ίους, διε/βαιι^ε καΐ 6 Μιθρα^άτης έχων την δΰι^α/χιζ^. παρηγγελτο δε των πελταστών ους έδει διώκειι^ και των οπλιτών, 15 και τοις Ιππευσιν εΐρητο θαρρούσι Βιώκειν ως εφεφσ- μενης Ικανής δυνάμεως, επει δε 6 ΜιθραΒάτης κατ- 4 ειληφει, και η^η σφεν^όναι και τοξεύματα εξικνούν- το, εσημηνε τοΐς "Ελλ-τ/σι τη σαλπιγγι, και ευθύς εθεον όμόσε οΐς εΐρητο και οί ιππείς ηιλαυϊ'ο^'. οι δε 20 ουκ εΒέξαντο, αλλ' εφευγον επί την χαράΒραν. εν 5 ταύτη τη διώκει τοις βαρβάροις τών τε πεζών απέ• θανόν πολλοί και τών Ιππέων εν τη χαρά8ρα ζωοι ελήφθησαν εις όκτωκαίδεκα. τους δε άποθανόντας αύτοκελευστοι οι "Ελληνες ηκίσαντο, ως ότι φοβερώτ 25τατοι/ τοις πολεμίοις εΐη οραν. d *ί 104 ANABASIS III. 4. β-12. Μ The march continued to Larissa and afterwards to Mespila, on the Tigris. A sight of ancient Nineveh. Account of the ruins. Kal ol μ€ν TToXc/Atot οντω πράξαντ€ς άττηλθον, ol 6 Sc '^Ελληνες ασφαλώς 7Γορ€νόμ€Ρθί το λοιπόν της ημψας αφίκοντο iwl τον Ύίγρητα ποταμόν. ίντανθα 7 πόλις ην έρημη μεγάλη, όνομα δ* αντη ην Κάρισσα• Βωκονν δ' αυτήν το τταλαών MfjSoi. του δέ τείχους αύτης ην το εύρος πέντε καΐ είκοσι ττόδβς, υψος δ' εκατόν ' του δέ κύκλου η περίο8ος διίο παρασάγγαι - ωκοΒόμητο δε πλίνθοις κεραμεαΐς • κρηπίς δ' ύπ^ν λίθινη το ϋφος είκοσι ποΒων, ταύτην βασιλεύς ο 8 ΙΟΠερσώι/, οτε πάρα Μή^ων την ο-ρχην ελάμβανον ΤΙερσαι, πολιορκων ού^ενι τρόπω ε8ύνατο ελεΐν * ηλιον δέ νεφέλη προκαλύφασα ήφάνισε μέχρι εξελιπον οι άνθρωποι, και ούτως εάλω. παρά ταύτην την πόλιν 9 ην πυραμις λίθινη, το μεν εύρος ένος πλέθρου, το δε 15 υφός διίο πλέθρων. επι ταύτης πολλοί των βαρβάρων ί^σαν εκ των πλησίον κωμών άποπεφενγότες. εντευΊ(^ θεν δ' επορεύθησαν σταθμον eva παρασάγγας εζ προς τείχος ερημον μέγα κείμενον • όνομα δε ^ν τη πόλει Μεστηλα * Mi^^ot δ' αυτήν ποτέ ωκουν, ην 20 δε η μεν κρηπίς λίθου ξεστου κογχυλιάτου, το εύρος πεντήκοντα ποΒων και το ύφος πεντήκοντα, έπι δε 11 ταύτη επωκο^όμητο πλίνθινον τείχος, το μεν εύρος πεντήκοντα πο^ων, το δε ύφος εκατόν • του δε τείχους η περίοδος εξ παρασάγγαι. ε'ι^αυ^α λέγεται Μι^δεια 2^ γυνή /βασιλέως κατάφυγαν οτε άπώλλυσαν την άρχην ύπο ΙΙερσων Μί^δοι. ταύτην δε την πόλιν πολιορκων 12 ό Περσών )8ασ"ΐλεύς ουκ ε^ύνατο ούτε χρόνω ελεΐν ANABASIS III. 4. 13-17. 105 ούτε βία- Ζευς δε βροντή κατέπληξε τους ένοικοΰν- τας, και ούτως εάλω. Tissaphemes threatens the Greeks, but is kept off. ^Εντεύθεν δ' επορεύθησαν σταθμον eva παρασάγΊΆ γας τέτταρας, εις τούτον δε τον σταθμον Ticrcra- 6 φέρνης επεφάνη, ους τε αύτος Ιππέας ηλθεν έχων και την *Ορόντα δυι^α/χΐϊ^ του την /βαοΊλεως θυγατέρα έχοντος και ους Κύρος έχων άνέβη βαρβάρους και ους 6 )8α^ιλεω9 ά8ελφος έχων βασιλεΐ έβοηθει, και προς τούτοις όσους /8ασιλεν9 έ8ωκεν αύτω, ώστε το 10 στράτευμα πάμπολυ εφάνη, έπει δ' έγγυς έγένετο,14 τάς μεν των τάξεων όπισθεν καταστησας, τάς δε εΙς τα πλάγια παραγαγών, εμβαλεΐν μεν ουκ ετόλμησεν ούδ' έβούλετο 8ιακιν8υνεύειν, σφεν8οναν δε παρήγ- γειλε και τοξεύειν. έπει δε διατα^^^α^ες οι 'Ρόδιοι 15 15 έσφενΖόνησαν καΧ οι ^κύθαι τοξόται έτόξενσαν και ονδεΐ9 ημάρτανεν άν8ρός, ουδέ γαρ ει πάνυ προυθυ- μείτο ράΖιον ην, και 6 Τισσαφέρνης μάλα ταχέως έξω βέλων άπεχώρει και αι αλλαι τάξεις απεχώρη- σαν, και το λοιπόν της ημέρας οι μεν έπορενοντο, 16 20 οί δ' ειποκΓΟ • και ούκέτι έσίνοντο οι βάρβαροι τη τστε άκροβολίσει • μακρότερον γαρ οι τε 'Ρόδιοι των ΙΙερσων έσφενΒόνων #cai πρόσθεν. 6 δέ αενοφών τους μεν πελ-39 ταστάς ουκ ^γεν • επιφαινόμενον γαρ έώρα Τισσα- Ι i 110 ANABASIS III. 4. 40-4i. φ€ρνηι/ καΐ το στράτευμα παν • αντος δε προσελάσας ήρωτα Ύί καλείς / 6 Se Xeyei αντω, "Εζεστιν οραν • - ττροκατείληπται γαρ ημΐρ 6 υπέρ της καταβάσεως λόφος, καΐ ουκ εστί παρελθεΐν el μη τούτους άποκότ 5ψο/χ€ϊ'. άλλα τι ουκ '^γες τους ττελταστάς ; ό δέ^Ο Xeyct ΟΤΙ ουκ i80K€L αύτω ίρημα καταλιπεΐρ τα οττι- ίτθεν πολεμίων επιφαινομένων. *Αλλά μην ωρα γ*, εφη, βουλεύεσθαι πως τις τους άνΒρας άπελψ άπο του λόφου. Xenophon captures a height above the enemy's position, and the Persians retreat. Adventure with Soteridas. 10 *Έ»νταυθα αενοφων opq του όρους την κορυφην^ υπέρ αυτού του εαυτίίν στρατεύματος ουσαν, και άπο ταύτης εφόσον επΙ τον λόφον ένθα ήσαν οΐ πολέμιοι, καΐ λέγει, Κράτιστον, ω Χειρίσοφε, ημΐν ?€σ^αι ως τάχιστα επ\ το άκρον • ην γαρ τούτο λάβωμεν, ου 15 Βυνησονται μενειν οΐ υπέρ της 68ου. άλλα, €t βού• λει, μένε επι τω στρατεύματι, εγώ δ' εθελω πορεύε- σ^αι • €t 8έ χρήζεις, πορεύου επι το όρος, εγώ Βέ . μενώ αυτού. Αλλά 8!&ωμί σοι, εφη ο Χειρίσοφος, 42 οπότερον βούλει ίλεσ^αι. εΙπών 6 Βενοφών ότι νεώ- 20τερός εστίν αίρεΐται πορεύεσθαι, κελεύει 8έ οΐ συμ- ττφψαι άπο του στόματος άν8ρας • μακρόν γαρ ijv άπο της ουράς λαβείν, καΐ 6 Χειρίσοφος συμπεμ-4Ά πει τους άπο του στόματος πελταστάς, έλαβε 8έ τους κατά μέσον του πλαισίου, συνέπεσθαι δ' εκελευσεν 2δ αυτω καΧ τους τριακόσιους ους αυτός είχε των επί- λεκτων επι τω στόματι του πλαισίου, εντεύθεν έπο- 44 ρεύοντο ώς ε8ύναντο τάχιστα, οι 8* επι του λόφου πολέμιοι ώς ένόησαν αυτών την πορείαν έπΙ το άκρον. ANABASIS III. 4• 45-49 and 5. 1• 111 i>-f- »-■ ευθύς καΐ αυτοί ώρμησαν ά^^λλάίτ^αι έπι το άκρον, καΐ ενταύθα πολλή μεν κραυγή ην του Έιλληνικου^^ στρατεύματος 8ιακελευο μένων τοις εαυτών, πολλή 8ε «ι.* κραυγή τών άμφΐ Ύισσαφέρνην τοΐς εαυτών 8ιακε- !όλευομένων. Ηενοφών 8ε παρελαύνων έπι του ίππου 46 πα/3€/ο€λ€υ€το, 'Άν8ρες, νυν έπΙ την Ελλάδα νομίζετε ά/ϋΐιλλάσ^αι, νυν προς τους παίδας και τάς γυναίκας, νυν ολίγον πονησαντες άμαχεϊ την λοιπην πορευσό- μέθα. ^ωτηρί8ας 8έ 6 ^ικυώνιος εΐπεν. Ουκ έζ ίσου, 47 10 ω αενοφών, έσμέν • συ μεν γαρ έφ' ίππου όχεΐ, έγώ 8έ χαλεπώς κάμνω την άσ"πιδα φέρων, και 6ς άκου-48 σας ταύτα καταπη8ησας άπο του ίππου ωθείται αυτόν έκ της τάζεως, και την άσπιδα άφελόμενος ώς έ8ύνατο τάχιστα έχων έπορεύετο • ετύγχανε 8έ και 15 θώρακα έχων τον ιππικόν • ώστ έπιέζετο. και τοΐς μεν έμπροσθεν ύπάγειν παρεκελεύετο, τοΐς 8έ όπι- σθεν παριέναι, μόλις επόμενος, οι δ' άλλοι στρα-49 τιώται παίουσι καΐ βάλλονσι και λοι8ορουσι τον ^ωτηρί8αν, έστε ηνάγκασαν λαβόντα την ασπίδα 20 πορεύεσθαι. 6 8έ άναβάς, εως μεν )8άσΐ)αα ην, έπι του ίππου ηγεν, έπει 8έ άβατα ην, καταλιπών τον ΐππον έσπευ8ε πεζή. και φθάνουσιν έπΙ τω άκρω γενόμενοι τους πολεμίους. The Persians take flight, and the Greeks descend to one of several rich villages in the plain. Tissaphernes attempts to burn these. Jests concerning this. V. ^Ei'^a 8rj 01 μεν βάρβαροι στραφέντες έφευγον 1 25 η έκαστος έ8ύνατο, οι 8έ '^Έλληνες εΐχον το άκρον. οί 8έ άμφι Ύισσαφέριτην και ^Αριαΐον άποτραπόμενοι άλλην 68ον ωχοντο. οι 8έ άμφι Χειρίσοφον κατά- tl 1 || 112 ANABASIS 111. 5. ^7. ANABASIS III. 5. 8-13. 113 I I βάντ€ς ioTparoTreSeuovTO iv κώμτ) μ€στΎ) πολλών άγα^ωΐ'. ησαρ 8e καΐ αλλαι κωμαι ττολλαΐ πλήρεις πολλών άγοϋθων iv τούτω τω πεδιω παρά τον Ύίγρητα πσταμόν. ηνίκα δ* ην Βείλη, έζαπίνης οΐ πολέμιοι 2 § Ιπιφαίνονται iv τω πεΒίω, καΐ των Ελλήνων κατέκο- φάν τινας των €σκ€Βασμ€νων iv τω ττεδιω καθ^ άρπαγην • καΐ γαρ νομαΧ πολλαΧ βοσκημάτων 8υαβί- βαζόμ€ναι els το πέραν του ποταμού κατελήφθησαν, ενταύθα Τισσαφέρνης καΐ οΐ συν αυτω κάειν επέχει- 3 ίορησαν τάς κώμας. καΐ των Ελλήνων μάλα ηθύμη- σάν τίνες, ivvooύμεvoί μη τα iπιτηhεLay εΐ κάοιεν, ουκ €χοιεν οπόθεν λαμβάνοιεν, καΧ οΐ μεν άμφΐ 4 Χεψίσοφον αίτησαν c#c της βοηθείας • 6 8ε Ξενοφών iπεl κατεβη, παρελαύνων τάς τάζεις ηνίκα από της U βοηθείας απήντησαν οΐ "^Ελληνες, ελεγεν, Όρατε, ω 5 άνΒρες '^Έλληνες, υφιεντας την γωραν η8η ημετεραν cli/at ; α γαρ οτε iσπεv8ovτo Βιεπράττοντο, μη κάειν την ^acrtXecuS ^ώραν, νυν αύτοΙ κάουσιν ως άλλο- τρίαν. αλλ' iav που καταλίπωσί γε αύτοΐς τά iπιτψ 20 ecta, οφοντοΛ καΐ ημάς ivraWa πορευομενους. αλλ', 6 ω Χειρίσοφε, εφη, Βοκεΐ μοι βοηθεΐν iπι τους κάον- τας ως ύπερ της ημετέρας. 6 Βε Χειρίσοφος εΐπεν^ Ουκουν εμοιγε 8οκεΐ • αλλά καΐ ημείς, εφη, κάωμεν, καΧ ούτω θάττον παύσονται. Perplexity about crossing the Tigris. A proposal to carry the army oyer on a bridge of inflated skins. This is rejected, and they turn about and march southward a single day. 25 'Επ€ΐ δ€ επΙ τάς σκηνάς άττηλθον, οΐ μεν άλλοι 7 περί τά iπιτηSειa '^σαν, στρατηγοί δέ και λοχαγοί (τυνηλθον. και ivraWa πολλΐ7 απορία ^ν. €νθεν μεν γάρ ορη ην ύπερύψηλα, ένθεν δέ 6 ποταμός τοσούτος το βάθος ως μη8ε τά δόρατα ύπερεχειν πειρωμενοις του βάθους, άπορουμενοις δ' αύτοΐς προσελθών τις 8 άνηρ 'Ρόδιος ειπεν, 'Eyci θέλω, ω άνδρες, Ζιαβιβά^αχ 5 υμάς κατά τετρακισχιλίους οπλίτας, αν iμoi ων δώ- /Liat υπηρετησητε και τάλαντον μισθον πορίσητε. εροπώμενος δβ ότου 8εοιτο, Ασκών, εφη, 8ισχιλίων 9 Βεησομαι • πολλά δ' ορώ πρόβατα καΐ αίγας και βους καΐ όνους, α άποΖαρεντα καΧ φυσηθεντα ραΖίως 10 άι/ παρέ)(θΐ την 8ιάβασχν. 8εησομαι δε και τώνΙΟ δεσμών οΐς χρησθε περί τά υποζύγια ' τούτοις ζεύξας τους άσκους προς αλλήλους, ορμίσας εκαστον ασκον λίθους άρτησας και άφείς ωσπερ αγκύρας εΙς το υΖωρ, διαγα^ώϊ^ καΐ άμφοτερωθεν όησας €πΐ)8αλώ Ι^ϋλην καΐ γην iπιφopησω' οτι μεν ουν ου καταδυ-11 σεσθε αύτίκα μάλα εΐσεσθε • πάς γάρ ασκός διίο άν8ρας εζει του μη κατα8υναι. ώστε όε μη όλισ^ά- νειν η ύλη καΐ η γη σχησει. άκούσασι ταύτα τοις 12 στρατηγοΐς το μεν ivθύμημa χαρίεν iSόκει eti^at, το 20 δ' έργον αδύνατον- ήσαν γάρ οι κωλύσοντες πέραν πολλοί ιππείς, οί ευθύς τοις πρώτοις ού8εν αν iπέτpε■• πον τούτων ποιεΐν. ivτaύθa την μεν ύστεραίαν iπav-13 εχώρουν εις τούμπαλιν εΙς τάς άκαύστους κώμας, κατακαύσαντες ένθεν iζησav • ώστε οι πολέμιοι ού 26προσηλαυνον, αλλά iθεώvτo καΐ όμοιοι ήσαν θαυμά- ζειν οποί ποτέ τρό^ονται οί ΈΧληνες και τί εν νω ίχοιεν. ι I ίΤ'Λι tJ ν 114 ANABASIS III. 5. 14-ia Questioning of prisoners about the roads. It is decided to march northward through the land of the Carduchi into Armenia. The army is to be ready to march at any moment during the coming night. *EirravOa ol μίν άλλοι στρατιωται cVi τα Ιττιτιη^εια 14 ^σαν • οΐ δέ στρατηγοί πάλιν συνηλθον^ καΧ συνα- γαγόι/Τ€9 TOU9 ίαλωκότας ηλ^γχον^την κύκλω ττασαι^ γωραν τίς έκαστη €νη, οΐ hk ίλίγον otl τα μ€Ρΐδ 5 vpos μ€στημβρίαν της eVl Βα^δυλώ^^α €Ϊη καΐ Μτ/διαΐ', ι ησπερ ηκοί€ρ, η θ€ προς €ω €πι Ζονσα τ€ και ^Εκβάτανα φ€ροί^ €ρθα θ€ρίζ€ίρ λέγεται βασιλεύς, η δέ Ζιαβάντι τον ποταμον προς εσπεραν επί Λυδιαί^ και ^ίωνίαν φεροι^ η 8έ δια των ορέων καΐ προς 10 αρκτον τετραμμενη οτι εις Καρ8ονχονς άγοι. τούτους 16 δέ εφασαν οίκεΐν ανά τα ορη καΧ πολεμικούς είναι^ καΧ ^α(Γΐ,λ€ω9 ουκ aκoύειvJ άλλα και εμβαλεΐν ποτέ εις αυτούς βασιλικην στρατιάν 8ώΒεκα μυριάδας • τούτων δ' ούΒενα άπονοστησαι δια την Βυσχωρίαν. Ιβ οπότε μεντοι προς τον σατράπην τον εν τω πεδιω σπείσαιντο, καΐ cin/xi.yi'iJi/ai, σφων τε προς εκείνους καΐ εκείνων προς εαυτούς, άκούσαντες ταύτα οΐπ στρατηγοί εκάθισαν χωρίς τους εκασταχόσε φάσκον- τας €ίδ€ναι, ού8έν 8ηλον ποιησαντες οποί πορεύεσθαι 20 εμελλον. ε8όκει &ε τοις στρατηγοΐς αναγκαιον είναι δια των ορέων εις Καρ8ούχους εμβάλλειν • τούτους γαρ 8ιελθόντας εφασαν εΙς *Αρμενίαν ηζειν, ης *Ορόντας ηρχ€ πολλής καΐ εύ8αίμονος. εντεύθεν δ' ευπορον εφασαν είναι οποί τις εθέλόι πορεύεσθ αι. 25cirt τοιίτοις εθύσαντο, όπως ηνίκα καΧ 8οκοίη τηςΐ8 ώρας την πορείαν ποιοΐντο • την γαρ υπερβολην των ορέων ε^εΒοίκεσαν μη προκαταληφθείη • #cai παρ- ANABASIS IV. ι. 1-4. 115 ηγγειλαν^ επει8η δειπι/τ^σβιαι/, συσκευασαμένους πάντας άι/απαυ€σ0αί,, καΧ Ιττεσ^αι ηνίκ αν τις παρ- αγγέλλη. BOOK IV. Summary of preceding accounts. Ι,ΓΟσα μεν 8η εν τη άι^α/3άσ€ΐ εγένετο μέχρι της 1 αμάχης, και δσα μετά την μάχην εν τοις σπον^αίς ας βασιλεύς καΧ οι συν Κυρω άναβάντες "Έλληνες εποιψ σαντο, και δσα παραβάντος τάς σπον^άς ^βασιλέως και Τισσαφέρνους επολεμηθη προς τους "Έλληνας επακολουθουντος του Ώερσικου στρατεύματος, εν τω ΐοπρόσθεν λόγω οεοηλωται. The Greeks enter the mountains. Flight of the Carduchians. Mountain villages. ΈτΓβΙ δβ άφίκοντο ένθα 6 μεν Τίγρης ποταμός παν- 2 τάπασιν άπορος ην δια το βάθος καΐ μέγεθος, πάρο- δος δέ ουκ ην, αλλά τά Καρ8ούχεια ορη απότομα υπέρ αυτού του ποταμού έκρέματο, ε8όκει 8η τοις 1ξ» στρατηγοΐς δια των ορέων πορευτέον έΐναι. ηκουον 3 γάρ των άλισκομένων ότι εΐ 8ιέλθοιεν τά Καρ8ούχεια ορη, εν τη ^Αρμενία τάς ττηγάς του Τίγρητος ποτα- μού, ην μεν βούλωνται, 8ιαβησονται, ην 8έ μη βού- λωνται, περιίασι. καΐ του Εύφράτου 8έ τάς ττηγάς 20 έλέγετο ου πρόσω του Τίγρητος εΐι/αι, και έστιν ούτως έχον. την δ' εις τους Καρ8ούχους έμβολην 4 ωδ€ ποιοίι^αι, άμα μεν λαθεΐν πειρώμενοι, άμα 8έ φθάσαι πρΙν τους πολεμίους καταλαβεΐν τά άκρα. j Jl 116 ANABASIS IV. ι. 5-10. t i Ήνίκα δ' ^v άμφΐ την reXevraiav φνλακην και 5 ik€LW€TO της ννκτος όσον σκοταίονζ ^ιεΧθεΐν το πβ- δίοι/, τηρικαντα άναστάντ€ς άπο παραγγ€λσ€ως ποτ- ρ€νόμ€νοι άφίκροννταί α/ια τη ημέρα προς το ορός. ^ίνθα 8η Χειρίσοφος μ€ν ηγ€Ϊτο του στρατεύματος 6 λαβών το άμφ* αντον καΐ τους γνμνητας πάντας, Βενοφών δέ συν τοΐς οπισθοφνΧαξιν οπλίταις €Ϊπ€το ovSepa €χων γνμνητα * ούδ€ΐς γαρ κίνδυνος iSOK€L cti'at μη τις ανω πορευο μένων Ικ τον όπισθεν Ιπί- ΙΟσποιτο. καΙΙπΙμεν το άκρον αναβαίνει Χειρίσοφος 7 πριν τινας αίσθεσθαι των πολεμίων • έπειτα 8* νφη- γεΐτο* εφείπετο δέ act το υπερβάλλον τον στρατεύ- ματος εις τάς κώμας τάς εν τοΐς άγκεσί τε καΐ μνχοΐς των ορέων. €νθα 8η οι μεν Καρ^ονχοι εκλιπόντες 8 15 τάς οΙκίας έχοντες και γνναΐκας και τταιδας έφενγον επι τα ορη. τα οε επιτήδεια ττολλα ην Καμρανειν, ^σαν δε και χαλκώμασι παμπόλλοις κατεσκενασμέ- ναι αί οΐκίαι, ων ον8έν έφερον οι ΈΧληνες ουδέ τονς άνθρωπονς έΒίωκον, νποφει8όμενοι ει πως εθελησειαν 20 οι Καρ8ονχοι διιει/αι αυτούς ως δια φιλίας της χωράς, επείπερ βασιλεΐ πολέμιοι τ^σαι/ • τά μέντοι επιτήδεια % οπον τις επιτνγχάνοι ελάμβανον • ανάγκη γαρ ην. οι 8έ ΚαρΒονχοι ούτε καλούντων νττηκονον οντε άλλο φιλικον ονΒεν εποίονν. An attack in the rear. Captives set free, and animals left behind. 25 'Ettci 8ε οι τελευταίοι των Ελλήνων κατέβαινον εΙς 10 τας κώμας άπο τον άκρον η8η σκοταΐοι — δια γαρ το στενην εΐναι την 68ον ολην την ημέραν η άνάβα- σις αντοΐς εγένετο καΐ κατάβασις — τότε 8η (τυλλε- ANABASIS IV. χ. 11-15. 117 γέντες τίνες των Καρ8ούχων τοΐς τελενταίοις επετί- θεντο, καΐ άπέκτεινάν τινας καΐ λίθοις καΐ τοζεύ μασι κατέτρωσαν, ολίγοι οντες • εζ άπροσ8οκητον γαρ αντοΐς επέπεσε το *ΈΧληνικόν. ει μέντοι τότε πλείονς 11 ξ^σννελέγησαν^ εκιν8ύνενσεν αν διαψ^αρτ^ΐ'αι πολύ τον στρατεύματος, καΐ ταύτην μεν την νύκτα όντως εν ταΐς κώμαις ηνλίσθησαν • οι 8έ Καρ8ονχοι πνρά ΤΓολλά έκαον κύκλω επι των ορέων και σννεώρων άλ- ληλονς. άμα 8ε τη ημέρα σννελθονσι τοΐς στρατη-ί2 10 γοΐς καΐ λοχαγοΐς των 'ΈΧληνων έ8οζε των τε νποζν γίων τά αναγκαία καΧ 8ννατωτατα έχοντας πορεύ- €σ^αι, καταλιπόντας τάλλα, καΐ δσα ην νεωστί αΐχ- μάλωτα άν8ράπο8α εν τη στρατιά πάντα αφεΐναι. σχολαίαν γαρ εποίονν την πορείαν πολλά οντά τα 13 15 υποζύγια και τά αίχμάλοπα, πολλοί 8ε οι επι τούτοις οντες απόμαχοι ήσαν, διπλάσια τε επιτη8εια έδει πορίζεσθαι και φέρεσθαι πολλών των ανθρώπων όντων, δό^αχ/ 8ε ταύτα, εκηρνζαν οντω ποιεΐν. €7Γ€ΐΐ4 8έ άριστησαντες επορεύοντο, νποστησαντες εν τω 20 στενω οΐ στρατηγοί, ει τι ενρίσκοιεν των είρημένων μη άφειμένον, άφηρονντο, οι δ' επείθοντο, πλην ει τίς τι εκλεφεν, οΐον^ η παι8ος επιθνμησας η γνναικος των ευπρεπών, και ταύτην μεν την ημέραν όντως επορεύθησαν, τά μέν τι μαχόμενοι τά 8ε και άι^απαι;- 25 όμενοι. March in a storm under attack. Dispute between Chirisophus and Xenophon. Εις δέ την ύστεραίαν γίγνεται χειμών πολύς, άναγ- 15 καΐον δ' ην πορεύεσθαι • ου γάρ ην Ικανά τάπιτψ δεια. και ηγεΐτο μεν Χειρίσοφος, ώπισθοφυλάκει ι ί! 118 ANABASIS IV. ι. 1β-22. Ml ι-Ι 8c Β€νοφων. καΐ οΐ πολψίοι Ισχνραχ; cVcri^ci/To, ΐβ και στ€νωρ όντων των χωρίων εγγύς προσιοντες cto- ξ€νον καΐ έσφ€ν8όνων • ωστ€ ήναγκάζοντο οΐ Ελλτ^- Ρ€ς έπιΒίώκοντες καΐ πάλιν άναχάζοντ€<ζ σχολρ tropev- 5 €σθαι • καΐ ^α/Αίι^ά TraprjyyeWev ο Β^νοφων νττομέ- v€LVj οτ€ οί πολέμιοι Ισχυρώς €πικ€θΐντο. έντανθα 6 17 Χειρισοφος αλλοτ€ μίν οτ€ παρ€γγνωτο νπ€μ€ν€^ τότε Sc ούχ νπέμ€ν€ν^ αλλ' rjy€ ταχέως και παρηγγύα cttc- cr^at, ωστ€ 8ηλον ην οτι πράγμα τι €Ϊη • σχολή δ' 10 ουκ ην iieiv παρελθόντι το αίτιον της σπουδής • ωστ€ η πορεία ομοία φνγη €γίγν€το τοις οπισθοφύλαξι. καΐ έντανθα αποθνήσκει άνηρ αγαθός ΑακωνικοςΙΒ Κλεώνυμος τοξενθεις δια της άσπιλος και της σποτ λάδο? €ΐς τας πλευράς^ καΐ Βασίας * Αρκάς διαμπερές 15 την κεφαλήν, επά 8ε αφίκοντο επι σταθμόν, ευθύς 19 ωσπερ εΐχεν 6 Βενοφων ελθών προς τον Χειρίσοφον ψ-ιατο αντον οτι ονχ νπέμεινεν, αλλ' ήναγκάζοντο φενγοντες άμα μάχεσθαι. καΐ νυν δυο καλώ τε και άγαθώ άν^ρε τέθνατον και ούτε άνελεσθαι οντε βάψαι 20 ώυνάμεθα. αποκρίνεται 6 Χειρίσοφος, Βλέφον, εφη, 20 προς τα ορη καΐ ΙΒε ως άβατα πάντα εστί• μία δ' ανττ) οδός ην οράς ορθία, και c't^I ταύτη ανθρώπων οράν εξεστί σοι οχλον τοσούτον, οί κατειληφστες φυλάττονσι την έκβασιν. ταντ εγώ έσπεν8ον καΪ21 25 δια τοντό σε ονχ νπεμενον, ει πως ^νναίμην φθάσαι πρΙν κατειλήφθαι την νπερβολην • οί δ' ηγεμόνες ονς εχομεν ον φασιν cli^at άλλην 68όν, 6 Βέ Hei/o-22 φών λέγει, 'Αλλ' εγώ έχω δύο άνδρας, έπει γαρ ήμΐν πράγματα παρείχον, ένηΖρενσαμεν, όπερ ήμας ANABASIS IV. χ. 23-28. 119 καΧ άναπνενσαι έποίησε, καΧ άπεκτείναμέν τινας αυτών, και ζώντας προυθυμήθημεν λαβείν αύτου τού- του ένεκα όπως ήγεμάσιν €ίδ()θ-ι την χώραν χρησαί- μέθα. Xenophon's two prisoners. One is made guide. Call for volunteers to seize a height δ Kai ευθύς άγαγοντες τους ανθρώπους ήλεγχον^Ζ Ζιαλαβόντες ει τίνα ειΒεΙεν άλλην ohov ή την φανε- ράν. ο μεν ουν έτερος ουκ έφη μάλα πολλών φόβων π ροσ αγομένων • έπει δέ ού^εν ώφέλιμον ελεγεν, ορώντος του ετέρου κατεσφάγη. 6 δέ λοιπός έλεζεν2^ 10 οτι οΰτος μεν δια ταντα ου φαίη εΙΒέναι οτι αύτω ετύγχανε θυγάτηρ έκεΐ παρ avhpX έκΒε^ομένη - αυτός δ' έφη ήγησεσθαι Βυνατήν καΐ ύποζυγίοις πορεύετ σ^αι ohov. έροπώμενος δ' et εΐη τι εν αύτη δυσ-πα-25 ριτον χωρίον, έφη clival άκρον ο εΐ μη τις προκατα- Ι^λήφοιτο, αδύνατον βσεσ^αι παρελθείν, ενταύθα δ '26 έ^όκει συγκαλέσαντας λοχαγούς και πελταστάς και τών οπλιτών λέγειν τε τα παρόντα καΐ έρωτάν ει τις αυτών έστιν δστις άνηρ άγαθος έθέλοι αν yei/eicr^at καΐ ύποστάς εθελοντής πορεύεσθαι. υφίσταται τώνζι 20 μεν οπλιτών ^Αριστώνυμος Μεθυ8ριεύς Αρκάς και Άγασίας ^τυμφάλιος * Αρκάς, άντιστασιάζων δέ αύ- τοΐς Καλλίμαχος ΐίαρράσιος Αρκάς • και ούτος έφη έθέλειν πορεύεσθαι προσλαβών έθελοντάς έκ παντός του στρατεύματος • εγώ γάρ, έφη, οΐδα οτι έφονται 25 πολλοί τών νέων εμού ηγουμένου, έκ τούτου ερωτώ- 2S σιν ει τις καΐ τών γυμνητων ταξιάρχων έθέλοι συμ- πορεύεσθαι. υφίσταται ^Αριστέας Χίος, ος πολλά- χού πολλού άξιος τη στρατιά εις τα τοιαύτα έγένετο. \ < 120 ANABASIS IV. a. 1-5. ANABASIS IV. 2. 6-11. 121 The attacking party set forth, while Xenophon makes a diversion. The enemy roll huge stones down the mountain. An outpost captured. n. ΚαΙ ην μ€ν δειλτ/, οί 8' eKcXevov αυτούς €μφα- 1 γόρτας ττορ^ν^σθαχ. καΧ τον 'ηγ€μόνα^ Βησαντες πα- /οαδιδόασιΐ' avroU, καΐ συντίθενται την μεν νύκτα, ην λάβωσί το άκρον, το χωρίον φυλάττειν, α/υια δέ 6 τη ήμερα τη σάλπιγγυ σημαίνειν * καΧ του<; μεν ανω οντάς Ιεναι επΙ Toifs κατέχοντας την φανεράν εκβα- aiVy αύτοΙ δέ συμβοηθησειν εκβαίνοντες ώς αν 8ύνωνταί τάχιστα, ταύτα συνθεμένοι οί μεν επορεύ- 2 οντο πλήθος ως δισχίλιοι • και ϋ8ωρ πολύ ^ν εξ 10 ουρανού • Ηενοφων Βέ έχων τους οπισθοφύλακας ηγεΐτο προς την φανεραν εκβασιν, όπως ταύτη τη όδω οί πολέμιοι προσεχοιεν τον νουν και ώς μάλιστα λάθοιεν οί περιιόντες, επει 8ε ^σαν επι χαράΒρα οι 3 οπισθοφύλακες ην εΒει Ζιαβάντας προς το ορθιον εκ- IS^atWii^, τηνικαυτα εκνλίν^ουν οί βάρβαροι ολοιτρό- χους άμαξιαίους και μείζους και ελάττους, οί φερόμε- νοι προς τας πέτρας παίοντες ΒιεσφενΖονωντο • καΧ παϊ^άπασιΐ' ουδέ πελάσαι οΓοι^ τ Tjv τη εισάγω, evioi 4 8ε των λοχαγών, εΐ μη ταύτη 8ύναιντο, άλλη επει- 2θρωντο' καΐ ταύτα εποίουν μ^χρι σκότος εγένετο - επει 8ε ωοντο αφανείς είναι άπιόντες, τστε απηλθον επι το 8εΐπνον • ετύγχανον 8ε καΐ άνάριστοι δντες t αυτών οι οπισθοφυλακησαντεςί οι μεντοι πολέμιοι ου8εν επαύσαντο δι' όλης της νυκτός κυλιν8ουντες 25 τους λίθους• τεκμαίρεσθαι 8^ Tjv τω φόφφ, οί δ' 5 ίχοντες τον ηγεμόνα κνκλω περιιόντες καταλαμβά- νουσι τους φύλακας άμφϊ πυρ καθήμενους • και τους μεν κατακανόντες τους 8έ κατα8ιώξαντες αυτοί εν- ταυθ' εμενον ώς το άκρον κατέχοντες, οί 8* ου κατεΐ- 6 χον, άλλα μαστός ην υπέρ αύτων παρ" ον ην ή στενή αιττη οοος εφ . η εκασηντο οι φυλακές, εφοόος μεντοι 5 αύτόθεν επι τους πολεμίους ην οι επι τη φανερά όδω εκάθηντο. Battle for the heights. One hill captured. Και την μεν νύκτα ενταύθα 8ιηγαγον - επει δ' 7 ήμερα ύπεφαινεν, επορεύοντο σιγή συντεταγμένοι επι τους πολεμίους • καΐ γαρ ομίχλη εγενετο, ωστ ελα- 10 θον εγγύς προσελθόντες, επει 8έ εΐ8ον αλλήλους, η τε σάλπιγζ εφθέγζατο καΧ άλαλάζαντες ιεντο επι τους ανθρώπους • οί δε ουκ ε8έζαντο, αλλά λιπόντες την ο8ον φεύγοντες ολίγοι άπέθνησκον • ευζωνοι γαρ '}]σαν. οί δε άμφι Χειρίσοφον άκούσαντες της σάλ- 8 15 πιγγος ευθύς ιεντο άνω κατά την φανεράν όδόι^ • άλλοι δε των στρατηγών κατά άτριβεΐς 68ούς επο- ρεύοντο η ετυχον έκαστοι οντες, καΐ άναβάντες ώς . έ8ύναντο άνίμων^ αλλήλους τοις 8όρασι. και ούτοι 9 πρώτοι ζτυνεμιζαν τοΙς προκαταλαβουσι το χωρίον. 20 Ξενοφών δε έχων των οπισθοφυλάκων τους ημίσεις επορενετο ηπερ οί τον ηγεμόνα έχοντες • εύο8ωτάτη γάρ ^ν τοις ύποζχτγίοις • τους δε ημίσεις όπισθεν των υποζυγίων έταζε, πορευόμενοι δ' εντυγχάνουσιΐο λόφω υπέρ της 68ου κατειλημμένα) ύπο των πολε- 2δμίων, ους η άποκόφαι ην ανάγκη η διεζευχ^αι άπο των άλλων 'ΈΧληνων. και αύτοΙ μέν αν επορεύθη- σαν ηπερ οί άλλοι, τά δε υποζύγια ουκ ην άλλη η ταύτη εκβηναι. ένθα 8η παρακελευσάμενοι άλλτ^-ΐΐ λοΐ5 προσβάλλουσι προς τον λόφον όρθίοις τοΙς — «. t - 122 ANABASIS IV. a. 12-16. ANABASIS IV. 2. 17-23, 123 λόχοις, ου κύκλω άλλα κατα\ιπόρτ€ς αφο8ον τοις πολεμίοις ct βούΚοιντο φ€νγ€ΐν. καΐ τ€ω<; /xei/ αυτούς 12 αναβαίνοντας δπτ) iSvvavro έκαστος οί βάρβαροι €τόζ€νον και ίβαλλον, έγγϊίζ δ* ου προσίεντο, άλλα δ φυγ-ίΙ λζίπουσι το χωρίον, και τουτόν Τ€ παρελτ^λν- θεσαν οΐ ''Έλληνες^ και erepov ορωσιν ίμπροσθεν λάφον κατ€χόμ€νον έπΙ τούτον αύθις ε8όκ€ΐ πορεύε- σθαχ. Two more hills captured, and the first lost. *Έννοησας 8' 6 Βενοφων μη, εΐ ερημον καταλίττοι 13 10 τον ηλωκστα λόφον, καΐ πάλιν λαβόντες οΐ πολέμιοι επιθοΐντο τοις ύποζυγίοις παριουσιν — επΧ πολύ h* ην τα υποζύγια^ άτε δια στενής της 68ου πορευόμενα — καταλείπει επι του λόφου λοχαγούς Κηφισόοωρον Κηφισοφώντος Αθήναιον και Άμφικράτην ^Αμφι8η- Ιδμου Αθήναιον και Άρχαγόραν ^Αργεΐον φυγάδα, αύτος δέ συν τοις λοιποΐς επορενετο επι τον δεύτερον λόφον, καΐ τω αύτω τρόπω καΐ τούτον αίρουσιν. / ert 14 δ* αύτοΓς τρίτος μαστός λοιπός ην πολύ ορθιωτατος 6 υπέρ της επι τω πυρΧ καταληφθείσης φυλακής της 20 νυκτός ύπο των εθελοντών, επεί δ' εγγύς εγενοντοί5 οι ''Ελλΐ7ΐ'€9, λείπουσιν οι βάρβαροι αμαχητί τον μαστάν, ώστε θαυμαστον ττάσι γενέσθαι, και ύπω• πτευον 8είσαντας αύΤούς μη κυκλωθερτες πολιορκοΐν^ το άπολιπεϊν. οι δ' αρα άπο του άκρου καθορωντες 2δτά όπισθεν γιγνόμενα πάντες επι τους οπισθοφύλα- κας εχώρουν. και Βενοφων μεν σύν τοις νεωτάτοιςίβ ανεβαινεν επι το άκρον, τους 8ε άλλους εκελευσεν ft- ύπάγειν, δπως οι τελευταίοι λόχοι προσμίζειαν, και προελθόντας κατά την 68ον εν τψ ομαλω ^cor^at τα όπλα είπε. και εν τούτω τω χρόνω ηλθεν *Αρχαγό- 17 ρας 6 *Αργεΐος πεφευγώς, καΐ λέγει ως άπεκόπησαν άπο του λόφου καΧ δτι τεθνάσι Κηφισό8ωρος και * Αμφικράτης και άλλοι δσοι μη άλάμενοι κατά της 5 πέτρας προς τους οπισθοφύλακας άφίκοντο. Negotiations for a truce. General attack of the natives. Burial of the dead. Ταύτα 8ε 8ιαπραζάμενοι οί βάρβαροι ηκον επ'ΐβ άντίπορον λόφον τω μαστω • και Βενοφων 8ιελεγετο αύτοΐς δι' ερμηνεως περί σπον8ων και τους νεκρούς άττητει. οί 8έ εφασαν άπο8ώσειν εφ^ ω μη κάειν τάς 19 10 οικίας, συνωμολόγει ταύτα 6 Βενοφων. εν ω 8ε το μεν άλλο στράτευμα παρηει οί 8ε ταύτα 8ιελεγοντο, πάντες οί εκ τούτου του τόπου συνερρύησαν. ενταύθα20 ΐσταντο οί πολέμιοι, και επει ηρξαντο καταβαίνειν άπο του μαστού προς τους άλλους ένθα τα όπλα 15 εκείτο, ΐεντο 8η οί πολέμιοι πολλω πληθει και θορύβω' και επει εγενοντο επΙ της κορυφής του μαστού άφ* ου Βενοφων κατεβαινεν, εκυλίν8ουν πετρους • καΧ ενός μεν κατέαζαν το σκέλος, Βενοφωντα 8ε ο υπασπι- στής έχων τηνάσπί8α άπέλιπεν • Εύρύλοχος δ€21 2θΛουσΐ€ύς * Αρκάς προσέ8ραμεν αύτω οπλίτης, και προ άμφοΐν προβεβλημένρς άπεχώρει, καΐ οί άλλοι προς τους συντεταγμένους άπηλθον. εκ 8ε τούτου 2Ζ πάν ομού εγένετο το ^Ελληνικόν, και εσκηνησαν αυτού εν πολλαΓς και καλαΐς οΐκίαις και επιτη8είοις 25 δαψιλ/σι • και γαρ οΐνος πολύς ην, ώστε εν λάκκοις κονιατοΐς εΐχον. Βενοφων 8ε και Χειρίσοφος 8ιεπρά-93 ξαντο ώστε λαβόντες τους νεκρούς άπέ8οσαν τον ΛΑ L Ε Ι ι 124 ANABASIS IV. a. 24-28 and 3. i. ANABASIS IV. 3. 2-«. 125 I Hi• >l ittii Ύΐγ€μόνα * καΐ πάρτα Ιποίησαν τοί<ζ άποθανονσιν ίκ των 8ννατώρ, ωσπ€ρ ρομίζ€ταί avhpaaiv άγαθοΐς. Fighting the way. The Carduchian bowmen. T]J Se varepaia av€v ηγ€μόνος iwopevovro • /i,a;( 'Mf Im, i ΐΓίτνσι διαλ€ΐ7Γ0ΐ;σαΐ9 μεγαλαις^ ανθ^ ων ίστηκότες ai/Spcs τί αν πάσχουν η νπο των φερομένων λίθων η νπο των κυΚιν^ου μίνων ; το \οιπον ουν τβη yiyveroL• ως ημίπλεθρον, ο Set όταν λοίφησωσιν οΐ λίθοι ττα- 6 ρα^ραμάν. Άλλα cv^ii?, ίφ-η 6 Χειρίσοφος, βπαδάϊ/ 7 άρξώμεθα ct? το δασύ ττροσιέναί^ φέρονται οι λίθοι πολλοί. Αντο avy ίφη, το Seov eh) ' θαττον γαρ άναλώσονσι τους λίθους, άλλα πορενώμεθα ίνθεν ημΐν μικρόν τι παραΐραμείν ccrrat, ην ^υνώμεθα, 10 και άπελθεΐν ρά8ιον, ην βόνλώμεθα. Capture of the fortress. Women throw their children over the cliffs and leap after them. ^Εντεύθεν Ιπορενοντο Χειρίσοφος καΐ Βενοφων καΐ 8 Καλλί/ϋΐαχο9 Παρράσιος λοχαγός• τούτον γαρ η ηγεμονία ην των οπισθοφυλάκων λοχαγών εκείνη τη ημέρα • οί δέ άλλοι λοχαγοί εμενον εν τω άσφαλεΐ. 15Μ€τά τοντο ονν άπ^λθον νπο τα δβ^δρα άνθρωποι ως έβδομη κοντά, ovfi αθρόοι άλλα καθ" ενα, έκαστος φνλαττόμενος ως ε8ννατο. Άγασίας δε 6 Χτνμφά- 9 λιος καΧ "Αριστώννμος Μεθν8ριενς, καΐ ούτοι των όπισθοφνλάκων λοχαγοί όντες, και άλλοι δ/, e^e 20 στασαν έξω των Βέν^ρων • ου γαρ ^ν ασφαλές εν τοις ^έν^ροις ίστίίϊ/αι πλέον η τον ένα λόχον. ένθα 10 δ'^ Καλλί/χαχος μηχανάταί τι • προντρεχεν άπο τον Βέν^ρον νφ' ω ην αντο? διίο η τρία βήματα • έπει δέ οί λ^οι φέροιντο, άνέχαζεν ενπετως - εφ" εκάστης 25 δ€ πρόδρομης πλέον η Βέκα άμαζαι πετρών άνηλί- σκόντο, ο ^έ Άγασίας ως ορψ τον Καλλίμαχον all έποίει, καχ το στράτευμα πάν θεώμενον, Βείσας μη ον πρώτος παρα^ράμη εις το χωρίον, ουτε τον Apt- στώννμον πλησίον όντα παρακαλέσας οντε Εύρΰλο- χον τον Αονσιέα εταίρονς όντας οντε άλλον ον^ένα χωρεί α{τΓΟς(^καΙ παρέρχεται πάντας. ό δέ Καλλί-12 ^ μαχος ως όρα αντοι/ παριόντα., επιλαμβάνεται αντον ^της ΐτνος • iv δέ τούτω παραθεΐ αύτονς Άριστώννμος Μεθν^ριενς, καΐ μετά τοντον Ενρνλοχος Αονσιενς • πάντες γαρ οντοι άντεποιονντο άρετης και άντηγωτ νίζοντο προς άλληλονς • και όντως έρίζοντες αίροίσι το χωρίον, ως γαρ άπαξ εισε^ραμον, ονΜς πέτρος 1θαι^ω0€ΐ/ ηνέχθη. Έκταυ^α Ιη ^εινίν ^ν θέαμα, αί γάρ γνναικεςιζ ^^ουσαι τα παιδία βΐτα εαντάς έπικατερρίπτονν, και οΐ άνδρες ωσαύτως. cWaS(9a δή και Αινείας ^τνμφάλιος λοχαγός, Ι^ών τιι^α θέοντα ως ρί^βοντα l^iavThv στολί^ν έχοντα καλην, επιλαμβάνεται ως κω- λύσων 6 δέ αύτοι/ έπισπάται, καΐ αμφότεροι ωχοντοΐ4 κατά των πετρών φερόμενοι καΐ άπέθανον. έντενθεν άνθρωποι μέν πάνν ολίγοι ελήφθησαν, βόες δέ καΐ όνοι πολλοί κζά πρόβατα. March through the Chalybes. Passage of the Harpasus. At Gymnias they take a guide to lead them to the Euxine. 20 'Εντενθεν έπορεύθησαν διά Χαλύβων σταθμούς 15 ίπτά παρασάγγας πεντήκοντα, οίίτοι ^σαν £ν 8ιηλ-^ θον άλκιμώτατο^ καΐ εις χείρας ^σαν. εΐχον δ€ ^ θώρακας λινονς μέχρι τον ητρον, άντΙ δέ των πτερν- γων σπάρτα πνκνά έστ ραμμένα, εΐχον δέ και κνη-1β 25^ϊδας καΐ κράνη καΐ παρά την ζώνην μαχαίριον όσον ξνηλην Αακωνικην, ω έσφαττον &ν κρατειν UvaivTO, και άπστέμνοντες άν τάς κεφάλας έχοντες έπορεύοντο, καΐ ^^ον καΐ έχόρενον οπότε οί πολβ'^ιοι 148 ANABASIS IV. 7. 17-22. ANABASIS IV. 7. 23-27. 149 1 J'llt I κ I; n αντονς οψ€σθαί e/mcXXoi/. €Ϊχον δέ /cat δόρυ ώς nev- Τ€καί8€κα 7Γηχ€ωι/ μίαν λάγχην €χον, ούτοι €νέμ€νον iv τοις τΓολίσμασίν • cVct δέ τταρέ\θοΐ€ν οΐ '^EXXt/i/cs, 17 eiTTOVTO acl μαχονμ€νοί. ωκονν δέ ei^ τοις οχνροΐς^ δ καί τα €πιτι^δ€ΐα cV τοιίτοις άνακ^κομισμένοι ήσαν • ωστ€ μη8€ν \αμβάν€ΐν avro^ci' τους ^Ελλτ^ι/ας, αλλά 8ί€τράφησαν τοις κτην€σιν α ίκ των Ύαόχων ίλαβον, €Κ τούτου οΐ '^Ελλην€ς άφικοντο iwl τον "Α/οττασο^Ίβ ποταμόν, €νρος τεττάρων πλέθρων. ivT€v0€v Ιπορ^ν- 10 θησαν δια ^κνθηνών σταθμούς τετταρας παρασάγ- γας €ΐκοσι δια πεδίου €ΐς κώμας, iv αΐς έμειναν ημέρας τρ€Ϊς καΐ €π€σιτίσαντο. ίντευθεν ^νη\θονΐ^ σταθμούς τέτταρας παρασάγγας είκοσι προς πάλιν μεγάλην και είΙ^αίμονα καΧ οίκον μένην η εκαλεΐτο 15 Τυμνιάς. εκ ταύτης της χώρας 6 άρχων τοΐς ^Ελλττ- σιν ηγεμόνα πέμπει, όπως Ζιά της εαυτών πολέμιας χώρας άγοι αυτούς, ελθών δ' εκείνος λέγει στι αξει20 αυτούς πέντε ημερών εις χωρίον όθεν οφονται θάλατ- ταν ' ει 8ε μη, τεθνάναι επηγγείλατο. καΐ ηγούμε- 20 ρος επειΒη ενεβαλλεν εις την εαυτού πολεμίαν, παρετ κελεύετο aJ^cti' και φθείρειν την χώραν • ω και 8ηλον εγενετο οτι τούτου €νεκα ελθοι, ου της των Ελλήνων εύνοιας. In £ve days they come to a mountain, and a great shout " The Sea 1 The Sea 1 " is heard from the yan. The guide is dismissed with presents. Και αφικνουνται επι το ορός τη πτμπτη ήμερα • 21 25 όνομα οε τω ορει ην ^χηςΤ^ επει σε οι πρώτοι εγε- νοντο επΙ του ορούς j κραυγή πολλή εγενετο. ακού-Ζί σας δέ ο αενοφών και οι οπισθοφύλακες ωηθησαν έμπροσθεν άλλους επιτίθεσθαι πολεμίους • εΐποντο γαρ όπισθεν οΐ εκ της καομενης χώρας, και αύτων οΐ οπισθοφύλακες απέκτεινάν τέ τινας καΧ έξώγρησαν iviSpav ποιησάμενοι, και γερρα ελαβον δασειωϊ/ δβοών ώμοβόεια άμφΐ τα εΐκοσιν. έπειΒη δ' η βοη22 ^^ πλείων τε εγίγνετο καΐ εγγύτερον καΐ οι άεϊ επιόντες εθεον 8ρόμω επΙ τους άει βοώντας και πολλω μείζων εγίγνετο η βοη οσω ^η πλείους εγίγνοντο,, έ^όκει θη μείζον τι είναι τω Βενοφώντι, καΐ άι^α^άς εφ* Ιππον2Α 10 /cat Ανκιον /cat τους Ιππέας άι/αλα^ώϊ/ παρεβοηθει * /cat τά^^α δι^ άκούουσι βοώντων τών στρατιωτών Θάλαττα θάλαττα /cat παρεγγυώντων. ένθα Ζη εθεον πάντες /cat ot οπισθοφύλακες, καΧ τα υποτ ζ^rytα τ^λαυί'ετο /cat ot ίπποι. 15 ΈπεΙ δε άφικοντο πάντες επι το άκρον, ενταύθα^ 8η περιεβαλλον αλλήλους και στρατηγούς και λοχα- γού? δακρυοι^€9. /cat εξαπίνης δτου 8η παρεγγυη- σαντος οΐ στρατιώται φερουσι λίθους και ποιουσι κολωνον μεγαν. ενταύθα άνετίθεσαν δερμάτων πλη-2β 2θθος ώμοβοείων /cat βακτηρίας καΧ τα αιχμάλωίτα »^ γερρα, καΧ ο ηγεμών αυτός τε κατέτεμνε τα γερρα και τοΐς άλλοις ^ιεκελεύετο. μετά ταύτα τον ηγεμόνα27 «,^ ot 'Έλληνες άποπεμπουσι δώρα Βόντες από κοινού ΐππον /cat φιάλην άργυράν και σκευην ΙΙερσικην και 25 8αρεικούς δc/cα • ^T€t δε μάλιστα τους δακτυλίους, και έλαβε πολλούς παρά τών στρατιωτών, κώμην δε 8είξας αύτοΐς ου σκηνησουσι και την oSov ην πο- ρεύσονται εις Μάκρωνας, επει εσπέρα εγενετο, ωχετο της νυκτός άπιών. 150 ANABASIS IV. 8. 1-7. Tke Macrones oppose the march of the Greeks. Through a former slave terms are made and pledges are given. Vin. 'EvrevOev 8' €πορ€νθησαν ol Ύλλην€ς δια 1 Μακρώνωρ σταθμούς rpeU παρασάγγας δ€κ:α.^ ttJ πρώτ-ο Sc Tjfxepa άφίκορτο inl top ττοταμορ ος^ ωριζ€ την των Μακρώνων και την των %κνθηνων,^ €Ϊχον δ' 2 δνττέρ 8€ξιων χωρίον οΐον χαλεπώτατον και ίξ άριστε-^ ρίς άλλον πσταμόν, άς ον ένφαλλεν 6 ορίζων, δι' οΐ €δα δια^^ΐ'αι. ^ν δε οΐτος δασνς δβ^δρεσι παχεσι μ^ ου, ττυκνοΐς SI Tarn cVct ττροσηλθον οι Ύλλψ ν€ς ίκοτΓΤον, σπενΒοντες €Κ τον χωρίον ως τάχιστα 10€ξ€λθ€Ϊν. οίδέ Μάκρωνες ίχοντες yeppa καΧ λο-γχας 3 καΐ τριχίνονς χιτώνας κατ αντιττέραν της διαβάσεως παρατεταγμένοι ήσαν και άλληλοις ^ιεκελενοντο και ,,,^^^λίθονς εις Thv πσταμί^ν ερριπτον ' έξικνονντο γαρ ' '^" ovj ούδ' εβλαπτον ον^εν. 15 "Ενθα δή προσέρχεται Βενοφωντι των πελταστων 4 άνηρ "Κθηνησι φάσκων &ε8ονλενκεναι, λέγων οτι γιγνώσκοι την φωνην των ανθρώπων, και οΐ/χαι, ?φη, εμην ταντην πατρίδα cli^at • καΐ εΐ μη τι κωλύει έθελω αχποίς διαλεχ^τί^αι. Άλλ' ovUv κωλύει, εφη,^ 5 20 άλλα διαλεγου καΐ μάθε πρώτον τίνες είσίν, οι δ' είπον εροπησαντος οτι Μάκρωνες. 'Ερώτα τοίννν, ίφη, αιτΓονς τι άντιτετάχαται και χρηζονσιν ημΐν πολέμιοι είναι, οι δ' άπεκρίναντο,Ότι και νμεΐς era 6 την ημετεραν χώραν ίρχεσθε. λέγειν J κελενον οΐ 2δ στρατηγοί οτι ον κακώς γε ποιησοντες,^ άλλα ^ασι- λεΐ πολεμησαντες άπερχόμεθα εις την Ελλάδα, και / !<α.ν> cVt θάλατταν βονλόμεθα άφικεσθαι. ηρώτων ^κεί-^ 7 '^'^^ νοι ει ΙοΙεν αν τούτων τα ττιστά. οί δ' εφασαν και > y ANABASIS IV. 8. β-12. 151 τ., ι - hovvai και λαβείν εθέλειν. εντενθεν διδόασιι/ οί Μάκρωνες βαρβαρικην λόγχην τοις ^Ελλησιν, οι δέ 'Έλληνες εκείνοις Έλληνικην ■ ταύτα γαρ εφασαν πιστά cii^ai • θεονς δ' επεμαρτύραντο αμφότεροι. The Colchians next oppose the march. Xenophon's plan of attack. He encourages the troops. 6 Μετά δε τά πιστά ενθνς οΐ Μάκρωνες τα ^εν^ρα 8 σννεξέκοπτον την τε ohov ώΖοποίονν ως ^ιαβιβώντες εν μέσοις αναμεμιγμένοι τοις "Ελλησι, και άγοράν ^ ^ οΐαν ε^ύναντο παρεΐχον, καΐ παρηγαγον εν τρισιν ^->\^ ^\ τίβέραις εως επΙ τά Κάλχων δρια κατέστησαν τονς t^^e-^s Ιο'Έλλτ^ι^ας. εντανθα ην ορός μέγα • και επι τοντον 9^«, οί Κόλχοι παρατεταγμένοι ήσαν. καΧ το μεν πρώτον '^,^,',Ι^^ οι Έλληνες άντιπαρετάξαντο φάλαγγα, ως όντως άξοντες προς το ορός • έπειτα δε έ8οξε τοις στρατψ γοΐς βονλεύσασθαι σνλλεγεΐσιν δπως ως κάλλιστα 15 άγωνιοννται. ''Ελεξεν ονν Βενοφων οτι ^οκοίη παύσαντας την 10 φάλαγγα λόχονς ορθίονς ποιησαι • η μεν γαρ φά- λαγξ Βιασπασθησεται ενθύς • τη μεν γαρ avoSov τη δε ενοΒον ενρησομεν το ορός ■ και ενθνς τοντο άθν- 20/uLtW ποιήσει δταν τεταγμένοι εΙς φάλαγγα ταύτην Ζιεσπασμένην ορωσιν. έπειτα ην μεν επΙ πολλών 11 τεταγμένοι προσάγωμεν, περιττεύσονσιν ημών οι πολέμιοι και τοΐς περιττοίς χρησονται δ τι αν βού- λωι/ται • εάν δε έπ ολίγων τεταγμένοι ΐωμεν, ονΒεν 25 αν ειη θανμαστον εΐ Βιακοπείη ημών η φάλαγξ νττο ι ί αθρόων καΐ βελών και ανθρώπων εμπεσόντων • ει δε πη τοντο εσται, τη όλη φαλάγγι κακόν έσται. άλλα 12 152 ANABASIS IV. 8. 13-16. ANABASIS IV. 8. 17-22. 153 /Ltot SoK€L• ορθίονς τους λόχους ττονησαμένους τοσού- τον χωρίον κατοΑΓχάν ^ίοΚιπόντας τοΙς Χοχοις όσον ίζω τους έσχατους λόχους γ€ν€σθαί των πολέμιων κεράτων • καΐ οϋτως εσόμεθα της Τ€ των πολεμίων .^ ζ}φάλαγγος εζω οΐ έσχατοι λόχοι, καΧ όρθιους άγοντες ι^ * /^.w». C οι *»*- ί«*«. οΐ κράτιστοι ημών πρώτον προσίασιν, g τε άν ευο8ον *'• ^ ^ν Ρ ταύτΐβ έκαστος afct ό λόχος, καΐ εις τε το διαλ€ίποι/13 ου paSiov εσται τοις πολεμίοις είσελθεΐν ένθεν και έν- θεν λόχων όντων, διακόψαι τε ου pah^ov εσται λόχον 10 όρθιον προσιόντα, εάν τε τΐ| πιέζηται των λόχων, 6 πλησίον βοηθήσει, ην τε εΐς πη Βυνηθη των λόχων επΙ το άκρον άΐ'α^'^ΐ'αί., ουδείς μηκετι μείνη των πολε- μίων, ταύτα ε^οζε, καΐ εποίουν όρθίους τους λόχους. 14 'Βενοφων Ζε άπιων επι το εύώνυμον άπο του οεζιου U έλεγε τοις στρατιωταις, 'ΆνΒρες, ουτοί είσιν ους οράτε μόνοι m ημΐν εμποΖών το μη ηΖη €α/αι ένθα ττάλαι σ7Γ€ΐ;δο/χ€ϊ^ • τούτους, ην πως Ζυνώμεθα, και ώμοΐίς Set καταφαγεΐν. The Colchians are defeated. The Greeks occupy villages, where they are poisoned by the honey. *B7r€t δ' εν ταΐς χώραις έκαστοι εγεροντο και τους 15 20 λόχους όρθίους εποιησαντο, εγενοντο μεν λόχοι των οπλιτών άμφι τους ογΒοηκοντα, 6 δέ λόχος έκαστος σχεΖον εΙς τους εκατόν • τοίίς δέ πελταστάς και τoifς τοξστας τριχη εποιησαντο, τους μεν του ευωνύμου εξω, τους δέ του Βεξιου, τους δέ κατά μέσον, σχεΒον 25 cf ακοσ-ίοι;? εκάστους, εκ τούτου παρηγγυησαν οίΐ6 στρατηγοί ευχεσθω, • ευξάμενοι δέ καΧ παιανίσαντες επορεύοντο. καΐ Χειρίσοφος μεν και Ηενοφων καΐ οι συν αυτοΐς πελτασται της των πολεμίων φάλαγγος Μ;.£ εζω γενόμενοι επορεύοντο- οΙ δέ πολέμιοι ως cSoi/17 αυτούς, άντιπαραθεοντες οΐ μεν επΙ το Ζεξιον οι οε επΙ το εύώνυμον Ζιεσπάσθησαν, και πολύ της αύτων φάλαγγος εν τω μέσω κενόν εποίησαν, οι δβ κατά 18 5 το 'Αρκαδικοί/ πελτασταί, ων ηρχ^ν Κΐσχίνης ό Άκαρνάν, νομίσαντες^φεύγειν άνακραγόντες εθεον -/[j^^alzZ^y καΐ ούτοι πρώτοι επι το ορός άναβαίνουσι • συνεφεί- πετο δέ αντοις και το ΆρκαΖικον όπλιτικόν, ων ηρχε Κλεάνωρ 6 Όρχομενιος. οι δε πολέμιοι, ως ηρξαντο 19 10 θειν, ουκετι έστησαν, άλλα φυγή άλλος άλλη ετρά- πετο. Οί δε "Έλληνες άναβάντες εστρατοπεΖενοντο εν πολλοίς κώμαις και τάπιτηΖεια πολλά εχούσαις. και τα μεν άλλα ούΒέν δ τι καΐ ε'^αν/υιασαϊ/ • τά δέ20 15 σμήνη πολλά ^ν αυτόθι, και των κηρίων όσοι εφαγον των στρατιοπων πάντες άφρονες τε εγίγνοντο και ήμουν καΐ κάτω Βιεχώρει αύτοΐς και ορθός ούΖεις έΒύνατο ΐστασθαι, αλλ' οί μεν ολίγον εΒη8οκότες σφόδρα μεθύουσιν εωκεσαν, οί δε ττολύ μαινομενοις, 20 οί δε καΐ άποθνησκουσιν. εκειντο 8ε ούτω πολλοί 21 ωσπερ τροπής γεγενημένης, καΧ πολλή ην άθυμία. τη δ' υστεραία απέθανε μεν ουδείς, άμφΐ δε την αύτην πως ωραν άνεφρόνουν • τρίτη δε καΐ τετάρτη άνίσταντο ωσπερ εκ φαρμακοποσίας. In two days the Greeks arrive at Trapezus on the Euxine. They make the sacrifice which they had vowed and celebrate games. 25 ^ΈΑντευθεν δ* εττορευ^ησαι/ δυο σταθμούς παρασάγ-2Ζ «/ ^ γας επτά, καΧ ^λθον επΙ θάλατταν εις Τραπεζούντα, Ίτόλιν *ΈΧ\ηνίΖα οίκουμενην εν τω Εύξείνω Ώόντω Κ;..: „ Xi C L. χ.** I ••■*»Τ»|(βΙ ^s^^ -C* ^"^ •" \i 154 ANABASIS IV. 8. 23-2a ANABASIS IV. 8. 155 'ϊ,ινωπ€ωι/ αποικίαν iv τ^ Κόλχων χωρά. ivravOa €μ€ίναρ ΐ7/Λ€ρας ά/χ<^ι τα? τριάκοντα iv rat? τώι/ Κόλ- χωϊ' κώμαχς ' KaLvrevOep ορμώμενοι iklQζovτo την 93 Κολχίδα, άγοραν 8c παρ€Ϊχορ τω στρατοττέ^ω Ύρα- 5 π€ζονντίθί, και &4ξαντ6 τ€ του^ "Ελλτ/ι^ας και ^ cVta ihoaav βονς καΐ αλφιτα καϊ οΐνον. σνν^ιεπράττοντο 24 δέ καΐ υπέρ των πλησίον Κόλπων των iv τω π^Βίω μαΚιστα οίκούντων, καΧ ^eVta καΧ τΐαρ 4κ€ίνων ηλθον βΟ€ς. /*! 10 Mcra Se τοντο την θνσίαν ην ευζαντο παρ€σκ€υα- 25 ζοι/το • ηΚσον ο αντοις ικανοί ρο€^ αποσνσαι τψ All τω σωτηρι και τω 'Hpa/cXct ηγεμόσννα και τοις : άλλοις θ€θΐς α ψυξαντο, Ιττοίησαν δέ καΧ άγωνα γνμνικον iv τω opei ίνθαττ€ρ iaKrjvovv. €ΐ\οντο δε Ιξ, Αρακόντιον ^παρτιάτην, ος €φ\τγ€ ττα2<ζ ων οίκοθεν, τταΐδα άκων κατακανών ζιτηλη πατάξας, δρόμου τ iπ^^μ€kηθηvaι και τον αγώνος προστατησαι. ineiSr) 26 δέ 17 θυσία iyevero, τα δέρματα τταρέ^οσαν τω Αρα- κοντίψ, καΧ ηγείσθοΑ, iKcXevov οπον τον Βρόμον ire• 20'Π'οιηκώς εΐη, 6 δέ δειράς ουπερ ίστη κότες iroyyavov, Οΰτος 6 λόφος, ίφη, κάλλιστος τρέχειν δπον άν τις βονληται. ΊΙώς oiv, ίφασαν, ^ννησονται τταλαίειι/ iv σκληρω και δασεί όντως; 6 δ* cIttc, Μάλλοι^ τι aviaxrerai ο καταπεσών, ήγωνίζοντο 8ε παίδες μεν 27 2^στα8ιον των αίγβαλώτων οι πλείστοι, 8όλιχον Βε Κρητες πλείονς η εξη κοντά εθεον, πάλην δέ και πνγ- μην καΧ παγκράτιον {έτεροι • καΐ) καλή θεα iy ενετό • πολλοί γαρ κατεβησαν, και άτε θεωμενων των εταί- ρων πολλή φιλονικία iγίγvετo. εθεον 8έ καΐ ίπποι, 28 £ Τ ci 1, jg' *""■-' Μ L.|i v^ και ε8ει αντονς κατά τον πρανονς ελασαντας εν τύ) θαλάττη άναστρεφαντας πάλιν άνω προς τον βωμον άγειν. καΧ κάτω μεν οι πολλοί εκαλιν^ονντο • άνω δέ προ9 το ισχυρώς όρθιον μόλις βάΖην iπopεvovτo οι ίπποι • ένθα πολλή κρανγη καΐ γελως και πάρα- κελενσις iγίγvετo. Ι )ί UfK— Ν. Β. — In the notes, G. refers to the latest edition of Goodwin's Greek Grammar (1892), and H. to lladley's Greek Granimar, revised by Allen (1884). A few references are made to Goodwin's Syntax of tk^ Greek Mood» and Tenses (edition of 1890), for the beneiit of teachers and more advanced pupils. Most references to the Greek text of this edition are made to pages and lines {e.g. p. 91, 7). When references are made by a simple number without mentioning a page {e.g. 14), the line of the same page is meant. When a reference is made to a section without mentioning the book and chapter {e.g. § 16), the section of the same chapter is meant. I '.A 't f i ι i :/■ '■r l,.f «. -Or *>■»»# *Λ ]Ds ο T Mj S. BOOK FIRST. The Levying of an Army. — The March to the Neighborhood of Babylon. — The Battle at Cunaxa and the Death of Cyrus. CHAPTER I. Page 1.] §1. 1. Aapctov καΐ Xlapvo-ariSos : see the Introd., § 15. For the case, a gen. of source, see G. 1130, 2; H. 750. — γίγνονται, were born. We should naturally render the clause, ' Darius and Parysatis had two sons.' For the historic pres., see G. 1252 ; H. 828. — δύο : for its agreement with iratScs, see G. 922 ; H. 2006. There were other sons (thirteen children in all), but these are the two now prominently in the mind of the writer. — 2. irpcapvrcpos . . . KOpos, Artaxerxes^ {who was) , the older y and CyruSj the younger. Άρταξ^ρ^ψ and KOpos are in appos. (G. 911 ; H. 023) with iraides. — 3. ήσ-θ^ν€ΐ, was ill^ lay sick. The inipf. denotes the continuance of the state (G. 1250, 2 ; H. 829). The aor. ήσθένησε would mean/eZi ill (G. 1200 ; H. 841). — ύΐΓώ•ΐΓΤ€υ€ : peculiar in augment (G. 543 ; II. 362 a). — τ€λ6υτην τον βίον : in such expressions in Greek the two substs. are closely connected, expressing a single compound idea ((/. - 'Lebensende' in German, * life-time' in Eng., eic), and only the subst. in the gen. has the art. For the force of the art., see G. 949 ; II. 058. — 4. τώ iraiSc : the dual, but above in 1 the pi. (G. 155). For the case, see G. 895, 1 ; H. 939. — άμφοτ^ρω : for its position, see G. 970 ; H. 673 a. — irapcivai, to be by {him), i. e. at Thamneria. See Introd. § 19. § 2. 4. 6 : for the separation of art. and subst., see G. 904 ; H. 660c. — |t€v ... 84 : used to correlate the two sentences. See the Diet., and cf. the case in 2. pJv is not to be translated. — 5. οδν, now, is here continu- ative, not inferential. Cf. igitur in Lat. — ιταρων Ιτυγχαν€, ivas, as it happened, {already) there (G. 1580 ; H. 984). — μ€ταΐΓ4μ•ΐΓ€ται, summoned. For the tense, cf. ylyvovrai in 1. This use of the pres. is common. — 6. αρχής : see the Introd., § 17. — σ-ατράπην : pred. ace. (G. 1077 ; H. 726). See also the Introd., § 11. — ΙτΓο£ησ-6, had made. The Greek was content simply to refer the action to the past, without specifying the time as exactly as we do by the plpf. — 7. καΐ . . . Z\ ... άπ48€ΐξ€, and {δέ) he had also {καί) appointed him, etc., a transition from a rel. to an independ- ent clause, not uncommon in Greek, by which special attention is called" 158 ANABASIS 1 I. a-a )t f 1 u Page 1.] to the second statement, καί adds the new particular of the investment of Cyrus witli military authority (tlie office of satrap was at first chiefly a civil one) ; 8i m the conjunctive word, and the word between the two is emphatic. — ιτάντων : accent ((ί. 128 ; Η. 239). — 8«roi, who, lit, {as man!/) «^, the rel. of quantity or nmiilwr (G. 429; li. 282). — €l«. . . άβροίζονται, miiHter in (he plain of Castolus, lit. gather them- seloes^ into, etc, άθροί^ορται is not the liistoric pres., but pres. to denote a standing fact. The review was annual. Wliere was the plain of Cas- tolus, and for what purpose was it especially used ? See the Diet. — 8, avoPnCvfi, άνίρη (10) : this change of tense from the historic pres. to tlie mor. is comuion. The repetition of the verb in chijistic order emi)hasizes the importance of the act: 'So Cyrus went up, taking with him Tissa- pbemes m his friend, and (lie was) accompanied on his journey (άνφη) by a GreeTc escort.'— 6 Kvpos : prop, name with the art. (G. 94;J ; II. (}(};]). — 9. λαβών : the partic. denotes the attendant cheumstance (G. 1503, 7 ; H. 068). So Ιίχωρ in 10. See also G. 1505 ; II. ίΧί8 b. — ^s φΛον : Tissa- phernes was in fact his enemy. See the Introd., § 20^. — τών 'Ελλήνων έιτλίτοβ TpiaKo^Covs : a body-guaixl selected from the Greeks then in his service. Cyrus knew well tlie supt-riority of the Greeks over the Pereians ae soldiers. What was the armor of the hoplite?— 10. &ρχοντα : in appos. (G. 91G, 1080 ; H. 720) with Sevlav, which is the secohd obj. of Ιχωΐ'. Where wfis Parrhasia ? §3. 12. Ιτ€λ€ύτη<Γ€, had ended {his life), had died. The aor. is generally used with yirc( or 47Τ€ΐδή, after, after that, the aor. with the temporal conj. being equivalent to our plpf. See note on έττοί-ησί m 6, and φ the Lat. historic (aoristic) pf. with postquam. — KuX κατέστη . . . Άρτ«ι||ρξιι$, ami ArtMxerxes had been established in the kingdom, lit. had been settled iiUo, and so c/$ with the ace. — 13 8ιαβάλλ€ΐ, falsely accused. The current story, that Cyrus had planned to kill Artaxerxes at the time of his coronation (seethe Introd., § 20 2), Xenophon evidently believed ' to be false. — 14. m Ιττιβονλιΰοι : opt. by (luot. after the idea of saying in διαβά\\€ΐ (G. 1487 ; H. 932, 2). Tlie historic pres. is a secondary tense (G. 1208). Give the direct form of ίιηβουλ£ύον. — αύτι^ : after the compound verb (G. 1179; H. 775).— a U,but he (G. 981, 983; H. U54fe), i. e. Artaxerxes. & δέ in the nom. in Attic almost always refers to a different subj. from that of the preceding sent. — 15. σνλλαμβάνιι, 'had hliE arrested.' — ώι4ιτοκτ«νών, with the amwed object of putting Mm to deM (G. mm, 4; 1574; H. 969c; 978). «Js shows that the purix)se expressed by the partie. was that avowed by A. — 16. Ιξαιτηο-αμ^νη «Αλιν : observe tlie difference between the Greek and Eng. idioms. In Eng., made intercession for him and effected his return (again) ; but in ANABASIS I. i. 3-5. 159 I ί I Page 1.] Greek, having made intercession for him, Reeled his return, etc. The use of the partic. is much commoner in Greek than in Eng., a fact to be kept constantly in mind in translating. For the voice of έ^αιτησα- μένη, see G. 1242, 2 ; Π. 813. Xenophon's choice of the word άνοΐΓ^μΐΓ€ΐ (lit. sent him back) shows his recognition of the imperious nature of Parysatis and of her influence over Artaxerxes. Page 2.] § 4. 1. Ό δ€ : i.e. Cyrus. Cf. the note on ό ό/, p. 1, 14. — ws, as, tohen, temporal conj. — &πήλθ€ : accent (G. 133, 1 ; H. 3916). — ^ovKtmrai. .., Utlvov, planned that he might never (G. 1610; H. 1021) again be (G. 1372 ; H. 885) in the power of his brother, but, if possible, might be king in his stead. For the mood of δύνηται, see G. 1503, end, and 1403 ; H. 937, 898 ; and for its accent, G. 720 ; H. 417 a. —3. μίν i correlative to δ4 in 5. His mother's support is contrasted with the steps taken by Cyrus himself to bring about the desired end. — 4. Kvptp: for the case, see G. 1159; H. 764, 2. — 5. βα<Γΐλ€νοντα : the simple attrib. partic. (G. 1559 ; H. 965), used as an adj. § 5. 5. oo-Tis άφικν€ίτο : a cond. rel. sent, expressing a general supposi- tion in past time, with the indie, where we should expect the opt. (G. 1432 ; H. 918, 894 c). — 6. irapd pcuriAcws, from the presence of the king, is used with των as an attrib. adj., a subst. being omitted (G. 952, 1, 2 ; H. 666 a, 621 a). The expression is brief, and would read in full, δστα δέ των τταρά. βασι\€ΐ (άη,Ι.) άφικνξΐτο τταρά βασιλ^ω^ (g^"•) κ^λ. Note that the art. is omitted with βaσι\4ωs (G. 957 ; H. 600 c). — iravras : pi. because of the distributive force of 5στ« (G. 1021c; H. 629 6).— 7. αύτ« : with φίλους (G. 1174 ; H. 765). So αύτφ in 10. — ctvat : after ωστ€ (G. 1449; 1450 ; H. 953). The Persians whose support Cyrus thus won were prob. high oflRcials at court, sent out to inspect the province. See Introd. 11 1, end. — 8. καΐ . . . 8^ : the position of δ^, so far from the beginning of the sent, is rare. For καΐ . . . δ^ cf. p. 1, 7, and note. — των βαρβάρων : to give a subst. a more emphatic position, it is often transferred, generally with change of case, from the dependent to the principal clause. So also in Eng., as "See the learned Bellario, how he writes." Here we should normally have ΙτΓ€μ€\€ίτο w's oi wop' έαυτφ βάρβαροι ΤΓθ\€μ€Ϊν κτ\. For the case of βαρβάρων as it stands, see G. 1102 ; H. 742.-9 ώς €Εησαν, €χοΐ€ν : object clause expressed by ω$ and the opt. where we should expect δπω$ and the fut. indie, (cf. δ-η-ω^ ίσται in 2, and G. 1372 ; H. 885), or at least «irws with the pres. opt. (G. 1374, 1 ; H. 8856). In thus using cJs (in the sense of δνωή, Xenophon distinctly violates Attic usage. In general, he stands apart from other writers of Attic prose in his use of ws in final and object clauses. See G. Moods and Tenses, 351, and Appendix IV. The instances of his peculiar usage will be noted as they occur. — 160 ANABASIS I. i. 5, β. I r * Page 2.] «oXf|utir: with humt (O. 1626; H. 052). — ι ivoucAf Ιχοκν: how are such phraaes best rendered into Eng.? See the Diet., 8.v. 16* 11. τ\ψ Si . . . βοβτιλία, hia Greek force (the position of the words isempliatie) hemlletied wUk the utmost secrecy (lit. concealing his act, G. 1242, 1 ; H. 812, as most he was aWe), that he might take (G. 1305 ; IL 881) the king as unprepared as possible, δέ introduces the tliird and most important particular. II is mother was liis fii-st resource, then native Persians, then Greek mercenaries. Cyrus knew that an army of Greeks wae hie chief hope for wresting tlie tlirone from his brother, who had all the feeourooi of the empire at bis command. Cf. i. 7. 3. — 12. ό'τι dirapa- wwmarwrw : Uri or m is very often prefixed to the sup. to strengtlien it. Cf, qumn maxime in Lat. In these constructions there is an ellipsis of ■oil© form of ^tm/iat. Sometimes in the case of the sup. with ws the ¥erb is expressed, aa in 11, m μάλιστα edt/mro κρυττόμερο$, as secretly αβ jWiliMe, and p. Ill, 13, iJt iSvmro τάχιστα iwoptvcTo. Cf. with the latter tba simple Jr τάχιστα^ p. 14, 21. Cf. also witli Srt irXci^Tous, as many as pomibk, in 16, wt Ar διΐκι^ται wXehrom, p. 27, 3. — 13. mU, in the following moMmr ; covering all that follows to the end of the chapter. First he ■trengtbeneti his garrisons (I 6), which were already manned by Greeks ; then he himself collected troops for the siege of Miletus (§ 7) ; then he got together other Greek contingents under Clearchus (§ 9), Aristippus |l 10), I*roienu8, Sophaenetus, and Socrates ($ 11). — ^ιγομϊτο : mid. Cf. ratidm§t p. 1, 16.-14. ψνλ«κ4• : antec. attracted into the rel. (G. 1037 ; H. ΙΜΙδ). Normally we should have των ψυΧακων όνόσων (G. 1031 ; II. ΟίΜ) ίίχ€ κτ\. The accent shows that φυΚακά^ is from #•λ«Μ| and not from ^<ίλα| (G. 121, 1 ; H. 128). State the difference in wmm^mg off the two subets. — 15. k^rrotf : pred. position (G. 076 ; H. 673 a). — 16. lii . . . «4λιοτ, on the plea that Tissaphemes was plot- liilf a^ifml their cUies (G. 1568, 1574 ; H. 970, 978). Cf ώ$ άτοκτ€νωρ, p. 1, 15. — 17. καΐ γ4^ . . . τΑ &|>χα{ον, and (the reason was plausible)^ for tte eUies of Imia had originally (G. 1060 ; H. 719) belonged to Tissw- pkermm (G. lOfM, 1 ; H. 732 a). The impf. Ιϊσαν is used with ro άρχαΐον off a time prior to the main action. — 18. Ik βαο-ιλίωι ScSofUveu, having bmrn ffimm Mm % the king^ or being a present to him from the king, έξ (ter the form I», we G. 63 ; H, 88 c) is used with the gen. of the agent fItiPtil Μ the source. — 10, &4«οτήκΐ0-αν : for the fonn, see G. 528 j E. ttiiL For the revolt of the Greek cities of Ionia to Cyrus, see the lBtrod.,1 17 end.— 20. irXi|v Μιλήτον : Tissaphemes had built a castle in Miletiii which overawed the town. Situation of Miletus ? See the Diet. aofl •Μΐ*ι»- ANABASIS I. i. 7,a 161 ^ ^ I ' Page 2.1 §7. 21. vpoaitr9o\uvost having become aware (or in Έ,ηξ. more commonly, becoming aware) l^forehand. — τα αντά : distinguish this care- fully from the following ταύτα (G. 399 ; II. 079). In the pL, because the Greeks looked at the action of revolting with reference to its parts ; but in Kng., were forming this same plan (cognate ace, G. 1054 ; H. 7166. — βουλ€υομ€νους : sc. rtras. The partic. is in indirect discourse (G. 1588 ; H. 982). — άτΓοστήναι ; in appos. with τά αυτά ταΰτα (G. 1517). — 22. tovs a€v . . . Tous 8€ : relic of the original demonstrative meaning of the art. (G. 981; H. <)o4). — 23. νιτολαβών rows φ€ύγονταβ : subordinated too-uXX^^as ivo\uSpK€i, when he had taken the fugitives under his protection, he collected an army and laid siege, etc. ύττόλαβων καΐ (observe the conj.) συ\\4ξαί ivo\iopK€i would mean, ivhen he had taken find had collected, he laid siege, Qtc. — 24. 4ιτολιόρκ€ΐ : continued action. — 25. κατάγΜν : observe the dis- tinction of the following terms : έκβάΧΧω, eject, banish; φ€\τγω, flee, be in banishment ; κατάγω, lead Imck, restore from banishment; iKTrixTw,fall out, be banished. — 2(). καΐ αίίτη . . . σ-τ(>άτ€νμα, and in this a^ain he had (G. 1173; H. 768) another pretext for collecting (G. 1547; H. 959) an army, αΰτη is in agreement with the subst. in the pred. ; otherwise it would be τοΰτο. Page 3.] § 8. 1. ηξίου . . . αύτον, he asked, on the ground that he was (G. 1503, 2 ; II. 9696) his brother.— 2. Βοθήναι : obj. of ι)^/ου (G. 1518; II. 948), with TroXet? for its subj. — ol : the indir. reflex. (G. 987 ; H. 085), accented because it is in antithesis to Ύισσαφ4ρνην?Λ\ά emphatic (G. 144, 1; H. 203). —3. opxfiv : parallel in const, to δοθηναι, i.e. he thought it right {■η^ίου) rather that the cities should be given to him (placed under his authority) than (he thought it right) that Tissaphemes should control them. — αντων : for the case, see G. 1109; II. 741. — «τυνέιτραττιν . . . ούτφ : cooperated with him in this, lit. did this with (συν-) him. Why is ταΰτα in the pi. ? See note on rk αυτά, p. 2, 21. — 4. «crrc ουκ τ)σθάν€το : actual result (G. 1449; 1450; II. 927). Cf ωστ€ eiwt, p. 2, 7.— irpos cavTOv : used as adj. (G. 952, 1 ; IT. 066 a). irpo'y : here of hostile personal relation. — 5. Τκτσ-αψ^ρνιι . . . Βαιταναν, but thougU thai he {αυτόν, i.e. Cyrus) loas incurring expense (G. 1522, 1 ; H. 940) about his forces because he was at war with Tissaphemes (G. 1177 ; H. 772). — 0. wonrc . . . ΐΓολ«μούν- των, consequently he was not at all {ούδέρ, G. 1060 ; II. 719) displeased at their being at war (G. 15s ScSofjivai, having been given him by the king, or being a present to him from the king. 4ξ (for the form ix, see G. 63 ; H. 88 c) is used with the gen. of the agent viewed as the source. — 19. Α^ηττήκισ-αν : for the form, see G. 528 ; H. 359 a. For the revolt of tlie Greek cities of Ionia to Cyras, see the Introd.,$ 17 end. — 20. wk^v Μιλήτου : Tissaphemes had built a castle in Miletus which overawed the town. Situation of Miletus ? See the Diet and map. i "J 111 ANABASIS r. I. 7, Λ 161 ί Page 2.] 5 7. 21. ιτμοαισ^όμΛνοζ, having become aware {or in Eng. more commonly, tecowiiwf/ aware) l^eforehand. — τα αυτά : distinguish this care- fully from the following ταντα (G. 309 ; II. 679). In the pi., because the Greeks looked at the action of revolting with reference to its parts ; but in Eng., were forming this same plan (cognate ace, G. 1054 ; H. 7166. — βονλ€υομ«νου$ : sc. rtvas. The partic. is in indirect discourse (G. 1588 ; II. 982). — άίΓοστηνοΛ : in appos. with τά αντά ταύτα (G. 1517). — 22. του» |icv . . . Tovs 8c : relic of the original demonstrative meaning of the art. (G. 981; 11. 654). — 23. νιτολαβων tovs φ€νγοντα5 : subordinated Ιοσυλλέξαί έτΓολιόρκα, when he had taken the fugitives under his protection, lie collected an army and laid siege, etc. ντόλαβων καΐ (observe the conj.) συΧλέξαί έΊΓολωρκ€ΐ would mean, when he had taken flnd had collected, he laid siege, etc. — 24. ΙίΓολιόρκ» : continued action. — 25. κατάγ«.ν : observe the dis- tinction of the following terms : ίκβάλλω, eject, banish ; φ€\τγω, flee, be in banishment ; κατάγω, lead Ixick, restore from banishment ; iκ■κί^Γτω,fcdl out, be banished. — 26. καΙ αντη . . . στράτ€υμα, and in this a^ain he had (G. 1173; H. 768) aiwther pretext for collecting (G. 1547; H. 959) an army, αντη is in agreement with the subst. in the pred. ; otherwise it would be τοΟτο. Page 3.] § 8. 1 . ηξίου . . . α(>τον, he a^ked, on the ground that he was (G. 1563, 2 ; II. 0606) his brother.— 2. δοΟήναι : obj. of ή^Ιου (G. 1518 ; H. 048), with TTciXets for its subj. — ol : the indir. reflex. (G. 987 ; II. 085), accented because it is in antithesis to Ύίσσαφ4ρνηρ and emphatic (G. 144, 1; H. 263). — 3. apxciv : parallel in const, to δοθηναι, i.e. he thought it right (ήξίου) rather that the cities should be given to him (placed under his authority) than (he thought it right) that Tissaphemes should control them. — αυτών: for the case, see G. 1100; H. 741. — oTJviirpaTTcv . . . οΰτψ : cooperated with him in this, lit. did this with (συν-) him. Why is ταύτα in the pi. ? See note on τά αυτά, p. 2, 21. — 4. wrrt ουκ η<Γβάν€το : actual result (G. 1440; 1450; II. 927). Cf ωστ€ eimt, p. 2, 7.— irpos Ιαυτόν : used as adj. (G. 052, 1 ; II. 666a). wpos : here of hostile personal reliition. ■ — 5. Τισ-σ-αψφν€ΐ . . . Sairav&v, but thougJU that he {αυτόν, i.e. Cyrus) loas incurring expense (G. 1522, 1 ; II. 040) ab(mt his forces because he was at war with Tissajthernes (G. 1177 ; H. 772). — 6. Arre . . . woXcp-ow- T«v, consequently he was not at all (ουδέν, G. lOiiO ; II. 710) displeased at their being at war (G. 15(i8 ; II. 070). — 7. καΐ γαρ, and (the more) because, involving an ellipsis, as always. Cf. p. 2, 17. — 0. «v . . . €χων, which he (Cyrus) happened to have that belonged to Tissaphemes. Τισσαφέρνους is a gen. of possession (G. 1085, 1 ; II. 720 a), limiting ών in the rel. clause. It would stand normally in the antec. clause with των νόλ€ων. — «ν : assimilation in case (G. 1031 ; II. 004). —Note throughout this section the use of the inipf. to express continuance or repetition. 162 ANABASIS I. i. 9, ία Ί Page 3.] S 9. 10. Χψρονήσ-ψ : What was the Chersonese, and where WM it ? — 11. icmT άντι-ττίραβ : an adv. phrase like ' over against ' in Eng., in which am-nripas was originally felt to be an ace. ; sometimes written as one word, mrairnHpas. —Άβν^υ : for the case, see G. 1148; H. 757. Where was Abydus, and for what was it famous ?—τόνδ€ riv τράιτον : in ihe following (G. 1005 ; H. 696) manner, adv. ace. equal to w5e, p. 2, KJ. — 12. KXiopxof : see Introd., § 23. ^ 13. %4τ0ΐ|, came to admire (G. 1200 ; H. 841).— δί8ωσ-ιν: change to the historic pres. Cf. ά»αβαίν€ΐ, άν4βη, p. 1, 8, 10, and the note. — 14. |&vp(ovt $α|Μΐκού« : tliis was a large sum (♦54,000), but Cyrus did not lack means and was determined to have men. — 15. ατννίλφν, ΙιτολΙμ» : note the difference in tense. —16. Ik • . . £f>|M&|Mvos: i.e. ihe Chersonese was his military base. —rots θρ^|1 T©is . . . οίκονο-λ : note the position of the attrib. adj. phrase (G. 050, 2 ; 952, 1 ; H. 668; 666a). Cf. Iv Χΐ|φονήο-φ τη κτ\. above in 10.-17. 'ΕλλήοΊτοντον : the ace. with reference to a preceding state of motion, as in tlie phrase cis τότον οίκω, (go into and) dwell in a place. What is the modern name of the Hellespont ? — 20. koikrcu : to be translated by an adv. (G. 026 ; H. 01 Π a). — τοντο . . . ο-τράτιυμ,α, in this way again this anttament was secretly maintained (G. 1586 ; II. 084) /or him. S 10. 22. BcTToXos : Where was Thessaly ? What famous mountain was there on its northern boundary ?— |«fvo« : What is the difference between the meaning of the word here and that below in 25 ?— 23. oCkol ; used as adj. (G. 952, 1 ; Π. 606 a). For its accent, see G. 113 ; H. 1026.— 24. αΐτιΐ . . . μκΓβόν, asked him for pay (αυτόν and μισθό ν being obj. aces. with αΐτ€ί)/ϋτ (e«) ;^000 mercenaries (and) for three juontfis, i.e. for three months' pay (G. 1085, 5 ; 11. 729 d) for WOO mercenaries. This is some- times rendered, asked him for about {«'i, see note on «j, p. 5, 5) SOOO fnercenaries etc. ; but it seems incredible that Cyrus should have been willing to send off 4000 Greeks (he gave Aristippus double the sum for which he asked) on so distant an expedition, when his whole aim was to gather Greek troops about him as rapidly as possible. On the other hand, it was an easy matter for- him to furnish Aristippus the wiean« for collecting this number.— 25. ώι . . . 4vTurrairi«T«v, on the ground that (cf. the use of m with iw^βov)uύo]^0s, p. 2, 16) in this way he should get tfie better of his opponents. T€fHy€i4mt^t dv (G. 1563, 2 ; 11. 0606) would be wtptyipfHTo dv (G. i:J08 ; H. 987 a), if expressed by a finite mood. The prot. to this apod, is implied in ovrm (G. 1413 ; 11. 002). — 26. i,wrurrwn»rmv : for the case, see G. 1120 ; H. 749. Page 4] 2. fli^kt»v : gen. obj. of Mrai (G. 1114 ; II. 743a). The obj. Inf. καταλΰσαι is, in this case, the ace. — |*ή: with the inf. (G. 1611; H. 1023). —3. vpW i» Λ^ψ rwiapoiiXfWii'nu, untU he had consulted toUh ANABASIS I. i 10 and 2. 1. 163 ί I Page 4.] him. For τρίρ (strengthened by preceding τρόσθεν) signifying until, with the subjv. after a neg., see G. 1460 ; 1470 ; II. 024. Since the clause depends on an historic tense, ιτρίμ συμβουΧ^ύσαιτο (G. 1502, 3; Η. 937 α) might have been used. § 11. 6. Πρόξ€νον : the particular friend of Xenophon, at whose invi- tation the latter took part in the expedition. — 7. «Ss βουλόμ€νο$, ws irape- χόντων : the first ω? shows that βου\όμ£νο% κτλ. gives the cause for the command to Proxenus, as assigned by Cyrus ; the second ws shows that παρΐχόντων gives the cause, as assigned by Cyrus^ for his desire (βουΧόμε- νοή to expel the Pisidians ; while wr before ττοΧεμήσων in 12 shows that this partic. gives the purpose declared by Cyrus for his command to the other two generals (έκ^λευσερ). The further idea implied in the first and third cases, that the cause and the purpose were not the true grounds of his action, is derived from the context and is not implied by this use of ω$ (G. 1574 ; H. 078). Neither is there any conditional force in the partic. with w's. Cf. with these three cases of aJs with the partic. the cases where it occui-s above, p. 1, 15, p. 2, 16, p. 3, 25. — els IliiriSas : point out the situation of Pisidia on the map. — 9. χώρψ: equiv. to apxy. Cf. p. 1, 17. — 10. Where were Stymphalus and Achaia ? Over one half of the Ten Thousand came from Arcadia and Achaia. See Introd. § 242. _ll. I^vovs . . . τούτου?, these also being guest-friends (G. 907 ; H. 614) of his. — 12. m the horse. When this relation is not to be expressed the phrase is ^φ' ϊτητου, as i-ri του ιπνου ψγ€ν, he led them on horseback, p. Ill, 20. — 8. oirdrc βονλοιτο : a cond. rel. sent, expressing ;?eneral supposition in past time (G. 1431, 2 ; H. 914, 2). — 9. δια . . . ιταραδ€ί<Γον, through the middle (G. 978, 1 ; H. 671) of the park. — 10. ούτοΰ : in the pred. position (G. 977, 1 ; H. 0736). —lie tAw βΐΜΓίλιίΜν : the more i»recise statement would be iv rots /SacriXciots, but the subsequent flowing of the water out from (under) the palace is implied. Cf. ταριψταν ets Σάρδ€ΐί, p. 5, 3, and note. S 8. 11. ^arn : for the accent, see"*6!l44, 5 ; H. 480, 2. Note the tense. Above in we have l^v, because, although the palace was doubt- less in existence at the time of the composition of the narration, Cyrus himself was then dead. — 12. μτγήλον p«uriX4Ms : note the omission of the art., and (/. βασι\4οί$, p. 2, β, and the note. — 14. καΐ ovtosi this alsoj i.e. the Marsyas as well as the Maeander. — 16. iroSwv : pred. gen. of measure (G. 1094, 5 ; H. 732, 729 dj. —Xiytrtu . . . IxSctpai, Apollo is mid to havefiaifed, etc., the pers. const, for tlie impers., X^yerai 'AiroXXwm ixMpai (G. 1522, 2 ; H. 944). The dir. form of the anecdote would be ένταΰθα ' Ατόλλων ίξ4δ€ΐρ€ . . . έκμ4μασ€. — 17. Map7 ; H. eU}^ § a 20. Η^ρΙη? : see tlleTntrod., §13.-21. r^ μάχιι, ill the well-known (t5) battle {G. 1181 ; H. 77(i).— λίγτται, οΙκοδομ{)σαι : cf. X^yerai ixSetpai iibo¥e in 16, and the note. —23. Ifutvc ημ^ραβ τριάκοντα : waiting for ANABASIS I. 2. 0-11. 167 Page 6.] the reinforcements immediately named. This is the longest halt that the Greek troops made anywhere, but the time was utilized. See the Introd., §42^ — 25. τοξόταβ Κρήτα? : the Cretan bowmen were celebrated in antiquity. — 20. Σώσί$ : not previously mentioned and not again referred to in the Anabasis. What became of him and what dis- position was made of his troops are matters of conjecture. — 27. Σοφαΐ- v«Tos : we should probably read 'Aylas. See the Inirod., § 22, note. Page 7.] 3. ^γ^νοντο ol crv^iravTcSf a^^ together amounted to. — όιτλΐ- ται, iriXTCUTTot : pred. nom. with iyivovro. (G. 907 ; H. 7066). The words distribute oi σύμτταντί^ (note fav . . . U). ττελτοστα/ is here used generic- ally for light armed troops in general, and includes the 500 yv^v^res and 200 bowmen mentioned above, p. 5, 7, and p. 0, 25, See the Diet., s.v. τελταστήί. Above, p. 0, 24, the word has its specific sense. — 4. &μφΙ Tovs δισ-χιλίουβ : see the note on cts, p. 5, 5. For the force of the art., see G. 9486; H. 604 c. — When Xenophon here says 11,000 hoplites and 2000 light armed troops, he is speaking in round numbers. The exact totals according to the preceding enumerations are respectively 10,600 and 2,300. The hoplite force was subsequently increased to the number of 1,100. See the Introd., § 22. § 10. Up to this time the march has been south-east. Cyrus now turns back and marches north-west as far as Κεράμων ayopa, probably with the double object of increasing his supplies and getting on the main high-road to the east. — 7. τά Αιίκαια ίΒνσ•€^ celebrated the Lycaea with sacrifice, τά Αύκαια is a cognate ace. (G. 1051 ; 1052 ; H. 715 ; 716a). Cf. the phrase ΊΓ4μτΓ€ΐν Βοηδρόμια, to celebrate the Boedromia by a procession. Why should Xenias have felt special interest in the Lycaea? — 8. ησ-αν : in agreement with the pred. nom. (G. 904 ; H. 010). — 11. Κ^μάμων άγοράν : cf. Eng. ^ Newmarket. — Ισχάτην irpers. C/. X^^erai Άιπίλλα». i^hupai, p. (., 10, and the note. —22. oJv, at any taie, i.e. however he got the money, he at any rale certainly had it to pay his troops with. Cf. οΰν below, p. 10, 9 and p. 11, 6. — rrpen^E: his Greek army. — 23. ^urO&v wrrapwv μ^vmv : how much did this amount to in gold money of the U. S. ? See the Diet. s.v. μ^θ6% and δα<ίι, and i. a, 21, below. —24. AinrivSioiis : where was Aspendus^ Pag© 8.] § la 3. irofid : with the ace, because of the course of the water after it left the Kfyi,.i^, along the road. Cf. irnyal 4κ τω, βα<η\^1ωρ, p. 6, 10. — κρήνη . . . καλουμίνη, the so-called (G. 1569 ; Η. 905) spring of Midas, lit. the spring called {thai} of Midm. Who was Midas, and for what two things was lie especially celebrated ? — 4. riv Σάτιιρον • What particular satyr is here meant ? - 5. οϊνψ . . . »ύτήν. by mixing wine in li, lit. by mixing U loith wine (the means). S 14 8. Κύρου ImSiiloi : cf αύτοΰ μ^ι καταλΰσαι, p. 4, 2, and the note. — 9. βoυUμMvo9 : Cyrus was the more willing to gratify her, since he saw the advantage of giving her husband a vivid impression of the strength of his army. - 10. τΔν Έλλήν«ν καί τών βαρβάρων : the art. repeated, because the Greeks and barbarians are not viewed m a single army but as separate forces. ' S 15. 11. «s . . . μάχην, as tlieir emtom (ims) for battle.— 12. ιττήναι, to take their places, not to stand. - ίκαιττον : sc. στρατψγόρ. - 13 Μ, wrrApeiF : this made the front of the army very extended. See the Introd., § 322, note. — Λχι : in agreement with the nearer subj. Cf ijv, p. 0, 0, and the note. — τά lOv 8€|iAv κτλ. : the positions are here named in the order of danger and honor. See the Introd. , § 32 2, end. — 14 ol «r^ dh-v : the subst. is omitted. Cf τώ. ιταρά ^ασιλ^ω$, p. 2. β, and the note, t/. also Toi>t iavrov In 12, and ol ixdm^u in U.~^Uwμov : What is meant when it is said that the Greeks used the word €ύώννμοί euphemistically for apurnpos ? See the words in the Diet, and also icico'i. δ 16. 10. irp«Tov μίν : correlated by eha δ4 two lines below— 17. an•, Ta|fis: cavalry and infantry respectively. See the Introd., § 14». — 18. τ«>ύι•Έλληιτβ8 : governed by iMpn above. — ιτ*ρΛαύν«ν : the Greeks drawn up in line of battle doubtless presented a more imposing appear- ance than if they had marched by m column.— 19. «φ|Mμά^)f • ANABASIS L 2. 16-19. 169 ! i ί Page 8.] distinguish the άρμάμαξα from the &ρμα and the Άμαξα respec- tively. —20. iravTcs : i.e. the Greeks. So irdi^as below in 22. —κράνη χαλκά . . . Ικκ€καλνμ)^να$ : Cyrus was aiming to impress the Cilician queen with the splendor of his Greek troops, through the mingled effect produced by the brilliant color of their χιτώι/«$ and by the gleam of their metal armor. The cuirass worn by the common soldier was doubt- less generally the leathern στολάί (see the word in the Diet.), 'i'his was now temporarily laid aside, leaving the dark-red tunic uncovered. See the Introd., §311, note. For the effect of this brilliant display upon Epyaxa, cf. ίδονσα την λαμπρότητα έθαίμασβ, p. 9, 7. — 21. 4κκ€καλυμμ€να$, uncovered, a circumstantial partic. of manner (G. 1503, 3; H. 909 a). How was the shield protected when not in use ?^,^^^ § 17. 22. ιταρήλασι : see the note on 4τ€λ€ύτησ€, p. 1, J2. — στήσ-ο? : first aor. and trans. For its relation to ττέμψα^, see the note on χητοΚαβών, p. 2, 23. — 23. ψάλαγγο$ : see the word in the Diet. — ^Axrt^i : cf. μέσου, p. 6, 9, and the note. — 25. προβαλ^σβαι το οιτλα : i.e. shields forward and spears in rest, as if for attack. See the Introd., § 432. — ολην την φάλαγγα, the phalanx in a body (G. 970 ; H. 072 c). — 26. oi U, and they. Cf ob4, p. 1, 14, and the note. —27. 4ο-άλΐΓΐγ|€ ; subj. nom. omitted (G. 897, 4; H. 002 c). Page 9.] 1. Ik δ€ . . . σκηνά$, and they {sc. αύτωρ) now advancing (gen. abs.) more and more rapidly, of their own accord the soldiers (G. 1173 ; H. 768) began with a shout to run toward the camp. They wished to give the barbarians the impression that they intended an attack. In the next section we are told that the Greeks ivl ras σκηνά.^ ήλθον, dispersed to their own tents. See the Introd. , § 40 2. §ia 3. βαρβάρων: subjective gen. (G. 1094, 2 ; H. 7296). With 0o>s sc. j5£. — καΙ . . . T€ . . . καί : the first και connects the statement that precedes with the double (re . . . καΐ, both . . . and) statement that follows. — 4. €φνγ€ν, €φυγον: the repetition of the word delineates the act vividly with comic effect. — oi Ik τή? άγορας ιφυγον: i.e. ol iv τη ayop^ έκ τψ ayopas }ίφχη/ον. Cf. το{^% 4κ των τόλ^ων, ρ. 5, 4, and των παρά βασιλέως, ρ. 2, 0. For the marches here referred to, see the Introd., § 20 1. —0. jfvv γΙλωτι : these Greeks had a keen sense of humoi -. Sel the Introtl., § 28 >. — 7. την τά|ιν : the Greek phalanx had not broken rank in its charge. — τοδ στρατινματοβ : the gen. in this position (G. 9fi5 end ; H. 6066) doubtless because it modifies λαμπρότητα as well as τά^ιν. —8. Tiv . . . 1$ών, seeing the terror with which the Greeks inspired the barba- rians. Note the prep, phrases used adjectively. § 19. 14. ταντην . . . "Ελλησ-ιν, this country he gave over to the Greeks to plunder (G. 1532 ; H. 951). At this point Cyrus first leaves his own 170 ANABASIS I. a. 19-23. ANABASIS I. 2. 23-26. 171 HI 9.] satrapy. — 15. «t . . . ovo-av, on the ground that it was. Cf, 4s βου^μ€9ΐη, p. 4, 7, and the note. See also Introd., § 2(i 1, end. f 2a 10. 4ΐΓ0«4μ«Η, σιινίικμψιν : cf. άmβaίv€t, ά,^βη, p. 1, 8, and the note. — Tijv ταχίστην όδόν : adv. ace. — 18. αντόν : Itimself, i.e. Menon. — Kvfios Si κτλ. : see the map for the two routes uito Cilicia that are here mentioned. —22. Iv ^t sc. χρόνψ, and cf. iv ah, p. 7, 7.-23. tTipov . . . Swairrtfv, a certain other powerful man of his subordinates. — 24. ImpovXivfiv αΰτι^: Cyrus's charge was, ίπφου^ύουσιν έμοί (G. 1522 1 • Η. IMO). ' ' § 21. 27. η ιΐσ-βολή : the so-called Πύλοι τψ KiXtdas. Page 10.] 1. αμήχανοι . . . στρα'ηνματι, impracticable for an army (G. 1165 ; H. 707) to enter (G. 1526 ; H. 952). -ft T15 Ικώλυιν, if there wm anybody to oppose (lit. trying to prevent G. 1255 ; H. 8:i2) it.— 2. dvw. ifwX rm¥ mcprnv κτλ. : he was there not with the intention of real opposition, but to give color to his asserted allegiance to the king, eiwi is quoted. Cf έκΜραι, p. 6, 17. —4. τη wrrtpal^ : for the case, see G. 1102; H. 782. — ir% λ<λοιιτώ$ €Ϊη κτλ. : the messenger's announce- ment continues to the end of ihe section. He said, \4\oiw€ (for the com- pound form in the opt. aci., see G. 7.'ί:ί) Συ^ρ,^σι$ κτλ., Syennesis has left the height since {iwti) he learned, etc., and because {καΐ St ή he heard, etc. weero and ^icovc were secondary tenses in the original statement and remain unchanged when quoted (G. 141)9, 1482 ; H. 9356c). The clause beginning «τι τό M/wjws is quoted after τάσθ€το, ^v occurring where €Ϊη or ivri would be regular (G. 1480 ; H. WQ). Cf έστρατ€ύ(το, p. 4, 27. Similarly the clause beginning rpi-fipctt wtpnrXwixra^ is quoted after vjKovt (G. 1588 ; H. 082). — 8. τάβ Αακ€$αιμον(«»ν ; with rpi^peis (G. !)5!), 2 ; 060 ; H. 668 a). For the aid rendered Cyrus by the Lacedaemonians, see i. 4. 2 and 3. $ 22. 9. ovv, at any rate, i.e. whatever the reason for which Syennesis left the heights. Cf p. 7, 22. — ovScvos κ«λύοντο5, loithout hindrance, gen. abe. expressing manner, — 10. τ4ι σκηνάι, the camp, the place. — ©4 : rel. adv. — Ιψΰλαττον : expressing continuance, but with plpf. force. Cf iiirai', p. 2, 17. —11. κατίβαινι ν : mark the change of tense from dW^ in 0. — •12. δΙν$ρων, άμιτίλβαν : with σύμιτλ^ωρ. Cf θηρίων, p. 6, 7, and tlie note. — σΰμ-ιτλιων : Attic second dec. (G. 305, 306 ; H. 227).— 13. ιτολύ ; for ite agreement, see G. 023 ; H. 620 a. — 14. impovs καΐ ηφΜΛ : note the pi. number. — φίριι : not the historic pres. Cf. άθροΐ- ^wrm, p. 1, 8, and note. — ^pot S' α«τ^ «ifulxci κτλ. : Mt. Taurus. The plain (αι!τ<ί) is of great extent. See the map. § 23. 18. Ταρσ-ούι, Tarsi or Tarsus, the birth-place of St. Paul. -- 10. : neut. of fdvw used subst., as in the phrase μ4σον ημέραί, midday f Page 10.] (G. 932, 1; H. 6216). The following gen. is partitive (G. 1085, 7, 1088 ; H. 729 e).— 20. δνομα, cvpos : aces, of specification (G. 1058 ;***Λί'> /ittc 3J18>. 21. νλέΒρων : limits νοταμόί (G. 1085, 5 ; 11. 720(Ζ), not eiJpos. ^^^ §24. 22. ol IvoiKOvvTcs : subst. G. 1560, 1; H. 966). —23. ιτλήν ol *'f^^'"^ . . . cxovTis : sc. ούκ i^^Xnrou. Cf the use of χΧήν, p. 2, 20, where it is a l)rep. —24. ol irapd . . . oIkovvt€S : cf tois υπέρ Έλλήστοντορ οΐκοΰσι, p. 3, 16, and the note. Those who remained did so for the purposes of trade w ith the ar my and fleet respectively. §25. 26. irpoT^pa . . . άψ£κ€Τ0| reached Tarsus five days (G. 1184; H. 781) 6e/ore (G. 926 ; H. 619 «) Cyrus (G. 1153 ; H. 755). Page 11.] 1. €ts TO ircSiov : used adj. (G. 959, 1, 2, 960 ; H. 666 a). Cf. κατ avTiw^pas 'Αβύδου, p. 3, 11. — 2. ol μ€ν . . . οι 8^, some . . . others. Cf τούί φ . . . Toos δέ, p. 2, 22, and the note. A case of asyndeton in an explanatory sent. Cf ούτοι μ^ν, p. 5, 13, and the note. — άρττάζοντάβ τι κατακοιτήναι, they had been cut to pieces (G. 1523, 1 ;ll. 946 6) while com- mitting some act of plunder (G. 1054 ; H. 7166). —4. καΐ ού, and not, και connecting ού δυναμένου^ κτλ. with an affirmative expression, wroXet- φθ4ντα%, but at the end of the line ουδέ, nor, continuing the negation. — Ti άλλο, the rest of (G. 966, 1). —5. €Ϊτα, then, resuming the two pre- ceding parties. — ησ-αν . . . όιτλΐται ; in explanation of δύο λόχοι in 1. The normal strength of the λόχο$ was 100 men (see the Introd., § 32 2.) If these two companies numbered each only 50 men, the instance is isolated ; some conimentatoi-s believe that Xenophon here expresses himself loosely, but means these were each 100 hopUtes. Elsewhere he is more exact. Cf p. 100, 22, e^ λόχου'ϊ avh. εκατόν άνδρας, six companies each of 100 men, and p. 152, 21, ό δ^ λόχο% έκαστος σχ^δδν eh robs εκατόν. — 6. ovv, however that was. ^^^. p. 10, 9. § 26. 6. ol δ' άλλοι : i.e. of Menon's army. Emphatic position (not iird δ' ol Αλλοι) as also in 9, KOpos δέ eVei κτλ. — 7. διήρπαο-αν : mark the force of the prep. See also the Introd., § 26 1, end.— 9. μ^τ^πέμιητο irpis lavriv, summoned repeatedly to himself, impf. (G. 1253, 2 ; H. 830). — 10. d δ' ovT« . . . ovTc . . . ήθ€λ€, but he both declared that he had never before, etc., and was then unwilling, etc. The Greek often says oiJic €φη iλe€ΐv, where we say, he said that he did not go, οΰ φ-ημι having the sense I deny. Here ουτ€ . . . ίφη οΰτς . . . ηθ€λ€, lit. he neither declared {i.e. he denied) nor wished, is perfectly regular, although a lit. translation of it is not good English. In oxnt . . . ^φη the direct discourse had ^λθον (G. 1494 ; H. 854) ; in ούτε . . . ηθ€λ€ there is no indirect discourse. —11. ο*δ€ν(: for the neg., see G. 1619; H. 1030. The dat. follows ets xeipas έλθ€ΐν, which implies union or approach (G. 1175; H. 772 a). So Κύρψ in the next line. — 12. Uvat : sc. eh xeipas. — irplv €ircio-€, €λαβ€ : for ττρίν 172 ANABASIS Ι. a. 26 an» 3. 2, Page 11.] with the indie, see G. 1409; 1470; 1464; H. 924. Mark the change of subj. in ί\αβ€, § 27. 13. μιτοΙ Sc ταΰτα : for its position, cf. ol δ* Αλλοι in 6. — 14. ISttKi . . . ΊΓολλά : so likewise had Epyaxa. Cf. p. 7, 20. — 15. Kvpos 81: sc. ίδωκ€. — 16. trapd βαο-ιλιΐ, at courts i.e. at the great king's court, the art. being omitted. Cyrus, in thus bestowing royal gifts, wjis assum- ing the kingly prerogative. See tlie Introd., § 19. — <Γτρ€ΐΓτόν, ψ€'λια, 4ιανάκην : for illustrations of these Persian articles, see the Diet. For representations of the bridle {χάΚινόή and στόΚή, see the Diet. s.v. ττρομε- TtavlSiov and KavSvs. — 18. μηκ^τι : as had already happened at Tarsus. — ΑφΛρίΓάζισ^αι : one of the ol}js. of ίδωκ€ supplied above (G. 1518 ; H. 948). So άπολαμβά»€ΐν in 20. — 19. τά Si . . . airoXajipavciv, and {the privilege of) taking back the slaves that had Iieen seized, if they {i.e. Syennesis and the Cilicians) should fall in with them {i.e. the slaves) anywhere (G. 1403 ; H. 898). The apo.)— 25. Ιβιά|€το : aUetnpted action (G. 1255 ; H. 832). Clearchus wiis a man of stern will, hilt he found in this instance tliat force was not the best means for complishing his purpose See the Introd., §272.-27. αρξαιντο : for the mood, ef. βούλοιτο, p. 6, 8, and the note. $ 2. 27. μικρόν, by a little, narrowly, adv. ace. Page 12.] 1. μή : added to the inf. to strengthen the neg. idea con- tained in iξiφvy€{G. 1615 ; 1549 ; Π. 1029).— Ιγνω, j^erceived. ~2. ότι ©* 8ννή4ΓτπΗ: quoted (G. 1591 ; 1487 ; 11. 932, 1, 2).— 3. ISdKpvc . . . Icrri^f, stood (G. 507 ; 508 ; H. 3;ί6) and wept a Img time, ace. of extent of time. —5. roMt : with reference to what follows (G. 1005 ; 11. 696). I I ANABASIS I. 3. ^-6. 173 Page 12. § 3. 6. dvSpcs crrpariwrat, fellow-soldiers, άνδρες is prefixed to στραηωται as a term of respect, as in the formula of the courts, άνδρ€ί δικασταί. Clearchus deals with tlie situation with great skill. —μή θαυμάζ€Τ€: pres. imv. in prohibition (G. 1346 ; II. 874). — 7. ιτράγμασ-ιν : tlat. of cau.se.— |€vos : cf. p. 3, 22, and the note. —8. Ιγίν€το, became, not was. For the facts, cf. i. i. 9. — τά τ€ . . . κα£, both honored me in other ways (ace. of specification), and in particidar, etc. — 9. ofis. . . ουκ . . . Ιδοττάνων, ichich I, when I had received them, did not lay up for myself {iμoί used reflex.) /or private use {or, more freely, did not devote to my own personal w.se) 7ior squander in pleasure, but I expended (impf.) them on you. §4. 13. Ιτιμωρούμην: sr. αύτούί, i.e. the Thracians. — 15. άψαιρ€ΐσ-θαι: with double obj. (G. 1069; II. 724). — 17. ϊνα . . . 4κ€£νου, that, in case he should have any (G. 1114 ; II. 743 a) need {of me), I might aid him in return for the benefits I had received from him. For et η δέοιτο, we might have had iav τι δέηται (G. 1503 ; II. 937). For the assimilation of ων, see G. 1032 ; H. ΟίΧϊα; and for the pass, force of ci τάσχω, see G. 1241 ; H. 820. § 5. 19. ιϊμ€ί5 : emphatic (G. 985 ; II. 677). So ^7^ in 24. Cf also the beginning of §6. —ανάγκη: sc. εστί. —20. ιτροδόντα : cf. λαβόντα, p. 4, 23, and the note. — φιλίι^ : a dat. of means (G. 1183; H. 777).— 21. fl, whether {G. 1605 ; II. 1016). — 22. ovv: cf. p. 7, 22, and the note. — 23. ο τι αν 8€t| : sc. τάσχπν. The rel. sent, is cond.( G. 1434 ; II. 916). — oviroTc οΰδίίς : emphatic negation. C/. p. 11, 11, and the note. — 24. ώ? άλόμην : quoted without change of mood. Give the form of the verb in dir. discouree. — άγαγών, irpoSovs : for the relation of the two parties, to one another, cf. ύτολαβών, συλΧ^ξα^, p. 2, 23, and the note, and στ-ήσαί, τέμψΆί, p. 8, 22. § 6. 26. έμοί : dat. of indir. obj. (G. 1159, 1160 ; II. 764, 2). Page 13.] 1. ο τι . . . ΐΓ€ίσομαι : for the use of the moods, cf. p. 12, 23, and the note. —2. καΐ . . . καΐ . . . καί, equally . . . and . . . and. — 3. crvv νμίν : i.e. if I should remain with you, is the prot. (G. 1413 ; H. 902) to tlie following hv ehai, which stands by quot. (G. 1494 ; 11. 964 a) for Slv €ΐην. In the alternative sent, that follows, the prot. to &v elvai lies in ων (4)=€t €Ϊην. The cond. rel. clause ότου Slv ω, ubicunque ero, presents the supposed future case more vividly than the more regular δτον €ΐην would have presented it, — ivherever I may be, for loherever I might be (G. 1437, 1421, 2; If. 918, 901a). See also G. Moods and Tenses, 556. This inf. with av, it should be remembered, represents the potential opt. (G. 1327-1329 ; H. 872).— 4. υμών : gen.-with an iwij. of want (G. 1140; H. 753 c). — οΰκ αν ικανό? clvai : by quot. for ούκ Αν . . . €Ϊην, 174 f ' ANABASIS I. 3. fr-lft w^.n^;-' , *' '^ "^^*^ »^' o''^' l^iore cMh of the dependent infs infe. lim tmg Ua,6s. Cf. p. 2, 9, and the note. -0. .is . . . ?v.„ fe o/- A« «p.««m iAer^rore, ίΛαί / ,A<.« ^o, eic, or more lit. (i„ ord« t^ show 7. IZt r• :*"• """ "'> '^"'"•"^' '*-'^>-• """ -f ^*«« Ζ e. See also G. Moods and TerL, 018.- ora a.J καΐ νμιϊι : «c. trrrt. S7. 8. Τοίτο: with reference to what precedes. Cf. rouilk ρ ]-> 5 and the note. — οίτ»- the arf n.p»i„oo .i,„ . ,: ' encIitiP ο 17-' τΛ, ™'='^'^'^^ "•« a^™"' fro>n the following enc itiu -9. «pd S. . . . Κλ&ρχον : as to the difficulty of maintaining miliuiry discipline among the Ten Thousand, see the Introd "1^:^^"""" (G im-'lT^i..^"'' ,''^''''"^•.-»• "Ρα^^τώ.: gen.' with adv. (U. 1150, H. 757 a). -air,.: mdir. obj. - 15. fluv. β«ρ«ί,, ba,le kirn n^ to te discouraged (G. 1510 ; H. 948). λ.^. i„ Lis ^l T^iZ «Λ..« ; so generally rf„, with the inf. .See G. MoMs a,ul TenL m For the const, with these verbs when ,.sed in quoting, see G. 1523 i II.' ^*/ "■;; ' '"■'"'""" '""««• """M be settled (gen. ab.s.) i„ the rvM way «„ « „sed sntet. (G. 032, 1 ; Π. «21 6). Λ shows that the part.c.pml sent, gives the ground on which Clcarchus bade Cyrus te encouraged. 16. ^^^■^a..to keep on se,ulin,j Μ (ln,„).-Jri^ U^, but for himself (αυτό, modifies the subj. of ««.,, G. 927 • II 940)' 'hi «ud Ae would not go. aMs marks the opposition of the two petrous Ymt keep sending for me, but still I HI not go. ' " J ft 18. •*: i.e. re (G. 92 ■ Η 8•η ίο -.:.. a t ' <^e rest (panUive J. , O. .ό^^ ηΝ.4Χ;.^!^Γ:Ι: ^Γ »M7/«r« omitted (G. 053; H, 6216). -8f|Xov : sc. iarL -οϋτ^. >ΓΙ!'/• ^'* '■'''^'''"' ^' "' ''"' "^•'■"^^ ^^^^ sume position as ours to hhu ml l!Lf ^; Z^"^' Λ "^'^ "^ "" '"""''" "'""*'" = ' '^'^'^^' «"^ ^-i^-^io"« are at mn end, lie may, however, not be done with us.' - »r, καΐ luToircuiro iUfoi», iiii/*otii?A Λ€ tei>s sendinrj, etc. (G. Ι57;ϊ; II. i)7!)) -^j τ/^" μ«γι*Γτοη ^/«e/?y, adv. ace. The correlative follows in rr«ra*^.a/ -^ ali82«7'^' ^''"' '^'"'* -Ιψ•^μΙνο« : quoted after «nM.r^ni./br ttai ,« «,λμ (J. for a, co^niate ace.) he thinks Λα* ei#eml/mi* we. For J., 4)" —lav μή 8ιδ.ί? : tlie verb of the apod, is aiV«v, which after elwe,' propoml lias a future force. Cf. ά7ΓoλαM/3άm^ p. 11, 20, and the note. —27 oW diralit: purpose (G. 1442; II. 911).-φΛίαβ: pred. adj. (sc. ovarjs) Pag© 15.J 1. μτ^Β4,ηοί€ν6η.~2. τήν ταχίο^ν : adv. acc. -^ροκα- ταληψομ<νουι : BC. AvSpas. The partic. expresses purpose. Cf. X^^oures p. 14, 18, and the note.-i]. τά &cpa : i.e. of Mt. Taurus, the pass by which they had entered Cilicia. — tfir«s φθάο-ωσ-ι : purpose (G. l;]()9 • H. 881). Note^the three ways in which purpose hjis been exp-ressed in this section. — Swm . . . κοταλοβοντ€5, might not seize than first (G 1580 • H. 984). -4. ών : its antec. is oi KlX^xes. With iroWot',, j/is a partitive gen., with xpi>/mra a gen. of possession (G. 1085, 1 and 7 ; 11. 729a and e). — iroUoiis icttl woUd χρήματα, many men (as captives) and much property. — 5. €χομ«ν άνηριτακοτιι : equiv. to άνηρκάκαμ^ρ καΐ ίχομεν (G 120'> • Η. m\a). For the facts, cf. I 2. 2(i, 27. Observe the sudden change to dir. discoui-se.— 0. τοο-οΰτον, m much only, with reference to what follows, irregularly (G. 1005 ; H. mm). His refusal to take the lead would embarrass his men still more. § 15. 7. 'ih μν . . . λ€γίτω, let nobody speak of me as the one loho is to he general, the partic. with cJr after Ι^έτω on the analogy of the const explained in G. 159S, 1 ; H. 982. See also G. Moods and Tenses, 919. — «ττρατΐ)γ(αν : cognate ace. —8. μηδ<1$ λ^ψτω : prohibition. Cf p. 12^ 6 and the note.— 4νορώ, see in the undertaking. —9. ττοιητών • sc έστΙ (G. 1594 ; II. 988). Since ταΰτο is in the neut sing., the const may be either pers. or impers. ~^ .,. ,^ίσομαι : sc. οντω X^yere from the pre- ceding μφ^ Xeyiru. ~ Sv άν ί'ληίτβι, quemcumque elegeritis, a cond. rel. clause. Cf p. 12, 23, and the note. λΥβ might have had <^ Av (G lO'Jl • H. 994), for which there is slight MS. authority.- 10. tf δννατόν μάλαττα' to the best of my ability {sc. iarl with dvmroy). Cf the phrases Js Μ^ίστα, ωί τάχιστα, and the note on «ri arapaaKevOTaTov, p. 2, 12. — ^τ* καΙ . . . άνβρώιτων, that I know kow also to mbmU to authority as mil as any other man thai lives.-lh μάλϋττα άν«ρώιτ«ν. in the highest degree {best of Page 15.] all men, partitive gen.) belongs to Αρχ€σθαι ένίσταμαι, and is really superfluous to the sense after ώ$ ns και AXXos, {as well) as any other man whatsoever {και being emphatic). For the latter, ei ns καΐ dXXos is more common. § 16. 14. «MTirep . . . ποιούμενου, just as if Cyrus were going home again (G. 1570 ; H. 978a), i.e. were minded to renounce the expedition. — 10. ws €ΰηθ€5 €Ϊη, that it wos silly (for the mood, cf. p. 14, 19), corres- ponding to τηρ €ύήθ€ΐαρ in the clause with μέρ. In the dependent clause φ Χυμαιρ6μεθα there is a change to dir. discourse (otherwise we should have Χυμαίνονται or Χυμαίροιντο, G. 1497, 2 ; H. 932, 2), which continues to the close of the speech in § 19. — trapd τούτου : in place of the simple τοΰτορ. Cf. the const, with alreip in p. 14, 20. — tf : dat. of disadvantage. — 17. cl ΐΓΐστ€ύ(Γομ«ν, if we are going to trust (G. 1391 ; II. 893 c), not eijuiv. to ioLP τηστ€ύσωμερ, if we shall trust. — 18. τί κωλνιι . . . ιτροκατα- λαμβάν€ΐν : the order of the words is, τί KwXiei {sc. ημόίί) καΐ KcXeveip Κΰρον νροκαταΧαμβάν€ΐρ τά &κρα ημΧρ ; the question is ironical. If they are going to trust Cyrus's guide, why not order Cyrus at once to occupy the pass in their behalf ? § 17. 19. Ιγώ : emphatic. — γάρ : the section states the grounds for the distrust of Cyrus which the speaker would entertain under the con- ditions supposed. — 20. α 8ο£η : cond. rel. clause (G. 1430 ; H. 917), as also φ δοίη in 22. — μή κατάδυση : after όκνοίην as a verb of fearing (G. 1378 ; H. 887). όκνοίην άν takes at the same time the obj. inf. 4μβαί' P€iv. So below φοβοίμηρ δ' Slp. . . iwecdai, μ^ . . . ayayri. — 21. Tats τριή- ρ€σι, with his triremes, dat. ot instrument (G. 1181 ; Π. 770). — ψοβο£μην : a stronger word than όκρέω, used to indicate a climax of feeling. — 22. φ : cf. ών, p. 3, 9, and the note. — ουκ eirrai, it will not be possible. The neg. shows that the antec. of δθ€Ρ is deiinite (G. 1427 ; H. 909). If the speaker had wished to express himself less vividly, he would have said, 69ev ούκ Slv eiv. — 23. άκοντος Κυρου ; SC. Ovroi. The adj. Akoptos appears to be used itself like a partic. (G. 1571 ; H. 9726). — αιτίων : equiv. to el άττίοιμι (G. 1503, 5; 1413; H. 909d; 902).— 24. λαθ€ίν . . . άΐΓ€λθών, to get off loitliout his knowing it. Cf. p. 3, 20, and the note. § 18. 20. dvSpas : subj. of έρωταν. All of the sent, from ά,ρδρα^ to the end of § 19 (except the parenthesis ούτω . . . άτίοιμεν, p. 10, 7, 8) is the subj. of δοκ€Ϊ. — otTivcS) such as are {sc. elffi). — 27. τί . . . χρήίτΟαι,, what use he wishes to make of us (G. 1183 ; H. 777 a). A similar use of the cases in olq-wep (for otapvep by assimilation) . . . rots ξέροΐί, p. 10, 2. Page 16.] 2. irp6o-6cv : for the time referred to, cf. i. i. 2. — iircoreai, ilveu : these infs. , which with 5oic« have a future sense, serve as apods. to ^BE I» I ΐι Ί ' 178 ANABASIS I. 3. 18-21. Page 16.] the preceding cond. Cf. iL• μ^ δώφ, a/re?!^, p. 14, 20 and the note. Cf. also άξωΰρ in 5, and άπαγγίΐλαι in 0. ' ' $m 4. T% trp«i«rfl«v, ααη Me former (one), sc, wpa^uys (G. 115.3; H. 75o).— 5. a|tovv, ίΛαί they demand, i.e. tlie deputies {Μραή mtn- iioned p. 15, 2tf. <Ι»Ό77€?λαι in 9 has the same subj., but βουΧεύίσθαι in 10 has iifias expressed as iU subj.- 0. wtio-avra : the means of ' iiersuasioii ' would be money. Cf § 21, and see the Introd., §27i.~7. Ιιτόμινοι, &«arrts : these might be respectively el έττοίμ^θα, ei άπίαιμ^ν. Cf p. 15* 2;i, and the note. — φΛοι, ΐΓρ<ϊ0νμοι : pred. adjs. § 20. 11. c'8o$€ ταύτα, this was approved. The ordinary beginning of an Athenian decree was Ιδο^.. r^ βονλν καΐ τφ δ-ήμφ, be it enacted by the Senate and the People. - 12. ηρώτ«ν Td Wfavra, 7nade the inmdries mre^ upon (i.e. ά $So^.). δοκέω in this sense, seem good or best, takes the dat of the indir. obj. - 1.3. oVi άκο^ι : he said ακούω, I have heard, ^. ITie Greek, like other languages, often uses the pres. of sucli verb^ as I hear, I learn, I say, even when their action is strictly finislied See G. Moods and Tenses, 28. --4χβρ6ν άνδρα : cf ixepas, p. 14, 11, and the note. ~ 14. flwot, was, infin. in indir. discourse after ακούω, where 6yra would be more common ((i. 1592, 1 ; H. mu). See G. Moods and Tmses, ;.« ~•^'^"'^» • • • «Γταβμοίίί, twelve stages off or distant, άιτ^χο^α qualihes Αβροκόμαρ.-~ί7. ηνφ€ΰγ|,, if he is (shall be) offinflujfd, mark the tense. — ιίμ*£5 Ικ«ί «τλ. : the quot. here becomes direct. Observe with what ease the Greek, contrary to the Eng. idiom, allows this transition from the mdir. to the dir. form. Cf p. 15, 4 and 16. ρ..Ζ, ib, and the notes. ~ίΤτ% &ψι . quoted after rots δέ ύτοψία iip = fa-i^TTci^M δέ, without change of mood. But after ιΙ,κουσ^ρ in 24, &n Ayoi --20. IS4«i : why έδόκ,ι here, but ISo^e (aor.) in 11 ?_22. 8ώ««ιν : note the tense, and cf 7raύψατο : from Ephesus probably. Cyras must have long foreseen that the pass would bar his way. — Λσ-ω καΐ «>, wUhin and wUhout the pass, Le, between the two walls and beyond the waU on the Syrian side. The object of Cyrus was to attack Abrocomas both in front and rear. The distance between the two walls was a third of a mile (three stades). -2. piiuro^vovs : the partic. expresses purpose. —•I φιιλάττοιιν : the mood is due to qiiot. (G. 150:j ; H. 937). —3. ^Tircp : juM the thing which, referring to the clause that precedes. — 4. Ιχοντα, since he had.— β, Svra : quoted. C/. €ipai, p, 10, 14, and the note.— 7. ώ$ ΙλΙγ^β : probably pers., aa he was said {to have). Of. p. 0, 10, and the note, —τριάκοντα fivpidSas : see the Introd., § 14 1 § β. 11. \ψ : we might have had karl. Cf. αθροίζονται, p. 1, 8, and the note. — tA x«>p£ov : the subj. ; the pred. subst. (here €μ'κ6ριον) seldom has the art. (G. §50 ; H. 069). S 7. 14. τά . . . Ivdlfuifoi, puUing on board (G. 1242, 3 ; H. 813) their moU valuable qff-ects.—U. «St ^v «τλ. : the correl. clause with 54 is omitted ; but μέν implies that there was another opinion in the camp. — ^icevv : pers. const. (G. 1δ22, 2 ; Η. 944 «). — 10. φιλοτιμηβ^ντ€8, since iAey were jealous. Sri eia Kvpos is also causal (G. ΙδΟδ ; Η. 925). — crrpa- •ηώτββ: obj. of Ιχ«ι» in 19.-17. aircXOovras : see i. 3. 7. — «s airwSvros; purpose. Cf, m aToicreimv, p. 1, 15, and the note. For the fut. force of •ίμ*, see G. 1257; H. 828 a. — 18. καΐοΰ: sc. lovras from the preceding Awdwrnt, — 19. 8ii)X0c Xdyos, α report went abroad, —on διώκοι : quoted. — 20. Tpi4pcJo. (G. 1153 ; H. 750), and irJl? Z'^T'^'''' i^• '''' ' "• 7δ1). The object is to empiasi^. the great^vantage over the rest to be gained by following his advice. - AS. Tovs ^Ελληναβ : subj. of fweffBau S 15. 27. ίμΛΪ9 . . . Sio^atviiv, you (emphatic) toill have credit of being t^e cause of ,/, by having begun the passage (of the river). For τον ί*α- ^imj., see G. 1547 ; 1099 ; 11. 959 ; 738. Page 21,] 2. iirirT»Tiu : sc. χάμ^ diroatWrni. - rt rif καΐ aUo« • cf, p. 15, 11, and the note. -4. τοΖμηηλ,ν : i.e. rb ίμταλ.. (by crasis). IX . . . «ιίομνοι,, l^cause (as he imll fed) you alone carried out his wishes' -«ΜΓτοτΑτοιι: as most trustworthy, pred. -0. iUov . . . Umr^, whai ^^ym may want. Λλλο. for Αλλι, by inverted assimilation (G. 1035 • M. 1003) ; or as gen. with τίύξβσΦβ. ' ANABASIS I. 4. 16 and 5. 3. 183 Page 21.] § 16. 8. lircCOovro . . . δι^βηο-αν : note the difference in tense. — 10. 8ιαβ€βηκότα$, that they had crossed, partic. in indir. discourse. — 11. Γλοΰβι Glus, son of Cyrus's admiral. — Έγώ |i€v . . . μΐ€λή<Γ» : note the contrast of persons marked by the expression of the nom. of the pers. prons. (G. 890 ; IL 002 a).— 12. oxws iiraiv«r€T« : this obj. clause is in fact here a gen. (G. 1105 ; H. 742). § 17. 15. Ιλ^γ€το ΐΓ€μψαι, he was said to have sent, pers. const. — 16. rh άλλο <Γτράτ€υμα αιταν : the order of crossing was, Menon's force, Cyrus and the barbarians, and then the rest of the Greek army. —18. τών μίΜΓτών : μαστός is one of the breasts, στέρνον (p. 38, 11) the breast, chest. § 18. 19. ol 8e . . . ιτλοίοις : what the inhabitants of Thapsacus said, supplying the ellipses necessary to the const., was οίητώτοθ' ovros 6 ττοταμ^^ δίαβατ6$ iydvero Tcf^ c/ μ^ vvv {except now, emphasizing ούττώττοτΐ), άλλα (διαβατοί fjv μ&ρον) rrXobis. Note the change of ρΰν to τότ€ ill passing from tlir. to indir. discourse. In the same way the pers. of the quoted verbs is often changed. — 21. ά totc . . . διαβή : a statement added by the his- torian. — κατ€κανσ-€ν : plup. in force. — 22. ϊνα . . . 8ιαβη : note the mood. — Ιδόκ» 8ή . . . βασ-ιλ€ύσοντι, it appeared accordingly that it {i.e. the low- ness of the river) ivas a divine intervention, and that the river had plainly retired before Cyrus, because {he was) about to be king: the sentiment of the truckling Thapsacenes. $ 19. 28. lin. SufieifMis, χορτον: double obj. (G. 1113; H. 743). — 20 mya ιτμίΕτ», as tmUomrs, Cf. άρχοντα, p. 1, 10, and tlie note. -21. • fl 10.34 1 f\ _1 Kaf4^ : for the case see G. 1090 ; H. 738. - 23. Ik, M : "the one 0./ o/, he other off ./.-24. τοντο . . . ^λ^ίστον, for this was very abundant in the country, i.e. millet was the conmion staple of the country τοϋτο neuter, although referring to μ^λίνψ. § 11. 2(i. άμψιλ€|άντ«ιτ τι, hamng had some dispute. Page 25.] 1. aZiKtlw . . . M^vwvos, thai Menon's soldier (probably two soldiers, one of Menon, the other of Clearchus, had begun the quarrel) was m the wrong. aSiKuu by quot. af ttr Kplm,. - Μβαλ^ν : i)robably on the spot, with his own staff, after the Spartan fashion. Clearchus was a severe diecipnwian. C/ ii. 3. 11, ii. 6. l).-2. ri Ιαντον <Γτρά«υμα : c/. and 7 another. See the Intrml., δ 40^. -3. Ιχαλ^νον . . . Κλ*άρχ«, took it hard, and were exceedingly angry at Clearchus. Cf. arpar-nyoh υ '>0 ίί and the note. ^ f• -", ", §12. 4. ιίμέρ^: ,/. TV mrepal^, p. 10, 4, and the note.-6. aAi^cici • the general was mounted. See the Introd. , § 32 2. __ 7 ^^ ^>,^^ ' with few (pred. adj.) abjut him, lit. with those ahmt him (being) few ~iO δΜλαύνοντα: not the partic. in indir. discoui-se (G. 1582 • 1583) — ίησ-ι τιϊ άξίτα, hurled his axe at him, lit. sends (at him, sc. a,JroO, G. 1090 ; Η 73ίη wUh hts axe.— 11. αύτοΰ: for the case, see G. 1099; Π. 748 —λίθο». sc. ϊησί. ' ' • f la 13. κάταφ€ύγ€ΐ: difference in meaning from άτο^ίΐ^^α,,ρ 18 26? --15. αύτοΰ,^ΛβΓβ, i.e. where they were.-rds ao-iriSas . . . Wvras • the left knee was slightly advanced, the shield set iirmly in rest upon it,* and the spear held in readiness for defence. Clearchus saw that he might be repulsed and obliged to fall back upon his heavy-armed troops.- 16 roi• ^, : not mentioned in i. 2. 9. These were the only Greek cavalry with Cynis. See the Introd δ 22 _ 1 7 «f J^- .? - • / / Tri, .0 ''^""*»^• "*"• Vai'.-19. ΙκΐΓΐίΓλήχθαι, were thoroughlu fr^tened (G. 1275). -20. ol «, .«. ot^er., as if%o;. ^. stood ^h ofcaLr "' ''''''^ tothespot.^-21. τ« .ράγμαη : dat. n^lif f ■ ^";'^' • * ; *'***^''' ^^i'^^«^ ^^ ^ ^^^ on later. For the partic, (/. χα/,ω., p. 1, 5, and the note. hropA^ is in the same const. -, Page 25.] 22. τάξις: see the Introd., § 302. — αΰτφ : with έτομένη (G. 1175 ; H. 772). — 23. ovv: <ίτυχ€. . . οττΧιτών \s parenthetic, and οδν resumes the narration. — άγων : sc. ttjv τάξιν. — 24. cOcro τα οιτλα, halted under arms, ordered arms. For the phrase τίθ€σθαί τά 6v\a see the Diet. , s.v. τίθημι. It never means sta^k οτ pile arms. — Κλ€άρχον μή iroiciv : cf. αύτοΰ μί} καταΧΰσαι, p. 4, 2, and the note? — 25. αντον . . . καταληχτΟήναι, when he (i.e. Clearchus) had barely escaped being stoned to death. See the Diet., s.v. δέω. and G. 1112 ; H. 7436. — 20. λίγοι : opt. in a causal sent. (G. 1500 ; H. 925 6). — αΰτοΰ refers to Clearchus. Page 26.] § 15. 1. ^v τούτίο, meanwhile (sc. τφ χρόνφ). — καΐ Kvpos» Cyrus also. — 2. τά τταλτά : see the Introd., § 14. What word is used to designate the Greek hoplite's spear ? — 3. τών ιηστών : partitive gen. The trusty counsellors or attendants of a Persian prince were called ol τηστοί. In the Persians of Aeschylus, the twelve elders who form the chorus say of themselves (vs. 1) τάδε . . . Πιστά κα\€Ϊται (for καλούμεθα ΪΙιστοί). § 16. 4. npo|cvc : Proxenus now seemed more prominent than Menon. — 5. cl . . . <Γυνάψ6τ« : for this form of the prot. to express fut. cond., see G. 1405 ; H. 899. — 7. κατακ€Κθψ€<Γθαι, shall be instantly cut to pieces (G. 1266; H. 8556). — 8. κακώς . . . 4χοντων : equiv. to ^άΐ' τά ημέτερα κακω$ ίχτ). — 10. τών ιταρά βα<Γΐλ€Ϊ όντων : i.e. η οί τταρά βασιΚεΐ OvTes, not η Tots τταρά. /Sa^tXet οΰσι. See G. 1155 ; Η. 6436. § 17. 11. Ιν Ιαντ<ρ iyivtro, came to himself, recovered his senses, Lat. ad se rediit. — ΐΓαυ(Γάμ€νοι : sc. ttjs μάχηί. — 12. κατά χώραν I6cvto τά οιτλα : see the Diet., s.v. τίθημι, and note on 25, 24. CHAPTER VI. δ 1. 13. IvTcuOcv : from the camp opposite Charmande. See the Map. — Ίτρο'ίόντων, a^ they advanced (sc. αύτων), but in 15 vpoCovres, keeping ahead (of the army). — 4ψα(ν€το, there kept appearing, impf. For its agreement with the neuter plur., see G. 899, 2 ; 901 ; H. 604, 607. — 14. «s . . . tinrttv, of about 2000 horse, poss. pred. gen. — 15. otToi : referring to the iinreti implied in ΧπΊΓων. — cC τι άλλο, i.e. whatever else (cf. p. 22, 5). — 16. γ€ν€ΐ : dat. of respect (G. 1182 ; H. 780). — 17. τά πολέμια λ€γάμ€- vos, reckoned, in matters pertaining to war, ace. of spec. — 18. Ilcpo-eev: part. gen. — καΐ irpas h/iwro : for ■ /• ■ § 9. 8. ΐΓαρ€Κ€λ€ύοντο . . . τάττκτβαν : had Cyrus followed this advice the whole course of Persian history might have been changed.— 9! μάχ€<Γβαι : i.e. in person. — Ιαυτών : with 6ιη(Γθ€Ρ, an adv. oi place. — U. γάρ : with reference to some unexpressed intimation of Cyrus, What ' do you think, etc. We should say, Do you then think, etc. — 12. Νή Δία Yes, bif Zem : ace. in an oath (G. KXiO ; 10(}7 ; H. 723).— i:j. i^^s αδελφό?' a brother of mine, ό iμbs ά8€\φό$ would be my brother. Cf. ρ 27* 23, and the note. — 14. τοντο : with a gesture. • • > $ la Ιδ. lyfviTo, wasfmnd to be.— HI acnrls . . . «τρακοσ-ίο, lit IO40O Shield, just as we say "a thousand horse."— The sum total of the Greeks here given does not tally with the numbers previously given separately. The reason for the discrepancy is uncertain. Cf. the Introd., § 22. 1 11. 20. Ικατόν καΐ ctKo|0. — ιτολ•μίοι$ : see G. 1174 ; H. 7726. Page 36.] § 18. 20. »s 8e . . . ψάλαγγοβ» when, as they (sc. αύτωή proceeded, a part {sc. μΑρο^ with n) of the phalanx surged forward (beyond the rest), lit. billowed out, etc. — 22. δρόμφ eciv, to go on the run, double- quick (dat. of manner). — 23. olov . . . Ιλιλίζουσ-ι, as they raise the war- cry to Ε ny alius {Ares). For the battle-cry and the charge on the double- quick, see the Introd., § 43^. — καΐ xavrcs 8c : cf. p. 33, 25, and the note. 25. φόβον . . . 'iinrotsi thereby frightening (lit. causing fright among) the horses (a dat. of disadvantage). § 19. 2(5. irpVv Sc . . . l|iKveureai : lit. before an arrow reached them, Le. Ixfore the Greeks were tvithin bow-shot of them. Cf. τρίν elvai, p. 20, 17. — 27. κατά Kparos : cf ανά Kparos, p. 33, 20. Page 37.] 1. Ociv 8ρόμ.ω : here the phrase involves the idea of con- fusion and disorder. Cf p. 30, 22. See the Introd., § 432. "-JTSO, 2. τά 8* έίρμιατα : i.e. of the enemy. We might have had τωρ δ' αρμάτων, but the subst. takes the case of the words (τά μέν, τά δ^ denoting its parts (G. 014 ; H. 624 d). — 4. ηνιόχων : for the case, cf. p. 13, 4, and the note. — InrtX irpo'iSouv, διίσ-ταντο, opened a gap, whenever they saw them coming on. Why is wpotdoiev in the opt.? — 5. Ιση 8* ocTTis : we should expect ήν δ^ ns 6s. Cf. p. 23, 15, and the note. — κατ€λήψθη 4κΐΓλαγ€£β, was caught {i.e. by failing to get out of the way of a chariot) in his consternation. — 0. κοί . . . Ιψασ-ανι and yet, in fact {καΐ μέντοι), they said that not even he suffered any harm. — 7. ov8c . . . 8i : the neg. expression corresponding to καΐ . . . δέ, for which cf. p.* 33, 25. — ούδ* ovScls ovhiv : emphatic neg. Cf p. 11, 11, and the note. So just before ουδέν ουδέ. — 9. ns, a single mail. § 21. 10. έρών : when he saw. — νικώνταβι διώκοντα? : participles in indirect cFiscourse (G. 1583). —rh καθ' avrovs : sc. πλήθος. — 11. i|8ρ δέ, p. 1, 7. — ols: dat. of indir. obj. after καθήκ€ΐ.—4. ίτρωτον μ^ν : weakly correlated by W in 18. 200 ANABASIS I. 9. 7-13. P nl Ί! W, Page 40.] δ. lir4S€i|cv αντόν δτ% κτλ. : c/. τωρ βαρβάρων, p. 2, 8, and the note. The dir. form of the sent, quoted after MSei^t,^ δη was rrepl «•Xfim-oi; irotou /ΛΟί, iap τψ στ€ίσωμαι καΐ . . . συνθωμαι καΐ . . . ύτόσχωμΛί τι, μηδαμω$ ψ€ύδ€(τθαί. What use of the subj. is this? — τφ: what other form was possible ? See G. 410, 1 ; H. 277. § a 7. καΐ γάρ, and {proof is at hand) for. — 10. μηδιν αν iraOciv : in the dir. form oodii^ Ακ ττάθοιμι. For the change of neg., see G. 1486 • 1496 ; H. 1024. δ a 12. iKowrw, : cf p. .3, 20, and the note. — 1.3. Μιλησίων : we should expect MiKfrov. See the Introd., § 17. — οντοι Si . . . αυτόν : a proof, drawn from an enemy, that Cyrus was to be trusted. — Toi»s φιν- yovTot : i.e. refugees.— 14. ιτροίσθαι : see τροίημι. 1 10. 14. καΐ γαρ . . . IXi^cv, for he both (καΙ . . . και in correlation) shuwed repeatedly b}/ what he did, and declared repeatedly, or, more freely, showed repeatedly both by word and deed. — 15. tfrt . . . irpdfciav : in dir. form ούκ Αν totc νροοίμην, iwcl . . . ΐΎ€ν6μην, ούδ' el . . . yivoivro νράξ€ΐαρ (G. 1490; 1500 ; Η. 935c). — ιτροοίτο : for the form, see G. 810, 2 ; H. 476. — 16. &«a|, ome for all ; but ποτέ, once on a time (p. 39, 23),' some time, ecer. — oiS'fl . . . «y^voivro, not even if they should become still fewer, i.e. should be cut down in numbers by their misfortunes. — 17. κάκιον irp4&|iiav (G. 1075 ; H. 810). § 11. 18. φανιρ^ς δ* ην καΙ ιτϋρώμινοβ, but it loas obvious also that he Mrove. Cf. Siflm fiv άνιώμχνο^, p. 7, 18, and the note. — cl ιτοιήσικν : prot. to π€φώμ^νο^, past general supposition. For the two aces, after τοφ€ΐ€Ρ, see G. 1073; H. 725 a. For the parallel const, in 21, see G. 1074 ; H. 712, and cf 17. — 20. Ι|ίφ€ρον, reported. — as •νχοιτο : quoted after €ύχ^ρ 4ξ4φ€ρον, which involves the idea of saying. They said, evxerai (i.e. he sometimes prays) ^ήρ ίστ Slp ρικφ (G. 1465 ; 1434 ; Η. 921) ; the fut. apod, to Ut &p ρικψ is ^i^. For the change by quot. of the subjv. pucq. to the opt, see G. 1497, 2 ; H. 932, 2.— 21. νικφ'η άλ€|<Ιμ€νοβ, i.e. should outdo in returning like for like. § 12. 22. καΐ γάρ ovv : cf 7. — irXiurroi δή : similar to μέy^στot δή, means the very greatest number. The phrase ipl ye άρδρΐ {άνδρΐ in app. to αύτψ) logically modifies the superlative, i.e. the number was the very greatest in view, at least (yi), of the fact that a single man (ipl άρδρΐ) was inquestion. — 23. τών Ιφ ημών, of the men of our time, part. gen. with Λΰτφ, but affected also by the sup. πλείστοι, as if it had been said he was truMed most of all the men of our day. — 24. irpo^^ot, intrust. Cf the meaning in 14. f la 27. TV 1δ€ίν, it was pouible to see, you might see. ANABASIS I. 9. 13-19. 201 Page 41.] 1. ιτοδών, χιιρών, όφθαλ|ΐών: why gen. ? — 3. μηδ«ν άδι- KovvTi, if in no respect (cognate ace.) a wrong-doer (G. 1563, 5 ; H. 9t}9-d). — 4. ο Tt Ίτροχωροίη, whatever it loas to his advantage (G. 1431, 2 ; H. 914 b, 2) to have {sc. ^χ€ΐν). For ηθ€\€Ρ (which might have been ie4\m), seeG. 1432; H. 918; 894 c. § 14. 5. «Jioλόγητo, he had been (and so was) acknowledged, pers. const. — 6. ην avTcp iroXenos : principal sent, where we should expect a depend- ent one, such as Ovtos ποτέ αίη-ψ πο\4μχ>υ ; for πρώτορ φ, notwithstanding its position, goes with άρχορταζ έποίει and is correlated by έπειτα δέ in 10. — 8. καΐ avTOs, even in person. — Ιώρα : for the mood, cf. ηθεΧερ in 4 and the note. — 40A.ovTas : partic. in indir. discourse. Cf. p. 37, 10. —9. ifs κοτ€«Γτρ€φ€το χώρα? : attraction and assimilation. Cf p. 30, 5. § 15. II. «<ΓΤ€ . . . ilvoi, so that (in his dominions) the good appeared (G. 1449 ; 1450 ; H. 953) most prosperous, and the bad were deemed fit to be their slaves, φαίρεσθαι would regularly either stand within the clause with μέρ or else belong to both subjects. — 14. οϊοιτο : for the mood cf. προχωροίη in 4. — αΙ<Γβήσ€σθαι : quoted. Note the turn. § 16. 15. γ€ μιηνι a case in the general testimony to the high character of Cyrus that could not be controverted. — els δικαιοσννην : with έπιδεί- κρυσθαι, to distinguish himself in uprightness, —el yivoiro, IwoieiTO : past general supposition. C/. p. 22, 13. — 16. povXo^evos : quoted. Cf φάρε- pbs p πεψώμ^ροί, p. 40, 18. — irepl iravTos liroieiTO : cf πίρΐ πλείστου ποιοΐτο, p. 40, 5. — τοντουβ : pi. because of the distributive force of ris to which it refers. —17. Ik του άδΙκου, by injustice. § 17. 19. δικαΐωβ, with fidelity. —20. καΐ . . . Ιχρήσ-ατο, and he secured the services of (G. 1260 ; H. 841) an army worthy of the name, jueto exercitu. — 22. eirXevo-av : coming as mercenaries across the sea. — Ιγνωσ-αν,;Μίίί;β(ί.— 23. rh κατά μήνα κ4ρδθ5 : the second subj. of eJpai, being in the same const, as πειθαρχεΪΡ, which might have been τό πειθαρχεΐρ (G. 1517 ; 1542 ; Η. 949 ; 959). § 18. 24. et tIs γί τι : one proclitic, three enclitics. The proclitic takes the accent of ris ; for the accent of the enclitics, see G. 145 ; H. 117.— Tis ye, any one (emphatically), no matter how insignificant. — τν : with ύπηρετήσειερ, did him (G. 1160 ; H. 764, 2) any good service. With ύπηρε- τήσειερ cf y4poi*ro in 15 and also όρ(^η in 27.-25. oύδevl . . . ιτροθυμίαν, he never let his (lit. any one's, G. 1165 ; H. 767) zeal go unrewarded. —26. κράτΜΓΓΟι δή : cf πλείστοι δή, p. 40, 22, and the note. — ύιτηρ^ται, sup- porters. — ΚύρΗ> . . . γβνέσθαι, Cyrus was said to have had, lit. were said to have been (become) to Cyrus. § la 27. τίνα δντα, that any one was, in indir. discourse. So the two participles that follow. 202 ANABASIS I 9. 19-2a 203 I • Itll i k 5* Page 42.] 1. Ik τοΰ δικαίου, according to justice, or we may freely translate deiWr . . . δίκαΐου, a skilful and just manager. — ηβ άρχοι : part of the cond. rel. sent. {=et nvos Λρχοή and following the const, of όρί^η. See G. 1439; H. 919a. —2. χώρα? : antec. attrac. Cf. p. 2, 14.— ούδ^να Ar. . . i^iOcTo, he would never deprive (G. 12i)(i ; II. 835 a) him (lit. any one) of (his terrUory, sc. χώραν, and see G. l(Xi9 ; H. 724). Av heVm^ equally to πρσσ^Μ^υ (G. 1314). This iterative form with Up, expressing customary action, is a natural apod, to «' ορ<4-η. —5. ίϊτέίΓατο : (/. the use of the perf. and plup. of κτάομαι. — Κυρον : second obj. (G. KXjD ; l\. 724). — ο*ψ•θ¥•νΙ4αίν€τοάλλαΐΓ€ΐρώμ«νο«, it was clear that he did not envy, eic., but strove, etc. im 8. ^Aovt: emphasized by its position and by the following particles; obj. of θεραπ^ύ^ιρ. —Hirmm ιτοιήο-αιτο : the apod, is ^e^aireiJciv (not y€v4a0ai). This cond. rel. const, with the opt., as also its corre- sponding use in simple cond. classes, occurs repeatedly in this chapter.— 9. ίνταβ : cf arra, p. 41,27. —Uavois στ>ν€ργού5 ο τι τυγχάνοι, competent co-workers in whatcOer he chanced, etc. — ^ τι τυγχάνοι • =€Ϊ τι rvyxavoi. See note on ^s Αρχοι in 1. — 10. βουλόμινοβ : cf παρών, p. 1, 5, and the note. — 11. KpaTurros 8ή : cf. p. 40, 22, and p. 41, 20. — γ€νέσ0αι : in the dir. form iyiwcro. — βιραιτιΰιιν : past frequentative after yeviadai. $ 21. 12. αύτΛ τούτο omp ivcKa κτλ., {he tried to secure for his friends) that very object for which he thought that he needed friends himself — namely, that he migU have co-workers, — he tried {I say) also on his own part to be a most vigorous co-worker with his friends to secure that, etc. Μΰτό τοΰτο would naturally have been the obj. of some verb like τράττ€ΐρ after ^iretpSro, but for this simple αυτό τοΰτο τράτταν the amplified expres- sion (TvmprYOs . . . clmt . . . έτηθυμουντα was substituted, to express the same idea more fully. C/. ά . . . κάουσιρ, p. 112, 17.-14. τούτου: emphatic. Otherwise it would be omitted (G. 1020; H. 090).— ίτου: i.e. oh-iuo^: gen. not by assimilation, but independently (G. 1102 j H. 742). — 15. ΙνιΟυμοΰντα : quoted after αίσθάνοιτο. S 22. 15. ot|uu : parenthetic, hke our / think. — els γ« άνήρ : cf. hi ye άρδρί^ p. 40, 22, and the note. — 16. Sid iroUa, for many reasons'. ~ 18. KoX ότου : sc. irpos and the indef. antec. of &rov. — 19. Scdfuvov : how is Ihe partic. to be construed ? § 23. 20. η ... ή, either . . . or. — m ils ιτάλιμον : cJs marks the pur- pose for which the objects were sent (cts ττόΧεμορ) as subjectively conceived by the sender. Cf ω, ei, μάχηρ, ρ .3.3, 23, and ώ, d, κύκΧωσιν, p. 37, 25. — 21. κλ(, mw&jver, with the following sent, as a whole.— 22. λέγιιν: an impf. inf. with ίφασαρ. Cf p. 38, 12, and the note. They said iXeye, le ιιββίΙ to say. — ο-ωμα : ace. of specification referring to σώματι in 20. — o4k w SivcuTo, νο|ΐί|οι : Cyrus said otk Am ΰνι^ίμην . . . 0Λου$ δέ . . . νομίζω. ANABASIS I. 9. 24-31. Page 42.] § 24. 24. καΐ τ& |icv . . . ττοιοΰντα, and his surpi (G. 1542 ; H. 959) his friends in conferring great (with emphasis) etc. τά, pueyaXa is cognate ace. Avith ei5 ττοιοΰντα, benefiting. Page 43.] 1. lm|«XeCij : dat. of respect. — τ<ρ ιτροθυμ^ΐσ^Μ : parallel in const, with τ-β έπιμ^λ^ψ (G. 1547; Η. 959). — 2. ταύτα: resumes τό ΤΓ€ρΐ€ΐναι κτ\. § 25. 5. ουιτω Βή ττολλοΰ χρο'νου, not for a long time (G. 1136 ; H. 759), lit. not as yet now ivithin a long time. — Ιττιτυχοι : represents έτέτυχον in the words of Cyrus ; but the next sent, gives the actual words of the messenger, who in delivering the gift would say : KOpos ούτω δί? πολλοΟ . . . έ•πέτυχ€ν • τοντον ουν σοι ίΐΓ€μψ€ κτλ. Cf. 9, tovtois ησθη Kvpos ' βον\€ται ΐίτ-λ. — 7. συν ols : cf άνθ'. ων, ρ. 12, 17, and the note. § 26. 9. ^TTiX^Yciv, to say in addition (to presenting the gifts), to add. — 10. τούτων γιύσοσβαι, to take a ta^te of (note the force of the inceptive aor.) these. §27. 13. διαιτέμιτων : force of διά? — 14. Ιαυτών refers to ^iXow, but ίαυτοΰ in 10 to Cyrus. — 15. τούτον τον χιλο'ν : i.e. what Cyrus sent. — ώς μή αγωσιν : subjv. of purpose after a secontlary tense. Note that a clause of negative purpose can be introduced either by the simple μή, or by μή preceded by ϊνα, ω$, or δπως, the meaning in both cases being simply that not, lest. Cf the examples under G. 1305 ; II. 881. See G. Moods and Tenses, §§ 307-310. § 28. 17. irXfio-Toi, very many. — μ^λλοκν δψ€σ^αι : cf. p. 33, 18, and the note. — 18. ώς δηλοίη ουβ τιμ^, that he might show whom he honored {τιμξ. is in the indie). Instead of τιμξ. we might have τιμ^η (G. 1503 end ; II. 937) ; cf. G. 14992. The purpose in Cyrus's own mind was, oJs δτ;λω (subjv.) 0^5 τιμώ (indie). — 19. ίξ cSv ακούω, from what I hear. — 20. 'Ελλήνων, βαρβάρων : with ούδ4να. § 29. 21. τούτου, to'Sc : difference of use ? — 22. 8ούλου ovtos, tJwugh he was a slave. Cf. p. 30, 4 ff. — ιτλήν : conj. — 23. καΐ ούτος . . . Ιαυτι^ : cf. p. 27, Off. For ol, cf. p. 3, 2. —27. υπ αύτου : the king. — άγαιτώ- μ€νοι : άya^rάω is properly to show regard by outward signs ; ψιΧέω (20), on the other hand, is used of the love of friends ; but the distinction is not always observed. Page 44.] 1. αν τυγχάν€ΐν : quoted after νομίξοντΐ^. The prot. lies in βκτ€5 = €t €Ϊησαν. § 30. 2. TO αύτφ "ycvo^cvov, what happened to him, sc. έστΙ. τίκμήριον is pred. — 4. τους . . . βίβοίους : the art. is expressed but once, because the writer is speaking of a single class of persons possessing all of the qualities mentioned, those who were faithful, well-disposed, and constant. § 31. 7. Tf ταγμένος : what use of the partic. ? Explain also the use of ΐΓΟΓτωκότα in 9. » Γ 1 f% 4 ♦ J 204 ANABASIS I. lo. 1-d. ANABASIS I. lo. 5-11. 205 w ύ; CHAPTER X. Page 44.] § 1. The narrative is resumed from Chap. viii. — 11. ώτο- Tifiwim . . . Scfid : a Persian custom. It is stated later (p. 84, 22) that Λβ head and hand of Cyrus were exposed to view fixed on a stake. — mtori^wrm,, βιώκαιν, tUnriimt : note and explain the number and agree- ment of these words. — 13. «rrpaTOircSov : see the plan, Introd. § 44. — oi|UTd "AiMi(m,Ariaeus and those with him, the troops of Ariaeus, like the phrase ol &(φ Τισσαφέρνη., p. 1 H, 2(>. μ,τά. ' Apcacov implies participation, but σύρ αύτψ in 12 implies accompaniment.~l'j. IvOcv ώρμηντο : i.e. on the morning of the battle. It will be remembered that the battle was fou^^ht on the afternoon of the third day (p. 33, 12) after the midnight revfew mentioned p. 29, 15, and that this review was held on the night after the third day's march from Pylae. Cf. the note on ^vtcvOcv, p. 20, 13. — 16. rirrufm . . . 68ov, a distance of four jmrasanys, it was said; lit. there were said to be four parasangs of the road. 12. 17. iroXXd: pred., to a great amount. —IS. την Φωκα£8α . •Iwu, the Phocaean woman, the concubine of Cyrus, who was said {την \ηομέρην = ^ . . . i\iy,ra, G. 1560; H. 960) to be, etc. —Id. XouBam ' with jSafftXeiJs in 17. rt^ ^ 5 3. 20. ή ν€ωτ€>α, the younger (of the two). —21. τών ΈUήvωv : sc. Tiwif (a rare omission). — Iv tois σκ€νοφόροι$, among the baggage (neut.). ~ 22. &ιτλα «fxovTcs, to be under arms, to be standing guard. Cf. p. 24, 25, and the note. — κοί «»ντιτοχθ€ντ€8 : sc. oJrot. — 23. ol 8c καΐ αυτών \ut smie also of them, d δ4 is correl to woWous μέκ^2δ. Ivtos αυτών, within their lines. — 2(J. lyivovro : pi. from the influence of ανβρωτΓοι. Page 45.] § 4. For the account of the second battle, described in the remainder of this chapter, see the Introd., § 452. _ i. «Λλήλων : why gen. ? — 2. οΐ^μν : referring chiastically (see note on am/3a/m . . . άνέβη, p. 1, 8) tool "EXXijws.— 3. ws iravTtts νικώντί5, thinking that thei/ were victorious omr all, but in the next line, cJs . . . vcKu>ure,, thinking that now theu were all victorious. — ol δ* : sc. iSacrtXc^s καΐ ol σύν αύτψ (see p. 44, 12). § 5. This section consists of four clauses arranged chiastically, 1) referring chiefly to the Greeks, 2) chiefly to the King, 3) to the King, and 4) again to the Greeks.— 6. ιΐη : why opt. ? — Tvo-o-ai^pvovs : sta- tioned at the king's extreme left (p. 35, 1), he had charged through the right of the Greeks and joined the king m the camp of Cyrus in the rear (20ff.).— 7. viici^fv, οίχοντοι : one verb changed to the opt. by quot., the other not. For this constr., see Moods and Tenses, § 670. — 10. ιτλη- ΠΛίτΛτοβ : comp. how formed ? (G. 352 ; H. 250). — 11. νίμ-πο^ν toicv • Page 45.] in the dir. questions, νέμπωμ^ν, ίωμ^ν ; (G. 1358; 1490 ; Η. 866, 3 ; 932, 2). For ct . . . η, introducing the double indir. question, see G. 1606 ; Π. 1017 ; and cf p. 20, 18. § 6. 13. δήλοβ ην -τροο-ιών : cf. δηλο^ ή ν άρίώμχνο^, ρ. 7, 18, and the note. — ces 4δόκ€ΐ διτισθιν, as it seemed, from the rear. — 14. στραφ4ντ«$» counter-marching. See the Introd., § 33, note. It will be remembered that the two forces were somewhat more than three miles apart (1 above). — irapc^KcvalovTO . . . 86|o'|uvoi, got ready with a view to his advancing in this way {i.e. όπισθ^ή and to their receiving {his attack). (Js belongs not only to δ€ξ6μενοι (partic. of purpose), but also to ιτροσώντο^ (partic. of cause), τροσώντοί {sc. αύτοΰ) is in the gen. abs. ; Sc^o/tcwt modifies ol "Ελληνί^. See, further. Moods and Tenses, § 876. — 16. η Be ιταρήλβιν κτλ., cf p. 37, 24. The aor. is a plpf. in force. 0/. p. 1, 6. — 17. amifiytVf marched back. § 7. 21. διήλοΜΓ€ . . . ΐΓ€λταστά5, charged along (ττορά) tfie river into {κατά) the Greek peltasts and through them. —22. διΛαύνων δ€, as he drove through them. For the force stationed at the extreme right of Cyrus when the battle began, see p. 34, 5ff.— 23. Iirauov : probably with their swords. — 24. αυτού?: the cavalry of Tissaphernes. — 25. iKiytro . . . ytvii CjjiJMiJeilieSBBfiSISSi 206 ANABASIS I. lo. 12~ia ANABASIS I. lo. 19 and II. i. 1-3. 20T Page 46.] δ 12. 17. 4νιβτράφησ•Λν, rai/ieci.— 18. ir«to£: pred. (with- out the art.), sc. Om-es. The const, changes at των 5i Ιτητέων, where we should expect Ivwett U, ω» 6 Τώφιη κτ\. — τών . . . Ινβιτλήσθη : the pass, of the const, explained in G. 1113; H. 743. —19. τό iroiov|icvov : τό γιγι/ό- fmmy is more common in this sense. — μή γιγνώσκιιν : sc. τού% "EXXi/ms. — 21. mra¥ . . . «ίνατιταμίνον, a kind of (rtva) golden eagle, with wings extended, perched on a bar of wood {and raised) upon a lance. τΑτι;, which commonly means a shield or target, is also used for δόρυ or λίτγχη (see the Diet., s.v. πέλτη, end) ; and i-n-l ^ύλου may refer to a horizontal piece of wood on which the eagle was perched. So iirl ξύλου καθ€ύδ€ΐί, roost like a fowl, Aristoph. Nub. 1431. The ξύλον with the eagle was then raised on the point of a lance {ivl wiXry). In the Cyrop. vii. 1. 4, the Persian standard is called derdy χρυσοΰί έτΙ doparos μακρού amrerap^vot, Curtius, iii. 3. 16, calls it auream aquilam pinnas extendenti similem. S la 22. Ινταΰθα : as we use here or there in the sense of hither or thUher. —24. &λλοι αλλοθιν, some from one part (of the hill), others from another, or, as we should say, some in one direction, others in another. — T*v Iwirimv : with έψιλοντο, was cleared of the horsemen. Cf. των ΙπΗωψ έ^Ίτλήσθη in 18. —25. rikos : cf. p. 39, 26. § 14. 26. vir αύτίν, at the foot of it. Page 47.] 1. τί loTiv : in what other mood might the verb have been? What case of the same sort is there in the next section ? 1 16b 4. «xiS^v ... ην, about this time. — 5. θ^μ€νοι τά οιτλα : see the Diet., S.V. τίθημι. — 7. φα£νοιτο, ιταρ€(η : opt. in a causal sent. Cf p. 35, 20, and the note. — 8. τ€0νηκ<ίτο : cf ττίττωκότα, p. 38, 20. — διώκοντα otx€o4o4, had gone off in pursuit (G. 1587 ; H. 981).— 9. κοτοληψόμ«νον τι ιτροΑηλακέναι, had pushed on (give the direct form) to occupy some point. § 17. 10. it δγοιντο ή oirCoicv : cf el ιτέμ-ποαν η touv, p. 45, 11, and the note. — 12. δοριπ|<ττον, supper4ime. In the primitive Homeric times there were two regular meals, άριστον, an early meal, breakfast, and δόρτον, a late meal, supper. Either could be called δ€ΪΐΓνον, which in Attic Greek meant the chief meal of the day, and as this came late in the afternoon, deiirvov took the place of the older name δόρτον. Cf dSecirm in 20. The Attic Apurro» was a midday meal, luncheon. $ia 15. tif\(maa-iUvii: supplementery partic. not in indir. discourse (G. 1682 ; H. 981). Cf. p. 25, 10. —ct τι . . . ήν, whatever there was to eat or drink. The clause is the second obj. of καταλαμβάνουσι. — 16. ofid- {as: obj. of διήρτασαν in 20, but repeated in καΐ raaras, these also, in 19, after the intervening clauses. — μιστόβ : pred. adj. sc. owras {that had been) full (G. 1289; H. 856α).— 18. λάβοι : why opt. ? — 19. δμαξμιι pied, to ^cvos : why mid.? See the IntrotL, § 20 1. $ 10. 0. -rpoo^cv η trapaSoicv, b^ore they would give up. See G. 1474, and Moods and Tenses, § 054. There is no change of mood in quoting what Cleaaor said. Cf c/ αύτψ Μη κτλ., p. 26, 19. — 11. Οανμήζω, should Page 50.] like to know. — iroVcpa . . . ή : double indir. question. Cf. p. 20, 18, and the note. — 12. m κρατών : force of ws ? — ή »s ... 8ώρα, or as gifts on the alleged (cJs) ground of friendship, as if he had said Js φίλοί ων. — 14. -irtixras, hy persucLsion, opposed to ω$ κρατών. — 15. tC ΙοΎΌΛ . . . χαρίσωνται : cf. p. 31, 6. §11. 10. irpos ταΰτα, in reply to this. — 18. αύτ» : with ct»^trot€?Tai (G. 1177; H. 772). — «στιν: why accented ? — <ίρχή5 : causal gen. (G. 1128 ; II. 730 a). —10. Ιαυτοΰ «Ιναι : pred. gen. of poss. — μ^ση τ^ χώρ^ : cf. μέσου του τταραΖΐίσου, ρ. Ο, 9, and the note. — 21. ούδ' cl, not even if: ού negatives δύναισθ^ &v. — irapc'xoi : SC. αύτούί. § 12. 25. €l μή, except, after a neg. Cf p. 21, 20, and p. 23, 10. — cxovT€s: = «' ^xot/xey. — 20. αν: with χρησθαι. Cf. p. 37. 20. So &v that follows belongs to στ€ρηθηναι, and irapaSovTes = €l ναραδοΐμχν. — 27. μή : the neg. with the imv. is always μ-ή (G. 1010 ; H. 1019). Page 51.] 1. ΐΓαραδώσ•«ν : sc. -ημα^ assubj., which would have been expressed if ημΐν had not preceded. § 13. 4. Άλλα αχάριστα : ironical. When Phalinus calls Theo- pompus a "philosopher," he means to stigmatize his remarks about άρ€τή and άγα^ά as unpractical. — 5. «v, that you are. —6. ΐΓ€ριγ€νέσΟαι αν, could (under any circumstances) prove superior, inf. with &v representing the potential opt. — 7. 8υνάμ€ως : for the case, cf. p. 3, 20. § 14. 7. €ψασ-αν : Xenophon writes as if he had not himself been present. — λ^ -yeiv : cf. X^yeiv, p. 42, 22, and the note. — 10. άλλο τι : cf. τί, p. 15, 27, and the note. — 11. ο-υγκατασ-τρ^ψαιντ* αν {sc. λ(yυ^Γτov) : serves only loosely as an apod, to the first prot., ehe &iXoi, since it expresses a thought adapted to the second. §15. 12. ft, whether. — 13. ά'ΐΓθΚ€κριμ^νοι tUv: why perf. opt? — 14. Ούτοι : in partitive appos. with the phrase Αλλον Αλλα. Cf. p. 37, 2, and the note. — αλλο$ όίλλα, some one thing, others another, lit. another other things. Cf. άλλοι άλλω?, p. 20, 11, and άλλοι άλλοθεν, p. 40, 24, and the notes. — 15. λcγcιs, mean, intend. § 16. 10. οΐμαι . . . iravTcs, as all the rest also, I think, οϊμαΐ is paren- thetic and does not affect the const. — 17. ημ€ί5 : sc. 'Έλληνέ$ έσμχν, — 18. Ίτράγμασ-ι : cf. p. 4, 8. § 17. 20. συμβovλcvσov ημιν ο τι κτλ., give us whatever advice, etc. — 22. circiTa : to be how construed? — λ€7oμcvov, δτι Φαλϊνο'β κτλ., ϊϋΛβτι reported as follows, " Phalinus once,^'' etc. For δη, cf. p. 28, 18, and the note. — 24. σηιμβονλινομ^νοις στίν6βούλ€υσ€ν : why a difference in voice ? — 25. τάδ€, the following advice, would be followed by the actual advice, if the report should ever be made in Greece. What kind of an ace. is rdSe ? — 5ti ανάγκη, thai it is inevitable, sc. έστΙ. 210 AHABASIS IL i, 19 and a. 3. ANABASIS II. 2. 3-11. 211 •T Iff *'| I •« P»ge 52.] 5 19. 2. fl . , . hm, if you have one chance in ten thousand. — 3. σιβΟήνβΜ, : limits iXxis, to be supplied with μία τι%. Cf. p. 14, 20, and the note. In 5 below, the subst. σωτηρία^ is used with έΧττίί in the same sense m σωθτ^ναι here. — 0. okovtos : used almost like a partic. Cf. p. 15, 2S, and the note. $ 20b 8. irp^ ταντα : φ p. 50, 16. — ταντα : cf. rdSe in the next line. Cf. also 14, where both words occur. — 10. i||uis : emphatic, opposing what the Greeks thought to what the king had demanded (p. 49, 25 ff.). — ilvoi: sc. ^μΛt Μ subj. — irXfiovos : for the case, cf. p. 14, 10. — 11. fxoms : a second prot. to Slv cimt, which is quoted. Cf p. 50, 25 ff. § 21. 15. m, , , ιΚησ-αν, that there was to be (not would be) a truce, the dir. form being μέι^υσι (partic, sc. ύμιν, =7/^ μένητ€) στονδαί €ΐσιν, there is a truce for you {i.e. for you to depend on), if you remain. Cf. 18 below, irroi^tti elaiif after μει^ΐτ€. Cf. also 22 ff. below. — 17. ironpa . . . η : c/. p. 50, 11. — 18. ή lie .. . άγγιλώ, or (whether) I shall take back answer from you thai there is loar ; lit. or, assuminy that there is war, I shall announce U from you. (G. 1503, 2.) §22. 20. ταύτα: not ταίϊτα. — airt ρ : sc. δοκ€Ϊ. — 21. άιτικρίνατο : note the asyndeton. — 22. σνονδα£ : sc. eUriv. $ 23. 26. S Tt ΐΓοιήοΌΐ : indir. question. The fut. opt. is never used except in indir. discourse as the representative of the fut. ind. (G. 1287 ; II. 855 a). CHAPTER II. Page 53.] δ 1. 2. Μένων . . . I |uvc : Glus also remained. Cf. p. 48, 12 ff., and p. 49, 4f. — 3. Ιλ«γον, φβ^η : the first takes a clause with 6τι, the second the inf. (G. 1523 ; H. 9466). —4. pcXriovs, of higher rank. — 5. ovs ovK ov όνασχίσθαι : for οί ούκ Slv άνάσχοιντο, a rel. clause with the inf. by assimilation (G. 1524 ; H. 947). — αύτον Pao-iXcvovros : gen. abs., expressing condition. —6. άλλ* d icrX. : a change to the dir. discourse.— ή8η, immediaieLy. — l. cl 8c μή, otherwise, i.e. if you do not come,=iav δέ βίι ηκ^ττ^. Cf 9, and see G. 1417 ; H. 906. 5 2. 8. xpij iroiitv : sc. ημάς, referring to both Greeks and barbarians. — 9. «trinp λΙγ<τι : understand before this xpij ημαί ηκαν t^s wktos. — ilSijfc^: cf. 7 and the note. — ιτράττιτ« : more animated than xpij ύμαί νράττ€ΐν would have been. — ύιτοΐόν τι : τΐ adds to the indefiniteness of owoiiop^ whatsoever. — 11. ουδέ, not even to the friendly barbarians, just as before he had sent Phalinus off without satisfying him. Cf p. 52, 26. $ 3b 14. Uvai : the inf. expresses purpose. Const, with ούκ iylyvero^ did not result {favorably) for going. This phrase is interpreted by κα\ά fjp In 21. See the Introd., S 29*. —15, δρα, m U seems, —16. iv μέο-φ : €OyovT€s. ^ 22. olt, by what: assimilation to the case of the omitted antec. §19. 23. τοΐδ'Έλλησι: after the compound verb.— 25. otov: masc. ace. Bubj. of yiyv€a$ai, qualem par est fieri. — Έοτ the camp at night see the Introd., §40» I^age 56.] § 20. 27. των τότ€ : sc. κηρύκων. Homer says {Iliad v. 780) that Stentor {cf. Eng. stentorian), the "brazen-voiced," was able to shout as loud as fifty other men together. Page 57.] 1. os αν μηνύσ-τ), λήψ€ται : cond. rel. sent. — 2. r6v 6vov: i.e. the senseless panic. — τα διτλα : in a Greek camp the arms (heavy shields and spears) were generally stacked in one place. See the Introd., § 402. _δτι λήψ€ται : cf. p. 20, 20, and the note. —3. τάλαντον : see the Diet.; cf o.], 2, and the note. § 21. 5. els τάξιν τα διτλα TC0€, his spear, but in the next line βακτηρία^, a «toff or stick, without the art., because the staff was no part of his regular equipment as a soldier.— 3. ct δοκοίη : why opt. ? — 4. τόν ίιητήδ€ΐον, the right man.—ly. Iirourtv αν: an Uerative aor. Cf p. 42, 2, and the note. For the use of the stick in Spartan military discipline, cf p. 24, 27 ff. Clearchus was a severe disciplinarian. See the Introd., $ 272 __ αύτάί ΐΓρο<Γ€λάμβαν€ν, took hold himself -7. μή ov : μή negatives the fol- lowing inf. regularly ; ού (here very irregular) strengthens the neg. idea underlying αίσχύνην dvai, were ashamed, were unioilling. See G. 1617 • H. 1034 ; and Moods and Tenses, § 817. ' §12. 7. irp^ αύτο, to it, the business in hand.— ol . . . vtvovoVft those that were thirty years old and less. -9. σιτουδάξοντα, in earnest.- ιτροα-€λάμβανον : cf 5. δ la 11. μή : in the dir. form σύ. Cf p. 40, 10, and the note. - 12. lp8iiF : with Ota (G. 1520 ; H. 1000), it was not the proper season for watering, etc. Cf Moods and Tenses, $ 759. The summer was the season for irrigation, so that the presence of the water late in September was suspicious.— 13. ιξδη, foHhwUh, at the very staH.~ds^ wUh reference to, /or. —14. τβντον Ivcxa : repeats Tm τροφαίροιτο. Cf G. 1363. δ 14. 18. otvos φοινίκων, palm wine. Cf p. 24, 23 ff. — i|o« . . . αυτών ns&ur drink made from the same by hoUing, ' Page 59.] § 15. 19. αύταΙ αΐ βάλανοι, the dates themselves, as con- trasted with the wine, etc. For the case, cf τά άρμχιτα, p. 37, 2, and the note. — 20. rots oU^rais : with άΗκ€ΐντο, were set apart, which is equiv. to the pass, of άττ^τίθ^σαν in 24 below. — 22. κάλλον$ : gen. of ciiuse (G. 1126; Η 744). — 23. ήλεκτρου: abridged for -ήλεκτρου β^€ω5. Cf. the similar case exjilained in G. 1178; H. 7736. — τάβ 8^ τιναβ, hut some {Tivas) others. — 24. τραγήματα, for sweetmeats, to be eaten at dessert. — καΙ ην . . . ηδύ μ^ν, and these (the rpay^pxLTa) were a palatable thing {cf. G. 925 ; H. 017) also at a symposium {τότον, not τοτόν). Page 60.] §16. 2. Ι|αιρ€β€ίη : why opt. ? § 17. 4. 6 . . . ά8€λψο$ : note the position of the genitives. — 5. -ywai- Kos : by name Statira. — 6. αΰτοΐ$ : for the case, see G. 1175; H. 772. Cf 'Ελλάδι in 9. § 18. 8. ytlruiv : pred. nom. to οικώ. — 9. οΙκώ : cf. Xen. Hdlen. iii. 2. 12, Καρία, evda-jrep 6 Τισσαφέρνους oIkos. — 10. cl 8ννα£μην : we might have had έάν δύνωμαι (G. 1502, 2; 1420; Η. 937; 907), since the context implies, / thought it would be a €υρημα. — 12. οΐμαι . . . ΙχΜν, for I think it would not be a thankless lab)r for me. — 13. irpos νμων : as if a pass, had i)receded in place of αχάριστων txetv. § 19. 10. MrwrrpaTcvovTa : quoted after ^77«λα (G. 1588 ; H. 981). For the fact mentioned, see p. 5, 13 ff. — 17. καΐ μονο$ κτλ. : cf. p. 45, 20 ff. — 21. συν τοΐσ$€ : with a gesture. — 22. αΰτφ : the king. § 20. 24. βουλ€ν(Γ€σθαι : what other tenses might be used ? Cf τταύ- σασθαι, p. 5, 1, and the note. — 27. cvirpaKTorcpov : verbal adj. in the com p. Tlie subj. of einrpaKTOrepov ji is διατΓράξασθαι understood, the διαΊτρά- ζασθαι expressed being the obj. of δύνωμαι. Page 61.] § 21. 2. μ€τα<Γτάντ€$ : second aorist. Cf. μεταστησάμ€νοί, p. 58, 12. — 3. Κλέαρχο9 8 tXtyfVf Clearchus was spokesman. — 4. ώβ βα<Γΐλ€ΐ 'ΐΓθλ(μήσ-οντ€$, with the intention of warring with the king. When, as here, the subj. of the leading verb is also the speaker, ais simply em- phasizes the cause or purpose denoted by the partic. For the case of βασι\€ΐ, cf. p. 3, 5. § 22. The speaker is referring in this section, probably, to the agree- ment entered into at Thapsacus, p. 20, Iff. — 9. Ocovs, άνβρώΐΓου5 : objs. of -ασχύνθημεν (G. 1049 ; H. 712). The inf. τροδουναι is a second obj. of the same verb (G. 1519 ; H. 948). — 10. irap^xovrcs, when we had offered (sc. αύτψ). For the tense of the partic, cf p. 5, 12. — cv iroictv : purpose. Cf p. 9, 14. §23. 10. liTfC: here, since; above, in 7, when. — 11. βασ-ιλιΐ . . . &ρχή$ : cf p. 50, 18. — 12. την χώραν κακώς trouiv : cf. p. 19, 3, and the note ; and 16 below, ^/xas dJ ποιων. — 15. dSiKovvra : sc. τινά, and cf 216 ANABASIS Π. 3. 23 and 4. 3. ANABASIS II. 4. 3-9. 217 1 Page 61.] βmiX€mμmvs, p. 2, 21, — 17. ύιτάρχη, shall take the first step, begm. For the const, of τΓΟίώι^, see G. 1580 ; H. 981 ; but for iroiovvrtt in 18, see G. 150.'], S; H. mm a. §21 21. 4iK»: mood? Cf. άχμι Αν σχολάσ-τ?, p. 57, 16.— αΐ . . . ,«i4rr«v, let the truce continue. - 22. άγοράν ΐΓαρέ|ομ*ν, will provide you a market, i.e. an opportunity for buying provisions. δ 25. 22. cts : cf. €h ?ω, p. 29, 17, and the note. ~ 25. δοθήναι αύτω • cf. the corresponding act. doumt ifwl, p. 60, 11.— 26. καίι«ρ : with the following concessive partic. Cf p. 29, 6.-&|ιον βα<Γΐλ«ί, befitting the king. Page 62.] ξ 26. 1. wap^iv : sc. 4}μα$. The inf. is quoted after the idea of promising in πιστά. So awd^eiy.—S. Ihrov B' &y μή : why not ού? — For the Greek commissariat, see the Introd., § 26, and for the con- dilions here imposed, see particularly § 26 2. δ 27. δ. ιτορ(ύΐ(Η)αι after όμάσαι (G. 1286 ; Η. 948 a). Cf the two fut infs. in 1 and 2. — ώβ διά φιλ£ο«, as (you would go) through a friendly (amntry), — 8. %iv : depends on the general idea of promising. 5 2a 8. ταδτ» ϊδο|€ : cf p. 16, H. - 9. ώμοο-αν . . . 25οο-αν : cf the note on πιστά, p. 54, 25. § 29. 1.^. &s βοίΓΐλέα ; cf p. 5, 16. — διαΐΓρά|ωμαι, shall have accom^ plished, with fut. pf. force (Moods and Tenses, § 90). — ί δέομαι : sc. διαπράξασθαι. — 14. ώ$ άιτάξων καΐ 4ιηών : φ the note on cJs πο\€μ'Ασοντ€$, p. 61, 4. CHAPTER IV. δ 1. 22. μή . . . avToS^, that the king toould bear them no ill-will. The inf. is quoted after St^ias. Cf παρέξ€ΐν in 1 above.— 23. lirnrTpaTfias : gen. of cause. Cf the second ijs, p. 30, 8, and the note. — τών -ιταροιχο- l^dvmv, of what was past. § 2. 24. Ινδηλοι . . . vovv, evidently paid less regard to the Greeks. For προσέχο^,^, cf ά.iώμ€ms, p. 7, 18, and the note.— 27. άλλα irpoawSvris κτλ. : for the freedom of relation which this implies between commanders and men, see the Introd., § 27 Κ Note that Clearchus answers the remon- etrants (p. 0:3, 12 ff.). δ 3. 28. η : may introduce the second part of an alternative question (G. 1606; H. 1017), even when the first part is only implied (here πίη -epop iWun Ixet). Cf the use of an in Lat. Page 63.] 1. αν ικρί iravros ιτοιήσαιτο : potential optative. —3. €ίη : we should expect J after im, since the verb on which the clause depends (ir ποφαιτο) is not past (G. 1270, 2) ; but €Ϊη is (irregularly) assimilated to the mood of the verb on which it depends. See Moods and Tenses, Pag3 63.] § 180 b. — «Γτρατ«ν«ν : dependent on φ6βο^ (G. 1521 ; H. 952). We might have had oi &\\oi "Ελληνες φοβοίντο . . . στρατεύ^ιν. — 4. %\λ~ (πτάρθαι : cf p. 30, 17. — 5. άλισ-θη : fut. pf. force; cf. διαπράξωμαι, p. 62,, 13, and the note. — 6. ουκ . . . ήμίν, it is not possible that he will not attack us, lit. there is not how (introducing the indir. question) he will not, etc. (G. 1618 ; II. 1031). § 4. 7. ή . . . άΐΓ0Τ€ΐχ(ζ€ΐ, is either trenching or walling off some point. Cf the use of τΐ, p. 47, 9.-9. τοσοίδ€, so few. ^ § 5. 14. Iirl ΊΓολέμφ : = πο\€μήσορτ€$. — airUvax : the future sense of ' €Ίμι and its compounds almost always extends to the inf. in indir. discourse. Cf p. 11, 22 ; p. 13, 17 ; p. 20, 8 ; p. 48, 19 ; but here the inf. irreguferly has the present sense. See Moods and Tenses, § 30. — 15. S'ιrcιτo^ moreover, introducing πρώτον μέν, αΰθί$ δέ, etc. — 16. oOcv Ι'ΐΓΐσ-ιτιονμ€θα : cf ivBev ΙΙξουσι τά επιτήδεια, p. 58, 7, and the note. — 17. &μα, cvOvs : for the use of these advs., see G. 1572; H. 976. — 18. άψ€«Γτήξ€ΐ : fut. pf. (G. 705; Π. 467).' For the force of the tense here, see G. 1266 ; II. 850 a, and cf \€\€L\f/€Tai below in 19. — 20. ^vtcs : sc. φίλοι. § 6. 20. ΐΓθτομ08 : emphatic, as if he had said, but as to rivers, I don't know whether (ei), etc. — 21. διαβατ^ος : the verbal in -t4os used personally (G. 1595 ; H. 989). — 23. αν : i.e. iav. — ov . . . €t«nt. introduces an element of doubt into the calculation. If they had remained just twenty days, their march northward with . ΐΓ'ΓΓΐηΐΪΓΜΪΓ °" "-''■ ^• -''*^'' '« »-« usually accepted f ία 13. βύτοί . . . ίχάρονν, proceeded by themselves. —14. Ιστρατο- «StiHWTo : the Greeks and barbarians. J ^26 "'. "' '*"* ' *"■ ^^°"' ^"^ ''■^' ''■ ^' ^• ~ *^• '^''^*» *'^™"''= J ^L• !?\Γ* "''^Γ'•' """"""^ Ρ• 32- 14. If we suppose that the south- «n part of this wall, which extended from the Tigris to the Euphmtes, Tr, V^Tl 1^ '^ *° "*""""'• "'^'' *"' X«"°P>'on'« not .lescrlbing it r?2 t, ff w Γ • """' '""'"""^• ^"^ ""^ '''"8'« '"gi'"»S tl«. trench (see p. JA 11 ft.) for the puipose of completing the line of defence furnished by the northern part of the wall. I„ the ix-treat Tissaphemes led the ηοΤΐΐΤ^'"'?'' Γ'" f'''' *""^" ^• ''' '")■ '" ""•- "'•■'' "-y «"«nil no see tte rich plam of Babylonia, and so brought them outside of the iiJ!;»*^'^' " . 7 ""'^^'^ within (.αρϋΧθοή on their way to the say ta,d._„S»v: why gen.? -24. μ<|κ„ 8' {«γ.«. 6„ί ?„ Jen;,,,, « was mid, etc. ^'^j^'h ^^ n«i?' V' "^^ ^* • • • ^•^^ «^^^ ^^*e ^^<Λ^ («'y «β A«y/«i7 hem) bndged OMT (partic Of means) with seven boats, Cf. p. 67, 2, and the note. rage 65.] 4. «κηηρ: sc. κατατέμνονται, δ 14. 10. δένδρων : with ιταραδ^ίσου (G. 1085, 4 ; Η. 720/). If it were mnstmed with Wo, it would be ,4νΒρ<η. {cf, .It..., p. Μβ, l)._ot δΐ § 15. 13. Ιτνχον h, iTf ριιτάτφ «rrts, Aajjpeneci to he walking. — »p6 τών δ4θΓ^ t ^*.^V; ''''t?' ^ote.~15. .ροφύλακα^: see the Introd., p. 20, 9, and tlie note. *^ \^^i^^' f'''-"i"^^^^^"^i'^ff*lirect discourse. C/. p. 28, 18, and the note. -19. Ει«μψ*: for its agreement, cf, p. 5, 11, and the note. ^21. μί, tmewvnu : why subjv. ? ^ * J2\ ^^: ^ ^^^-^ «*«^« Tissaphemes intends, etc. ; but in the Bext hue «, «order that. ^27. n^ δ.ώρνχο« : the second of the two mentioned at p. β4, 27 ; over this there was only a pontoon bridge, which could be destroyed easily. ^ ' ANABASIS II. 4. 19-26. 219 Page 66.] § 19. 3. vcavCo-Kos ns : conjectured to have been Xeno- phon himself. — 5. τό τ€ 4ιηθήσ€σθαι καΐ Xvcrciv : i.e. the two stories of an intention to attack, and at the same time to destj^y the bridge. We should expect TO also before \ύσ€ίν. For the unusual fut. inf., see G. 1277; H. 855 a, and Moods and Tenses, § 113. —6. νικάν : sc. ain-ous as subj. — 7. tC δ€Ϊ . . . γβ'φυρον : why need they destroy the bridge ? implying whxit good will it do them, etc. ? It is thus a proper apod, to the fut. prot. iL• . . . νικώίτί. — 8. &v ώσ-ιν, €)ςοιμ€ν αν : a subjv. in the prot. with an opt. with dv in the apod. See G. 1421, 2 ; H. 901 a ; and Moods and Tenses, § 505 ; and cf p. 13, 3 f. The ού in ούδ4, not even, modifies ^χοιμεν Λρ, the meaning being, even if there are (shall be) many bridges, we should not know, etc. Cf. for this meaning of ουκ ίχω, p. 30, 28, and the note ; cf also ούχ i^oviTLv in 10 below. — 9. σωθωμ€ν : why subjv. ? So φύyωσιv in the next line. §22. 17. νίΓΟΊΐ^ΐλψακν, had sent the man with a false message. The dir. form was ύττέτημψαν. — 19. IvOcv jUv, €νθ€ν U, on this side, on thai. — 21. ΐΓολλή9 . . . ίνόντων, since it loas extensive and fertile, and since there were men in it to cultivate it. — 22. tlra δ« κοί, and moreover also. — 23. γένοιτο : with μή. — ct tis βούλοιτο, in case any one should wish, might have been iav tis βούληται. Cf p. 18, 2, and the note. § 23. 25. 4irl μ,έντοι . . . 6μω^, yet they nevertheless, etc., i.e. notwith- standing that they now knew the man's statements were false. Page 67.] 1. oiHJYYeXXov : i.e. the next morning. § 24. 2. ίζιν-γμένην : the Greeks said ^evyvovai ^έφυραν (cognate ace), ίο build {join) a bridge, or ζ^υ^νύναι ποταμών (διώρυχα) to bridge a river (or trench). For the latter, cf. p. 65, 1.— 3. as . . . ικφυλαγμένωβ, as guardedly as possible, with the utmost precaution: cf. p. 89, 14. olbv re (= δυνατόν), sc. ήρ, — 4. τών ιταρα Τισ-σαφ4ρνους Ελλήνων : cf, τών τταρά. βασΐΚέω^, ρ. 2, 6, and the note. — 5. διαβαινόντων : sc. αυτών. We should expect the dat. after έττιθ^σ^σθαί, rather than the gen. abs. Similarly διαβαινόντων occurs in the next line, notwithstanding the following aiJrois. — 8. σκοιτών: partic. — διαβαίνουν : in the dir. form διαβαΐνουσι, to see whether Ihey were crossing. — 9. (pxcro άπιλαννων, went riding off. Cf. p. 47, 8, and the note. § 25. 12. ιτλίθρου : cf ττΧέθρων, p. 10, 21. — 13. irpos ην : why acc. ? — 16. α : adv. with δυνάμενοι^, the most powerful. — 14. oSiKttv : cf for the tense the note on άδικέΐν, p. 25, 1. So άδικοΰντα in 5. — μή ΒιδοΙη $£κην, might not pay the penalty. §22. See the Introd., § 29 1. — 17. rh ainb τφ ήλιθίφ, the same as folly, synonyms of folly. For the dat., see G. 1175; H. 773. § 23. 19. τοντφ : repeats the rel. clause, and depends on i7Γιβov\€ύωp. — ^νδηλο$ Ιγίγν€το : how difEerent from Ιίνδη\ο$ 'jv and €νδη\ος iyivero ? — 20. ovScvos : depends on the prep, included in the compound verb. — των σννόντων : connect with KarayeKuiv. 6ie\iy€To would require the dat. § 24. 24. μόνο$ . . . δν, he thought that he alone understood that it was an easy task. Page 80.] § 26. 1. άγάλλ€ται lirt : in the next line with iiy^WeTo we have the simple dat. of cause, τψ δύνασθαι κτ\. — 3. ψ€νδή : from φ€υδή$, not t^eOSos. — 4. τών άΐΓαι8€ντων : pred. part. gen. — 6. $ι.αβάλλων tovs Ίτρώτονς, by slandering those who were already first (in their friendship). — TOVTO : repeats the thought of Trpuyreuetv φιλίί/.. § J27. 7. TO . . . ΐΓαρ^χ€σθαι : obj. of έμηχανατο. — 9. ήξίον, expected. — 10. Sri δνναιτο καΐ lOd^oi. ov : in the dir. form δύναμαι καΐ έθέλοιμι &v. — cvcpYco-Cav 8c κατΛ.€γ€ν, he set it down as an act of kindness. — 11. oitotc άφ£(Γτατο : cf 6στί% άφικνΰτο, p. 2, 5, and the note. See also Moods and Tenses, § 535. — οτι ονκ άΐΓώλ€σ€ν αντόν, that he had not destroyed him. § 28. 14. irΐΓΟτ€ Ινθυμοίμην, whenever I considered (G. 1431, 2; H. 914 B. 2), would de- pend on έφοβούμην (14), were it not repeated in λογι^ό/λβνο? (13). — 9. ovScv^ ημίν (G. 1161; H. 734) μιτιίη cl μη •ΐΓρια£μ€θα : in direct discourse, oodevbs ημίν μέτΐστίν iav μτ} ιτριώμεθα (G. 1431,1; Η. 894, 1). — 10. ότου ώνησόμιθα, wherewith to buy (G. 1133 ; 1442 ; Η. 740 ; 911) ; the antecedent {apyupiov understood) follows ^χονταί, I knew that few had, etc. — 11. άλλως . . . ιάνουμένους, from getting supplies in any other way than by purchase, follow- ing KaTixovTas, restraining. See Introd. § 26 2 and § 29. — ηδ^ν with ^XovTas and κατέχονται (G. 1588 ; H. 982), by anacoluthon (ανακολουθία) takes the place of the construction begun by δτι τών μέν (9) : we should expect ολίγοι txoiev, etc., after δτι, without ydeiv, and ωνήσονται for ωνησό- μέθα (which foUows the person of ττριαίμεθα). §21. 15. δοκ€ί: personal construction (G. 1522,2; H. 944 a). — 16. άσάφ€ΐα, uncertainty, ace. to Hug, the original reading of Cod. C : the other Mss. have ύττοψία.—Ιν μ^σ-ω «ίται . . . άθλο, they (τά ayadd) lie open to competition as prizes (as in the games) : cf. 4s μέσον τιθέναι {in medio ponere), to offer as a prize, and έν μέσφ (in another sense) in p. 81, 16. Demosthenes {Phil. i. 5) calls certain exposed towns αa τούτων . . . φΙρ€ΐν, more capable than theirs (lit than they) of bearing (G. 1520; II. 952). -24. ψύχη, βάλιη, : plur. to denote various occasions. —25. «τύν Tois θιοίβ, by the blessiny of the Gods, a pious precaution against tlie effects of i)roud language, σύρ rarely occurs in Attic prose, except in Xenophon: see G. 1217. —20. ol Si avSpts: i.e. the enemy.— 27. ήν . . . διδώσιν, if the Gods grant us, etc. The future apodosis is implied in τρωτοί etc., more liable to l)€ wounded and killed. The Greeks took a just pride in tlieir superior vigor of body and mind. Ever since tlie Persian wars they had felt profound contempt for the effeminate Asiatics. Page 86.] § 24. 1. άλλ' lo-ws γαρ . . . άναμίνωμιν, but let us not wait, dc. , for perhaps others too, etc. άλλα and yap belong to different clauses ; generally άλλα yap is an emphatic but, with only one verb expressed : see p. 96, 9, and note. —3. ιταρακολοΰνταβ : future. —4. του Ι|ορμήσ•αι : gen. after άρξωμ€Ρ. — 0. τΔν ο^ρατηγών ά|ςοστρατηγότ€ροι, more fit to be generals than the generals themselves : he is addressing only XoxayoL § 25. 9. tpiiiciav : Xenophon speaks as a young man ; and this passage favors the later date (about 430 n.c.) assigned for liis birth, which many authorities place as early as 440 or even 444 n.c. — άκμάξιιν, that I am (d the height (of my ability) ; ipUKUi. (a poetic wortl) depending on the idea of €U)ility in άκμάξ^ειν. δ aa 12. ιί〫ëαι : sc. αύτ6,. — 13. βοιωτιά^ων r% φωνή, ivUh a Boeo- tian accent : the Boeotians spoke Aeolic. — φλυαροίη 6Wts \iy^K (repr φ\υαρ€ΐ δστι, \iyec) : some Mss. have \4yoi, corresponding to φλναροίη, — 14. άλλως η ι« £s &\\ovs in 12. — ΐΓαρασ-κ€υαζόμ€νοι, preparing {not prepared), with φαρ€ροΙ ^re (G. 1589; IL 981). δ 37. 15. Tt, somewhat. — 16. ταξίαρχοι : see Introd. δ 30». —17. χρή- μαο-ι, i.e. pay: see Introd. δ 251.-19. άξιονν δΰ {sc. τιρά), toe have a right to expect . — 20. τούτων : with ττρό in comp. δ 38. 22. αν . . . ώφ€λήσαι = ωφ€\ήσαιτ€ Λρ. — 25. άντικατασταθώο-ιν : subjunct. in obj. clause. —20. as . . . ctirftv, in a word (G. 1534; 1172, 2 ; II. 950 ; 7716), limits the absolute force of ούδαμοΰ.—27. ιταντάττασ-ιν (.sc. 0Jδh SiP yivoiTo): i.e. it is absolutely true in military matters. 282 ANABASIS III. i. 38 and a. 1• ANABASIS III. 2. 1-a 233 ί Ϊ Page 89.] 2. άιτολώλ<»ν : gnomic perf. (G. 1295). S39. 2. eipxovTas: see §§ 40,47 (below), and Introd. δ 272. _ 4 Skv ΐΓοιήσοι : see p. 88, 22 ; we should expect τοφα^^, to agree with the pre- cedmg subjunctives. — ιτάνυ Iv καιρ<ρ, quite seasonably. I 40. 0. ώδ (ίΒύμα,«, hjw loiihout spirit. See p. 81, 24. — 7. ψυλακάς • see Introd. § 40^. _o{Jt« γ ^χάντων (sc. αύτων), at least while they are so {I.e. αθύμωή. — S ri, for what seruice (G. 1183; H. 777 a). — 8. νυκτ6$ : gen. of time. — Scot : sc. χρψτθαι. § 41. 9. ώι . . . Ivvowrrat : final clause with wy (G. 1.368) ; cf. ρ 88 4 δ 42. This section expresses what the battle of Cunaxa tauijlit the Greeks, confirming the lesson of the old Persian wars. - 12.^ ή . . . wotovcra, which causes, etc., snbj. of iarh, takes the gender of Ισχύ, where we might have rb τοωνκ~η. otrortpoi &v ϊω<ην: gen. rel. condit'ion - 14 lpp«jtcv^6p,vfu, more vigor- ously. — 15. To^Tovs refers with emphasis to the omitted antecedent of irorepoi (G. 10:30): cf. oCrot in 18, and ro&rovs in 22.— ώ, Μ τό -roXv' generally, for the most part. — οΰ δέχονται, do not abide. ' δ 43. 17. Ik iravros rpoirov, in any way they can.~22. μάλλον άψι icvov^voue, are more apt to live to old age: partic. in indir. discom-sV, like Myo^as in 23.-2.3. I«s av JOHrtv, ivhile they live: gen. rel. condition. δ 44. 24. Iv ToiovTij, . . . ia -μΛν is parenthetical— 25. αυτού? (sc. i,aas), ourselves. — 2(!. ιταρακαλιίν : sc. ayaOods elmu δ 45. 28. Χ€ΐρ£-<Γοφο8 : for the composition see G. 872 ; H. 575 c. ..^f^l ?^•^ ^* ''***^"^*»^ • • • 'i«<»«>v, I knew only so much of tjou as (that) I heard, etc.~2. 4ψ' ols (G. 10;]2,• II. 090 a). -3. βονλοίαην &v (G. 1327 end ; 11. 903). -6'τν χλ«£ο^ου5 (like quam plurimos), as many as possiMe. See note on p. 2, 12. § 46. C. αίρ«-«Γβ*, etc. : imperat. — ol W|uvoi, you who need them. — 8. αττγκαλοΰμιν : future (cf. p. 8(i, 3). \^\ ^' ^ *'^^''^ ■" ^^'^ *'*'''^^'^ ^"^ ^^ ^® '■^^'^^ ^° summon the soldiers. -- 10. &μα . . . €ΐΐΓών, i.e. «θ Λβ said this (G. 1572 ; Π. 970). — 12. Δορ8α- ν•ΰβ, ofBardanus in the Troad. See Introd. δ 23 1. CHAPTER II. ^ 1 1. 10. Ή'ρηντο : for the plupf. with iwd, see note on p. 81, 8 — ύ^φαιν€, loas glimmering : a common force of Μ in compos, is slightly (G. 1219 end ; 11. 808 end). - 18. ιτροφυλακά, (note the accent), pickets oTJ'f'ri n?f ^''"*''^• ^ ^*^^•— *-«^ersonal verb meaning they resolwd were to follow, in place of iίδoξep ainoU. - 10. oiroo-o«s κατακάνο«ν ■ representing briHrom hp κατακάνωμ^ρ of the direct form. — 11 νιμαίρα* • trace the origin of the Englisli word chimaera.-lZ. ά,τοθνουο-ιν theu are dUl (after ninety years) fulfiUing that sacrifice. According to Herodotus (vi. 110, the number of Persians slain at Marathon was about 0400 The Athenians had vowed to sacrifice to Artemis 'Ayp^ipa as many goats as they should slay of the Persians; they afterwards voted to sub- stitiite for a single sacrifice of this large number of goate an annual one ο five hundred. The essay on the Malignity of Herodotus, included m llutorch's Morals, 26, describes this sacrifice as still kept up more than five centuries after Xenophon's time. ANABASIS III. 2. 13-20. 235 Page 93.] § 13. 13. Ιιτίΐτα corresponds to έλθόντων μ^ρ in 7. — 14. άναρίθμητον : Herodotus (vii. 185) makes the whole number of fight- ing men {μ&χιμοι) in the armament of Xerxes 2,041,010 ; and he estimates the number of camp-followers (vii. 180) as even greater than this. These numbers are, of course, immensely exaggerated : see Grote, chap. 38. — 15. καΐ τότ€, then too (as well as at Marathon), referring to the victories at Salamis (480 ii.c), and at Plataea and Mycale (479 b.c, on the same day). — 17. Ισ-τι ύραν, we may see (G. 1517 ; H. 949). — «κμήρια : appos. (G. 910 ; H. 720). — 20. άλλα τουβ Ocovs, but {only) the Gods. — 21. irpo- γόνων : gen. of source ; see note on p. 1, 1. § 14. 21. ov μ€ν 8ή . . . ovtovs, i.e. I have no idea of telling you that you disgrace them {your ancestors). — 23. άφ* ού, since. —24. €Κ€ίνων: the Persians in Xerxes's army. Page 94.] § 15. 1. ιτολν belongs to the two compar. in 2 ; cf. 21 below. — 2. &μ€ίνονας : see iii. i. 22. §16. 5. αμ€τρον {sc. 6p) : indir. discourse. — 0. els, against {into), stronger than the more common iwL — 7. οτι ού θ€λονσ-ι depends on the idea of knowing implied in τηΐραρ ^xere. — καΐ 6vrts : partic. of opposition (G. 1573 ; H. 979). — 8. 8€χ€σ^αι ύμαβ, to abide your attack.— νμίν : we might have had u/xas as subj. of ψοβεΐσθαι ι see line 1. § 17. 9. μήδ€ ... el, nor suppose (G. 1340 ; H. 874) that you are the worse for this, that, etc. (G. 1423 ; H. 920). — 10. ol Kvpeiot : the bar- barian troops of Cyrus. — 12. eVeivovs refers to τωρ ήττημέρωρ : running to them for refuge implied (Xen. means) that the refugees were the greater cowards. — 14. ταττομ^νους (G. 1582 ; H. 982) ; not indir. disc. (G. 1583). § 18. 17. e•vβυμήθητe : plural, as if y/xets had preceded in place of ύμωρ Tis. — ol μύριοι linreis : the article here implies that the number is a familiar one ; "so in English, your ten thousand horse'' (Crosby). This argument against cavalry, like some other arguments in this speech, is a piece of humor, intended to amuse the disheartened army. § 19. 21. Ινιτέων : gen. of compar. after ττόλύ ασφαλέστερου. — 25. βββη- KOTes, on our feet. — 20. τeυfόμeθα, shall hit. — 27. ήμα« : vpoixetp usually takes the genitive ; here the accusative. Page 95.] § 20. 1. el belongs to both clauses, ras μέρ . . . θαρρ€Ϊτ€, and δτι di. . . Λχθ€σθ€. — μάχα8 (G. 1049 ; Η. 712). —Stk,., -irap^gei : summed up in τοΰτο (3). — 2. ήμίν ήγήο-βτοι, ιυίΙΙ be our guide : in this sense ηyoΰμaι takes the dative of advantage. — 5. φανβρό? with partic. (G. 1589 ; H. 981). — ovs . . . avSpoe for Αρδραί ovs. — ovs ov . . . λαβοντ€8 . . . κeλevωμev, i.e. any men whom we may capture (on the way) and order to act as guides. — 6. ήν τι . . . ομαρτάνωσι, if they commU any offence / II ί ΐΜι 236 ANABASIS III. 2. 20-24. Page 95.] against us. — 7. rde ψνχάί καΐ «τώματο, their own lives and bodies : the meaning is that such guides will fear death or a beating enough to make them faithful. See an instance in point in iv. i. 23, and Introd. §282. With nouns of different genders the article is usually repeated. δ 21. 8. Wrcpov Kpcirrov (sc. έστΙ) is part of the indirect question depending on σκέψασθ^ in 3. - 10. μηΚ . . . έχοντα?, when we no longer have even this {i.e. apyopiop), i.e. being now without pay. — 11. αύτοιίδ (sc. ή/χά$), ourselves. — 12. &•πόσ•ψ . . . βονληται, i.e. using whatever meas- ures we please. See Introd. 5 26 2. § 22. 12. s . . . •π•ολιτ€ΰοντα5, those who now live poor at home: object of opav. — 17. κομι.σαμ€νου8 ΐΓλουσ•ίου8 όράν, i.e. to bring them here and see them rich, κομισαμέρου^ might have followed the case of αύτοΓί (G. 928, 1; II. 941). — 19. των κρατούντων (G. 1094, 1; II. 732 α) : possessive. § 27. 20. οιτωβ αν belongs to both πορευοίμεθα and μαχοίμχθα, which are potential optatives in an indirect question (G. 1327 ; H. 872).— 24. ημών follows στρατη-γν, that our campaign may not be directed by the cattle (G. 1109; H. 741). —25. ο-υμφ4ρη : sc. ττορεύεσθαι. — σν^κατακανσ-αχ : sc. δθΚ€Ϊ. Page 97.] 1. 5χλον ιταρίχουσ-ιν άγ€ΐν (G. 1530; Η. 952), give trouble to carry, i.e. are troublesome to carry. —2. cts rb μάχ£σθοι (G. 1546; H. 950). — ούδ€ν . . . οΰτι . . . οΰτ (G. 1019 ; Η. 1030). § 28. 4. άχαλλά|ωμ€ν, let US abandon. See iii. 3. 1, and Introd. § 39 1. — 7. κρατουμένων ιτάντα, all that belongs to conquered men (G. 1500, 2 ; II. 900): he avoids saying ηρ μέρ κρατώμεθα. —αλλότρια, /or/eii (another's). — 9.. νομ(ΐ;€ΐν : with two accus. § 29. 9. λοιίΓον (Μπω), it remains (sc. έστίρ). — 11. ov irpoVOcv . . . irpCv, not . . . until (G. 1471, 2 ; H. 924) : the preceding ττρόσθερ empha- sizes irplp. — 13. δντων . . . ΐΓίίθομΙνων, while we had our officers and obeyed ihem. 10. -άχολ^σθαι αν, that we should be ruined (άττόλοίρτο &p). δ 3α 17. Toi»s vvv . . . TiSv irpoVecv (G. 952, 2 ; H. βββ a). Notice the emphatic position of toj>s pup. — 19. ΐΓ€ΐθομίνουδ μάλλον, 7More obedient : a comparative corresponding to εύτακτοτέρου^. § 31. 20. ψηφΟτασβαι (sc. δει), we must vote. — τον del βντνγχάνοντα (subj. of κο\ά^€ΐρ), whoever of you may be at hand at the time. — 22. i^ev- M 238 ANABASIS ΠΙ. a. 31-^. ι, Page 97.] σμέΜ»! Icrovnu (G. 706 ; Η. 467 α), wiW/nd iAemee/ues deceiued (wi« have been deceioed). — 23. roirt . . . ilvat, wen who υήΙΙ suffer no man to be a coward. — 24. κακ4^ (G. 928, 1 ; H. 941). ^ 1 32. 24. ircpaimv ότ€ρον . . . Ιτό|€υον, i.e. the Bhodians carried fuHher with their slings than the Per- sians, and the Cretans with their bows. The words ol Κρητ€^ έτ6ξ€χΗ>ρ are merely a conjecture of Cobet for των τοξοτών or των τ^ίστων τοξ^ων of the Mss., the text being corrupt or defective. § 17. 24. όΐΓΟσ•α ολίσ-κοιτο : depending on the frequentative χρήσιμα ^v. — Κρησ -C : depends on χρήσιμα. —25. διατελούν χρώμ€νοι, they used con- stantly (G. 1587 ; H. 981). —26. &νω Uvres, shooting upwards, so as to recover the arrows. — μακράν : sc. Od6v. — 2S, &m χρήσβαι, to be used (lit. so as to use them). Page 106.] § la 2. κώμαι« : see Introd. § 402.-3. jwtov Ιχοντ«, having the worst 0/ ii. - άκρο-βολίο•€ΐ (G. 886 ; H. 5856) : cf άκροβοΜ^ uevot in 7. § 19. 8. Ιγνωο-αν, found out. — ιτλαίίΓΜϊν : see iii. 2. 36 and 37. For the changes in the hollow square, see Introd. δ 38.-9. ήν «τνγκνιπτι rd !l 244 ANABASIS III. 4. 1&-29. Page 106.] κφοτα, if the wings are ever drawn in (ef. 6ταρ διάσχν in Itl^"^ -^-^7->rro. in 24.-10. ο'δον ,rTcv««>as ovδ6ν. δ 4a 11. καΐ OS (G. 1023, 2 ; Η. 055 α). — 14. ίχων iiropcwTo, marched on with it (the shield). —15. θώρακα ϊιηηκον : the horseman carried no shieltl (Introd. § 31 3), and wore a heavy metal cuirass : see note on p. 102, 20. — 16. ΰιτάγαν, to advance slowly. — 17. wopUvoi, i.e. to pass along, leaving Xenophon to follow slowly with his burden. § 49. 20. &vapas, mounting his horse (again), —βάσ-ιμα . . . άβατα {sc. τά χωρία), passable . . . impassable {i.e. for a horseman) : Kruger makes the construction impersonal, like αδύνατα έστιν, it is impossible, for αδύ- νατον έστιν, comparing βατά, p. 143, 24.-22. φ94νονο-ιν Ύ€νομ€νοι (G. 1586 ; Η. 984) : φθάνονσιν in its sense of anticipate governs τού$ νο\€μίουί in 23. CHAPTER V. $ 1. 26. &ιτοτραΐΓο'μ«νοι . . . «ρχοντο, they turned off by another road and were gone (G. 1587 ; H. 827). —27. ^λην <ί8ον (G. 1060 ; Π. 719α) ; adverbial Page 112.] 2. αγαθών, supplies. § 2. 7. νομαΐ βοοΓκημάτων, pasturing herds (lit. pastures of herds). — 8ιαβιβαζο'μ€ναι, i.e. in course of transportation. §3, 11. μη ovK cxouv depends on the idea of apprehension in έννοού- μ^ροι. — €'ΐΓΐτήδ€ΐα : obj. of λαμβάνουν. — cl xdouv : sc. oi πολέμιοι (G. 1503; H. 937). — 12. όΐΓθ'θ€ν λαμβάνουν : indir. question after ούκ €χοΐ€ν (G. 1490 ; Η. 932, 2 end) representing ττόθίν λαμβάνωμεν; ίχω is used like habeo in non habeo quid dicam, non habebam quid dicerem. § 4. 13. airfio-av U τήβ βοηθ€(οβ, had returned from giving help (evi- dently to the plunderers of § 2). — 14. κατ4βη : i.e. from the height (p. Ill, 25). § 5. 15. OpaTc . . . €Ϊναι ; donH you see that they admit the country is now ours? — 11. ά γάρ . . . άλλοτρίαν, for what they stipulated against our doing, when they made the treaty {cf. ii. 3. 27), viz., burning the king's territory, (this) they are noro themselves {doing, by) burning {it) as if it were another's : μ^ κάίΐν . . . χώραν {sc. ημαή is in apposition with the antecedent of &. See p. 42, 12, and note ; in both cases a more definite expression (here κάουσι) is substituted by anacoluthon for a more general one like τοιοΰσι. § 6. 23. Οΰκουν €μοιγ€ SoKct, I don't think so, now. The reply is mere jest, like the preceding remark of Xenophon. § 7. 25. σ-κηνάδ, encampment (in the village). — 27. evOcv μΐν . . . €νθ«τ δ6, on the one hand . . . on the other. Page 113.] 2. ώς μηδ€ . . . βάθου? {sc. τισί), i.e. so as not even to let their spears project when they tried the depth ; their spears found no bot- tom (G. 1172; II. 771). C/. p. 95, 17. § 8. 5. κατά τ€τρακισχιλίου5, four thousand at a time. — ών 8€Όμαι, what I require, —τάλαντον: see Diet. Rhodes at this time used the Attic talent. «9. 7. • Ασκών : bags of inflated hides are still used in crossing these rivers. —9. axoSapc ντα : from αττοδέρω. — ^\Mrr\Bivra refers to δέρματα, hides, implied in άνοδαρέντα, i.e. flayed and (the hides) blown up. It appears that there were at least 2000 animals in the train. See Introd. §39. § 10. 11. 8€σμών, giHhs.— 12. ο'ρμίσ -as, mooring.— 13. &^ls, by leUing them down (1563,3; H. 969 a): this and άρτ-ήσαί are subordinate to ορμίσαί. — 14. Βιαγαγών, carrying (the line of floats) across the stream. — 4μφοτ€ρ»θ6ν 8ήσα5, fastening them to the two banks, to serve as pontoons, or supports to a floating bridge. § 11. 17. Si|ci τον μή κατο8€ναι, loill keep from sinking (G. 1549 ; 1615 ; H. 963): we might have τοΰ καταδΰναι, μ^} καταδΰναι, or (less frequently) 248 ^ I ANABASIS III. 5. 11-ia Page 113.] simply καταδΰναι. An equivalent (though different) con- struction follows, ωστ€ μ^ι όλισθάναν σχήσ^ι, will keep you from slipping^ lit. wiU keep you so that you may not slip (G. 1450 ; H. 953). § 12. 19. rh Ιργον, the execution of the plan {ενθύμημα). — 20. ol κωλν- jrovTcs, men ready to preveru, U: cf. note on p. 57, 28. — 21. ιτολλοί iinr«is : apposition. — ot . . . &v f irlrpctrov : sc. et έττ^χ^ίρησαν. § 13. 22. €-iravcxi6povv els τοΰμιτβΛιν, etc., i.e. they made a day's march backward to some villages which had not been burnt by the enemy (see § 3). —24, CV0CV = 4ξ ^s {sc, τ^ν κώμην), the village frorn which (see § 1). — 25. ^^oioi ήσ-ον θαυμά^ϋν, were like to wonder, i.e. seemed amazed, like iifiKea-au θαυμά^€ΐρ : the text, however, is very doubtful. ~ 2β. τρίψονται . . . €χοΐ€ν (G. 1487; Η. 932, 2): we might have had two indicatives or two optatives. Page 114.] § 14. 3. ήλ€γχον . . . χώραν, they enquired (of the cap- tives) about the whole surrounding country. See Introd. § 39 1. 5 15. δ. T% cirl Βαβυλώνα (poss. gen.): i.e. it lay on the road towards Ba/jylon. -0. ^kouv (G. 1497, 2 ; H. 032, 2). -βιρί^ιν : the king spent the wmter at Babylon, the spring at Susa, and the summer at Ecbatana (see Xen. Cyr. viii. 6. 22). Many Mss. here Imve θ€ρί^€ΐρ καΐ έαρίζ^ιν.— 8. 8ιαβήντι . . . irp^ Ισχέραν, to the west after crossing the river (sc. ripl) : this is used like the otiier adjective phrases with i,. — 10. Sri is repeated for emphasis in the last clause. - Καρδούχου? : the people called Kurds, Armenian Kordukh; the region is Kunlistan. §ia 12. άΐ€θύ€ΐν, Ihten to or o?ie?y. — i μβαλιίν irorc «ts αΰτονβ, once invaded than. — 15. 4wor€ . . . σιτιίσαιντο, καΐ €ΐημιγνύν« (dei)€nding on f^iroi.) : in the direct form, oworap . . . σττ^Ισω,η-αι, καΐ έττιμι^νύασι, ivhen- em- they (the Kurds) make a treaty, etc., some of them also mingle, etc.— 10. «nf»Av, CKffvttiv : sc. τινάί (G. 1001 ; H. 734). § 17. 18. Ικα<ΓταχοΐΓ€ ιΐδένοι, that they knew the way in each direction 21. To^To«s : governed by SieXeorra,.— 22. €>airav η>ν, they (the captives) said that they (the Greeks) would come. — 24. iWopov . . . ΐΓορ€ύ€«Γ«αι : in the direct form, ttxopop έστιν δτοι dp rts 4θέ\η πορ€ύ€σθαι, it is easy to go whUhersoever ijou wish, the apodosis being general in sense. §ia 25. Iirl ToiTOis, thereupon. —26. «Spot: part. gen. after ijplKa, atwhaievertίme.—r^vύw€pβo^v, the pass: ace. by anticipation ; regu- larly it would be, they feared that the mountain-pass might he seized beforehand. Page 115.] 2. η'νίκ' £v τιβ ιταραγγΟλΉ, «-β. when the order should be given ; cf ef ns . . . λνιτοίη in p. 01, 14 : this subjunctive might have been changed to the optative (omitting dp), as iirtidi, δ€ΐπρή<τ€ΐαρ (in 1) is changed from έΐΓ€ΐδάρ δ€ΐπρήσητ€. ANABASIS IV. i. 1-a 249 BOOK FOURTH. Hard Fighting in the Mountains. — Entrance into Armenia. — Great Suffering from Cold and Famine. — To Mount Treches, FROM AVUICH THE SeA IS SEEN. — ARRIVAL AT TrAPEZUS. CHAPTER I. Page 115.] § 1. See note on ii. 1, 1. Here it is probable that sec- tions 1-4 are interpolated. — 7. δσα Ιιτολιμήθη : passive of an active coiistr. δσα έττολέμησαρ (G. 1054; Η. 710 6) : to what extou war was made upon the Greeks. § 2. 11. cvOa {sc. έκ€ΐσ€), {to the place) where. — 12. irapoSos, way along the river. — 15. iropcvriov tlvai (dir. ττομευτέορ έστίρ : impers.). Much of this section repeats what has been stated in iii. 5. § 3. 10. τών άλισ-κομ^νων, the captives taken along the way. — d StcX- 0OUV has for its apodosis the sentence ip τ^ Άρ/χεν/ςι . . . irepdaai, including two subordinate protases ; it represents iap δι^λθωμβρ of the direct dis- coui-se, and the four following verbs might also have been changed to the opt. (see G. 1498). —10. ircpita^i, will pass round (G. 1257; H. 828 a). —20. a^YCTO : the subject is rds in;7as elmi. — gomv οντωβ €χον, it is just so (G. 144, 5; H. 480). § 4. 23. φθάσ-αι irpiv . . . καταλαβ€ίν : see p. 118, 25, and note. Page 116.] § 5. 1. την reXcvraCav φνλακήν : the last watch began at early dawn. See Introd. § 408. _2. δσον . . . Βϋλθιίν, enough for cross- ing the plain in the dark ; δσορ {sc. τοσοΟτορ) takes the infinitive from the idea of sujficiency which it implies.— 3. ιταραγγίλσιωβ, i.e. the word of command passed round {cf. p. 115, 2). —4. to Spos : cf. iii. 5. 7 and 17. § 6. 6. ri άμφ' αυτόν, his own special command : cf. τ6 όν\ιτικ6ρ, p. 153, 8. So TO iirirticoi', the cavalry, and τό Έλληρίκόρ for ol 'Έ\\ην€ί, the Greeks (p. 117, 4).— γυμνήταβ : for the use of light-armed troops see Introd. § 35. —7. oirXiTais : apposition.— 9. μή, that {lest), after κίρδυροί. — ΐΓορ€υο|4^νων {sc. αυτών), as they went, gen. abs. (G. 1568 end ; H. 972 o). — lirioriroiTO : see έφ^νομαι. § 7. 11. €ΐΓ€ΐτα, i.e. after crossing the hill and descending : cf. § 10. — 12. oUC, regularly, qualifies 4φ€ίΐΓ€το, affecting also the force of νπβρβάΧλορ, the idea being that each detachment in succession followed, as it crossed the height. § a 16. ήν λομβάν«ιν, there was an opportunity to take.— ^9. et ir»s |$£λήσ€ναν, in case the C. should be willing to let them pass, i.e. with a view 250 ANABASIS IV. ι. g-ia ANABASIS IV. i. 16-25. 251 I Page 116.] to this result (G. 1420 ; H. 907) : the implied apod, is that then they might do this, or the like. — 20. ώδ . . . χώρα$ = διά τψ χώρα? wy ψιλίαί {sc. ονσψ), i.e. to let them go through their country as {being) a friendly one : cf. p. 14, 27, and p. 02, 5, and the notes. §9. 22. δίΓου, wherever, is Cobet's emendation for δτου (one Ms.) or S Tt (most Mss.) : the common reading δτφ is also a conjecture, —ανάγκη : see Introd. § 20 2. —23. καλούντων (sc. αύτώή, when they called: see note on ΤΓορ€νομ4νων in 0. f 10. 20. Sid TO . . . flvai (G. 1540 ; H. 950). -27.' δλην τήν ήμ^ραν M»'*To, loent on through the whole day : the aor. looks at the ascent and descent as a single event, without regard to its duration ; cf. έβασΙ\€υσ€ δ^κα ίτη, he had a reign of ten years. See Moods and Tenses, §§ 56, 57. On the other hand, έτ^τίθ^ντο in p. 117, 1, looks at the attack in its dura- tion or repetition. Page 117.] 3. Ιξ άιτροο-δοκήτου, ex improviso: the suddenness of the coming of the Greeks is given as the reason for their fewness {OXlyoi Oures). —For the length of the line of march through the mountains, see Introd. §35 and §38*. δ 11. 5. lKivSvv€vi. — 11. W«s . . . τύν νουν, that the enemy might ham their attention turned to that road. - 12. (8ir«s) ώ« μάλιστα λάβουν that they migU be, as far as possible, unseen. δ a 14. ην Ιδ€ν . . . Ικβοίν«ν, i.e. which they must cross before getting to the ascent. — 15. 6λοιτρ<ίχοιΐ8 : a poetic word, compounded of «Γλω (Oolm), to roll (cf ίλμοί), and τρ4χω ; probably meaning rounded by rolling (I.e. m the water). See Liddell and Scott; and Theocr. xx. 49, there quoted: wiTpoi 6\οσΙτμοχοι, owrre κυ\ί»δωρ χαμάρρου, τοταμί>, μ^άΧαι, irepc^^eae Slmis. The χαράδρα which they were crossing was the dry bed of a wmter torrent {χ€ΐμάρρουή, down which the stones were hurled. See note on χαράδρα•', p. 103, 2. — 17. 8«σ•φ€νδονώντο, flew in pieces (lit. were fiung about, as if from slings): '' diffundebantur : cf σφ€»δ6»η r=funda'' Kehdantz. $4. 19. it μΙ, δνναιντο (sc. διαβηναι): gen. cond. with frequenUtive #r€»p(Srro. - ταύη, . . . Λλλ,ι. 8c. 65^.-- 22. άνάρι«Γτοι, breakfastless. - 24. KvXivSoiivTfs : with έπαύσαντο (G. 1580 ; H. 981). Page 121.] § 5. 2. «is . . . κατ^χοντιβ, supposing that they held the summit: see note on p. 1, 15. δα 2. ol 8* ού κατ€ίχον, i.e. they were wrong in so thinking : ol 5e is irregular in referring to the subj. of the preceding verb (see also G. 983 ; H. 654 e). — 3. μικττόδ, a round hUl. — 4, αΐίτη : oh-os may stand between • See Kemarks on §§ 1-22 on pp. II. and lii. Page 121.] the article and its noun, provided some qualifying word separates it from the article (G. 975 ; H. 673 c). — 5. αύτόθ€ν, from that spot (where they were). § 7. 8. iirc4»aiv€v : cf. note on p. 90, 16. — 10. trpotrtMovTis (G. 1586 ; II. 984). — 11. άλαλάξαντ€8 : see Introd. § 432. — 13. «{}ζ«νοι, nimble (well-girt): yap introduces the* reason why only a few (oXiyoi) were killed. §8. 17. as Ιδύναντο, as well as they could, with άνα/3άμτ«. — 18. άν- £μ»ν, drew up (like buckets from a well) : cf. Ιμάω, to draw; Ιμά$, a thong or strap. § 9. 21. -nircp, by the way by which {sc. έχορίύθησαν). —22. iiris, about: cf notes on p. 5, 5 and 9.-4. των Καρ- δούχων : depends on ορέων. § 2. ΐΓολλά : as adv. with μνημον€ύοντ€ν, recounting. — 7. έιττά ,ίμΙρα? : the day just ended appears to be the fifth since they entered the Carduchian country. Unless two days were occupied in negotiation (see chap. 2, $ 23), we must include the two following days spent in Carduchia. The seven days, as usually reckoned, are Nov. 12-18, 401 b.c. -8. μαχόμ€νοι δΐ€τΙλ€σαν (G. 1580; Η. 981). -9. κακά . . . «τύμιταντα, i.e. more evih than all which they had suffered taken together. — ho-a : sc. Ιίτασχον. — 10. ώ$ άιτηλλαγμίνοι, i.e. feeling free. $ 4. 18. οιτλα : appositive. — 19. γΙρρα : see Introd. $ 142. $ 5. 21. όδ^ . . . ανω, i.e. the only road which was visible was {one) leading up, etc. : the construction is η ^ρωμΑνη μία όδ05 liv ϋιιουσα άνω. ι 256 •« ANABASIS IV. 3. &-12. Page 125.] See p. 118, 22, ην 6p$s, and note.— 22. wtnnp χ€ΐροΐΓθ(ητο« {sc. οΰσα), (looking) as if it had been buiU. — τονηι, here, i.e. opposite to this road. §6. 28. irfiptt|ilvoif (sc. rurh), on trial.— 26. οΰτ* corresponds to τέ in 27. — έίιτλα refers especially to the shield, which, if held on the side, would be under water. ~€i Sk μή, otherwise, i.e. if any of them did attempt to carry their anns tlirough the river: cf. note on p. 53, 7. —27. 4irl τή? «ψαλής: i.e. holding them up above their heads. — 2S. γυμνοί, exposed: plur. since ns is collective. ^ Page 126.] $ 7. 1. "Ενθα, where. —4. ορώσ-ι μιν . . . opwrt, 8c . . . oftmrK U: notice the emphatic repetition. — G. lirtKcwro^fvovs, ready to faU upon (G. 1582) : not or. obi. § 8. 10. αντιίμαται : cf. awii τον αυτομάτου, spontaneously, p. 9, 1. — ιηριρρυήναι,/β// off [sc. ίδοξαν), with αύτψ as dat. of advantage. — διοβαί- vitv όΐΓόσ-ον ίβονλ€το, took as long steps as he pleased (opposed to δ€δέσθαι) : διαβαίν€ίρ in this sense was a good omen for crossing the river {δΜβαί»€ΐν) ; see § 12, § 14, and § 15. — 13. rh 6vmp : see Introd. § 20i. § 9. 14. m τάχιστα, as soon tw.- 15. Iirl του ιτρώτου (sc. lepelov), with the first victim. § 10. 19. apttrrmm, while eating his lunch: cf. άριστονοαΐσθαι (17), to prepare breakfast (or lunch). See also note on δορπηστόν, p. 47, 12. — 20. I|c£if κτλ. : the direct discourse would be Ιίξ€στίρ . . . trpoa^keuv, καΐ iav Ka0€U6jj . . . €ιτγ€Ϊρ, iav . . . Hxjj. — ούτιρ : with προσ€\θ€Ϊν. —22. ^γ€ί- ραντα civctv, to wake him and tell. — ϊχοι : sc. ctireiv. § 11. 23. καΐ TdTi, and this time. — Sn τνγχάνοκν . . . κατ£8οΐ€ν : imperf. and aor. opt., the direct discourse being irvyxapop^p . . . καΐ κατ€ίδομ£ρ: this true imperf. opt. (G. 1488; H. 9356) is rare. — 24. ώι lirl irvp : see Introd. f 40 ». — Iv τφ ir^pav, across the Hver. — 2G. iraiSio-Kos diminutive (G. 844 ; H. 558, 3): cf Ρ€αρίσκω in 20, which is a diminutive in form only.— Anrtp. . . κατατιθ€μ4νου$ (G. 924 a ; H. 615), apparently putting away bags of clothes. § 12. 28. Sd|ai : the oratio obliqua here changes from the opt. to the infin., as if ΐίφασαρ had already been introduced. —oitSk yap . . . ιτροσ-βα- rhv ctvai κατά τοΰτο (sc. ίφασαν δ6^αι), for {they said it appeared to them that) neither could tlie enemy's cavalry come down to the river at this point : ούδ4 {also . . . not, or neither) implies that this ground of safety appeared in addition to other obvious advantages. Page 127.] 1. IkSvvtcs . . . διαβα(νϋν : in the direct form, 4κδύντ€ί . . . δκβαίρομ^ρ (see G. 927) : distinguish the various circumstances of the crossing expressed by the three participles and yvμ»ol {sc. Omci). — 2. «g vwa-afuvw., i.e. with the expectation of swimming if it should be necessary. ANABASIS IV. 3- 12-ίίΟ• 257 Page 127.] — SiapaCvftv : imperf. representing δΐ€βαίρομ£ρ, we proceeded to cross; cf this with διαβηρα, (in 3) for δ,φημ^ρ, we crossed {φcted the crossing). -S. trpoo^tv . . . irpCv, before wetting (G. 1469; 1470 ; H. 924 a): for the use of νρόίτθ^ρ, see Moods and Tenses, § 658. Cf p. 4, 3, and note ; also p. 84, 15. — BiapavTcs : past to both \αβ6ρτ€^ and ηκ€ΐρ. §13. 5. Tois vcavto-Kois ^YXciv {sc. oIpop), to pour wine for the young men.-Q. ^k^Xcvc : sc. ro^s rrapoprat : cf p. 86, 12.-όν€ίρατα (see § 8) : the plural seems to indicate the several points of the dream. —7. καΧ τά Xotird αγαθά, also the other blessings (not portended in the dream).— 8. IviTtKia-ai : depending on βιΧχεσ^αι. See Introd. § 291. § 14. 13. διτωβ αν . . . ΐΓάσχοΐ€ν : obj. clauses after 4βου\€ύοντο, in which the best Attic usage allowed only the simple ihrws, generally with the fut. indie, or opt. The meaning is, th^y took counsel {i.e. planned) to cross in the best way, etc. For Xenophon's still greater violation of Attic usage by using ω$ in these and in linal clauses, see note on p. 2, 9, and the references. § 15. 18. iv μ^σφ τούτων, i.e. between the two divisions : see Introd. § 392. § 17. 23. άντίΊταρήο-αν, went along opposite to them, i.e. the enemy on the other bank. —24. κατά . . . δχθα?, at the ford and where the {oppo- site) high banks were {cf §11). — 26. στ€φαν«σάμ€νο«, putting on a wreath, probably one made on the spot. It was one of the institutions of Lycurgus that the Spartans should go hito battle wearing wreaths (see Plutarch^s Lycurg. 22). -26. airoS^s, throwing off (probably) his outer garment : IkSvvtcs (in 1), acc. to Rehdanlz, means stripping themselves entirely.— 27. ΐΓαρήγγ€λλ€, gave the word {sc. άττοδυσι Χαμβάν^ιν τά βχλο). —28. opOiovs : see p. 121, 29, and the note. Page 128.] § 18. 2. els r6v ττοταμόν, i.e. so that the blood ran into the river. For the ceremonies etc. preceding the passage of the river, see Introd. §29^ and §43 2. § 19. 5. άνηλάλαζον, raised the war-cry, properly shouted alala : the 6\o\vy^ was a loud cry or chant, generally a joyous one raised by women in invoking the Gods. § 2a 10. lirl rbv iropov : i.e. the regular ford ; see § 3 and § 5. — 11. ίκβασ-ιν, passage out (from the river). —12. ιτροιηΓΟίούμίνος, feigning : he " made a feint of hastening back to the original ford, as if he were about to attempt a passage there. This attracted the attention of the enemy's horse [on the opposite bank], who became afraid of being attacked on both sides, galloped off to guard the passage at the other point, and opposed no serious resistance to Chirisophus. " Grote. — 8ιαβάβ : belongs to omitted subj. of avokXeiffeiv, 258 ANABASIS IV. 3. 21-2a ANABASIS IV. 3. 28 and 4. 4. 259 f I ^Page 128.] δ 21. 13. ol •πολέμιοι : i.e. the cavalry mentioned in § 17. 17. ωβ . . . «κβαο-ιν, i.e. hmtening to the road which led up from the river: ίκβα<ην, as a verbal noun, takes i^ and the gen. as if it were ίκβαί.. Cf κατά ri). ^κβααι. in 11, iκβaί.u. in p. 125, 15, and iξiβa..e. m 25 (below). — 18. Ituvov, thet/ pushed on. § ^ 19. imr^^v: see Introd. § 30. -20. τηΧταιττων: see Introd. § 30 and §4.,i.-21. φ€νγοντιΐ5 : see 10 and 17.-22. «ττρατιΔται : the main body of the soldiers who were crossing with Chirisophus. - |βό«ν μή άΐΓθλ€£,Γ€<Γθα*, called out (protesting) that they should not be left behind but should follow, in the pursuit. - ^ν,κβα^.ν i^X rh Spos, i.e. shouli follow the road leading up from the river {rijp ^κβασ^^, 11) with Lucius and Aeschines. $ 23. 23. αί, on the contrary, as Ch. declined to follow the retreatin- cavalry, but took a more direct eoui-se to attack the enemy on the heicdits'' --24 κατά . . . ,Γοταμόν, by (over) the bluffs which reached to the river (§11 : see G 909,• H. 067 a. -27. ό,τλίτα, : the troops of Chirisophus who had not followed the retreating cavalry, the στρατί&ται of 22. «s ΓίΤ^^Λ^ι^ "-^ / ^ ^' ^"^^^^ •• ^^'^ «''^™e movement mentioned in η z\) and 21. —4. KarapaCvovrcs : with φαΡ€ροΙ ή(ταρ (G. 1589 ; Η. 981) ! S* ί' ''^\"'«^^P«'' ("«^^«^•). «Λβ baggage train (of the enemy). ' S Λλ 9. άκμην Si^poivi, were just (at the point of) crossing: with the adverbial accus. άκμήρ, just at the point, cf riXos in p. 40, 25, and the common use of άρχΡ, at frst. _ 10. άντία . . . $9.ro, formed his line factngthem: cf note on p. 25, 24.-11. κατ Ινωμοτία,, by enomoties, i.e. with the four 4^μοτΙαι arranged in line, probably in eight ranks (Introd. § 32 2). The troops had formed in λόχο. όρθαπ, company columns In rod. δ 36): see p. 127, 28. They are now brought into line of battle iijl φάλαγτοή by moving ταμ' άατίδα, to the left, lit. by the shield. For the process see Introd. 5 30^ and § 33. ^13. ιταραγαγάντα, : might have been dative with λοχαγό» in 11 (G. 928, 1). - 14. Tois ^v . . . τον ποτα- μοί, {he ordered) the captains and enomotarchs to {go to) face the Car duchians and to let the rear-leaders stand (in the rear) next the river The oopayol were thus ready to become the leaders of the companies when the order came to "right about face" (see §§ 29 and 32).— 15. Uvat: sc. xap^yeiXe, which may have either the dative (11) or the a^cus. as here (see p. 57, 6). - καταστήο-α^τθα., transitive, to cause to stand or to station (see Diet.). δ 27. 18. τοδ «χλου ψιλονμίνοιιι, Ιφ by the crowd {of camp-followers, etc.) : see 8 and 9 (above). δ 2a 23. Ιδών . . . 8ιαΡαίνοντα$, when X saw them {on the point of) crossing (to aid him). -25. a^(, (they) themselves, i.e. Xenophon and Paee 129.1 his men. - Ivavrtovs : i.e. to meet them.-.v^^v "^L Λ ;iL on both siMs of them. - 27. δ.ηγκυλ«μ4vovs, wUh hxind on the tkor^ ilJxv). - imPtpXn^^vovs (middle), ivith arrow on the string {sc. ri ToLja i.l raU .evpals): cf V. 2. 12, ^.φeβ^v8 ΐΓρόσω τον ^οταμον, far into the river (partitive gen.) "page 130.1 § 29. 2. ψοφη, ring with the thump of the fon^B.- .a JuravTas : cf 15 below. -5. ,τημήν, T^ -ολ^μ«6ν, signaXthe charge (to deceive the enemy). See § 32. - άνασ^Μψαντα? ΙιΛ h6pv, facing about to Vie right, belongs to the subjects of both vyelaea. and «««« «"•«3'• ^ ^f*^" $ 35». -2. «8U,» &ira», over entirely level country (G. 1057) : so t'jX**•"' "'i'2.'-^5.'.t; ψ k1„v, for ή «ώ., «•. ί. (G. 1037, end; Η. 995α). -7. τΰρσ.ι$ : cf. Lat. turris, Eng. lurret, tower. Tz. 9. ί«ρ*|λβ.ν τα. ^,4,, κτλ. : here they «^"f * *«^ '"°" range which is the watershed between the Tigris and the Euphrates ; the Teleboas (generally supposed to be the present Karasu) flows mto he FuDhrates " After the river Teleboas, there seems no one point in the march which ean be identified with anything ^PP™'""''"? *" ^^^f*""*!• Nor have we any means even of determining the general line of route, irt llom speciifc places, which they followed from the river Teleboas to Trebizond." Grote. . , ,i ηλ,.* /wv>./oni 5 4. 14. •Αρμ-»ί. 4| irpis ««^ip•'. ^"»^'" «» ^'^ West (We^ had no stirrups. 260 ANABASIS IV. 4. 5-15. ANABASIS IV. 4. 15 and 5. 4 261 mt Page 131.] ξ 5, 21. cts Ιττήκοον : see p. 99, 17. §6. 22. If ^ : expressing condition (G. 1460; H. 999a) -u«Tf "l^l Τ '*'*''; ■ • "' ^^ P• ^' ^^' ^^^ correlatives are re . *. Ve ... Tc, the first two clauses being negative, the third positive. -24 8.^-^- see .„.„,...„ p" 5 ft 9. Up.t«, ca«ie/«• ,ia«flrAter (orig. for sacrifice, here /„r food) - φ.»^«.τ. : m direct discourse, .«rrijo^, and φα^ί. *' ti.* ^, " σ««γ«γ.ί, : subj. of WaXi, rfm. (without oiA i e thev Tf'V*'^.;'^^^ required «e,» ίο co«eci tAe a„„^ „,„,„_ 15 <^Z Wepcajuv, i< seemed σον, about. f 11. C. Ι8ννή0η<Γαν, were {still) aJtle-bodied : see τά μ^ι δυνάμ^ικι in 12. 5 12. 14. 8ι<φ0αρμ4νοι . . . rovt όφβαλμο^, wUh their eyes blinded by the snow ; the ace. is retained from the (possible) active constr. διαφθ€ΐρ€ΐν Todf δφ$ΛΚμοΰ% oi^raif, to Mind their eyes for them (G. 1239) : τονβ 8ακτύλονι ANABASIS IV. 5. 12-19. 263 Page 136.] is in the same construction after άτΓοσ€σψΓδτ€$, which is passive in sense, having lost their toes by mortification. Cf note on >jn Oft § 13. 16. Tois όφθαλμοϊς Ιιτικούρημα τήβ XwSvos, help (or protection) to the eyes against the sn'}w : χώρο^ is objective genitive, as we might say iTiKovpeiP Tivi χώνα, like ef τψ χειμώνα έΐΓ€κούρησα, if I ever protected any one against the winter, Anab. v. 8. 25. Cf Lat. alicui defendere frigus. So we can say φάρμακορ νόσου, a medicine for a disease, and also φάρμακον ύγίβία?, a medicine to cause health. On the other hand, των τοδων {sc. έπικούρημα) in 18 gives the more common use of the objective genitive, help to the feet. -IS. Iiropcicro (G. 1305; H. 804 c) : there is good authority for the more regular rropeuoiTo (like the following κινοΐτο, ίχοι, and ύίΓολιίοιτο). — 10. «Is τήν νύκτα νιτολύοιτο, t)ok off his shoes for the night; opposed to {ηΓοδ€δ€μένοι έκοψώντο (20), slept wUh their shoes on: δέω and λύω refer to tying and untying the leather straps {ιμάντ€$). § 14. 20. δο-οι : the antecedent would be a genitive dependent on iro5as. — 21. ιτιρ^ιτήγνυντο, froze on (their feet).— 22. ^irav . . . καρβά- τνναι, {their shoes) were brogues : Hesychius calls them aypoiKiKbv ύτόδημα μοΜ€ρμον. —2fi. ν€θδάρτων (i^^s and δ^ρω). — βοών, ox-hides : cf έλέφα^, both elephant and ivory. § 15. 20. 4icXcXoiir^ai, was wanting.— 27. άτμι(|ουσ•α Iv νάιτη, steam- ing in a dell. — 2S. ούκ €φαο•αν ΐΓορ€ύ€<Γθαι, i.e. said they were going wo further; see note on p. 11, 10. We learn from Anab. v. 8. 8-12, that Xenophon flogged a mule-driver at this time for attempting to bury alive a sick soldier whom he had been ordered to carry. The man afterwards complained of his flogging; but when the facts were known, the army cried out that he had received less than he deserved. See Introd. § 28 «. Page 137.] § 16. 1. οιτισ-θοφύλακα? (without τούή, some of the rear- guard. —2. irdoTi τέχνχι καΐ μ-ηχανη, by every art and device. —4. TfXcvrwv, finally.— σ^&τηιν : sc. τινά (as subj.), i.e. Xenophon or anybody else.— 5. 8vva(rd(u αν : sc. ίφασαν. § 17. 7. ct Tis δνναιτο, if they {one) could: cf. ef tis μ^ λυποΐη, p. 61, 14.— 9. άμφΐ . . . διαφ«ρόμ€νοι, quarrelling about what they had, i.e. their booty. § 18. 11. o«rov Ιδύναντο ι^γκττον, i.e. as loud as they could (G. 1054; Π. 716 6).— 13. ηκαν cavrovs, threw themselves: they rushed down into the dell over the snow-banks. — 14. ούδ«ν5 . . . Ιφθ^γξατο, i.e. not a sound Λ was heard from them afterwards. §19. 17. Iv axnovSf i.e. to get them. — 19. 4γκ€καλυμμίνοΐ5, wrapped up, —20. φνλακή ονδ€μ(α: this implies that sentinels were generally posted; see in 26, φυΚακ^$ καταστησάμενοι. —avUrrwraVf tried to make II liMiiiiiiaiiMii 264 ANABASIS IV. 5. 1&-27. Page 137.] them get up. — 21. Sn . , . νιτοχωροίιν, that those be/ore them (on the road) did not make way for them. δ 2a 24. όλον rh <Γτράτ€νμα, i.e. what seemed to be the whole army ; but Chirisophus with the van was already quartered m the village (S§ 9-11). — ovTws, i.e. like those in § 19. $ 21. 29. 4να<Γτή<Γαντα$, rousing (them), agreemg with the omitted SUbj. of άνα-γκάζ€ΐν. Page 138.] §22. 1. τών Ικ τ% κώμη$ (G. 1091; 1097; Η. 730); see note on p. 2, G. —2. σ-κ€ψομ4νον$ agrees with nvas implied with των. — 4. κομίξιιν : infin. of purpose. $23. 10. Toips Ιαντών: the troops were organized in τάξ^ι$ (Introd. δ 302), each under its own commanders. 5 24. 15. ir^Xovs: cf. Lat. pullus; Eng. /oa/. — ίΐΓΓακα{δ€κα : this number seems too small (see § 35), but correcting numerals by conjecture is unsatisfactory. — 16. Ινάτην ήμέραν, eight days before (G. 1063 ; II. 721). δ 25. 19. κατάγ€ΐοι, underground: Mr. H. F. Tozer {Turkish Armenia, p. 390), thus describes one of the modem dwellings in this region, made by burrowing into a mound or a sloping hill-eide. "After you have entered by a low door, you find a considerable area, divided up into a number of compartments. . . . These pens are almost entirely sUbles for cattle, but one inner compartment, which, fortunately for the occupants, has a small window in the roof, is devoted to human beings The low side-walls are formed of large stones piled together, and these support trunks of poplars laid at intervals, with numerous branches across and between them, while the whole is covered by a thick layer of clay which forms the roof." The '* window in the roof" is a relic of the ancient στ6μΛ, and now men and beasts both use the front door, —ri μ^ν «ττόμα «ariTfp ψρίατος {sc. 6v), i.e. the mouth (or entrance) being like that of a well, that is, narrow (opposed to €ύμ€Ϊαι) : στ6μα is in partitive apposition (G. 914 ; H. 624 d) with oUlai ; but in the clause with S4 the construction changes, and we have κάτω (below) «' eop^tai for τά δέ κάτω €ύρέα (sc. δντα). δ 2a 24. otvos icpteivos, fmrley-toine, i.e. beer.— 25. κρατήρσ-ιν, large bowls, like the Greek mixing-vessels. —26. ia-oxtuuts, floating on the top, lit. on a leml wUh the brim (xe*Xof). — κάλαμοι, straws, without joints {y6mTa): with y6w cf Lat. genu, Eng. knee. δ 27. 28. ^Sf i μΰί€ΐν, he had to suck : USet has here none of its common potential force (G. 1400 ; H. 897), but is merely a past tense of δ^ΐ. The straw was necessary to avoid the floating barley. Page 139.] 1. &κρατο«, str(mg, lit. unmixed (a priv. and κ^ράννυμι), —2. ιηιμμαΟόνη, to one used to U (G. 1172, 2; H. 771 6). ANABASIS IV. 5. 28 and δ. 1. 265 Page 139.] δ 28. 5. οδτι στ«ρήσ•οιτο . . . dirCoo-tv : the direct dis- course would be otre στ€ρήσ€ΐ . , . τήν rt οΐκίαν σου an-eMTrXVarres . . . ϋιτιμ^ν. στ€ρήσοιτο is middle, with passive meanmg. — 6. άντ€μΐΓλήσ-αντ€$, filling in recompense (for information). — ην αγαθόν τι . . . φαίνηται, if he should appear to have given them good guidance (G. 1054 ; H. 716 b). — 8. €as «?χ€το (G. 1587). -11. άμΑιια, neglect, i.e. in letting the guide escape. — 12. Ιχρήτο : cf. note on p. 70, 7. 5 4. 14. Φββ-ιν : the famous Colchian river Phasis, for which the Greeks probably mistook this stream, flows into the Euxine from the East. This was probably the upper part of the A raxes, flowing into the Caspian. 5 5. 16. iirl ΤΉ . . . νιηρβολη, on the pass leading over to the plain • cf. note on p. 133, 20. «6. 20. tcard xlpat &γων, leading (his men) in colujnn (partic. of manner). See Introd. § 35». —21. ιτοράγβιν, to lead along, to bring into hne of battle {iwl *τοΰ κινδύνου : the penalty of embezzlement might be death : δεινού, formidable, refers back to δεινού, in 13. — καΐ μέντοι, and in truth. — Vo. ύμϊν άρχιιν, to be your rulers (lit. to rule for you), distinct from ύμωρ άρχειν, to rule over you. § 17. 21. κλωιτών : referring to the preceding jokes on κλοπή. — τούτω J καΐ ιπινθάνομαι, I learn from them also, i.e. besides other things. —22. ν4μ€ται αΐξΐ κα\ βουσίν, it is grazed by goats and cattle (instrum. dat )• this corresponds to an act. constr. νέμαυσι rb 6pos a^i, the herdsmen (ol v^/xovres) being the subj. Cf Verg. Aen. xi. 319: exercent colles, |i i 1 tVv< I 268 ANABASIS IV. 6. 17 and 7. 5. Page 143.] atque horam asperrima pascuni. See Cyr. iii 2 20 — ΓΐΚο ind 2^. ''"''^"^* ^'^^''' ^""^ """ '''''' ^"^ ^""'^ and"d^a*r«, 518. 24. ΙλΐΓί{« μ*ν«ΐν; see note on p. 142, 7.-26. h τψ 6uoC«. on a level with them, with an allusion to the obvious meaning onapa/with mem. — Z7. ημίν . . . t«rov, to the same level with us. J ivi!\\^' ^*^^ ^^ '' ''^''''^ ^^^ "P^"^ ^^ ^^^"^ ^^^^^ connectives.- Fage 144.] § 20. 4. σΰνΟημα Ιιτοιήο-αντο κά«ν : (/. ^u,n^/^e,^at 0u- Χάττα, . . . συμβοηθήσ€ΐν, p. 120, 3-7. § ^. 6. Ik τον άρίο-τον, a/.-24. &UoT. ή . . . ^apUva., is there anything to prevent us from passing by? literally, is anything else {the ANABASIS IV. 7. 5-16. 269 Page 145.] case) than {this, that) nothing prevents, etc. ? (G. 1604 ; H. 10156) : άλλο τι (without ν) is the more common form ; see p. 69, 26.— 25. cl μή, nisi, except {sc. όρώμ€ν). §a 27. TpCa ήμίΐΓλ£θρα: i.e. 150 feet. —28. Ραλλομ€νου8, under fire (of stones). Page 146.] 1. SiaXeiirov^ais, scattered. — av9' «v, behind which. —2. ^ψοψίνων, flying (through the air) : cf. φέρονται in 6, below. § 7. 7. •ΐΓθλλο( (pred.), in great numbers, —αυτό το δέον, the very thing we want. — S. IvOcv, {to the point) from which.— 9. μικρόν th i.e. the fifty feet called τό λοιπόν in 3. § 8. 13. ήγ€μον£α : the company which led the column was changed daily ; see Introd. § 40 1. — λοχαγών : appos. ; see p. 145, 12. Cf 19 : οπισθοφυλάκων λοχαγοί. §10. 23. βήματα: ace. of extent (or cognate ace.).— iircl «Η'ροιντο, lohenever the stones began to fly. —25. άμαξαι, (here) cart-loads. § 11. 27. μη ού Ίτρώτοβ ιταραΒράμη, i.e. that he might not get by first. Page 147.] § 12. 4. αΰτον τή$ KrvoSy the rim of his shield : frus is a poetic word. — 10. ήν^χθη : cf φέρονται, p. 146, 6. § 13. 11. Scivov : see Introd. § 282. _13. ώσαύτω5 : adverb of ό aOros. — 14. Στυμφάλιοδ : of Stymphalus in Arcadia, famous in the story of Hercules, —as μψοντα: oJs refers to τινά as the person whose intention is expressed. § 14. 10. φχοντο ψ€ρόμ€νοι : see G. 1587. §15. 21. ιί-αρασ-άγγαβ ΐΓ€ντήκοντα : see Introd. §41.-23. ΐΓΤ€ρνγων, flaps (generally of leather covered with metal) at the bottom of the θώραζ. — 24. σιτάρτα Ιστραμμίνα, plaited cords forming a fringe. § 16. 25. μαχαίριον, diminutive of μάχαιρα. — 26. έ•σ-ον ξυήλην, about as long as a Spartan dagger : ξυ-ήλην is accus. by a peculiar attraction, where we should expect ξυήλη {sc. εστί) : cf G. 1036. — 27. άΐΓθτίμνοντ€5 . . . 4ΐΓθρ€ΰοντο, i.e. they used to cut off their heads {i.e. ών κρατεΐν δύναιντο) and carry them along on their march: dv belongs (grammatically) to έτορεύ- ovTo (G. 1296 ; H. 835), but the iterative force of the whole sentence extends to αΐΓθτέμνονΤ€% ; we might have had άττέτεμνον &v καΐ έπορεύοντο. — 28. oirOTc . . . €μ€λλον, i.e. whenever they were to be seen by the enemy. Page 148.] 2. μίαν λόγχην Ιχον, i.e. with a sharp point at only one^ end : the Greek spears had also a point {στύραξ) at the butt, so as to stick* in the ground. \hxv is properly the metal point of a spear, but is often used for the whole weapon, δόρυ is the more common word for spear (as a whole), though this is properly the wooden shaft, δόρυ and SpOs being related to our word iree. — 3. ιτολίσμασιν : derived from τολί^ω, to build (prop, a city, ττόλι?) ; see G. 837 ; H. 553, 1. 11 270 ANABASIS IV. 7. 17-27. ANABASIS IV. 7. 27- and 8. U. 271 Page 148.] § 17. 4. μαχονμινοι (fiit.), ready to fight. —5. 4v τούτοιι makes the storing of provisions in the strongholds more prominent than the carrying them into these. Kruger {Spr. § 08, 12, A. 2) remarks that this use of iv is confined, in Attic Greek, to the perfect and pluperfect (whicli mark the action as completed) and to verbs like τίθημι, Cf. iv off . . . €ίχον άνακ€κομισμ^νοι in p. 145, 4. — 7. 8ΐ€τρ^ψησαν : a return to the independent sentence, as if tiVrc had not preceded : cf. {ητώττ€υορ in p. 122, 22. — Tois κτήν€σ•ιν & : the assimilation is here omitted. § la 8. "Apiroo-ov : the Greeks do not cross this river. —12. lirco-irC- σ-αντο : see In trod. § 42. § 19. 1(3. δνά . . . χώρα?, through the countnj of their ovm enemies : ιτοΜμιοί sometimes (as here) governs the genitive, chiefly (and originally), when it has the force of a substantive : cf irpos toi>s ίκείρου 4χθίστου^, p. 91, 18. See G. 1144, 1; H. 754 (/. — Ιαντών refers to the people of ό ϋρχων (the subject) : cf 20. — 17. twm &γοι : optative after an historic present. δ 20. 19. «I δ€ μή : cf note on p. 53, 7. — ΙιτηγγιΛοτο, agreed, offered, — 20. την Ιαντον ιτολιμίαν (sc. χώραν): cf note on 10. Page 149.] § 22. 4. Scurciwv . . . ώμοβόιια, covered with raio hides of shaggy oxen : βοών is gen. of material. § 23. 0. irktimv T€ καΐ Ιγγϋτιρον : adj. and adv. together with iylyvtro, the shout was becoming louder and getting nearer. — ol ad Imovrcs, those who successively came up ; so (7) τού? άιΐ βοώνταβ, those who successively raised the shxmt. — 9. |uC|s δ^κα : about ^54.00. See note on p. 33, 2. — το{^ δακτυ^ λίοιιι, their rings (chiefly seal rings). "Tlie free Greek, if not of the very poorest class, wore a ring, not only as an ornament, but as a signet to attest his signature, or for making secure his property." Becker»a Page 149.] Charicks. — 27. ov σ-κηνήσουσ-ι : rel. clause of purpose (G. 1442 ; H. 911). So ην iropcwovrai. These clauses are very rarely changed to the fut. opt. after past tenses. — 28. ώχ6το αιτιών : G. 1587. CHAPTER Vni. Page 150.] § 2. 5. ύττιρ δφών (neut.), over the right (on the right, above) : we have also iv 5c^t$ (sc. χ€φί), on the right; cf i^ aptarepas, on the left hand (in 5). See 5^|tos and aplarepos in Diet. — olov χαλ€ΐΓώ- τατον : like oJs (or δη) χαλ€ΤΓ ώτατον. — 0. 6 όρ(ξων, the frontier stream : cf Eng. horizon. — 7. tha διαβήναι, they had to pass. —UvSpivi. : more common than the reg. dat. 5ivdpois. — 9. Ικοιττον : Le. to clear the banks of the river so that the army could pass over. (See p. 151, 0.) §3. 13. €ls τον -ΐΓοταμόν cppiirrov: i.e. the stones all fell into the river ; see the following clause with yap. § 4. 10. δ€δουλ€υκίναι : distinguish δουλεύω, to be a slave, from δουλόω, to enslave (see G. 807 ; H. 572). —18. €l μή τι κωλύα, if there is nothing to hinder (a present supposition) : see the answer, ουδέν κωλύει, in 19. §5. 21. Ιρωτήσαντο5 (sc. αύτοΟ). — 22. άντιτ£τάχαται : Ionic perfect (G. 701 ; H. 404 a). §7. 28. €l δοϊ«ν αν (indir. question), whether they would give; they asked δοίητ€ &v; Page 151.] 4. irnrra ctvai : see Introd. § 292. § 8. 0. «nivcfcKoiTTov : i.e. helped the Greeks cut down the trees. — οδύν ώδοίΓοίουν (G. 540), they worked on the road, to help the Greeks reach the river. — διαβιβωντ€« : see G. 005, 2 ; H. 424. — 7. juVois Tots : see p. 0, 9, and note. §9. 12. φάλαγγα: i.e. they at first thought of attacking the height in line of battle. The arguments against this are given in §§ 10-13. — 14. βουλινσ-ασ-θαι <Γυλλ€γ€Ϊσιν, i.e. to come together and consult (G. 928, 1), as if it had been συλλ€7^ί'αι καΐ βουλεύσασθαι. § 10. 10. ΐΓαΰσαντα8 . . . ττοιήσ-αι, that they should give up the phalanx, and should form the companies in columns. — 18. διασ-ιτασθήσ-ιται, will be broken up {torn asunder) : i.e. the line will net be able to march all at the same pace (see next clause). — 18. τ^ μ^ν, τη Uj here, there. § 11. 21. M. ΊΓολλών, many {men) in depth, opposed to ir 6\ί^ων (in 24), few in depth. See Introd. δ 322, ^ith Fig. 2, in which the depth of the line is 8. With a depth of only 4, the line would be doubled- in length, but greatly weakened. On the other hand, the deeper and shorter line could be more easily outflanked. In 21, ττοΧΚων is a conjectural emendation for voWoH, which it is hard to explain, especially with iv ml ί Δ ANABASIS IV. 8. 11-21. ANABASIS IV. 8. 21-26. 273 Page 151.] ό\ίyωv (24) following.— 22. irfpirrcvcroiMriv ημών, will outflank m (G. 1120). — 23. rois ΐΓ«ριττοί?, i.e. those by whom they will outflank us. — χρήσ-ονται . . . βούλωνται, Le. we shall be at their mercy. —24. oiScv άν €Ϊη has two prota.ses, both future, but of different forms : see j\foods and Tenses, § 510. —20. ά.9μ6<ον, in a mass: predicate with έμττ€σ6ντων. Page 152.] § 12. 1. τοσοντον . . . λόχοι$, to cover 8ΐιβ€ί6ηί ground with the companies by leaving spaces between them. — τοσ-οΰτον όσον, so much as, suβc^ent, takes the infinitive as an adjective (Moods and Tenses, § 759) : the idea is, to cover ground enough to have the outer companies get beyond the enemy's wings. See note on άρθίοι$ rots λόχο*?, in p. 121, 20. — 6. ol Kp&rurroi ημών, i.e. the fjest of our captains (sc. \oxayol). — ιτράτον: for πρώτοι, which is perliaps necessary here ; see p. 1;>], 7. § 13. 7. τλ βιαλ€ΐΐΓον, the interval between tlie columns : cf. τό διέχορ, p. 107, 1. — 12. ούδ€ΐβ μηκ^τι μ€ίνη, not a 77ian will stand his ground for a moment (G. l.i«0 ; II. lu:32) ; the compounds of ού and μή (as here) can be used in these emphatic future expressions. $14* 10. ΙμίΓοδών TO μη clvai, in the way of our being (G. 1551, cf. 1549 ; H. 901a). — 18. ώμονι καταφαγιίν, devour (them) raw, a common expression, rather stronger than our cut them in pieces or gobble them up: l/. II. iv. ;]5, ωμόν β€βρώθοι^ Ιϊρίαμα» ίίριάμοώ re τταΓδα? AWovs re Τρώα$. δ 15. 22. its TOWS Ικ•τόν : 100 was the full number of a company (λόχοή. See Introd. § 32 2. The 80 companies make 8000 hoplites. For these compared with the original numbers, see Introd. §232._24. τον δ^ιοδ : ac. Ιίξω. See Introd. § 43 1. § 16. 20. €νξάμ€νοί καΐ iraiavCo-avrcs : see Introd. f 43 2. Page 153.] 1. Ιξω γ€ν<&μ€νοι: i.e. with a view to outflanking the enemy. § 17. 2. άντιΐΓορα$ίοντ€5, i.e. hastening along (their own line), to con- front the Greeks and so save themselves from being outflanked, by extending their line. —4. Kfv<$v, empty, i.e. without men enough. § la 5. κατά rh Άρκαδικόν, i.e. belonging to the Arcadian division. — — 6. ψ€νγ€ΐν : sc. roi>s το\€μΙου^. § 19. 9. us ήρ|οντο Bttv : see β. §2a 14. tA μιν &λλα, in other matters, opposed to τά δ^ σμήνη (= εσμοί), swarms of bees. — έΟαύμασ-αν, found strange, is emphasized by jccti, which has no exact English equivalent. — 17. κάτω Suxwpci avTois, le. they had a diarrhoea: δΐ€χώρ€ΐ is impersonal. —20. άττοβνησ-κουσ-ιν • in same construction as μ^θύονσιν and μαινόμενοι^. $21. 21. &ηηρτροιτ% γ€γ€νημίνη8, as if they had suffered a defeat (eee note on p. 15, 14), referring to the disheartened condition of a defeated army. —23. irios makes r^v ιι^τήκ less definite. -άνιφρονουν, Page 153.] began to come to their senses. — 24. άνίσταντο : opposed to ^Kci ντο (20). — φορμακοποσίαδ {φάρμακον, drug, and vlvu), drink), being drugged. The idea is, the men recovered from the effects of eating the honey, as they would have done from the effects of drugging or poisoning. " Most modern traveller attest the existence, in these regions, of honey intoxicating and poisonous, such as Xenophon describes. They point out the Azalea Pontica as the flower from which the bees imbibe this peculiar quality. Professor Koch, however, states that after careful inquiries he could find no trace of any such." Grote. § 22. 20. ΤραΐΓ6ζοΰντα : the modem Trebizond on the Black Sea. Page 154.] 1. Σινωιτίων, the people of Sinope, a Greek city on the coast of Taphlagonia. § 24. 6. στ)νδΐ€ΐΓράττοντο (sc. rots "ΈΧΚησιν), they negotiated with the Greeks. — 7. ύττέρ, in behalf o/. — 8. ξίνια : see G. 916; H. 726; and cf. I^wa (accus.) In 5. § 25. 10. ην cv|avTO : see iii. 2. 0. — 11. Ικανοί άττοθΰσ-αι : cf. Ικανώ- repa φέρ€ΐν, 85, 24. —12. ΔιΙ τ<ο σωτήρι (see Diet. s.v. ZeiJs) : we should expect σωττ^ρία, thank offerings for safe deliverance, after σωτηρι; this is found in iii. 2. 9. — ήγ€μο'συνο (found only here), thank offerings for safe guidance, made to Ήρακλψ 'Άy€μώv ; the wanderings of Hercules were believed to give him special sympathy with wanderers. — 15. €φυγ€ oCkoOcv, ivas banished from home. — 10. άκων (Hom. άέκων, from a- and €κών), accidentally. The Greeks looked upon a person who had caused the death of another, even by accident, as a polluted person, and he was obliged to leave the country, at least for a time. The law of Athens — a relic of the Draconic legislation, usually famous for its severity — pro- vided that a person who had committed involuntary homicide should leave the country within an appointed time and by a prescribed road, and should remain in exile until he should become reconciled with the family of the person whom he had killed; but the law protected him in his departure and during his absence, so far as it could, and his property was not confiscated like that of persons condemned to perpetual banish- ment. Even inanimate objects which had caused the death of a person through no human agency, or when the agent was unknown, were, according to the Draconic law, solemnly tried before the court at the Prytaneum, and on conviction formally cast out of the country as pol- luted. — 17. €ΐΓΐμ€ληθήναι, ιτροστατήσ-αι : infinitives of purpose after dXovTo (14). § 26. 18. τά δέρματα, the hides of the victims (§ 25), which were to be offered as prizes in the games. — 19. οιτου . . . €Ϊη : the direct words of the command would have been δπου πενοίηκας. — δρόμον, race-course : 1%. U 274 ANABASIS IV. 8. 26-2a Page 154.] cf. Ιττ6δρομβ$, hippodrome. ^21. τρ^ιιν, for running.-^ Sirnv &v Tis βούλητ<Η, wherecer any me shall please: the future apod, is found in τρ^χ€α'.—23. οϋτωβ, like this: placed emphatically after the adjectives which it qualities. —Μαλλόν rt άνιάιηται, will hurt himself rather more, and so they will try harder to keep on their feet; as if this were a recommendation of the spot for a race-course. § 27. 25. στά8ιον : cognate accus. with 'ήyωpίξ^oyτo ; like δ6\ιχον with r^coi', and ττάλην etc. with 'ifyωpί^ovτo understood (G. 1052; H. 715 6).— τών αιχμαλώτων ol irXfiirroi, the greater part (being) of the number of the captives, appos. to irotScs. — Βόλιχον (noun), the long race, variously esti- mated from 6 to 24 stadia in length, probably variable. The adj. δολιχόί (oxytone), long, appears in the Homeric δολιχάσκιον ^γχο?. The δόλιχο- Spofws ran several times round the ordinary στάδων: for the stadium, see note on p. 17, 2. —27. ιταγκράτιον, double (lit. complete) contest, one which combined both πάλη and πvyμή. There is a lacuna in the Mss. between TayKpdriov and καλή, and the words irepoi- καΐ usually inserted here have little or no authority. — 28. κατίβηο-αν, entered (the contest): cf Lat. descendere in certamen. Page 155.] § 28. 1..αΰτού«, i.e. the horses: object of ayeip, bring, — IX«l«ravTos and άναΐΓτρ4ψαντα5 agree with τού? iirWas understood, the subject of &y€iv. — 2. rhv βωμόν, the stand, probably a mound of turf, to mark the starting-place in the race. I t t According to Koch's chronology (see L. Dindorf s Oxford edition, p. xxxvii), the march of Cyrus from Sardis took place JVIarch 6, 401 b.c, the battle of Ciinaxa was fought September 3, the Greeks crossed the river Zapatas and began their retreat October 23, and the army arrived at Trapezus Febraary 8, 400 b.c. For a brief account of the further fortunes of the " Ten Thousand," see the Introduction, § 4. I march: of the τε:3τ τΗουβΑίϊΧ) grjeeks. 4 ILLUSTEATED DICTIONARY TO XENOPHON'S ANABASIS, WITH GB0UP8 OF WORDS ETYMOLOGICALLY RELATED. BY JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE, Ph.D. (Hakv.), Pbof£S80b op Obeek, AND MORRIS H. MORGAN-, Ph.D. (Harv.), Assistant Professor ot Oreek and Latin, IN Habyabd University. καΐ δ^ι καΐ τό vepl των ονομάτων ού σμικρόν Tvyxdvei ον μάθημα. Plat. Crat. 384 b. BOSTON, U.S.A. : PUBLISHED BY GINN & COMPANY. 1894. "β PREFACE. -•ο»- ΟοΡΤΒΙβΗΤ, 1891, By JOHii WILLIAMS WHITE and MORRIS Η MORGAN. All Riohts Ηββκβτβο ΤΤΡΟβΒΑΡΗΤ BT J. Θ. CUSBINO ft Co., ΒοβΤΟΗ, U.S.A. Pbisswobk BT GiNN & Co., Boston, U.S.A. This Dictionary has not been compiled from other vocabularies and lexicons, but has been made from the Anabasis itself, on \he basis of an independent collection and examination of all the places where each word occurs. The editors have aimed to give all words found in the principal editions of the Anabasis now in use, including Dindorf's fourth edition and Hug's recension of the Teubner text, as well as the editions of Kriiger, Vollbrecht, Rehdantz and Cobet, and Goodwin and White's edition of the first four books. In the definitions, they have intended to give all the meanings that each word has in the Anabasis, beginning, when possible, with the etymological meaning, and passing through the simpler varia- tions to the more remote. Each meaning or group of meanings is supported by at least one citation. The number of citations given, except in the case of conjunctions, particles, pronouns, and prepo- sitions, is determined by the importance of the word as shown by the frequency of its occurrence in the Anabasis. When a word is of common occurrence in all the books (as "Ελλην and €ρχθ' μχιί), this is indicated by a row of one or more citations from each book. But a few words, like κατακαίνω, though not common, are cited at length because their treatment in lexicons has been defective. Under each word the first passage in which it occurs is always cited. When but one citation is made for a word, that word is found only once in the Anabasis. In treating of the derivation of words, special attention has been given to their connexion with one another and with related words in Latin and Englisli. Because of the importance of this subject, etymological explanations have for the most part been removed from the body of the Dictionary, and added at the end in the form m iv l• ι of one hundred and twenty-four groups of related Greek, Latin, and English words. These groups include the greater number of the words in the Anabasis, presented in the natural order of their development from a common element. The groups are not complete for the entire language, since they contain in the main only words found in the Anabasis and selected Latin and English words. For a fuller treatment, Vanicek's Griechisch-Lateinisches Etymologisches Worterbuch may be consulted, as well as the books named on page 247. These groups should be specially and sepa- rately studied. Too little attention is given to the manner in which pupils acquire their Greek vocabulary. The result is often a confused half-knowledge of the meaning of words. The acquisi- tion of a vocabulary becomes both easy and interesting, if the method is used which recognizee the great advantage of grouping words that are related. At the end of many articles are placed phrases or idioms of special difficulty or interest in which the given word appears. In selecting English equivalents for these phrases, as for the words themselves, the editors have been governed by a desire to keep the Greek ideas alive, and to avoid that strange dialect which seems to have been devised by the Adversary for the express use of schools, and which has done much to make Greek (and Latin also) a dead language indeed. Further, at the suggestion of a well-known teacher, Latin equivalents have been given for many Greek words and phrases, in the hope of encouraging the comparor live study of the two languages in schools. Latin words, unless included within square brackets, are of course not necessarily ety- mological equivalents. Simple constructions that follow a given verb, such as the * direct * or * indirect object,* are not indicated unless some other construction also is found in the Anabasis with this verb. When more than one construction is found, at least one citation is given for each. It may be thought that some articles are swelled beyond their due limits by the statement of constructions at length, but the editors have preferred to risk this criticism rather than to be too brief. They believe, too, that the fulness with which such words are treated will be found of real assistance by many teach- ers, especially by those who teach Greek composition by means of exercises based on the Anabasis. Among the * principal parts ' of verbs, only those tenses have been admitted of which forms are actually found in Attic prose or poetry before Aristotle. To ascertain the facts has been a task of no little difficulty, since, except for the ' irregular verbs,' the present attempt has not before been made in a Greek dictionary. Veitch's well-known work has been of great assistance, and so have various indexes to the most important authors. But there must still be many Attic forms not yet catalogued. No tense, however, is here .riven which is not represented by a form in some Attic author. *' Under geographical words, the modern name, when it differs from the ancient, is generally added in parenthesis (see e.^. *Αλυς). As many of these names are Turkish, the following vocabulaiy may be of service. It is taken from Dr. Sterrett's preface to his Epigraphical Journey in Asia Minor, in Vol. II. of the Papers of the American School of Classical Studies at Athens. Ak, white. Boyuk, large. Dagh, mountain. Hissar, castle. Irmak, large river. Kara, black. Kieui, village. Kilisse, church. Kizil, red. 8u, water, large river. Tchai, small river. The Greek vowels a, i, and υ, when long, and all long vowels in Latin words, are marked with the usual sign wherever they occur in the Dictionary. The same mark is placed on the penult of English transliterations of Greek and Latin proper substantives and adjectives in all cases where the pupil is in danger of giving the English word the wrong accent. The editors hope that the illustrations and the articles on man- ners and customs, on military organization and equipment, and on other topics relating to the objective side of old Greek life, may help to arouse the pupil's interest as he reads Xenophon's graphic account of the achievements of the Ten Thousand. As works of art, some of the illustrations leave much to be desired, but they may nevertheless serve to make Xenophon's narrative seem more real to the youthful reader. The sources of the illustrations are stated on page 243 fF. The publication of this book discharges an obligation which Mr. White rashly assumed many years ago. He would not be able VI to meet it now if his colleague, Mr. Morgan, had not come to his aid. Mr. White begs to acknowledge his obligations for assist- ance when the book was in the early stages of making, to Gardiner M. Lane, Esq., of Cambridge, to Dr. F. B. Goddard, of Columbia College, and to Professor F. L. Van Cleef, of the University of Wisconsin. Both editors would acknowledge their more recent indebtedness for valuable help to Mr. Charles B. Gulick and to Miss Lucy A. Paton. Cambeiimik, Dec. 1, 1891. DIRECTIONS AND EXPLANATIONS. -iO•- WiiEN a verb is 'regular ' and all the six * principal parts* are found in Attic Greek, only the present and future tenses are given, followed by etc. The parts of * irregular verbs ' art) given in full, so far as they occur in the authors, as well as all the existing parts of those ' regular ' verbs of which some parts are not found in Attic. The theme is inserted among the 'principal parts,' just after the present tense, unless the verb is of the First or Variable-vowel class. A hyphen prefixed to a tense signifies that the tense occurs only in compounds. The parts of a compound verb are not given if the simple verb occurs in its proper place in this Dictionary. The form of the genitive is given for substantives of the A- declension, the gender is indicated in the 0-declension, and both genitive and gender are given in the Consonant-declension. The derivation of the word is indicated in square brackets just before the definition. When the root or word given in these brackets is in heavy-face letter, refer to the Groups of Related Words alphabetically arranged (p. 247 ff.). If a word is given in light-face type in these brackets, without further statement, refer to that word in its proper alphabetical place in the body of the Dictionary. If no square brackets occur, the derivation of the word is unknown or its etymological connexion is doubtful. Eng- lish cognate words are printed in small capitals, English borrowed words in heavy-face letter. (See p. 247.) For information in regard to the illustrations, see p. 243 ft. The following Abbreviations are used : — abs. = absolute, absolutely, ace. = accusative, ace. to = accoi-ding to. act. = active, actively. adj. = adjective, adjectively. adv. = adverb, adverbial, adverbi- ally, antec. = antecedent, aor. = aorist. apod. = apodosis. ¥il VIU appos. = apposition, appositive, art. = article. attrib. = attributive. c/. = confer y compare. comp. = corapanitive. cond. = condition, conditional. conj. = conjunction. contr. = contraction, contracted. dat. = dative. def . = definite. dera. = demonstrative. dep. = deponent. dim. = diminutive. dir. = direct. disc. = discourse. Dor. = Doric. edit. = edition, editor. editt. = editions, editors, e.g. = for example. end. = enclitic. Eng. = English. esp. = especial, especially. «οκόμό$, a (Dor. gen.), Abro- comas, satrap of Phoenicia and Syria, and commander of one- fourth of the king's army, 300,000 men, i. 7. 12. From cowardice or treachery he abandoned the Cili- cian Pass at the approach of Cy- rus, i. 4. 5, though he afterwards burned the boats used for crossing the Euphrates in order to impede his advance, i. 4. 18, cf. i. 3. 20. At Issi his Greek mercenaries, 400 in number, deserted to Cyrus, i. 4. 3. He did not reach Cunaxa until five days after the battle, i. 7. 12. "Αβνδος, η, Abydus, a city of Troas, mentioned by Homer, but later colonized by the Milesiaijs, on the Asiatic side of the Helles- pont at the point where the strait is narrowest, i. i . 9. It was here that Xerxes built his famous bridge, and from here Leander swam the Hellespont to Hero in Sestus. άΎαΎ€Ϊν, άγάγη, άγαγών, see άγω. ά-γαθός, ij, bv, good, in the broad- est sense, as opposed to κακόϊ. Hence, of persons, good (^in war), brave, valiant, i. 9. 14, iii. 2. 3, v. 8. 25, upright, virtuous, i. 9. 30 ;^ of things, serviceable, useful, profita- ble, excellent, ii. i. 12, iv. 4. 9, favourable, advantageous, iii. i. 38, V. 7. 10, fertile (of land), ii. 4. 22, auspicious (of a dream), iii. i. 12. As subst., ayadop, τό ά7α^ύΐ', good, good thing, benefit, service, resource, advantage, blessing, ii. 5,- 8, iii. I. 45, vi. i. 20, vii. 7.52; in the plur., good things, blessings, means of living, advantages, wealth, products, iii. i. 20, 22, 2. 11, iv. 6. 27, V. 6. 4, vi. 6. 1, vii. 6. 32. Phrases : ayadou τι woieiv τίνα, do one some service, i. 9. 11, v. 7. 10 ; ayadov tl βον\€ύ€σθαι, take good counsel, iii. I. 34 ; ay aBbv τι i^vyei- σθαι, give good guidance, iv. 5. 28 ; ά7α^ά ττάσχαν, receive benefits, vii. 3. 20 ; Ka\6s καΐ άγα^ό?, καλοί K&ya- Θ6ί, noble and good, possessing the virtues of a noble man, 'gentle- man,' ii. 6. 19, 20; έττ' ayaeoCζω (άθροιδ-), αθροίσω, etc. [d^poos], press close together, col- lect, as troops, Lat. cogd, i. i. 0, 10. 5 ; mid., muster, intrans., i. i. 2, 9. 7, vi. 3. 4. άθρ<^ο$» Sl, OP [ά- copulative and ^poos, noise, older form αθρόοι], in a noisy crowd, close together, in a body, all together, of living men, dead bodies, and villages, i. 10. 13, iv. 6. 13, 7. 8, vi. 5. 6, vii. 3. 9, 41 ; strengthened by ttoXi/s, in a mass, used of men and missiles, iv. 8. 11. aOvfUo», άθυμ-ήσω [R. 1 θυ], be άθυμαί, be despondent, lose cour- age, be disheartened, iii. 2. 18, 4. 20, 5. 3, V. 4. 19, vi. 2. 14, 6. 36, vii. I. 9. άθύμητίθ5, a, op, verbal [R. 1 0v], must lose courage, iii. 2. 23. άθνμία, OS [R. 1 Ov], faintheart- edness, discouragement, dejection, despondency, iii. 2. 8, 3. 11, iv. 3. 7, 8. 10, 21. αΟνμ^, ov [R. 1 θν], without heart or courage, dispirited, de- pressed, fainthearted, I 4. 9, iii. i. 30, vii. 8. 16. άθύμ»$, adv. [R. 1 θυ], faint- heartedly, dejectedly, ill i. 40; άθύ- PMs ixeip, be disheartened or de- spondent, iii. I. 3, vi. 4. 26. al, at, see 0, ds. αΙγιαλός, ό, seashore, beach, vi. 4. 1, 4, 7. AtYvimos, a, op [Afyvirjos], Egyptian, ii. i. 6. As subst., Al- yoxTios, 6, an Egyptian, i. 4. 2, 8. 9, ii. 5. 13. Atvvirros, V, Egypt, the land of the Nile. For over a century before the time of the Anabasis Egypt had been under Persian rule, but had been liberated by Amyrtaeus in the time of Darius II., 414 b.c. The Persians attempted to subjugate the land again, and the Ten Thou- sand Greeks after the death of Cy- rus offered their assistance, but Egypt remained independent until 350 B.C. In 332 b.c it was sub- dued by Alexander the Great, ii. I. 14. αΙδ4ομαι, αΐδ^σομαι, ^δ€σάμηρ, ^δ€σμαί, -^δέσθηρ [αΐδέομαι], respect with fear, reverence, respect the memory of, revere, iii. 2. 4, 5. αΙδή|ΐων, ov, gen. ows, sup. αίδη- μονέστατο$ [αΐδ^μαι], respectful, modest, i. 9. 5. αΐδοΐον, TO, comm.pl. [αΐδ^ομαι], the private parts, Lat. pudenda, iv. 3. 12. αΙδώς, oCs, η [αΐδίομ,αι], respect, ii. 6. 19. alii, see dei. Α1ήτη$, ου, Aeetes, king of Pha- sis in Colchis, v. 6. 37, and not to be confused with the mythical ovraer of the golden fleece. But the king of Phasis doubtless claimed de- scent from the other. atBpCd, as [αϊθω], clear sky, iv. 4. 14. ate« [α10ω], set on fire, kindle, burn, iv. 7. 20 ; mid. intrans., be on fire, burn, vi. 3. 19. αΙκ(|α> (αίκιδ-), comm. dep., a/ic£- fo/tat, αίκιονμαι, etc. [Ιοικα], out- rage, torture, maltreat, mutilate, ii. 6. 29. Phrase : τά έσχατα αΐκι- σάμενο$, torturing most cruelly, ILslI. ultimis cruciatibus adficere, iii. i. 18. αίμα, ατο5, τό, blood, V. 8. 15. AMas or AlveCos, ov, Aeneas, a Stymphalian captain in the Greek array, iv. 7. 13. Alviiiv, avos, 6, an Aenianian. The Aenianians were an ancient Hellenic race and settled finally in the upper valley of the Spercheus in southwestern Thessaly. i. 2. 6, vi. I. 7. :|' t αΙξι aiyos, ό, ή, groai, Mi. 5. 9, iv. 5. 25, V. 3. 11. AIoXCs, ίδο5, ifj Aeolis, v. 6. 24, a district on tlie coast of northern Lyflia, between the rivers Hermiis and t'iucus, colonized by Aeolians. Tlie chief city was Cyme. In a wider sense the name included all the Aeolic colonies as far north as the Troad. alptT^os, ά, ov, verbal [αίρίω], mitftt be taken^ iv. 7. 3. alpcrds, ή, 6p [atpl«i>], that mmj be taken or chosen, chitsen ; oi alpe- Toiy the men chosen^ the deptitieH^ i. 3. 21. αίρίω (ίλ-), αίρήσω^ elKop^ ίρηκα, ίμημαι^ νρέθην [αίρ^οι], tak€y seize, capture^ of persons or things, i. 4. 8, 6. 2, V. 2. 0, 4. 20, vii. 3. 26 ; mid., take for oneself^ choose^ prefer^ electa side with, i. 3. 5, 7. 3, 4, 9. ί), ii. 6. 6, iii. 4. 42, iv. 8. 25, v. 6. 3, 7. 28, vi. 1 . 25, vii. 3. 5, 6. 15 ; correspond- ingly^ in the pass., be elected, chosen, iii. I. 46, 47, 2, 1, v. S. 1, vi. i. 32, 6. 22. Phrase : &n Αρχων ίρητο, ex οβϋίδ^ vi. 2. 6. ^ mtpm (ip-), δρω, ^po, ^p/ca, ήρμαι, Ίΐρθηρ, Att. for ά€ίρω {aep-), etc. [4ii|>»], raise, i. 5. 3, v. 6. 33, vii. 3.6. atti see 8s. αίσ-θάνομα^ (αίσθ-) , αίσθήσομαι, ■^σθ^μηρ^ "βσθημαί [II. 1 aF]t per- ceive, learn, see, observe, become aware of, with the simple ace, i. i. 8, iv. I. 7, which is often to be supplied from the context, i. 8. 22, iv. 3. 33, with a partic. clause, i. 9. 21, iv. 6. 22, or with a clause with δτι, uis, or δτοι, i. 2. 21, 10. 5, iii. i. 40, v. 7. 10 ; with gen., Aear, hear <*/* vi. 3. 10, vii. 2. 18. aCo^o^f, cwj, 1^ [R. 1 ap], per- ception ; aiffffifffip ταρέχΐΐρ, afford perception, i.e. be perceived, iv. 6. 13. itf, OI' [οίσα, fate, jfortnne'], bodinff well, ampicio'ns, vi. 5. 2, 21. Α1ΐΓχίνη«ι ου, Aeschines, an Acar- nanian, in command of peltasts, iv. 3, jilif 8. lo. aUrxpos, a, 6p [a(S4o|iiCu] , shame- fid, base, infamous, disgraceful, i. 9. 3, ii. 5. 20", iv. 6. 14, vi. 2. 10, vii. 7. 22; comp. αίσχίίχ>ι/, sup. αΐσχι- aros, V. 7. 12, vii. 6. 21. αίσχρώς» adv. [αΐδ^ομ,αι], shame- fully, disgracefully, ignominiously, iii. I. 43, vii. i. 29. αΐιτχύνη, ψ [α18^ομ.αι], shame, dishonour, disgrace, ii. 6. 6, vii. 7. 11. Phrases: di αίσχϋνηρ άλΧή- λωρ, from a sense of shame before one another, iii. i. 10; ωστΐ ττασιρ αίσχϋρηρ elvat, so that all were ashamed, ii. 3. 11. αίο-χύνω (αΐσχνρ-), αίσχνρώ, ^σχΰρα, ^σχύρθηρ [αΐδ^ομαι], dis- honour, shame ; mid. as pass, dep., be or feel ashamed, feel shame be- fore, stand in awe of, i. 3. 10, 7. 4, ii. 3. 22, 5. 39, vi. 5. 4, vii. 6. 21, 7.0. αΐτ^ω, αΙτήσω, etc. [αΐτέω], ask for, beg, demand, with the simple ace. of the thing, iii. i. 28, two aces., one of person, the other of thing, i. I. 10, 3. 14, iii. 4. 2, v. 8. 4, vi. 2. 4, or with ace. of thing and καρά with gen. of pers., i. 3. 16. Mid., entreat, bese&ch, beg for, ob- tain by entreaty, with ace. of pers., ii. 3. 19, the ace. of thing and -irapa with gen. of pers., v. i. 11, with ace. of pers. and inf., vi. 6. 31, or the infin. and ιταρά with gen. of pers., ii. 3. 18. atrCok, 5? [aWei], a charge, im- putation, blame, censui'e, vi. 6. 15, 16 ; ahloLP (α/τίά?) ^χ€ίρ, be blamed, censured, held responsible, vii. i. 8, 7. 56, with ύχό and gen. of pers., and either ip with dat. or vepl with gen. of thing, vii. 6. 11, 15. αΐτιάομαι, αΐηάσομαι, etc. [α1τ€ω], blame, Jind fault with, reproach, iii. 3, 12, vi. 6. 16, 20, 26 ; accuse, charge, with inf., i. 2. 20, v. 5. 19, vi. 2. 9, or with ace. of pers. and 6ti with a clause, iii. i. 7, iv. j. 19, vii. I. 8. atrios, o, OP [αΐτίω], causing, to blame^ culpable^ responsible, i. 4. 15, V. 5. 19; of persons or things, cause of, reason for, to blame for, with sen. of thing, ii. 5. 22, v. 5. 19, vi. I. 20, 6. 15; with ace. and inf., vi. 6. 8. As subst., τό αίτιορ, the cause, iv. i. 17 ; τούτου 6 αϊτως, the author of this, vii. 7. 48 ; αΐτιοί οΰ- δέρ, gmltlcss, vii. i. 25. αΙχμιάλωτο$, op [K. ακ + οΐρ^ω], captured by the spear, captured, of persons or things, iii. 3. 19, iv. i. 12, 7. 20. As subst., oi αιχμάλωτοι, prisoners of loar, captives, iv. 8. 27, vii. 4. 5 ; τά αιχμάλωτα, booty, both persons and things, iv. i. 13, V. 3. 4. Άκαρνάν, apos, 6, an Acarnanian. The Aearnanians inhabited the province of Acarnania in the west of Greece, bounded on the south and west by the Ionian Sea, on the north by the Ambracian Gulf, and on the east Jay the river Achelous and Aetolia. iv. 8. 18. ακαυστθ9» op [κα(α»], unburnt, iii. 5. 13. ακέραιος, op [R. 2 κρα], undi- luted, undiminished, i.e. complete, perfect; of troops, in fine condi- tion, fresh, vi. 5. 9. ακήρυκτος, op [R. καλ], unpro- claimed; of a war in which no overtures from the enemy are re- ceived, truceless, iii. 3. 5. άκΐνάκης, ου [Persian word], a short, straight sword or poniard, i. 8. 29, the general form of which was identi- cal with that of the scabbard represented in the accompanying cut. The acinaces was worn on the right side, and hung from a leathern belt over the hip. In the illus- tration, from a bas- relief found at Per- sepolis, the single lines at the right and left represent the outline of the front and back of the dress of the wearer. This weapon was No. 1. αίχμάλαιτος-άκόντιον peculiar to the Persians, Medes, and Scythians. A golden acinac^ was often given by the kings of Persia as a mark of honor, i. 2. 27. An acinaces taken from Mardo- nius was preserved in the Acropo- lis at Athens, and was worth, De- mosthenes says, not less than 300 darics. ακίνδυνος, op [κίνδυνος], without danger; sup. άκίρδυρ6τατο$, safest, vi. 5. 29. ακινδύνως, adv. [κίνδυνος], with- out danger, in security, ii. 6. 6. ακληρος, op [/cX^pos, ό, lot, por- tion, cf Eng. clergy, c/erk^, loith- out portion, in poverty, iii. 2. 26. ακμάζω {άκμαδ-), ακμάσω [R. ακ], be at highest point, in full bloom, at the height of one's ability, with inf., iii. i. 25. ακμή, ijs [R. ακ], point; ace. as adv., at the point, just, iv. 3. 26. άκόλα.(Γτος, op [κολάζω], unpun- ished; of soldiers, undisciplined, ii. 6. 10. άκολουθέω, άκολουθ-ήσω, etc. [R. KcX], accompany, follow, with σύρ and dat., vii. 5. 3, ακόλουθος, op [R. kcX], going the same way, consistent, of things, ii. 4. 19. ακοντίζω (άκορτιδ-), άκορτιω [R. ακ], hurl the javelin, iii. 3. 7, v. 2. 12 ; throw a javelin at, hit with a javelin, hit, with ace. of pers., 1. 10. 7; with ace. of pers. and dat. of the weapon, i. 8. 27. άκόντιον, TO [R. ακ], javelin, dart, the weapon of the άκορτιστ-ήί (q.v.), shorter and lighter than the δόρυ, q.v. ITie javelin had a leather thong permanently attached to it at its centre of gravity (iv. 2. 28, cf. iv. 3. 28), through the end of which the finger was put when it was hurled (see s.v. δια-γκυλόομαι) . This • thong was wrapped round the shaft and gave the javelin when hurled a rotary motion, similar to that of the ball shot from a rifled gun. In the heroic age this weapon was dicdvTunf-drr^ used chiefly in hunting» but later throwing the javelin was one of the regular exercises in the Greek gymnasium, and became one of the five events in the pentathlon. Here the object was either to hit a mark or throw a long distance, and the javehn was light and short with a long, thin point, &ic6vTuris, cuis, η [R. a,K]Javelin• throioing, i. 9. 5. AicovTioT^s, 01? [R. ακ], javelin- thrower, iii. 3. 7, iv. 3. 28. The javelin- throwers, doubtless, carried each several javelins (see s,v. ακόν- των). They had no defensive ar- mour (helmet, breast-plate, etc.), since they were to fight at a dis- tance, and with the bowmen and slingers constituted the light-armed troops. See s.v. ^υμν^ι^ and τέλτα- στή$, 4kov(», άκούσομαι, ηκονσα, άκ'ήκοα, ήκοό<τθ7}ν [R. κορ], hear, learn, listen to. Used either abs., iii. I. 27, V. 5. 8, or as follows: with the simple gen. or ace. of the thing, i. 3. 7, iv. 2. 8, 4. 21, V. 7. 21; with the gen. of source, vii. 3. 8 ; with the gen. of the pers. and ace. of the thing, i. 2. 5, ii. 5. 16 ; with the ace. and partic, i. 2. 21, v. 5. 7, or a clause introduced by δτι or wt, i. 3, 21, vi. 6. 3, 23, either con- struction being sometimes accom- panied by the gen. of the person, i. 8. 13, 10. 6, vi. 2. 13 ; witli the ace. and inf., i. 3. 20, iii. i. 45, iv. 6. 14, 16 ; with wepi and gen., ii. 5. 26, accompanied by the ace. of the thing and a ωι clause, vi. 6. 34, or by the ace. of the thing and gen. of the source, vii. 7. 30; followed by a rel. clause, v. 7. 12, vii. 3. 5, 4. 21. Also, hear of, with ace, i. 4. 9, 9. 4; hearken to, give heed to, obey, with gen., ii. 6. 11, iii. 5. 16. The pres. is sometimes used in a sense that strictly requires the perf., have heard, am told, under- stand, i. 9. 28, V. I. 13, 5. 23, 8. 23. Phrases : t§ άκύύ§ιμ^ hear good of oneself, hence with ΰτ6 and gen. of pers., fee in good repute among men, Lat. bene audire, vii. 7. 23 ; άκουόν- των των πολ€μίων, within hearing of the enemy, iii. 4. 36 ; drt irXel- στων άκονόντων, within the hearing of every possible man, vii. 3. 7. ακρά, OS [ R. ακ], summit, height ; then the fortified stronghold there- on, citadel, v. 2. 17, vii. i. 20. &Kparos, ov [R. 2 icpa], unmixed, of wine, v. 4. 29, hence strong, iv. 5. 27. It was the custom among the Greeks to mix water with their wine. The usual proportion was three to one or two to one, some- times three to two, the amount of water always exceeding that of wine. The mixture was made in large bowls (see s.v. κράτήρ), and was dipped from these by means of a ladle or wine-pitcher (see s.v. ΟίνΟχόοί). m ' &KpiTosy 01» [κρίνωΐ, unjudged, without a trial, v. 7. 28, 29. dKpopoXC|;o)fcflu (άκροββλιδ-), ήκρο- βολκτάμην [R. ακ+Ρ^Ιλλω], throw from a distance or height, as op- posed to fighting a pitched battle, skirmish, abs., iii. 4. 18, v. 2. 10, or with dat., iii. 4. .33. &KfMpdXwns, €a>5, η [R. aic + βάλλ»], throwing from a distance, skirmishing, skirmish, iii. 4. 16, 18. άκρόιτολις, ews, η [R. ακ + R. irXaJ, upper city, acropolis, vitadel, i. 2. 1, 6. 6, vii. I. 20. &icfM>Sy ά, ov [R. ακ], pointed, at the point, highest, topmost. As subst., TO Ακρον, height, summit, eminence, of a hill or mountain, iii. 4. 27, 44, iv. 7. 25, v. 4. 26 ; τά Ακρα, the heights, i. 2. 21, v. 2. 16, vii. 3, 44 ; τό άκράτατον, the highest peak, the chief stronghold, v. 4. 15 ; κατά τά Ακρα, . along the heights, iv. 6. 23, 24, vi. 3. 19. &κρ«ιννχ(ί, at [R. ακ -f 6ννξ, nail}, tip of the nail, spur, crest, of a mountain, iii. 4. 37, 38. 4κτή, η^ foreland, promontory^ coast, beach, vi. 2. 1. if' &Kvpos-aXMVTiKds &KvpoS) 01» [icOpos, TO, power, authority], oj no force, null and void, vi. I. 28. ^κων, ούσα, ov [for άέκων by coiitr., see εκών], unwilling, reluc- tant, used as partic. without ων, iii. 1. 10, vii. 3. 30 ; as adv. with a partic, unintentionally, accident- ally, iv. 8. 25 ; ακοντ6^ tlvo^, sc. iv- Tos, against a man's loill, loithout his consent, i. 3. 17, ii. i. 19, vii. 6.40. αλαλάξω (άλαλαγ-), άλαλάξομαι, αλάλαξα [άλαλαγτ^, shouting, άλα- λή, battle-cry], raise the battle-cry of άλαλη, shout the war-cry, iv. 2. 7, vi. 5. 26, 27. Poetic, except in Xen. and late prose. dXiCivos, ή, 6v [αλέα, €Ϊλη, prop. wannth of the sun, σέλα%, bright- ness, cf. Lat. sol, sun, Eng. sul- try], warm; as subst., τό άλ€€ΐν6ν, source of wai'mth, iv. 4. 11. άλ^ξω (άλ€κ-), άλέξομαι, 'ήλ€ξάμην [R. αρκ], ward off, only in mid., ward off from oneself, defend one- self from, repulse, obj. in ace. or implied, i. 3. 6, iii. 4. 33, v. 5. 21, vii. 7. 3 ; return like for like, re- quite, i. 9. 11. άλυτης, ov [άλ^ω, grind], lit. grinder. Used only as an adj. in the phrase 6vos άλέτψ, i. 5. 5, the upper millstone, marked dd in the annexed cut, which represents a mill found at Pompei. At the right, not quite one- half of the outside of the mill is shown ; at the left, a vertical sec- tion. The stone base is marked a, and terminates above in the cone-shaped lower mill-stone (^\os) c, in the top of which is set solidly a heavy iron peg (a in No. 3). The upper stone (6vos) No. 2. No. 3. dd is in the foi-m of an hour-glass, the lower half revolving closely upon c. The 6vos is closed at its narrowest part by a thick iron plate (6 in No. 3) in which there are five holes. The peg in the upper part of c (a in No. 3) passes through the hole at the centre of this plate; through the others, arranged round it, the grain, which was put into the up- per half of dd, or the hopper, passed downward. When the upper stone was turned by means of the bar / the grain gradually worked its way downward, and was ground into flour in the groove e by the friction of the two rough sur- faces, and fell into the rill b be- low. &λ€υρον, τό [άλέω, grind], flour, wheaten flour, always in the plur., i. 10. 18, iii. 4. 31 ; as distinguished from barley meal, i. 5. 6. άλήθ€ΐα, as [R. λαβ], truth, truth- telling, candour, sincerity, ii. 6. 25, 26, vii. 7. 24. Phrase : τ^ aX-qeeiq,, Lat. re uerd, in fact, in reality, vi. 2. 10. άληθ€ύω, άληθ€ύσω, ήλ-ήθενσα [R. λαθ], speak the truth, i. 7. 18, vii. 7. 25; report correctly, iv. 4. 15; with ace, tell the truth about, v. 6. 18. αληθή?, ^s [R. λαβ], unconcealed, and so true, of things, v. 5. 24, vii. 2. 25 ; as sul3st., τό άληθέί, the truth, truth, Lat. uerum, ii. 6. 22 ; άληθη X^yeiv, speak the truth, ii. 5. 24, iii. 3. 13, V. 8. 10. αληθινό?, i), 6j» [R. λαθ], agree- able to truth, real and true, genu- ine; στράτευμα άληθινόν, an army worthy of the name, i. 9. 17. άλιίυτικό?, ήι 6v [aXteiJw, flsh, άλ$, ό, salt, a\s, η, sea, cf. Lat. sal, sea, salt, Eng. salt], of or belonging to a fisherman; with τλοΐον, fishing boat, vii. i. 20. iX((w-tXXet 10 [Λλίί], gather, collect, assemble, li 4. a ; in mid. intrans., assemble, meet, vi. 3. 3. ftXiOos, OK [Xitfof], mthout stones, free from stones, of land» vi. 4. 5. Alt, adv., in heaps or crowds, in plenty, enough, with gen., v. 7. 12. Άλισάρνη, 1?$, ij, Halimrne, a city in Mysia, south of Per^raiims, vii. 8. 17. «ίλίο -icomu (α'λ-, ιίλο-), άλώσομαι, έάλων or ι/λω!», έΐίλωκα or ^λωκα [αίρΐ»], pass, to αίρ^ω, be captured, taken, caught, of persons, animals, places, and things, i. 4. 7, iii. 4. 8, 17, 5. 14, V. 3. 10, vii. 3. 10. The pros, sometimes approaches the sigiiiflcation of the perl, as ol αλισκ6μ£νοι, the captives, iv. i. 3, c/. &λκιμο?, or [R. αρκ], stout, brave, warlike, iv. 3. 4, 7. 15. Αλλά, adversative conj. [&λλο5], otherwise, in another loay, on the other hand, still, but. It intro- duces something different from what has been said before, or op- posed to it, and occure frequently after negatives, i. i. 4, 4. 18, ii. 4. 2, 6. 10, vi. 4. 2, vii. i. 31. It often mtroduces an antithesis, which em- phasises the thought, i. 8. 11, iii. 2. \ 13, V. 7. 32. At the beginning of a speech, by way of an abrupt transition, or to break off discus- sion, tuell, well but, however, for my pan, i. 7. 6, 8. 17, ii. i. 10, 5. 16. In conditional sentences, the apod- oeis may be opposed to the prot- asis by άλλα, yet, still, at least, ii, 5. 19, vii. 7. 43. An objection in the form of a question is intro- duced by άλλα, V. 8. 4. At the be- ginning of a second question ά\\ά is best translated or, ii. 5. 18. After questions containing a negative idea, or one to be refuted, rather, on the contrary, iv. 6. 19, v. i. 7, 7. 30. άλλα is joined with various particles, m follows: άλλα yap, but really, iii. 2. 2δ, 26, v. 7. 11, vii. 7. 43 ; άλλα ye, but at any rate, iii. 2. 3 ; άλλα 7^ rot, yet at least, ii. 5. 19 ; άλλα μάλλον, but rather, iii. I. 35 ; άλλα μέντοι, yet truly, iv. 6. 16; άλλα μήν, but, but then, used when the speaker resumes an in- terrupted thought, ii. 5. 12, 14; άλλ' δμωί, but nevertheless, i. 8. 13, V. 8. 19. άλλ' ή, I.e. άλλα η, other than, witii the accent of the first word lost ; after a negative, except, iv. 6. 11, vii. 7. 53. &λλη, as adv. [ολλοί], in another way, iv. 2. 4, 10 ; elsewhere, some- ichere else, ii, 6. 4, v. 6. 7, vi. 3. 7 ; elsewhere, in another direction, only in phrases, as dXXos άλλν ίτράτετο, one one way, another another, dif- ferent ways, iv. 8. 19 ; άλλο? άλλ^) διώκων, vii. 3. 47. &λλήλι»ν, reciprocal pron. [αλ- λο«], of one another, each other, i. 10. 4, iii. I. 10 ; άλλήλοΐί, I 2. 27, iii. 3. 1, V. 2. 11 ; άλλ-ήλου^ iii. 2. 5, iv. 3. 29, vii. I. 39. αλλοθιν, adv. [&λλο«], from an- other place; άλλοι Λλλοθίρ, some from one point, others from an- other, i. 10. 13. αλλομαα (αλ-), άλοΰμαι, ηλάμη» or ίιλόμηρ [c/. Lat. salid, leap], leap, jump, hop, iv. 2. 17, vi. i. 5. &λλο$, η, ο [άλλο?], other, an- other, i. I. 7, 9, 3. 16, ii. I. 20, iv. 5. 28. When preceded by the art., t?i€ other, the remaining, the rest, the rest of, i. 2. 15, iv. 3. (5 ; oi Αλλοι "Ελλίίΐ^Γ, the rest of the Greeks, ii. 1.4; TO Αλλο στράτ€υμα, the rest of the army, i. 2. 25, 4. 17 ; ol Αλλοι waPT€s, all the rest, ii. i. 16. τά Αλλα is used adverbially, as for the rest, I 3. 3, 7, 4, iv. 8. 20. When joined with one of its own cases or an adv. derived from the same stem, it is used distributively, like Lat. alius, as Λλλο$ καΐ Αλλοί, one and another, another and another, 1.5. 12, vii. 3. 27, 6. 10; Αλλοι . . . Λλλοέ, some . . . others, i. 8. 9, vii. I. 17; άλλοι άλλα Kiyei, one says 11 &λλο<Γβ-αμα ihis, another that, ii. i. 15; άλλο? Αλλ-η, one in one place, another in another, vi. 3. 7, or one in one di- rection, others in another, iv. 8. 19, vii. 3. 47 ; άλλοι Αλλοθ€ν, Lat. aln uUuude, some from one quarter, others from another, i. 10. 13 ; Αλλοι άλλωί, Lat. αΙΓί aliter, some one way, others another, i. 6. 11. ry Αλλν, with ή^ΐΑ^ρ^ι understood, means next day, ii. i. 3, iii. 4. 1, vi. i. 15 ; άλλοί Αλλον €Ϊλκ€, one pulled up the other, V. 2. 15. Used with numerals Αλλο$ may be best translated be- sides, further. Αλλοι δ^ ^aicd&Ti|t 12 ^/*/^(i, at daybreak, ii. i. 2, iii. i. 13, vi. 5. 1 ; άμα. ry iirtouopc'6« 4μ«ίν»ν, ov, gen. opos, comp. of d7a^os, q.v., better, braver, stouter, iii. I. 21, 23, 2. 15, V. 6. 28, vii. 6. 44, 7. 54; joined with κρύττων, braver and mightier, i. 7. 3 ; neut. as adv., better, ii. i. 20, vii. 3. 17. αμ4λ€ΐα, as [R. μβλ], careless- ness, neglect in guarding, iv. 6. 3. &μcλέ», άμ€\ήσω, etc. [R. μ«λ], be careless, be heedless, neglect, slight, with gen. of the person or thing, i. 3. 11» V• I• 1δ» 4. 20, vu. άμιλώί, adv. [R. μ€λ], heedlessly, negligently, v. i. 6. &μ€τρος, ov Ιμέτρον], Without measure, countless, iii. 2. 16. άμήχα-νο?» o" [1^• H•*•']» '^^^^^ means, destitute of means (of per- sons), ii. 5. 21; impossible (of things), impracticable, i. 2. 21; πολλά κέμ-ήχανα, many difficulties, ii. 3. 18. άμιλλάομαι, άμιΚΚ'ίΐσομΛΐ, eic.,dep. pass. [ά/Αίλλα, contest^, contend, struggle ; with ένΐ or vpbs and ace., race for, struggle for, iii. 4• 44, 40. αμΐΓ€λθ5, ν, vine, I 2. 22, vi. 4. 6. Άμιτρακιώτη?, 86β'λμβρακιώτψ. άμιτγδάλινος, η, ov iάμυyδά\η, almond, cf. Eng. almond], of al- monds, iv. 4. 13. , _ Γ * άμννω {άμυν-), άμυνω, ημυνα [ΓΟΟΙ μυ, shut, fasten, ά- prothetic, q.v., cf Lat. moenia, rampaHs, munio, fortify], ward off. Mid., ward off from oneself, defend oneself, avenge oneself upon, ii. 3. 23, iii. i. 14, 29, V. 4. 25, vii. 3. 35. άμφ(, prep, [akin to άμφω, cf. Lat. ambi-, amb- in composition, round about], orig. on both sides of, hence aboiU, followed by the ace. and very rarely by the gen. Used of persons, places, and thmgs, sometimes of time and number. With gen., about, concerning, of things; άμφ' ων elxov διαφέρεσθαι, quarrel over what they had, iv. 5. 17. With ace, of place, round, about, of persons, countries, or things, i. 2. 3, v. 2. 17, vii. 8. 2 ; of the object affected, άμφΐ στρά- τ€υμα δατταναν, spend money on an army, i. i. 8; of time, about, at, άμφΐ δορτηστόν, about supper-time, i. 10. 17 ; cf. ii. 2. 8, iv. 5. 9, vi. 4. 26 ; with numerals preceded by the art., about, Lat. circiter, i. 2, 9, 7. 10, iii. I. 33. Phrases: oi άμφί with an ace. of a pers. may denote either the followers of that pers , or that pers. and his follow- ers, as ol άμφΐ βασιλέα, the king's attendants, i. 10. 3, cf i. 8. 1, 21, but ol άμφΐ Χεφίσοφον, Chirisophus and his men, iv. 3. 21, cf iii. 2. 2, 5. 1 ; τά άμφΐ rd^eis, tactics, ii. i. 7 ; άμφΐ ταύτα ?χ«ν, be busy about this, occupied, v. 2. 26, vii. 2. 16 ; άμφΐ τά έτιτήδΐΐα ehai, be busied about the provisions, iii. 5. 14. In composition άμφί signifies on both sides, about. άμφιγνο^ω, imp. ημφΐ^νβουν, ήμ- φ^^νόησα, ήμφε'γνοήθην [R. γνω], think on both sides, be in doubt or puzzled, ii. 5. 33. Άμψ(δημο5, ό, Amphidemus, fa- ther of Amphicrates (see the next word), iv. 2. 13. •Αμφνκράτης, oi/s, 0, Amphicrates, an Athenian, son of the preceding, one of the captains of the Greek array, and killed by the CardOchi in the retreat, iv. 2. 13, 17. άμφιλ€γίι> [R. λ€γ], speak on both sides, have a dispute, quarrel, i. 5. 11. ΑμφιίΓολίτηβ, ου, an Amphipoli- tan,'d native of Amphipolis, i. 10. 7, iv. 6. 1, a colony of Athens founded in 437 b.c. in eastern ' Macedonia, on the left bank of the river Strymon, just below its egress from lake Cercinitis and 25 stadia from the sea. The Stry- mon flowed almost round the town. The ruins of Amphipolis can be seen near Neochorio at the present day. άμφορ€ν$) έωs, 6 [in Epic άμφι- φορ€Μ, R. φ€ρ], Lat. amphora, a jar primarily intended for liquids. &μφότιρο«-&ν 14 as wine or oil, but used variously, as for pickled dolphin, v, 4. 28. As the name implies, the άμφορ€ύ% had two handles, and was so large as to need two persons to carry it. As a liquid measure it contained 39.39 liters, 41.6+ quarts U. S. liquid measure, having one and one- half times the capacity of the Roman amphora. In form it was more or less bulky, had a neck and mouth which were generally of moderate size in comparison with the body of the vessel, and No, ft. either rested on a foot, as in the illustration, or was pointed at the lower end. The &μφορ€ύ% was some- times highly ornamented. &|M(»dTC(M>s, ci, ov [Λμ^ω], both, from its signification generally plurail (in Anab. only dual or pi.) ; when used with the art, put in the pred. position, i. i. 1, 4. 4, iii. i. 31, vil. 6. 17. Sometimes used subst., Imh parUmf i 5. 17, ii. 5. 41, v. 3• o• &μφοτέρ»0€ν, adv. [αμφότεροι'}, on both sidm, from both sides^ I 10. 9, iii. 5. 10 J with the gen., iii. 4. &μψω [akin to άμφί, cf. Lat. amboy both, Eng. both], gen. and dat. άμφοΐ,^, both, ii. 6. 30, vi. 2. 6. &v, a post- positive particle with- out an exact equivalent in Eng- lish, but having force according to tlie construction in which it is employed. Three uses of &v are to be distinguished: I. In condi- tional, relative, and temporal prot- ases and in final clauses; II. In apodosis; III. In iterative sen- tences. I. With subjv. in protases with e/, when ci and iv combine to form έέν, dv, or r^v, or with rel. advs. like iwti, έπ€ΐδή, ore, etc., com- bining to form iwdf, έΊΓ€ΐδάν, όταν, etc. (for this use see under the dif- ferent words); with a rel, as «s, 5<Γτΐ5, ότόσοί, etc., i. 3. 5, 4. 15, ii. 5. 18, or a temporal conj., as ?ws, τμίν, μέχρι, lirre, i. i. 10, 4. 8, 13, ii. 3. 9, 24 ; in a final clause with «f and subjv., ii. 5. 16, vi. 3. 18. 11. In apodosis, where &p belongs to the verb and is used with sec- ondary tenses of the ind. in condi- tions contrary to fact, ii. i. 4, iii. 2. 24, vii. 5. δ, 6. 9 ; with the opt in less vivid fut conditions, i. 3. 19, ii. 3. 23, vi. i. 28, vii. i. 21 ; in Mss. it is sometimes found with the fut. ind., which in editt is cor- rected to the opt, ii. 5. 13, v. 6. 32; with the inf. or partic. in indir. disc, representing the ind. or opt., i. I. 10, 3. 6, 7. 5, 9. 8, 29, ii. i. 12, 2. 1, iii. I. 17, v. 2. 8, vi. 4. 7, vii. 7. 30, 40 ; the protasis may be implied in the context, iii. 5. 12, iv. 2. 10, vii. 6. 23, or be altogether lacking with an independent po- tential ind. or opt with dp, i. 5. 8, 9. 3, ii. 5. 20, iii. I. 7, 2. 24, iv. 6. 12, 7. 7, V. 6. 15, 7. 10, vi. 5. 17, vii. 7. 27; dp is sometimes repeated for emphasis or in a long sentence, i. 3. 6, 6. 2, ii. 5. 20, iv. 6. 13, 15 βν-άνάγω vii. 7. 38 ; the verb to which dv be- longs may be omitted when it can easily be supplied from the con- text, i. 3. 6, iii. 2. 24, v. 4. 34, or dv itself may be omitted for the same reason,!. 6.2, iv. 6. 13. III. In the iterative construction, with inipf. and aor. ind., i. 9. 19, ii. 3. 11, iii. 4. 22, iv. 7. 16. αν, conditional conj., contracted form of iap, q.v. dv-, see a-. άνά, prep. [cf. Eng. on], up (op- posed to κατά), followed by the aec. It is used of place (in the Anab. not of time), up, up along, upon, over, throughout, iii. 5. 16, vii. 4. 2 ; with numerals to signify distribution, άνά ir^vre ταρασάγγα^ TTjs ήμέράν, at the rate of five para- sangs a day, iv. 6. 4 ; άνά. εκατόν, by hundreds, a hundred each, iii. 4. 21, v. 4. 12, vi. 5. 11 ; and to ex- press mode and manner, άνά κρά- τος, from weakness up to the full measure of strength, at full speed, i. 8. 1, 10. 15, iv. 3. 20, v. 2. 30. In composition άνά signifies up, back, again, and is sometimes simply intensive. αναβαίνω [R. βα], go tip, as- cend, climb up, a mountain or stronghold, either with the obj. omitted, iv. 2; 8, 12, 8. 19, v. 2. 15, or with itrl and ace, i. 2. 22, iii. 4. 25, iv. 8. 13, v. 2. 22 ; march up (from the coast to the interior, Lat. e.scendo), i. i. 2, 4. 12, ii. 5. 22, iii. 1.2; mount (a horse), with έπί and acc, i. 8. 3, iii. 4. 35, vii. 6. 42 ; embark (sc. ivi τά τηλοΐα), vi. 1.14. αναβάλλω [βάλλω], throto up, V. 2. 5 ; help to mount, with έιτί and acc, iv. 4. 4. άνάβασ -is, cws, η [R. βα], going up, ascent, march upward, of a hill, iv. I. 10. Esp. applied to the expedition from the coast to Baby- lon, made by Cyrus the Younger against his brother, King Arta- xerxes, and used as the title of Xenophon's history, i. 4.•9, iii. 1. 1, vii. 8. 26. αναβιβάζω {βφά^ω, βφαδ-, -βι- βάσω or βίβω, -6/3ί)8ασα [Κ. βα], make go, causative to βαίνω), make go up, lead up, i. 10. 14. άναβοάω [R. βορ], let Up a shotit, cry out, v. 4. 31. αναβολή, ψ [βάλλω], that ichich is thrown up, mound, earth-work, Lat. udilum, v. 2. 5. αναγγέλλω [ά77^λλω], _ bring back word, report, Lat. renuntib, i. 3. 19, 21 (some read άτταγγ^λλω). αναγιγνώσκω [R. γνω], know again what has been seen before, recognize, v. 8. 6 ; hence of written characters, read, 1. 6. 4, iii. i. 5. αναγκάζω ((θμητos, ov [R. ap], not to be counted, innumerable, iii. 2. 13. dvapiOTTOSi ov [άριστο»'], without breakfast, not having had breakfast, Lat. imprdnsus, i. 10. 19, iv. 2. 4, vi. 5. 21. dvapirdtu [R. άριτ], snatch up, carry off as booty, i. 3. 14, vii. 1. 15. dvapxCd, as [dpx«]i Idck of leaders, anarchy, iii. 2. 29. dv(UΓK€υdζω [R. σκυ], pack up, get ready ; hence, remove, vi. 2. 8. dvaardS) see άνίστημι. άνοΜΤταυρόω (^στανρόω, έσταύρωσα, -€στανρωμαι, έσταυρώθην [R. οττα], fence with pales), set up on a stake, impale, iii. i. 17. ά.νασ-τέλΛω [στ Αλω], send back, keep back, repulse, v. 4. 23. άναστηναι, dvafm^cros» see av- ίστημι. dvouΓτp4ψω [στρέφω], intrans., turn back, retreat, wheel round, face about, i. 4. 5, 10. 8, iv. 3. 29 ; turn about, of horses, into the home stretch, iv. 8. 28 ; mid., con- duct oneself, proceed, Lat. uersor, as ω5 δ€σΐΓ6τηί άναστρέφ^σθαι, be- have like a Czar, ii. 5. 14 ; pass., be turned back, face about, rally, i. 10. 12. dvcurx^trOai, dvd(Γχωμαι, see άν- έχω. dvαταpdττω [ταράττω], stir up; perf. pass., be in confusion or dis- order, i. 7. 20. άνατ€(νω [τβ/μω], stretch up, hold up ; of a show of hands in voting, χειροτονία, iii. 2. 9, 33, v. 6. 33; perf. partic. άνατ€ταμένο^, of the royal standard, an eagle with ex- tended wings, with wings displayed, i. 10. 12. dvατέλλω (τίλ\ω, reX-, ?τ€ΐλο, -τέταλμαι [R. ταλ], make to arise), intr., rise ; άμα ηλίφ άνατέλλονη, at sunrise, ii. 3. 1. dvατCθημι [R. Oc], put or lay upon, of things, esp. baggage, iii. I. 30, iv. 7. 26 ; mid., with έπί and ace, ii. 2. 4 ; set vp as a votive of- fering, dedicate, v. 3. 5, 6. 4v»rpl4«-&i4f> άνατρΙψ«ι [τρ^0ω], bring up, fatten, of a horse for sacritice, iv. 5. 35. Avaφ€ύyω [R. φυγ], flee M|), with iwl and ace. of the place, vi. 4. 24. άναψ(Μ>ν4«ι» [ψρήν], come back to om*8 mnsesj recover one^a senses, iv. 8. 21. 4ναχ4(ω (the simple χά^ω, make retire; is Epic only), cause to re- tire; hence mid., retreat, draw back, iv. 7. 10, and so once the act. used intrans. in the same sense, iv. i. l(j. άναχωρέω [χωρ^ω], move back, retire, of troops, iii. 3. 13, iv. 3. 0, vi. 4. 10 ; ^iri waSa άναχωρ€Ϊν, Lat. pedem referre, retreat with one^s face to the foe, v. 2. 32. &ναχωρ£ζ(ι> [χωρίζω], make re- tire, draw off, of troops, v. 2. 10. &vSpa, see άνήρ. ύ,ν^ρΛψΛΙά, άί [άνήρ + άγα^ό?], manli virtue, bravery, valour, v. 2. 4v8p<£iro8ov, τό, attendant on a freeman, slave, esp. a captive taken m war, who became the slave of his conqueror, i. 2. 27, ii. 4. 27, iv. I. 12, V. 6. 13, vi. 6. 38, vii. 8. 12. 4vSf>€losi ά, ov [άνήρ], manly, valorous, vi. 5. 24. dvSpcionjSi ητοί, η [άνήρ], man- Uness, valour, Lat. nirtus, vi. 5. 14. άνδρίζ», άνδρίσω [άνήρ], make a man of; mid., play a man's part, act bravely, iv. 3. 34, v. 8. 15. 4νΐΡην» see αναβαίνω. 4v«^(p«i [iytlpu], wake up, arouse; pass., be aroused, awake, III. I. ίύ. Ιο. 4ν(ΐλον, see άναίρέω. 4vcivai, see άι^ημι, 4vc4'irov [eliroi/], proclaim, of a herald, with inf., or with Ort and a clause, ii. 2. 20, v. 2. 18. 4ν€Κ'ΤΓίμ'ΐΓλημι [R. irXaJ, βΙΙ OUt or tip again, iii. 4. 22. 4ν«λΙο*0αι, see άναφ4ω, &vc)M>s, 6 [c/. Lat. anima, breathy tuind, animus, soul], if?ind, iv. 5. 4 ; Λί^ΜΟϊ βορραί ivavrioi, a north VJind full in the face, iv. 5. 3. 4ν€ΐηλή'ΐΓτα>$, adv. [Xtjittoj, verbal of λαμβάνω], not to be attacked, mthout blame, in security, vii. 6. 37. 4ν€ρ€θ£ζ(ο (έρ€θΙξ'ω, έρ€θιδ-, ipe- ΘΙσω or έρ€θιω, etc., excite), pro- voke; piiss., be instigated, egged on, vi. 6. 9. 4ν«ρ(ΐι»τ4α> [ερωτάω], ask with authority, demand, ii. 3. 4, iv. 5. 34. 4νέσ-την, see άνίστημι. άν€στρ4ψην, see αναστρέφω. αν€υ, improper prep, [akin to negative prefix ά-], without, fol- lowed by the gen., i. 3. 11, 13, ii. 2. 3, 3. 10, 6. 6, 18. 4ν€υρ(σκο> ΐ€νρίσκω], find out, discover, vii. 4. 14. 4ν^χωι impf. and aor. mid. with double aug., v. 6. 34, i. 8. 26 [R. σ€χ], hold up; mid., control one- self, i. 8. 26 ; stand firm against, tolerate, endure, abs., v. 6. 34, with the simple ace, i. 7. 4, 8. 11, with ace. and a partic, vii. 7. 47, or with the gen. and a partic, ii. 2. 1. 4ν€ψι6«, ό [r/. Lat. nepos, grand- son], first cousin, Lat. cdnsobrlnus, vii. 8. 1). 4νήΎαγον, see άνάΎω. 4νηγ^ρθη, see άveyΐίpω. 4νηΎ^'νο$, see άνά-γω. 4νήκ€σ-το$, ov [άκέομαι, heal, άκο5, τ6, remedy, cf Eng. pan-acea], not to be healed, iireparable, ii. 5. 5, vii. I. 18. 4νήκα» [^κω], have come up to a point, extend, reach, of land, with tls and ace. of limit, vi. 4. 3, 5. 4νήρ, άνδρόί, 6 [4νήρ], man, Lat. litr, as opposed to woman, youth, or child, in contrast with the gene- ric άνθρωτΓΟϊ, huinan being, iv. 7. 2, V. 3. 10, 4. 34, 7. 10 ; hence, hu.s- band, iv. 5. 24 ; soldier, i. i. 11, iii. 4. 21, V. 6. 12 ; the enemy, iii. i. 23, vi. 5. 16. As a title of honour, a true 7nan, a man indeed, i. 7. 3, 9. 23, vii. 1.21. Often used with an adj. of nationality and not to be translated, i. 2. 20, iii. 4. 35, v. 4. 5, vi. I. 26, vii. 6. 40, cf. vii. 7. 23. 19 4νηρώτα-''Αντανδρο5 Sometimes used in respectful allu- sion, or as a special designation when the person is not named, ό άνήρ, ι 3- 12, meaning Cyrus; τόν Ανδρα όρώ, i. 8. 26, of the Persian king. Without much force, person, individual, i. 3• 18, iii. 2. 20, iv. 8. 4, vii. 6. 39. As a form of address (but not always to be translated), often in connexion with other nouns, with or without ω, as &v- 5pes, gentlemen, soldiers, my men, i. 4. 16, iii. 1. 43, 4. 46 ; Ανδρες φίλοι, comrades, friends, i. 6. 6_; Λνδρ€% στρατιωται, στρατηΎοί, ΧοχαΎοί,^ Ελ- λ77ΐ'€5, fellow soldiers, etc., i. 3. 3, 7. 3, ii. I. 9, iii. I. 15, 34, vi. 3. 12. See Ανθρωποι. 4νηρώτά, see άν€ρωτάω. 4νήχθησαν, see άνάΎω. 4νθ', by elision and euphony for AvtL before an aspirate. 4νθ4μ.ιονι TO [Ανθοί, τ6, flower], flower; i^\., flower patterns, v. 4. 32. 4νθί<Γτημι [R. στα], match against; mid., stand against, re- sist, vii. 3. 11. 4v6p»irivos, η, ov [4νήρ + R. oir], human ; neut. pi. as subst., human things, things fallible, ii. 5. 8. &vOpwiros, o, η [4νήρ+Β. Otr], wan, human being, Lat. homd, one of the human race as opposed to a higher or lower order of beings, ii. 4. 15, iii. 2. 13, V. 8. 9, vii. 6. 11 ; sometimes used instead of άνήρ as a general term for soldier, i. 8. 9, ii. I. 11, iv. 7. 4, vi. 4. 23. With an adj. of nationality and not to be translated (see άνήρ), vi. 4. 23. As a contemptuous expression, /e2ZotSi ov [R. ν€μ], without law, lawless, vi. 6. 13. 4vT*, by elision for άντΙ. 4νταγορ4|;ω [4γ€ίρω], buy in ex- change, i. 5. 6. 4νταγωνίζομαι [R. ay], struggle against, rival, with irpos and the ace, iv. 7. 12. 4ντακούω [R. koF], listen tn one''s turn, ii. 5. 16. "AvravSpos, ή, Antandrus (An- tandro), an ancient city on the southern slope of Mt. Ida, vii. 8. 7, in the Troad, and near the head of the gulf of Adramyttium. It was founded by the Pelasgians, and &ντ€|&ΐΓ(μ,ΐΓλημι-4νητΐ|λά«» 20 21 &ντιτο|(νω-άπαγγ{λλω 1^ later colonized by the Aeolians, but the Persians took it, and during the Peloponnesian war engaged in various struggles with the Athe- nians for its possession. Accord- ing to Vergil, Aeneas built his fleet there. άντιμιτίμιτλημι [R. ιτλα], βΙΙ in recompense, with ace. and gen., iv. 5* '^o. 4vTfvi|jifX^o^flu [R. μ«λ], take care in return^ take measures against, m. I. 16. αντί, prep, with the gen. [αντί], orig. over against^ againstj hence, instead of, for, in place of i. i. 4, 7. 16, iii. 1. 17, 47 ; at^ tSv, i.e. &ντΙ τούτων Λ, t» return for, i. 3. 4, v. 5. 14, Yii, 7. 8; αΙρ€Ϊσθαί τι αντί Timn, prefer one thing to another, i 7. 3, 9. 9; άνθ^ tSv έ(ττηκ6τ€$, standing icith tchich in front (of pine trees), behind which, iv. 7. 6. As adv., in recompense, in re- turn, V. 5. 21. In composition atn-i signifies against, in opposition, in return, in turn, instead. dvTiSiS«i|fci [R. 80], give in re- turn, put in place of, iii. 3. 19. άντικαθίστημι [R. στα], estab- lish, appoint instead, iii. i. 38. &ντιλΙγβι» [R. λ€γ], say or speak against, oppose, object, iii. 2. 38, vi. 5. 22, vii. 3. 14 ; sag in opposition, with the dat. and inf., ii. 5. 29 j with fkif and a clause, ii. 3. 25. *AvTiXc«iV| ovTos, d, Antileon, a Greek soldier from Thurii (see Θούριοί), v. I. 2. avrios, ά, ov [αντί], set against, opposite, face to face. In the pred. where we should use an adv., against, with the dat. of the pers. expressed or understood, i. 10. 10, iv. 3. 26 ; so amiot Uvat^ go to meet, i 8. 17 ; cf 8. 24, vi. 5. 26. As subst., ol άντίοι, the enemy, iii. i . 42 ; ix Tw avriov, from the opposite side, i. 8. 23. l*hrase : (rare, only in Xen. in Att. prose, cf. imrriot) \6yoi άντίοι η ovs ηκονον, words just the remrse of what I heard, vl 6. 34. &vTitrf&pa0^ii» [θ^ω"], run along one's own line to meet, iv. 8. 17. 4ντιΐΓαρα<ΓΚ€υήζομ,αι [R. σκυ], prepare one.self in turn, i. 2. 5. άντιπαρατάττομαι [Κ. τακ], ar- ray oneself against, with κατά φά- λαγγα, iv. 8. 9 (where some read simply φάλαγγα). άντίΊτάμίί,μ,ι [^μι], march along over against, on the opposite side of a stream, iv. 3. 17. άντνπό^σχω [R. onra], suffer in return, ii. 5. 17. άντίΊΓ^ραν or avTiir^pos, adv. [R. iMp], preceded by κατά (κατ), over against, on the opposite side of, with the gen., i. i. 9, iv. 8. 3. See καταντινέράν, καταντινέρά%. άντίΊτοιίω [ΐΓοιίω], do in return, retaliate, iii. 3. 7, 12; mid., Iayclai7n to, contend for, dispute about, with the gen. of the cause and dat. of the pern., ii. i. 11, 3-23; vie with, be rivals in, with the gen. of the thing, iv. 7. 12, or with the dat. of the pers. and vepi with gen. of the thing, V. 2. 11. ovTitropost ov [R. iTfp], on the opposite coast, over against, oppo- site, with the dat., iv. 2. 18. Poetic word, except here. άντιστασ-ιάζω [R. erra], form a party against, contend with, with the dat., iv. i. 27. άντκΓτασ-ιώτης, ου [R. ιττα], one of the opposite faction, party foe or opponent, i. i. 10. άντκΓτοιχΙα» (στοιχέω, στοιχήσω [στοίχο?, 6, row"}, be in a row), stand in rows opposite, with the dat., v. 4. 12. άντιστρατοιη δίνομαι [R. crrpa -f R. Iff δ] , encamp against, vii. 7. 33. άντιτάττ» [R. τακ], set against, set in battle against, with the ace. and the dat., ii. 5. 19 ; mid., set oneself in array, marshal oneself against, set the battle in atray, with the dat., iii. 2. 14, iv. 8. 5, v. 4. 23, vi. 1.9; so the pass., i. 10. 3. &ντιτΐμ4«» [R. Ti], honour in re- turn, Y, 5. 14. &ντιτοξ€νω [R. τακ], shoot in re- turn, shoot back, iii. 3. 15. άντιφνλάττ» [φυλάττω], guard in turn; mid., guard oneself in turn, ii. 5. 3. άντρο V, t6 [Lat. antrum is a borrowed word], cave, i. 2. 8. άντρώδηβ, C5 \_&ντρον -[- Έ. Ρ^δ], cave-like, cavernous, iv. 3. 11. άννστό?, όν [verbal of άνιίω], to be accomplished, possible ; σι-γν , see Αγω. άξων, ovos, b [R. αγ], axle, i. 8. 10. &οπλθ9, ov [R. «reir], without arms, unarmed, ii. 3. 3. άΐΓ , by elision for άπό. άτταγγ^λω [ά7γΑλω], bring or carry back word, bring tidings (from a person or place, of envoys, mes- sengers, scouts, etc.), announce, report, with the simple dat. or πρ05 with the ace. of the person to whom the message is sent, and the gen. with irapa of the person from whom it comes, i. 4. 13, 7. 2, ii. i. 20, 3. 24, 5. 36, vi. 3. 22 ; the pur- port of the message is expressed ψ &,νΛγψΐύω-&ιηψΑ t by the ace, i. 4. 12, ii. i. 21, 3. 2, Yi. 4. 25, or a clause with δτι or ftit, i. 10. 15, ii. I. 4, 22, 4. 4, iv. 5. 20, vi. I. 16, or an indir. quest, 1. 10. 14, ii. 5. 27, or with ώ$ and the gen. abs., ii. i. 21. dimyopivw, pf. aireipijica, ef. dirct- wuv 1&ψΙρ4» and R. 1 ftp], forbid; intr., rewmnce, give up or owi, be- come exhausted, of men or ani- mals, i. 5. 3, ii. 2. 16, V. I. 2, vi. 5. 30, 8. 3. &ir&Yw [R. αγ], lead off or back, march back, esp. of troops, i. 3. 14, u. 3. 26, 29, vii. 6. 9, 7. 10, 57 ; cfltrry away, remove, ¥. 8, 7, vi. i. 8, K. 20, 6. 1. &ΐΓαγ•ιγή, ψ [R. αγ], hading off, removal, vii. 6. 5. diroO^t, is [R. OTTftJ, tuithout experience of, free from, with the gen., vii. 7. 33. 4iraiS«vTos, ov [irotf], unedu- C€U€d, ignorant, ii. 6. 26. άιταίρω [dcCpn»], Ιιβ off; hence, of a ship, set sail, depart, vii. 6. &ΐΓΰΛτ4ω [αΐτέω], demand or ask from, demand (as a right or debt), Lat. posco, i. 2. 11, iv. 2. 18, vii. 5. 7, 7. 20; sometimes with two aces., ii. 5. 38, v. 8. 4, vii. 6. 2 ; one of the aces, may be represented by a rel. clause, vii. 7. 21, 39. ^ άτταλλάττω (άλλάττω, άλλ<%7-, άλλ(ί|ω, ι^λλα^α, -^λλαχα, ιξίλλαγ- {ΛΛΐ, -ηλλάχθιιν ΟΓ ήλ\άyηv [άλλο?], change), change off, abandon, de- part, iii. 2. 28, V. 6. 32 ; so mid., but with aw6 or έκ and the gen., vii. 1. 4, 6. 2 ; pass., be freed from, be rid of, with the gen., iv. 3. 2, V. 1. 13, vi. 2. 15. Phrase: cJs μ^ίον Ιχων άτη\\άyη, lohen he had come offtuith the worst of it, I 10. 8. diraXiSs, ή, 6v, tender, delicate, »οβ, i. 5. 2, V. 4. 32. ^ 4irafuCPo|MU (άμχίβω, αμείψω, ^μ^ιψα, -ηρχίφ&ην, change), dep. mid. and pass., make return, an- swer, reply, ii. 5. 15. Poetic verb, perhaps only here in Attic prose. τ-ψτα, άτήντ-ηκα [avrCJ, meet, go to meet, Lat. obuiam ed, with the dat., ii. 3. 17, 4. 25, vii. 8. 1 ; in a hostile sense, encounter, iv. 6. 5, 24, vi. 1.8. £ira|, numeral adv. [R. ιτογ], once; used in Anab. after Λγ€/, id», iamrep, or cJs, without the ex- act idea of number, Lat. ut semel, si spmel, etc., i. 9. 10, ii. 2. 12, iii. 2. 25, iv. 6. 17, 7. 12. dirapafTKcuoSf ov [R. νκο], un- prepared, i. I. 6, 5. 9, ii. 3. 21. άιτόβ, ά<Γα, iv [iras], all together, all, whole, of persons or of things, when with the art., it has pred. posi- tion, i. 4. 4, 5. 1, 5, 6. 10, 7. 8, ii. 3. 7, 5. 28, 29, iii. 2. 9, iv. 3. 19, V. 6. 8, 7. 28, vi. 4. 20, vii. i. 27. Phrases: ίτάκ τό μΑσον, the entire space between, 1. 4. 4 ; dirav 6μΛ\έ$, entirely level, i. 5. 1 ; xeSLov airaif, all a plain, iv. 4. 1. άΐΓαν6ημΜρ£ζ<0 {αύθη μερίζω, αύθψ μερίδ- [αϊτά% Σήμερα], return on the same day), return on the same day, V, 2. 1. dirfvvwK^vai, see άττιτγνγνώσκω. 4ιηΜμην, see άποδίδωμι. dir48pdy diroSpdsi etc., see awo- διδράσκω. d'WSttKa, see άτοδίδωμι. dirlOcivovi see άΊΤοθνρσκω. d1rfιθέω, άττίίθ-ήσω [R. ιτιθ], dis- obey, be disobedient, ii. 6. 4, iii. 2. 31. dirciX^«i άττειλιίσω, etc. [dir€tXi>], threaten, with a cognate ace. and a clause with tas, or with the dat. of the pers. and a clause with δη, v. 5. 22, 6. 34. dtΓ«ιλή, rjs, boastful promise, threat, generally pi. (always pi. in Anab.), vii. 7. 24, 54. &ιηιμ.ι [R. ccr], be away, stay away, ii. 5. 37, vi. 6. 20. &ΐΓ€ΐμι [el/M], go off or away, depart, retreat, desert, return, go along, disappear (often with fut. meaning in the pres., like ei/w), i. 3. 11, a I. 21, 2. 1, 10, 3. 7, iii. 3. 5, 23 dirftirov-clirXoos 4. 34, iv. 5. 24, 6. i,v. 2. 3,vi.3.25, vii. 2. 16. The person to whom is expressed by wpos, ταρά or ω 5, with the ace, i. 9• ^9, ii. 3• 29, vii. 2. 37 ; from whom by άττό with the gen., vi. 5. 17 ; the place or thing to which by els or έττί with the ace, i. 4. 7, 10. 17, ii. 3. 29, 4. 8, iv. 8. U, vi. 3. 4 ; towards which, by hrL with the gen. or by an adv., i. 7. 4, ii. I. 3, vii. 8. 2 ; for which by έττί with dat., ii. 4. 5 ; within which by etffw with gen., vii. i. 40; from which by άνό or έκ with gen., iii. 5. 4, iv. 3. 9, vii. 6. 42. A cognate ace. follows the verb in v. 3. 6. Phrase: κατά χωράν άιτιέραι, move back to its former position, of an army, vi. 4. 11. amiieov [elirov'], renounce, vii. 1. 41 ; forbid, with the dat. and tlie inf. with μή, vii. 2. 12. d1rcιpηκόταSf see άτΓα'γορ€ύω. &ir€i.pos, ov [R. ircp], without ex- perience, utiskilled, unacquainted with, Lat. imperitus, abs. or with the gen., ii. 2. 5, iii. 2. 16, v. i. 8, 6. 29. άΐΓ€Ϊχον, see άνέχω. dir^KTOvc, see ά.ΊΓθκτ€ΐνω. dircXavvtt [Ααύΐ'ω], drive away, expel, iii. i. 32, vi. 6. 6; with άτό and gen. of the place, iii. 4•. 40; intr., march, ride, or go away, ii. 3. 6, 4. 24, vii. 3. 1, 7. 12 ; with τταρά and ace. of the person, or els and ace. of the place, i. 4. 5, 8. 17, vii. 6.42. dircXOovras, see άττέρχομαι. aircp, see 3 tJOard off, V. 8. 25. άΐΓΐρχο|ΐαι [άρχομαι], the verb &π€ΐμι serving as fut., come or go away, go forward, depart, retreat, desert, return, abs., i. i. 4, 3. 17, ii. 2. 5, 6. 5, iii. 4. 18, iv. 7. 7, v. 2. 7, vi. 3. 25, vii. 2. 15. The person to whom is expressed by irpos or ταρά >vith ace, i. 4. 7, iv. 2. 21, vii. 6. 34 ; from whom by τταρά and gen., i. 9. 29 ; place or thing to which by ^i or els with ace, iii. 5. 7, iv. 8. 0, vii. 5. 8, or by the advs. ο(καδ€ and χωpίs, V. 6. 20, vi. 6. 2 ; so ^|ω with gen., vii. i. 35 ; from which by άτό with gen., v. 2. 27, or by the adv. ένθ4νδε, V. 7. 5. dircxOdvoivou, άττεχθήσομαι, άτψ χθόμην, άπήχθημαι [βχθοί, τό, ha- tred], be hateful to, incur one'^s hatred, with the dat., ii. 6. 19, v. 8. 25, vii. 6. 34, 35, 7. 10. ktri\άκασ-ιν, see άττοδιδράσκω. άΐΓθ8€ίκννμι [R. 1 Βακ], point out, make known, v. 8. 7, 11 ; show to, direct, with the inf., ii. 3. Ii ; ap- point, i. I. 2, 9. 7 ; mid., set forth one's views, declare, with or with- out γρώμην, and with a clause with δτι or with inf., v. 2. 9, 5. 3, 6. 37 ; pass., be declared , vii. i. 26. άίΓοδέρω (δ^ρω, δ€ρω, Ιίδαρα, δ^- δαρμαι, 4δάρην [R. Ινφ], flay), take the hide off, flay, skin, iii. 5. 9. άτΓοδίχομαι [R. 2 δακ], receive at the hands of, accept, vi. i. 24. ά,ιτοδημ^Μ, αποδημήσω [R. δα], be from home, go abroad, vii. 8. 4. άίΓοδιδρασ-κω (-διδράσκω, δρα-, -δράσομαι, -έδρα ν, -δέδρακα [root δρα, run, cf. Eng. tread], run), run away, desert, escape by stealth, I 4. 8, ii. 2. 13, iv. 6. 3, v. 6. 34, vii. 6. 36; abandon, with ace, vi. 4. 8 ; withdraw, hide oneself, with e/s and the ace. of the place, ii. 5. 7. άΐΓθδ£δ»μι [R. δο], give back or up, restore, deliver, iv. 2. 19, 23, V. 3. 6, 7, vii. 5. 5, 6. 2, 3, 8. ; re- turn what is due, pay, with or without μισθδν, i. 2. 11, 12, 4. 15, vii. 5. 4, 7. 34 ; fulfil a promise, i, 7. 6, vii. 6. 22 ; mid., sell, vii. 2. 3, 6, 8. 2, 6. ΐ&ΐΓοδοκ€ΐ [R. δοκ], it displeases, with dat. and inf., ii. 3. 9. 4ΐΓθδονναΐ| see άττοδίδω/Μ. &ΐΓθδρα£ΐ|, airoSpdvoi, see άιτο- δίδράσκω. άίΓοδραμοΰμαι, see άτοτρέχω. ά.νο$ύ» [56^;], strip off, spoil the slain, v. 8. 23; mid. with 2 aor. act., throw off (a garment), iv. 3. 17. &ΐΓθδώΐΓ€ΐ, see άτοδίδωμι. diroOavctv, see αποθνήσκω. &iro0v||VK» Ιθι^σκω], die off, die, be killed, fall in battle, I 6. 11, 9.31, ii. 6. 20, iv. I. 18, v. i. 17; he put to death, ii. i. 10, iii. i. 13, V. 3. 5, vii. 4. 7 ; with ύιτό and gen., hn, at the hands of, ii. 6. 29, v. i. 15, vii. 5. 13 ; the manner of death is 'expressed by the dat. or by a partic, iii. i. 13, 2. 18, v. 7. 19, vu. 2 32. ol άΊΓοθανόντ€^, the dead, the fallen, iii. 4- 5i iv. 2. 23. ^ ■ άίΓοθίω [R. 2 Bv], sacriflce as due, offer up, pay a vow, Lat. uotum solud, with cognate ace, iii. 2. 12, iv. 8. 25. άίΓοικία, as [R. FtK], colony, settlement, Lat. coldnia, iv. 8. 22. &iroiKos, OP [R. FtK], aicay from home ; ir6\is Atoikos, a colony, v. 3. 2, vi. 2. 1 ; as subst, Λιτοικοι, colo- nists, Lat. coldni, v. 5. 10, vi. i. 15. άιτοκαίω, Att. άιτοκάω [κα(«], burn off; of a blizzard, freeze off, Lat. aduro, iv. 5. 3, vii. 4• 3. άίΓΟκαλΙω [R. καλ], call off, call aside, Lat. seuoco, vii. 3. 35. άίΓοκάμνω [κάμνω'\, grow weary, fail, flag, iv. 7-2. &ΐΓΟκ€ΐμαι [κ€ΐμαι], be laid away, be laid up in store, ii. 3. 15, vii. 7. 46. άΐΓθκλ€(ω [icXeiw], shut off, cut of, exclude, iv. 3. 20; with the gen., vi. 6. 13 ; shut, vii. 6. 24. άίΓΟκλίνω {κλίνω, κ\ιν-, κΚινω, (ΕκΧϊνα, κ4κ\ιμαι, έκλίθην ΟΓ -€κ\1νηρ [root κλι, lean, cf κλΐμαξ, Lat. in- ϋΐιηδ, bend, clluus, declivity, libra, balance, Eng. lean, lid], bend), intr., turn aside, turn off the road, ii. 2. 16, άχοκόΐΓτω [κόττω'], cut off, strike off, vii. 4. 15 ; beat off from, of an enemy, iii. 4. 39, iv. 2. 10 ; with άτό and gen. of the place, iv. 2. 17. αποκρίνομαι [κρΐΐ'ω], give a de- cision, ansioer, Lat. responded, abs.,l i. 4. 16, ii. 3. 20, vii. 2. 26, or with cognate ace, ii. 5. 42, iii. 3. 3, or with a rel. clause, ii. i. 9 ; the person to whom is expressed by the dat., i. 4. 14, vi. 6. 34, vii. 7. 4, t\iQ thing to which by vp6s and ace, ii. 5. 39, v. 4. 8 ; the answer itself may be a direct quotation, with or without δτι, i. 6. 8, 8. 16, ii. i. 22, 4. 5, iv. 8. 6, vii. I. 22, or indirect with δτι,' i. 3. 20, 8. 13, iv. 5. 10, V. 4. 8, vii. 2. 10. άιτοκρύιττω [κρύπτω], hide from, conceal, i. 9. 19, iv. 4. 11. airoKTcCv» [iCTcivo»], with aroBviQ- σκω {q.v.) serving as passive, kill off, put to death, slay, i. i. 3, 7, 2. 20, ii. I. 8, 3. 23, iv. 7. 22, v. 7. 16, vi. 4. 24, vii. I. 28. ό,ΐΓθΚτ(νννμι [^κτΙννΰμΛ, not AttlC, collateral form of icrei^w], only pres. and impf., kill, vi. 3. 5, 5. 28. &•ΐΓθκωλύ(« [κωλόω], hinder from, prevent, with the ace and the gen., iii. 3. 3 ; with the ace and μή with inf., vi. 4. 24. απολαμβάνω [λαμβάνω'], take from, take back, receive back, re- cover, regain, i. 2. 27, 4. 8, vii. 3. 31, 7. 25, 8. 6 ; pass., be cut off, as a military phrase, ii. 4. 17 ; cf. iv. 3. 20 (where editions differ). άίΓολιίιτω [Xciirw], leave behind, forsake, desert, abandon, i. 4. 8, ii. 6. 12, iv. 2. 15, vi. 2. 12 ; leave open, leave a space, vi. 5. 11 ; mid. and pass., fall behind, be parted from, iv. 3. 22, v. 8. 16 ; with the gen., V. 4. 20, vi. 3. 26. airoXcKTOSf ov [R. λιγ], selected, picked, ii. 3-15. άΐΓθληφθήτ€» άιτολήψονται, see άίΓολαμβάνω. άιτόλλνμι (δλλνμι, 6λ-, όλώ, ώλβσα, ωλόμην, -ολώλ€κα, ΟΓ βλωλα [root ολ, destroy, cf. Lat. ab-oled, destroy], destroy), destroy utterly, kill, lose, ii. 4. 3, 5. 39, iii. 2. 4, vi. 6. 23 ; with ύτό and the gen. of agent, iii. 4• H» vii. 2. 22 ; mid. with 2 pf. a nd plpf. act.^ pemfe, die, be lost, be ruined, 1. 2. 25, 11. 5. 41, iii. 1.2, 38, vii. i. 19, 4. 12; with ύΐΓΟ and the gen. of cause or the dat. of manner, i. 5. 5, v. 3. 3, 8. 2, vii. 4. 5. Άιτόλλων, ww5, ace. ωνα and ω, voc. Άτολλον, Apollo, one of the greatest of the divinities of the 'AtmhXmvlor^wwHfwm 26 Greeks, son of Zeus and Leto, twin brother of Artemis. His birthplace was Delos. He was the god of prophecy, his most famous oracle being at Delphi, iii. i. 6, of music (9-Apya 28 dtrpoaSo κήτος, o^ [irpod|if|s, ου, the Araxes, an afflu- ent of the Euphrates, above the Tigris, called by other authors Χαβώραί and ' Αβόρραί, now Chabur, i. 4. 19. The name Araxes is ap- plied by other writers to the Phasis of Xenophon. έράτω, see αίρω. Άρβάκάβ, ου, Arbacas, ruler of Media at the time of the retreat of the Ten Thousand, vii. 8. 25. Άρβάκη$, ου, Arbaces, one of the four generals of the king's army, commanding 300,000 men, i. J. 12. ApYCios, a, OP \*Apyos, τ6, Ar- gos], of Argos or Argolis, as subst. masc., an Argive, iv. 2. 13, 17. Argos, the capital of Argolis or Argeia, was situated in a level plain a little to the west of the Ina- chus, and was, according to Greek tradition, the oldest city in Pelo- ponnesus. Said to have been built by Inachus, it was in mythological times the capital city of Danaus, Acrisius, and Orestes. In Homer Argos is subordinate to Mycenae. On its first appearance in history, about 750 b.c, it was the most important city in the peninsula. Owing to destructive wars with Sparta, its power declined, and it took no part in the Persian wars, but, having partially recovered, sided with the Athenians in the Peloponnesian war. It was fa- mous for its worship of Hera. αργό«, 6p [R. Fl 'ApKoSiKrft-lpi&il• 30 31 άρμάμα|α-Αρτάο|;ο$ longing to Arcadia, Arcadian; rh Αρκαδίκόν, the Arcadian forces iv. 8. It)• 'Αρκάς, άδοί, ό, an Arcadian, L 2. 1, ii. I. 10, vi. I. 11, vii. 3. 23. Arcadia was the country in the centre of Peloponnesus, mountain- ous and surrounded by mountains, and watered by many streams, esp. the Alpheus. The Arcadians were a strong, brave, and active race, of a simplicity of life which has been exaggerated by poets into an ideal excellence. They were de- voted to hunting and pastoral pur- suits. They worshipped especially Pan and Artemis. They were fine soldiers, and, with the Achaeans, formed more than half of the Greek force of Cyrus, vi. 2. 10. &ρκ^ΐ0, άρκ4σω, ηρκ€σα [R. opic], »t#ce, be sufficient or enough, with or without the dat. of the person, also with inf., v. i. 13, 7. 11, 8. 13, vii. 5. 3 ; with wpos and the ace. of the thing, ii. 6. 20 ; partic. άρκωρ as adj., enough, v. 6. 1, vi. 4. 6. &pKTos, η [cf. Lat. nrsm, bear], bear, she-bear, i. 9. 6 ; the constel- lation Ursa Maior, the North; so in the plirase rpoy Αρκτον^ towards the North, i. 7. 6, iii. 5. 15. έίρμα, ατο5, τ6 [R. αρ], chariot, Lat. currus, either the war-chariot (the only sort mentioned in the Anab., i. 2. 17, 8. 20, and only of the Persians), or for racing. The two sorts were essen- tially the same, but among the Greeks the war-chariot be- longs to the Heroic Age. The Persian war-chariots were sometimes fitted with scythes, άρματα 5pe- τανηφόρα, i. 7. 10 ff., & 10. See s.v. δρ€7Γανηφ6ροί. The Λμμα was low and broad, to pre- vent its upsetting, and was open behind. It consisted of the δίφρο$ or body (see s.v. δίφροί), axle (Λξωρ), wheels, and pole. In the war-chariot the δίφρο3 was large No. 7. enough, as the name implies, to accommodate both the warrior and his driver (see s.v. tjvIoxos). It consisted of the floor, and of en- closing sides that protected the oc- cupants. At the top of this bar- rier in front was a curved rim (Λρ- τνξ), which could be grasped by the hand or serve as a place to which to attach the reins. There were generally curved rims also at each side of the chariot behind, to assist in mounting. The chariot No. 8. It'lV- had a single axle and two wheels. The latter were of small diameter, and in the vase paintings have generally four spokes. For an ad- ditional representation of the &ρμα,^ see s.v. τέθριΐΓΊΓον. Phrases : e>' Άρματος or iiri του άρματος, in a chariot, i. 2. 16, 7. 20 ; airb του άρ- ματος, with a verb of motion, out of the chariot, i. 8. 3. άρμάμαξα, 17s [K. αρ -J- αμα -|- R. αγ], closed carriage, luxurious, and used in travelling, esp. by women and children, i. 2. 16, 18. *Αρμ€ν(ά, as, Armenia, a lofty table-land of Western Asia, part of the plateau of Ir&n. Of vol- canic nature, it had many moun- tains, including Ararat, and nu- merous rivers, with the sources of the Tigris and the Euphrates, iii. 5. 17, iv. 3. 1, 4• h 4. 4, 5• 34. No exact boundaries can be given, as the country has greatly varied in extent at different periods. The climate was severe in winter, but the valleys were fertile and pro- duced a famous breed of horses. The people were hospitable, al- though rude, and still live in the manner described by Xen., iv. 5. 25 £E. The Armenians were per- haps the first nation to adopt Christianity. Άρμίνιοβ, a, ov J^ Αρμενία], of or belonging to Armenia, Armenian, iv. 3. 4, 5. 33. Άρμήνη, ψ, Harmene (Ak Liman), a port town of the Sino- peans, about 50 stadia west of Sinope, vi. i. 15, 17."-^t/o SM.A\n όρμοσ-τή$, ου [R. αρ], one who sets in order, organizer, adminis- trator, harmost, a Spartan officer in charge of a district of the Peri- oeci, but also and generally one sent out by Sparta to govern a subject state, vi. 2. 13, vii. 2. 5. Xen. applies the title to the Sino- pean governor of Cotyora, v. 5. 19, 20. apvcios, a, ov [apj^s, of a lamb, gen. without nom. in use], of lamb, with icp^o, lamb's meat, lamb, iv. 5.31. άριταγή, ψ [R. άριτ], a seizing, plundering, pillage, v. 4. 16, vii. 1. 18 ; καθ' άρτταγήν, after plunder, άριτάζω (οίριταδ-), άρττάσω, ηρ- πασα, ηρττακα, ηρτασμαι, ηρπάσθη» [R. οριτ], snatch, snatch up, seize, capture, iv. 6. 11, v. 2. 15, vi. i. 8, 5. 18 ; sioeep away, of a river, iv. 3. 6 ; plunder, pillage, rob, i. 2. 25, iv. 5. 12, vii. 5. 13 ; ol eipirafoirres, the pillagers, i. 10. 3 ; perf . pass, par- tic, carried off, stolen, i. 2. 27. "Apirao-os, 0, the Harpasus, a river separating the Chalybes from the Scythini, probably emptying into the Pontus and identical with the Acampsis (Charuk), iv. 7. 18. •Αρταγ^ρστ|5, ου, Artagerses, in command of the king's body-guard of cavalry at Cunaxa, and said to have been slain by Cyrus there, i. 7. 11, 8. 24. •Αρτακάμαβ, α (Dor. gen.), AHa- camas, satrap of Phrygia, vii. 8. 25. •Αρταξέρξη?, ου [Pers. Arta- Khshatra, Lord of the Times'], m the Anab. Artaxerxes II. (called Mnemon from his good memory), eldest son of Darius II. and Pary- satis, and king of Persia from 405 to 361 or 359 b.c, i. i. 1, 3, 4. Against him Cyrus, his younger brother, made the expedition re- corded in the Anab. His reign was a succession of wars, carried on with rebellious satraps and tribu- tary princes. Of a weak and mild character, he left too much to the government of his slaves. Towards the end of his reign his eldest son, Darius, formed an unsuccessful conspiracy to assassinate him. He was succeeded by his son Ochus (under the style of Artaxerxes III.), who gained the throne by causing the death of his two brothers. •Apraotos, 0, Artaozus, a trusted friend of Cyrus, but after the bat- tle of Cunaxa one of the king's I party, ii. 4. 16, 5. 35. •M 1 *ΑρταΐΓάτιι$-άσέβ€ΐα 32 Αρταιτάτης, ον^ Artapates,, the confidential attendant of Cyme, slain upon his master's body at Cunaxa, i. 6. 11, 8. 28. &f»Td«i, «ρττίσω, etc. [dfCp»], hang on tOf fasten one thin*; to another, ni. c. 10. 'ApTciusi t5of, ή, Artemis, daugh- ter of Zeus and Leto, and twin- sister of Apollo. Like her brother, she spread pestilence and sudden death with her arrows, but pro- tected those who loved her. She wiis the especial patroness of hunt- ing, and as such was worshipped at Agrae in Attica, where also there was a yearly sacrifice in her hon- our to cominemorate the victory over the Persians, iii. 2. 12. The Artemis of the renowned temple at Ephesus was an Asiatic divinity, the A naitis- Aphrodite of the Per- sians, having originally nothing in common with the Greek goddess. V. 3. 4, 6 ff. fipTt, adv. [R. ap], justjusi now, iv. 6. 1, vii. 4. 7. 'ApτLμaSf a (Dor. gen.), AHimas, aatrap of Lydia, vii. 8. 25. 4mK^irot, 6 [Apros + root κοιτ, cook, cf. Lat. coquo, cook^, baker, ifmif, ά, loaf of bread, gener- ally of wheat, but sometimes of barley, i. 9. 26, 11. 4. 28, iv. 5. 31, V. 3. 0; Αρτοι ξϋμιται, leavened or raised bread, vii. 3. 21 ; τριχοίηκοί apros, three-quart loaf, vii. 3. 23. *Α|»το^χόβ, ά (Dor. gen.), AHu- chas, a general in the king's army, 3* *ΑρύσΎαβ> ο or ου, Arystas, an Arcadian, described as a great eater, vii. 3. 23 f. Άρχαγόρόβ, ά or ου, Archaffo- ras, captain in tlie Greek army, exiled from Argos, iv. 2. 13, 17. &PX0S0S, i, ov Γ&ΡΧ»], from of old, oM, amient, lii. i. 4, iv. 5. 14, vii. I. 28, 3. 28; KHpos ό apxatot, Cyrus the Elder, i. 9. 1 ; τό άψχαΐον, νΛγ., formerly, i. i. β. άρχή» ^5 [&PX»], beginning, ori- gin; so adv. αρχήν, from the βrst, at first, often followed by a neg. in the sense of not at all, vii. 7. 28 ; the first place, sovereignty, rule, power, command, ii. i. 11, 3. 23, iii. 4. 8, vi. I. 19, 2. 12 ; govern- ment, province, empire, realm, i. 1. 2, 5. 9, ii. 3. 29, vii. 2. 32, 5. 1. apxiKds, ή, 6p [&ρχω], fit to com- mand, ii. 6. 8, 2υ. δ.ρχω, άρξω, ήρξα, 9ΐρΎμαι, ηρχθη» [*ΡΧ»]ί begin, be first, with the inf. or with the gen., i. 3. 1, 4. 15, iii. 1. 24, V. 7. 34, vii. 7. 17 ; be the foremost, hence rule, command, lead, reign over, abs., or with the gen. of persons, countries, or cities, i. I. 8, 7. 11, 9. 1, 19, 10. 7, ii. 2. 5, 6. 21, V. 7. 10, vi. 6. 9; as subst., Αρχων, leader, chief, general, gov- ernor, i. I. 2, 8. 22, ii. i. 3, iii. i. 38, iv. 5. 28, V. 6. 8 ; a higher title tlmn στρατψγόί, vi. i. 18, 2. 0; 6 Αρξα$, the former rider, i. 4. 10, V. 7. 34 ; TO Apxeiv, the government, n. I. 4 ; mid., begin, abs., with the gen., or with the inf., i. 8. 18, ii. 6. 14, iii. 2. 7, 9, v. 7. 13, vii. 2. 24; of the extent of a country, begin with, with άτ6 and the geii., vi. 4. 1 ; of a place, begin from, Mart from, with έκ and the gen., VI. 2. 18 ; pass., be begun, be ruled, with or without inra and the gen., obey, i. 3. 15, 9. 4, ii. 6. 15, v. 7. 12 ; d dpxofuvoi, subjects, soldiers, 11. 6. 19, iii. 2. 30. Phrases : irpos AWov αρχομένου^ AxUvai (others read dXXous Apxovrm, or άρξομένου^, fut. pass.), go into another's ser- vice, transfer one's allegiance, ii. 6. 12; Apx€/a2/ the ftOe^piaif on any wind instrument, κεράσι καΐ σάλτη-γξιν^ vii. 3. 32; mid., have the flute played for oney he accompanied on the flute, vi. i. JIX• A^XCtofMU (oiJ\t3-), ιηύΧισάμην and ηύΧΙσθην [R. 2 oF], lie in the open air, pass the night, bivouac, mcamp, ii. 2. 17, iv. i. U, 3. 1, vi. 4. 1, vii. 4. 11. aiXds, 4 [R. 2 aF], a trt» thought- tessness, folly, v. i. 14, &ψ(ΐβ•ν, ov, gen. omt [φρήν], without sense, foolish, light-headed, out of one's head, iv. 8. 20, vii. i. 28. άφνλακτίι» [φυλάττω], be with- out a watch, off one's guard, vii. 8. 20. άφνλακτο$ι ov [φνλάττ»»], «n- watched, unguarded, ii. 6. 24, v. 7. 14. &φνλάκτ•ιι, adv. [φιιλ4τται], un- guardedly, rashly, v. i. 6. Ά)ςαι^$, οΰ, 6, an Achaean, i. i. 11, ii. 6. 30, vi. 2. 7. Achaia was the country lying along the north- ern coast of Peloponnesus, and contained a confederacy of twelve cities. The Achaeans enjoyed in- ternal prosperity, but had but little influence outside and held aloof from Hellenic affairs until after the death of Alexander, when they formed the Achaean League. In the Heroic Age they were the ruling nation in Peloponnesus, and accordingly Homer calls the Greeks collectively Achaeans. They formed with the Arcadians over, one-half of the Ten Thousand, vi. 2. 9, 10. άχάρι<Γτο«, OP [R. χαρ], ungra- cious, unpleasant; ούκ αχάριστα X^eti/, ironical, speak prettily enough, ii. i. 13 (some read άχά- ριτα) ; of persons, act., ungrateful, pass., unrewarded, i. 9. 18, vii. 6. 23. 4χαρ(<ΓΓω«, adv. [R. χαμ], ungra- ciously, without gratitude, thank- lessly, ii. 3. 18, vii. 7. 23. &χάριτι&, see αχάριστοι. *Αχ€ρου(Γΐάς, ados, η [Άχαρων, Acheron], Acheru»ian; with Xep- povjiaos, the promontory or penin- sula of Acheron (Baba-Burun), near Heraclea in Bithynia, where Heracles, according to the myth, descended to fetch up Cerberus, vi. 2. 2. &χθθ|ΐαι,, άχΘέσομΛΐ, ήχθέσθην [c/. άχοί, τ6, pain, distress, Lat. anger, anguish, Eng. awe, ugly], be weighed down, distressed, trou- bled, displeased, vexed, angry at, abs., vii. 5. 5, 6; with δτι and a clause, sometimes accompanied by τοΰτο, iii. 2. 20, v. 4. 18, vi. 6. 9 ; with the gen. abs., i. i. 8 ; with the dat. of the person, vi. i. 29, vii. 5. 7; with the dat. of the cause, sometimes governed by M, v. 7. 20, vii. 6. 10. &XpiSot, or Ιχράομαί"], useless, ηηβί for service, of persons or things, iv. 6. 26, v. 2. 21. &χρη«Γτο5, ov ΙχράομΛίΊ, useless, unserviceable, iii. 4• 26. &ypi, adv., utterly, Lat. usque; with e/s, up to, V. 5. 4 ; as temporal conj., with iv and the subjv., until, ii. 3. 2. , • 1 άψίνθιον» TO, wormwood, 1. 5• 1. Βαβυλών, Cjpos, ή IBabel, the aate of God], Babylon, i. 4• ^h 1 5, ii. 2. 6, 4. 12, iii• 5• 1^, cue of the oldest and most famous cities of antiquity. Its origin is un- known. It was the capital of the province of the same name as early as the Elamite conquest, b.c. 2300. After the 13th century, when As- syria became the controlling power in the Tigris-Euphrates region, the city was conquered at various times by Assyrian kings and fin- ally by Sennacherib (first part of the 7th century), who dealt its prosperity a heavy blow. With the fall of Nineveh and the rise of the new Babylonian empire (B.C. 606), it entered on a career of unprecedented splendour. It was rebuilt and beautified by Naho- polassar, his son Nebuchadnezzar, and their successors down to the last native king, Nabonidas. It survived the conquests of Cyrus the Great (539 b.c.) and of Alex- ander (331 B.C.) ; its last king was the Seleucid Antiochus the Great (224-187 B.C.). In Pliny's time it was a ruin, and has so contin- ued until to-day. Herodotus (who probably and rightly included Ba- sippa in his measurement) de- scribes it as a square, each side of which was 120 stadia long. Its hanging-garden, built by Nebu- chadnezzar for his Median queen, was reckoned one of the wonders of the world. The ruins of Baby- lon (which represent the city of the Nabopolassar dynasty) have been in part excavated, and nu- merous inscriptions have been found, from which and from As- syrian inscriptions its history has been to some extent recovered. Βαβυλ»ν(ά, as [Βαβυλώνιοι], Ba- bylonia, the district in which Baby- lon was situated, i. 7. 1. It was a plain, watered by the Tigris and Euphrates and bounded on the north by Mesopotamia, and ex- tending to the Persian gulf on the south. The famous Median wall was intended as a barrier agamst foes from the north. The natural fertility of the plain was increased by means of canals from the rivers. Βαβυλώνιοδ, ά, ov [ΒαβυΧών], of Babylon, with χώρα, ii. 2. 13. βάδην, adv. [R. βα], at a walk, with slow pace, of men or horses, iv. 8. 28, V. 4• 23, vi. 5. 25. Phrase: βάδην ταχύ, of soldiers, at a quick- step, of an advance in which the ranks were still preserved, as op- posed to δρόμψ, iv. 6. 25.^ βαδίζω (βαδιδ-), βαδιουμΛΐ, έβά- δισα, βεβάδικα [R. βα], go on foot, loalk, march, Lat. incedo, of sol- diers, v. 1.2, vi. 3. 19. βάθθ5, ovs, TO Ιβαθυ$, cf Eng. bathos], depth or height, ace. to the point of view of the speaker, Lat. altitudo, i. 7• 1^» ίϋ• 5• 7, iv. c 4. βάθνδ, eta, ύ, deep or high, Lat. altus, i. 7. 14, V. 2. 3. βαίνω (βα-, βαν-), β'ήσομΛΐ, βέ- βηκα, 4βην [R. βα], go, walk ; perf , have stepped out, stand, stand Jast, iii. 2. 19. .. -, ^ 77 βακτηρία, os [R. βα], staff, walk- ing-stick, Lat. baculum. Staves and walking-sticks were very gen- erally carried by the Greeks, not only by the old for support (see the representation of Pelias, s.v. ap^opeus), but also by young men, and even in the army, u. 3. U^ iv. 7.26. it pdAavof-pcXriitv 40 41 βήμα-ΒκτάνΟη II ' I I i ^ ! βάλανος, ή [c/. Lat. glans^ acorn, nut], acorn, hence any acorn- shaped fruit, as a date, i. c. 10, ii. β4λλι» (/3αλ-, /9λα-), /3αλώ, ^^α- Xor, βέβΧηκα, βέβλημΛΐ, έβλήθην [βάλλω], throw, throw at, hit, abs. or with the ace. of the person, the word for the missile being omitted or in the dat, i. 3. 1, iii. 4. 25, iv. 2. 12, V. 4. 23, 7. 21, vii. 4. 15 ; pass., exposed to missiles, under fire, iv. 7. 6, V. 2. 32. Phrase : oi έκ xeipbs βάλ\οντ€$ = ά,κοντισταί, iii. 3. 15. β4«τι» {βαφ-), βάψω, ίβαψα, βέ- βαμμαι, έβάφην [c/. Eng. baptize], dip, dip in, ii. 2. 9. βαρβαρικός, ή, 6» Ιβάμβαρο^], not Greek, foreign, barbaric, i. 3. 14, 8. 14, iv. 5. 33, V. 7. 13 ; ro βαρβαρι- k6p (sc. στράτευμα), the Persian force of Cyras, i. 2. 1, 8. 5. βαρβαρικΔβ, adv. Ιβαρβαρικό$], in a foreign tongue, e.g. in Persian, 1- 8. 1. βάρβαρος, oy [cf Eng. barbarous], not Greek, foreign, barbarian, un- dmlized, a word applied by the Greeks to all other races, their possessions, and defects; as adj., i. 7• •% ii. 5• 32, V. 5. 10, vii. i. 29, 3. 18 ; sup. βαρβαρώτατοί, most un- civilized, V. 4. 34 ; as subst., for- eigner, barbarian, in the Anab. applied esp. to Persians, i. i. 5, 9. 13, ii. I. 7, 6. 28, iii. i. 35, iv. 2. 3, V. 4. 16, vii. I. 28. βαρέως, adv. [βαρύ$, hem^, cf. l^t.grauis, heavg, Eng. baty-tone], heavihj, grievously ; in the phrases βαρέων φέρ€ΐν, take to heart, Lat. grauiter ferre, ii. i. 4, and βαρέω$ ακού€ΐν, hear with anger, ii. i. 9. Bacrios, ου, Bamas, an Arcadian, killed by the Carduchi, iv. i. 18. Boo-Cds, ου, Basias, of Elis, a soothsayer, vii. 8. 10. βασ-ιλιία, as [/?α<Γΐλ«ίί], king- do7n, ropaU^, royal dignity, i. i. 3, iii. 2. 15, vii. 7. 26. βαο-αηοι, OP {βασιΧ^ύ^], belong- mg to a king, royal, i. 2. 20, 10. 12, ii. I. 4; neut. as subst. and gener- ally pi., palace, cf Lat. regia (fem. ), 1. 2. 7, 9, 4. 10, iii. 4. 24, iv. 4. 2. βαβΓΐλ€ΰ5, 4ωs, ό [cf Eng. basilica, basilisk], king, Lat. rex, esp. the King of Persia, when the art. is regularly omitted as the word is used as a proper name, i. i. 5, ri. I. 4, iii. I. 2, V. 5. 17; so niyas βασι\€Μ or βασι\€ύ5 μέyas, i. 2. 8, 4. 11 ; of other kings with the art., i. 2. 12, V. 4. 26, vii. i. 28 ; of Zeus, iii. I. 12, vi. i. 22. Phrases: ό άνω βασι\€ύί, the king of the up-country, applied even to the king of Persia, vii. I. 28, 7. 3; παρά βασι\€Ϊ, at court, i. 2. 27. βαο-ιλιόω, βασι\€ύσω Ιβα<η\€ύ$], be king, be sovereign, i. i. 4, ii. 2. 1 ; with gen., v. 6. 37. βασ-ιλικός, ij, 6v [βασιλεύε], Μ to be king, i. 9. 1 ; belonging 'to a king, royal, ii. 2. 12, iii. 5. 16. βάσ•ΐ|Μ>«, ov [R. βα], passable, for animals; iws βάσιμα 1j» (sc. τψ ΓίΓίΓφ), as long as he could ride, iii. 4. 49. βατόδ, ή, 6v [R. βα], passable, for animals, with dat., iv. 6. 17. βέβαιος, a, ov [R. βα], abiding fast, trusty, constant, i. 9. 30. βιβαιόω, βφαίώσω [R. βα], make sure, confirin, fulfil, with ace. of the thing and dat. of the person, vii. 6. 17. βιβηκότ€«, see βαίνω. BAfo-is, see B^Xeo-i/j. Βέλ«Γν9> vos, or BAc(ns, toy, 6, Belesys, satrap of Syria and As- syria, i. 4. 10, vii. 8. 25. βέλος, om, τ6 [βάλλω], thing thrown of any sort, missile, iii. 3. 16, iv. 3. 6, V. 2. 14 ; Ιίξω των β€\ων, out of range, iii. 4. 15, v. 2. 26. βΙλτΜΓτος, η, ov [R. βολ], used as sup. of ayaBos, best In any re- spect, noblest, bravest, of meas- ures, most advantageous, i. i. 6, ii. ς. 41, V. i. 8, 6.2, vii. 6. 12. β€λτί«ν, ov [R. βολ], used as comp. of ά7α go, arrive, vii. i. 33; per- haps only here in Att. prose, and here in the mouth of a Theban. βθ4β», βοήσομαι, έβόησα [R. βόρ], mout, call out, cry aloud, abs., with dat aaid a clause with &ri, or with dat. and inf., i. 8. 1, 12, iv. z. 22, 7.24, V. 6. 34. ^ βoiικds or βοΪ9ώ$, τ}, 6μ [R. βορ], belonging to an ox; ^eoyri βο€ΐκά, ox-ieams, vii. 5. 2, 4. βοΐκ^$, see βο€ΐκό$. Ρ^*ρ[η.βορ], shout, call, cry, iv, 7. 23 bis. ^' β^β€ΐα, 5s [R. βοΡ-^θ4ω], sue cowr, help, esp. in the form of troops, Ift. auxilia, rescuing party, ii. 3. 19, m, K. 4. "^ fo^i β^^^ή^ω, έβφψτα, β€. βφηκα, βΐβο-ήθημαι [R. βορ+ θέωΛ, run to rescue at a cry for help, come to the rescue, help, abs., i. 9. 6, iv. 8. 13, V. I. 8, vii. 7. 19, with dat, 11. 4. 20, 2δ, iii. 4. 13, vii. 4. 7, or with Ari and ace. of the enemy and Μμ with gen. of the side helped, 115. β. ^ * P*lfH»s, & [cf. Lat. fodid, dig], m^hole, hollow, iv, 5, β, of & grave. V, o* y. Boto-Kos, 0, Boiscus, a Thessa- han pugilist, a shirk and a plun- derer, v. 8. 23. Βοιωτία, ds [Boiortos], Boeotia, 111. I. 31, a country in northern Greece, bounded on the north by the territory of the Opuntian Lo- cnans, east by the Euboean sea, south by Attica, Megaris, and the Corinthian gulf, and west by Pho- cis. Its position, between seas and mountains, and its numerous lakes and marshes, rendered the cli- mate damp and subject to frequent changes, and its cloudy skies made the air thick and heavy. To this and to the fact that the Boeotians were great eaters may be ascribed the natural dullness attributed to them, especially by the lively Athe- nians, which passed into a prov- erb. Yet Boeotia furnished not only good soldiers, athletes, and flute-players, but also several great generals, poets, and historians. Under Epamhiondas it became for a short time the mistress of Hellas. Boeotia was settled by Aeolians from Thessaly after the Trojan war, βοιωτιάξω [Βοιώτω?], act the Boeotian; βοιωτιάξ^ειν ry φωνχι, speak taith a Boeotian accent, that m, broadly, coarsely, as if from a full mouth, iii. i. 2β. Βοιώτιοδ, ά, ov [Βοιωτοί], Boeo- tian; only as subst, ii. 5. 31, 6. 16. V. 6. 19. Bouertfs. 6, a Boeotian, v. 3. 6. Bopias, ου, or coiitr., Boppas, a, Boreas, the North wind, Lat. aquilo, with or without di^/uos, iv. 5. 3, V. 7. 7. Strictly speaking, this was to the Greek a north-east wind, blowing over the Tliracian mountains, and bringing purer and cooler air. βάο-κημα, aros, r6 [βόσκω, feed], fed or fatted beast; pi., caUle in pasture, iii. 5. 2, βονλιΰ», ^νλ€ύσω, etc. [R. βολ], plan, think up, rare in act., with 43 βουλή-Βν(άνηον ace. and dat., ii. 5. 6 ; usually in mid., advise with oneself, plan, ponder, consider, deliberate, medi- tate, abs., ii. 3. 8, iii. 2. 36, vi. 2. 8 ; the subject under consideration may be expressed by the ace, i. i. 7, 10. 10, vi. I. 33, 2. 4, or by a relative clause, i. 3. 11, 6. 6, iii. 2. 08, or by a clause introduced by δτωϊ with the fut. ind. or the opt. with dv, i. I. 4, iv. 6. 7, v. 7. 20, or by an indirect question, single or double, i. 10. 5, iv. 6. 8, vi. 2. 4, vii. 5. 9, or by vepi with gen. of the person or the thing, or irp6s with ace. of the thing, i. 3. 19, ii. 3. 20, 21, V. 1.2, vi. 6. 28 ; the person on whose behalf the plan is made is expressed by 0w4p or vp6 with gen., V. 7. 12, vii. 6. 27 ; resolve on, set- tle on, Lat. consilium capid, with ace. of the thing, or with the inf., iii. I. 34, 2, 8, 3. 2. βουλή, ^s [R. βολ], consultation, reflexion, deliberation, vi. 5. 13. βουλϊμιάω, έβουλϊμίάσα, [R. βοΡ -HXi/ios], have bulimy, iv. 5. 7, 8. Bulimy, or 'ox-famine' (i.e. great hunger), was a disease brought on by exposure to intense cold and hunger. It developed suddenly, the symptoms being a burning and gnawing in the pit of the stomach, until faintness and collapse en- sued. The patient quickly recov- ered on receiving nourishment. βονλομαι. βουλήσομαι, βίβούλη- μαι, έβουλήθην [R. ^\],Will,wi8h, desire, be inclined, Lat. uold, used abs. or with ace, ii. i. 5, 3. 4, iii. 4. 41, iv. I. 3, V. 4, 6, 8, vi. i. 20, vii. 2. 3, with the simple inf. or ace. and inf., i. i. 1, 11, ii. i. 10, 5. 12, iii. I. 25, 45, iv. 2. 11, v. 6. 17, vi. 2. 13, 5. 18, vii. 1. 4 ; prefer, choose, ii. 6. 6 ; ό βουλόμενο^, he that wishes, whoever likes, i. 3. 9, v. 3. 10, 7. 27, vi. 4. 15. βουΐΓΟρο«, ov [R. βοΡ+ R- i«p]i ox-piercing; only in phrase βου- vopos όβ€λία'κοί, a spit big enough for a whole ox, ox-spit, vii. 8. 14. βοΰβι /Soos, 0, η [R, βορ], ox, steer, bullock, cow, Lat. bos; pi., cattle, oxen, ii. i. 6, iii. 5, 9, iv. 5. 25, vi. I. 4, vii. 7. 53; /Sous, ή, ox- hide, iv, 5. 14, 7, 22, V. 4. 12. Phrase: jSoOs ύφ' αμάξης, draught- ox, vi. 4. 22, 25. βρα84ω$. adv. [βραδύί], slowly, leisurely, i. 8. 11. βραδν$) eta, ύ, slow ; only in the phrase τό βραδύτατον (sc. του στρα- τ€ύματο$), the slowest division of the army, vii. 3. 37. βραχν$» €Ϊα, ύ [cf Lat. breuis, short], short, of space and time; only in phrases: ττέτΐσθαι βραχύ, have a short flight, i. 5. 3 ; βραχύ- T€pa τοξ€ύ€ΐν, shoot less far, iii. 3. 7 ; ivl βραχύ έξικνβΐσθαι, have a short range, iii. 3, 17. βρέχω, €βρ€ξα, βέβρ^γμαι, έβρέχθην [cf. Lat, rigo, wet], wet, pass., get wet, i. 4. 17, iii. 2. 22, iv. 3. 12, 5. 2. βροντή, ijs [root βρ€μ. roar, cf. Lat. fremd, roar, Eng. brim], thun- der, clap of thunder, iii. i. 11. βρωτός. ή, όν [cf βιβρώσκω, eat, Lat. Moro, devour, uordx, vora- cious], that is to be eaten, eatable, iv. 5. 5, 8. Βυξάντιον. TO [Bufdmos], By- zantium (Constantinople), a city in Thrace on the Bosporus, founded by the Megarians (led, ace. to the story, by Byzas) in 667 b.c. Its favourable situation rapidly gave it importance, and it became the key to the Pontus. Abandoned by its inhabitants in the Persian wars, it afterwards fell into the hands of the Athenians, vii. i. 27, and after Aegos Potami passed to the Spar- tans, in whose control it was at the time of the retreat of the Ten Thousand, vi. 2. 13, 4. 2, vii. i. 2, 2. 6. Later it became an ally of Athens and enjoyed independence until it fell into the power of the Romans. The Emperor Constan- tine founded the modern city in 330 A. D. (Turkish Istamboul or Stamboul). Bv|4rruif-^YfXdei jifl!./l. 45 γ^λοΐος-γ^ΎνομΜ \] it ■ i I Bw|4irruiSt Λ J or, belonging to Byzantium^ Byzantine; only as subst, in pL, the Byzantines, vii. i. 19, 39. βω|Μ$$, 6 [R. βα], any raised place, but. esp. altar, Lat. dra, i. 6. 7, V. 3. 9 ; in the stadium (see β.©, στάδιο ν) it was usual to have the start made from near an altar, iv. 8. 28. For an illustration of one form of the altar used in bloody sacrifice, vii. i. 40, see s.v, σψάττω. γαλήιηι, ψ, sHUness, calm, of wind or sea, v. 7. 8. yapi» (yaMr), Ύαμω, ίγημΛ, y€- Ύάμηκα, '^€^άμ•ημΛΐ [γά/ωί], marry, wed^ act. of tlie man, Lat. ducd; mid. and pass, of the woman, L&t, nUbd, ένάτην ημέραν Ύ^γαμιιμένη, an eight days^ bnde, iv. 5. 24. γάμος» 6 [cf. Eng. bi-gamy, crypto- gam^, wedding, marriage; dyei» έπΙ yάμψ, take home as oite'e wife, 11• ^. o. Fdvos or Favos, ij, Ganus (Ga• nos), a Thracian city on the Pro- pontis, southwest of Bisanthe, vii. 5.8. γάρ, post-positive causal conj. lyi 4-4po], for, commonly giving the cause, reason, explanation, or con- firmation of some fact, which may either follow or precede the clause with yap, or be supplied from the context, 1. 2. 2, 3. 17, 6. 8, ii. 3. 13, 5. 40, V. 6. 4 ; yap cannot always be translated for, but because, indeed, certainly, then, now, for example, namely, may be used when it ex- presses specification, confirmation, or explanation, i. 7. 4, 9. 25, ii. 5. 11, iii. 2. 29, V. i. 8, vii. 7. 5; in questions yap refers to a cir- cumstance not expressed, though giving rise to the question, and may be translated then, or left un- translated, i. 7. 9, V. 7. 10, vii. 2. 28. In elliptical phrases: καΐ yap, Lat etenim, and to be sure, and really, where there is an ellipsis between καί and yap, and (this was so) be- cause, i. 1.6, 8, iii. 3. 4, V. 6. 11, 8. 11 ; καΐ yap οϋν, and therefore, and consequently, in full, and (this is) then (so), for, i. 9. 8, 12, 17, ii. 6. 13, vii. 6. 37; αλλά yap, Lat. at enim, but, but to be sure, in full, but (enough of this), /or, iii. i.24, 2. 25, 32. γΐΜΓτήρ, Tpos, ij [cf Lat. uenter, belly, Eng. gastric], belly, of men or animals, ii. 5. 33, iv. 5. 36. yavXiKOs orYavXiriKds» ή, όν [yav- \ό%, 6, merchant-vessel], belonging to a merchant-vessel ; yavXiKa χρή- ματα, merchantmen's cargoes, v. 8. 1. Γανλύτης» ου, GauUtes, a Samian exile, in the confidence of Cyrus, i. 7. 5. YavXiTiKdSf see yavKiKO^. γ<, intensive particle, enclitic and post-positive, serving to em- phasise a preceding word, or the clause which the word introduces ; often it can be translated only by emphasis, at other times yet, at least, nevertheless, indeed, cer- tainly, even, can be used, i. 3. 9, 6. 5, 9. 18, ii. 2. 12, iii. i. 27, 2. 24, iv. 8. 6, vii. 2. 38, 7. 47, 51 ; in addi- tion to its emphasising force it often has a limiting or restricting sense, like Lat. quidem, i. 3. 21, 10. 3 ; it is also used to introduce and con- trast something new with the fore- going, 1. 9. 14, 24, ii. 5. 19, iii. 3. 6 ; with other particles, y€ 5iJ, indeed, iv. 6. 3 ; 76 μήν, ye μέντοι, at least, at any rcUe, certainly, i. 9. 14, 16, 20, iL 3. 9, iii. i. 27, vii. 7. 32. Ύ^γινήοΓΟαι., -γ^γονα, see ylyvoμΛι. γ•£τ•»ν, ons, 6 [γή], neighbour, Lat ulclnus, with gen. or dat., ii. 3. 18, iii. 2. 4, vii. 3. 17. YcXdw, y€\άσoμm, iyiXeura, iye- Χάσθην, laugh, Lat. rideo, abs. or with ^i and dat, ii. 1. 13, v. 4. 34, vii. 4. 11, 7. 54, •ycXolos, ά,ον [7€λάω], laughable, farcical, ridiculous, with inf. or with el and a clause, v. 6. 25, vi. i. 30. Y^tts» ωτο5, ό [7€λάω], laughter, roar of laughter, ί.Λ2. 18, iv. 8. 28, vii. 3. 25. ?^ , 1 Χά«- YcXtfTOtroios, ό ^[7Αω5 + ιτοι^ω], one who makes laughter, jester, a professional who was employed chiefly at dinner-parties, vii. 3. 33. γ^μω, only in pres. and impf., be full of, stuffed with, with gen., iv. 6.27. Ycvca, as [R. Y«v], time of birth, birth ; arb 7ei«a$, from one's birth- day, of age, ii. 6. 30. •γcv€ιdω [y^ws], groio a beard, be bearded, ii. 6. 28. γ€νναλότης, t^tos, η [R. ycv], emi- nence of race or character {cf Lat. generdsus), hence, nobility, mag- nanimity, generosity, vii. 7. 41. Yc'vos, ous, TO [R. Ycv], family, race, Lat. genus, i. 6. 1. Ycpaios, a, 6v [_yip(av], old, with the additional idea of reverence or dignity ; comp. oi yepahepoi, digni- taries, elders, v. 7. 17. Y€p, βροντή), arise, resound, iii. i. 11, iv. 7. 23, 8. 28. When followed by the simple inf., be possible, i. 9. 13 ; when by an adj. or adv., be, prove oneself to be, I 6. 8, 10. 7, ii, 2. 18, iii. 4. 36, iv. i. 26, 2. 15, 3. 24, vii. 8. 11. Often Λvith dat, as δμόμο$ iyivero rots στμαηώταΐί, the SOl• diers started to run, i. 2. 17. Phrases: ^1» έαυτφ yiyveaBai, come to himself, recover himself i. 5. 17; for many others, see the various prepositions; rb yevo^evop or rd y€y€vημiwp, the occurrence^ the fact, i. 9. 30, vi. 3. 23 ; τΑ 7€7€ιίϊ- μ4ι^α, the circumstances, ii. 5. 33, v. 4. 19. ■γιγνώσ-κω (yvo-)^yvώaΌμaι, iyvtav, ^yvujKa, ίyvωσμ(^ι, iyvaverfv [R. γνω], know, perceive, feel, experience, un- derstand, recognise, learn, think, be convinced, with the simple ace, i. 3. 13, ii. 3. 19, 5. 35, iii. i. 45, iv. 8. 4, V. I. 14, vii. 5. 11 ; with δη and a clause, i. 3. 2, ii. 2. 15, iii. 3. 4, V. 6. 13, vi. I. 31 ; with the ace. and a partic, i. 7. 4, ii. 5. 13, iii. 4, 36, vii. 7. 24 ; with the ace. and inf., i. 3. 12, 9. 18 ; with repl and gen., ii. 5. 8; abs., iii. i. 27; the source is expressed by 4κ and gen., vii. 7. 43. rXovf, 6, Ghts, a noble Egyp- tian, son of Tamos, on the staff of Cyrus. After the d%ath of Cyrus, he Joined the king's party, i. 4. 16, 5. 7, ii. I. 3, 4. 24. He was hon- oured by Artaxerxes and placed in command of a fleet, but on en- gaging in another revolt he was put to death. rwio^inrott ό, Gnesippus, a cap- tain from Athens, vii. 3. 28. γνφ(ΐ|ι see yiyvoffKut, γνώμη, η$ [R. γνω], opinion, in- tention, purpose, plan, judgment^ advice, Lat. sententia, i. 6. 9, 10, 8. 10, ii. 2. 10, 12, iii. i. 41, vi. i. 31, 3. 17, vii. 6. 20. Joined with certain verbs, it forms a phrase wliich is treated like a single verb and which may be followed by the inf. or by &ri and a clause, v. 5. 3, 6. 37, or by «y with the gen. or ace. abs., i. 2• ^^ 8. 10. Phrases : dpcv yvώβη% Ttvoi, against one^s will, i. 3. 13 ; έμχιμνλά^ τ^ν y»ώμηv, satisfy one's heart's desire, i. 7. 8; rpos Tiva T^v yvώμηv ίχα», be on one's side, be devoted to one, ii. 5-29; ypώμ^ι κο\ά{;€ίΡ, punish on princi- ple, ii. 6. 9. Ϊνώναι, γνώσ-€θΓ0€, see yιypώσκω. Όγγύλο«, 6, GongyluSt 1) a Greek living at Pergamus, vii. 8. 8 ; 2) his son, vii. 8. 8, 17. Their common ancestor, Gongylus of Eretria in Euboea, had been the go-between of Pausanias and Xerxes, and was rewarded by the king with four cities in the Troad. γοητιύω, y€yol/|T€υμaι, έyoψ■€ύθηp^ [^όψ, ητο$, sorcerer^, ensured, be- wiich, V. 7. 9. γον€ν$, έω%, ό [R. γ€ν], begetter, father; pi, parents, iii. i. 3, v. 8. 18. γάνυ, 76mT05, τ6 [cf Lat. genu, knee, Eng. knee], knee, of men, i. 5. 13, iii. 2. 22, vii. 3. 23 ; joints knot, of reeds or canes, iv. 5. 26. Γοργίαδ, ου, Gorgias, of Leon- tini in Sicily, a famous rhetorician, who lived about 485-380 b.c. He first came to Athens in 427 b.c. on an embassy from his native city, and won literally golden opinions by the brilliancy of his oratory. Later he revisited Athens, and travelled through Greece, getting pupils everywhere. Among these was Proxenus, ii. 6. 16, but his most celebrated pupil was Isocra- tes. FofryCMv, wwf, 6, Gorgion, son of Gongylus the elder, g.t>., vii. 8. 8. 47 γοΰν-δάκτνλοι γοΟν, postpositive intensive par- ticle [y^-^odp], stronger than 7^, used to bring forward the proof of a foregoing assertion, or a rea- son for it, at least, at any rate, anyhow, at all events, iii. 2. 17, v. 8. 23, vi. 5. 17, vii. i. 30. γρ^$ιον, TO lyέpωp, cf, ypavs, ypios, old woman^, poor or feeble old woman, vi. 3. 22. γρά|λ)ΐα, aros, τό [7ρά^ω], letter of the alphabet, Lat. littera; pi., inscription, v. 3. 13. γράφω, yράψω, typa^a, yiypaj>a, y^y ραμμΛΐ, ^^ράφηρ [cf Lat. scribo, write, Eng. sharp, grxvb, graphic, bio-graphy, dia-gram, grammar, eic], make a mark, draw, paint, write, ii. 3. 1, 6. 4, vii. 5. 14, 8. 1 ; the person to whom is expressed by ιταρά and ace, i. 6. 3. γνμινάζω {yυμpaδ-'), yvμpάσω, etc. [7U)uw)s], train naked, exercise, i. 2. 7. γυμνής, ^τοί, ΟΓ γυμνήτη?, ου, ο {^υμρ6^\, a generic term signifying light-armed foot-soldier, in contra- distinction to the heavy-armed hoplite, i. 2. 3, iv. 6. 20, and appli- cable properly to javelin-men, bow- men, and slingers, who wore no defensive armour, iii. 4. 26 {σφ^ρ- δορηται and τοξόται are immedi- ately mentioned), v. 2. 12 (proba- bly slingers). The word ^IXrfs, q,v., has, as a miliUry term, the same application. But yυμviι^ is sometimes used so broadly as to include peltasts, who were light- armed troops, although they car- ried a shield for defence, iv. i. 6, 28 (equal to ιτβλταστοί in 26), vi. 3. 15 (equal to ιτελταστοί in 19). Conversely ιτελταστι}?, q.v., is some- times used to designate all the light-armed troops. The Greek light-armed troops in the army of Cyrus amounted, just before the battle of Cunaxa, to 2500, i. 7. 10. These were principally peltasts. The javelin-men, bowmen, and slingers were relatively of much less importance. See s.v. άκορτι- στήί, τοξιότψ, σφ€Ρδορήτψ. Ϊίμνήτης, see yυμpήs. υμνιάβ, aSos, or Γυμνίαβ, αδο$, η, Gymnias, a flourishing city of the Scythmi, in Armenia, but its exact site is now unknown. γυμνικός, ή, op [yυμpόs], belong- ing to physical exercise (practised naked), gymnastic, athletic, iv. 8. 25, V. 5. 5. γυμνό?, τ), όρ [c/. Eng. gymnast], naked, stripped, Lat. nudus, iv. 3. 12; lightly clad, i.e. without the ιμάτιορ, in one^s shirt or shift (see s.v. χιτώρ), i. 10. 3, iv. 4. 12 ; of soldiers without armour, exposed, defenceless^ with Trpos and ace, iv. 3.6. γυνή, γυΐ'αικοδ, η [R.γ€v],w?om(lW, wife, i. 2. 12, 4. 8, iii. 2. 25, iv. i. 14, 3. 11, 5. 9 ; chief wife, consort of a Persian king as distinguished from the rest of his Harem, ii. 3. 17, iii. 4. 11. Γωβρνας, ου or ά, Gobryas, one of the four field marshals of Arta- xerxes, in command of 300,000 men, i. 7. 12. δ*, by elision for δ4. 8άκνω (δακ-), δήξομαι, UaKOPj δ^δττ/μαι, ίδήχθηρ, bite, Lat. mor- ded, iii. 2. 18, 35. 8ακρΰω, δακρύιτω, ^δάκρυσα, δεδά- κρϋμαι [δάκρυ, tear, cf. Lat. lacrima, tear, Eng. tear], shed tears, weep, Lat. lacrimo, i. 3. 2, iv. 7. 25. 8ακτύλιο?, ό [R. 2 8ακ], finger- ring, ring, Lat. dnulus. Rings were much affected by the Greeks of the historical period, esp. by men, and were used either as an ornament or as a seal. Cf. iv. 7. 27, where they are worn by sol- diers in the rank and file. 8άκτυλθ5, ό [R. 2 8ακ], finger, Lat. digitus ; with τωρ ττοδωρ, toe, iv. 5. 12, V. 8. 15. ΔάfJιdpάτo$-Δαφvαγόρ<ίi 49 8α.ψνλής-8ΜΐΓνοΐΓοι^«» Δάμάράτοβ or Δΐ|μάράτο§, ό, De- marattis, son of Ariston and king of Sparta, deposed by his colleague and rival, Cleomenes I., b.c. 491. He fled to Darius, and was by him presented with the cities and dis- tricts of Halisanie and Teuthrania. He accompanied Xerxes in the in- vasion of Greece, but his advice and counsel were neglected, ii. i. 3, vii. 8. 17. Δάνα, t4, Dana, called also Ty- ana (Kilisse-Hissar), a city of Cappadocia north of Tarsus and at the foot of Mt. Taurus. Its position on the highway to Cilicia and Syria rendered it important, i 2. 20. Sairavnwi δαπανήσω, etc. [R. 8a], spendj expend, of money, with els or άμφί and the ace. of person or thing, i. I. 8, 3. 3, ii. 6. 6; τά iav- rwp Bawavav, live at their own ex- pense, V. 5. 20; of property or provisions, use up, consume, vii. 6. 81, % 2. S4«iSov, TO [R. iTfSJ, solid earth, ground, iv. 5. (J. Δαρ<λ8ά|, see AdpSat, Δαρ8αν€ν$, im, 6 [AdpSapos, ij, Bardanm^, a Dardanian, an in- haJbitant of Dardanus, which was an Aeolic city in the Troad on the Hellespont. Near by was Cape Dardanis, noted for a naval battle in tlie Peloponnesian war. iii. i, 47, V. 6. 21, vi. I. 32. Δ4ρ8αβ, aror, or Δα(Μΐ84ξ, άκο^, έ, Bftrdm, a little river in Syria whose exact position is unknown. It was probably west of Thapsa- CE8, i. 4. 10. 8i|Miictft, 0, danc, the name of a gold coin of great purity, said to have been coined first by Darius Hystaspes and to have derived its name from him (compare Napo• iJott, Louis d^or, as names of coins), but both statements are in doubt. The device on the obverse of the daric is a crowned archer kneeling, as shown in the cut, which is of the No. 14. size of the original. The daric con- taiued about 125.5 grains of gold, and would therefore now be worth about $5.40 in American gold ($1.00 contain- ing 23.22 grains). The daric was worth 20 silver drachmas, i. 7. 18, where Cyrus pays a bet of 10 talents, or 60,000 drachmas with 3,000 darics. The silver drachma was of greater value, relatively to gold, then than now. See s.v. μνάί. The weight of the daric was about equal to that of two Attic drachmas, i. i. 9, 3.21, ii. 6.4, iv. 7. 27, vii. 6. 1,8.6. ΔάριΣος» ό [Persian dard, king], Darius, a name of many of the Persian kings. In the Anab., Da- rius II., called 6 Nti^os as being the natural son of Artaxerxes I.; his real name was Ώχο?. He over- threw and murdered his brother Sogdianus, and reigned from 425 to 405 B.C. His sons were Arta- xerxes II., who succeeded him, and Cyrus the Younger, i. i. 1, 7. 9. Sdo-fuvcris, €W5, ή [R. δα], distri- button, vii. i. 37. δα<Γμ05, ό [R. 8α], division, par- tition; hence tribute, tax, as laid in equal parts on all subjects. A yearly tribute was imposed on all the provinces of the Persian em- pire ; this was paid eithei- in money or in kind, as horses, cattle, slaves, and fruits of the field, i. i. 8, iv. 5- 24. δαο^, €ΐα, ύ [c/. Lat. densus, thick^, thick, thickly grown, esp. with trees and shrubs, which may be expressed in the gen. or dat., ii. 4. 14, iv. 7. 6, 8. 2, 26, vi. 4. 27 ; τά δασύ, thicket, coppice, copse, iv. 7. 7; also of ox-hide with the hair on, used for shields, shaggy, rough, iv. 7. 22, V. 4. 12. Δαφναγ^ρόΐι ου, Daphnagoras, a favourite of Hellas, the wife of Gongylus, vii. 8. 9, 8αψιλή«, ds [R. 8a], liberal, am- ple, of provisions, plentiful, abun- dant, iv. 2. 22, 4. 2. . ^. ^ ^ hi, post-positive conjunction, but, strictly, but often weakly, adversa- tive, standing midway in force be- tween άλλα and και, and introducing something new, which the lively Greek felt to be of the nature of opposition. In English this oppo- sition is not so apparent, and there- fore δέ is often to be rendered by and, however, yet, to be sure, further, by the way, while, now, or even omitted in the translation, i. 3. 5, ii. 3. 10, 4. 24, iii. i. 13, iv. i. 2, 6. 10, V. 2. 22, 5. 13, 6. 10, vi. 3. 7, 4. 12, vii. 5. 1, 6. 1. In the preceding clause fiiv is often found, to call attention to the fact that δέ is to follow in the second, μ^ρ . . . δ4 being equivalent to while . . . yet, on the one hand , . . on the other, or weaker, both , . . and, i. i. 1, 2, 8, 3. 16, 5. 2, ID. 6, ii. 3. 10, iii. I. 40, V. 6. 12, vi. 6. 18. The μ^ν is often omitted in the first clause, i. 7. 5, 9, iii. i. 23, 4. 7, especially in questions, v. 7. 33. An apodosis is sometimes intro- duced by δέ, which marks a sur- vival of the paratactic construction, V. 6. 20, 8. 25. Phrases : καΐ . , . δέ, and also, but further, i. i. 5, 8. 2, iii. I. 25, iv. i. 3, vi. i. 1 ; ούδ^ . . . δέ, and not indeed, and not even, i. 8.20. -8€, a suffix joined to names of places, generally in the ace, to dc note motion towards; to demon- strative pronouns to give them greater force. 8€8ιώ$, see δ€ΐδω. 8€86γμ^ναι see δοκέω, 848oiKa, see δΐίδω. 8€δομί4ναι, see δίδωμι. 8% 8€ηθήναι, 8 • ^ 3 ^ be a leader of the people, generally with the idea of unwor- thy means, play the demagogue, win by currying favour, vii. 6. 4. Δημάρατος, see Αάμάράτο$, Δη|Μ>κράτη$, ous or ov, Democra- tes, of Temnus or Temenium (see Ύημν{τηί), & SCOUt, iv. 4. 15. 5ημ6σ-ιο$, α, op [U. Sa] , belong^ ing to the community, public, Lat. publicus, vi. 6. 2, 0, 37 ; τά , . , δημυά- Via, the public money, the treasuni, iv. 6. 16. δηό«, δ^ώσω, ίδιβωσα [Epic δτ^ίοϊ, hostile, destructive], destroy, lay waste, ravage, v. 5. 7. ψ\νου, intensive particle [5iJ 4- woiJ], surely, I s^pose, of course, iii. 2. 15, V. 7. 6, vii. 6. 13. 8ήο-αι, see δ^ω, bind. $ηχ9€(βι see δάκνω. 8ιά, by elision δι, prep, with gen. or ace. [SvoJ, through. With gen., used of place, time, or means, through, during, throughout, by means of, Lat. per, i. 4. 6, 5. 12, ii. 3. 17, 6. 22, iii. 5. 15, iv. 2. 4, 6. 22, V. 4. 14, vii. 7. 49. Phrases: διά ταχ4ω», rapidly, i. 5. 9 ; διά σκδτουί, in darkness, ii. 5. 9; διά ΐΓΐστ€ωί, trustingly, iii. 2. 8; διά φιλίάί Uvai Tivl, enter into friendship with one, iii. 2. 8 ; διά ταντό^ ττοΧ^μαυ Uvai τινί, wage every kind of war with one, iii. 2. 8 ; διά riXovs, from be- ginning to end, vi. 6. 11, cf vii. 8. 11. With ace, through, by means or aid of, on account of, for the sake of, Lat. ob or propter, i. 7. 6, iii. 5. 16, V. 8. 12, vii. 6. 33, 7. 7 ; because of, with r6 and inf. where we use a causal clause, i. 7. 5, iv. 5. 15, V. 5. 17. Phrases : διά τοΰτο^ for this reason, i. 7. 3 ; διά roWd, for many reasons, i. 9. 22; διά φιλία V, out of friendship, v. 5. 15. In composition διά signifies through or over^• sometimes it adds an idea of contmuance or of fulfilment, or it may signify apart, Lat. di-, die-, Ala, Alt, Alas, etc., see ZciJs. διαβαίνω -f^-^e^, go with long strides, stride, walk freely, iv. 3. 8; but mostly trans., go over, cross, 53 διαβάλλω-διαιθριάζ» Lat. transeo, abs. or with ace, i. 2. 0,4.15, ii. 2. 3, 3.10, iii. 3. 6, 4.3, iv. 1.3, 3.7, V. 2. 4, vi. 5.3, vu. i. 3; the means may be expressed by dat. or by iirl and gen., i. 5. 10. 8ιαβάλλ« [βάλλω], throw over or across; in Anab. always throw at with words, slander, traduce, accuse falsely, Lat. maledicd, abs. or with ace, ii. 5. 27, 6. 26, v. 7. 5, vi. 6. 11; the person to whom is expressed by vpos and ace, i. i. 3, V. 6. 29, vii. 5. 6, the slander by the ace or by ω$ and a clause, v. 7. 5, vii. 5. 8. 8ιαβά$) see διαβαίνω. 8ιάβαοΓΐ5, «ωϊ, V {9τφκ^, a going over, a crossing, hence place or means of crossing, ford, bridge, i. 5. 12, iii. 4. 20, 5. 9, iv. 8. 3, vi. 3. 5. 8ιαβατέο8, a, ov, verbal [R. βα], that must be crossed or passed over, Lat. transeundus, ii. 4. 6, vi. 5. 12. 8ιαβατ05, ή, όν, verbal [R. β α], that can be crossed, fordable, pas- sable, i. 4. 18, ii. 5. 9, iii. 2. 22. 8ιαβ€βηκότα$» see διαβαίνω. 8ιαβιβά|ω (βφά^ο), βιβαδ-, -βι- βάσω or βιβω, -€βίβασα [R. βα], make go), make go across, lead across, drive across, transport, Lat. traduco, iii. 5. 2, iv. 8. 8, v. 2. 10, vii. I. 2. 8ιοβολή, ^s ΐβ^^Λ»5, slander, false charges, ii. 5, 5. 8ιαγγ^λλω [ay yέλλω'], carry word through, where διά suggests inter- vening space, cf. Lat. internun- tius, bring word, report, with dat. or €ls and ace of the person to whom, and ταρά with gen. of the person from whom, i. 6. 2, ii. 3. 7, vii. I. 14; mid., carry word along, pass the icord, iii. 4. 36. 8ιαγ€λάω i7cXdw], laugh to scorn, ridicule, ii. 6. 26. 8ιαγ(γνο|ΐαι-[41,^γ«ν}-, of time, get through, pass through, continue, exist, remain, i. 10. 19, vii. 3. 13, often with partie, i. 5. 6, ii. 6. 5, iv. 5. 5. 8ιαγκυλόομαι, pf. δηγγκύλωμαι [R. αγκ], hold by the thong, insert the finger through the javelin-thong, No. 15. only in pf . partie, iv. 3. 28, v. 2. 12. See the account of the manner in which a rotary motion was given to the javelin, s.v. ακόντων. 8ιάγ» -^R- Λγ}> carry through or across, used esp. of ships, trans- port, ii. 4. 28, iii. 5. 10, vii. 2. 12 ; of time, pass, spend, live, tarry, Lat. degd, with or without ace, iii. I. 43, 3. 2, iv. 2. 7, vi. 5. 1 ; with partie, continue, i. 2. 11. 8ιαγων(ζομαι,-ίΛ. αγ], strive con- tinually or earnestly, with irpos and ace, iv. 7. 12. 8^α8ίχoμαv{R.-2-δαι^}-, receive at intervals or along a line; θηρφβν διαδ€χ6μ€νοι, relieved one another in the chase, i. 5. 2. 8ια8£8ωμι -f R . 8 ], give from hand to hand, distribute, Lat. dis- tribud, abs., or with ace of thing and dat. of pers., or with dat. alone, or with inf. of the thing, i. 9. 22, 10. 18, iv. 5. 8, V. 8. 7, vii. 7. 56. 8id8oxos, ό -fRi-^SoK]-, reliever, successor, Lat. successor, with dat., vii. 2. 5. 8ίαξ€νΎννμί [R. ζνγ}, disjoin, Lat. diiungo, separate, with άπό and gen., iv. 2. 10. 8ιοθ€άομαι [ Cfe ] , look through and through, observe closely, iii. i. 19. 8ιαιθριάζΜ [ a tO tt ] , be clearing away, said of breaking weather, Lat. disserenascit, iv. 4. 10. fl ft t t/jO ( Or a Siaip^et-Siairpdhrti 54 55 8ια^ΐΓάζω-διαψα(νω l|l. I Simp^M [olp<»]» sunder, tear apart or away, destroyy ii. 4. 22, v. 2. el. 8ιάκ€ΐμαι [«ίμαι], be set in or- der, be disposed, generally of a state of mind, feel, with dat. or irpotsmd ace, ii. 5. 27, 6. 12, iii. 1. 3, vii. 7. i38 ; άμεινορ ϋμΧν διακ€ΐ<τεΓαι, it toill be better for you, vii. 3. 17. διακ€λ€ΰο)λα€ [R. κιλ], give dii'ec- tions to, urge, encourage, with dat. of peis., iii. 4. 45, iv. 7. 26. 8ιακιν5νν€νω [kCvSuvos], run all risks, risk a battle, iii. 4. 14, vi. 3. 17. διακλ4&«» (κλάω, Ικλασα, κέκΧα- σμαι, έκ\άσ&η» [c/. Eng. icono- ciast], break), break in two; κατά μικρί^ψ ίιακλαρ, break into bits, vii. 3. ^*'• SiflucoWwi διακονήσω, δ€διάκ6νΊΐμαι, έδιακονήθην [διέκονοϊ, servant, cf. Eng. deacon], serve, esp. tmit at table, Lat. ministro, Iv. 5. 33. διακόιτται [κόιττω], cut in pieces, cut through, i. 8. 10, iv. 8. 11, 13, vii. I. 17. διακόσιοι, at, α [8vo + Ικατόν], two hundred, Lat. ducentl, i. 2. 9, ii. 5. 30, vi. 5. 11. 8ιακρ(ν«ο [κρίνω], separate from one another, decide, settle, Lat. decidd, abs., vi. i. 22. διαλαγχάναι [λα-γχάνω'], part or assign by lot, iv. 5. 23. 8ιαλαμΡ4ν«0 [λαμβάνω'], take sep- arately or apart, iv. i. 23; divide, διαλίγομαι, διαλέξομαι, δ^€i\eγμaι, δΐ€λ4χΒην [R. λιγ], talk or coji- verse with, abs. or with ace, or with wepl and gen. of the thing spoken of, i. 7. 9, ii. 6. 23, iv. 2. 19, vi. 3. 9, vii. 1.15; the pers. spoken to is ex- pressed by dat. or by wpot and ace., ii. 5. 42, iv. 2. 18, v. 5.25. SioXcCirc» [\€ίτΓω], leave a space or gap between, stand apart or at intervals, be distant, Lat. distd, abs. or with ace, i. 7. 15, 8. 10, iv. 7. 6, 8. 12 ; TO SiaXttwov (sc. χωρίον), Lat. interualliim, gap, space be- tween, iv. 8. 13. διαμάχομαι [R. μοχ], fight to a finish, fight it out, struggle ear- nestly, with vepl and gen. or with μή and inf., v. 8. 23, vii. 4. 10. διαμένω [R. μα], stay through, stay, vii. i. 6. διαμιτρίο» [μετρέω], divide by measure, measure out, of food, vii. I. 40 ; mid., serve out rations, vii. 1.41. διαμιηρ4$, adv. [R. trip], through and through, tight through, with ace, iv. I. 18, vii. 8. 14. διανέμω [R. ν€μ], divide up among, with ace of thing and dat. of pers., vii. 5. 2. διανο4ομαι [R. γνω], think otit, purpose, plan, intend, mean, with ace or with inf., ii. 4. 17, iii. 2. 8, V. 7. 15, vi. I. 19, vii. 7. 48. διάνοια, as [R. yvm], way of thinking, purpose, intention, v. 6. 31. διαιταντόδι properly διά. ravros, see was. διαιι^μΐΓ» [ττέμΊτω], send in dif- ferent directions, send round, abs. or with ace, i. 9. 27, iv. 5. 8. διαίΓίρά» [R. iwp], cross through or over, iv. 3. 21. διαιτλ^ω [R. irXiF], βαι7 over or across, abs. or with eU and ace, vii. 2. 9, 6. 13, 8. 1. διαιτολιμέω [τΓο\€μέω], carry a war through, fight it out, Lat. de- belld, with dat., iii. 3. 3. 8iairopcvM [R. iwp], carry across, set over, ii. 5. 18; pass, and fut. mid., pass over, marxh through, abs. or with ace, ii. 2. 11, iii. 3. 3, vi. 5. 19. διαιτορ^ο» [R. iTip], be utterly at a loss, vi. I. 22. Siairpdrrw [τράττω], work out, bring about, accomplish, Lat. efii- cid, with ace or with δττωί and a clause, v. 7. 29, vii. i. 38, 2. 37; generally in mid., which has much the same meaning as the act., carry one^s point, bring to pass, effect, secure one^s object, arrange, obtain one's wish or request, make an aareement, stipulate, used abs. or with ace of the object, for which the inf. or ace with inf. or a clause with ω(ττ€ or a relative clause may sUnd ; the person benefited is ex- pressed by dat., and the person from whom by τταρά and gen., ii. 1. 20, 25, 29, 5. 30, 6. 2, iii. 5. 5, iv. 2. 23, v. 7. 30, vi. 6. 12, vii. i. 39, 7. 24. Phrases: rrpbs rhv Zei/- Βψ irepl σπονδών δίβιτράττοντο, they tried to arrange a truce with Seu- thes, vii. 4•. 12» c/. vii. 2. 7; φιΧίάν διαιτράζάμενοί irpbs Μήδοκον, having concluded an alliance with Medo- cus, vii. 3. 16. διαριτάζω [R. άριτ], tear in pieces, lay waste, plunder, sack, spoil, Lat. diripio, i. 2. 19, 10. 2, 18, ii. 2. 16, V. 2. 10, vii. I. 25. διαρρέω [ρέω], flow throu^, run through, with διά and gen., v. 3. 8. διαρρίΐΓτω and διαρρΐ-ιττ^ω [^f- ττω], throw round, scatter, Lat. disicib, divide among, v. 8. 6, vii. 3. 23. διάρρΐψις, ews, η [διαρρίντω], a tossing about, scattering round, v. 8.7. διασημαίνω [σημαίνω], point cmt clearly, announce publicly, ii. i.23. διασκην^ω, διεσκήνησα [R. σκα], in aor., take up one's quarters apart, go into quarters separately, sometimes with els and ace of place, iv. 4. 8, 5. 29. διασ•κηνητ€ον, verbal [R. σκα], must encamp apart, iv. 4. 14. διαο-κηνοω [R. σκα], encamp apart; be quartered apart, iv. 4. 10. διαα-ιτάω [R. σιτα], draw apart; in Anab. always pass, and gener- ally of soldiers, be separated, scat- tered, dispersed, i. 5. 9, iii. 4. 20, iv. 8. 10, 17, V. 6. 32, vii. 3. 38. διασηηίρω [σπ€ίρω], scatter about, prop, of seed ; in Anab. used only in the pass, of soldiers, be scat- tered, be routed, disperse, Lat. dls- pergor, i. 8. 25, ii. 4. 3, vi. 5. 28, vii. 2.8. διασψ€νδονάω [σφ€νδονάω], sling in all directions; pass.,/?/ in pieces as if from a sling, iv. 2. 3. διασ-φζω [R. a-af],bring through, save, save up, keep, v. 6. 18, vi. 6. 5, 28; pass., be brought through safe, come out safe and sound, with ■Kpos and ace, v. 4. 5, vii. 8. 19; mid., save for oneself, preserve, v. 5.13. διατάττω [R. τακ]», draw up in array , Lat. dispond, of soldiers, i. 7. 1 ; pass, of skirmishers, posted at intervals, iii. 4. 15. διατ€ίνω [τ€ίνω], stretch out; mid., let oneself out, in the phrase παν πpbs υμάs δίατ€ΐνάμενον, doing my very utmost against you, vii. 6. 36. διατ€λ^» [tA.os], bring quite to an end, complete, finish, as a jour- ney or road, iv. 5. 11 ; sometimes όδό^ is understood, complete the march, finish the distance, with πp6s and ace of the end in view, i. 5.7 ; with partie, continue to do or do constantly, the partie containing the leading idea, iii. 4. 17, iv. 3. 2. διατήκω [τήκω], melt up; pass., melt away, iv. 5. 6. διατ(θημι [R. Oc], set out in place, arrange, order, dispose of, treat, Lat. dispond, i. i. 5, iv. 7. 4 ; mid., set out for oneself, esp. in the market, sell, Lat. uendle propond, vi. 6. 37, vii. 3. 10. διατρέψω [τρέφω], feed thor- oughly, sustain, support, iv. 7. 17. διατριβή, T7S [διατρίβω], a wast- ing away, esp. of time, waste of time, delay, vi. 1. 1. διατρΐβω (τρίβω, τριβ-, τρίψω, έτριψα, τέτριφα, τέτρίμμαι, έτρίβην [cf. τριβή], rub), rub through, waste away, consume, spend, of time, Lat. tempus terd, with the ace, iv. 6. 9, or in pass., vii. 2. 3, 4. 12 ; abs., waste time, delay, wait, 1.5. 9, ii. 3-9, vii. 3. 13. διαψα(νω [R. ψα], make show through ; pass., be visible through, shine through, v. 2. 29, impers., light shows through, vii. 8. 14. y ί»ν' 8Mi4av«>f-S(8«|av 66 ■■-J Κ 57 ε^ίργω-Βίκη 4 1 ειιιψανΜΐ, adv. [U.^],distinctly, clearly y Lai. perapicuey vi. i. 24. Sin^cfMiirrws, adv. [R. φιρ], dif- ferently from others, i.e. peculiarly ^ surpassingltj, I g. 14. SM4«» [R. φ€ρ], carry different waysy bear apart, hence he different from, Lat. dCiTero, with gen., ii. 3. 15; he better than, surpass, with gen., iii. i. »1; mid., differ from, quarrel, with άμ^ί and gen. of the thing, or with rpos and ace. of the person and τ€ρΙ with gen. of the thing, iv. 5. 17, vii. 6. 15. Phrase : wo\u δίέφ€ρον, they found it very different, i.e. they found it easier, iii. 4. 33 (where most editt. have the impers. τολύ δι4φ€ρ€ν, it was a very different thing). δι,οφ€νγω [R. φυγ], flee away, escape, Lat. effugid, abs. or with ace, V. 2. 3, vi. 3. 4, vii. 3. 43. Sio^OcCpw [φθείρω], destroy alto- gether, spoil, ruin, corrupt, bribe, Lat. corrumpo, iii. 3. 5, vi. 2. 9; pass., be destroyed, break up, or in a moral sense, lose credit, iv. 1. 11, vii 2. 4, 7. 37. Phrase: διεφθαρ- μένοι τούϊ οφθαλμούς, with their eyes blinded, iv. 5. 12. 6ι4ψορο«, ov [R. φιρ], different, unlike, at variance., sup., vii. 6. 15 ; subst., τδ διάφορον, difference of opinion, disagreement, Lat. dissen- sid, iv. 6. 3. &ιαφνή, ψ [φϋ<α}, a natural growth betiueen, division, in some nuts, V. 4. 29. διοφνλάττβ» [φι»λ4τΓ«•1, watch closely; mid., be on one*» guard, Vii. 6. 22. &ιαχά(*ι, διεχασάμην (the simple X<£f(w, make retire, is Epic only), intr., give ground, fall back, iv. 8. lo. Siaxci)i4|«i» (xeiMfw, χαμαδ-, χ€ΐ- μά^Μ, έχειμάσθην [χεΐμα, winter, cf. χιών], pass the winter, Lat. Memo), winter, spend the winter, vii. 6. 31. 8uixcifiCS«i ('χεφί^^ω, χεφιδ-, -χει- ρωΰμΛΐ, etc, [R. χιρ], handle), have in hand, manage, i. 9. 17. / ΐχΛ, £v I huixmfUm [χωρέω], go through, pass through; impers., κάτω διε- χώρ€ΐ oiJtois, they had diarrhoea, iv. 8. 20. 6ιδά(Γκαλο$, δ[ΗΛ δακ], teacher, Lat. magister. The Athenian boy was under the instruction of teach- ers continuously for twelve years, from the beginning of his seventh year, and the discipline was severe, ii. 6. 12, V. 8. 18, where note that the speaker is Xenophon, an Athenian. The boy received in- struction in reading, writing, and arithmetic, in music (singing and the use of the αόλόί and λύρα), and in gymnastics. See the school- scene, s.v, αύλόϊ, where instruction in the αύ\6$ is represented at the left (a lyre is suspended at the centre above) and in writing at the right (on tho v/ax-tablet with the stylus). διδάσ-κο (διδαχ-), διδάξω, ^δ/δαξα, δεδίδαχα, δΐδΙδαΎμαι, έδιδάχθην [R. 1 3ακ], teach, inform, prove, show, Lat. doced, abs. or with ace. of the pers., with inf. of the thing, or with a clause with ω$, i. 7. 4, ii. 5f6, iii. 2.32, iv. 5. 36, vii. 7. 47; pass., be taught, learn, with άτό and gen. and a clause with δη, vi. 5. 18. δ(δημι [R. δ€], bind, tie up, v. 8. 24. (Epic, except here, see δέω, bind.) δ£δΜμ4 (δο-), δώσω, Ηωκα, δι- δωκα, δίδομαι, έδόθην [R. δο], give, present, give over, allow, pennit, pay, give to wife, Lat. do, with tlie ace. or the dat. alone, or with dat•. of the pers. and ace. of the thing, i I. 9, 6. 3, ii. 3. 28, 6. 4, iii. 2. 4, 3. 18, iv. 4. 14, 5. 8, V. 2. 24, vi. i. 12, vii. I. 7, 2. 38, 3. 24 ; with the inf., or with dat. of pers. and inf., i. 6. 6, ii. 3. 18, iv. 5. 32, vii. 3. 13 ; with d% and ace. of the thing for which, i. 2. 27, 4. 9 ; the agent is expressed by ντό and gen., vii. 7. I ; hy iK and gen., i. i. 6; often in pres. and impf., offer, iii. 4. 42 ; when used of gods, bestow, or- dain, grant, with ace., or with dat. and ace, or with mf., ni. i. 20, 2. 7, vi. 1. 20; δέδοται, it is ordained, vi. 6* 36. δι«ίργω [βΓρτω], keep asunder, cut off, with ace. understood, iii. i. 2. SuXavv» ίέλάύρω'] , dnve through, ride through, charge through, abs., i. 5. 12, 10. 7, ii. 3• 19. δΐ€λόντ€5, see διαιρ4ω. δΐ€|ίρχθίΐαι [άρχομαι], poss out throuqh, vi. 6. 38. διέρχομαι [ίρχομαϊ], go through, march through, pass through, com- plete, travel, of distance, countries, or peoples, abs., with ace, or with διά and gen., ii. 4. 12, iii. 5. 17, iv. 1. 5, 5. 19, v. 4. 14, 6. 7, vi. 5. 5, 19 ; v/ith cts and ace. of place, vi. 3. 10 ; of a rumour, spread abroad, v/itli δτι and a clause, i. 4. 7. δΐ€ρωτάω [ερωτάω], ask in turn, ask publicly, iv. i. 26. δΐ€σΐΓάρθαι,, see διασιτείρω. δι^χω [R. σ-€χ], hold apart, sep- arate, Lat. separo; subst., τό δι4- χον, the separating space, interval, Lat. interudllum, iii. 4• 22 ; intr^ he separated, be apart, abs., with gen., or with av6 and gen., i. 8. 17, 10. 4, iii. 4. 20, 22. διηγέομαι [R. αγ], lead out in detail, set forth, tell, Lat. narrd, iv. 3. 8, 13, vii. 4. 8. διήλα<Γ(, see διελαύνω. διίημι pi7Au], let go through, let pass through, allow a passage, abs., or with ace, and with διά and gen., iii. 2.23, iv. 1.8, v. 4. 2. δι(<Γτη}ΐιι [R. «Γτα], set apart; mid. and 2 aor. act., intr., separate, open ranks, stand at intervals, i. 5. 2, 8. 20, 10. 7. δίκαιος, ά, ov [R. 1 δακ], right, lawful, just, fit, proper, Lat. ius- tus, i. 6. 6, vii. 6. 22; impers., δίκαιοι» 4ση, with ace and inf., ii. 5. 41, iii. 1.37, v. 8. 26; pers., δί- καιόί €ΐμχ with inf., / deserve to, it is right that I, so δικαιοτάτου? (sc. ■■apajcaXeta^ai), vL I. 3; subst., τό δίκαιον, the right, justice, pi., one^s rights, so with ίίχειν and λαμβάνειν, have or get one^s rights, vii. 7. 14, 17, and in such phrases as έκ του δικαίου, and σύν τψ δικαίφ, right- eously, justly, i. 9. 19, ii. 6. 18, παρά τό δίκαιον, unjustly, v. 8. 17 ; δίκαια ΐίτταθε, he met his deserts, v. 1. 15. δικαιοσητνη, η? [R. 1 δακ], jus- tice, Lat. iustitia, i. 9. 16, vii. 7. 41. δικαιότης, i?tos, η [R. 1 οακ], justice, equal to δικαιοσύνη, ii. 6. 26. δικα(ο>δ, adv. [R. 1 δακ], with justice, rightly, properly, fitly , Lat. iure and recte, I 9. 17, ii. 3. 19, v. 1.9, vii. 1.29. δικαα-τή5, ου [R. 1 δακ], one who awards or decides what is just, a dicast, resembling a juryman rather than a judge, Lat. iudex, v. 7. 34. δίκη, vs [R. 1 δακ], custom, usage, nght, judgment, justice. The meaning of a phrase in which this word appears can often be deter- mined only from the context, as δίκΐ7 may signify satis/action re- ceived or punishment inflicted by the sufferer of a wrong, as well as the atonement made by the crimi- nal or the penalty which he pays ; thus Uav^v δίκην ^χω, I am abun- dantly satisfied, vii. 4• 24, but τήι» δίκην ίχει, he has his deserts, i.e. his punishment, ii. 5. 38 ; cf also δίκτ; έσχατη, Lat. ultimum suppli- cium, extreme penalty, i.e. death, vi. 6. 15 ; δίκην 4τιτιθέναι or λαμ- βάνειν, infiict punishment, Lat. sup- plicium surnere, i. 3. 10, iii. 2. 8, V. 6. 34, 8. 17 ; δίκην διδόναι, pay the penalty, be punished, Lat. poe- nds dare, soluere, ii. 6. 21, iv. 4. 14, V. 4. 20, vii. 6. 10 ; δίκην ύττέχειν, suffer or undergo the penalty, vi. 6. 15 ; TTjs δίκηί τυχεΐν, meet the pen- alty, vi. 6. 25. The word some- times means a reckoning, account, trial, investigation, v. 7. 34 ; cf. the phrases δίκην ύνέχειν and διδόναι, render account, v. 8. 1 , 18 ; eh δΙκα$ Ίτάνταί καταστησαι, bring all to trial, V. 7. 34. Si|U>vf»(a-Soiclii» 58 59 8οκιμά{ω-δοράτιον I ' ι ι SιμoιpCό^ OS [δΰα + μο(ρα, por- tion, cf. μέροί], dotubU portion or Bkare^ vii. 2. 36, 6. 1. whirlpool], whirl round; mid. in- Irans., of a dance, vi. i. 9. Sid, for δΐ δ, on account of which, wherefore, therefore, i. 2. 21, v. c. 10, vii. 6. 39. ^ 8(oSof, ^ [68dsJ, passage^ ¥. ^ 17. Siopaw [R. 2 Ftp], see through, discover, v. 2. 30. Siopvrrai [όριίττω], (?i<7 through, make a breach in, of a wall, vii. 8. 13, 14. SidTi, for 5t* δτι, on account of which, because, since, ii. 2. 14. δίΐΓΤίχΐϊί, υ [δύο + τ^χν*], of two cubits, two cubits long, iv. 2. 28. διιτλάσαοδ, a, op [δνο + R. ιτλο], twofold, double, of numbers or of bulk, Lat. duplus, iv. i. 13, vi. 5. 17 ; διτλάσιον, adv., itm'ce as far, with gen., iii. 3. 16. 6(vXf0pos, OM [δύο + R. irXtt], 0/ two plethra, iv. 3. 1. διΐΓλ6ο$ι 1^, ov, contr. oOs, ^, ouv [δνο + R. Ίτλα], twofold, double, of amount, Lat. duplex, vii. 6. 7. δί§, numeral adv. [δύο], twice, Lat. 6is ; in Anab. only in compo- sition, δισ- or δι-. διο-χίλιοι, oi, α [δύο -f χίλίΟί], two thousand, i. i. 10, iv. 2. 2, vii. 3. 48. διφθέρα, β5 [cf δέφω, 8θβ€η by working, Eng. diphtheria], softened or prepared hide of an animal, made ready for use, tanned skin, leathern bag, I 5. 10, v. 2. 12. διφβίρινοβ, η, OP [δίφθέρα], made of hide, leathern, ii. 4. 28. δίφρος, ό [δύο -f- R. φ€ρ], holding two, the body of the war-chariot (see s.v. Αρμα), on the floor of which stood the driver and the war- rior, i. 8. 10. Then, the word los- ing its etymological signification, a mat, large enough to accommodate only one person, stool The δίφροί had neither back nor arms. The seat was square and rested on four legs, which were either perpendic- ular and solidly attached to it (see s.v. αύ\6$), or crossed one another and were bolted at the centre, so th'at the δίφροι could be closed like I a camp-stool (see s.v. &μφορ€ύ%). In this form the legs often curved inward below {cf the Roman sella curulis). δ£χα, adv. [δύο], in two parts; δίχα xoietp, divide, vi. 4. 11. διχάζω (διχάδ-) [δύο], divide in two; in trans., divide, separate, iv. 8. 18. διψάω, διψήσω, ίδίψησα [δίψα, thirst, cf. Eng. dipso-mania], be thirsty, Lat. sitid, iv. 5. 27. διωκτ^ον, verbal [διώκω], must pursue, iii. 3. 8. διώκω, διώ^ω, έδΙωξα, δεδίωχα, έδιώχθ-ηρ, pursue, chase, hunt, of an enemy or of game, Lat. perse- quor, i. 4. 7, 8, 5. 2, 10. 4, ii. 3. 19, iii. 2. 35, iv. I. 8 ; abs., give chase, follow up a victory, pursue, i. 5. 3, 8. 19, iii. 3. 8, iv. 6. 24, v. 4. 16, vii. 3. 26; intrans., run quickly, make haste, vi. 5. 25, vii. 2. 20. Phrase : τό διώκ€ΐρ, the pursuit, i. 8. 25. δ(ωξΐ9, e&>5, η [διώκω], a pursu- ing, pursuit, iii. 4. 6. διωρυξ, υχοί, ij [cf. διορνττω], ditch, trench, canal, Lat. fossa, i. 7. 15, ii. 4. 13, 21, 22. δόγμα, aros, τό [R. δοκ], that tchich seems to one, principle, maxim, Lat. placitum ; public de- cree, ordinance, standing order, Lat. decretum, iii. 3. 5, vi. 4. 11, 6. 8,27. δο0ήναι, see δίδωμι. δοκίω (δοκ•), δόξω, Uo^a, δ^δoyμat, ίδόχθηρ (rare) [R. δοκ], 1) coti- sider, suppose, think, trans., with two aces., with inf. or with ace. and inf., i. 7. 1, 8. 2, ii. 2. 10, 14, iii. 2.17, V. 7.26, vi. i. 3, 17; 2) in- trans. and both pers. and impers., seem, appear, seem right, best, or good, be determined or resolved. Lat. uidetur, used with the dat., i. 4. 7, ii. I. 22, iii. 5. 6, iv. 4. 6, v. 5. 22, vi. 3. 25, vii. 3. 22 ; with inf., i. 3 11, 4. 15, ii. 6. 1, 29, iii. i. 38, iv. I. 26, V. 3. 1, vi. i. 25, vii. i. 20 ; with dat. and inf., i. 2. 1, 3. 11, ii. 1.2, 17, iii. I. 10, 11, iv. i. 2, v. 2. 3, vi. I. 14, vii. 2. 17; abs., i. 10. 0, iii. 5. 18, V. 2. 15, vi. i. 25, 2. 12, see ταύτα eSofe below; sometimes the inf. or the dat. is to be supplied from the context, i. 6. 8, vi. 5. 10, vii. I. 6, 2. 16 ; when impers., with dat. and ace. and inf., i. 3. 18, iii. 1. 30, iv. 3. 15, V. 8. 1, vi. 5. 4, vii. 1.31; sometimes a combination of the pers. and impers. constructions is found, i. 3. 12, iv. 6. 13, v. 6. 32, vii. 5. 5, and in this case the phrase δοκώ pjoi, like Lat. uideor mihi, moderates the statement which fol- lows, and gives an air of civility and courtesy, like the old English methinks, i. 7. 4, vii. 6. 10, 11, 18. Phrases: at the end of busi- ness meetings we find often Uo^e ταΟτα or ταΰτα eSo^e, this was re- solved, decided, voted, Lat. placuit or uisum est, i. 3. 20, ii. 3. 28, iii. 3. 38, iv. 8. 14, V. I. 7, vi. 2. 11, vii. i. 32 ; δί)^αρ ταΰτα, having resolved on this course, iv. i. 13; τό δόξαρ, the resolution, vi. 1. 18; τά δόξαρτατ^ στρατιφ, the decision of the army, i. 3. 20; τά δ€δοΎμέρα, the conclu- sions, Lat. quod uisum est, iii. 2. 39, vi. 2. 7 ; έκπ\€ΐρ δ€δο^μένορ €Ϊη, it had been decided to sail out, v. 6. 35 ; δτψ δοκ€Ϊ ταΰτα, άνατεινάτω τ^ρ xeipa, all in favour of this ^notion will raise their hands, iii. 2. 9, cf. v. 6. 33 ; δοξάτω υμΐ», let it be approved, let it be sanctioned publicly, v. 7. 31. In the phrase δοκοΰσί μχ>ι άπηΧθορ, v. 7. 13, δοκοΰσί μοι is used parentheti- cally without influencing the con- struction (but some read άπβΧθεΐρ). δοκΐ)ίάζω (δοκιμαδ-), δοκιμάσω, δ€δοκίμασμαι, έδοκιμάσθηρ [R. δοκ], test, examine; pass., be accepted after examination, of cavalry, iii. 3.20. δόλιος, α, OP [δόλο?], treacherous, traitorous, i. 4. 7. δόλιχος, δ, long race, varying, ace. to circumstances, from six to twenty -four times the length of No. 16. the stadium, q.v., iv. 8. 27. Com- pare the second set of runners in the accompanying illustration, where the pace shows that the race was a long one. δόλος, δ [cf. Lat. dolus, device, deceit], craft, fraud, stratagem, v. 6.29. Δόλοψ, oTos, 0, a Dolopian (only in plur.), i. 2. 6. Dolopia, a coun- try between Mt. Find us and Aeto- lia, was inhabited by a brave tribe which long kept its independence. They were perhaps not of Greek origin. δόξα, ψ [R. δοκ], opinion, esti- mation, in one's own mind, παρά, Tijp δόξον, contrary to one''s expec- tation, Lat, contra exspectatio ii. I. 18 ; of others about one, rep- utation, fame, glory, Lat. fdma, vi. I. 21 ; with els and ace, vi. 5. 14. δοράτιον, TO [δόρυ], prop, small spear, but in the Anab., vi. 4. 23, rather the pole of the spear, used for carrying booty. See s.v. δορν φόροί. 'liW^H So|>idb-8f>cir«iin|4^f}ot 60 61 8ρίΐΓανον-$ν(Γμή 'i 1 I i'E :i SopKds, aSos, ij [cf. δίρκομαι, Bee clearly, see}, a sort of deer, gazelle, with large bright eyes, i. 5. 2, v. 3. 10. 8<»f>in)ν No. 17. ^f^t^" «MO»' ^x**", to keep their spears at rest on the right shoulder, vi. 5. 25; τά δόρατα eh •προβολών καθέιη-αί, lowering or couching their spears for the charge, vi. 5. 25, cf 27. Βορνφόρος, [δόρυ + Β. φιρ], one who carries a spear, spearman, pikeman. But in the Anab. said of tliose who went out with δορά- Tia, q.v., to carry tlie captured booty to camp, v. 2. 4. SovXctd, ά$ [δουλεύω], slavery, Lat. seruitus, vii. 7. 32. δονλιύο», έδούλευσα, δ€δούλ€υκα [δοΰλοί], be a slave, Lat. seruid, iv. 8. 4. 8ovXos, 6, slave, Lat. seruus, ii. 7. 17, ς. 32, iii. I. 17, vii. 4. 24; ap- plied to all subjects of the I'ersian king, i. 9. 29, ii. 5. 38. Sovvaty see δίδωμι. Sowita, ^δούττησα [δουιτοί], poetic verb, sound heavily, make a din, strike heavily, with vpos and ace, i. 8. 18. So&iros, 6, poetic word, any heavy sound, din, uproar, ii. 2. 19. ApaKdvTios, 6, Dracontius, an exile from Sparta in the Greek army, in charge of the games at Trapezus, iv. 8. 25; sent to Olean- der, vi. 6. 30. Spdp,oi, 8ραμοννται, see τρέχω. δρ(ΐΓανηφόρο$, ov [δρέΊΓανον-\-Έί. φ€ρ], scythe-hearing, of chariots, Lat./a/caiae quadrigae, i. 7. 10, 11, 12, 8. 10. Such chariots were much in use among the I*ersians. Those described in the Anab. had, as rep- resented in the accompanying cut, No. 18. a stationary scythe inserted in each end of the axle, the chariot be- ing two- wheeled, and other scythes fastened in the axle underneath, with the points downward and the blades turned toward the horses. There are other representations of I'ersian scythe-bearing chariots in which blades are fastened to the outside of the felly of the wheel, with iron spikes on the inside of the felly and between the spokes. In these the pole also of the wagon ends in an iron spike, and spikes and scythes are attached to the yokes of the horses. For the gen- eral form of the chariot, see s.v. άρμα. Sp^iravov, τό [δρένω, pluck], reaping hook, scythe, Lat. falx, used on chariots, i. 8. 10. ApCXai, ων, the Drilae, a tribe of mountaineers living southwest of Trapezus, called the most warlike people of the Pontus, v. 2. 1, 2, 3. δρόμ.ος, ό [root 8ρα, δραμ, cf. άττο- δώράσκω, Eng. dromedary], a run- ning, run, Lat. cursus, i. 2. 17, iv. 8. 25, V. 2. 31; the dat. δρόμφ, when used of infantry, means on the run, double quick, of cavalry, at a gallop, and is frequently joined with θ€Ϊν and found also with όρμαν, διώκ€ίν, and φ€ύy€LP, i. 8. 18, iv. 3. :]1, 6. 25, V. 7. 25, vi. 5. 25, vii. i. 15; running track, race-course, Lat. spatium, iv. 8. 26, see s.v. Ιττιτόδρομοζ. δνναμαι, δυνίισομαι, δεδύρημαι, έδυνήθην [δύναμαι], be able, capa- ble, strong enough, can, with inf. or abs. with inf. understood, i. i. 4, 2. 25, 3. 2, 6. 7, ii. 2. 3, iii. i. 35, iv. I. 19, V. 2. 16, vi. 3. 8, vii. i.28; often with relatives m, ^, Birv, δσον, δτΓΟί, ότοίο and the sup. of an adv., as μαχόμενοι oJs Slu δυνώμεθα κράτίστα, fighting with all our might and main, iii. 2. 6, cf. i. 1.6, 2. 4, iii. 4. 48, iv. 5. 1, 18, vi. 6. 1, vii. 7. 15; less often with ws or δσον and sup. of an adj., as Ιίχων ΙχΊτέάί ws hv δύνηταί xXeiffTOUS, with the largest possible number of cav- alry, i. 6. 3, cf ii. 2. 12, vii. i. 37, 2. 8 ; of things, be worth, amount to, Lat. ualeo, with ace, i. 5. 6, ii. 2. 13. Phrases: ol μ^ιστον δυνά- pjevoi, the most powerful, cf. Lat. plurimum posse, ii. 6. 21, vii. 6. 37 ; TO έΐζαναταν δύνασθαι, the power of deception, ii. 6. 26. δύναμιιςι tws, η [δνναμαν], ability, means, Lat. facuUds, vii. 7. 36 ; generally in a military sense, force, troops, i. I. 6, 3. 12, ii. i. 13, iii. 4. 3, iv. 4, 7, vii. 4. 21, so also in pi., like Lat. cdpiae, i. 5. 9; jjoicer, re- sources, Lat. opes, i. 6. 7, ii. 5. 11; influence, position, Lat. auctdritas, ii. 6. 17, V. 6. 17. Phrases: th or κατά δΰναμλν, according to one^s ability, Lat. pro uiribus, ii. 3. 23, m. 2. 9. δυνάσ-τη$ι ου [Ζνναμα,ι], a mighty man, nobleman, i. 2. 20. δννατόβ} -ή, f>v [δνναμαι], able, in both active and passive sense; act., powerful, influential, capable, i. 9. 24, iv. I. 12, vii. 7. 2 ; with inf., ii. 6. 19, vu. 2. 33, 4. 24 ; pass., possible, practicable, with inf. or abs., i. 3. 17, ii. i. 19, iv. i. 24, v. 5. 13, or with a rel. and sup. of an adv., ν€ίσομαι ή δυνατόν μάλιστα, I shall obey to the best of my ability, where εστί is understood with δυ- νατόν and y means as, i. 3. 15. Phrases: ois δυνατόν, (so far) as was possible, ii. 6. 8 ; έκ των δυνα- τών, as well as they could, iv. 2.23. δύνω, see δύω. δύο, otv, [δύο], two, Lat. duo, generally not declined, i. i. 1, 2. 23, ii. 2. 12, iii. 2. 37, iv. i. 19, v. 4. 11, vi. I. 9 ; but the gen. occurs in V. 6. 9, vi. 6. 14, vii. 5. 9 (with which cf vii. 6. 1). Phrase: ds δύο, two abreast, ii. 4. 26. δυο•- [cf Eng. dys-peptic'], insep- arable prefix signifying hard, ill, with difficulty. δύσ•βατο$, ov [R. βα], hard to travel, of country, v. 2. 2. δυσδιάβατο5, ov [R. βα], hard to march through, vi. 5. 19. δνο-μή, ^s [δύω], a going under, of the sun, in Anab. always pi., 8ιΐ(ητ&ριτοφ-ΐρ6θ)&4κοντ« 62 63 {ρδομο$-Ιδη$οκότε8 ι Ι•' ι .' I ):■ ifXlov δυσμαί, sunsety Lat. sdlis occasus^ vi. 4. 26, ς., 32, vii. ^ SwirapiTos, or Itlmlf hard to get by, hard to paas^ of a fortress, iv. I. 25. Svo-mipfvros, ov [R. inp], hard to get through^ of heavy ground, with dat., i. 5. 7. δνο-τΓορίό, it [R. mp], diffi- culty of passing, of a river, iv. 3-7. Si«nropos, ov [R. iwp], ftard to travel, hard to cross, of rivers, ra- vines, and roads, ii. c. 9, v. i. 13, vi. 5. 12. 8νο-χρτ)στο«, ov [χρι;<Γτό$, useful, verbal of χράομαι'}, hard to me or manage, of liuie service, of troops in disorder, iii. 4. 19. ενσχωρ(ά, ά$ [χώ /ws], roughness of country, hard or rough country, iii. 5. 16. Um (δυ-), δύσω, Uma or Ulv, δέδνκα, δέδυμαι, ίδύθην, enter, in Anab. always of the sun, enter the sea, set, Lat. occido, and in act. only in the collateral pres. δύνω, ii. 2. 3, 13; elsewhere in pres. and !mpf. mid., i. 10. 15, ii. 2. 16, v. 7. 6. δΔ, see δίδωμι. δώδικα, indecl. [8^ + δ/κα], twelve, Lat. duodecim, I 2. 10, iii. 5. 16, V. 6. 9, vii. 3. 16. δο>ρ4ομαι, δωρήσομαι, etc. [R. δθ], give a present, present, abs. or with ace, vii. 3. 18, 20, 26, 27, δωροδοκία», δωμοδοκήσω, etc. [R. δο + R. 2 δακ], accept a present, take a bribe, vii. 6. 17. δώρον, TO [R. δο], present, gi^, Lat. donnm. It was the universal custom among the Persians that those who approached the king or a satrap should bring him gifts, and in general among them gifts were freely bestowed, i, 2. 27, ii. I. 10, iv. 7. 27, v. 6. 11, vii. 3. le. δ^•», see δίδωμί. 1^ see έάω. Ιάλω, see άΧίσκομαι. Wv, contr. aiOr ^1^, in crasis k&p for καΐ έάν, conditional conj., [ci + f "]> «7. if haply, used with subjv. in the prot. of cond. sentences of the vivid future and present gen- eral classes, i. i. 4, 3. 14, iii. i. 36, 2.20,^4. 19, 35, iv. 8.11, V. 1.9,5. 22; iav μή, unless, i. 4. 12 ; idv re . . . id» T€, with verb to be sup- plied, whether . . . or, v. 5. 16, vii. 3-37. lavmp, conj. [ίάν], if at least, if only, iv. 6. 17. lapCi;» (έαρίδ-) [?αρ, spring, cf. Lat. uer, spring], spend the spring, iii. 5. 15. Ιαυτον, ψ, ου, contr. αντον, etc., refl. pron. [pronominal stem i (see ου) 4- αύτό$], of himself, herself itself, used both directly and in- directly, i. I. 5, 2. 7, 14, 7. 9, ii. c. 29, 38, iv. 5. 24, V. 3. 6, 6, 16, 8. 14, vi. I. 32, vii. i. 18. The gen. with the article takes the place of the possessive pron., Lat. suus, as d^i«-T6Vfi ixl T^v 4αυτοΰ σκηνήρ, he rode off to his own tent, i. 5. 12, cf ii. 4. 7, iv. 3. 26, v. 6. 37 ; in this case the substantive may be omitted, as rods έαυτοΰ, his own men, i. 2. 15, cf iii. 1. 16, 4. 45, iv. 5. 23, vii. 7. 44. 16m, ϋσω, ΐίάσα, €Ϊάκα, €Ϊαμαι, €ΐάθην, let, allow, permit, with inf., or with ace. and inf., i. 4. 7, 9. 13, ii. 3. 26, iii. 3. 3, V. 8. 22, vii. 4. 20; ούκ iav, not allow, i.e. refuse, forbid, prohibit, abs. or with inf., i. 4• ^^ V. 2. 10, 7. 3, vii. 4. 10; let go, neglect, give up, with ace, i. 9. 18, vii. 3. 2. Phrases : iav χαΐ- p€iv, vii. 3. 23, see χαίρω; ταΰτα efo, he let the matter drop, vii. 4. Ji JLm ΐρδομήκοντα, indecl. [tirra + Λιιοβτ,], seventy, Lat. septudginta, iv. 7. 8. Ιβδομοβ» η, ov [iirrd], seventh, Lat. Septimus, vi. 2. 12. ίγ-, by assimilation for ^1^ before a palatal mute. έγ^ίγνομαι [R.ycv], be born in, be innate, be in, Lat. innascor, v. 8. 3. ^YYvdw, ήyyύησa, -η^^ύηκα, iyye- ^ύημαι, iiyyuifjevv [^τ^ϊ?, pledge], pledge; mid,, pledge oneself, en- gage, promise, Lat. spondeo, with ace. and inf., vii. 4. 13. Ιγγνθιν, adv. [fiyis], from close by, iv. 2. 27. iyy^S) adv., near, close by, nigh, nearly, comp. iyyurepov, sup. iyyu- τάτω or iyyύτaτa, of place, abs. or with gen., i. 8. 8, 10. 10, ii. 2. 15, 4. 1, iii. 3. 7, iv. 2. 15, 4. 1, 7. 23, V. 4. 10, vi. I. 17 ; sup. with the art., Clearest, Lat. proximus, ii. 2. 16, V. 7. 13; of time, sup. with the art., last, ii. 2. 11 ; of relation, nigh on to, very nearly, Lat. fere, iv. 2. 28, V. 4. 13 ; with gen., v. 7. 9. I^yctp» (^€/>-), iyepQ, Tjyeipa or 'f|yp6μηp, iyp^yopa, iyήy€pμaι, iiyip- θην, rouse; pass, and 2 perf., be awakened, wake up, lie awake, keep vigil, Lat. uigilo, iv. 6. 22, v. 7. 10. Ιγκαλ^ω [R. κολ], call in, claim, of a debt, vii. 7. 33 ; bring a charge against, reproach, blame, of per- sons, with dat and sometimes a clause with aJs or 6τι, vii. 5. 7, 7. 44, 47. ίγκαλνιττω («αλύιττω, κα\υβ-, κα- λύψω, έκάΧυψα, κ€κά\υμμαι, έκαΧύ- φθην, cover), cover closely; mid., wrap oneself up, iv. 5. 19. Ιγκ€ΐμαι [κ€ΐμαι], lie in, be in, iv. 5. 26. I^K^XcvirTos» ov [R. κιλ], insti- gated, of persons, with ύτό and gen., i. 3. 13. ΙγκΙψολο$> ov [κ€0αλι)], within the head; as subst., ό έyκέφά\os (sc. /ιυβλόί, marrow), the brain; of the palm tree, the crown, a cabbage- like growth at the top, edible and of a peculiar flavour, but causing headache, ii. 3. 16. Ιγκρατή«ι ^s [R. 1 κρα], possessed of power, holding fast, master or lord of, with gen., i. 7. 7, v. 4. 15. iypr\y6pCKrav, see έy€iρω. έγχαλΐνόω [χαλϊϊ'όω], put on a bridle; esp. in perf. pass. iyKexa- λϊνωμένοι, ready bridled, vii. 2. 21, 7. 6. Ιγχ€ΐρ€ω, έyχ€ιpήσω, έν^χαρησα [R. X€p], lay one'^s hand on, ivMke an attempt, abs., V. I. 8. {γ\«ρ(διο$, ov [R. X€p], in the hand; subst., τό iyχ€ιpίδLov, dag- ger, dirk, as eas- ily held in the hand, Lat. pu- gio, iv. 3. 12. The iyxeipldiov was two-edged, and often had an ornamented handle. In the second of the accompanying cuts the handle was faced with plates of wood, united by rivets. ριουμαι, etc. [R. χ€ρ], handle), com- mit to the hands of, entrust, Lat. mando, iii. 2. 8. ^ΎΧ^ω (Χ^ω, χυ-, -χ^ω, «χβα, -κέ- χυκα, κέχυμαί, έχύθην [root χυ, cf, Lat. fundo, pf. fudi, pour, Eng. Gush, gut], pour), pour in (sc. olvov), fill a cup, esp. for a libii- tion, iv. 3. 13. ίγώ, έμου or μου, pers. pron. {cf. Lat. ego, Eng. I, Lat. we, Eng. me], /, in the nom. used only when emphatic, i. 3. 3, 10, 6. 8, 7. 7, ii. 2. 3, iii. I. 25, iv. 8. 12, v. i. 7, vi. I. 29, vii. 2. 25. Ιγωγ€ [έγώ + τ^], I for my part, Lat. equidem, i. 4. 8, vi. i. 32. Ιδ€δο(κ€θ-αν, see δείδω. {δ», see δέω, lack. Ιδ€ΚΓ<ιν, see δΐίδω. ϊδηδοκότ€$} see ίσθίω. No. 19. Siiii iiiiliUlIM^^^^ ISfMft|l01^-•tλήχtιv ίί :η ?δρ»μον, see rpixm. ISwica, see δίδωμι, ^% ^mvf see ρίω. Hmon^f, οΰ [iffiXu], volunteer^ Lat uoluntarius^ in a military sense, iv. i. 20, 2. 14; as adj., oi iBeXotn-al φίλοι, friends of their own free imll, i. 6. 9. MfXowaios, ά, ov [e [R. ακ], throw in a javelin, vii. 4. 15. itirPaCvo» [R. βα], go on board, embark, with els ττλοϊορ, v. 7. 15. ιΐα-βάλλο» [βάλλω], throw into; intr., throw oneself into, invade, with els and ace. of place, i. 2. 21, V. 4. 10 ; of rivers, empty, i. 7. 15. f Ισβιβά^ω (βφά^ω, βιβαδ-, -βιβάσω or βίβώ, -^βίβασα [R. βα], make go), make go on, of persons, put on board, embark, Lat. impdno, v. 3. 1. cto -βολή, ψ [βάλλω], inroad, in- vasion, V, 6. 7 ; place of entrance^ pass, i. 2. 21. cl [R. poF + ^ /ω], come out to the rescue, with έκ and gen., vii. 8. 15. Sryovos, ov [R. γιν], born of, de- scended from; subst., ol inyovoi, descendants, iii. 2. 14 ; of animals, τά iicyova, the young, iv. 5. 25. licSlfMi (β4ρω, δ€ρω, Ueipa, δέδαρ- t*m, Uip^v [R. δαρ], flay), strip off the skin, flay, with ace. of pers., Ικ8($«»μλ [R. 80], give away or up, deliver up, Lat. dido, vi. 6. 10, IB; give away from one's house, of marrying off a daughter, Lat. nuptum do, in pass, with wapa and dat., iv. I. 24. 4kSi^ [δόω], put off, strip off; mid. and 2 aor. act., strip oneself, iv. 3. 12. Iicii, adv., there, in that place, with verbs of rest, i. 3. 20, 8. 12, vi. 3. 16, vii. 2. 15 ; with verbs of motion, thither, iii. i. 46, v. 6. 26. <κ€ίθ€ν, adv. liKei], thence, from there, Lat. illinc, v. 6. 24. iKiivos, η, 0, dem. pron. [iKci], that, that man there, Lat. ille, used prop, of a person or thing remote in thought or actual distance from the speaker or subject in hand, but sometimes refers to one near at hand or lately mentioned, and even to the subject itself ; in agree- ment with a subst. it has the pred. position ; it is often used as a strong form of the pers. pron., he, she, it; i. i. 4, 2. 7, 15, 3. 1, 18, ii. 5.38, 6.8, 14, 19, iii. i. 29, 2. 5, iv. 3. 20, V. 6. 31, vii. 3. 4. Phrase : iK του iir 4κ€Ϊνα, see έπ4κ€ΐ»α. Utifre, adv. [έκ€ΐ], to that place, thither, Lat. illUc, vi. i. 33, 6. 36. Ικ^κτη«Γθ, see κτάομαι. Ικήρν|€, Ικηρίίχθη, see κηρύττω. Μλίβω (θλίβω, θλιβ-, θλίψω, Ιίθλΐψα, έθλτφθην, press), squeeze out, crowd out, of soldiers crowded out of their ranks, iii. 4. 19, 20. 4κκαθα({>ω [^καθαίρωί^, cleanse thoroughly, of shields, burnish, i. 2. 16, an inferior reading for the following word. ^κκαλνίΓτω (καλύττω, κάλυβ-, κα- λύψω, ^κάλυψα, κ€κάλυμμαι, 4καλύ- φθη», cover), uncover, said of shields, when carried without the usual leathern case (σάγ/ιο), i. 2. 16. Ικκλτ|<Γ(α, as [R. κολ], assem- bly, the regular word for town meeting, the people being called out by proclamation of the herald ; in Anab. meeting or assembly of soldiers, with avvdyeiv or roieiv, i. 3• *, 4• 12. 4κκλησι,ά|;ω, έκκλησιάσω, έξεκλη- ffUura or ήκκλτμτίασα [R. καλ], hold an assembly^ abs., v. 6. 37. iKKXivtt (κλίνω, κλιρ -f κλινώ,ίίκΧϊνα, κέκλιμαι, έκλίθην or -€κλίνην [cf απο- κλίνω], bend), of soldiers, bend out of line of battle, give ground, Lat. incUno, abs., i. 8. 19. €κκομ£ζ« [κομΧξω], carry out, draw out, as wagons from the mud, i, 5. 8 ; bring off, lead off, of sol- diers, vi. 6. 36 ; mid., carry off for one's own use, v. 2. 19. ^κόΐΓτω [κόΐΓτω], cut away from what surrounds, of trees from a wood, or of an entire wood, where we say cut down (cf. εκπίπτω), i. 4. 10, ii. 3. 10. ίκκνβιστάω (κυβιστάω, •€κυβί- στησα [/cuirrw, stoop], tumble head foremost), turn heels over head, throw a somersault, of a dancer, vi. I. 9. ΙκκυμΛίνω (κυμαίνω, κυμαν- \_κυμα, billow, cf. Lat. cumulus, heap, pile], surge), billow out, surge forward, of part of a line of battle, i. 8. 18. Ικλ^γω (-λ^ω, -έλ€ξα, -€ίλοχα, ^€ίλeγμaι, -€λέyηv [R. λ€γ], gather), pick out, Lat. deligo, iii. 3. 19; mid., select for oneself, choose, ii. 3. 11, V. 6. 20. 4κλ€(ΐΓω [\e/irw], leave out, aban- don, of cities, houses, etc., with ace, which may be understood, iii. 4. 8, iv. I. 8, vii. 4. 2; τ^ν πόλιν έκλιπ€ΐν els χωρίον όχυρόν έπΙ τά Ορη, leave the city and flee to a fortress in the mountains, i. 2. 24; intr., give out, of snow, melt away, iv. 5. 15. ^κμηρύομαι (μηρύομαι, έμηρΰσά- μην, draw, intr., wind), intr., wind out, of an army, defile, vi. 5. 22. ΙκΊτέμιτω [πέμπω], send off or away, abs., iii. 2. 24; mid., send from oneself, let go, dismiss, v. 2. 21. 4κΐΓ€ΐΓληΎμ(Ινο$ι ΙκΊΓΜτλήχθαι, see Ικπλ-ήττω. 4Ktrcpa(vci» [R. ircp], bring to^ an end, fulfil, accomplish, with ώστβ and inf., v. i. 13. Ικ•ιπ|8άο» (π-ηδάω, πηδήσομΛΐ, ίπή- δησα, -πεπ-ήδηκα [R. iri8], leap), spring out, vii. 4. 16. ΙκΊτίμιτλημι [R. ιτλα], fill up, iii 4.22. Ικνίνω [R. 1Γ0], drink off or up, i. 9. 25. ΙκΐΓΐ-ιττω [R. itct], fall out, of trees from their place in a wood, where we say fall down (cf. έκ- κόπτω), ii. 3. 10 ; from one's house or country, be driven out, be exiled, with gen. or έκ and gen., v. 2. 1, vii. 2. 32 ; ol έκπeπτωκότes, the ex- iles, Lat. exsules, i. 1. 7 ; έκ ttjs όδοΰ έκπίπτειν, drop out of the road, V. 2. 31 ; used also abs., esp. of voyagers, be shipwrecked, vi. 4. 2, vii. 5. 12, and of hasty movement, tumble out, hurry out, v. 2. 17, 18. ^KirXaYcCs, see 4κπλ•ήττω. ^κιτλ^ω [R. irXeF], sail off or away, ii. 6. 2, iii. i. 8, v. 6. 21, vi. 4. 8, vii. 6. 1. Ικχλ€ω$» ων, gen. ω [R. ιτλα], filled up, complete, full, of a square of men, and also of pay, iii. 4. 22, vii. 5. 9. ΙκΊτλήττω, aor. pass, έξeπλάyη» [πλήττω]. Strike out of, esp. out of one's senses, amaze; pass., be astounded, surpHsed, frightened out of one's wits, sometimes with dat. of cause or έπί and dat., i. 5. 13, 8. 20, ii. 2. 18, v. 6. 36, vi. i. 12, vii. 6. 42. ΙκΊΓοδών, adv. [R. ΐΓ€δ], out of one's way, of removing an obsta- cle, ii. 5. 29 ; εκποδών πoιeΐσθaι with ace, put one out of the way, i. 6. 9. ΙκτΓορ€ύομαι [R. inp], go out, march forth, v. i. 8, 6. 33, vi. 6. 37. ΙκΊΓορίζω [R. ir€p], bri)ig to light, provide, supply, v. 6. 19, vi. 2. 4. {κΊτωμα, aros, to [R. iro], drink- ing cup, goblet, iv. 3. 25, 4. 21, vii. 3. 18. iKTaOcCsy see έκτ€ίνω. cKTatos» a, ov [ί|], on the sixth day, vi. 6. 38. ίκτάττω [R. τακ], draio out in line of battle ; mid., form line of battle, Lat. explicd aciem, v. 4. 12, vii. I. 24. J ■ ti V lim(vii-IXfCv 70 71 Ιλ€λίζω-1λΐΓύ« IK ( Ιί •Γ ' ' 1 t ixnlvm [tc/j'w], Mretch out, $tretch, of legs, v. 8. 14 ; pass., of a man asleep, stretched ca full lengthy v. i. 2. Irrofcvw [R. τακ], shoot arrows from a place, vii. 8. 14. licTds, adv. [έξ], outside of with gen., ii. 3. 3. Iktos, η, 0» mj, sixths Lat. sex- iU5, vi. 2. 12. ΙκτρίιτΜ Ιτρέττω}, tum out, di- vert; pass, and 2 aor. mid. intrans., turn aside or owi of the way, iv. 5. 15. ΙκτρΙφι» {τρ4φω], bring tip, rear, of a child, I^t. eniitno, vii. 2. 32. Ικτ|»^Μ Ιτρ4χω], rush out, esp. to attack, make a sally, v. 2. 17, 4. 16. Iicrdrro, see κτάομαι. ΙκφαΙν» [R. φα], bring to light; phrase : WXe/M>v έκφαΙν€ίν, open hos- tilities, with Tpos and ace, iii. 1. 16. U^(m [R. φ€ρ], carry out a per- son as dead, Lat. effero, vi. i. 6 ; bring to accomplishment, in the phrase ίκφέραν πόλεμαν xpds Tim, open hostilities against one, Lat. bellum Inferre alkui, iii. 2. 29; carry forth to people, announce, report, sometimes with eh aind ace, i. 9. 11, v. 6. 17, 29. Ικφιύγαι [R. φνγ], flee out of, es- cape, abs., with wpot, or with μή and inf., i. 3. 2, 10. 3, vii. 4. 6. Ικών, oma, or, willing, of one's own choice, in pred. position when with art., and then generally best translated as adv., willingly, vol- untarily, i. I. 9, ii. 4. 4, iii. 2, 26, V. I. 14, vii. I. 16. Ιλαβον, see λαμβάνω. ΙλΑά or Ιλα(ά, as [cf Eng. o//Ve], olive tree, Lat. ofiua, vi. 4. 6 ; the fruit of the tree, olive, vii. i. 37. iXaiov, TO [, 6v [ΈλΧτ^μ], Hel- lenic, Greek, Lat. Graecus, i. 1.6, in. 4. 45, iv. 8. 7, v. 4. 34, vi. 3. 10, vii. 3. 41 ; τό ΈλΧηνικόν, the Greek army, i. 2. 1, iii. 4. 34, iv. i. 10. έλληνικώβ, adv. [Έλλι/μικό?], in the Hellenic language, in Greek, Lat. Graece, i. 8. 1. Έλληνί?, ίδο5, η ["Ελλι^ΐ'], Greek, Grecian, fern adj. used with 7^ and ΊτόΧΐί, iv. 8. 22, v. 5. 16, vi. 6. 12, vii. 1.29. ελληνιστί, adv. [έλληνί^ω'], in the language of Hellas, in Greek, vii 6.8. Έλλησ-ΐΓθντιακ05, ή, *" ['Ελλι}- (TirovTos], Hellespontine, of cities, lying on the Hellespont, i. i. 9. Έλλή<ηΓθντθ5, ο \^ΈXληΛ■^Γbv Tos], the Hellespont, i.e. HelWs sea, named, according to the myth, from Helle, who was drowned in it while riding with her brother Phrixus on the ram with the golden fleece to escape their stepmother Ino. It is the strait (Dardanelles) separating Europe from Asia and connecting the Propontis with the Aegean. The ancients called it 400 stadia long and 7 stadia wide at its narrowest part. Here Leander swam across to visit Hero, and here Xerxes built his famous bridge. The possession of this strait was of the utmost importance to Ath- ens, as it was the key to the coun- tries on which she depended for grain ; hence it was the scene of several important naval battles. The name is also extended to the neighbouring coast, which was full of Greek cities, i. i. 9, ii. 6. 3, vii. 2. 5. Ιλιτίζω (ίΧΐΓΐδ-), ηΧτισα, ήλνίσθην [Airis], hope, trust, expect, Lat. spero, with fut. inf., iv. 6. 18, vi. 5. 17, vii. 6. 34. iKvis, ίδοί, η [root Ρ€λΐΓ, wish, cf. Lat. uoluptds, satisfaction, pleas- ure], hope, Lat. spes, ii. 5. 10 ; with Ιμ— {pwoSCI•• 72 73 IjiiroSios-^vaiTTtf id pn., or aor. or fat. inf. of the thing hoped for, ii. i. 19, iii. 2. 8, iv. 3 8. Phrases: iXviSas \iyωv Sιηy€, he continually put them off with hope, L 2. 11; iy Ατίσι fieyaXacs eimi, he full of confidence, i. 4. 17 ; έξω» ξχω iXwiSat, on what grounds I hope, ii. 5, 12. Vi by assimilation for ip^ in composition before a labial mute. Ιμ.αθ€ν, see μανθάνω. ίμαυτοΰ, Tjs, refi. pron. [pronomi- nal stem |M (see iyώ) + αύτό«1, of myself i. 3. 10, ϋ. 3. 29, iii. ,. 14, V. 8. 10, yii. 6. 35. Ιμβαίι^ [R. βα], gro t»/o, enter, abs. or with €i$ and ace, ii. 3. 11, iv. 3. 28; esp. embark, Lat. con- scendd, abs. or with els and ace i 3. 17, V. 7.7, vii. 3.3. Ιμβάλλα> [βάλλω], cast in, put m, thrust in, of a bar into its place m the doorposts, vii. i. 12, 15; in- trans., thrttw oneself into, of rivers, empty, and of soldiers and armies, make an invasion, attack, abs. or with els and ace, i. 2. 8, 8. 24, 111. 4. 14, 5. 16 iv. 8. 2, vi. 2. 18. Ihrases: TrXirr&s έμβάΧΧείρ, inflict blows, i• 5. 11 ; Tois ijnrois έμβάΧΧ€ΐν t6v χϊλόν, throw in, i,e,, give fodder to the horses, i. 9. 27. ΙμΡ4β4|ω {βφάζω, βφαδ-, φφάσω or βφω, -€βφασα [R. βα], make go, causative to βαίνω), make go in, esp. make embark, put on board, Lat. in nauem impdnd, abs. or with els and ace, v. 3. 1, 7. 8. Ιμβολήι ^y [β4λλ«], invasion, in- road, with €4i and ace, iv. i. 4. Ι|λΡ;Μίντητο$, Of [βροντάω, thun- der, rf βροντ-ή}, thunderstruck, stunned, terrified, Lat. attonitm, lu. 4. 12. I|if&vi, see μένω, Ι|ΐΙβ», έμοΰμαι, ημε^α [root ρ•μ, c/ Lat. noma, vomit, Eng. emeticl, vomit, be sick, iv. 8. 20. Ι|^μνητθ| see μιμν^σκω, Wvoi [R. im], stoy tn, /iw i/i, With iv and dat., iv. 7. 17. V^i 4, Λΐ', poeseseive pron. [pro- nominal stem μ€ (see iyo), cf Lat me?/e, my, Eng. mine, mvJ, w?/, mine, with or without the art., as & iμbs ττατήρ, my father, I 6. 6, ef 11. 5. 22, but iμJbs άδ€Χφ6$, a brother of mine, i. 7. 9 ; τά έμά, my situa- tion, vii. 6. 33. Ιμιταλνν, adv., in Anab. always with the art. and by crasis τουμ- iraXiv [iraXiv], back, back again, so also the phrase els τουμτταΧιν, i 4 15,iii.r 13,iv.3.21,v.7.6,vi.6.38'. €μΐΓ€δ<ίω, iinpf. -ίιμτέδουν, έμτ€- 5ώ(τω [R. tnS], make firm, hold fast, hold sacred, of oaths, iii. 2. 10. ΙμΐΓ«ιρο5, ov [R. wip], acquainted with, skilled in, experienced, of countries and diseases, abs. or with gen., iv. 5. 8, v. 6. 1, vii. 3. 39. ΙμΐΓΐίρ««, adv. [R. «p], by expe- rience; iμτ€lpωs αύτοΰ ^xeiv, be personally acquainted tcith him, ii. 6. 1. Ιμιτίμιτλημι [R. ιτλο], fill full, satisfy, pass, with gen., be full of, 1. 7. 8, 10. 12 ; mid. with partic, vwισχvoύμevos ούκ 4ν€τΙμΐΓΧα(το, you couldn't make promises enough to satisfy yourself, vii. 7. 46. hi , iii. I. 13, V. 7. 26; of men, tumble into, meet with, attack, abs. or with els and ace, iv. 8. 11, v. 7. 25, vi. 5. 9. ' ^ Ιμνλιω^, ων, gen. ω [R. ιτλαΙ,/ΜΗ of, quite full of, with gen., i. 2. 22. Ιμ«ο8ίζ• [R. ««8], put in bonds, hinder, be in the way of, Lat. twi- pedid, iv. 3. 29. luiroSios, ov [R. ΐΓ«δ], in the xmy, himlerino, vii. 8. 4; τό έμ•κΙ>δων, the hindrance, vii. 8. 3. ^μίΓοδών, adv. [R. ireS], before the feet, in the way ; έμνοδών ehai, be in the way, hinder, with dat. of ners., v. 7. 10 ; with τό μή and mf . or μ^ ού and ace and inf., c/. Lat. quid impedit quominus, iii. i. 13, iv. 8. 14. ^ . ίμίΓοιίω [ιτοιίω], make in, cause, impress upon, with ace and dat., or with dat. and a clause with ωs, ii. 6. 8, 19, vi. 5. 17. Ιμιτολάω, έμττοΧήσω, έν€ποΧησα, ■ήμτόΧηκα, -ημττόΧημαι, ήμνοΧήθην [έμίΓοΧή, trafic], get by traffic, earn, realize, vii. 5-4. ΙμΐΓΟρι.ον, τό [R. wcp], trading- place, mart, emporium, where mer- chants (ΊίμτΓοροί) brought goods by sea to sell to retail dealers (κάνη- Xoi), i. 4. 6. €μΐΓορο5, ό [R. ircp], passenger, generally by sea, hence, merchant, idiolesale dealer, Lat. wercaior and negotiator, engaged in export and import as well as in home trading, V. 6. 19, 21. 2μΐΓρο<Γθ€ν, adv. ΙτΓρ6σθ€ν'\, of place, before, in front of, iv. 2. 12, V. 4. 12, vii. 7. 36 ; with gen., i. 8. 23, iv. 5. 9. Phrases: ol ίμττρο- ffdev, those in front, the van, iii. 4• 48, iv. 3. 14, 5. 19 ; τά ^μτροσθ€ν, of men, foreparts, as opp. to the back, v. 4. 32 ; of country, what is ahead, vi. 3. 14 ; ά ίμ-προσθΐν X6yos, see X6705. Of time, rbv Ιίμτροσθ€ν χρόνον, hitherto, vi. 1. 18; iv τψ ίμ- ττροσθεν χρόνφ, in past days, vi. 6. 31. ΙμψάγοΜν, Ιμφαγόνταβ, see iv- ίφα^ον. Ιμψανήβι . [R. ' openly, v. 4. 33. Ιμφανώβ, adv. [R. φα], visibly. iv, prep. [4v], with dat., in, like Lat. in with abl., used of place and time, and in other relations. Of place, in, among, in one's presence, before, on, at, by, i. 1.6, 5. 1, 6. 1, 8. 22, ii. 2. 14, iv. 7. 9, 8. 22, v. 6. 22, 7. 10; iv iτtτη^€ioLS δαψίΧέσι, with provisions in abundance, iv. 2. 22; iv OttXois, under arms, iii. 2. 28. Of time, in, during, within, at, in the course of, often iv τούτφ with χρόνφ understood, meanwhile, i. 5. 15, iii. I. 44, iv. 2. 17, 5-22; so also iv ψ and iv ats {sc. ijp^pais), during this time, while, i. 2. 10, 20, ID. 10, ii. 2. 15, iv. 2. 19. Often used with the art. and neut^ ad], instead of an adv., as iv τψ φα- ν€ρψ, openly, i. 3• 21, cf ii. 5. 25. Phrases: iv iceipq. Ktpov yeviffOai, be intimately acquainted with Cy- rus, i. 9. 1 ; iv όφθαΧμΛίί ίχ^ίν, keep in sight, iv. 5. 29 ; aSovres iv ρνθμψ, singing in time, v. 4• 14 ; «^ ^' ^^ τούτψ €(η, if haply there were any- thing important in this, vi. 4. 22. In composition ^i^ becomes iy- be- fore a palatal {κ, y, χ) and i/*- be- fore a labial (ir, /3, φ) or before μ, and signifies in, at, on, upon, among. %v see els Ινάγκυλάω [R. αγκ], fit javelins with a thong, for the purpose of hurling them, iv. 2. 28. Ιναντιόομαΐι ivavτ^ώσoμaι, ήναν- τίωμαι, ήναντιώθην [αντί], set one- self against, withstand, oppose, with dat. and gen., vii. 6. 5. ivavrCos, a, ov [avrC], opposite, in the opposite direction, before, in one's face, Lat. aduersus, iv. 3. 28, 5. 3, vii. 3. 42 ; τάναντία, the opposite, the reverse, v. 6. 4, 8. 24 ; opposed to, hostile, abs. or with dat., iii. 2. 10, vii. 6. 25 ; with η, V. 8. 24 ; ol ivavrloi, the enemy, vi. 5. 10. Phrases : τάναντία crpi- ^j/avTes, having faced about, iv. 3. 32 ; iK του ivavTlov, on the opposite side, iv. 7. 5, vi. 5. 7 ; τούτου ivav- Tlov, in this man's presence, Lat. cdram hoc, vii. 6. 23. 4νάΐΓΓ« ΙϋίΊΓτω'\, fasten to, kindle, set on fire, Lat. incendo, abs. or with ace, v. 2. 24, 25, 26. <»l i i r; Ivwrof-lvift IvATOf, η, ov [IvWa], ninth, Lat. nonuSy ένάτην ημέρα ν Ύ€^αμημ4νην maiTied eight days be/ore, iv. c. 24. *' έναυλίζομαι [R. 2 oF], pass the mght in, bivouac, encamp, vii. 7. Iv&ia, aj .[R. Sf], w^aui, need, scarcity of provisions or money, poverty, i. 10. 18. vi. 4. 23, vii. 8. 6. lv8€£Kvv»ii [R. 1 8aic], show forth, i-at. indico; mid., s/ioto «?Λ«ί is om s own, express, declare, vi. i. ^ϊ^ί*'^"*' ^7, oip [efi+ δίκα], eZev- enth, Lat. undecimus, i. 7. 18 li^«» [R. δ€], lack; impers., mere IS need or wane, with dat. of pers., gen. of thing, and «στ^ with ml, vii. I. 41 ; έώρά wXdovoi έρδέο», he saw that more reasons were wanted, vi. i. 31. Ινδηλο«, ov [δ^λοί], evident, ob- nous, plain, manifest, generally with partic. like an adverb, ίίvδηλos iyLyv€To ίνφονΧΐύωρ, he was clearly plotting, ii. 6. 23, cf. 4. 2. Phrase : iwSTjXov aB καΐ τοΰτ €ίχ€ν &τι, he rmde this also obvious that, ii. 6. 18. ^f^un, OP [R. δα], dwelling in a place, native, at home ; τά ίνδημα, home or internal revenues as con- trasted with foreign, vii. i. 27. Ινδίφριοβ, ov [δύο+ R φ€ρ],*οη a δΙφρο$ with one, on the same seat, «Aan'^ir one's seat, vii. 2. 33, 38. IfBojiiv, adv. [Iv], from the in- mae, from within, v. 2. 22, vii. 8 14. hBow, adv. [έν], inside, within, of a house or other place, ii. c. 32, iv-5.24, V. 2. 17, vii. I. 17. ii«o|os, oi' [R. δοκ], in renown, glorious, famous ; act. of a bird of omen, betokening or presaging glory or fame, vi. i. 23. Iii«^ [δ6ω], put on, clothe one- self tn, Lat. induo, i. 8. 3 ; pf. and P^-yhavepnt on, wear, v. 4. 13. i»4Sf»a, as [R. «Γ€δ], α sitting in, 74 75 Ιν64δ€-^ντ^λλομαι ambush, ambuscade, Lat. insidiap IV. 7.22, V. 2. 30. ' Ιν€δρ€νι», έν€δρ€ύσομαι (as pass.), ένίΐδρ€υσα, ένηδρ€ύθην [R. ο^δ], lie in ambush, set an afnbush, way- lay, Lat. insidior, abs., i. 6. 2, iv. I. 22, 6. 17. Ινιίδον [R. ριδ], see, remark, observe something in any one or anything, with ace. and dat, vii. 7. 45. ' lv€i|ii [R. CO-], be in or on, abs. or with iv and dat., i. 6. 3, ii. 4. 22, *^• 5• 26, V. 3. 8 ; be there, abs., i. 5• 1, 2, li. 3. 14. IvfKa or Ivckcv (see below), adv. and improper prep, with gen., on account of, by reason of, generally post-positive like the Lat. causa, i 9. 21 ii 3. 13, 5. 14, V. 6. 11 ; stand- ing before a vowel, i. 5. 9, iii. 4. ^5, IV. 1. 22 ; preceding its subst., V. 4. 19; between the adj. and subst., i. 4. 5, 8; separated from the subst., i. 9. 21 ; iv€K€v, gener- ally used before a vowel, ii. 3. 20, iii. 2. 28, V. 4, 16 ; before a conso- nant, V. I. 12; preceding its sub- stantive, V. 8. 13. Ινινήκοντο, indecl. [4vv^a -f €Ϊκο- » iwos, a, 6v, speechless, dumb, deaf and dumb, iv. 5. 33. IviTos, ii, 6v [Ms, verbal of ΐημή, sent in, suborned, instigated, with ντό and gen., vii. 6. 41. iv•fΛ^ovltφayov], eat quickly OT hastily, iv. 2. 1, 5. 9. Ivcxctpicrav, see iy χαρίζω. IWxvpov, r6 [R. «τιχΐ, pledge, pawn, security, with Jj and a clause, vii. 6. 23. Μχ- [R. σ•€χ], hold or c-4ξ€λαύνο» 111 t f IvTfpov, τά [Iv], intestine^ gvt^ Lat. intesthiumj ii. 5. 33. IrrcvOfv, adv. of place, time, and 'cause [Iv] ; of place, thence, from iherey i. 2. 7, 10, v. 4. 26 ; of time, tke%y thereafter, afterwm'ds, ii. 2. 7, iii. I. 31, iv. 4. 15, vi. 6. 1 ; of cause, therefore, in consequence^ Yi. 4. 15, vli. I. 25. Ιντ(Οημν [R. ©c], put or place in; of fear, instil in, inspire in, with ace. and dat., vii. 4. 1; mid., put aboard ship, i. 4. 7, v. 7. 15. 2ντϊμο$, ov [R. Ti], in honour, in credit, esteemed, of persons, v. 6. 32, vi. 3. 18, vii. 7. 52. lvTf^a»S| adv. [R. Ti] ; ivripm ίχαν, be held in honour, ii. i. 7. IvToixiosy ov [toixos], on the wall ; τά έντοίχια, wall paintings, vii. 8. 1. irraimi, adv. [Ιίντονοί, eager, cf. ^iTciwtf], urgently, earnestly, vii. 5• 7. Ivrdsi adv. of place or time, with gen. [If] ; of place, within, inside of, I 10. 3, ii. I. 11, vi. 4. 3, 5. 7 ; of time, ivTOs όλΐ-γων ήμερων, tuUhin a few days, vii. 5. 9. Ιντνγχάν» [R. τακ], chance or light upon, fail in with, meet, find, abs. or with dat., i. 2. 27, 8. 1, ii. 3. 10, iii. 2. 31, iv. 5. 19, vi. 5. 5. 'EvvdXiost ό f Εκϋώ, Enyo, god- dess of war], Enyalius, a name applied to Ares as the furious god of war and companion of 'Έ,νϋώ. After the singing of the paean the war cry was raised to him, i. 8. 18, V. 2. 14. Ινύιτνιον, rh [ihrvos], vision in sleep, dream, whether prophetic or not, whereas Ovetpov is always a prophetic dream; τά ip&irvia, dream- pictures, vii. 8. 1 (where some read έντοίχΐΛ). lvwμoτdpχ1|f , οι; [cf. ίρωμοτίά + &PX»Ji commander of an enomoty, iii. 4. 21, iv. 3. 26. Ινωμοτίά, as [ένώματοί, bound by oath, cf. δμνυμι], any swoim band, eep. the enomoty, which formed a quarter of the λάχοι and one half of the ΊΓ€ντηκοστύ$, or division of fifty, and therefore consisted nor- mally of twenty-tive men, iii. 4. 22, iv. 3. 26. I|, or, before a consonant, Ik, by loss of t, prep, with gen. denoting separation or distance from a point [c/. Lat. ex, e]. Used of place, from, away from, out of, i. 2. 1, 7, 7. 13, ii. 4. 28, iii. 4. 25, iv. 7. 17, vi. I. 4 ; often Greek used the terminus ex quo where the English has the terminus in qu5, as (Ιχορ έξ apiffrepas ττοταμόν, they kept the river on the left, iv. 8. 2 ; cf i. 2. 3, iv. 2. 19, V. 3. 9, 7. 15. Of time, succeeding, after, as έκ του άριστου, after breakfast, iv. 6. 21 ; iK τούτον, after this, thereupon, i. 2. 17, 6. 8, ii. 5. 34 ; ^trci> (?/)τω, -Ipf ω, efpiry 11• iir', by elision for έτΙ. ίτταγγΛλω [άγγέλλω], give no- tice, proclaim ; mid., declare one- self propose or offer oneself, prom- ise, abs. or with" inf., or with dat. of the pers. and inf., ii. i. 4, iv. 7. 20, vii. I. 33. ^ιτάγω [R. αγ], bring on, urge on, bring forward, of a vote or motion, in the phrase ού yap ττω ψηφοί αύτψ έιτηκτο rrepl φνγψ, ηο decree of exile had yet been pro- posed against him, vii. 7. 67. Ιιταθον, see πάσχω. Ιηαί,νίω {αΐνέω, αΐνέσω, ^νεσα, -^veKa, --όνημαι, --^νέθ-ην [alvos, tale, praise'], praise), praise, Lat. laudd, commend, approve, compliment on, abs., with ace, with ace and έπί with dat., or with drt and a clause, i. 3. 7, 4. 16, ii. 6. 20, iii. i. 45, v. 5. 8, 7. 33, vi. 6. 35, vii. 3. 41 ; as a polity formula in declining an of- fer, in the phrase τήν μ^ν στιν ττρό- ροιαν Λταινώ, thank you vanf much indeed for your thoughtfulness, vii. 7. 52. Iiraivos, ό [aTws, tale, praise], praise, approval, commendation, V. 7. 33, vi. 6. 16, vii. 6. 33. €ΐΓαίρω [&€£ρω], raise up, rouse up, excite, induce, with ace of pers. and a following inf., vi. i. 21, vii. 7. 25. liraCrtos, ov [alWw], blamed for, blameworthy; subst., έταΐτών τι, a cause for blame, with dat. of pers. blamed, and Tpos and gen. of blamer, iii. i. 5. Ιιτακολονθ^β» [R. KcX], follow closely upon or up, pursue, abs. or with dat, iii. 2. 35, iv. 1. 1. Ιιτακονο» [R. koF], give ear to, overhear, vii. 1. 14. Itrdv or έιτήν, temporal conj. [^έττεί + άν], when, whenever, with τάχι- στο, as soon as, the moment that, Lat. cum prlmum, with the subjv., the aor. often being rendered by our fut. perf., i. 4. 13, ii. 4. 3, iv. 6.9. ΙΐΓανατ€(νω [τείνω], stretch out and hold up, vii. 4. 9. Ιιταναχωρ^ω [χωρ^ω] , move back, retreat, retire, with ττάλιν or els τουμιταλίν, iii. 3. 10, 5. 13. 4ΐΓανέρχομ.αι [βρχορΛΐ], go back to, return, with els and ace, or ^νθα and a clause, vi. 5. 32, vii. 3. 4, 5. Ιητάνω,οάν.Ι&νω], above. Phrase: iv Tois έιτάνω e(ρητaL, it has been stated above, Lat. supra dictum est, vi. 3. 1. ΙΐΓαΐΓ€ΐ.λ4ω \_άΐΓ€ΐ\έω], threaten in addition, add threats, vi. 2. 7. kirtyyekaM [Ύ€\άω], laugh at, inn suit, with dative, Lat. inrideo, ii. 4. 27. ifireytLpa lέyeίpω], wake up, arouse, iv. 3. 10. lireC, temporal and causal conj., Lat. cum; of time, when, afier, with indie, i. i. 1, iv. 7. 2, v. 8. 9, vi. I. 30, vii. 3. 47; with opt. in indir. disc, vii. 2. 27, or in a sup- position, i. 3. 1, 5. 2, 8. 20, V. 6. 30 ; with inf. by assimilation in indir. disc, V. 7. 18; iwel τάχιστα, as soon as, Lat. cum primum, with indie, vi. 3. 21 ; of cause, since, be- cause, as, with indie, i. 3. 5, 8. 23, ii. I. 4, iii. I. 31, vii. 3. 46 ; after a full stop, for, Lat. nam, vi. i. 30, vii. 6. 22; ivei ye, since at any rate, i. 3. 9. lirciSav, temporal conj. liireiS^ -f iv], when, after, as soon as, when- ever, in protases with subjv., esp. the aor., when it may often be ren- dered by the fut. perf., i. 4. 8, ii. 2. 4, 3. 29, V. 6. 19, vii. i. 6, 2. 34, 5. 8 ; with τάχιστα, Lat. cum prlmum, iii. I. 9. liTf ιβή, temporal and causal conj. ΙέΊΓ€ΐ-{'δή], of time, when, after, \ l>< i hnXMow-hrl 80 81 ΙΐΓΐβάλλω-Ιιηθαλάττιοδ r With mdic, i. 2. 17, 7. 16, 8. 28, 9. 29,111.1.13,4.38, 5. 18, iv. c. 8: with opt. in indir. disc, iii. 5. 18; of cause, since, because, with indie, yii. 7. 18 ; 4π€ΐδή 7€, since at least, 1. 9. 24. linCSov [R. ριδ], have one''s eyes on, behold, see, with ace. and par- tic, vii. 6. 31 ; live to see, experi- ence, with ace, or ace. and paitic, lii.^i. 13, vii. i. 30. ίτηιμχ [Κ. te-J, be over or on top of, of a bridge or tower, abs. or with 4iri and dat., i. 2. δ, ii. 4. 25, IV. 4, *• ΙΐΓ«ιμι [€Ϊμι2, go on, come up, make progress, of persons or things, abs., i. 5. 15, V. 7. 12 ; esp. of sol- diers, advance, attack, abs. or with dat., 1. 2. 17, 7. 4, 10. 10, iii. 4. 33, IV. 3. 23, 5. 17, vi. 3. 7, 5. 10 ; of orators or actors, come forward, enter, Lat. in scaenam prddeo, vi. I. 11 ; of time, η έτιοΰσα ημέρα, the next day, the following day, so with νύ^ and ?ω$, i. 7. 1, iii. 4. 18, iv. 5. 30, V. 2. 23, vii. 4. 14. urtiinp, causal conj. [^irei], with indie, since in fact, seeing that, ii. 2.10, 6.38, iv. I. 8, vii. 4. 19. fiTfiora, Ιιτι(σθησ-αν, see τηίθω. «ιπιτα, adv. [eira], thereupon, then, Lat. deinde, ii. 4. 5, 5. 20, iii. 1. 46, iv. 1. 7, 3. 11, V. I. 3, vii. 1. 4 ; esp. in enumerating, then, next, fuHher, besides, I 3. 10, 9. 5, iv. 8. 11, V. 5. 8; often in narrative, vpwTov φ . . , ixeira δέ, V. 4. 20, 6. 8, cf. ii. 4. 13. Phrase: els rbv iwtira xphpQv, in after times, ii. I. 17. Micfim, adv., for hr 4κ€Ϊνα, on the further side, beyond, Lat. ultra. Phrase: ol 4κ του έττέκαρα, those who dwelt beyond, v. 4. 3. IvfidMai [θέω'], run out against, make a sally, abs., v. 2. 22. Ιιη|Ιρχομαι [άρχομαι], come out against, make a sally, v. 2. 7. Iirc|o8u)s, o» [iSds], belonging to a march out or expedition; subst., τά iw€^a^ia (sc. Upd) etetv. f offer the sacrifice before marchinq, vi. 5. 2. lirc'iraTO, see νάομαι. liTfirpoKcii see τιπράσκω. Ιιτέιτράκτοι see πράττω. ΜμομΛΐ, only in 2 aor. έττηρόμην [^ρομαι], ask again or besides, question about, inquire, ask, with a clause in dir. disc, or with ace. of the pers. and a clause with el, β η or an interr., iii. i. 6, v. 8. 6, vii. 2. 25, 31, 3. 12. .^'"^ΡΧβμ** [άρχομαι], come upon, visit, Lat. obeo, of a country, with ace, vii. 8. 25. Sttco-ov, see ττίτΓτω. <ΐΓ«ύχομαι [€ΰχομαι], make a prayer to. I'hrase: irev^apjevo^ ciire, he spoke, calling the gods to ivitness, v. 6. 3. liTf φιν'γιο'αν, see φ€ύ^<ύ. heixm [R. o-fx], hold upon, hold m or back, Lat. inhibed ; intr., hold in, hold back, delay, with gen., iii. 4. 36. 4ΐΓήκοο5, OP [R. KoF], giving ear to; of a place, where one can hear or be heard; els έττήκοον with verbs of rest or motion, or iv έιτηκόφ with verbs of rest, vnthin hearing distance, within earshot, ii. 5. 38, I iii. 3. 1, iv. 4. 6, vii. 6. 8. 4ΐΓήκτο, see έττά^ω. Ιιτήν, see έττάν. liTQpiVi see Ιτταίρω. liH)pcTO, see έττέρομαι. itri, prep, with gen., dat., or ace, before a vowel iir' or έφ', upon. With gen., of place, on, upon, l 4. 3, 5. 10, 7. 20, iv. 3. 6, 5. 25, v. 2. 5» vii. 4. 11, 4φ' ΪΊΓίτων, on horse- back, iii. 2. 10, έττΐ του ποταμού, on the river bank, iv. 3. 28, cf. ii. 5. 18, 4πΙ QpiKtis, on the coast of Thrace, vii. 6. 26, έττΐ του €ύ(ανύμαυ, on the le,n, i. 8. 9, cf iii. 2. 36, with verbs of motion, towards, in the direction of, ii. I. 3, vi. 3. 24 ; of time, in the time of, at, i. 9. 12, iv. 7. 10, έτΙ του πρώτου (iepcioi/), with the first victim, iv. 3. 9, vi. 5. 2, 8 ; of man- ner, esp. denotmg distribution» irl τ€ττάρων, four deep, i. 2. 15, cf. iv. 8. 11, vii. 8. 14, ίφ' iv6s, in single file, v. 2. 6, i ίαυτίαν, by them- selves, ii. 4• 10, ^""i φά\ayyos, in the form of a phalanx, in battle array, iv. 3. 26, 6. 6, vi. 5. 7, 1:5. With dat., of place, upon, on, ctt, III, near, i. 2. 8, 4. 4, 8. 27, 9. 3, iv. 4! 2, v. 2. 16, vii. 3. 44, έπΙ θαλάττ^ι, on the sea, i. 4• I5 ζ/"• i• 3• 20, 7. 19, iv. 1. 20, V. 4. 2, 4πΙ τψ eύωvύμφ, on the left, i. 9. 31 ; of time, ^Xios ^p έπΙ Svapxus, the sun was just setting, vii. 3. 34, έπΙ τψ τρίτψ, at the third (signal) , ii. 2. 4, hrl τούτφ or toutois, at or upon this, thereupon, next, iii. 2. 4, vi. 1. 11, vii. 3. 14; of cause, aim, or reason, for, i. 3. 1, 6. 10, ii. 4. 5, 8, iii. 2. 4, V. 4. 11, 8. 18, vi. 4. 13, vii. 7. 39 ; of possession, in the power of, i. i. 4, iii. i. 13, v. 5. 20, over, in command of, i. 4. 2, τδ έπΙ τούτψ, as far as in him lay, vi. 6. 23 ; of condition, έφ' ψ or φτ€, on condition that, with inf., iv. 2. 19, 4. 6, vi. 6. 22. With ace, of place, to, on, upon, i. I. 3, 5. 13, iii. 4. 25, iv. 4. 4, 15, v. 2. 19, 22, vi. 2. 19, vii. 3. 23, έπΙ δόρυ (q.v.), to the right, iv. 3. 29, έπΙ δεξιά, to the right, vi. 4. 1, έπΙ πόδα, see άραχωρέω, v. 2. 32, άρα- /Sas έπΙ τόν ϊππορ, mounting owe's horse, i. 8. 3, iii. 4. 35, in a hos- tile sense, against, i. 3. 1, ii. i. 4, 3. 21, iv. 4. 20, V. 7. 24; of ex- tent of space, extending over, over, along, i. 7. 15, iv. 6. 11, ^i πολύ, for a great distance, i. 8. 8, iv. 2. 13, cf. vii. 5. 12, έπΙ βραχύ, see έξικρέομαι, iii. 3. 17, ίπΐ παρ iXdeiP, make every effort, iii. i . 18 ; of extent of time, for, during, vi. 6. 36, (as έπΙ τό πολύ, generally, for the most part, iii. i . 42, 43 ; of the purpose or object of an act or mo- tion, to, for, i. 2. 2, 6. 10, iii. i. 22, iv. 3. 11, v. I. 8, vii. 4. 3; rarely distributive, έπΙ πoλλoύs τετα-γμέ- poi, arranged many deep (but some read gen.), iv. 8. 11. In composition έπί signifies over, in, upon, against, in addition, but often gives merely intensity and force to the simple word without otherwise affecting its meaning. ΙΐΓΐβάλλω [βάλλω], throw on, iii. 5. 10 ; pf. mid., επιβεβλημένοι τοξό- ται, archers with their arrows on the string, with or without έπΙ rats νευραΐ^, iv. 3. 28, V. 2. 12. έΐΓΐβοηθέ» [R. βορ+^^ω], come to the rescue or aid of, with dat., vi. 5. 9. ΙΐΓΐβουλ€νω [R. βολ], plan or plot against, conspire or intrigue against, lay snares against, with dat., i. I. 3, ii. 5. 15, iii. i. 35, v. I. 9; with inf., purpose, design, scheme, v. 6. 29. ΙΐΓΐβουλή, rjs [R. βολ], a planning against, plot, scheme, design, in- trigue, ii. 5. 1, 38, vii. 2. 16 ; with dat. or προ$ and ace of the pers., i. 1. 8, V. 6. 29; έξ έπιβουλψ, by artifice, vi. 4. 7. ΙΐΓΐγ(γνομαι [R. γ€ν], be upon, come upon, esp. in a hostile sense, fall upon, attack, Lat. superuenio, abs. or with dat., iii. 4. 25, vi. 4. 26. Im'yράφω lypάφω'], write upon, inscribe, Lat. inscribo, v. 3. 5. ΙτΓίδιίκννμ,ι [R. 1 δακ], show to, point out, display, abs., with ace and dat., or with dat. and a clause, i. 2. 14, iii. 2. 26, v. 4. 17 ; show in words or deeds, make clear, dis- close, i. 3. 13, 16, 9. 7, V. 5. 24, vii. 4. 23 ; mid. , show oneself or for oneself, distinguish oneself, bring to light, show, abs., with ace, or with a clause, i. 9. 10, 16, ii. 6. 27, iv. 6. 15, V. 4. 34. ΙΐΓίδιώκω [διώκω'], pursue after, follow up, chase, of enemies, abs. , i. ID. 11, iv. 1. 16, 3. 25. liTiSovraSi see έπεϊδο». k-mitfiro, see πιέζω. Ιιτιθαλάττιος, α, op, ΟΓ os, op [θά- λαττα], on the sea^ lying on the sea, Lat. maritimus, of places, v. 5.23. i 4 f Ιϋ;" Ιν<Ιιβη§-4ιη)Μλ^ 82 II Γ MOfo-ts, €W5, 71 [R. β€], a setting oil, attack^ Lat. impetus, vii. 4. 23 ; with dat. , iv. 4. 22. ίιηΒνμΑω, έττιθυμ-ήσω^ έ'Τ€βϋμησα [R. 1 θυ], have one^s heart on, de- sire, wish for, long for, covet, Lat. cupid, with inf., ace. with inf., or with gen., i. 9. 12,21, ii. 5. 11,6. 16, iii. 2. 39, v. i. 2, vi. i. 21 ; lust after, he in love with, iv. i. 14. ΙΐΓΐθνμίά, as [R. 1 βν], demre, longing, Lat. cupiditas, ii. 6. 16. liTiKaCpios, ov Ικαιρό^], in season, suitable, appropriate, Lat. oppor- tunus; ol έπικαίρωι, the important or chief men, vii. i. 6. ΙνικάμιττΜ {κάμτΓτω,καμχ-,κάμψω, ίκαμψα, -κ^καμμαι, ίκάμφθην, bend), bend towards, of an army, toheeL i. 8. 23. Ι-ΐΓίκατορρϊτΓτ^» [/Μττ^ω], throw down after, iv. 7. 13. Iirdccifjiai [Kcifwu], lie upon, press upon, of an enemy, attack, Lat. In- sto, abs. or with dat., iv. i. 16, 3. 7, V. 2. 5, vi. 5. 29, vii. 8. 17. Ivik£v8vvos, ov [κίνδννοβ], dan- gerous, Lat. perlculosus, with dat. of pers., i.^ 3. 19, ii. 5. 20, vii. 7. 54. IviKOvpco}, 4ΐΓΐκονρήσω, έτίκονρησα IhrUovpos, 6, ally], be a helper, aid, assist, with dat., v. 8. 21 ; also with dat. of pers. and ace. of thing, el δέ τψ χ€ΐμωνα 4τ€κούμ7ΐσα, if I pro- tected any one from the cold, v. 8. 2δ. Ιιηκονρτιμα, aros, το [έττικουρέω'}, help, protection, defence, with gen. Xdms and dat. άφθα\μοΐ$, iv. 5. 13. lmKpdT«ia, as [R. 1 κρο], mas- tery, power, command, Lat. impe- rium, vi. 4. 4 ; of a country, realm, dominion, vii. 6. 42. ΙιηκρνίΓΓΜ [κρύπτω^, conceal thoroughly, hide; mid,, conceal oneself or one'* acts, do secretly, i. I. 6. IviKihrTtt» (κίτττω, κν4>-, -κί>φω, ίίκυψα, κέκυφα, stoop), stOop towards or over, iv. 5. 32. ImKvp^M {κϋρόω, κυρώσω^ έκϋρωσά, κκκύρωμαι, ίκυρώ&τ^ρ [κβροϊ,τό, might. 88 ΙιημΑομαι-Ιιησ-τ^λλ» power], make valid), confirm, rat- ify, vote, iii. 2. 32. Ιιηκωλνω [ιτωλόω], prevent, hin- der, with ace. of pers. and gen. of thmg, iii. 3. 3. ΙΐΓίλομβάνω ΐΧαμβάνω], take to oneself, fasten to, take in, include, VI. 5. δ, 6; mid., take hold of catch, abs. or with gen., ίγ. y. 12, 13. έιτιλανθάνομαι [R. λαθ], let es- cape one^ forget, Lat. oblluiscor, with gen., iii. 2. 25. . ^τΓίλ^γ» [R. λ€γ], say besides, add, with dir. disc., i. 9. 26. έΐΓίλι^Ίτω [λείτω], leave behind, Lat. relinquo; in pass., τό iinUivo• μ€νον, the part (of the army) which was left behind, i. 8. 18 ; of things, fail, give out, fall short, Lat. de- ficio, abs. or with ace. of pers., i. c. 6, iv. 5. 14, V. 8. 3, vi. 4. 20. lirtXfKTos, ov [R. Xcy], selected, picked out, Lat. electi; subst., ol irlXeKToi, picked men, a band of soldiers reserved for difficult or dangerous service, the flower of the army, iii. 4. 43, vii. 4. 11. Ιιημαρηίρομαι (μΛρτύρομαι, έμαρ- τυράμ-ην [μάρτυς], call to witness), appeal to, invoke, Lat. obtestor, of gods, iv. 8. 7. ΙΐΓ£μαχο5, ov [R. μαχ,] that may be easily attacked, assailable, of a place, V. 4. 14. lmμA.€ια, as [R. μβλ], care for a person or tiling, solicitude, pains, attention, i. 9. 24, 27. ίιημ€λώμα4 and έιτιμέλομαι (iv. 2. 26, V. 7. 10), έτΓΐμεΧ-ήσομαι, έττιμεμέ- λημαί, έΜΤ€μ£\ήθην [R. μ<λ], take care of, look out for, watch out for, Lat. curd, with gen. or vepi and gen., with δη and a clause, or a clause with ws or iirws, i. i. 5, 8. 21, iii. I. 14, 38, iv. 2. 26, v. i. 7, 7. 10 ; take charge of, attend to, with gen. of pers. or thing, iii. 2. 37, iv. 8. 25, V. 3. 1. 4ιημ€λή«, /$ [R. μ«λ], careful, anxious, watchful, Lat. diligens, of persons, iii. 2. 30. Ιιημ^ομαι, see έιημΛέομαι, ΙΐΓΐμ^νω [R. μα], stay by, stay on luith, with έττΐ and dat., vii. 2. 1 ; day on, wait for, wait, with ^στ€ and a clause, V. ς. 2. ΙΐΓΐμίγνϋμι (μιΎνϋμι, μι^-, μτξω, ^μιξα, μέμΐ^μα,ί, έμίχθην and ipiy^v [R. μιγ], mix), mix with; mid. intr., mix with others, have inter- course or dealings with, Lat. im- misced, of races, iii. 5. 16. ^ιηνο€ω [R. γνω], have on one''s mind, purpose, intend, Lat. in animo habed, ii. 2. 11, iii. i. 6, vi. 4. 0. ^ΊΓίορκ^ω» έΐΓίορκ-ήσω, " έτηώρκησα, έηώρκηκα [iiriopKos], swear falsely, commit perjury, be a perjurer, Lat. pei/ro, abs., ii. 5. 38, iii. 2. 10, vii. 6. 18; TO έΊΓΐορκ€Ϊν, perjury, ii. 6. 22 ; swear falsely by, with eeovs, ii. 4. 7, iii. I. 22. imopKCo, as [έπίορκοί], false swearing, perjury, Lat. periurium, abs. or with irpos ^eoiJs, ii. 5. 21, iii. 2. 4, 8. lirCopKos» ov [δρκοί], forsworn, perjured, Lat. periurus, ii. 6. 25. ^τηΐΓάρ€ΐμι [R. €σ], be there be- sides, iii. 4. 23. ΙΐΓΐ-ΐΓάρ€ΐμι \βμί], march on be- side or abreast of another body, with κατά and ace, iii. 4. 30, vi. 3. 19 ; 7narch along up to one's placie, abs., iii. 4. 23. kmvtirriu [R. ΐΓίτ],/«ΖΖ upon, esp. in a hostile sense, attack, assail, abs. or with dat., i. 8. 2, iv. 1. 10, V. 6. 20, vi. 3. 3, vii. 3. 43 ; of snow, fall, abs., iv. 4. 11. lirCirovos, ov [R. σιτα], painful, toilsome, laborious, Lat. laborio- sus, i. 3. 19 ; of a bird of omen, portending suffering, vi. i. 23. ΙΐΓίρρΪΊΓτέω [^ϊΐΓτ^ω], throw at, cast at, V. 2. 23. lirCppvToS} ov [β^ω], flowed upon, watei'ed, well watered, of a plain, Lat. inriguu^, i. 2. 22. ^ιησάττω (σάττω, σακ-, ^σα^α, σέσα-γμαι, load), put a load on; phrase, ^«ra|at rbv iinro», put the housings on one''s horse, Lat. equum sternere (the ancients having no saddles), iii. 4. 35. ΈίΓΜτθίνηίϊ ous, δ, Episthenes, of Ampbipolis, captain of peltasts at Cunaxa, where he fought skilfully, i. 10. 7, iv. 6. 1, 3. ΈΐΓΐ<Γθ€'νη9, ous, 0, Episthenes, of Olynthus, a lover of boys, vii. 4. 7-10. ΐΊτιοτΐτίζομαι {σιτίζομαι, σίτιου- μαί, -€σϊτισάμην ΐ^σΐτο^], eat), fur- nish oneself with provisions, i.e. food or provender, collect or pro- cure supplies, forage, abs., or with els την vopeiav, i. 4. 19, ii. 5. 37, iii. 4. 18, iv. 7. 18, vii. i. 7. 4ιη<ΓΪτΐ€Γμό$, ό [^ένισ'ιτίζομαΐ], a supplying oneself with provisions, procuring supplies, foraging, Lat. frttmentatio, i. 5. 9 ; food supplies, vii. I. 9. 4ΐΓΐσκίΐΓτομαι Ισκ4ΐΓτομαι], look to, see to, examine, inquirCi with indir. question, iii. 3. 18. ΙΐΓΚΓΚ€νάξω [R. σκυ], fit out, make ready, of a temple, restore, repair, Lat. reficio, v. 3. 13. έιησκοΐΓ€ω \_σκοτέω], look to, see to, of a general, inspect, review, Lat. recenseo, ii. 3. 2. Ιιτισιτάω [R. crira], draw or drag to or after; raid., drag to oneself, pull along, iv. 7. 14. ^ΊτίσίΓΟίτο, see έφέττομΛί. ίΐΓ(αΓταμαι, έττιστήσομαι, ήπιστή- θην, understand, know, esp. of a knowledge got from practice or experience, know how, with inf., 1. 3. 15, iii. 3. 16, vii. 3. 25 ; under- stand, be sure of, be acquainted with, know, abs., with ace, with δτι and a clause, or with ace. and partic, i. 3. 12, 4. 8, ii. 5. 9, iii. i. 35, 3. 2, V. I. 10, vi. 6. 17, vii. 6. 12. iirCo-TOuris, ews, η [R. <Γτα], a stopping, of troops, halt, ii. 4. 26. ImcrraWw [R. οττα], be a com- mander, exercise command, ii. 3. 11. Ιιηστέλλω [στ Αλω], send to, send word, give notice either by letter or message, with ace. of the >i Nl ΙιηβΓτή|Μ•ν-4ιηχι•|»Ιβ* 84 'Μ : r thiog, dat. of pers., and with dat. of pers., cA)me into dose relations with, i. 2. 26 ; «'$ XAyovs σοι ixe^h have an interview with you, Lat. in conloquium uenire, ii. 5. 4, cf. iii. i. 29 ; i-wl παν έ\θ€ΐν, make ever υ ef- fort, iii. I. 18. * •' €p«, see €(ρω, 4μ&ντ€$, see 4ράω. lp«S, ωτο$, ό [^ραμαι, cf. Eng. erotic], love, desire, tcish, Lat. amor, with an inf. clause as obi ace, ii. 5. 22. ερωτάω, ερωτήσω, etc. [cf.ίpoμaι\ ask a question, inquire, Lat. quaero, abs., with or without an interr clause in dir. or indir. disc, i. 6. 7, ii. I. 15, iii. 4. 39, iv. 8. 5, vi. 6. 4. vii. 6. 4 ; witli ace of pers and a clause in dir. or indir. disc, i. 3. 18, 6. 8, ii. 4. 15, v. 5. 15, vii. 3. 25 ; with two aces, of pers. and thinji, sometimes with a clause in indir disc, i. 3. 20, iv. 4. 17. €V^»(s» η, ov, or OS, ov [R. to•], real, ready, prepared, Lat. paratus, with dat. of pers. or with inf., i. 6. 3, iv. 6. 17, vk i. 2, vii. i. 33 ; of the future, sure to come or to be real- ised, certain, vii. 8. 11. fToC|iws, adv. [R. €cp7mj$ iratSes 6vT€s, even from childhood, Lat. a pueris, i. 9. 4, cf ii. 6. 11 ; eo$ds iK ταίδων, even from boyhood, Lat. a pueris, iv. 6. 14 ; €ύθύs iirtMv, as soon as, iii. i. 13, iv. 7. 7 ; ττρωτον μ^ν οίδα €ύθύί, in the first place to state the facts at once, etc., v. 6. 7 ; €ύθύί άφ' έστέράί, directly after nightfall, vi. 3. 23. €^0νωρο«, ov [€ύθύί], in a straight direction; only in neut. as adv., straight on, ii. 2. 16. €δκλ€ΐα, OS [κ\έο$, t6, fame, cf. Lat. clued, be spoken of, and laus, praise, Eng. loud], fair fame, glory, Ύύ. 6. 22, 33. Εΰκλ6(δη5, ov, EucUdes, a Phlia- sian soothsayer, friend of Xeno- plion, vii. 8. 1 fE. €vk\€«s, adv. [€Uk\€^s, famous, cf. €VK\€ia], gloriously, vi. 3. 17. €ύμ,€νή5, «is [R. μια], well disposed, of gods and men ; of places, actions, etc., favourable, kindly, comfort- able, iv. 6. 12. cijuTttxcipto-ros, ov [R. xcpj, easy to handle or deal with, of a person, ii. 6. 20. ^ ^ .„ eivoia, OS [R. γνω], good will, kindness, affection, I 8. 29, ii. 6. 13, vii. 7. 46 ; with objective gen., iv. 7. 20. livoiKws, adv. [R. γνω], with qood will or affection; with ίχ€ΐν, be tcell disposed, with dat. of pers., i• ϊ• ^• - ΓΤ> €vvoos» OV, contr. euvous, ovv LK. γνω], well or kindly disposed, at- tached, of persons, abs. or with dat. of pers., i. 9. 20, ii. 6. 20, v. 6. 2, vii. 7. 30. €ΰξασθαι, see €υχο/χοι. 6v|€ivos, ov [^vos], kind to strangers, hospitable; ,6 Ev^eivos lUvTos, the Black Sea, the Euxine, iv. 8. 22, which was at first called by Ionic sailors in old times "A^et- voi, inhospitable, because of its stormy character. The name was changed by euphemism {cf Cape of Good Hope, originally Stormy Cape) after the colonization of its shores by the Milesians in the sev- enth century b.c. EvoScvSi ^ω5, or Ενο8£άς, ου, δ, either a proper name of a Greek captain, Euodeus, or a corrupted gentile adj., vii. 4. 18. efioSos, ov [o8os], easy to travel, practicable, passable for men or animals, abs. or with dat., iv. 2. 9, 8. 10, 12. fvoirXos, ov [R. σ€ΐΓ^, well atoned or equipped, in sup., li. 3. 3. €ύΐΓ€τώ5, adv. [R. itct], easily, with little difficulty, ii. 5. 23, iv. 3. 21. iiiropto, 5s [R. ΐΓ€ρ], easy ineans or facility of obtaining what one can use, means in the sense of money, v. i. 6 ; iroWij bpXv etnropla φαίν€ται, you appear to have excel- lent prospects, vii. 6. 37. cuiropos, ov [R. inp], easy to travel through or pass, iii. 5. 17, vi. 5. 18 ; of a road, ii. 5. 9, v. i. 14. cuirpOKTos, ov [τράκτόί, verbal of 7Γ ράττω'], easy to be done, practica- ble, in comp., ii. 3. 20. cvirpcn^s, ^s [πρ^τω], good look- ing, handsome, of persons, iv. 1. 14. €ύΐΓρόσοδος, ov [o&Ss], easy to approach, accessible, in sup., v. 4.30. (ΰρημα, ατο$, τ6 [βύρίσκω], what is found, esp. unexpectedly, a find, windfall, vii. 3. 13 ; ^υρημΛ Ιιτοιη- σάμην, I thought it a piece of good luck, ii. 3. 18. €υρ(<Γκω (cyp-), ουρήσω, ηνρον, ηυρηκα, ηυρημαι, ηυρέθην, find, diS' cover, Lat. reperio, i. 2. 25, iii. 2. 12, iv. 8. 10; V. 4• 27, vii. 5. 14 ; find out, discover, devise, iii. 3. 18, with ace. of pers., and inf. or partic, i. 9. 29, vi. I. 29; mid., find for oneself, procure, obtain, ii. i. 8, with τταρά and gen. of pers., vii. i. 31. (The late forms evpov, ενρηκα, etc., are printed in some editt. of the Anab.) cupos» ovs, t6 [ciJpiJs], breadth, width, Lat. latitudo, used with or without the art., and generally m ace. of specification, i. 2. 5, 23, 7. 15, ii. 4. 12, iii. 4• 7, iv. 3• li v. 6. 9, vi. 4. 3, vii. 8. 13 ; with gen. of measure, i. 2. 8, ii. 4. 25, iii. 4. 9 ; with adj. π\€θριαίοί, i. 5. 4, iv. 6. 4. Είρύλοχο5, ό, Eurylochus, a hop- lite from Lusi in Arcadia, well known for his bravery, iv. 2. 21, 7. 11, 12, vii. 1.32, 6.40. Ένρνμ.αχο$ι δ, Eurymachus, of Dardanus ; he aided in thwarting Xenophon's plan to found a city on the Pontus, v. 6. 21. cvpvs» €»«) «i» broad, wide, Lat latus, iv. 5. 25, v. 2. 6. XI » Γ ■ !! ! ΡΙΓΙΙΙΙΙΙΙΙΪ^ ' ΕΜ*η-'ΈΦ««χ>< 90 91 Ιφη -JblM 4i ί ΕυρωίΓη, lyy, Europe, the north- west division of the Old World vii. I. 27, 6. 32. ' furaicTos, ov [R. τακ], well ar- rangedy of soldiers, orderlp, well dwaplined, ii. 6. 14, iii. 2. 30. €*τάκτωί, adv. [R. τακ], i« « awcipUned mamier, with good dis- dpline, vi. 6. 35. ι*το|ία, as [R. τακ], good ar- rangement, esp. in a military sense, discipline, subordination, Lat. dis- cipUna, I 5. 8, iii. i. 38. ιίίτολμοί, OP [R. ταλ], of brave spirit, courageous^ i. 7. 4. ιύτνχία», ευτυχήσω, etc. [R. τακ], he well off, fortunate, or successful, am, or with cognate ace, i. 4. 17, vi. 3. 6. ^ ' •ύτνχημα, aroy, τό [R. τακ], piece Of good fortune, success; τοΰτο rb βύτύχημα €ύτνχ€Ϊν, gain this advan- tage, vi. 3. 6. Ευφράτη?, ov, the Euphrates, the £eat river of Western Asia, i. 3. 20, 4- Π , ii. 4. 6, iv. 1 . 3. It rises in Armenia, where it consists of two branches, the modern West Phrat or Turkish Kara Su (Black River), md the East Phrat or Murad Su. The latter was crossed by the Greeks, iv. 5. 2, and the main river at the usual ford at Thapsa- cus, i. 4. 17. It flowed through Mesopotamia and Babylon to fts Jnnction with the Tigris, thence to the Persian gulf. «*Χήι ^5 ί^νχομαι}, prayer, I 9. ΐΰχομαλ, €υξομαι, ίύξάμη» or ηύξά- MJ»', pray, offer prayers, tuish for, abe. or with inf. or with ace. and ia'/ao J'.7^'^' 11, iv. 8. 16. vu. I. tJU, 7. 27 ; pray or pay one's vorn to the gods, offer vows, Lat. mtafacio or sttscipid, with ace. of the thing vowed, iv. 8. 25: abs. with dat of the god, iii. i. β, to which may be added the inf. ex- pressing what one will do or what the god is asked to do, iii. 2. 0, iv. 3• 13, vi. I. 26. I €ύώ8η$, « [Hj^uf, smell, cf Lat odor, smell], sweet-smelling, fm. grant, Lat. odoratus, of plants and wme, i. 5. 1, iv. 4. 9, V. 4. 29. €ύωνυμο8, ou [R. γν«], of good name or omen; euphemistic for apiaT€f>6s, left, in order to avoid the mention of this word, which was considered unlucky from its use in soothsaying; as a military phrase, τό €ύώνυμΜν, with or with- out Kipas, the left wing of an army the lefl, i. 2. 15, 8. 4, 10. 6, iv. 8 14, V. 4. 22, vi. 5. 11. €ύωχ^ω, €ύωχ-ήσομΛί, €νώχημαι, (ύωχ-ήθηρ [R. σ•€χ], entertain; mid. and pass., fare sumptuously, feast, have one's βΙΙ, of men and ani- mals, iv. 5. 30, V. 3. 11. €ύωχ£ό, as [R. σιχ], feast, ban- quet,^ VI. I. 4. ίφΊ by elision and euphony for Ιφαγον (0α7-), 2 aor. with no pres. in use, inf. φay€iv [cf. Eng oeso-phagus], eat, taste of abs.,* with ace, or gen., ii. 3. 16, iv. 8. 20, vii. 3.23. (Seeiffeiw.) Ιψάνη. see φαίνω. {φαο-αν, *φατ€, see φημί. Ιφιδροϊ,^ον [R. o-th], seated by; subst., ό €φ€δρο$, a contestant in the games who has drawn a bye and therefore waits for the second round in the contest, Lat. supposi- ticius, hence, fresh opponent, re- serve force, ii. 5. 10. ^φίίΓομαι [R. «rtir], follow after, follow, pursue, esp. of an enemy, abs. or with dat., ii. 2. 12, iii. 4. 3, V. 8. 8, vi. 5. 17, vii. 6. 29; 2 aor. opt. iwiffwotTo, iv. I. 6. Έφ^σιοβ, α, ov ["E^eiros], of Ephesus, Ephesian, v. 3. 4, 6. Έφ€σο$, i}, Ephesus, the oldest of the twelve ancient cities of Ionia, settled by colonists of the Attic deme Euonoraeus, i. 4. 2, ii. 2. 6. It lay on the Selinus, v. 3. 8, near the mouth of the Cayster, in the Asian Plain, from which the chief highways led into the interior. This plain is believed by many to have given its name to the conti- nent. Ephesus was the most con- venient landing place for Greeks and Romans coming to Asia, and from here Xenophon started to join Cyrus, vi. i. 23. It was not, however, of great commercial im- portance before the time of Al- exander, nor did it take a promi- nent part in wars. It was re- nowned as a sacred city, contain- ing the famous temple of the Ephesian Artemis, the largest of Greek temples and one of the won- ders of the world, v. 3. 12. This, however, was the second temple, the first having been burned on the very night, it was said, when Alexander was born. The present ruins at Ajasluk are those of the suburb of the city, for Ephesus it- self lay on the hill Prion or Pyon. The remains of the temple lie be- tween Ajasluk and this hill. €φη, ίφηίτθα, see φημί. €φθό$, -ή, όκ [c/. ^ψω], boiled, v. 4. 32. ίφίημι [Ίημί], Send or let go to; mid., leave to or allow one to do a thing, with dat. of pers. and inf., vi.6.31. ^φίστημι [R. στα], set beside or on, make stop at, make halt, bring to a stop, i. 8. 15 (sc. τ6ν ΐπτον), ii. 4. 25 ; set over, set in command, Lat. praeficid, abs. or with dat., iii. 3. 20, 4. 21, v. I. 15; intr. in mid. and 2 aor., pf. and plpf . act., be set on, stop, halt, sometimes with iwl and dat., i. 4. 4, 5. 7, ii. 4. 26, v. 4. 34; be set in command of, com- mand, with dat, vi. 5. 11. Ιφό8ιον, TO [oSos], provision for a journey, travelling expenses, Lat. uiaticum, vii. 3. 20, 8. 2. €φοδο5, η [OSos J, loay to, ap- proach, with iirl and ace, iii. 4. 41, IV. 2. 6; of an army, advance, at- tack, ii. 2. 18, 3. 1. Ιφορά» [R. 2 F«p], have one^s tyes on, keep in sight, vi. 3. 14. €φορμ4ω [ορμέω], lie at anchor opposite or against, blockade, abs., vii. 6. 25. «ίφορος, [R. 2 F«p], overseer; esp. a Spartan officer, ephor. The board of ephors at Sparta num- bered five, elected annually from all of the citizens. They possessed authority not only over the com- monwealth in general, but also over the kings. Two of them regu- larly accompanied the kings on their campaigns. But at the end of their year of office, they were liable to be called to account by their successors. The year was dated by the name of the first ephor, as at Athens by that of the first archon. ii. 6. 2, 3. ξφ\τγ€, see φΐύ^ω. cxOpdi as [ex^os, τό, hate], en- mity, ill will, Lat. inimicitia, ii. 4. 11. €χθρό5, ά, 6v Ι^χθοί, τό, hate], hated or hating, hostile, Lat. ini- micus, i. 3. 20 ; subst., enemy, Lat. hostis, i. 3. 6, ii. 5. 39, vii. 6. 7 ; sup., oL εκείνου ίχθιστοι, his bitterest foes, iii. 2. 5. 4χυρό5, ά, 6v [R. σ€χ], tenable, firm, strong, with χωρίον, ii. 5. 7, vii. 4. 12. Ιχω (ίτβχ-), Ηω and σχήσω, ίσχον, ^σχηκα, -έσχημαι [R. <Γ€χ], have, in its widest sense, Lat. habeo, hold, possess, occupy, keep with one, include, i. i. 6, 2. llj 8. 10, 21, iii. I. 19, 5. 1, v. 4. 15, vi. i. 17, ol fxovTcs, the rich, vii. 3. 28 ; have to wife, iii. 4. 13 ; obtain, re- ceive, i. 3. 11, ii. 4• 22, iii. 2. 20; keep, holdfast, carry, wear, 1. 5. 8, 9.6, ii. 3. 11, iii. 2.28, iv. 4. 16, vi. 1. 9; pass., be held, captured, iv. 6. 22, vii. 3. 47, iv avayKy Ιχεσβοι, see άνάΎκη, ii. 5. 21 ; ^χων, having, is generally best rendered by with, i. I. 2, iii. 3. 6, iv. 5. 13, vii. 3. 47 ; with inf., be able, can, ii. 2. 11, iii. 2. 12, vii. 6. 39 ; hold off, keep off, with ace. or with ace. and gen. , iii. 5. 11, vii. I. 20; used intr. and η Hirrtft-tcfiyot 92 93 Ζ€ύ$-ζώνη generally with adv., when the phrase is best rendered like cimt with an adj., as edvo'iKQt ίίχ€ΐν, be well disposed^ i. i. 5," elxc ν ουτω^, it was so, iii. .i. St, 'do with κακω$, - eic, i. 5. 16, & 13, ii. i. 7, 2. 21, III 2. 37, vi. 1. 21; without an adv., κωμαι ύιτά τό τόλισμα Ιχουσ -oi, m7- /«ί/β* extending along under the citadel, vii. 8. 21, with djufl^i and ace, be busy at or about, v. 2. 26, VI. 6. 1, vii. 2. 16. Mid., hold on to, come next to, be next, abs. or with gen., i. 8. 4, 9 ; cling to, strive for, vi. 3. 17. Phrases : μεΐορ Ιχβιι^, have the worst of it, i, lo. 8, iii. 4:- 18 ; €ΐρήνη» ?χ«„, live in peace, ii. 6. 6 ; (νδηλορ τούτο €?χ«», he made this clear, ii. 6. 18 ; iiy [verbal of ξ-ηΚδω, emulate, envy, f^Xos, 0, emulation, envy, cf Eng. zeal, jealous], to be deemed happy, envied; roU οίκοι ξ^η\ωτ6ν, an object of envy to his neighbours, i. 7. 4. Ιημ,ιόω,ξ^ημιώσω, etc. {^^ημία, loSS"], cause one loss, fine, punish, with dat. of the penalty, vi. 4. 11. Ιψίω, ζητήσω, etc., seek for, ask for a person, ii. 3. 2, 4. 16 ; seek to do a thing, desire, with inf., v. 4. 33. IvpitTqsi ου [ζϋμη, leaven, cf. Eng. zymotic], in the phrase άρτοι i^pu- ται, leavened bread, ItaX. pdnis fer- mentdtus, vii. 3. 21. ζωγρ^ω, ίξώ^ρ-ησα, ί^ώ^ρημαι, Ιζω- ^ρ-ίΐθ-ην [fwos + R. αγ], take or save alive, give quarter to, iv. 7. 22. XJaVf see ξάω. ζώνη, η^ [cf Eng. zone], belt, girdle, zone, Lat. zona, worn both by men and by women just above the hips, to be distinguished from the second girdle worn by women just under the breast (see the cut s,v. ευζωνοί). The ζώνη kept the χιτών (q.v.), which was a loose garment, in place, and furnished the means for regu- lating its length, since it could be drawn up under the girdle so as to leave the feet un- impeded. The gir- dles of women were often simple cords, but they might be elaborate and handsomely orna- mented. See s.v. φιάλη. The sol- dier's girdle, iv. 7. 16 (in Homer No. 22. No. 23. commonly called ^ωστ-ήρ), was a substantial belt of metal, or of 1«»^-ήγ4ομα•. 94 95 Ή-γήσ'αν8ρο$-ήλίθιο$ ,1 ' \ 1 leather plated with metal, worn about the loins to secure the lower part of the cuirass and fastened by hooks. Ηβββ.ν.κνημίς. I'hrases: Αα- βον τ% ^ώΐΊ75 τ6ν'Ομ6νταν^ grasped Orontm by the girdle, tlie si^n among the Persians that one had been condemned to death, i. 6. 10 ; e/5 ί^ώνην δ€δομ4ι^ι, given for gir- die money (as we should say, pin money), of Persian queens who had cities given them for their small expenses, i. 4. 9. S«jit. ij, &P Ι^άω, cf. Eng. zodiac, zoo-logy], living, alive, lii. 4. 6. A• f, disjunctive conj., or, used like both Lat. tiel and aut, i. 4. 16, 8. 12,iv.7.5, 10,y.2.4,6.9; ^ . . 1 ,5, either , . . or, I 3. 5, vii. 6. 40, 7. 14 ; m mdir. double questions, the first member introduced by vore- pov, τ6τ€ρα, or €l, whether . . . or, Lat. «in/m . an, i. 4. 13, 10. δ, 17, 11. I. 10, 21, 5. 17 ; in a dir. question, having no first member expressed, ii. 4, 3. ή, comp. conj., than, Lat. quam, ii8edafteracomp.,i. 1.4, 2.4,11, 111. 1.2, IV. 7. 9; with a following inf., VI. 2. 13 ; after words of comp. meaning, as Avrim, imprlos, Αλλωί, ουδέν &\\o, διαφ^ρ€ΐρ, H. 2. 13, iii. 1.20, V. 8. 24, vi. 6. 34 ; άλλο η ^, see Λλλο5 ; omitted after μ^ΐον with*' a numeral, vi. 4. 24.. n, prepositive intensive particle, really, truly, certainly, Lat. uero, 1. 6. 8 ; esp. in an oath, ή μήν, in very truth, upon my sacred honour, u.3.26,vi. 1.31, 6. 17, vii. 7. 35, ή, interr. particle, implying noth- ing as to the answer expected, Lat I -we, V. 8.6, vii. 4. 9, 6. 4; 27. " n, see 6. J, dat. sing. fem. of rel. Λ, used adv. (sc. δδψ), of place, in whiU piace, where, by the way in which, Lat. qua (sc. ma), i. 10. 6, iii. 4. 37, 5. 1. IV. 2. 8, 5. 34, 8. 12, v. Τ Π, 6. /, VI. 5. 22; of manner, in what way, how, as, Lat. qua (sc ratione), esp. with sup. of adv., ^ αδύνατο τάχιστα, as quickly as pos^ ^i6/e,i 2.4, vi. 3. 21, so 5' τάχιστα, VI. 5. Ιό ; 27 δυνατόν μάλιστα, with all one's power, I 3. 15. p, see €ίμΙ. ηβάα-κω Ιηβη, youth], begin to oe m the flower of youth, Lat. pubesco, iv. 6. 1, vii. 4. 7. τίγαγον, see ά-γω. ι^γάίτβη, see άΎαμαι, TiryciXa, see ά77Αλω. ΐ|γγυοτο, see iyyudu. ηγ€μονίο, as [R. αγ], leadership, chief command, precedence, iv. 7. 8 ηγ«μά<Γννα, τά (sc, lepd) [R. αγ], offerings for safe-conduct, esp. to Heracles iJy€μώv, iv. 8. 25. ήγίμών, ovos, 6 [R. ογ], one who leads, a guide on a journey, Lat. dux i. 3, 14, ii. 3. 6, iii. 2. 23, iv. 1-22, V. 2. 1, vi. 3. 11, vii. 3. 40: with τη, όδοΰ, iii. 1.2; leader, com- mander, esp. of large bodies of troops, fleld marshal, i. 6. 2, 7. 12, ΊΙ' \^^ ' ^^ ^^^ ^^^e standing at the head of Greece, said to hold the liegemony, vi. i. 27 ; as a title applied to Heracles as protector of wanderers and warriors, vi. 2 15 5. 24, 25 (cf. iIyeμdσυva). ' ^ ήγίομαι, ηyήσoμaι, i|yησάμ^ηv, -ΤΤνμαι, -ψγ-ήθην [R. αγ], go be- Jore, lead the way, guide, conduct, Lat. duco, abs. or with dat. of pers., ii. 3. 10, iii. 2. 20, iv. 6. 2, v. 4• 20, vi. 3. 15, vii. 3. 8 ; with M, Tp6s, or €ls and ace, ii. 3. 9, iv. 2. 2, VI. 5. 1, vii. I. 33 ; with έκ and gen., 1. 4.2; with όδόν, iv. i. 24, V. 4. 10 ; KaXws ηy€ΐσθa^, be a good guide, iv. 6. 1 ; τό iιyoύμ€vov or ol ψουμ^νοι, the van, Lat. pnmum agmen, ii. 2. 4, vi. 5. 12, vii. 3. 6 ; ί«αα, ίαΑβ command of, command, be general, abs., or with gen. or dat,i.7.l,8.22,ii. 2.8,iu. 1.25, 2. 36, IV. I. 27, V. 2. 6, vi. 6. 32, vii. 1.40; think, believe, consider, after a survey of the facts, like Lat. duco, with inf., ace. and inf., or with two aces., i. 2. 4, ii. i. 11, vi. I. 18, vii. 7. 27. Ήγήσαν8ρο$, ό, Hegesander, a Greek captain, chosen as one of their generals by the Arcadians and Achaeans, vi. 3. 5. ήδ€ΐ, ^Sco-ttv, see οίδα. ήδ€ω$, adv. [R. άδ], with pleas- ure, gladly, contentedly, Lat. liben- ter, i. 2. 2, iv. 3. 2 ; comp. ηδϊον, i. 4. 9 ; sup. ηδιστα, ii. 5. 15. ήδη, adv., referring to time just past or just about to come, some- times of present time, Lat. iam, already, by this lime, ere now, now, at once, straightway, i. 2. 1, 3. 11, 4. 10, ii. I. 3, 6. 4, iii. i. 40, iv. 3. 24, V. 5. 22, vi. 5. 29, vii. i. 4, 7. 24. ηδομαι, ησθήσομαι, ησθην [R. o8], be (jlad, take pleasure in, delight in, enjoy, abs., with partic, or with dat., i. 2. 18, 4. 10, 9. 26, ii. 5. 16, iv. 3. 0, V. I. 4, vii. 8. 6. ηδονή, ^s [R. άδ], pleasure, de- li«/c(5s], half a daric, 1. 3. 21, see δαρ€ίκ6$. ήμιδιήβ, ectator, Lat. specto, i. 2. 10, ii. 4. 25, V. 3. 7, vi. 2. 1 ; of troops, review, i. 2. 16. Θηβαίος, ό [βηβαι, Thebes], a Theban, inhabitant of Thebes, ii. 1. 10, vii. 1. 33, the oldest and most powerful city of Boeotia, on the ■"1^ βήΡΐ|-Θρ^ιο| 100 101 Θρς|-θν<α is» Ismgnus. Thebes was said to have been built by Cadmus and en- larged by Amphion. It was pre- eminent in the mythical age among all the cities of Greece, among its most important legends being those connected with Heracles, Dionysus, and the family of Oedipus. In Uie historical period, Thebes was al- ways the bitter enemy of Athens, supporting Xerxes and later the Spartans. After the Peloponnesian war, she took sides against Sparta from jealousy, and under Epami- nondas rose to be the head of Greece. Having resisted the Mace- donians, the city was destroyed by Alexander in 335 b.c. Twenty yeara later it was rebuilt, but never regained its former standing. Θ^Ρη, Iff, Thebe, a city and dis- trict in either Mysia or the lYoad, ▼ii. 8. T, at the foot of Mt. Pla- cus, and hence called ^ΎχοιτΧακΙη. Here Achilles took captive Chry- eels, having sacked the city. βήρό, as [^i}p, wild beast, cf. Lat. ferm, wUd, Eng. deer], a hunting, chase, hunt, Lat. uenatio, of wild animals, v. 3. 8, 10. 9i|pd«•, e -ηράσω, έ&ήράσα, ηθή- ράκα, ί&ηράθ-ην [ί?τ^ρό], hunt, chase, pursue, Lat. uenor, of animals or men, abs. or with ace, i. c. 2, iv. c. 24, v. 1.9. ^ ^ (hjf>€v«, θημ€ύσω, etc. [Βήμα], hunt, chase, catch, Lat, uenor, i. 2. 7, 13, ¥.3.9. IvipCov, TO [θήρά^, beast, animal, esp. of beasts of the chase, Lat. fern, i. 2. 7, 9. 6, v. 3. 8. 0ησαυρά$, ό [R. $f], something put atmy, treasure, v. 4. 27 ; store- house, treasury, like those estab- lished by different states at Delphi and Olympia, to contain their pub- lic offerings to the gods, v. 3. 5. . ^tel«f »•'» Theches, the mountain m Pontus, south of Trapezus, from which the retreating Greeks first be- held the sea, iv. 7. 21. Its identity cannot be certainly established. -Oi, a suffix denoUng the place where, Θίβρων, ωνοί, 6, Thibron, a gen- eral sent out by the Spartans against Tissaphernes in 400 bc He took the Greeks into his paV vii. 6. 1,43,7. δ7, 8. 24, and met with some success, but was super- seded for allowing his troops to plunder allied nations. θν^νκω (θαρ-, em-), θανοΟμαι, ίθανον, τέθνηκα, die; in Anab. al- ways in composition, except in pf., be dead, be slain, have fallen in battle, the following forms occur- ring: τέθνηκ€, ii. I. 3, τέθνατορ, iv. I. 19, τ€θνασι, iv. 2. 17, Τ€θνάναί, bi, l.^ 20, ηθνηκότοί, iii. I. 17, τΐθνη- κότα, i. 6. 11, τ€θν€ώταί, vii. 4. 10. θνητό{, ή, 6v [verbal of θν^ισκωΛ, subject to death, mortal, Lat. mor- tdlis, iii. i. 23. θόανα, τά, Tyana, see Mm. •dpvpos, ό [^/,όοί, ό, noise, cf. άθροο$], turmoil, disturbance, noise, confusion, of the noise a crowd makes, Lat. turba, i. 8. 16, u. 2. li), iii. 4. 35, vii. 2. 18. 6oipu>s, 0, a Thurian, inhabitant of ThuHi, V. I. 2, a city in Luca- nia in Magna Graecia, on the gulf of Tarentum. It was colonized by Athenians sent out by Pericles, among them Herodotus and Lysias. Its ruins are near Terra Nuova. θρ^οΐ,ϊίί {BpW], Thrace, either 1) m Europe, a country formed by the southeastern part of the Balkan peninsula, without definite borders on the west, but reaching as far north as the Danube, now Roumelia, v. i. 15, vii, i. 14; or 2) in Asia, called also Bithynian Thrace, the coast extending from the mouth of the Pontus to Hera- clea, vi. 2. 17, 4. 1. θρ^ιον, TO [QpiKtoq, the Thro- cium, a public square in Byzan- tium, vii. I. 24. ©p^cioe, 5, OP [θρίΐί], Thracian, belonging to Thrace, vii. i. 13, 2. 23. Θρ4|, k6s, 0, a Thracian, native of Thrace, whether in Europe or in Asia, i. I. 9, ii. 2. 7, vi. i. 5, 3. 4, vii. I. 5, 4. 4; the latter were called also Bithynian Thracians, vi. 4. 2, θρασ-^ωδι adv. [epeurvs], with confidence, boldly, iv. 3. 30. epatrvsteta, ύ [6pa«rvs], confident, bold, daring, Lat. audax, in comp., V. 4. 18, 8. 19, vii. 8. 16. θρ€ψόμ€θα, see τρέφω. epovos, ό [cf Eng. throne], seat, chair, chair of state, throne. The word would suggest to a Greek the large chair with straight back No. 24. No. 25. and legs and low arms (Lat. so- lium), which in a private house would be the seat of honour of the master and of his guests, and in temples the throne of the god. The former were commonly made of heavy wood, although sometimes in part of metal, the latter were wrought in marble. The Spovos miglit be provided with a cushion and coverings ; and, since the seat was lofty, a footstool might be added. Of the throne of the king of Persia, dpoms ό βασί\€ΐο$, ii. i. 4. θνγάτηρ, Tpos, η [cf Eng. daugh- ter], daughter, Lat. βΐία, ii. 4. 8, iv. I. 24, vii. 2. 38. Ούλακο$, 6, bag, sack, generally of leather, vi. 4. 23. θΰμα, arcs, τό [R. 2 Ov], that which is offered, victim, sacrifice, animal for sacrifice, Lat. hostia, vi. 4. 20, vii, 8. 19. Θνμβριον, TO, Thymbrium, a city in the southern part of Phrygia, i, 2. 13. Its site cannot be exactly determined. θϋμο«ι8ή9, ^s [R. 1 θυ-1 -R. Ft8], high-spirited, Lat. animosus, of horses, in comp., iv. 5. 36. θΰμόομαι, θϋμώσομαι, etc. [R. 1 θυ], be angry, incensed, with dat. of pers., ii. 5. 13. θνμό$, ό [R. 1 θυ], the animating principle in man, both of physical and mental feelings, Lat. anima and animus, used in a wide sense, like English heart; as the seat of passion, anger, wrath, vii. i . 25. 0vvoC, ol, the Thyni, a tribe of Thracian stock, which originally lived on the Black Sea in the neigh- bourhood of Salmydessus, but af- terwards crossed into Asia and lived in the Bithynian coast dis- trict, vii. 2. 22, 4. 2, 14, 18. θύρα, as [cf Lat. foris, door, Eng. dook], dooi', of a* room or build- ing, generally pi., as the doors were usually double, Lat. fores, ii. 5. 31, vii. 3. 16, 4. 15. Phrases : ένΐ rats Έλλάδο$ θύραΐί, at the door, or as we might say, on the very threshold of Greece, vi. 5. 23 ; so επί rah βασιλέων θύραις may denote neigh- bourhood, at the very gates of the king, ii. 4. 4, iii. i. 2, but it also denotes his residence, as we say, at the king''s court, Lat. in aula, i. 9. 3, ii 1.8; so θύραι denotes a general's residence, headquarters, i. 2. 11, ii. 5. 31. θνρ€τρα, τά Ιθύράΐ, door, gate, of a town, Lat. porta, v. 2. 17. 9υσΊα, as [R. 2 θυ], offering to the gods, sacrifice, Lat. sacrificium, iv. 8. 25, 26, V. 3. 9, vi. 4. 15. θύω, θϋσω, ίθυσα, τέθυκα, τέθυμχιι, έτύθ-ην [R. 2 θυ], sacrifice, offer sacrifice, Lat. sacrificd, abs. or with ace. of the victim offered, iii. 2, 12, iv. 6. 27, vi. I. 4, vii. 8. 4; with dat. of the god, iii. i. 6, v. 5. 5 ; mid., have a sacrifice offered for oneself, esp. with the idea of learn- ing something about the future. itip (&ωράκιδ'), έθωράκισα, Τ€9ωράκκτμαι, έθωρακίσθηρ [θώράξΐ, arm with a breastplate; mid., put on one's breastplate or corselet, ii. 2. 14; pass., τ€θωράκισμ4νοι and βωρακκτΜί, armed with the breast- plate, ii. 5. 3δ, iii. 4. 35, vii. 3. 40. Οιβράξ, α /co?, ό, breastplate, corse- let, cuirass [rf Eng. thorax], i. 8. 3, (irTeiis,j.„.), iii. 4. 48, cf i. 8. 6, nj• 3• -^0. The θώραξ consisted of two metal plates, made to fit the person (see cut s.v. SirXov), of which one protected the breast and abdomen, the other the back. These were hinged on one side and buckled on the other. Thev were further kept in place by leathern straps passing over the shoulders from behind and fas- tened in front, and by the belt (see s.v. ί:ώνη and s.v. a4«, d [iio/mi], one who heals, mtrgeon, physician, i. 8. 26, ui. 4. 30, V. 8. 18. ^ IW, (Sctv, see tUov. *I8i|, 17s, Ida, a high and precipi- 26, iv. 2. 28 worn not onW w *^.^ r'^J^^^^ «* mountains beginning heW-ar^edTololS^^^^^^^ IL & L'd ^"*^."^^.T '""'^'^^ ....), but also by the -v^tlll |^^έ^;ν^8.?^^Γ^^^^^^^^ No. ae. was Gargarus (Kara Dagh), over 5000 feet above the sea. Its slopes formed the plain of Troy. Ida was the scene of the judgment of Paris. tSios, o, ov [cf. Eng. idiom, idio- syncrasy'], one's own, belonging to an individual, personal, private, Lat. proprius, peculidris, subst. in the phrase els τό ίδιαν, for one's personal use, i. 3. 3, vii. 7. 39 ; adv., ίδίφ, in a private capacity, pri- vately, LaX. proprie, v. 6. 27, 7. 31, vi. 2. 13. Phrase : iKcivov Ibiq. irc- ιτ\ούηκ€ν, he has enriched him per- sonally, vii. 6. 9. tSiorqSf VTos, ή [t^Lof], pectdiar fiature, pecidiarity, ii. 3. 16. Ι8ιώτη5, ου [Wtos, cf. Eng. idiot], one in a private station, as opp. to an officeholder, Lat. prludtus; hence, as opp. to a king, subject, private citizen, vii. 7. 28 ; as opp. to a general, private soldier, pri- vate, i. 3. 11, iii. 2. 32, v. 7. 28 ; as opp. to one of special knowledge in any subject or profession, lay- man, amateur, vi. i. 31. Ιδιωτικό?, ή, ο ν [Ιδιώτψ], per- taining to one in private station, ordinary, common, vi. i. 23. CSoi, 1$ονσα, see tido». 1$ρόω, ίδρωσα [cf. ίδρώί, sweat, Lat. sudor, sweat, Eng. sweat], sweat, reek with sweat, Lat. sudd, of a horse, i. 8. 1. 18ώνι see €ίδον. tcvTO, see ίημΛ, Upctov, TO [iepoy], animal for sacrifice, victim, Lat. hostia, vi. 5. 2 (cf. iv. 3. 9) ; pi., cattle, as a part of every animal slain was offered to a god, iv. 4. 9, v. 7. 13, vi. i. 4, 4. 25. 'l€p6v ^pos, TO, the Sacred Mount, in Thrace, on the northern coast of the Propontis, near Ganus, vii. 1. 14, 3. 3. (Tekir Dagh.) Upos, ά, 6v [cf. Eng. hier-archy, hiero-glyphic], holy, consecrated to a god, sacred, Lat. sacer, v. 3. 9, vii. I. 14, with gen. of the god, iv. 5. 35, V. 3. 13 ; as subst., τό Upov, temple, Lat. sacrum, v. 3. 11 ; pi., τά lepa, sacred rites, sacrifices, sa- cred things, esp. the vitals of the victim, or the omens from inspect- ing the vitals (see σφάΎΐα), ii. i. 9, iv. 3. 9, V. 2. 9, 6. 29, vi. i.31, vii. 8. 22. Phrases: τά lepa καλά έστι or yiyverai, the omens are fa- vourable or result favourably, i. 8. 15, ii. 2. 3, iv. 3. 9, vi. 4-9; ν ί^ρα συμβουλή \€yoμέvη elvai, the advice termed holy (with allusion to the proverb Upbv rj συμβουλή), V. 6. 4. '^ρώννμος, ό, Hieronymus, a Greek captain, from Elis, iii. i. 34, vi. 4. 10, vii. I. 32, 4. 18. ϊημι {έ-), ησω, ηκα, -«κα, -€Ϊμαι, -€ίθην, make go, send, throw, hurl, with Ανω or with dat. of thing thrown, i. 5. 12, iii. 4. 17; ηκαν εαυτούς eh ttjv νάτην, they threw themselves into the ravine, Lat. se demiserunt in uallem, iv. 5. 18; mid., send oneself, rush, charge, abs., with Ανω or κατά with gen., or έττί with ace. of place or pers., i. 5. 8, 8. 26, ui. 4. 41, iv. 2. 8, 20, v. 7. 24. tOi, see e?/u. Ικανόδ, ή, 6v [R. ψικ], sufficient, whether in number, size, strength, or character, of persons and things, Lat. idoneus; in number or size, enough, adequate, in plenty, abs. or with inf., i. 2. 1, 7. 7, iii. 3. 18, iv. 1. 15, V. 6. 1, vi. 4. 3, vii. 4. 24 ; in strength or character, sufficient, able, fit, capable, competent, abs. or with inf., i. I. 5, 3. 6, 9. 20, ii. 3. 4, ui. 1. 23, 2. 10, V. 1. 6, 4. 10, vii. 3. 17. ικανώς, adv. [R. FtK], sufficiently, well enough, Lat. saiis 6ene,iv. 3. 31. lκcτcvω, ^κereύσω, iκέτeυσa [R. Fik], implore, beg, beseech, Lat. supplied, with inf., vii. 4. 7, 10, 22. Ικ^τηβ, ου [R. Fik], petitioner, suppliant, Lat. supplex, with inf., vii. 2. 33. Ίκόνιον, τό, Tconium, an old, but in antiquity an unimportant city, placed by Xenophon on the southeastern border of Phrygia, i. 2. 19. It was afterwards in Lyca- onia. (Konia.) , > fXci*s-t να 104 105 tinrapxos-linriSpoiios 144 fλcωs, ωρ, gen. ω, gracious, pro- pitious, Lat. secundusj of gods, vi. 6. 32, vii. 6. 36. ιλη, η$ [erXw, • press y hem in], crowd, band ; of soldiers, esp. cav- alry, troop, Lat. turma, I 2. 16. ^ Ιμ^, άντο%, 6, thong, strap of leather, esp. in pi. of tlie shoe or sandal straps, Lat. amentum^ iv. 5. 14. See S.v. καρβάτιναι. ιμάτιον, τ6 [Κ. PicrJ, outer gar- ment resembling the mantle, hima- ■μή No. 27. tion, corresponding in use to the Roman toga; pL, clothes, iv. 3. 11, 12. The himation was worn both by men and by v^^omen, vii. 3. 27, ς. 5, and its shape viras the same for both sexes. It was a rectan- gular piece of drapery, one end of which was gathered about the left arm and shoulder, and there held in place by the left hand. The other end was then carried across the back to the right, brought either under or over the right shoulder, and thrown across the front of the body over the left shoulder. But in the house it was either thrown off altogether, or else it dropped loosely about the person. See the illustrations s.v. κλίνη and rpivovt, which also show that in the case of men the χιτών (Q-v.), or un- dergarment, was sometimes en- tirely lacking. The himation was a part of thedressevenof boys at Athens. See the illustra- tion s.v. aoUs. The garment fre- quently had a border, and might be otherwise ornamented. See the two figures at the left s.v. φιάλη. The prevailing colour of the himation was white, but it is a mistake to suppose that other colours, brown, saffron, red, were not common. The ordinary material of the gar- ment was wool, the weight vary- ing according to the season of the year. ϊνα, final particle, that, in order that, with subjv. after a primary or secondary tense, i. 3. 15, 4. 18, ii. 2. 12, 5. 36, iii. 2. 27, vii. 3. 28 ; with opt. after a secondary tense, i• 3- 4, ii. 3. 13, 21, vi. 6. 28. No. 28. tinropxoe, i> U^- »•« + &PX«] » cavalry commander, hipparch, ui. ^.20. , . , . ΙιπΓασ(ά, as [R. ακ], a ndmg, ridinq about, ii. 5- 33. ^ .. . lirircCo, as [R. ακ], cavalry, Lat. eqiiitatiis, v. 6. 8. l-nrc^s, revailing colour of the himation was white, l)ut it is a mistake to suppose that otiier colours, brown, saffron, red, were not common. The ordinary material of tlie gar- ment was wool, the weight vary- ing according to the season of the year. ίνα, final particle, that, in order that, with subjv. after a primary or secondary tense, i. 3. 15, 4. 18, ii. 2. 12, 5. ,Ί(ί, iii. 2. 27, vii. 3. 28; with opt. after a secondary tense, i. 3• 4, ii. 3. 13, 21, vi. 6. 28. 105 ϊ•ιηΓαρχθ5-ΙΐΓ'π•όδρθ|ΐθ8 tinrapxos, f> [Tl. ακ 4- δ.ρχω]ι ,„ralry commander, hippavch, 111. *'■ iirirao-id, as [Κ-^ακ], a riding, riding about, ii. 5- ψ- , ^ . lirirtid, as [R. ακ], cavalry, Lat. rfiuitatus, V. 6. 8. lirircvs, ^ws, ό [11. ακ], horseman, .'i,h)\ caiy(lr)/man, Lat. eques, gen- erally in pi, cavalry. The Greek cavalryman was protected by a iiu'tal helmet, and a metal cuirass whii'li was heavy (iii. 4• 48), and w , .IV cavalry-boots. He carried no sliield, since his left arm controlled liis horse. His offensive armour designated the place for races, both of chariots, i. 8. 20, and of single horses, which formed a part of their national games. The accompany- in«• cut represents the supposed No. 29. was the spear and the straight two- edged sword. Persian horsemen wore also thigh-pieces (see s.v. ττα- ραμηρίδια), and their horses were protected by frontlet and breast- plate, see s.v. Ίτρομετωττίδίον and προστ€ρνίδίον. For the bridle of the horse, see further s.v. χαλϊνόω. The rider had no saddle, but at most a blanket confined by a girth, i. 2. 4, 5. 13, iL 4. 6, 5. 17, iii i. 2, 3. 20, iv. 3. 3, V. 6. 9, vi. 3. 7, vii. 3. 40. linriKOs, -ή, 6v [R. ok], of or be- longing to a horse or to cavalry, Lat. eqiiester, I 3. 12, iii. 4• 48; subst., TO ΙτΊΓΐκόν, cavalry, I 9. 31, vi. 2. 16, 5. 29, vii. 3. 37. Ιτητόδρομιοβ, ό [R. ακ+δρό/Λο?], race-course, hippodrome, Lat. cir- cus• By this name the Greeks ground plan of the hippodrome al Olympia. Λ is the natural slope of the hill, bounding one side, on which the spectators sat, Β a cor- responding artificial elevation on the other side, provided with seats. lwwi§— Xcrcrot 106 Μ ίβ &n entrance. F is the goal farthest from the starting-point, G the 'finish.' Over against G zX Η is the judges' stand. D is a por- tico facing the course, C is a tri- angular space bounded on two sides by the stations, a, 6, c, eic, from which the chariots started, on the right, and to which they might return, on the left, in case they did not leave the hippodrome al- together. Κ is an altar, J the * scratch.' On the former was a bronze eagle with extended wings, at the latter a dolphin. The ele- vation of the eagle and the fall of the dolphin, managed by some Bort of machinery, marked the be- ginnhag of the race. The chariot at a was the first to be sent off, the chariot at b started when the first came in line, and so for the others. They were all in line at J, but those on the outside had the advantage of a *flymg-start' over those placed nearer the 'pole,' and thus the conditions of the race were equalised. The distance between the goals was probably two stadia (1200 Greek feet) . The race varied in length according to the number of times the com- plete circuit was covered. Sin- gle horses were also run at the pL, ol iwiroty cavalry^ the horse, vu. 3. 39, 41, 43. Phrases: έφ" ϊτητου 0St ov [ΐσοί + v\evpa], with equal sides, equilateral^ of a square, iii. 4. 19. i {τιΒυτταθέω, -ηδυτά- &7}σα [R. OS 4- R• iriro], δβ luxuri- ous), waste in luxury or i» riotous living, i. 3. 3. Kttl^Kw [ηκωΐ, come down, reach or extend down, esp. from higher ground to the sea, of walls and hills, with els or hrl with ace. or Aw6 with gen., i. 4. 4, iii. 4. 24, iv. 3. 11, vi. 4. ό ; impers., it falls to, it belongs to, ots καθήκα άθροίζ^σθαι^ whose duty it is to muster^ 1α.Ι. de- cet, i. 9. 7. κ40ΐ)μαΑ, impf. ίκαθήμην [^μαί, sit, Epic and tragic], sit, be seated, Lat. seded, abs. or with iwl and gen., i» with dat., or άμφί and ace, i y. 20, iv. 2. 5, v. 8. 1δ, vi. i. 23, vii. 3. 29 ; of public meetings or at table, abs., vi. 2. 5, vii. 3. 21 ; of soldiers, be encamped, i. 3. 12, iv. 2. β. καΟήρολ, see καθαΙρω, K«OC|«>, καθιω, έκάθκτα (ϊ^ω, seat, rare) [R. crcS], make sit down, seat. Phrases : «*$ τ6ν θράνον καθι- €Ϊ», set on thfi throne, make king, Lat. regnum deferre, ii. i. 4 ; έκά- θ^σαρ χωρίί, they seated apart, iii. 5. 17. KaOiii^l• {tifAu], send down. Phrase: ra δόρατα els τροβολ^ιν κα9έντα$, lowering or couching their spears for attack^ vl. 5. 25, 21. καΟ(στΐ||Η [R. vr%], set dmim or ill order, settle, station, i. 10. 10, ii. 3. 8, iii. 2. 1, V. 1. 16, vi 3. 11, vii. 3. 34 ; bring down to a place, htingt with elt or iirl and ace., i. 4. 13, iv. 8. 8, V. 7. 34 ; set in office, establish, appoint, iii. 2. 5, 4. 30, vii. 7. 56 ; intr. in 2 aor. and plpf., be stationed, abs., iv. 5. 19, of a king, with «'$ and ace. βασι\€ίαΜ, succeed, begin his reign, i. i. 3; mid. 1 aor., station, appoint, iii. i. 39, iv. 5. 21 ; intr. in pres. and impf., take one's place, abs. or with els and ace, i. 8. 3, 6, vi. i. 22. Phrase: cJs καταστηιτομένων τούτων eis τό δέον, since this matter will be settled in the right way^ i. 3.8. καβοράω [R. 2 F iv. 6. 2, V. 6. 32, vi. 3. 20 ; for καΐ yap and Αλλω; re και, see yap and Αλλωϊ. KdiKos, 0, the Caicus, a river in Mysia near the Lydian border, emptying into the sea opposite Lesbos (Bakir Tchai). Its plain was the most fertile in Mysia. vii. o. 8. KaivaC, ων, Caenae, a large city in Mesopotamia on the Tigris, south of the mouth of the Zapatas, ii. 4. 28. This was probably the Ganneh of the Old Testament (Ezek. 27, 23). (Kala Scherkat, where there are ruins of a brick acropolis.) KaCircp, concessive conj. [/ca£], although, with partic, i. 6. 10, ii. 3. 25. Kaipos, 0, the fitting time, the right time or moment, occasion, opportunity, Lat. occdsid, abs. or with inf., i. 7. 9, ii. 3. 9, iv. 6. 15, V. I. 5, vii. 3. 36. Phrases: iv καιρψ, in season, opportunely, Lat. in tempore, iii. i. 39; iv τοιούτφ καιρψ, in such a condition or crisis, iii. I. 44, V. 8. 3; μiyιστov exere καιρόν, you have your grandest op- portunity, Lat. maximum momen- tum habetis, iii. i. 36 ; προσωτέρω του καιρού trpo'ibvres, going forward further than they should have gone, iv. 3. 34. καίτοι, conj. [(cai -f τοί], and yet, still, i. 4. 8, V. 7. 10, vii. 7. 39, 41. KaCw or κάω (καν-) , καύσω, ίκαυσα, -κέκαυκα, κέκαυμαι, iKaudriv [καίω}, burn, burn up, set fire to, consume, Lat. incendd, comburo, alis. or with ace, i. 6. 1, 2, iii. 5. 3, v. 2. 25, vi. 3. 15 ; ττΰρ Ιίκαον, they kept a fire going, iv. i. 11, 4. 12, 6. 22, vi. 3. 20, vii. 2. 18 ; of surgeons, cauter- ize, Lat. adUro, v. 8. 18 ; pass., be on fire, be burning, Lat. ardeo, iv. 5. 6, 7. 22, vii. 4. 18. Ka.Kctvos, for καΐ iKeivos. κακόνοια, as [icaicos -f R. γν»], ill will, aversion, vii. 7. 45. κακόνονς, ovv [κακοί -{- U. γν«β], ill-disposed, hostile, ii. 5. 16, 27. κακοποιέω [«cancos -f ιτοιέω] , do ill to, injure, ii. ς. 4. κακό$, ij, ov, bad in its widest sense, signifying what a person, thing, or a^t ought not to be, Lat. malus; hence of persons, bad, wicked, insolent, base, abs. or with vepl and ace. of pers., i. 4. 8, ii. 5. 39, V. 8. 22, vii. 6. 4 ; esp. of sol- diers, cowardly, timorous, i. 3. 18, iii. I. 36, V. 7. 12, vi. 5. 17, with iv τολέμφ, ii. 6. 30 ; of things and acts, bad, weak, hurtful, injurious, abs. or with dat. of thing, iv. 8. 11, V. 4. 19; comp. κακίων, i. 3. 18, sup. κάκιστοί, ii. 5. 39; subst., TO κακόν, hurtful thing, harm, in- jury, loss, misfortune, ii. 5. 16, iii. I. 25, iv. 3. 14, V. 8. 26. Phrases: κακό I' or κακά voieiv or ipya^eaBai^ abs. or with ace, do harm to, in- jure, hurt, i. 9. 11, ii. 5. 5, v. 6. 11, vii. 3. 47, 4. 24. κακονργ^ω [KOKOS-f R. fepy"], do harm to, injure, maltreat, vi. i. 1. κακονργο$, δ [κακο$ 4- R. Ρίργ], wrongdoer, criminal, Lat. malefi- CU8, i. 9. 13. κακ6ω, κακώσω, έκάκωσα, κεκάκω- μαι, iκaκώθηv {^κακόί"], hurt, injure, iv. 5. 35. κακώς, adv. [κακ(^$], badly, in a wide sense (see κακοί), Lat. male, ill, erroneously, wrongly, wretch- edly, miserably, iii. i. 43, iv. 4. 14, V. 6. 4, vii. 6. 27. Phrases : κακώς Toieiv, injure, harm, ntaltreat, abs. or with ace, i. 4. 8, 9. 11, ii. 3. 23, iii. 2. 5, V. 5. 21 ; κακωί ίχειν, be badly off, be in a bad way, i. 5. 16, vii. 7. 40 ; κάκίον τραττειν, be still worse off, i. 9. 10 ; κακώ? ττάσχειν, be ill treated, be damaged, iii. 3. 7, V. 2. 2, vii. 7. 16. κάκωοΓίς, eωs, τι [κακ((ω], ill usage, bad treatment, iv. 6. 3. καλάμη, ηί, Straw, Lat. stipula, V. 4. 27. κάλαμος» ό, reed, Lat. harundd, i. 5. 1 ; stalk of grain, straw, iv. 5. 26. KoXlet-KavSiff 110 καλΙο» (ifttXe-, icXiy-), καλώ, 4κά- "keea^ κέκΧηκα, κέκλημαι^ έκλήθην [R. κ(»λ], call^ summon, Lat. moco, abs. or with ace, i. 2. 2, 3. 4, ii. i. 8, iii. 4. 38, iv. i. 9, v. 6. 8, vii. 3. 2 ; invite, with ^iri and ace, vii. 3. 15, 6. 3; call to see whether, de- mand, with €/ and interr. clause, V. 4. 3; call, name, Lat. appello, with two aces., vii. 6. 38 ; pass., be called, he named, i. 2. 8, iv. 4. 4, vi. 4, 1 ; i} καλονμ^νη, the so-called, i. 2. 13, cf. 8. 10, ii. 4. 12; mid., call to oneself, iii. 3. 1, vii. 2. 30. καλινδίομολ [c/. κυλίνδέω"], roll, V. 2. 31. καλλκρ^ω, κα\\ΐ€ρήσω, έκαλλιέ- ρψτα^ Κ€κα\\ι4ρηκα, κ€κα\\ιέρημαί [καλοί 4- l€p6s], have favourable signs in a sacrifice, obtain good omens, Lat. lito, v. 4. 22, vii. i. 40, 8.5. Καλλίμαχος, ό, Callimachus, a brave captain . of hoplites, from Parrhasia in Arcadia, often dis- tinguishing himself, iv. 1. 27, 7. 8, 10, V. 6. 14, vi. 2. 7, 9. κ4λλϊον, κάλλΜΓτοςι see καλό$. κ4λλο$ι oi/$, TO [καλ6$], beauty, Lat. ptdchntudo, ii. 3. 15. καλλωΐΓίσ-μός, 6 [καλόϊ + Κ. oir], adornment, embellishment, i. 9. 23. KoXoSi l}, bv [cf. Eng. HALE, WHOLE, caNi-graphy'}, comp. κολ- }άων, sup. κάλλιστο?, beautiful, handsome, of outward beauty in persons and things, Lat. pulcher, i. 2. 22, 10. 2, ii. 4. 14, iii. 2. 7, 25, iv. 8. 26, vi. I. 9, vii. i. 24 ; of ideas, acts and things in reference to use, fair, good, favourable, ii. i. 17, iii. 2. 8, vi. I. 14; of sacrifices and omenSf good, propitious, favour- able, 1. 8. 15, iv. 3. 9, vii. 2. 17 ; in a moral sense, fair, noble, honour- able, iii. i. 24, iv. 6. 14, v. 6. 15, vii. 7. 41 ; subst., τό καλόν, honour, ii. 6. 18. Phrases: καλοί κέ-γαθοί, or καΐ Ayaj$ol, noble and good men, te, genUevmut Lat. opHmdtes, ii 6. 19, iv. I. 19 ; els καλ^ρ fJKere, you are come at the right moment, iv. 7. 3 ; κάλλιστοι' 7€7^ΐΊ7ται, it is the luckiest incident, Lat. res optime euenit, vii. 6. 2. Κάλιτη, ηί, only in the phrase Κάλνηί λιμήν, Colpc Harbour, vi. 2. 13, 3. 16, 4. 1. This place was on the coast of Asiatic Thrace, midway between Heraclea and the Bosporus (Kerpeh). Καλχη8ον(ά, as [Καλχι/δών], Chalcedonia, the country about Chalcedon, vi. 6. 38. Καλχη&ών, ows, η, Chalcedon, a city in Bithynia, founded by Me- garians, 682 b.c, at the southern entrance of the Bosporus and op- posite Byzantium, vii. i. 20, 2. 24, 26. Here was held the Coun- cil of the Church, 451 a.d. (Kadi- koi). καλώ$ι adv. [καλο'ί], beautifully, well, fairly, finely, favourably, suc- cessfully, honourably, nobly, of out- ward beauty, in a moral sense, or of good fortune, i. 9. 17, 23, iii. i. 16, 43, iv. 3. 8, V. 6. 2, vii. 3. 43 ; comp. κάλλίον, ii. 2. 13, vii. 3. 37 ; sup. κάλλιστα, iii. i. 6, iv. 3. 14, vi. I. 11. Phrases: καλώ^ κοτα- ΊΓμάττ€ΐν or ylyveaeai, result in suc- cess, turn out well, i. 2. 2, iv. 3. 24; καλώ$ ^χ€ΐν, be well, be all nght, i. 8. 13, vii. 7. 44 ; τά των $€wv καλω$ €ίχ€ν, the rites of the gods were duly performed, iii. 2. 9 ; καλώ$ Ιίχαν ορασθαι, be finely dis- posed to view, ii. 3. 3 ; καλω$ woieiv, do well, benefit, abs. or with ace, ii. 6. 20, V. 8. 25. κάμνω (κα/χ-), καμαΰμαι, έκαμαν, κέκμηκα, work, labour, hence, be •weary, tired, v. 8. 23 ; with partic, iii. 4. 47 ; oi κάμvovτ€s, the ex- hausted, the sick, invalids, iv. 5. 17, V. 5. 20, vii. 2. 6. καμο(, for κα2 έμοί, καν, for καΐ iv. kHv, for καΐ έάν. KdvSvs, voi, 0, a Median and Persian long outer garment, cqftan. 111 καντ€δθ€ν-καριπ(ομαι It had wide sleeves, and was made of woollen cloth, which was either No. 32. of purple or of some other splendid colour, i. 5. 8. KavTcvOcv, for Koi ivrevdev, Kaircira, for καί Sexetra. καΐΓηλ€Ϊον, τό [κάττ^λο?, ό, retail dealer, cf. Lat. caupo, tradesman), retail shop or general store for the sale of all kinds of provisions, but esp. tavern, restaurant, bar-room, Lat. caupona, i. 2. 24. καιτίθη, i;s, capithe, a Persian dry measure, equal to two choi- nixes, i. 5. 6. See s.v. χοΐνιξ. Kairvosi & [cf. Lat. uapor, steam'], smoke, Lat. fiimus, ii. 2. 15, 18. ΚαιπΓαδοκία, as, Cappadocia, a country in central Asia Minor, bounded on the east by the Eu- phrates, on the south by Taurus, i. 2. 20, 9. 7. Under the Persians it was divided mto two satrapies, the southern, or Cappadocia proper, and the northern, which included Paphlagonia and part of Pontus. Kdirposi 6 [cf Lat. caper, goat], wild boar, Lat. aper, ii. 2. 9. καρβάτιναι, ων, shoes of un- dressed hide, brogues, made of a single piece of oxhide, so that sole No. 33. and upper leather were all in one, and tied on with thongs. These shoes were so simple that they could be made easily, and so we find the Greeks in the Anab. resorting to them in an emergency, iv. 5. 14. KapSCd, OS [c/. Lat. cor, heart, Eng. heart], heart, as the seat of feelings, ii. 5. 23. KapSovxcios or Καρδονχιος, ά, ov [ΚαρδοΟχοι], of the Carduchi, Carduchian, iv. i. 2, 3. Καρδονχοι., ol, the Carduchi, Car- duchians, a wild and warlike race living among mountains on the left bank of the Tigiis, and sepa- rated from Armenia by the Cen- trltes river. They owned no alle- giance to the king of Persia, v. 5. 17. The Greeks passed through them under great hardship and difficulty, with constant fighting, iii. 5. -15, iv. i. 4, 8, 3. 1, 24, 4. 1. The modern Kurds of kurdistan now represent this people. KdpKao-os, 0, Carcasus, a river in Mysia, vii. 8. 18. καριταίό^ ά$, the carpaea, a Thes- salian pantomimic dance or ballet, fully described vi. i. 7, sq. καριτόομαι, καρττώσομαι, 4καρτω• σάμην, κΐκάρττωμαι [καρττόί], reap crops from, enjoy the fruit of, hence b καρτΓούμενο^, the possessor of an estate, usufructuary, v. 3. 13 ; of an enemy, plunder, devastate, iii. 2. 23. κ«φιτόι-καταγγΙλλ« 112 καριτ^, 5 [c/. Lat. carpOt pluck, Eng. harvest], fruit, both of the earth and of trees ; hence of grain, ermf Lat. seges, ii. 5. 19. K&fKTos or Kipa-os, ό, the Carstis or CwsMif, a small river emptying into the gulf of Issus, between Cilicia and Syria, i. 4. 4 (Merkez). Kdpvov, TO, nut, Lat. nux; κάρυα Ίτλατέα ουκ έχοντα διαφυήν, flat nuts without divisions such as the walnut has, v. 4. 29, 32, by which description Xen. probably means chestnuts, τά κασταναΧκά κάρυα or καστάηα, then unfamiliar to the Greeks ; but others think hazelnuts ftre intended. κάρφΐ|, ψ [€/. κάρφω, dry up}, any dned stalks, hay, straw, i. 5. 10. KaffTitX4f, ii, Castolus, a place probably near Sard is, where there was a plain which served as a muster field for that part of tlie Persian anny which was recruited from Lydia, Great Fhrygia, and Cappadocia, i. i. 2, 9. 7. κατ4, by elision and euphony gar or κα$\ prep, with gen. and ace, doicn, downwards, Lat. sub. With gen., denoting motion from above, down, down along, rare in Anab., i. 5. 8, iv. 2. 17, 5. 18, 7. 14, 8. 28; down under, below, vii. i. 30, 7. 11. With ace, of place or position, said of motion, on, over, down along, by, throughout a space, iii, 4. 30, iv. 6. 23, vi. 5. 7, 22, so icoi κατά yriP icoi κατά θάΧατταν, by land and sea, Lat. terra manque, !. I. 7, iii. 2. 13, cf. v. 4. 1 J denot- ing the place of a blow, on, i. 8. 26 ; of the object of motion, for, ftfter, iil 5. 2 ; with verbs of rest or of motion, over against, oppo- 9ϋ€, opposed to, against, i 5. 10, 8. 21, 10. 4, 7, ii. 3. 10» iv. 3. 20, vi. 5. 28, vii. 3. 22 ; with verbs of rest, near, at, by, v. 2. 16, vii. 2. 1, so κατά ταύτα, on this idde, vii. 5. 13; of fitness, in conformity ίο, according to, in relation to, con• ceming, ii. 2. 8, vii. 2. 23, 3. 39. Phrases: τό κατά τούτον elvai, as far as'he is concerned, i. 6. 9 ; καθ' ησυχίάν, see ησυχία ; κατά στου- δ-ή», in haste, vii. 6. 28 ; κατά ταύτα, tw the same way, v. 4. 22, vii. 3. 23; κατά KpaTos, with all one^s might, I 8. 19, but in vii. 7. 7 it means by right of strength; distribu- tively, of a divided whole: κατά ίθνη, by races, i. 8. 9, (/. i. 2. 16, iii. 4. 22, 5. 8, v. 6. 32, vii. 3. 22 ; καθ* Im, one by one, iv. 7. 8 ; αυ- τόν καθ' ainav, all by himself, vi. 2. 13, cf, 11 ; of time, κατά μήνα, by the month, i. 9. 17; κατ ένιαυτόν, annually, iii. 2. 12. In composition κατά givesthe idea of motion from above down, along, or against, but freq. it strengthens the simple idea in the sense of utterly, completely, or it makes an intr. verb transitive; cf the Lat. de- i» composition. καταβαίνω [11. βα], step down, go or come down, descend, dis- mount, as from higher ground, from a chariot or a horse, Lat. descendo, abs. or with άττό and gen., ii. 2. 14, iii. 4. 25, iv. 2. 20, 5. 25, V. 2. 30, vii. 3. 45; with els and ace. of place or irpo'f and ace. of pers., i. 2. 22, iv. i. 10, vii. 4• 1'^ ; with iwl, for, vi. 2. 2; descend from the interior to the sea, ii. 5. 22, vii. 4. 21, 7. 2 ; go down into the arena, enter a contest, Lat. in harenani descendo, iv. 8. 27. κατάβασ-ις, ewv, η [R. βα], a go- ing down, descent, march down, abs. or with «is and ace, iv. i. 10 ; esp. from the interior to the coast, V. 5. 4, vii. 8. 26 ; concretely, place of descent, descent, abs. or with els and ace, iii. 4. 37, 39, v. καταβλάιηύΜ Ιβλάκεύω], treat neglef^uUy, mismanage, vii. 6. καταγγ^λλι* [άτΎ^λω], an- nounce, denounce, ii. 5. 38. 113 κατάγ»ο$-καταλαμβάνΜ KardYcios, 01» [γή], under the earth, subterranean, of dwellings, iv. 5. 25. Kara^cXd» [γβλάω], laugh at, ridicule, mock, deride, Lat. dendeo, abs. or with gen., i. 9. 13, ii. 4. 4, 6. 23, 30. κατάγννμι (ά'/νϋμι, ay-, -ά^ω, 'έαξα, -^07α, -eiyriv, break), shatter, break, of a leg, iv. 2. 20. καταγοητ€νω [;^ο•ητ€ύω\, bewitch utterly, v. 7. 9. κατάγω [R. αγ], lead down, Lat. deduco ; esp. in nautical language, bnng down a ship to land from the high seas, bring to port, land, put in, Lat. applied nduem, abs., v. i. 11, 16, vi. 6. 3; of exiles, bring down, restore, bring back, abs. or with οίκαδ€, i. I. 7, 2. 2, vii. 3. 18; mid., arrive at, with iri and ace, iii. 4. 36. κατα$αιτανάω [R. 8a], spend completely, use up, Lat. cdnsumd, ii. 2. 11. καταδιιλιά», κατ€δ€ΐ\ίασα [8-κατ«φ4ομΜ 114 town or stronghold, Lat. occwpo, i. 3. 14, 10. 16, iv. I. 20, 21, v. 4. 15, vil. 3. 48; catch up to, overtake^ Lat. adsequor, of persons, ii. 2. 12, iii. 3. 8, iv. 5. 7 J of a town, reach, arrive at, Lat. peruenio, vil. 8. 8 ; discover, find, meet, Lat. incido, iii. I. 8, iv. 2. 14, v. 7. 18, with partic, i. 10. 18, iv. 2. 5. καταλΙγΜ [R. λιγ], recite, enu- merate, reckon ; phrase : eoepycalav tcariXeytv δη, he counted it as a kindness that, ii. 6. 27. KaraXcCtro» [λίίτω], leave behind, leave, Lat. relinqud, iii. 3. 19, 4. 49, iv. 2. 13, vil. 2. 30, with ace. of thing and either dat. or χαρά with dat. of pers., or inf. of purpose, iv. 6. 1, V. 2. 1, 3. 6; desert, abandon, forsake, leave in the lurch, i. 2. 18, iii. I. 2, 4. 40, iv. 6. 3, vi. 4. 8; leave remaining, free, or over, with ace. of thing and dat. of pers., iii. 5. δ, iv. 2. 11, vi. 5. 1, vii. 3.22; pass., stay or remain behind, i. 8. 25, V. 6. 12. KaroXfVtt» (Xei/w, -λίύσω, -ikevffa, iXeoffffTiv [Xoas, stone, cf. Lat. latl•- tumiae, quarry}, stone, late Lat. lapidd), stone to death, i. 5. 14, v. 7. 19, 30, vii. 6. 10. καταλλάττ» (άλλάττω, aWay-, αλλάξω, ηλλαξα, -τ^λλαχα, ηλλαΎμαι, -Ίίλλάχθηρ ΟΓ ήλλάγηιτ [&λλοΐ], diange), change; raid, and pass., esp. of a change from enmity for friendship, become reconciled, i. 6. 1. καταλογίζομαι [R. Xry], put down to one''s account, reckon up, v. 6. 16. καταλύω [λϋ^], unloose, dissolve, end, Lat. dissolud, vi. 2. 12 ; with ΐΓΟλ€μον, make peace, Lat. bellum conficio, V. 7. 27, without νόλ€μαν and with ir/>o$ and ace. of the pers., i. I. 10; unloose, unyoke (ec. fvirovs), i.e. make a halt, abs. or with wp^ αμιστον, halt for break- fast, i. 8. 1, 10. 19. καταμανθάν•! [R. μα], learn thoroughly, understand, observe, be aware, abs., with ace, or with ace. and a clause with m or Sri, i. 9. 3, ii. 3. 11, iii. i. 44, v. 7. 14, vii. 2. 18, 4. 6 ; discover, with partic, V. 8. 14. καταμιλίω [R. μ€λ], be neglect- ful, neglect one^s duty, v. 8. 1. καται^νΜ [R. μα], stay or wait behind, Lat. remaned, abs. or with h or χαρά and dat., v. 6. 17, vi. 6. 2, vii. 3. 47, 6. 43. καταμ€ρ(ξ» if^p}Mi divide among, distribute, vii. 5. 4. καταμίγννμι (μίΎννμι, pxy-, μίξω, ίμϊξα, μέμΰ'γμΛΐ, έμίχθην and Ιμί^ην [R. μιγ], mix), mix up; pass., mingle with, els τά$ xoXcis Karepiy- wrro, they mingled with the citi- zens, vii. 2. 3. κατανοώ» [R. γνω], mark well, vii. 7. 43 ; observe, perceive, i. 2. 4, vii. 7. 45. καταντιΐΓ^ραν or καταντιιι^ροβ adv. [R. iTfp], over against, on the opposite side of, with gen., i. i. 9, iv. 8. 3. καταιτ^μιι^β [τ^/Αΐτω], send down, esp. from the interior to the coast, i. 9. 7. καταιητρόββ (τ€τρ6ω, aor. pass. 4ΊΓ€τρώθΊ]ν [ir^pos], stone, late Lat. lapidd), stone to death, in pass., i. 3. 2. καταΐΓη8&β» (τηδάω, τηδι^σω, ένή- δησα, -τεπήδηκα [R. ικ8], leap), jump or spring down, with άνό and gen., i. 8. 3, iii. 4. 48. καταιτίιττω [R. ιγ€τ], fall down, esp. from a horse, fall off, get a fall, iii. 2. 19, iv. 8. 26. καταιτλήττ» [τλήττω"], strike dotvn, esp. with terror or wonder, terrify abjectly, with βροντή, iii. 4. 12. καταίΓολιμ^Μ [iroXe/i^w], fight down, vanquish, reduce, Lat. de- bello, vii. i. 27. καταιτράττ•» Ιτράττω"], fulfil, bring to an end, accomplish, exe- cute, i. 2. 2, vii. 7. 17 ; mid., achieve, vii. 7. 27. κατόίρ4ομαι {αράομαι, -άράσομαι, ήράσάμην, -ήράμαι [αρά, prayer], 115 καταβτβένννμι-καταψρονέϋ pray, poetic), pray against, impre- cate, curse, Lat. detestor, abs. or with dat., V. 6. 4, vii. 7. 48. καταο'β^νννμι {σβέννΰμι, αγ€Ϊν, see κm,τέφayov. κατα4|»ανή$ι έs [R. ψα], in sight, Lat. in oculls, i. 8. 8, ii. 3. 3, vii. 2. 18. καταψινγω [R. φνγ], flee down, take refuge, fiee for help, Lat. con- fugio, with ενταύθα or with els and ace, i. 5. 13, iii. 4. 11, v. 7. 2. καταφρονέω [φρήν], look down on, despise, Lat. despicid, iii. 4. 2. κ•ταχ•ΐ|>£1«»~Εΐ€λ<Μν•( 116 117 ιαλιΰβ^-κέραβ καταχα>ρ(|« [x<*^^'i'<^]t set apart in one^s proper place, settle, sta- tion, arrange, vi. 5. 10. KaWalav, see κατά-γνϋμι. IC«iTf04|&t)V| see κατατίθημι. KarcfSov [R. FiSJ, look down on froui above, Lat. despicio, i. 10. 14, iv. 4. 9, 7. 21, vii. 3. 44; observe, discern, iv. 3. 11, vi. 5. 8. κατ«λήφ0αι, κατιιληφάτ«β, see καταλαμβάνω. κ4τ€ΐμΑ [eUAu], go 0Γ come down, Lat. desceudo, v. 7. 13. κατιργά(ομα4 [Κ. Ρ«ργ]ι ίίο ίΛο/•- onghly by work, accomplish, bring to pass, achieve, i. 9. 20, ii. 6. 22, vl 2. 10, Yii. 7. 25, 26. κατφχφ|Μ» [άρχομαι], go down, ©ep. to one's home, return, with dfiraSe, vii. 2. 2. κατιτΙτ|λΐ|ντο, see κατατέμνω. ttarrh-prntraw, see κατατιτρώσκω. κατΙ4^γον [^^αγον], ea^ up, &ο2ί, iv. 8. 14. κατέχω [R. «τιχ], hold dmcn or firmly, hold fast, Lat. retineo, vii. 7. 28 ; restrain, check, prevent, with ace. of the pers. or with inf., iii. I. 20, vii. 7. 29 ; esp. hold in pos- session, occupy, Lat. obtineo, iv. 2. 1, 5, 12, V. 6. 7, 36; intr., in a nautical sense, come down to land, ptit in, Lat. portum capid, abs. or with ixfiae, v. 6. 20, vi. i. 33. Phrases : avdyKji κατ€χ6μ£νοι, com-^ pelled by^ necessity, ii. 6. 13 ; τοσού- τοι χωμίον κατασχεΓΐ', cover SO much ground, iv. 8. 12. κατήγορε»! κατψγορήιΤΜ^ etc, [ayiCpw], speak agnifist, accuse, charge, with gen. of pers. and 6τι or ftJj with a clause, v. 7. 4, 8. 1, vii. 6. 8, 7. 44. κατηγορία, if [ayilp•], a speak- ing against, accusation, charge, v. 8. L κατηριμίΐ;» (i>p€/iijTi», ^pCMii-, •κφέμισα, -7ΐρ€μΙσ9τιν [ίιρέμα, adv., ψtl€tly^, make still), make thor- oughly quiet, calm down, appease, ¥iL I. 22, 24. κ«ηδόνταβ, see κατ€Ϊίοκ κατοικίΜ [R. F«]i have one^s res- idence, live, with iv and dat., v. 3. 7. KaTOiK(t«» [R• Ρι•κ], make live in, settle as a colonist ; of a city, colonize, settle, found, Lat. condo, V. 6. 15, vi. 4. 7. κατορνττ» [δρύττω], sink in the ground, bury, hide underground, Lat. Infodio, iv. 5. 29, v. 8. 9, 11. κάτω, adv. [κατά], with verbs of motion, doicn from above, down- wards, Lat. deorsus, iv. 8. 20, 28 ; with verbs of rest, underneath, be- low, Lat. infra, iv. 5. 25. Phrase : TO κάτω τον τό^ου, the lower part of the bow, iv. 2. 28. κανμα, ατο$, τ6 [καίω], heat, of the sun, i. 7. 6. καύσιμο$, ov [κα(ω], that can be burnt, combustible, vi. 3. 15, 19. Κανσ-τρον ircSCov, τό, Cayster Plain or Caysterfield (cf. Spring- field, Dartmoor), a city in Phrygia, where the roads from Byzantium and Sardis united on tlieir way to Syria, i. 2. 11. (Near Bulwudun.) κώ», see καίω. κέγχρο9ι έ, millet, millet grass, a hardy grass used as fodder, with a grain sometimes ground into meal, i. 2. 22 {panicum miliacetim). κιΐμαΐι κ€ίσομαι [κ€νμαι.], be laid (used as a pass, of τίθ-ημι), hence of persons, lie, lie at one's length, iv. 8. 21, esp. lie dead, i. 8. 27, vi. 5. 6; of things, be laid, lie, be placed, be situated, with iv or τρό$ and dat. of place or κατά and ace. of pers., iii. i. 21, 4. 10, vi. 4. 3, vii. 3. 23 ; esp. as pass, of the phrase θέσθαι τά IhrXa, cf. ίνθα τά SrXa licetTo, where the armed force too* halted or stationed, iv. 2. 20, cf. vii. 1.24. Kf Kpd^dTMv, see κράξύ», κέκτησβι, see κτάομαι. KfXaivaC, ώΐ', Celaenae, a flour- ishing commercial city of Phrygia, at the sources of the Marsyas and Maeander, with a citadel and royal palace. Here Cyrus had a park. L 2. 7, 8, a (Ruins near Denair.) KcXiVM, κ€\€ύσω, έκί\€υσα, Κ€κ4- \€υκα, KCKiXeva μαι, έκεΧεύσθην [R. KfX], order, command, bid, give orders, direct, Lat. iubeo, gener- ally with ace. of pers. and inf., i. I. 11, 2. 15, ii. I. 8, iii. 4. 38, iv. 2. 1, V. 2. 8, vi. 6. 5, vii. i. 22 ; with inf. alone, i. 3. 16, ii. 3. 1, iii. i. 26, vi. 3. 15; with ace. of pers. alone, vi. 6. 15 ; with ace. of thing, iii. I. 7, vi. 6. 14 ; abs., i. 6. 10, vi. 5. 26, 6. 26; in a weaker sense, bid, urge, advise, suggest, abs., with inf., or ace. and inf., i. 9. 27, iii I. 29, iv. 5. 16, vii. i. 4, 2. 8. Kcvost -ήι iv, empty, vacant, void, Lat. indnis, uacuus, abs. or with gen., i. 8. 20, iii. 4. 20; empty, idle, groundless, of fear, ii. 2. 21. Phrases: τολύ ttjs φάΧαΎΎΟί Kevbv εποίησαν, they made a great gap in the phalanx, iv. 8. 17. Κ€νοτάψιον, TO [k€v6s -\- τάφos, cf. Eng. cenotaph], empty gravemound or tomb, cenotaph, in which there were no ashes of the dead, vi. 4. 9. These were erected chiefly in hon- our of persons lost at sea or of those whose bodies were missing after a battle. They were often handsome artistic structures with pillars and inscriptions. Μντέω, κεντήσω [cf. κέντρον, sharp point, goad, Eng. centre], prick, goad, stab, torment, iii. i. 29. Κιντρίτης, ό, the Centntes, an aflauent of the Tigris, separating Armenia from the country of the CardQchi, iv. 3. 1 (BuUn Tchai). The Greeks crossed at the modern city Sert, where there is now a good ford. κιράμιον, TO [R. 2 κρα], earthen jar, used for wine, vi. i. 15, 2. 3. Kcpa^ovs» a, οΰν [R. 2 κρα], of earth or day, τΧίνθοι κεραμεαϊ, clay brick, whether sunburnt or baked in a kiln, iii. 4. 7. Κ,ίράμων or Κιραμ&ν άγορα, at, the name of a town in Phrygia, close to the Mysiau boundary, i. 2. 10. It means either Tilemarket or Market of the Ceramians, ace. to the accent. It was perhaps the later TrajanopoHs, modern Uschak. Kcpawvp.!. (fepa-, κρα-), iKipava, κέκραμαι, ίκεράσθην or έκράθ-ην [R. 2 κρα], mix, mostly of the dilution of wine with water, Lat. dMud, v. 4. 29 (see s.v. άκρατοι); of mix- ing wine into water, with ace. and dat., i. 2. 13. κέρα$, κέρατου or κέρω^, dat. κα- ράτι, τό [cf Lat. cornu, horn, Eng. HORN, HART, rMno-ceros], horn, prop, of an animal, Lat. cornu; hence, from the resemblance of shape or because horns of animals were originally used for these pur- poses, bugle horn, horn, used to sound ' taps,' ii. 2. 4, and among the barbarians for other purposes, vii. 3. 32, 4. 19. The aaXviyii, q.v., was the instrument employed by the Greeks in war for signals of every description, and the use of the 'horn' in ii. 2. 4 in giving a military signal cannot be paralleled in the writings of any other Greek historian than Xenophon. As used among the barbarians, the instru- ment was probably the actual horn of an animal. In vii. 4. 19, it is worthy of note that the person who blows on the κέρα^ is called by Xenophon a ^aXirticnJj, which in- dicates that the κέρα% was used among the barbarians as was the σάλΐΓΐ7ξ among the Greeks. Among the Romans the cornu developed into a regular instrument, as shown I'! No. 34. in the accompanying cut. Kipas also signifies drinking horn, but Κ€(ΜΙ<]ΓθύνΤΙ01-Κ€ψ(λλ(λλ-γήΐ 118 in the Anab. is so used only of the Thracians, vii. 2. 28, 3. 24 (c/. vi. i, 4). Among the Greeks the drink- ing horn received elaborate devel- opment, and was technically des- ignated by the term βντ6» {cf. ^^ω, βονο)^ since it had a small opening at the bottom which the drinker put into his mouth and thus allowed the wine to run in. The rhyton, as an artistic development of the earlier horn, was made of pottery or metal and was modelled into the head of an animal, so that the No. 35. special cup might be called Γιγιγοϊ, ί\Λφο%^ jcdrpos, etc. κ4ρα$ is also used of a projection or peak of a mountain, v. 6. 7. In military language, the army in line of bat- tle is compared to an animal which shows its front to an enemy, but whose strength lies in its horns on either side ; we, however, from the Roman comparison to a bird of prey, call these tomgrs, Lat. άία, iv. 8. 12, vi. 5. δ, vii. i . 23. Phrases : ri δβξώ» xipatj the right wing^ i. 7. 1, 8. 13; τά de^ia, tw Kiparos^ the right of the wing^ i. 8. 4 ; rb €ύώνν- μον KipaSf the left wing^ i. 8. 4, 10. 9 ; Ι|ω iyivtro του κέράτο^^ he otii- flanked the tmng^ i. 8. 23 ; τά κέ- ρατα του ιτλαισίοϋ, the wings (oi wXevpal) of the square^ iii. 4. 19, 20, 21 ; κατά /c^as, in column^ the common order of march, with the right wing leading, iv. 6. 6; rijv oupkv τον κ4ρατο5^ the rear of the column^ vi. 5. 5. See also s.v. άνα- τΓτύσσω. Κιρασονντιοι, ol [Κ6/οασοί)$], CerasutUiansj inhabitants of Cera- sus, V. 5. 10, 7. 13, 17, 31. KfpooOvs, ovvTos, η [cf. Eng. cAer/y], Cerasus^ a city in Pon- tus west of Trapezus, the mod- em KiresUn, v. 3. 2, 4. 1, 7. 16, 30. It was a colony of the Sino- peans and was doubtless named from the cherry trees (Arme- nian keraz^ Turkish kires) which grew there abundantly. Lucullus brought the cherry from here to Rome in 73 b.c., hence the Lat. cerasus. Kfp4nvoS| 17, ov [κ^ραϊ], of horn^ made of horn j vi. i. 4. K^pptposi o, Cerberus, the hell- hound, the watch-dog of the lower world. His kennel was on the further bank of the Styx, where Charon put ashore the shades. He let all pass in, but none out. Hesiod describes him as having fifty heads, later writers and works of art generally represent him with only three, and with hair composed of serpents. Heracles brought him up to Eurystheus, vi. 2. ^. KfpSaCv«» (κ6ρ^αν-), κ€ρδανω, ίκ4ρ• hcLvay -κ€κέρδηκα [jc^pdos], gain, ac- quire, ii. 6. 21. Kcp8oA.^oS| a, ov [^KipSos"], of things, gainful, profitable, i. 9. 17. Kosi d. Oleander, the Spartan governor of Byzantium, vi. 2. 13, 6. 5, at first set against Xenophon and the Greeks by Dex- ippus, vi. 6. 9-28, but afterwards reconciled to them and friendly to Xenophon, vi. 6. 34 ff., vii. i. 8. He took care of the Greek sick at Byzantium, vii. 2. 6, until suc- ceeded by Anaxibius, vii. 2. 5. KXfdvwp, opot, δ, Cleanor, a Greek general from Orchomenus in Arcadia, ii. 1. 10, 5. 37, elected to command the Arcadian hop- lites after the death of Agias, iii. I. 47, iv. 8. 18, often mentioned for valour and wisdom, iii. 2. 4, vi. 4. 22, vii. I. 40, 3. 46, 5. 4, 10. KXcdpfTos, 6, Clearetus, a Greek captain, slain while on a plunder- ing expedition, v. 7. 14-16. KX^apxos, 6, Clearchus, a Spar- tan general in the Peloponnesian war, was at the battle of Cyzicus, and was harmost of Byzantium, where his cruelty led to its capture by Alcibiades, ii. 6. 1, v. 6. 24; after the peace, he was guilty of disobedience to the ephors and by them condemned to death, ii. 6. 2 ft., but escaping them became attached to Cyrus, i. i. 9, ii. 6. 4, was in his most secret counsels, iii. 1. 10, and was the most trusted of his generals. He commanded the right wing at Cunaxa, i. 8. 4, 12, and after the death of Cyrus led the Greek army until he was treacherously captured and put to death by Tissaphernes, ii. 5. 31-42, 6. 29. An estimate of his charac- ter is given by Xen., ii. 6. 1-1δ; see also i. 2. 9, 3. 1 ff., 5. 11 ff., 6. δ, ii. I. 4, 15, 3. 11, 4. 15, 5. 3, 27. PI., Κ\4αρχοι, men like Clearchus, iii. 2. 31. κλιΐθρον, TO [/cXfifti], the fasten- ings of a city gate, generally pi. like Lat. clatistra, vii. i. 17. See s.v. /χοχλόί. κλιίω, -κ\€ΐσω, έκλεισα, κ4κ\€ΐμΛΐ, ίκΚίΙσθην [root κΚαψ, ΐΓ€νω ΙκΧώφ], Steal, rob ; with ace. of pers., intercept, waylay, vi. I. L κλώψ, κλωίΓΟί, 6 [ίτλ^πτω], thief; in war, marauder, bummer, Lat praedator, iv. 6. 17. xW^as, ovs, TO, darkness, dusk, twilight, Lat. crepusculum, iv. 5. 9. κνημί$, ίδοί, η [κνήμη, leg, cf. Lat. nitor, bear ιψοη], greave, Lat. ocrea, generally pi., that part of the defensive armour of the Greek hoplite which covered his leg from the knee to the instep, i. 2. 16, iv. 7. 16, v. 2. 22. The greaves, which were made of flexible metal and lined with felt, leather, or cloth, were ' sprung on ' the leg, and then fastened behind by straps or buckles. Like the cuirass, they were made to fit the indi- vidual person. See s.v. 6τ\ον. For additional illustrations see s.v. aatrls, ζίφοί, ΟΊΓ\ιτη$. No. 38. No. 39. χ<^ΎΧη» v^ W' ^^S' conehli, mvs- cle, cockle, a bivalve shellfish, Lat concha, v. 3. 8. κογχυλιάτη8, ov, adj. [κογχύλη = κόΎχη], shelly, with λί^ο5, shelly limestone, iii. 4. 10. I Ml NoSXos-KonaT^S 122 KoCXof, η, OP [root icaF, cf. Lat. cauus, hollow^ Eng. hole, hol- low], hollow, of a country, lying in a valley, v. 4. 31. ΚΟίμάω, έκοίμησα, ίκοιμήθην [κ€Ϊ- |Mu], lay to rest; mid. and pass., lie down to sleep, go to bed, iv. 3. 2, 5. 14, vi. 4. 10. KOivpi dat. sing. fem. of koivos, as adv., ill common, together, jointly, abs. or with μετά and gen. or σύρ and dat., iii. 3. 2, iv. 5. 34, v. 4. 26, vi. 2. 13. Koivos, ή, άρ [p, Colossae, a city in the southwestern part of Phry- gia, on the Lycus, i. 2. 6, of impor- tance in the time of Herodotus and Xenophon, but afterwards rarely heard of until in connexion with St. PauPs epistle. Its ruins are near Khonos. Κολχ(5, /5os, ή, Colchis, a coun- try in Asia on the eastern coast of the Pontus, and west of Iberia, and watered by the Phasis, iv. 8. 22, V. 3. 2. It was a land of witch- craft and sorcery, the home of Me- dea, and the scene of the quest of the Golden Fleece. (Mingrelia.) Κόλχοι, ol [cf Κολχί$], the Col- chians, inhabitants of Colchis. They were divided into various tribes, including the Moschi, iden- tified with Meshech of the Bible (Ezek. 27, 13). Afterwards the Lazi possessed the country, from whom are the modem Lazians. In the A nab. a tribe of Colchians are mentioned in the neighbourhood of Trapezus, iv. 8. 8 ff., v. 2. 1, 7.2. koXmvoSi ό [cf. Lat. celsus, high, collis, hill, Eng. hill], heap, hill, of stones, cairn, iv. 7. 25. Κομανίά, ά$, Comania, a place in Mysia, near Pergamus, other- wise unknown, vii. 8. 15. κομιδή, ψ [κομίζω], means of conveyance by sea, transport, v. i. 11. κομίζφ) (κομιδ-), κομιω, etc. [κομέω, care for], take charge of, carry away so as to save, bring, convey, conduct, with ^iri and ace. or with oficaSe, iv. 5. 22, 6. 3 ; mid., convey, fetch one'^s own, or for oneself, abs. or with ivHde, iii. 2. 26, v. 5. 20 ; pass., travel, v. 4. 1. Koyidrds, i>, op [verbal of κοριάω, plaster, κονίά, dust, ashes, plaster, cf KOPis, dust, Lat. cinis, ashes], covered with plaster, plastered. KOViopTOs-Kpdvos cemented, oi underground cisterns for wine, iv/2. 22. κονιορτός, ό [kopis, cf κοριάτόί and όρννμι, stir up, Lat. orior, rise], dust raised, cloud of dust, i. 8. 8. κόίΓος, 6 [κότΓτω], a belabouring, hence fatigue, v. 8. 3. Koirpos, η, dung of animals, i. 6.1. κόΐΓτω (/coir-), κόψω, Ιίκοψα, -κ^- κοφα, κέκομμαι, έκότηρ [cf. Eng. chop, syn-copate], cut, hew, slash, of trees, fell, iv. 6. 26, 8. 2 ; of ani- mals, slaughter, ii. 1.6; of a door, knock at, Lat. pulso, vii. 1. 16. κόρη, ψ, girl, maiden, Lat. pu- ella, iv. 5. 9. Κορσ-ωτή, ^s, CorsUte, a large city in Mesopotamia, said to be surrounded by the Mascas river, i. 5. 4. This was probably a canal forming with the Euphrates an island on which the city stood. Remains have been found on the island Werdi, similarly formed. Κορνλάς, a. Dor. gen., Corylas, chief of the Paphlagonians, inde- pendent of the king of Persia, v. 5. 12, 22, 6. 11, vi. i. 2. κορυφή, rjs, highest point, top, peak, summit of a hill or moun- tain, iii. 4. 41, iv. 2. 20. κο<Γμ4ω, κοσμήσω, έκόσμησα, κ€κό- σμημαι, έκοσμήθηρ [κόσμοί, cf Eng. cosmetic], arrange, array, mar- shal, of an army, iii. 2. 36; of persons, dress, adorn, i. 9. 23. κό<Γμι.ο$} ά, OP [κόσμοί], well- ordered, under good discipline, vi. 6.32. Kdcrjios, 6 [cf Eng. cosmic, cosmo- i<^9y]i order, good order, orna- ments, attire, dress, Lat. mundus, 1. 9. 23, iii. 2. 7. Κοτνωρα, τά, Cotyora, a com- mercial town, a colony of the Sino- peans, in the country of the Tiba- reni, on the Pontus, v. 5. 3 (Ordu). Κοτνωρΐταΐι ωρ [Κοτύωρα], the people of Cotyora, Cotyorites, v. 5. 6, 7, 10, 19, 25. κονψοβ» 17, OP, light in weight,• > Lat. leuis, vi. i. 12. Phrase : χόρτοί κουφοί, hay, i. 5. 10. κονψω$| adv. [κουφοί], lightly, vi. I. 5. κράζω (κρα7-), fut. pf. κ€κράξομαι, cKpayov, 2 pf. κέκρα^α as pres., [K. KdiX], cry out, call aloud, vii. 8. 15. Kpdvos, ουί, TO [cf. Eng. cranium], headpiece, helmet, of metal, Lat. cassis, I. 2. 16, 8. 6, iv. 7. 16, vii. 4. 16, or of leather, Lat. galea, v. 2. 22, 4. 13. The helmet of metal, which was developed from the simple dogskin cap, consisted of No. 40. six pieces : the cap, conformed to the shape of the head ; the φά\οί, a metal ridge running from the front to the back of the cap at the centre and designed as a support for the crest; the \6φοί or crest, commonly of horsehair and con- stantly ending in the horse's tail ; the visor, the cheekpieces, and the neckpiece. The helmet was lined on the inside. It might be solid, when the visor had openings for the eyes and mouth and a pro- jecting nose guard, and the helmet was put on by pulling it down from above over the face {cf No. 40, and II ιΐ|Μ)ΐτέ«•-κρ4τιστοι 124 125 Kpdros-icpinrTti see also s.v. Krntat and 6π\ον) ; or the visor might be a simple mova- ble guard for the forehead (c/. ^1 I κράτήρ, ηρο%, 6 [R. 2 κρα], mix- ing howl^ used like our punch bowls, iv. 5. 26, 32. The κμίτηρ^ as used at Greek symposia, was designed to hold a large quantity of wine and water mixed (for the universal Greek custom of drink- ing wine diluted, see s.v. άκρατοι). It was therefore a bulky vessel. The liquor was drawn from it by No. 41. Mo. 41, and see also 8.v. A»€ Strong, have the pmcer, be lord or master^ rule, get the upper hand, abs. or with the gen. of place, ii. 5. 7, vii. 2. 25, 3. 3 ; esp. be victori- ous, conquer, abs., i. 7. 8, iii. 2.21, 39, V. 6. 7, hence partic. as subst., victor, ii. i. 10, iii. 2. 26, pass., vanquished, iii. 2. 28, vii. 7. 32; conquer, worst, subdue, vanquish, with ace. or gen. of pers., iii. 4. 26, iv. 7. 16, V. 6, 9, vii. 6. 32. No. 42. attendants (see s.v. οίνοχόοί), who dipped into it their jugs or other vessels. The mixer was, therefore, broad at the top. Its form is shown in the accompanying illus- tration. The body of the vessel rested on a foot and base. It had two handles, which were generally, but not always, attached to the lower part of the vessel. For an additional illustration, see s.v. rpl- irom. No. 74. KpdnoTTOf, iy, or [R. 1 κρα], used as sup. of ά7α^ο$, best, most excel- lent, strongest, bravest, Lat opti' mus, i. 9. 2, 18, 21, iv. 8. 12, vii. 6. 37 ; most eminent or distinguished, noblest, Lat. optimdtes, i. 5. 8, ii. ^. 8, iv. 6. 16, vii. 3. 21. Neut. pi. κράτιστα, as adv., in the best way, with ws, most excellently, bravely, cleverly, suitably, iii. 2. 6, 3. 3, iv. 6. 10, 15, V. 2. 11, vii. 7. 16. Phrase: κράτιστον (sc. εστί), it is best or most advantageous, abs., with inf., or with dat. of pers. and inf., iii. 2. 28, 4. 41, iv. 5. 17, v. 6. 36, vi. 3. 13, vii. 3. 8. Kpdrosi ovt, TO [R. 1 κρα]. Strength, force, might, Lat. uls, used in Anab. only with ανά and κατά ; see under those words. κραυγή, ^s [R. καλ], outcry, cry, shout, Lat. clamor, i. 2. 17, ii. 2. 17, iii. 4. 45, v. 2. 17, vi. 4. 27. Kp^as, κρ4ωί, τό {cf. Lat. caro, flesh, Eng. creosote^, flesh, pi., pieces of flesh, meat of animals, for food, i. 5. 2, ii. i. 6, iv. 5. 31, vii. 3.21. κρ<£ττων, ov, gen. ovos [R. 1 κρα], used as comp. of ayaeos, bet- ter, stronger, mightier, superior to, more useful, more valuable, Lat. melior, i. 2. 26, ii. 2. 10, 5. 19, iii. I. 4, 2. 22, V. 6. 8, vii. 7. 6, 31 ; bolder, braver, i. 7. 3, v. 4. 21. Phrase: Kpeirrov (sc. εστί), it is better or more advantageous, with inf., iii. 2. 17, iv. 6. 11, vi. 5. 21. κρίμαμαι, κρ€μ'/ισομαι, intr., hang, be suspended, Lat. pendeo, with iirl and gen., iii. 2. 19 ; of moun- tains, with inrip and gen., overhang, Lat. impended, iv. i. 2. κρ€μιάννΰμι (κρ€μα-), κρεμώ, ίκρέ- μασα, έκρεμάσθηρ [κρέμαμαι"], trans., hang, hang up, suspend, Lat. sus- pendo, i. 2. 8, vii. 4. 17. κρήνη, ψ, spring, well, fountain, Lat./5ws, i. 2. 13, iv. 5. 9, 15, vi. 4. 4. κρηιτίς, ιδοί, v^ half boot or high shoe, Lat. crepida ; of a building, foundation, iii. 4• 7, 10. Κρή«, KpijToy, b, a Cretan, a man from Crete, the largest of the Greek islands in the Mediterra- nean, now called Candia, famous in mythology as the birthplace of Zeus and as the kingdom of Minos. The Cretans were swift runners and renowned as archers, serving in this capacity in the army of Cyrus, i. 2. 9, iii. 3. 7, iv. 2. 28, 8. 27, V. 2. 29, but they were prover- bial liars and cheats. κριθή, yjs, always pi. in Anab., barleycorns, barley, Lat. hordeum, i. 2. 22, iii. 4. 31, iv. 5. 26, vi. 4. 6, 6. 1, vii. 1. 13. Kpteivos, 17, ov iKpie-ff], of barley, made of barley, as bread, iv. 5. 31 ; with oiws, barley wine, i.e. beer, a favourite beverage among the Egyptians, Armenians, Thracians, and Germans, iv. 5. 26. κρίνω (κριν-'), κρίνω, ίκρίνα, κέ- κρικα, κέκριμαι, έκρίθην [c/. Lat. cerno, separate, crimen, judgment, Eng. critic, hypo-crisy'], part asun- der, divide, distinguish, pick out, Lat. cernd, i. 9. 30 ; decide, deter- mine, be of opinion, estimate, ad- judge, with two aces., with inf., or with ace. and inf., i. 5. 11, 9• 5, 20, iii. I. 7, 12 ; esp. in judicial lan- guage, decide as judge, try, Lat. iudicd, vi. 6. 16, 18, 20 ; pass., be brought to trial, be tried, v. 6. 33, vi. 6. 25. Kpios, 0, ram, Lat. aries, ii. 2. 9. KpCaiSf cws, η Ικρίνω, cf Eng. crisis^, a separating, distinguish- ing, decision, esp. in court, trial, Lat. iudicium, i. 6. 5, vi. 6. 20, 26. κρόμμυον, τό, onion, Lat. caepe, vii. I. 37. KpoToS} ό [c/. κρούω"], noise made l^y two bodies striking together, esp. of the hands, clapping, ap- plause, Ι,Άΐ. plausus, vi. 1. 13. κρονω, κρούσω, έκρουσα, -κέκρουκα, -κέκρον(σ)μαι, -εκρούσθην [c/. κρό- Tos], Strike one thing against an- other, clash, rattle, vi. i. 10, with irpos and ace, iv. 5. 18. κρνίΓτω (κρυφ-), κρύψω, έκρυψα, κέκρυμμαι, έκρύφθην and 4κρνφην [cf Eng. crypt, crypto-gam, grotto], hide, conceal, keep secret, Lat. tego, i. 4. 12, vi. I. 18, with ace. of pers. from whom, i. 9. 19. KfiMp«Xot-K4^icot 126 I KfMpvXos, 0, the Icwhulos, a way of arranging the hair, a sort of top- knot or crest formed by drawing all the hair to the crown and there confining it in a knot. This was old-fashioned for men hi the time of Xenophon, but the hair was still worn so by children. In v. 4. 13 the name is applied to a horsehair crest or tuft of leather on the hel- mets of the Mossynoeci. κτάομ,αι, κτή<τομαι^ έκτησάμην, κ4- κτημαι, έκτήθΐ)»^ procure for one- self, acquire, gain, win, abs. or with ace, i. 9. 19, ii. 6. 17, v. 6. 30, vi. 4. 8, vii. 2. 38, 3. 31 ; perf., pos- sess, enjoy, i. 7. 3 ; of persons, in the phrase Καρ8ούχου% τολβμίουί έκτψ- σάψ£0ιι, we made enemies of the Carduchi, v. 5. 17. KTclvfi» (iCTcr-), κτ€ρω, ffcrttm and iKTowM, -4κτονα, kill, ii. 5. 32, rare as simple verb, eee aTOKreltm, κτήμα, aros, τά ϊκτάομαι], pos- session, vii. 7. 41, pL, property, u. 6. 24. κτήνο«, οϋ$, τ4 [κτάομαι], piece of property, chattel, then, as the ancient races were pastoral, any domestic animal, beast, v. 2. 3; generally pi., animals, cattle, used like our stock, iii. 1. Id, iv. c. 25, 7.2. _ » :> » Κτησ^άι, ου, Ctesias, a famous physician of Cnidus, belonging to the Asclepiad guild there. He was taken prisoner by the Persians about 415, and on account of his skill was appointed body physician to Darius II. and afterwards to Artaxerxes. He attended the lat- ter at Cunaxa, i. 8. 2β, 27. He re- mained at tlie court 17 years, when in 398 he was sent home by the king on an embassy to Evagoras and Conon, and never returned to Persia. He wrote a history of Persia in 23 books and a descrip- tion of India in one book, of both of which we have only epitomes, made by Photius, and a few frag- ments. ιτυΡιρνήτηβ, ου [κυβερνάω, steer, φ Eng. govern], one who steers, helmsman, v. 8. 20. The κυβ€ρνή- τηs was the most important oflicer in the Greek ship. He not only steered the vessel, a difficult and delicate operation in case of the man-of-war in action (see s.v. τριή• ρψ), but he also gave the orders which were passed on to the rowers. He had an assistant, called τΓρψρ€ύ$ (q.v.), who stood at the bow of the boat as lookout, and was in constant communication with him. For the steering gear of the Greek ship, see s.v. ττηδάλιορ. Por illus- trations of the κυβ€ρνήτΎΐ% at the rudder, see s.v. wOy and τ€ντηκόν- ropot. K^Sws, 0, the Cydnus, a river in Cilicia which rose in the Taurus range and flowed through the city of Tarsus, i. 2. 23 (Tersus Tchai). κυξιιαινοδ, ό fKiJfiifor], a Cyzi- cene, a gold coin of Cyzicus of about twice the weight of the da- ric (see s.v. dapeiKOs), but so alloyed that in the time of Demosthenes it had the value of only 28 Attic drachmas (see s.v. μνα), v. 6. 23, vi 2. 4, vii. 2. 36, 3. 10. Kwtiicoe, ij, Cyzicus (Balkiz), vii. 2. 6, a colony of the Milesians, on the southern shore of the island Arctonnesus, in the southern part of the Propontis. This island is now a peninsula, but in antiquity two bridges spanned the strait with a fine harbour on each side of them. The position of the city made it important, and its posses- sion was therefore often hotly con- tended for, especially in the battle won there by the Athenians in 4 10 B.C. Since it was a station on the way to the grain districts, its coinage was current among the Greeks (see Κυί\κηρό$). Under the Romans the city reached its height of prosperity, and the ruins on the hills above the peninsula are of that period. m 12T irOKXos-KOpos kvkXos, 6 [c/. Lat. curuus, bent, circus, circle, Eng. ring, cycle, bi- cycle, en-cyc/o-paedia], circle, rimf, I'sp. in the dat. as adv., κύκλφ, in a circle, round, all round, i. 5. 4, iii. I. 2, iv. i. 11, vi. 3. 0, vii. 2. 21 ; of a city, ring-wall, encircling 'trail, iii. 4. 7, 11 ; of persons, group, κύκλοι συνίσταντο, groups collected, V. 7. 2. Phrases : ττί^ν κύκΚψ ττασαν χώραν, the whole region on every side, iii. 5. 14, cf. v. 6. 20 ; κύκΧψ διά, μ4σψ τψ Θρ4κηί, round through the middle of Thrace, vii. i. 14; νορ€υόμ€Ρθί κύκ\φ, march in a curve, vii. 8. 18. κνκλό», κυκλώσω, έκύκΧωσα, κ€- κόκλωμαι, έκυκλώθην [κύκλο?], encir- cle, surround, of troops, in pass., i. 8. 13, iv. 2. 15 ; mid., form a circle, gather round, with vepi and ace, vi. 4. 20. κνκλωσΊς» €ωΐί, η [κυκλόω], an encircling^ tas elt κύκΧωσιν, as if to encircle, i. 8. 23. κύλινδρο» or kvXCvS», •€κύ\Ίσα, -κ€- κύλϊσ/ιαι, έκυλίσθην [c/. καΧινδέομαι, Eng. qf Under'], roll, roll along or down, of stones, iv. 2. 3, 20, 7. 4 ; pass, intr., roll, with κάτω, roll down, of horses, iv. 8. 28. Κυν(σκος, ό, Cyniscus, a Spar- tan, probably harraost in the Chersonese at the time of the Greeks* approach thither, vii. i. 13. KvtrapCTTivos» 17, op [κυιτάριττοί, cypress-tree, cf. Eng. cypress], of cypress, made of cypress, v. 3. 12. Kvpcios or Kvpcios, a, ov [Kvpos], of or belonging to Cyrus, Cyrean, as TO Kbpeiov στράτίυμα, the Cyrean army, i.e. the Greek army which had accompanied Cyrus, vii. 2. 7, but ol K6peiot, iii. 2. 17, means Gy- rus''s barbarian troops, and rb Kt- petop στρατ6τ€δορ, means Gyruses camp or quarters, i. 10. 1. Kvpios, a, 01» [/cCpos, rrf, might, power], having pmoer or author- ity, Lat. potens, of persons, with inf., as ούκ liaeaOe κύριοι άνέλέσθαι ΊΓ6\€μορ, you will not have it in your power to make war, v. 7. 27. Κνρος, ό [Vers. Kurash], Cyrus, called ό άρχαΐοί, the Ancient or the Elder, i. 9. 1, Cyrus the Great, the founder of the Persian monarchy. According to Xen. and Hdt., he was the son of Cambyses, a Per- sian noble, and Mandane, daughter of A sty ages, king of Media, whom he overthrew and succeeded, reign- ing from 560-529 n.c. But mod- ern investigations have shown that Ctesias (see Κτησία$) was right in stating that Cyrus was not related to Astyages. He was in reality of pure Persian stock, the descend- ant of Achaemenes in the fifth generation — Hakhaminis, Ksha'- ispis, Kurash I., Kambudshia (Cambyses I.), Kurash II. (Cy- rus). His ancestors, of Iranian stock like the Medes, coming from Parsua in the north, had gradu- ally moved down towards the Me- dian empire, and Cyrus, becoming king of Anshan (Anzan) in 558 b.c, carried on an active war against Astyages, king of Media, until, in 549 B.C. the latter' s army revolted, and Astyages and his capital, Ec- batana, fell into the enemy's hands. Cyrus enlarged the Median em- pire by the conquest of the Lydian kingdom of Croesus. The capture of Babylon in 538, followed by the extension of his domains to the borders of India, made him the monarch of the entire East. He was succeeded in 529 by his son Cambyses II., the invader of Egypt. Xenophon's work called the Cyropaedia is not a real his- tory, but an historical romance in which Cyrus is presented as the highest type of a ruler. Kvpos, ό [Persian Kurash] , Cyrus the Younger, whose ill-fated expe- dition is described in the Anabasis. He was the son of Darius Nothus and Parysatis, i. 1. 1, and was born after his father's accession (425 b.c.) ΚντΟΜ4ΐν-λ«.γ46« 128 129 λα9€ΐν-λαμβ&ν» to the throne of Persia. Τη 407 b.c. he was made by his father satrap of Lydia, Fhrygia the Greater, arid Cappadocia, and military comman- der of all Asia Minor west of the Halys, i. i. 2, 9. 7. In this position he aided the Lacedaemonians in the Peloponnesian war, iii. i. 5, having indeed received special or- ders from his father to this effect. He became the warm friend of Lysander, and on being summoned to the deathbed of Darius in 405 B.C., i. I. 2, he turned over to the Spartan admiral the money which he had in hand and his en- tire revenue from the satrapy. This timely aid to the Spartans did much to hasten the end of the war. There is little doubt that it was rendered by Cyrus with the hope of enlisting the sympathy of Sparta in his design to obtain the throne of Persia. As the son born in the purple (Artaxerxes Mnemon having been bom before his fath- er's accession), he hoped to be ap- pointed his father's successor, but on the death of Darius he was disappointed, and his elder brother succeeded, i. i. 3. Upon this, Tissaphemes, satrap of Caria, who had been obliged to follow Cyrus to Babylon, i. i. 2, accused him of plotting the murder of Artaxerxes, i. 1.3, and it was only the inter- vention of Parysatis, i. i. 3, 4, that saved Cyrus's life. He returned to his satrapy, vowing vengeance, i t. 4, and from that time made his preparations to dethrone his brother. These and the expedition which followed are described in the first book of the Anabasis. Cyrus set out from Sardis in the spring of 401 b.c., i. 2. δ, and was slain in a hand to hand encounter with his brother at the battle of Cunaxa some six months later, i. 8. 26 ff. A sketch of his character is given, i. 9. The royal line of which he came ran thus : Hakha- minis (Achaemenes), Ksha'ispis, Ariaramna (brother of Kunisli I., who was grandfather of Cyrus the Great), Arsama, Hystaspes, Da- rius I., Xerxes, Artaxerxes I., Da- rius U. (Nothus) , Cyrus. ( Cf. with this the genealogy of Cyrus the Great, whose son Cainbyses was succeeded by Darius I.) Κυτββνιον, TO, see Κίρτωνόν, κύ«ν, Kvvos, ό, ij [cf. Lat. cams, dog, Eng. hound, c/nic, cynos-ure], dog, bitch, hound, cur, iii. 2. 35, v. 7. 20, 8. 24, vi. 2. 2, vii. 2. 33. κωλύω, κωλύσω, etc., hinder, keep from, prevent, oppose, check, Lat. impedid, abs. or with ace, i. 2. 21, ii. 4. 6, iii. 5. 12, iv. 2. 24, 25, v. 4. 5 ; with inf., or ace. of pers. and inf., i. 3. 16, ii. 5. 7, iv. 3. 3, v. 7. 10, vii. 3. 3 ; with τον and inf., i. 6. 2. Phrases: τό κωλίΗ>ν, the obstacle, iv. 5. 20, 7. 4; κω\ϋοντ€$ μηδαμ^ ημαί τορίζίσθαι, preventing us from getting supplies anywhere, vii. 6. 29. κωμάρχηι, οι; [κιΐμ,αι -f- &ρχω] , village chief, head man of a vil- lage, chief, iv. 5. 10, 24, 29, 6. 1. κώμη, η$ [κ€ίμ<Η], Village, ham- let, unfortihed, opp. to a walled city, Lat. ulcus, i. 4. 9, 10. 11, ii. 2. 15, iii. 2. 34, iv. 4. 2, vi. 4. 6, vii. 4. 11. κωμήτηβ, ου [κ€ΐμαι], villager, Lat. uicdnus, iv. 5. 24. κώιπ|, ψ, handle, esp. of an oar, hence oar, Lat. remus; κώ~ wais, by rowing^ vi. 4. 2, see s,v. τριήρψ. Xapftv, see \αιφάνω, λαγχάνβ» (λοχ-), Xi}foMai, Ao- χον, €(\ηχα, €ί\ηyμaι, 4\ήχθημ, get by lot, get, obtain, be possessed of, hold, with ace. or gen., iii. i. U, iV. 5-24. λαγώ«, 6, hare, Lat. lepus, iv. ς. 24. ^ » 3 XaOctv, see \ανθάνω. λάθρ-//7e], «ione, Lat. faj?te, iii. 5. 10, iv. 7. 25, as a substance, iii. 4. 10, as used in attack or defence, i. 5. 12, iv. 2. 4. The use of stones as an instrument of warfare was com- mon in later times, and engines for hurling them (called λιθοβόΧοι, Lat. balUstae) were invented and came, ii^to ^extensive use in siege operations. Such artillery was used by Alexander the Great. Earlier, in the time of Xenopbon, stones were thrown either with slings, in which also lead bullets were used, iii. 3. 17, cf. iv. i. 10, or by the hand, v. 2. 14, cf. v. 2. 12. In his time stone- throwers, in the latter sense, had not been developed into a distinct branch of the service, but their usefulness was recog- nised. See further the illustration s.v, ξΙφΟί. λλμήν, ivos, 6 [root λι, poiir, cf Lat. htus, shore, limus, sHme, Eng. lime], harbour, port, Lat, partus, vi. 2. 13, 4. 1, 4, 6. 3. λιμός, d, hunger, famine, dearth, Lat. fames, i. 5. 5, ii. 2. 11, 5. 19, vii. 4. &. λ£νιοι, 5, or, contr. oOj, η, οΰν Ιλίνον, /men, cf. Lat. linum, flax], of flax, flaxen, linen, Lat. lineus, V. 4. 13 ; on the cuirasses of linen, iv. 7. 15, see \€νκοθώραξ. λογ({ομΜ (λο7ΐδ-), λοΎΐοΰμαι, etc. [R. Αίγ], count on, reckon on, take into account, consider, with ace. of thing or inf., ii. 2. 13, iii. i. 20. λόγος, ό [R. λ€γ], word, saying, statement, speech, discourse, pi. words, conversation, Lat. uerbum, oratio, ii. 5. 16, 27, 6. 4, v. 7. 27, vi. I. 18, vii. 7. 24 ; debate, discus- sion, i. 6. 5, iii. 2. 7 ; rumour, story, i. 4. 7, V. 6. 17 ; narrative, ii. i. 1, iv. I. 1. Phrase: els \6yovs iXBeiv with dat. of pers., have an inter- view with one, Lat. in conloquium uenire, ii. 5. 4, iii. i. 29. λόγχη, ψ, spearhead, metal point of the spear or lance (δόρυ), Lat. cuspis, i. 8. 8, vii. 4. 15 ; also the spear itself, lance, in Anab. used of those employed by barbarians, ii. 2. 0, iv. 8. 3, 7, v. 8. 10, but not exclusively, v. 2. 14. The term was sometimes applied also to the metal shoe at the butt end of the spear, iv. 7. 16. For the manner in which the spearhead was supported at the point where it joined the shaft, in the case of the lances of the Mossynoeci, see S.V. σφaιpo€ιδ■ήs. λοι^ορ^ω, λοιδορήσω, etc. [λοίδο- pof, abusive], revile, abuse, rebuke, iii. 4. 49, vii. 5. 11. λοιιτός, ή, 6v [Xe/rw], tohat is leβ, remaining, Lat. reliquus, with the art., the rest, of persons and things, iv. 2. 14, 3. 13, 30, v. i. 2, vi. 4. 26 ; of time and space, iii. 4. 6, iv. 7. 6; λοιιτόν {sc. έστι), with dat. of pers. and inf., it remains that, iii. 2. 29. Phrases : rb λοιπόν, of time, from now on or from then on, henceforth, thenceforth, for the future, Lat. dehinc, posthdc, ii. 2. 5, iii. 2. 8, V. I. 2, 3. 9 ; του λοιτοΰ, in future, v. 7. 34 ; 6 Xotiros, the survivor, iv. i. 24, vi. 3. 12 ; rifv Xonriiv (ec. 6δ6ν), the rest of the way, iii. 4. 4β. AoKpos, 6, a native of Locris, a Locrian, vii. 4. 18. The Locrians were divided into three tribes, the Epicnemidian, who occupied a 133 Αουσι<1τη9-Αύκ»ον promontory extending into the Malian gulf, the Opuntian, who lived east of them on the Euboean Sea, whose chief town was Opus, and the Ozolian, upon the gulf of Corinth, east of Aetolia, whose chief town was Amphissa. The third division was separated from the other two by Phocis. Αονσ-ιατης, ου, and Αουο -uvs, 4ωs, 6 ΙΑουσοί, Lusi], a Lusian, a native of Lusi, a small city in the northern part of Arcadia, iv. 2. 21, 7. 11, 12, vii. 6. 40. (Sudhena.) λόφος, ό, ridge or crest of any- thing, esp. of rising ground, hill, ridge, height, Lat. dorsum, i. 10. 12, iii. 4. 24, iv. 2. 10, 8. 26, vi. 3.3. λοχάγ^ω [R. λ€χ-ΗΗ. αγ], be captain, vi. i . 30. λόχάγίά, άί [R. λ€χ-^-R. ογ], office of captain, captaincy, i. 4. 15, iii. I. 30. λοχαγός, ό [R. λ€χ-i-R. αγ], commander of a λόχο?, captain, Lat. centurid, i. 7. 2, ii. 5. 25, iii. I. 15, 32, 4. 21, iv. 3. 17, 26, 7. 8, V. 2. 13, vi. 4. 10, vii. 4. 18 ; he re- ceived twice the wages of a pri- vate, vii. 2. 36. Above him were the arparrfyoi and ταξίαρχοι, below him the ύΐΓθλόχά7οι, ΊΓ€vτηκovτηp€S, and ένωμΛτάρχαι. λοχίτης, ου [R. λβχ], one of the same company, comrade, vi. 6. 7, 17. λόχος, 6 [R. λ€χ], ambush, men in ambush, armed men, esp. as a certain part of the army, a com- pany, iv. 2. 16, 7. 9, V. I. 17, vi. 5. 9, vii. 3. 46 ; it consisted generally of about 100 men, Lat. centuria, iii. 4. 21, iv. 8. 15, but might be less, i. 2. 25, and was divided into two 7Γ€ντηκοστύ€% and four ένωμοτίαι. Two λόχοι formed a rd^is, vi. 5. 11. In vi. 3. 2, the word is used of a larger number of troops, division. Phrases: κατά λ6χoυs, by compa- nies, i.e. with the fou^ ένωμοτίαι in file one behind the other, iii. 4. 22; opeiois Tots λόχοΐί, see 6ρθιο$, iv. 2. 11 ; irapayeiv toos λόχoυs, see τταράΎω, iv. 6. 6. AvSCo, as [^Aΰδόs'], Lydia, i. 2. 5, iii. 5. 15, vii. 8. 20, a fertile country in the western part of Asia Minor, irrigated by the gold-bearing rivers Hermus and Pactolus. Its chief city was Sardis. Under Croesus it was a powerful and prosperous kingdom, but after his defeat by Cyrus the Great, in 546 b.c, it was made a Persian satrapy, i. 9. 7, with the following boundaries, which it retained also under the Romans : on the north Mysia, east Phrygia, south the Maeander, separating it from Caria, and west Ionia. Under the Persians the previous warlike nature of the people was softened into that effeminacy of life for which Lyd- ians were afterwards famous. Αύ8ι.ος, ά, ov [Λϋδ(ίϊ], belonging to Lydia, Lydian, i. 5. 6. Αν8ός, ό, a native of Lydia, a Lydian, iii. i. 31. Ανκαια, τά, the Lycaea, a festi- val in honour of ZeCy Kvkoios, or AUKaios, of Mt. Lycaeus, celebrated in the spring by the Arcadians, i. 2. 10. Αυχάον€ς, ων, ol, natives of Ly- caonia, Lycaonians, iii. 2. 23. AvKoovCo, as [Αυκάονεί], Lycao- nia, a country in the central part of Asia Minor, north of Cilicia, hostile to Persia, i. 2. 19, vii. 8. 25. The chief city was Iconium. AvKciov, TO [cf. Eng. iyceum], the Lyceum, a gymnasium just outside the wall of Athens to the east, and near a temple of Apollo Lycaeus, vii. 8. 1. Its foundation was ascribed by some to Pisistra- tus, by others to Pericles. Lycur- gus embellished it with gardens and a palaestra. Here the Athen- ians exercised under arms before a war, and here was the tribunal of the Polemarch. Aristotle used the gardens for his lectuyes. f1 Αύκα»9-μάγα&ι1 134 135 Μάγνητ««-Μαντιν€5$ Ι|!ί A^Kios, d, LycittSj an Atheniaiif who was appointed to command the cavalry, and distinguished him- self against the Carduchi, iii. 3. 20, iv. 3. 22, 25, 7. 24. A^Kiost 6, Lyciusy a Syracusan, i 10. 14, 15. AUKOf, h [XiJiros], the Lycus or Wolf River, a common name for a powerfully flowing stream. The Lycus of the Anab. emptied into the Fontus near Heraclea, vi. 2. 3. (Kelkit Tchai.) X^icofi 0, [ef. Lat. lupus^ wolf, Eng. wolf], vmlf, sacrificed by the Persians to Ahriman, the prince of darkness, ii. 2. 9. Ανκϋν, wvos, d, LycoUf an Achaean in the Greek army, v. 6. 27, vi. 2. 4, 7, 9. λνμα(νομ(α (λνμαν-), λνμανοΰμαι, έλΰμηνάμην 'Κ€λύμασμαι, έλΰμάνθηρ [λύμη, insuUI, outrage, destroy, muse ruin, spoil, Lat. noced, with ace. of thing and dat. of pers., i. 3. 16. Xvirlfl•, \ϊητή<τω, etc. [Xifriy], grieve, pain, vex, Lat. dolore αΰβ- cid, vii. 7. 12 ; of an enemy, annoy, molest^ trouble, Lat. laeclv, ii. 3. 23, 5. 14, V. 2. 26 ; pass., be pained or sad, be sorry, Lat. doled, i. 3. 8, iii. I. 11. λύιπ|, ψ, pain of body or mind, griff, sorrow, Lat. dolor, iii. i. 3. λνΐΓηρ6«, ά, 6v [Xhrri'], painful, distressing, sad, of things, vii. 7. 28; of persons, troublesome, aa- noying, Lat. molestm, with dat, ii. 5. 13. λνσιτιλίω, iKwivrik^ra [λύω+Β. τ»λ], pay expenses, be profitable, pay, Lat. prosum, with dat of per»., iii. 4. 36. (See λύω, fin.) λύττα, ψ, madness, Lat. ra6ie«, of dogs, V. 7. 26. λ4β>| Χύσω, ΙίλΪΜτα, Χίλυκα, Χέλυμαι, iXuStiif [cf Lat. luo, loose, solud, loose, Eng. lose, loose, louse, ana-fyse}, loose, set free, unbind, release, Lat. soluo, iii. 4. 35, iv. 3. 8, 6. 2 ; dissolve, separate, hence of a bridge or obstruction, break down, remove, Lat. rescindd, ii. 4. 17, iv. 2. 26 ; of a truce or oaths, break, Lat. foedera rumpo, ii. 5. 38, iii. 2. 10; mid., redeem, ran- som, vii. 8. 6. Phrase : ούκ έδ6κ€ΐ Xikiv αύτούί wktos Topeueadat, they thought marching by night didnH pay, iii. 4. 36, where Xteiv is used as in poetry for XuffireXeiv, which some read here. λωτοφάγοίι ol [Xbtros, 6, lotus •\- ίφα'γον}, lotus-eaters, iii. 2. 25. The lotus-tree (rliamnus lotus of Lin- naeus), growing on the north coast of Africa, bears a fruit shaped like an oUve, and sweet, like a date or fig. The lotus-eaters lived along the coast of Tunis and Tripoli, where the fruit is still used and is called jujube. According to the story, first appearing in Odyssey 9, 82 ff., whoever ate the lotus lost all recollection of his home. λ»φά«>ι Χωφ-ίισω, έΧώφησα, ΧεΧώ- φηκα, slacken, rest, cease, of the throwing of stones, abs., iv. 7. 6. λφων, λφον, gen. ovos, preferable, used as comp. of aya06s, better, in the sense of pleasanter, more agreeable, in Att prose generally in neut with εστί, followed by inf. or dat and inf., iii. i. 7, vi. 2. 15, vii. 6. 44. μά, intensive particle, surely, used in oaths, and foil, by ace, always neg. unless preceded by ra(, as dXXd μά robs Btous, no, by the gods! i. 4. 8, cf. v. 8. 21, vii. 6. 11 ; mi /ϋΐά Δία, yea, by Zeus I v. 8. 6, vii. 6. 21. 1&άγα8ι$, (8os, 1^, dat. μα^άίΐ, ma- gadis, a musical instrument, prob. of Lydian origin, said to have been one of the most perfect stringed instruments in use among the Greeks. It comprised two full oc- taves, the left hand playing the lower notes, the right the upper. Hence, οϊον μαΎάδϊ, as on the maga- dis, i.e. in the octave, vii. 3. 32. Μάγνητ€5, ων, ol [cf. Eng. mag- net, magnesia'], Magnesians, na- tives of Magnesia, vi. i. 7, a penin- sula in Thessaly between the Pe- gasaean Gulf and the Aegean. udOc, μάθης, μάΟ<Η, see μανθάνω. MaCavSpos, ό [c/. Eng. meander^, the Maeander, a large river rising near Celaenae, i. 2. 7, and flowmg thence through Phrygia and be- tween Lydia and Caria into the Aegean, i. 2. 5, 8. Its winding course was proverbial among the Greeks and Romans, hence Eng. meander. (Boyiik or Mendere Tchai.) μαίνομαι (μαν-), μανοΰμαι, μέμηρα, έμάνην [R. μα], rage, be raving or mad, Lat. furo, ii. 5. 12, iv. 8. 20, vii. I. 29 ; aor., go mad, ii. 5. 10. Μαισά8η$ι ου, Maesades, father of Seuthes, vii. 2. 32, 5. 1. μακαρίζω (μακαριδ-), έμακάρισα, ίμακαρίσθην [R. μακ], regard as happy, think fortunate, iii. i. 19. μακαριστό?, ή, 6v [R. μακ], to be thouffht happy, hence enviable, Lat inuididiius. Phrase : iroXXoh μακα- purrhv έττοίησ^ν, he made him an object of envy to many, i. 9• β• Μακίσ-τιος, ό [Μάκιστο?, Mads- ίί /s], a Macistian, a native of Ma- cistus, a city in southern Elis, vii. 4. 16 (Samikon). μακρός, ά, 6v [R. μακ], long, of space and time, Lat. longus, i. 5. 7, ii. 2. 12, iv. 3. 4, vi. 4. 2. Phrases: μακράν (sc. 6δ6ν), a long way or distance, iii. 4-17, cf μακρο- τέραν, ii. 2. 11, μακροτάτην, vii. 8. 20 ; μακρά, irXoia, men-of-war, Lat. ndues longae, v. i. 11 ; μακρόν ή ν with inf., it was too far to, Lat. longum erat, iii. 4• 42 ; μακρ&τερον, adv., further, at longer range, iii. 4. 16. MdKpMvcs, ων, oi, the Macrones, Macronians, a free and warlike people on the coast of the Pon- tes, south of Trapezus, iv. 7. 27, 8. 1 ff., V. 5. 18. . ^ Γ ^ μάλα, by elision μαΧ, adv. icf. Lat. melior, better'], very, exceed- ingly, much, Lat. ualde, i. 5. 8, iii. 3. 6, 4. 15, iv. 1.23, V.4. 18, vi.4. 26, vii. I. 39;.o«J μάΧα, not very much, litotes for not at all, ii. 6. 15; αύτίκα μΛΧα, on the spot, in- stantly, at once, iii. 5. 11, vi• 2. 5; €5 μάΧα, very easily, vi. 1. 1 ; μάΧα Katpoi έστιν, ifs just the chance, iv. 6. 15 ; comp. μαΧΧον, more, rather, better, more surely, more highly, i. I. 4, 5, 7. 19, u. 1. 18, 5. 13, iij. I. 35, V. 7. 9, vi. 1. 17 ; μαΧΧον η, rather than, L&t.potius quam, i. i. 8, iv. 6. 11, V. 8. 20 ; ουδέν μαΧΧον, not a bit more (than before), iii. 3. 11 ; μαΧΧδν τι, rather more, iv. 8. 26; sup. μάΧιστα, most, espe- cially, generally, most highly, i. 6. 5, 9. 22, ii. 2. 2, iii. 2. 5, iv. 6. 16, vii. 2. 4 ; with numerals, about, v. 4. 12, vi. 4. 3 ; (Js μάΧιστα with or without έδύνατο, or ^ έδύνατο μά- Χιστα, as much as possible, Lat. quam mdxime potuit, i. 1.6, 3. 15, iv. 2. 2 ; ώ$ τ IS καΐ Αλλο$ μάλιστα άνθρώττων, as well as any other man alive, i. 3. 15. μαλακίζομαι (μαΧακιδ-), ίμαλα- κισάμην and έμαΧακΙσθην ΙμαΧακ6$, 8οβ, cf Eng. amalgam], be soft- ened or effeminate, be weakly or indolent, v. 8. 14. μανέντ€$, see μαίνομαι. μανθάνω (^μαθ-), μαθήσομΛΐ, ίμα- θον, μεμάθηκα [11. μα], learn, esp. by inquiry, find out, hear of, under- stand, with ace. or inf., i. 9. 4, ii. 5. 37, iii. 2. 25, v. 2. 25; with 6rt or an interr. clause, ii. 5. 16, iv. 8.5. μαντ€ίο, OS [R. μα], prophetic announcement, prediction, oracle, Lat. ordcvlum, iii. i. 7. μαντ€ντός, ή, 6v [R. μα], directed or advised by an oracle, vi. i. 22. MavTivcis, ων, ol, Mantineans, natives of Mantinea, vi. i. U, ore of the oldest cities of Arcadia, in |λ4νηι-|λ4χαλ^ 136 137 |λαχα(ριον-μ^ι.μνο$ 1 if the eastern part, on the streamlet Ophis. Its situation on a low pass between Arcadia and Argos made it a centre of traffic, and it was an important military position. Here were fought two great battles, in 418 and in 362 b.c. In the latter Epaminondas of Thebes conquered the Spartans and Athenians with whom the Martineans were allied. Here fell Gryllus, the son of Xeno- phon. (Falaeopolis.) μάντίΐ, e«f, ό [R. μ«ι ], one in a frenzy or possessed, one inspired, who thus declares the will of the gods, seer, prophet, diviner, sooth- myer, exercising his art by in- specting the vitals of victims, like the haruspex, i. 7. 18, v. 2. 9, 6. 29, vi. 4. 13, vii. 8. 10, or by observing the flight of birds, like the aitgur, vi. I. 23, 5. 2. Sometimes he slew the victims, iv. 3. 18, v. 6. 16, vi. 5. 8. In V. 7. 3δ the μάντ€ΐ^ took charge of purifying the army. M4pS«i or MapWvtoi, ol, the Mardi or Mardonii, a warlike, marauding race who probably lived in the Masius Mts. in southern Armenia, iv. 3. 4. It is thoujiht that both words are adjectives meaning manly. Mapiav6vvoC, ol, the Mariandyni, a race inhabiting the eastern part of what the Romans called Bithy- nia, vi. 2. 1. They were reduced by the Heracleans to the condition • of Helots. μάρο%ΊΤύ9 or μάραηιπΓος, 6 [cf. Eng. marsupial'], pouch, bag, Lat. marsuppium, with gen. of con- tents,, iv. 3. 11. MofMr^os, ου, Marsyas^ a satyr of Phrygia, killed and flayed by Apollo after being beaten in a musical contest, the flute against the lyre, i. 2. 8. From him, ace. to the myth, the river Marsyas was named ; rising in a small lake near Celaenae, called Aulocrene, because about it grew reede suit- able for the mouthpiece of the flute, it emptied into the Maean- der, i. 2. 8. μαρτνρ^ω, μαρτυρήσω, etc. [μάρ- τυς], be a witness, testify, bear wit- ness, Lat. testor, with dat., iii. %, 12, vii. 6. 39. ^ μαρτνριον, τό \^μάρτυ{], evidence, proof, Lat. argumentum, iii. 2. 13. μάρτ«5, υροΓ, ό [c/. Eng. mo/^/r], witness, Lat. testis, vii. 7. 39. Μαρων€(τη$ι ου \Uapuv€ta, Maro- nea], a Mardnite, native of Μ aro- ma, vii. 3. 16, a city in the land of the Cicones, east of Abdera, re- nowned even in Homer's time for its wine. (Marogna.) MacTKos, 5. (Dor. gen.) , 0, Mascas, called a river by Xen., i. 5. 4, but really a canal about Κορσωτ-ή, q.v. μαΐΓΤ€ύ» [R. μα], seek after, search for, abs. or with ace, v. 6. - 25, vii. 3. 11 ; stHve, with inf., iii. J I. 43. Poet, verb, except in Xen. *" > μαβττΐγό», μαστί-γώσω, έμαστί-γω- σα, έμαστΪΎώθην [μάστΐξ], lohip, chastise, Lat. uerbero, iv. 6. 15. μάΐΓτιξ, lyos, η, whip, lash, Lat. flagellnm ; inrb μαστί-γων, under the lash, Lat. flagellis coacti, iii. 4. 25. For an illustration of the μΛστΙζ used as riding whip, see s.v. Ιππό- δρομο% (No. 31). μασ-τ<ί$, b, nipple, breast, of men, Lat. papilla, in pi., i. 4. 17, iv. 3. 6 ; hill, hillock, iv. 2. 6, 18. μάταιοβ, ά, op [μάτη, folly^, foolish, vain, idle, Lat. nanus, of words and deeds, vii. 6. 17, 7. 24. μάχαιρα, as [R. μαχ], sxcord, sabre, cutlass, with straight back No. 48. and curved edge, a Greek weapon, vii. 2. 30, although worn also by the Thracians, vi. i. 5; adapted to ripping, iv. 6. 26; and carried by cavalrymen, cavalry sabre, i. 8. 7 ; in vii. 4. 16, identified with the ii<^os, q.v. μαχαίριον, τό [R. μαχ], dagger, dirk; iv. 7. 16. μάχη, i?s [R. μ«ιχ]ι battle, en- gagement, fight, Lat. pugna, proe- Hum, i. 2. 9, 5. 16, 8. 6, ii. 2. 21, vi. 3. 21 ; place of baUle, battle-, field, ii. 2. 6, v. 5. 4. Phrase: μά-χν 0Ϊ* f^XV vi>io.v, see νικάω, ii. I. 4, 6. 5. μάχιμο$ι ov [R. μαχ], fit to fight; dvbpas μαχίμου$, fighting men, vii. 8. 13. \ μάχομαι, μαχοΰμαι, έμαχ€σάμην, ^^ιεμάχημαί [R. μαχ], fight, give battle, fight with or against, Lat. pugnd, or proelium committd, abs. or with dat. of pers., i. 5. 9, 7. 1, 17, 8. 23, ii. i. 4, 4. 6, iii. 4. 33, iv. 1.19, V. 4. 21, 5. 13, vi. 3. 6; very rarely with irpos and ace, vii. 8. 19, while σύν with dat. means on the side of, with the aid of, vi. 3. 13 ; in defence of, for or about, is expressed by ιητέρ and gen. of pers., or irepl or wpo and gen. of thing, i. 9. 31, ii. I. 12, vi. i. 8 ; wrangle, quarrel, iv. 5. 12. Si, μο£, μον, see ^ώ. ΐ€γάβυζο5, ό, Megabyzus, the official name of the keeper or sex- ton of the temple of Ephesian Ar- temis, always a eunuch, v. 3. 6, 7. μΓγάλην, see μέ-γαί. μ.^ydKr\yopiωf έμ^ΎαληΎόρησα [R. μακ -I- άγβίρω], talk big, boast, brag, Lat. glorior, vi. 3. 18. p^YoXoirpctr&s, adv. [R. μακ -f Ίτρέιτω], in magnificent style, mu- nificently, splendidly, in a princely manner, Lat. magnifice, i. 4• 17, vii. 6. 3 ; sup. μ^'^αΧονρ^νέστατα, vii. 3. 19. μιγάλωβ, adv. [R. μακ], greatly, exceedingly, grossly, Lat. mdgno- pere, iii. 2. 22. M€7apcvs, ^ws, 6 [JΛέyapa, Me- qara], a Megarian, native of Me- gara, i. 2. 3, 4. 7, the capital of Megaris. This sute lay between Attica and Corinth, and was long the commercial rival of the latter, founding many colonies, such as Chalcedon, Byzantium, and Hera- clea, vi. 2. 1. Its prosperity was destroyed when at its greatest height with the loss of Salamis, 598 B.C. It was always the enemy of Athens, but was esp. hostile in the Peloponnesian war. μ^γαβ, μηάΧη, μ^α [R. μακ], great in its widest sense, Lat. magnus, comp. μ£ί^ων, sup. μέη^ι- [c/• La*• modius, com measure}, medimnusy the largest 1 fj piC-MiXivo^YOi 138 Ι Mi Attic dry measure, containing 52.53 liters, 47.7+ quarts, U.S. dry meas- ure, or about a bushel and a half, vi. I. 15, 2. 3. See s.v. χοΐηξ. |Μ0•, by elision and euphony for μετά, ^ Ιϋβίημι pi7M*], let go, give up, Lat. aimittdj vii. 4. 10. μ«9(οΎημι [R. «rrm], set in a dif- ferent place, remove; aor. mid., make go aside, set apart, il. 3. 8 ; 2 aor. act., go aside, stand apart, ii. 3. 2L Methydrium], a Methijdrian, native of Methydrium, iv. i. 27, 6. 20, 7. 9, a little town in central Arcadia, between the rivers Maloetas and Mylaon, whence its name. On the founding of Megalopolis the inhab- itants of Methydrium were trans- ferred thither, and it lost all im- portance. (Near Nemnitza.) |M9iM lM»v, wine, cf Eng. MEAD], be in wine, be drunk, Lat. ebrius sum, iv. 8. 20, v. 8. 4, vii. 2 35. ' > J IuCImv, comp. of /t^as, q.v. fUiXCxiot, o, or [cf. μεΙΧιχοί, «οΛ gentle], mild, gracious, mer- ciful, an epithet of Zeiis {q,v,), whose favour was to be won with propitiatory sacrifices. The great- est of the festivals in honour of Ztin UeiKlxun was the Diasia, cele- brated at Athens by all the people in the month of February with bloodless offerings. But bloody sacrifices, such as swine, might also be offered to Zeus under this title. These were then burnt whole, vii 8. 4, 5. see μίνια. μιϊον, as adv., see μχίων, |Μΐρ4κιον, TO [μχΐραξ, lass], lad, hoy, youths from 14 to 20 years, ii. 6. 16, 28. pMtmiM, Λτοϊ, t6 Ιμ€ΐ6ω, make smaller, μ(1ων], curtailment, defi- ciency, shortage, of money, v. 8. 1. fiiCiiv, ow, used as comp. of puKpot, small, little [cf. Lat. minuO, dimin- ish, minor, less, Eng. mio-cene], smaller, lesser, weaker, fewer, i. 9. 10, iv. $. 36; μχΐον, adv. less, of force, distance and number, Ii. 4, 10, V. 4. 31 ; so μ£Ϊον ij, less than, or without ij and followed by gen., iii. I. 2, V. 4. 19, vi. 4. 3, vii. 7. 24. l*hrase: μ£Ϊον ^χ€ΐν, be worse off, iii. 2. 17, get the worst of it, in a battle, i. 10. 8, iii. 4. 18. McXavSirai, ών, Afelanditae, a tribe in European Thrace, men- tioned only in Anab., vii. 2. 32. fuXavCa, as [μέλά$], blackness, i. 0. 8. μΑοβ, μέλαινα, μέΧαν, gen. μ^λα- ws, etc. Icf. Lat. malus, evil, Eng. calo-me/, me/an -choly], black, dark, Lat. niger, iv. 5. 13, 15. \Uktif μ€\ήσ€ΐ, έμέλησβ, μεμ4\ηκ€ [R. |Μλ], impers., it is a care, it concerns, with dat. of pers. and Swm with fut. indie, or with opt., often best translated personally as έμοί μ£\ήσ€ΐ, I will take care or see to it, i. 4. 16, cf 8. 13, vii. 7. 44. Phrases: τ^ θ€ψ μεΧήσ^, euphem- istically, the goddess will punish, V. 3. 13 ; διά τό μέΧ€ΐν Λτάσιρ, as it was a matter of general interest, vi. 4. 20. (In poetry the above tenses are used personally, as well as -μεμίΧημαι, 4μ€Χή0ην.) |ifXfTd«», μ^Χίτ-ήσω, έμχΧέτησα, μχ- μχΧέτηκα [R. μίλ], attend to, prac- tise, Lat. me exerced in, with inf., in. 4. 17, IV. 6. 14. μίλιτηρόβ, ά, 6p [R. μιλ], prac- tising diligently, well exercised or trained, Lat. exercitatus, witli gen., i. 9• δ. ί"λ£νη, η$ [cf. Lat. milium, mil- let], millet, a kind of grain (see K^yxpos), sing, or pi., i. 2. 22, 5. 10, vi. 4. 6, 6. 1 ; also in pi., millet fields, ii. 4, 13. Μιλινοφάγοι, ol [μΐΧΙ^η -f ^^o- yov], Melinophagi, a Thracian tribe, living between Byzantium and Salmydessus, where the peo- ple still eat millet, vii. 5. 12. 139 |ΐ€λλω-μ^ρο$ μίλλω, μίΧΧήσω, έμ^ΧΧησα [R. |uX], be about to, be on the point of an action, be going to do anything, be likely, with pres. or fut. inf., serving like the Lat. periphrastic conjugation to denote simple fu- turity (when the word means shall, will, should, would, etc.) or pur- pose or wish, i. 8. 1, 9. 28, ii. i. 3, 4. 24, iii. 1.8, iv. 7.10, V. 4.20, vi. 4. 18, vii. 7. 40; delay, abs., iii. i. 40, 47 ; intend, purpose, with ace, ii. 5. 5. Phrase: τό μέΧΧον, the future, vi. i. 21. μιμνηο, μέμνηο-αι, μ€μνήσ€σθΜ, etc., see μιμν^σκω. μέμφομαι, μ^μψομαι, έμ^μψάμην and έμέμφθην, find fault loith, blame, Lat. reprehendo, of persons and things, ii. 6. 30, vii. 6. 39. μίν, post-positive particle (never used as a conj. to connect words or sentences), used to distinguish the word or clause with which it stands from something that is to follow, and commonly answered by 84, when it may be rendered by on the one hand, indeed, truly, or left untranslated, but its presence shown by stress of the voice, i. i. 1, 2.4, 6. 6, ii. I. 10, 2. 17, iii. ϊ.3, 19, 43, 2. 2, iv. 4. 3, v. 6. 12, vi. 4. 20, vii. I. 29; but sometimes other words take the place of δ4, as ^ireiTO, μέντοι, και, άλλα, i. 2. 1, 3. 10, ii. I. 13, iii. 2. 8; frequently combined with the art. or other words, as 6 μ4ν . . . 6 δ4, the one ...the other, pi., some . . . others, i. i . 7, 2. 25, 8. 20, ii. 2. 5 ; άλλα μν, but certainly, for a fact, i. 7. 6, vii. 1.9; ού μέν δ-ή, nor yet in truth, i. 9. 13, ii. 2. 3, iii. 2. 14 ; μ^ν δή, in fact, certainly, ii. i. 20, iii. i. 35; with a pers. pron., esp. ^ώ μ4ρ, I for my part, or / at least, i. 9. 28, ii. 5. 25, iii. i. 19, vu. 6. 10. μ^ντοι, adv. and conj. Ιμ4ν•\- τοί], used to strengthen the meaning of an assertion or protestation or to show opposition, really, cer- tainly, in truth, moreover, i. 9. 6, 29, ni. 2. 17, vii. 6. 21 ; yet, still, however, nevertheless, i. 3. 10, 4. 8, 9. 14, ii. 3. 9, 22, iii. i. 5, iv. 6. 16. μένω, μ€νω, e/ictw, μχμένηκα [R. μα], wait, stay, tarry, abide, Lat. maned, i. 2. 6, 21, 3. 11, 5. 13, ii. i. 21,4. 3, iii. I. 7, 3. 12, iv. 2. 6, v. 2. 10, vi. 5. 20, vii. 7. 54 ; be lasting, last, hold good, of a truce, ii. 3. 24 ; wait for, with ace, Lat. exspectd, iv. 4. 20. Μένων, ωροί, &, Menon, a Thes- salian adventurer, one of the com- manders of Cyrus's Greek force. In his youth he was a favourite of Aristippus of Larissa, who gave him the command of the merce- naries whom Menon brought to help Cyrus, ii. 6. 28, i. 2. 6 ; he was employed by Cyrus to escort home the Cilician queen, i. 2. 20 ff., and won favour by being the first to cross the Euphrates, i. 4. 13 ff. ; he commanded the left wing at Cunaxa, i. 8. 4. With the other generals he was seized, ii. 5. 31 ff., but not beheaded as they were, but tortured to death, ii. 6. 29. He was probably guilty of treachery towards the Greeks with his friend Ariaeus, ii. 4. 15, 5. 28. An un- favouraljle account of his charac- ter is given in ii. 6. 21 ff. μ€ρ(ζω (μχριδ-), μ^ριω, 4μ4ρισα, μχμέρίσμαι, έμερίσθην [μ^ροί], divide, divide up, v. ι. 9. μέρος, ovs, τό [cf. Lat. mereo, be entitled to], division, part, share, portion, Lat. pars, i. 6. 2, iv. 6. 24, V. 3. 4, vi. 6. 28, vii. 7. 35. Phrases : μέροί τι TTJs εύταξίοίί, a bit OT an instance of their discipline, Lat. disciplinae specimen, i. 5. 8 ; iv τψ μ4ρ€ί, each in turn, i.e. according^ to his place in the ranks, Lat. suo quisque loco et ordine, iii. 4• 23; κατά pipoi, alternately, in reliefs, Lat. per uices, v. i. 9 ; κατά. τό X«- ρισόφου μ4ρο%, in the place of Chiri- sophus, vi. 4. 23; iv τψ μ4ρ€ΐ καΐ χαρά τό μ4ρο^, according to and be- yond one^s share, vii. 6. 36. t Ml (i'l |Μο-ΐ|μβρ(ά-μ«τ(ΐ£(8«»|Μ 140 141 μ€ταμΑ»^|ΐή |Μΐη|μβρ(ά, as [M [R. γνω], change one** fftt'tid, Lat. sententiam muto, ii. 6. 3. |Α€τα$£8Μμν [R. 80], give ainong^ $hare, distribute, give a share or part, Lat. impertio, with dat. of pers. and either gen. of the whole of which a part is given, or ace. of the part given, iii. 3. 1, iv. 5. 5, 6, vii. 8. 11. μιταμ.^» [Η. μ€λ], it is a care afterwards, it makes one sorry, with dat. of pers., best translated personally, / am sori-y, I repent, Lat. paenitet me, i. 6. 7, ii. 6. 9, v. 6. 30; with dat. and partic, as τειθομέροΐί αύτοΓ? ού μεταμ^λήσει, they will not be sorry for obeying, vii. I. 34, cf. vii. i. 5. μεταξύ, adv. [μετά + ξύρ = σύν'\, in the midst, in between, in the phrases: μεταξύ ύπολαβών, inter- rupting him in the midst of his talk, iii. i. 27 ; ov ττολλοΰ χρόνου μεταξύ 'γενομένου, after a short in- teroal, v. 2. 17 ; as prep., between, of place, with gen., Lat. inter, i. 7. 15, iii. 4. 37, v. 4. 22. μ€τάΐΓ€μΐΓΤ05, ov [verbal oi juTa- Ίτέμιτω'], sent for, summoned, i. 4. 3. μ€ταΐΓ^μΐΓω [ττέμνω^, send for 0Γ after ; mid., send for a person or thing to come to oneself, summon, Lat. arcesso, i. 3. 8, 4. 5, iii. i. 4, vii. I. 38 ; with άπό or έκ and gen. of place, and irpos or els with ace. of pers. or place, i. i. 2, 2. 26, vii. I. 3, 20. μ€τα(Γτρ^φω [^στρέφω'], turn a thing round; mid., turn oneself round, turn round, Lat. se con- uerto, vi. i. 8. (ΜτιΙσ-χοι, see μχτέχω. μΐ€ταχωρ^ω [χωρ^ω], go to an- other place, change one^s position, vii. 2. 18. Ι^τ»μι [R. c«r], be among; in prose only impers., μέτεστι, there is a share, so ovdevbs ημΧν μετείη, we had no share, iii. i. 20. |"'»^X" [^• ^^\]i ^^"^^ ^ share of, share, take part in, abs. or with gen., V. 3. 9, vi. 2. 14, vii. 6. 28, 8. 17. Μτέωρος, ov [acCpw], raised up from the ground. Phrase: μετεώρου$ έζεκόμισαν τάί άμ&ξάί, they lifted and carried out the wagons, i. 5. 8. (Μτρ^ω, έμέτρησα, έμετρήθην [μέ- τρον], measure, Lat. metior, iv. 5. 6. μ€τρ(ω$» adv. ^μέτριοί, moderate, μέτρον], in due measure, moder- ately, Lat. moderate, ii. 3. 20. μ^τρον, TO [0/. Lat. metior, meas- ure, Eng. metre, dia-meter, thermo- meter, sym-metry'], measure, dry* and liquid, iii. 2. 21. μ^χρι, adv., up to a place or time, before εls and έττΐ, as far as, even to, up to, Lat. usque ad, v. i. 1, vi. 4. 20; μέχρι ενταύθα, up to that point, V. 5. 4 ; as prep., with gen. of place or time, up to, as far as, until, i. 7. 15, 10. 11, iv. 5. 36, 7. 15, vi. 4. 1, 25; μέχρι ου, down or up to where, until the time when, i. 7. 6, V. 4. 16; as conj., until, Lat. dum, donee, with indie, or Hv with subjv., i. 4. 13, ii. 3. 7, 24, 6. 5, iii. 4• 8, iv. 2. 4, 4. 3, vi. 5. 29. μή, adv., not, used both in inde- pendent and dependent clauses. In independent clauses : in prohi- bitions with pres. imv. or aor. subjv., ii. I. 12, vi. 6. 18, vii. 1.8; with subjv. of exhortation, vii. i. 29; and in the phrase ού μή with subjv. for a strong future, ii. 2. 12, vi. 2. 4, vii. 3. 26. In dependent clauses: after a final conj., as ϊνα, ως, δττω?, i. 4. 18, ii. 4. 17, iii. I. 18, 47, 2. 27 ; with verbs and parties, forming protases, ii. i. 4, 3. 5, iv. 2. 17, V. 3. 1, vi. 4. 9, 19, vii. 2. 33, 8. 2 ; with a partic. equivalent to a rel. clause, iv. 4. 15 ; with inf., ii. 3. 10, iii. 4. 21, 5. 11, iv. 3. 28, vi. 4. 24, vii. 6. 22 ; Μ ού and inf., ii. 3. 11, iii. I. 13 ; after verbs and expres- sions of fear, caution, or danger, lest, that, Lat. ne, with subjv. or opt., i. 3. 10, 17, ID. 9, ii. 3. 9, Iii. I. 5, 2. 25, iv. I. 6, 2. 13, 15, v. 6. 17, vi. I. 28, vii. 7. 31, Μ ού, that not, i. 7. 7, iii. i. 12. Phrases: el μή, except, ii. 1. 12 ; el 6i μή, other- wise, ii. 2. 1, iv. 7. 20, vii. i. 31. The compounds of μή follow the usage of the simple word. μΐ]Ια|ΐη>|&ΐ|ρ^ 142 143 μήτ€-μισ0ο8οτΙβ» RWti a [μισθός + Έ,. δο], pay wages, employ, with dat. of pers., vii. I. 13. ftettS&i im-|nn||itte» 144 I μκΗ)οΐΜ}τη$, ot; [μισθοί -^ R. 80], one who pays wages, employer, with dat of pers., i. 3. 9. luirOds, δ [γ/. Eng. meed], wjagree, pay, esp. of soldiers, Lat. stipen- dium, i. I. 10, 2. 11, v. 6. 31, vii. 5. β. Cyrus at first paid his Greek troops one daric monthly, but af- terwards increased it one-half, i. 3. 21. The usual pay was a daric for a private, two for a captain, and four for a general, vii. 6. 1, 7. From this sum the soldier provided not only his arms and clothes, but also his daily rations, since among the Greeks there was no commissa- riat in the modern sense, but each soldier bought his own provisions. |*ΜΤ«οφορ4 as [μισθοί -hU.^p], receipt of toages, wages received, pay, of soldiers, v. 6. 23, 35, vi. i. 10, vii. I, 3. |ΙΜΓ•θφ<ίρθ5, σρ [μισθοί + R. φιρ], receiving pay; subst., ol μισθοφό- ροι, mercenary troops, mercenaries, Lat. mercennarii, i. 4, 3. iv. 1 4 vii. 8. Ιδ. ^ * "^ ' futrOo», μισθώσω, etc. [μισθοί!, let out for hire; mid., came to let out for hire, hire, Lat, conduco, vi. 4. 1•^, vn. 7. 34 ; pass., be hired, be paid,^ 1. 3. 1. ttw, as, mina, the next to the highest denomination in Greek sil- ver money, although never actu- ally minted as a coin, the one- sixtieth of the talent, or a hundred drachmas. (See raXavroy.) The Attic table of money ie as follows : — The Attic drachma had 4.336 grams or 67.370 grains of pure silver. As the U.fci. silver dollar has 371.25 grains of pure silver, the drachma would be worth about 18 cents (legal value). The talent (6000 drachmas) would be worth about $1080, the mina |;18.00, and the obol 3 cents. Many Greek states used the Aeginetan (or commercial) stand- ard, with silver coins more than one-third heavier than the Attic. The Persians had a silver talent and a mina a little more than one- fourth heavier than the Attic, the σίy\os (q.v.) representing the drach- ma. (See note on i. 5. 0.) The ratio of value of silver to gold is established by law in the U. S. at about 1 : 10. In Xeno- phon's time it was estimated at 1 : 10. On this account the silver m an Attic drachma is worth less now than it would have been then. See dapciKOs. Attic currency was silver. The highest denomination actually coined was the ten-drachma piece. The commonest coin was the four- drachma piece. The accompanying άβολόί 600 30000 _- δραχμή 100 0000 μν& 00 rdXavrop K0.44. That is, obols equalled 1 drach- ma, 100 drachmas equajled 1 mina, 60 mmas equaUed 1 talent illustration is an enlarged repre- sentation of the drachma, the ob- verse showing the helmeted head of Athena, the reverse the owl and olive branch and an inscription containing the first three letters of the name of Athens, ΑΘΕΝΑΓ. μνημ€ίον, τό [Κ. μα], remem- brance, memorial, monument, Lat. monumentum, iii 2. 13, 145 μνήμιη-Μνσάβ μνήμη, ψ [R. μα], remembrance, memory, Lat. memoria, vi. 5. 24. μvημovcvω, μνημονΐύσω, έμνημΜ- ν€υσα, -€μνημόν€υκα, έμνημον€ύθην [11. μα], recall, recollect, Lat. recor- dor, iv. 3. 2. μνημονικός, ή, 6v [R. μα], having a good memory, in sup., vii. 6. 38. μνησΟ^, see μιμιη^σκω. μνησ-ικακέω, μνησικακήσω, έμνησι- κάκησα [U. μα -f'cafcoj], remember wrongs received, bear a gi^idge, with dat. of pers. and gen. of cause, ii. 4. 1. μόλι$, adv., ΐΓΐίΛ difficulty, hardly, only just, Lat. uix, iii. 4. 48, iv. 8. 28, V. 2. 27, 4. 25, 8. 14, vii. 8. 18 ; μάλα μόΧΐί, with extreme difficulty, vii. I. 39. μολυβδίς, ίδθ5, η [μάΧνβδοί'], leaden ball, bullet, Lat. glansplum- bea, used in slings. Hi. 3. 17. μόλυβδος, 6 [c/. Lat. plumbum, lead], lead, iii. 4-17. μόλωσ-ιν, see βΧώσκω. μοναρχία, as [μόνοί + &PX«]» rule of one; of a general, command in chief, vi. I. 31. μονάχη, adv. [μοναχοί, single, solitary, μόνοί], in a single way, alone, only; Jircp μαναχν^ where alone, iv. 4. 18. μονή, ^5 [R. μα], a tarrying, stay, halt, V. 1.5, 6.22, 27. μονόξνλος, ov [μ4νοί -f ξύΧον^, made of one log, of canoes, v. 4. 11. μόνος, η, ov [cf. Eng. monk, min- ster, monastery, monad, and mono- in mono-logue, mono-gram, etc.], alone, left alone, by oneself, Lat. solus, iii. 1. 2, V. 2. 26, 4. 34 ; alone, only, sole, i. 4. 15, ii. i. 12, iii. i. 41, iv. 6. 3, vi. 3. 5, vii. 7. 50 ; alone among or of, with gen., ii. 3. 19, v. 7. 30 ; neut. as adv., μόνον, alone, only, solely, ii. 5. 14, iii. 2. 19, v. 2. 15, 7. 10. μόσ-οτνν, ννοί, dat. pi. μοσσύνοΐί, ό, wooden tower, v. 4. 26. Μοσσύνοικοι, ol [μόσσΰν -f R" FtK], the Mossynoeci (dwellers in wooden towers'), a rude and barbar- ous but warlike race, living along the Euxine west of Trapezus, v. 4. 2, 8, 15, 5. 1. Their manners and customs are described in Anab. V. 4. μόσ-χ€ΐος, ov [μδσχοί, 6, calf], of a calf, Lat. uitulinus ; κρέα μ/>σχ€ΐα, veal, iv. 5. 31. μοχθέω, μοχθήσω, έμόχθησα [μ^χ- θοί, ό, toil], be burdened, labour, toil, Lat. laboro, with irepi and ace, vi. 6. 31. μοχλός, ό, bar of a gate or door, Lat. sera. The gates of a Greek town were double and opened in- ward. When closed they were barred on the inside by a timber (μοχΧόί) which crossed them at the centre and fitted into the posts on each side. A hollow bolt, which could be removed only with a key, was then shot through a hole in the post and in the end of the bar. vii. 1. 12, 15. δύζω, suck, abs., iv. 5. 27. Ινρίανδος, η, Myriandus, a city in Syria on the gulf of Issus, near the later Alexandria, i. 4. 6. (Is- kanderun.) μνριάς, άδοί, ή [μϋρίοί, cf. Eng. myriad], the number ten thousand, myriad, i. 4. 6, 7. 12, v. 6. 9. μύριοι, see μϋρίοί. μνρίος, ο, ov, countless, unnum- bered, vii. I. 30; pi. μύριοι, at, a, as atlefinite number, ten thousand, being the largest Greek number expressed by one word, Lat. decem milia, i. i. 9, 2. 9, ii. 1. 19, iii. 2. 18, V. 7. 9, vii. 3. 48 ; so in sing, with a collective subst., i. 7. 10. μνρον, TO, sweet-smelling oil, iv. 4. 13. Μνσίά, OS [M6<5τη8, 0U [μισθός + Ji. 8ο], one who pmjs wages, employer, with (lat. of pers., i. 3. 9. μΐΙΓβ(ί$, ό [γ/. KllJ^r. MEEI»], luaffes, pwj, esp. of soldiers, Lat. stlpen- (Hum, I I. 10, 2. 11, V. 6. .Jl, vii. 5. δ. Cyrus at iirst i>aitl his Greiic troops one daric montlily, but af- terwartis increased it one-half, i. 3. 21. The usual pay was a daric for a private, two for a captain, and four for a general, vii. 6. 1, 7. From this sum the soldier provided not only Ids arms and clothes, but also Ids daily rations, since among the Greeks there was no commissa'^ riat in the modern sense, but each soUher bou^dit his own provisions. μισθοφορά, as [μκτθόί-^ΪΙ. φ€ρ], receipt of warfes, xmrfes rerdcnL pay, of soldiers, v. 6.*2:ϊ, ΰό, vi. i. 10, vii. 1.3. μιο-θοφόρος, ov [μισθό$ + R. φι©]^ recemng pwj ; subst., ol ιησθοφό^ pot, mercenary troops, mercenaries, Lat. mercennarii, i. 4. 3, iv. 1 4 vn. S. 15. μισ^όω, μισθώσω, etc. [μίσχοι], let out for hire; mid., came to let out for hire, hirr, Lat. cowlilnj, vi. 4. 13, vii. 7. ;)4 ; i)ass., be hired, be paid,^ I. 3. 1. |Ava, as, mina, the next to the highest denomination in Grtek sil- ver money, although never actu- ally minted as a coin, the one- sixtieth of th(^ talent, or a hundreii drachmas. (See raXaurov.) The Attic table of money is as follows : — Tlie Attic drachma had 4.336 grains or 07.370 grains of pure silver. As the U.S. silver dollar has 371.20 grains of pure silver, the drachma would be worth about 18 cents (legal value). 'Ihe talent (O(M)O drachmas) would be Avorth about §1080, the mina .«?18.00, and the obol 3 cents. Many Greek states used the Aeginetau (or commercial) stand- ard, with silver coins more than one-third lieavier than the Attic. The Persians had a .silver talent and a mina a little more tlian one- fourth heavier than the Attic, the σίy\m{q.ι\) reprtsenting the drach- ma. (See note on i. 5. 0.) The ratio of value of silver to gold is establisluHl by law in the U. S. at about 1 : 10. la Xeno- phOE's time it was estimated at 1 : 10. On this account the silver in an Attic drachma is worth less now tjian it would have been then. See δάρ€ΐκ6ί. Attic currency was silver. The highest denomination actually coined was the ten-drachma piece. Tlie commonest coin was the four- drachma piece. The accompanying όβολόί 600 36000 δραχμή 100 0000 μρα 00 τάλαντο ι» No. 44. That is, 6 obols equalled 1 dracli- ma, 100 tlraclimas equalled 1 mina. 60 uunas equalled 1 talent. ilhLstration is an enlarged repre- sentation (tf the drachma, the ob- verse showing the helmeted lieax^«> [νανβ4-όρχί•], com- mand a fleet, be admiral, v. 1.4, vii. 2. 7. ναύαρχοι, 6 [va<»s + &ρχβ»], com- mander of a fleet, Lat. praefectus dassis, β'ϊρ. a Spartan officer, ad- miral, i. 4. 2, vi. I. 10, 6. 13, vii. 2. 5. ναύκλη(Μ>$, d [vaus + /tX^pos, 0, lot], shipowner, wlio generally was also master, captain, vii. 2. 12, 5. 14. latter was long and narrow, and was propelled in action by oars. As here illustrated each is provided with rudders (see s.v. ιτηδάλων), a ship's ladder (see s.v. κλΐμαξ), a foredeck, a balustrade running along the side of the ship and de- signed to serve as a bulwark, a smgle mast supported by two stays, and a sail attached to a yard which is secured by braces. The hull of the merchantman is high above the water, and the bow curves upwards and outwards and terminates in a point, which is not fashioned into a figurehead, but has the 'eye,' which may have been either a hawse hole or of the nature of an amulet. The man-of- war has the ram, in which is the *eye,' and two banks of oars. In the historical development of ship- building among the Greeks the merchantman first appears, then the pirate ship, which was swifter but still capable of stowing plun- der, and then the man-of-war. The latter reached its perfect form in the τριήρψ, q.v. See also s.v. ΐΓ€ντψ KOvTopos, rpiaKOvTopos, and τ\οΐορ. ναΰσΌλον, see ναΰΧον. ΝαναΓΐκλ€(8η$ι ου, Nausiclides, who brought pay to the Greek army from Thibron, vii. 8. 6. ναυσίίΓορος, ov [vavs + R• "««ρ], that can be traversed in ships, of a river, navigable, ii. 2. 3. vavTiKOs, ή, 6v [vavs], be- longing to ships, naval, with δύναμίί, naval power, i. 3. 12. vcdvCoTKOSf 0, [waWas, young %nan, νέο^], youth, young man, a term covering the period from boyhood up to forty years, Lat. iuuenis, ii. 4. 19, iv. 3. 10, vii. 2. 33, 7. 4 ; used sneeringly, ii. 1. 13. νιίμαι, see νέμω. vfKpos, ό [cf. Lat. nex, death, need, slay, Eng. necro-logy, necro- mancy], dead body, corpse, Lat. cadauer, iv. 2. 18, 23, v. 7. 18, vi. 4. 9. Phrases : Av€V iroWtav νεκρών, without severe loss, v. 2. 9 ; ol ve- Kpoi, the dead, Lat. mortui, v. 4. 17. viμωf ν€μω, tveipxi, -νενέμηκα, vevi- μ-ημΛΐ, ένβμήθην [R. ν€μ], distribute, portion out, award, Lat. distribuo, vi. 6. 33 ; of meat, divide up, carve, vii. 3. 21 ; of herdsmen, drive to pasture, Lat. pdscd; and so mid. of animals, graze, feed, ii. 2. 15, and in pass., 6pos νέμεται αΐξί, the mountain is pastured with goats, iv. 6. 17. ν€ν€μημένων) see νέμΜ. νίνημ^νων, see νέω, heap. vcoSaproS} ov [νέο$-{•^• 8αρ], freshly flayed, iv. 5. 14. Νέον τ€ίχο5, ous, t6. New Fort, a fortress in Thrace west of Perin- thus, vii. 5. 8. vfos, ά, ov [cf. Lat. nouus, new, Eng. NEW, neo-phyte], young, fresh, of men, comp. νεώτεροι, sup. νεώτατοί, Lat. iuuenis, iunior, minimus ndtu, i. i. 1, 10. 3, iii. 2. 37, iv. I. 27, 2. 16, vii. 4. 6; of grain, new, fresh, this yearns, Lat. nouus, V. 4. 27. ν€νμα, aros, r6 [νεύω, nod, cf. Lat. adnuo, nod at, nuto, nod], nod, sign with the head; νεύματος μόνου ^νεκα, for a mere nod, v. 8. 20. v€vpa, as [cf. νεΰρον], sinew, string, esp. bowstring, Lat. neruu^, No. 46. iv. 2. 28, V. 2. 12. For additional illustrations, see s.v. τόξον and φαρέτρα. v€vpoV| TO [cf. Lat. neruus, sinew, muscle, Eng. neur-algia], sinew, cord, used in slings, iii. 4. 17. See s.v. σφενδόνη. vev|i|t, ου [Pers. Khshyarshan, of doubtful meaning, chiefs ruler?], Xerxes, son of Darius Hystaspes and Atossa, king of Persia from 485 to 465 b.c, chiefly famous for his mighty but ill-fated expedition against Greece, i. 2. 9, m. 2. 13. {frr^, ή, άν [verbal of ξέω, terape, polish], scraped, planed, polished, Lat. polUm, iii. 4, 10. Ιηραίν» (ξηραν-), ξηραρώ, 4ξή. ρανα, έξήρασμαι, έξηράνθην [ξηροί], parch, dry, Lat. sicca, of fruits, ii. 3. 15. |ηρ<$β, ά, 6p, dry, Lat. siccus, iv. 5. ;w. |ίφο$, ovs, t6, sword, Lat. gla- dius, ii. 2. 9, v. 8. 21, vii. 4. 16. The ξίφο$ had a straight blade and I No. 47. was double edged, and was there- by distinguished from the μάχαιρα, q.v. Both were short, as compared with modem swords. The cross- bar, or guard, of the ξΐφο$ was not large; the hilt was often orna- mented. The ξΙφο$ was carried in a scabbard of metal, or of leather No. 48. with metal mountings, which rested on the left side of the body and was supported by a strap that passed over the right shoulder. See s.v. δτλορ, όψλίτψ, and τυρρίχη (where note the shape of the edge of the blade). |6avov, TO [ξέω, cf. fe^r6$], piece of carved work, esp. carved image of a god placed in a temple, v. 3. 151 ξνήλη-&8€ |υήλη, i?s {ξύω, scrape, akin to ξέω, cf. ξ€στό$], tool for scraping, hence, ciirved or sickle-shaped dag- ger, used by the Spartans, iv. 7. 16, 8. 25. ξυλίζομαι (ξυλιδ-) [ξύΧον], gather wood or faggots, Lat. Ugnor, with iK and gen., ii. 4. 11. ξύλινος, η, ov [ξύλον], made of wood, wooden, Lat. ligneus, i. 8. 9, ii. I. 6, v. 2. 5. ξύλον, TO [cf Eng. zylonite], wood, Lat. lignum, as material, v. 4. 12, OT piece or bar of wood, i. 10. 12 ; esp. in pi., wood, beams, logs, trees, fuel, i. 5. 12, ii. i. 6, 2. 16, iv. 4. 12, V. 2. 23, 26, vi. 4. 4, 6. O. 6, ^, to', def. art., the, originally a dem. pron. but retaining this force in Attic chiefly in the ex- pressions 6 μ^ν.,.ο Sim all cases, sing, and pi., this . . . that, the one . . .the other, he . . .the rest, i. i. 7, 10. 4, ii. 2. 5, iii. 3. 7, 4. 16> iv. 3. 33, vii. 2. 2 ; sometimes b δέ is found without a preceding 6 μέν, and he, but he, i. i. 3, 4, 9, 2. 2, 16, 3. 21, ii. 3. 4, iv. 5- 10 ; pi., others, the rest, I 5. 13, 10. 3, ii. 3. 10, iv. I. 14, V. 4. 31 ; τά μέν or τά μέν τι . . .τά δέ, partly . . . partly, iv. ι. 14, V. 6. 24 ; τά μέν . . . τέ\ο$ δέ, at first . . . finally, i. 9• Q; ry μέν . . . τρ δέ, in this respect ... in that, iii. 1. 12, cf iv. 8. 10. In its proper use as the article, &, η, τό, it corre- sponds in general to the Eng. art., although it is sometimes wanting in Greek where we should use it, i. 1. 1, 4. 4, or is used where we omit it, as with proper names to mark them as well known or before men- tioned, i. I. 2, 2. 5, 4. 7, ii. 3. 8, iii. 4. 39, vi. 1. 15, vii. 2. 8, or before numerals when they denote an ap- proximate number, i. 2. 10, 7. 10, ii. 6. 16, iv. 8. 15. It may be used restrictively, marking the thing to which it refers as well known, i. 2. 9, as customary, usual, or proper, i. 3. 20, ii. 5. 23, iii. i. 25, v. 6. 26, vii. 6. 23, or as belonging to a per- son, where we use a poss. pron., i. I. 1, 3, iv. 6. 26, V. 6. 6 ; sometimes it has a distributive force, as in τοΰ μ•ηνδ% τψ στρατιώττ), per month to each soldier, i. 3. 21. The neuter TO or τά is often used before a gen., as τά Κυρον, Cyruses relations, i. 3. 9 ; τά των στρατιωτών, the condition of the troops, iii. i. 20 ; τά εκείνων, their property, v. i. 9, but oi έκΐΐνου, his men, i. 2. 15. The art. is used before a partic, as oi φ€ύηίοντ€$, the exiles, ί.ι.Ί,δ βουλόμ^νοί, who- ever w^hes, i. 3. 9, ούκ Utiv δ το\- μ-ήσων, there is not a man that will venture, ii. 3. 5, cf 4. 5 ; with inf. as subst., ii. 4. 3, 6. 19 ; before ad- verbs, in phrases like ol οίκοι, those at home, i. 2. 1, oi (νδον, those within, ii. 5. 32, ol τότ€, the men of that day, ii. 5. H, els τδ νρόσθΐν, for- ward, i. 10. 5, but TO •πρ6σθ€ν, be- fore, i. 10. 10 ; before prepositions, in phrases like ol παρά βασι\έω$, men from the king, i. i. 5, ol έκ τη$ ayopas, market men, i. 2. 18, oi σύν αύτψ, his men, i. 2. 15, τά ναρά. βασιλέων, news from the king, ii. 3. 4, τά vepl ΙΙροξένον, the fate of Proocenus, ii. 5. 37, τό xpos έστέραν, westward, vi. 4. 4, τά vap τ)μϊν, our condition, vi. 3. 26. δ, see ds. oPcXi^KOS, δ [ojSeXos, o, spit, cf Eng. obelisk], little spit, Lat. ueru, vii. 8. 14. όβολόδ} δ, obol, an Attic coin, worth about three cents, i. 5. 6. See s.v. μνα. ΟΎ$οήκοντα, indecl. [οκτώ + ct- Koo-i], eighty, Lat. octoginta, iv. 8. 15, V. 4. 31. ^•ySoosi 17, 0" [<ίκτώ], eighth, Lat. octauus, iv. 6. 1. gSe, 'ηδ€, τόδ€, dem. pron. [δ + -Se], this, referring to what is close at hand, but more emphatically il ij '.'' iSc^M-oU^i• 152 153 otia||&a-olos than ovToj, accompanied generally with a gesture, ii. 3. 19, vii. 3. 47 ; often referring to what is to fol- low, while ovros regularly refers to what precedes, the following, i. i. 9, 9. 29, ii. I. 17; Xifret τάδ€, he spoke as follows, i. 5. 15, ii. 5. 40; dat. as adv., rySc, in the following manner, thus, ii. 3. 1; r^de, of place, here, vii. 2. 13. όδιύο», ωδενσα [oSds], go owe'e way, march, with dtd and gen., Yii. 8. 8. ^Soiirop^o», ωδοιττόρτισα, 6δοιτ€Έ•ό• pTftca [iSds-f R. iripj, ^0 ftj/ land, V. I. 14. ύσηι, ου, αιι Odrysian, vii. 5. 1, 7. 11, pi., ίΛβ Odrysae, a Thracian Iribe whose power once extended from Abdera to the Ister and the Pontus, and from Byzan- tium to the Strymon, but it de- clined at the end of the fifth cen- tury, B.C., vii. 2. 32 (c/. 22), 3. 16, 4. 21, 5. 15, 7. 11. OSvoxrcvs, im, h, Odysseus, of Ithaca, son of Laertes and Anti- clea, husband of Penelope and father of Telemachus. He was one of the most famous chiefs before Troy, and is the hero of the Odyssey ; the incident referred to in V. I. 2 is related in Od. xiii, 79 ff. 8ifv, adv. lSt],from which place, whence, from which side or source, Lat. unde, i. 2. 8, vii. 3. 5, 6. 12, 7. I ; in indir. questions, ii. 4. 5, v. 7. β ; of persons, from whom, ii. 5. 20. δβ€νι«ρ, adv., stronger than SBev, q.v., from which very place, ii. I . o. ol, see d. 0Ϊ, see 8s. ol, to him, see ov. ol8a, 2 pf. with pres. sense, plpf. as impf. ^δ€ΐρ, fut. €(σομαι [Ii. FiSJ, knoio, understand, feel sure, have knowledge of, be ac- quainted toith, abs. or with ace, i. 4. 12, 7. 4, 8. 21, iv. I. 22, 23, v. 7. 23, vi. I. 31, vii. 7. 7 ; with ace. and δτι with a clause, ii. 4. 6, vi. i. 32 ; with δτι and a clause, i. 3. 15, iii. I. 36, iv. i. 27, v. 8. 10, vii. 7. 38 ; with a partic. in nom. or ace, i. 10. 16, ii. I. 13, v. 8. 15, vii. 6. 12, 7. 22 ; with ei, whether, or a rel. clause, i. 3. 5, 4. 8, 7. 4, iii. i. 40, V. 7. 6. Phrases: χάριν e/5^mt, abs. or with dat. of pers. and gen. of cause, be grateful, feel thank- ful, Lat. gratias habere, i. 4. 15, I vii. 4. 0, 6. 32 ; έκασταχ6σ€ €ΐδέναι, I know the way in every direction, iii. 5-17; οίδ' δτι, parenthetically, surely, certainly, v. 7. 33. otfi, see οίομαι. oticaSf, adv. [R. Fik], to one's home, homeward, to one's native country, Lat. domum, i. 2. 2, ii 1 23, iii. 2. 24, iv. 6. 3, vii. 8. 2; r^s οίκαδ€ 6δοΰ, the return march, iii. oUcios, a, OP [R. Fik], belonging to one's house, home or familif, hence familiar, intimate, Lat. fa- milidris, with dat. of pers., ii. 6. 28. As subst., oi οΙκ€Ϊοι, one's family, kinsmen, relatives, friends, iii. 2. 26, 39, 3. 4, vii. I. 29. oUcCdiSi adv. [R. puc], in a friendly way, kindly, vii. 5. 16. V otWi^s, ου [R. Ftic], member of one's household; pi., household, in- cluding slaves, Lat. domestici, iv. 5. 35, 6. 1, but esp. slaves, servants, hBX.famun, ii. 3. 15, vi. 6. 1. oWiio, οΙκήσω, etc. [R. Fik], have a home, dioell, live, Lat. habitd, com, abs., with άρά, κατά, or χαρά and ace, iv and dat., or vir4p and ace, i. I. 9, 2. 24, 7. 6, ii. 3. 18, ui. 2. 24, 5. 16, iv. 7. 17, vi. i. 15, vii. 5. 13 ; dwell in, live in, inhabit, with ace, iii. 2. 23, 4. 7, iv. 7. 1 ; of a city, have its place, be situated, lie, with irapa and ace, v. i. 13; in pass., be inhabited or peopled, be situated, I 2. 6, 14, 4. 11, ii. 4. 25, V. 4. 15, vi. 4. 6. οίκημα, aros, τ6 [R. ψ\.κ], dwell- ing, house, Lat. domicilium, vii. 4. 15. οϊκησΐ5, €ω5, ή [R. Ρ«], «ci of dwelling, dwelling place, residence, Lat. habitdtio, vii. 2. 38. oIkCoi as [R. FtK], house, Lat. domus, ii. 2. 16, iii. i. 11, iv. i. 8, 5. 25, V. 2. 1, vii. 2. 6. οΙκ(|ω (οίκιδ-), ol- κιώ, φκισα, ψκισμαι, φκίσθην [R. Fn«]) found, settle, colo- nize, of a city, Lat. condo, V. 6. 17, vi. 4. 14, 6. 3 ; pass., of ii a person, be settled, v. 3. 7. olKo8o|Uv [&μ.α], even, level, Lat. aequus, planus, of ground, iv. 6. 12 ; iv τψ όμαΧψ, in the plain, iv. 2. 16. όμαλώς, adv. [&μα], evenly, in even step or line, i. 8. 14. 8μηρο$, ό [&μα -f- Κ. αρ], hostage, Lat. obses, vi. 3. 9, vii. 4. 12, 7. 53 ; with gen., iii. 2. 24. όμϊλ^ω, όμίΧήσω, ωμίΧησα, ωμί- \ηκα [άμο-ΐ-ίλτ;], associate with, consort with, iii. 2. 25. ομίχλη, ψ [cf Eng. mist], va- pour, mist, fog, iv. 2. 7. {μμα, arcs, τό [R. oir], eye, Lat. oculus; hence, look, pi., vii. 7. 46. δμνΰμι or όμνν» (6pr, όμο-'), όμου- ^at, ώμοσα, όμώμοκα, όμώμο(σ)μαι, ωμό{σ)θην, swear, swear to or by, take an oath, Lat. iurd, abs. or with ace. of thing sworn, ii. 2. 9, 3. 28, 4. 7 ; with dat. of pers. to whom or ace. of gods by whom, ii. 3. 27, 5. 39, vi. I. 31, 6. 17, vii. 6. 18 ; with inf., vi. 6. 17, vii. 7. 40 ; with fut. inf., ii. 2. 8, 3. 27, 5. 39; with iirl τούτοις, iii. 2, 4. &μοιο$» α, ov [&μα], like, similar, resembling, of the same kind, Lat. similis, of persons and things, v. 4. 21, 34; with dat., iv. i. 17, vi. 6. 10 ; with inf. (but some read dat.), δμοιοι ^σαν θαυμάξ^ειν, they were like to wonder, they seemed amazed, iii. 5. 13. Phrases : iv τψ όμοίψ, on a level, iv. 6. 18 ; ol δμοιοι, equal citi- zens, peers in its literal sense, a. name applied to Spartans pos- sessed of full civic rights, iv. 6. 14. ομοίως, adv. [&μα], in like man- ner, alike, Lat. similiter, i. 3. 12, vii. 6. 10 ; όμοίωί ωσιτβρ, like as though, just as if, Lat. aeque ac, vi. 5. 31. όμολογ^ω, όμολογι^σω, etc. [&μα -f- R. λ€γ], hold the same views about anything, agree, admit, confess, own, Lat. cdnfiteor, concede, abs. and generally parenthetically, also with ace. or inf., i. 6. 7, 8, ii. 6. 7, V. 8. 3, vi. 6. 17, 26 ; concede, grant, admit, abs,, with ace, or with inf., vi. 1. 27, 28, 3. 9, vii. 4. 13 ; in pass, used pers. where we use an im- pers. const., i. 9. 1, 14, 20. ομολογουμένως» adv. [&μα -f- R. λ€γ], avowedly, by common con- sent; so with iK Ίτάντων, ii. 6. 1. όμομήτριος, ά, ov [&μα + μήτηρ}, born of the same mother, iii. 1. 17. όμοττάτριος, ά, ov [&μα+ irarijp], begot by the same father, iii. 1. 17. όμόο^ΟΛ, see δμννμι. όμόσ-ι, adv. [&μα], to the same spot ; in military phrases, to close quarters, hand to hand, Lat. com- minus, with Betv, χωρ^ΐν, and Uvai, iii. 4. 4, V. 4. 26, vi. 5. 23. . s 1!, !1 Ϊ ill Μ 4μοτρ4«ι{οι-^ιηο^οφύλα| 156 4-R. irtS], αί the same table with one, a table companion, Lat. con- uictOTj a title of honour among the Persians, applied to those who dined in the same apartment with the king, but not at his table, i. 8. 25, iii. 2. 4. όμον, adv. [Λμο], together, at once, at the same place or time, Lat. simul, una, of place, time, or association, i. lo. 8, iv. 2. 22, 5. 29, V. 4. 25 ; with gen. (some read dat.), &μον cimt, join, meet, iv. 6, όμ^αλάί, 6 [cf. Lat. umbiUcus, navel, Eng. nave, navel], navel, IV. Km M» ΙγΜ%, adv. [άμα], all the same, for all that, nevertheless, Lat. ta- men, generally followed by δέ or preceded by άλλα, i. 3. 21, ii. i. 9, iii. 2. 3, iv. 4. 21, v. 8. 19, vi. 5. 30, vii. 1. 10; after a concessive par- tic, yet, still, however, i. 8. 23, iii. I. 10, 2. 16, V. 5. 17 ; so when the idea of concession precedes, with- out a partic, ii. 2. 17, 4. 23. Iv, see €ίμί. *v, see 6s. Ivof», TO, only in nom. and ace, dream, vision, Lat. somninm, iii. I. 12, 13. Phrase: elBev 6mp, he had a dream, iii. i. 11, cf. iv. 3. 8, vi. I. 22. ovtlftam, 3d decl, rd [cf. Omp], metaplastic form of Opcipos or Svei- pov, dream, vision of the night, Lat. .somnium, iv. 3. 13. dv^o-oii see όνίνημι. όν(νημι ( δσον, as widely as, vi. 3. 19 ; with numerals, about, i. 8. 6, iii. 4. 3, vii. 3. 7, cf iv. 5. 10, vii. 3. 20, 8. 19. Phrases: with comps., to denote degree, Lat. quanta, as δσφ θαττον, the quicker, i. 5. 9, cf iv. 7. 23, vii. 3. 20 ; with sups., δσον iδύvavτo μέγιστον, as loudly as possible, Lat. quam mdx- ime poterant, iv. 5. 18, cf vii. i. 37, 7. 40 ; so without sup., v. 5. 14, vii. 7. 8; δσον ού, all but, almost, Vll. 2. 5. Sφρα(νομαι-ο4δ€(€ 162 163 0i8^0T€>0{)Te»S I όσφρ-), όσφρήσομαι^ ύΰσφράμην^ ώσ- φράν0ην [tffiw, smell, ef. €ύώδψ, + Κ. φ€ρ], smell f get a smell ο/, with gen., V. 8. 3. δταν, relative adv. [Sre + Ay], whenever^ XOhen•, with subjv., iii. 3. 15, 4. 20, iv. 7. 4, V. 5. 20, vii. 7. 47. Sw, relatiye adv., at the time wheuy as, when, Lat. cum, with indie, i. 2. 9, 8. 8, iii. i. 33, v. 3. 6, vii. 7. 10 ; with subjv., see δτα» ; with opt. in a general cond., when- ever, as often as, ii. 6. 12, iv. i. 16. . ihn, conj. [neut. of Arrts], that, in- troducing indtr. disc, with indie, after both primary and secondary tenses, i. 3. 9, ii. i. 8, 4. 21, iv. 7. 20, V. 8. 10, vi. 3. 11, vii. 2. 16 ; after a secondary tense with opt., i. 6. 10, iii. I. 10, vii. 1. 16, or with both Indie, and opt., i. 2. 21, vi. 3. 11, but editt. differ, i. 3. 21, 8. 13 ; with- out a preceding verb expressed, iv. 3. 29, V. 8. 8; the infs. found in Mss. after Sn have been altered by editors, iii. i. 9, v. 6. 34, vi. i. 29, vii. I. 5. Introducing dir. disc, i. 6. 8, 8. 16, ii. 4. 16, v. 4. 10, vii. 6. 7. Causal, became, since, Lat. quod, with indie, i. 2. 21, ii. 3. 19, iii. I. 12, iv. 8. 6. To strengthen a sup., as δτι άταρα(ΤΚ€υότατον, as unprepared as possible, i. i. 6, cf. iii. I. 45, iv. 3. 29, vii. 3. 7. 0*, before a vowel οΰκ, before a rough vowel ούχ, neg. adv., not, Lat. flow, used to deny a fact, i. 2. 11, 3. 5, ii. 2. 11, 5. 21, iii. i. 13, 18, V. 2. 17, vi. 2. 4 ; accented at the end of a clause or sentence, iv. 8. 3, V. I. 17 ; in litotes, as ού »dw rp6s, at some distance from, i. 8. 14, c/. ii. 1.13, 6. 15, vi.* I. 26; in- troducing a question expecting the answer yes, Lat. nonne, iii. i. 29, vii. 6. 24. Phrases : ού φ-ημί, deny, L&%,nego, i. 3. 1, iv. i. 21, vi, 4. 19, ef. vii 7. 19, and see 4άω ; ού μή, see μή. ©4 relative adv. [«$], where, Lat. quo, i. 2. 22, ii. i. 6, iii. 4. 32, iv. 7. 27, V. 7. 33; strengthened by δή, where in fact, iv. 5. 6 ; μ4χρι oC, see 3s. ου, dat. of (the only sing, form found in Anab.), pers. pron. of the third pers., but in Attic Greek al- ways refl. and generally indir. refl. [pronominal stem c forVpt, cf. Lat. sej, of himself, Lat. sui, I i. 8, 2. 8, 9. 29, iii. 4. 42 ; pi., themselves, σ06?5, V. 7. 18, vii. 5. 9, σφών, iii. 5. 16, iv. 3. 28, vi. 6. 33, σφίσι, i. 7. 8, 8. 2, V. 4. 33, σφας, v. 7. 25, vii. 2. 16. ον8αμη, adv. Ιούδαμόί, none, ούδ4 + ci/ios, an obsolete word = Tis], in no way, in no wise, Lat. nulla modo, V. 5. 3, vii. 3. 12, 6. 30. ούδομιόθ€ν, adv. [cf. ούδαμ^}, from no place, direction, or quar- ter, Lat. nulla ex parte, ii. 4. 23, iv. 5. 30. . ο^^δαμοί, adv. [cf ούδαμν}, to no place, nowhere, vi. 3. 16. ού8αμοΰ, adv. [cf ούδαμ^], in no place, nowhere, Lat. nusquam, i. 10. 16, ii. 2. 18, iv. 5. 18. o^U, neg. Conj. and emphatic adv. [01)4- 3^J, and not, but not, nor yet, nor, connecting a follow- ing with a preceding neg. clause, Lat. neque, nee, i. 2. 25, 3. 11, 4. 8, 8. 20, iii. I. 2, 10, iv. 7. 2, v. 8. 25 ; not even, Lat. ne . . . quidem, i. 3. 21, 4. 9, ii. I. 11, iii. 4. 15, vii. 6. 35 ^ not at all, by^ no means, 1. 3. 12, ii. 5, 18 ; ούδ* ws, not even 80, not even in these circumstances, i. 8. 21, iii. 2. 23 ;• ού μέντοι ουδέ, not by any means however, ii. 2. 16. o^SfCsi ούδ€μΙα, ουδέν, gen. ούδ€- v6s, ούδΐμια^ (cf. ουδέ μιαί, vi. 3. 16) [ουδέ + els], not one, not any, none^ no, Lat. nullus, ii. 5. 1, iv. i. 9, viL I. 29 ; subst, oiJicis, nobody, Lat nemo, i. 2. 22, 8. 20, iii. i. 16, iv. 5. 18 ; ουδέν, nothing, Lat. nihil, i. 8. 20, ii. 2. 11, V. 2. 3, vi. 2. 10 ; ουδέ» Tt, nothing at all, vii. 3. 35 ; neut. m adv., ουδέν, in no respect, not at all, i. I. 8, 6. 7, vii. i. 25; with comps., ουδέν μάλλον βλάττταν, do not a bit the more harm, iii. 3. 11, cf. 13, vii. 5. 9. oiSc'iroTC, adv. [ουδέ -|- ττοτέ'], never, Lat. numquam, ii. 6. 13. οΰδίιτω, adv. [ουδέ + ττώ], not yet, Lat. ndndum, vii. 3. 24 ; separated, ουδέ νυν νω, vii. 6. 35. ονθ*, see ουτ€. ουκ, see ού. ούκέτΐι adv. [ού -f^Tt], no more, no longer, no further, i. 8. 17, 10. 12, iu. 4. 16, vii. 6. 29 ; ούκέη μή and subjv., ii. 2. 12, see ού μ-ή under μή. οδκουν, inferential particle [ού 4- οδν], therefore not, Lat. ηδη igitur ; ουκουν lipjotye δοκ€Ϊ, I donH think so then, iii. 5. 6. In old editt. sometimes in questions, but see ούκοΰν. ovKoOvi interr. particle [ού -f οΰν'], not therefore} expecting an affirmative answer, Lat. ndnne igitur, i. 6. 7, ii. 5. 24 ; as inferen- tial conj., therefore, then, so, Lat. igitur, iii. 2. 19, v. 8. 9, vi. 5. 21, vii. 6. 14, 16, 7. 26, 29, 31 (where the old editt. have ουκουν, intro- ducing a question). οΰν, post-positive particle of in- ference, stronger than &pa, there- fore, then, so, in cx>nsequence, cer- tainly, of course, at any rate, how- ever that may be, i. i. 2, 2. 12, 3. 6, 5. 6, iii. I. 20, 2. 30, v. 1.8, vi. 6. 15 ; καΐ yap οΰν, for the fact is, i. 9. 8, 12, 17. ovircp, adv., stronger than ου, q.v., just where, iv. 8. 26. ouirorc, adv. [ού + τοτέ'\, never, Lat. numquam, i. 3. 5, ii. 5. 7, iii. I. 3, 19. οΰιτω, adv. [ού-^ττώ], not yet, not before, Lat. ndndum, i. 5. 12, 8. 8, 9. 25, iii. 2. 14 ; separated, see τώ. οΰιτώΐΓοτ€, adv., before a rough vowel ούττώττοθ [ού -f- τώττοτί] . never yet, never before, i. 4. 18 (see νώ- WOT€). oipd, as, tail of an animal, Lat. Cauda; of an army rear, Lat. nouissimum agmen, iii. 4. 38, 42, vi. 5. 5. ουραγός, 6 [ουρά •{- "R. ay], rear leader, i.e. the last man in a file who led when the file faced about, iv. 3. 26, 29. ovpavoS} 0, the heavens, the sky, Lat. caelum, iv. 2. 2. οΰδ, euros, TO [R. 1 oF], ear, Lat. auris, pi., iii. i. 31, vii. 4. 4. oCtc, neg. conj. [ού-\-τέ'], and not, Lat. neque, doubled, neither . . . nor, i. 2. 26, 3. 6, 4. 8, ii. 5. 7, 21, V. 3. 1, or followed by τέ, not only not . . . but also, Lat «e- que . . . et, ii. 5. 4, iv. 3. 6, vii. 7. 48. οδτοι, adv. [ού -f τοΓ], certainly not, Lat. ηδη sane, vii. 6. 11. oi^Tost αυτή, τοΰτο, dem. pron., this, pi., these, freq. as pers. pron., he, she, it, pi., they, Lat. hie, gen- erally referring to what precedes and in pred. position when used with subst., i. I. 7, 9, 2. 4, 5. 10, ii. 2. 12, iii. 2. 20, 4. 29, iv. 2. 6, 8. 4, V. 8. 15, vi. 4. 5, vii. i. 9, 2• 10, 5. 3 ; when the subst has also an adj., oStos follows the adj., iv. 2. 6, vu. 3. 30, cf.i. I. 7 J the art. is sometimes omitted, i. 5. 16, esp. with proper names, v. 5. 10, vii. 2. 29 ; rarely oZtos refers to what follows, iii. i. 7, 2. 17, iv. 6. 3, vii. 3. 22. Phrases : καΐ oCtos, he too, even he, iii. 2. 5, iv. 1. 27, cf i. 1. 11, ii. 6. 30, iv. 7. 9 ; καΐ ταΰτα, and that too, although, with partic, i. 4. 12, ii. 4. 15, cf. ii.5.21. ovToo-t, αύτηί, τουτι, strength- ened form of ovTos, applied to a person or thing present and imply- ing a gesture, this man here, this present, without the art., i. 6. 6, vii. 2. 24, 6. 12. οδτω?, or, before a consonant, οΰτω, adv. [oirros'], in this way, so, thus, to su^h an extent or degree, under these circumstances, Lat. ita, i. 1.5, 10, 8.22, ii. 6. 1,6, iii. i.31, I o^xC-^m^tcpdnoir 164 165 ΐΓα'γχάλ€ΐΓ05-ΐΓάλη ι 1 I Ft I f 2. 10, iv. I. 11, 7. 4, V. 2. 20, 4. 22, vii. 1. 28, 7. 50 ; referring rarely to what follows, tfms, as jfollows, ii. 2. 2, iv. 6. 10, V. 6. 12, 32. ούχ£, adv., emphatic form of oiJ, iii. I. 13, vi. 5. 18, vii. 7.47. όψ€(λΜ (όφ€\'), όφ€ΐ\ήσω^ ωφ€ί- λησα and ωφ€\ον^ ωφ€ίληκα^ ωφ€ΐ- λήΘην^ owe, Lat. debed ; pass., be due, of pay, i. 2. 11, vii. 7. 14, 34; with inf., be bound, ought, should, as in wislies, ωφ€\€ KOpos i^Wj would Cyrus were Ηνιηρ, Lat. utinam ulueret, ii. i. 4. δφ€λο$, TO, only in nom. and ace, help, advantage, use, good. Phrase: στραττ^ΰΰ 6φ€\ο$ ούδ^ν, a general is of no use, Lat. ηδη prd- dest, i. 3. 11, cf. ii. 6. 10. <ίφθαλμ05, ό [R. oir], eye, Lat. oculus, i. 8. 27, iv. 5. 12. Phrase : tlxovres iv όφθαλμοΐί, keeping in sight, cf. Lat. in ocuUs habere, iv. 5. 29. όψλισκάνκ) (όφ\-, όφλισκ-), όφλή- trw, ωφλορ, ώφληκα, ωφλημαι [cf. άφίίλω'}, owe or be liable to a money fine, be fined, l,Sit.imtltor, with ace of^fine and gen. of cause, v. 8. 1. Όψρύνιον, TO, Ophrynium, a city on the coast of the Troad, between Dardanus and Rhoeteum, vii. 8. 5. (Fren Kievi.) oXCTos, ό [R. F«x], channel for water, ditch, drain, Lat. candlis, ii. 4. 13. «ίχέω, &χ•ίισω [R. ρ•χ], Carry, pass., be carried, ride, Lat. uehor, with ένί and gen., iii. 4. 47. δχημα, aros, to [R. ρ«χ], car- rier, supporter, in the widest sense, as a wagon, ship, or animal, vehi- cle, conveyance; of the earth, iii. 2. 19. δχβη, ψ, height, esp. Λι'^τΛ δαηΑ; of a stream, bluff, iv. 3. 3, 5, 17, 23. (Poetic in Attic, except here.) ^X^osi ό [R. Fix], mass, throng, crowd, company, press, Lat. turba, of men, ii. 5. 9, iv. i. 20, v. 4. 34, vii. I. 18 ; as a military phrase ap- plied to the undisciplined part of the army, camp followers, non- combatants, Lat. impedimenta, iii. 2. 36, iv. 3. 15, vi. 5. 3 ; confusion, annoyance, in the phrase 6χ\ον τταμέχουσιν, are a bother, iii. 2. 27. dxvfxis, a, 6p [R. «x], tenable, esp. in a militiiry sense, of a height or fortress, strong, secure, fortified by nature, i. 2. 22, 24 ; subst., τά ^χυρά, holds, strongholds, iv. 7. 17. όψ€, adv., late, Lat. sero, ii. 2. 16, vi. 5. 31. δψ€σ-θαι, see όράω. <ίψί|;«, ό^ίσ^ι;^ [ό^ί'^], dfo a thing late, be or cowie late, iv. 5. 5. δψιβ, ews, ή [R. otr], «.speci, look, appearance, ii. 3. 15 ; sight, spec- tacle, show, vi. I. 9. ιταγκράτιον, τό [iras-f R. 1 κρα], the pancratium, iv. 8. 27, an ath- letic contest in which, as the name No. 52. signifies, all the powers of the fighter were called into action. It comprised boxing (see s.v. τν-γμή) and wrestling (see s.v. ττάλη), but in the boxing the hands were not bound with thongs, since these would have been a hindrance in wrestling, nor was the blow deliv- ered with clenched fist but simply with the fingers bent. In the wres- tling the object was not the simple fall, but the fighting was continued on the ground. The struggle was maintained until one of the con- testants was either disabled or de- clared himself defeated. The pan- cratium was one of the regular con- tests at the Greek national games. fra^xaXciros, ov [iras 4- χαλεττό?], very difficuH, v. 2. 20. ΐΓα7χαλέΐΓω$, adv. [iras + χαλε- 7ΓΟ$], very hardly. Phrase: irpos Ζ^νοφωντα τταγχαλ^ω? (Ιχορ, they were very hard on fenophon, vii. 5. 16. traOeiv, see νάσχω. ΐΓάθημ.α, otos,to [R.trtr a], wretch- edness, misfortune, vii. 6. 30. ιτάθος, ovs, TO [R. o-iro], experi- ence, accident, mishap, trouble, matter, Lat. casus, i. 5. 14, i v. 5. 7. Ίταιάνίζω, iraiavLffa [ιταιάν, pae- an], sing the paean, in honour of Apollo or Artemis ; as a tear song the paean followed the prayer and immediately preceded the war cry and atUck, i. 8. 17, 10. 10, iv. 3. 19, 8. 16, V. 2. 14 ; it was sung in ac- knowledgment of any blessing, e.g., of an omen, iii. 2. 9, at a feast after the libation preceding the sympo- sium, vi. I. 5, and in sacred pro- cessions, vi. I. 11. iratSeid, as [irats], bringing iip, education, training, Lat. institutio, iv. 6. 15, 16. •ΐΓαι$€ρα<Γτή$) oD [irats -fepo/xat], lover of boys, vii. 4. 7. παιδ€νω| παιδεύσω, etc. [irats], train up a child, educate, Lat. In- stituo, pass., i. 9. 2, 3. iraiSiKd, τά [irats], beloved youth, favourite, Lat. deliciae, ii. 6. 6, v. 8.4. iraiSCov, τό [irats], infant, little child, iv. 7. 13. iraiSCo-io), ψ [irats], maiden, young girl, Lat. pweZia, iv. 3. 11. iratsi iratSos, 0, η [irats], child, boy, girl, but in Anab. always masc. in sing., boy, son, Lat. puer, pi. without article, children, Lat. liberl, i. i. 1, 7. 9, ii. 6. 12, iii. i. 3, iv. 6. 3, v. 3. 10, vii. 8. 22. Phrase : iK παίδων, from boyhood, iv. 6. 14. iraiw| Ίταίσω, ^παισα, -νέπαικα, έταίσθην [root iraFi cf. Lat. pauio, strike, paueo, be struck with fear, Eng. ana-paest], strike, hit, beat, strike at, Lat. caedd, abs., with ace, or with κατά or irpos and ace, i. 8. 26, ii. 3. 11, iii. i. 29, 2. 19, iv. 2. 3, 6. 2, V. 7. 21, 8. 16, vi. 6. 27. Phrase: oXLyis iraiaeiev, v. 8. 12, see oXLyoi. irdXal•, adv., of old, long ago, long, long since, Lat. iamdudum, iam pridem, i. 4. 12, iv. 8. 14, vii. 6. 37, 7. 48. Phrase : oi πάλαι rJKovTes, the early comers, iv. 5. 5. irs λόχοϋί, bring the companies (which had been marching κατά Kipas) into the line, iv. 6. 6. ιταραγωγή, ^$ [R. αγ], convey- ance, esp. along the coast, trans- portation, V. I. 16. irapaScwros, ό [Persian word, cf. Eng. paradise], park, pleasure garden, when used for game, pre- serve, Lat uiuarium, i. 2. 7, 4. 10, ii. 4. 14. ΐΓαραδ18ω|ΐι [R. 80], give overU) a person, give up, deliver over, surrender, Lat. trddo, ii. i. 8, 12, iii. I. 27, 4• -2, iv. 2. 1, 8. 26, v. 4. 30,' vii. 2. 14 ; of the watchword, give out, vii. 3. 34 ; of gods, grant, allow, vi. 6. 34. ΐΓαραδραμ€Ϊν, see παρατρέχω. ιταραθαρρύνω [0po ; the long- est march was ten, i. 2. 10, 11 ; the shortest five, i. 2. 10, 14, 4. 1, ii. 4. 25, iv. 6. 4, except when the pres- ence of enemies or other causes reduced the distance still more, i. 7• 1, 14, iii. 4. 13, iv. 5. 3. ΐΓαραο-Κ€υάζω [R. «τκυ], get ready, prepare, provide, Lat. paro, ii. 6. 8 ; mid., make one^s preparations, get ready, arrange, procure, provide, in past tenses, be all ready for, abs. or with ace, i. 9, 27, 10. 18, iii. i. ΐβ, 36, iv. 6. 10, V. 2. 21 ; with fut. par- tie, or «Tws and fut. indie, i. 10. 6, ill. I. 14, V. 4. 21, vi. I. 33; with inf. with or without ωστβ, iii. 2. 24, vii. 3. 35 ; with tU and ace, i. 8. 1 , vi. 4.21. Phrases: παρασκ^νασαμένου^ T^v η/νώμην, with our minds made «A vi. 3. 17; ofiraie ΤΓαρα<ΓΚ€υα^6μενο$, getting ready to go home, vii. 7. 57. Ίταρασ-Μνή, ijs [R. «ricv], prepa- ration, of an annament, Lat. ap- paratus, I 2. 4. ιταραο-κην^ω [R. erica], aor., en- camp beside, iii. i, 28. jrapdralit» eu)s, ij[R. τακ], order ofbaUk,v.2,l3. 169 ΐΓαρ€ΗΓχήσω-ΐΓαρίημι ΊταραΐΓχήσω, see τταρέχω. Ίταρατάττω [R. τακ], draw up side by side, only in pass, in Λ nab., 7ra/>aT6Ta7/A^fos, drawn up in line of battle or in battle array, Lat. instructus, i. 10. 10, iv. 3. 3, 8. 9, v. 2. 13. ΐΓαρατ€£νω [τείνω], stretch out, extend, with ναρά and ace, vii. 3, 48 ; mid. intr., i. 7. 15. ιταρατίθημι [R. Oc], put beside, of food, set before, serve, Lat. ad- ρδηΰ, iv. 5. 30, 31 ; mid., put aside, of arms, lay at one's side, vi. i. 8. ιταρατρέχω [τρέχω^, run along, run by, abs. or with παρά and ace, iv. 5. 8, vii. I. 23, 4. 18 ; run over or across, iv. 7. 0, 7 ; with els and ace, iv. 7. 11. ιταραχρήμα, adv. [χρ^μα], for Ίταρά. TO χρήμα, on the spot, of a payment, in cash, vii. 7. 24. ΐΓαρ€γγυά.ω l1Γapeyyύη'], pass the word, esp. of command, give or- ders, exhort, suggest, abs., with inf., or with ace and inf., iv. 1. 17, 7. 24, 25, 8. 16, vi. 5. 12, vii. 3. 46 ; with toOto, vii. I. 22. Phrase: Ore TrapeyyvipTo, whenever word was passed, iv. i. 17. ΐΓαρ€γγύη, vs Icf. iyyvάω'], word passed, order, command, vi. 5. 13. ΐΓαρ68€δραμήκ€σαν, see ταρα- τρέχω. Ίτάρδίμι [R. €σ], be beside, be at hand or near, be there, be present, have come, arrive, Lat. adsum, abs. or with dat., i. i. 1, 4. 8, 5. 15, ii. 4. 19, 6. 14, iii. i. 17, 46, iv. 3. 9, V. 5. 8, 6. 29, vi. 6. 20 ; with els, itrl, or Tp6s and ace, previous mo- tion being implied, i. 2. 2, vi. 4. 15, 6. 26, vii. 1. 11, 35, 2. 5 ; denoting possession, with dat., have, ii. 3. 0, iii. 2. 18 ; impers., it is possible, iv. 5. 0, vii. I. 26, so ace abs., v. 8. 3. Phrases : τά τταρόντα with or with- out τpάyμaτa, the present state of things, circumstances, i. 3. 3, iii. i. 34, iv. I. 26 ; ^y TV rapovrt, in the present crisis, ii. 5. 8 ; έκτων xapbv- τωρ, from these straits, iii. 2. 3. ΐΓάρ€ΐμν [el/ii], go 0Γ pass by, come by, pass, abs. or with ace, iii. 2. 35, 4. 37, iv. 2. 13, 5. 30, v. 4. 30, vii. 8. 14 ; go or come along, iii. 4. 48, vi. 5. 12, vii. 3. 46, with irapd and ace, vi. 5. 23. Phrase : ol va- pibvres, those who come forward, esp. of speakers, v. i. 3. 'π■αρcλαύvω [^έΧαύνω], drive by, march by or past, pass in review, abs., i. 2. 16, 8. 12, vi. 5. 25 ; with iiri and gen., i. 2. 16, iii. 4. 46 ; with ace, ride past, review, i. 2. 17, iii. 5.4. παρέρχομαι \βρχομΛΐ\, pass by, pass, pass through, go along, abs. or with ace, i. 4. 4, 7. 16, 8. 16, ii. 4. 25, iv. 7. 11 ; with eΐσ.ω or €ξω and gen., i. 10. 6, ii. 4. 12 ; come by others to the front, come forward, esp. of speakers, v. 5. 24, vi. i. 31, 6. 21, cf vii. 5. 11 ; of time, go by, elapse, pass, i. 7. 18, iv. 3. 2, v. 8. 1. ΐΓαρ€σχημίνθ5, see παρέχω. Ίταρέχω [R. <Γ€χ], hold beside or ready, afford, provide, offer, fur- nish, give, supply, Lat. praebed, 11. 1. 11, 3.22,24,4.5, 10, 11, iii. i. 2, iv. 1.22, 6.13, v. 3. 9, 6. 1, vii. 6. 22 ; render, make, ii. 5. 13, 6. 27, iii. 5. 9; produce, arouse, cause, inspire, i. i. H, iii- i• l^i 2. 27, v. 8. 15, vi. 5.29•; mid., offer for one- self, contribute, display, vi. 2. 10, vii. 6. 11. Phrase : irpdypara πα- ρέχον, see τ pay μα. Ίταρήσθα, see νάρειμι, be beside. Παρθένιον, rb, Parthenium, a town in Mysia with a citadel, near Pergamus, vii. 8. 15, 21. Παρθ^νιος, b, the Parthenius, a river flowing between Paphlagonia and Bithynia into the Pontus, v. 6. 9, vi. 2. 1. (Bartan Tchai.) irapO^vos» Vi maiden, virgin, Lat. uirqo, iii. 2. 25. IlapiavoC, ol [Πάριο»'], Parians, natives of Parium, vii. 3. 16. Ίταρίημι [VO' ^«^ ^^» ^^ P^?^' give way, yield, allow, abs. or with inf., Lat. concedo, v. 7. 10, vii. 2. 15. « ΙΙο|>ιον-ιπ£τρΜ>ι 170 ndfiiov, τί, ΡαπΜηι, a city on the northern coast of the Troad on the Propontis, vii. 2. 7, 25, 3. 20. (Kamares.) «αρ£4Γτΐ|μι [R. οτα], set by or near; intraus. in pf. and 2 pf., stand by or beside, abs. or with dat.» V. 8. 10, 21 ; aor. mid. trans., Mt by one's side, produce, bring forward, of victims at sacrifice, vi. I. 22, of a soothsayer, vii. 8. 3. «dpoSof, if [68άομαι-ιηλταστήι 172 ϋ Ι^ΐΐ: ΐκιράομαι, χειράσομαι, iireipaaa- μη»^ Τ€Τ€ίραμαι^ έτ€φάθηρ [R. ικρ], try, attempt, emleavour, Lat. conor, generally with inf., i. i. 7, 9. 19, ii. 3. 23, 6. 3, iii. 2. 39, iv. 6. 15, v. 4. 25, Yi. 2. 11, vii. 2. 15; with δνω^ and subjv., iii. 2. 3; abs. or with an adv., iv. 2. 4, 3. 6, vii. 2. 37 ; make a trial of, test, Lat. expldrd, with gen., iii. 2. 38, 5. 7. ircC^ds, ΐΓ€ΐσ•θήτ€, see ire /^ω. ικΐσ-€ΐ, trcCiro^ai, see πάσχω. ΐΓ€ΐΐΓτ4ον, verbal of ircWcu [R. ιηθ], o«e iwwifi obey, obedience must be rendered, ii. 6. 8, vi. 6. 14. ιηλάζω (ΐΓ€λαδ-), ττ^λάσ-ω or reXw, έπέλασα, έτΓ€\άαθην [wiXas, adv., Μθα?•, ef. Ίτλ-ησίο^], draw near, ap- proach, with dat., iv. 2. 3 ; abs., i. 8. 15 (where ύιτίλάσάβ is commonly read). (Poetic, except in Xen.) _ Πιλληνινς, ^ws, b [UeWiivyi, Pel- iewe], a Pellenian, native of Pel- lene, v. 2. 15, an ancient city in Achaia near the boundary of Sicyon. ncXoirow^^ios» ά, ov [vaCs], he- longing to Peloponnesus, Pelopon- nesian, i. i. 6; subst.pL, Pelopon- nesians, vi. 2. 10. Πιλοιτ^ννησο$) ^ [vaws], Pelo- ponnesus, i.e. Pelops'^s Island (Mo- rea), the peninsula constituting the southern half of Hellas, i. 4. 2. ««λτ4|ω (reXraS-) [ττέΧτη'], be a peltast, serve in the peltasts, v. 8. 5. Πέλται, ων, Peltae, a city in Greater Phrygia, on the Maean- * der, i. 2. 10. ΐΓ€λτ€ΜΓτή5, ου [τ€λτά^ω], pel- tast, targeted'. The peltasts dif- fered from other light-armed troops (see S.V. Ύυμνήί, άκονηστήί, τοξότψ, σφ€νδονήτψ) in carrying a shield (see s.v. τ4\τη). There is no evidence in the Anab. that they had other defensive armour, but doubtless they were offensively armed with a sword as well as with spears. Of the latter they carried probably several, which were hurled with (v. 2. 12) or without the thong. After the expedition of the Ten Thousand, they were developed by the Athenian Iphicrates into a No. 54. distinct branch of the service, combining the peculiar advantages both of heavy- armed and light- armed troops. Iphicrates added to the shield a linen corselet, in- creased the length of the spear and sword, and invented an im- proved sort Of boots, which took his name. The peltasts among the Ten Thousand were largely Thra- cians, i. 2. 9, but those of other races care specifically named, i. 2. 6. This sort of troops was of Thracian origin, cf. vi. 3. 4, vii. 3. 40. In contrast with hoplites, the peltasts were detailed to service that required celerity of move- ment, iv. 3. 22, 4. 20, 6. 25, 8. 18, cf. vi. 3. 4. In the Anab. they are sometimes contrasted with bow- men, i. 2. 9, iv. 8. 15, with bowmen and slingers, iv. 3. 27, v. 6. 15, and once with the ψιλοί, i.e. lightrarmed troops of any sort not armed with the shield, v. 2. 16. But they probably usurped the place of the άκοντισταί, V. 6. 15, who are but seldom mentioned ; and since the bowmen and slingers were few in number relatively to the peltasts, the term τ^ΧτασταΙ is constantly used as a designation of the light- armed troops in general as con- trasted with the heavy-armed. Cf. i. 2. 9, where in an enumeration of the forces of Cyrus 2000 pel- tasts are named as representing the total of the light-armed troops in contrast with 11,000 hoplites. 173 ΐΓίλταοττικόβ-ιτίνη^ These 2000 peltasts included the 500 'γυμιή}τ€$ and 200 τοξόται men- tioned in i. 2. 3, 9. The same contrast of light-armed troops, designated as peltasts, with heavy- armed troops is found also in i. 7. 10, 10. 7, equal to τό νβΧταστικόν in i. 8. 5, where all the light-armed troops of Cyrus are meant, iii. 3. 8, 4. 3, iv. I. 26 (cf. iv. i. 28, where 'γυμνητ€ί is equivalent to the pre- ceding τΓ€\τασταί), V. 2. 4, vi. 2. 16, vii. I. 23, 3. 44 (c/. vii. 3. 37). Cf also v. 8. 5. ircXrcuTTiKOSi ή, 6v [ττελταστι}?], ο/ or belonging to peltasts; subst., TO ΊΓ€\ταστικ6ν (sc. στράτ€υμα), the peltast force, the light-armed troops, i. 8. 5, vii. 3. 37, 6. 29. ΊΓ^λτη, ψ, shield, target, small and light as compared with the hoplite's shield (see s.v. dairls), was of Thracian origin, cf vii. 4. 7, 17, but was used by other bar- barian tribes, vi. •ι. 9. The text No. 55. that part of the armour of the pel- tasts (see s.v. TreXrao-TiJs) which distinguished them from other light- armed troops. The ττίΚτη consisted of a wooden frame cov- ered with leather. Sometimes it was covered wholly or in part with bronze, v. 2. 29. In shape it was either elliptical or crescent shaped, generally the latter, to judge from representations of it in works of art. This was the form of shield attributed to the Ama- zons (see s.v. *ΚμΛζών) . The πέΧτη No. 56. in ii. I. 6 is probably corrupt, since there is no evidence that any of the Persian troops were anned with ττέΧται. In i. 10. 12 ττΑτι; is equivalent to δόρυ or \oyxv, unless the reading should be ταλτφ. τΓ€μΐΓταιθ9» α, ov [irivrc], on the Jifth day, of persons ; hence, of corpses, 9ισαν ττΐμιτταίοι, they had lain unburied five days, vi. 4.9. ΊΓ^μίΓτοδϊ 1?, 01/ [irivre], fifth, Lat. qulntus, iii. 4. 24, iv. 7. 21. ΐΓέμιτω, ιτέμψω, (Εττεμψα, ττέ- νομφα, ΐΓέΐΓ€μμαι, έττέμφθην, send, despatch, send icord, send a message, Lat. mitto, abs. or with ace, i. 9. 25, ii. 3. 1, iii. i. 27, iv. 3. 28, V. 5. 19, vi. 2. 7, vii. 3. 1 ; there may be added the dat. of pers., i. 3. 8, vii. i. 31, or wpbs, irapa or els and ace. of pers., i. I. 8, iv. 3. 27, v. 4. 2 or έττί or els and ace. of place, i. 10. 14, vii. 2. 24 ; the purpose is expressed by a fut. or pres. partic, i. 3. 14, V. 2. 10, vi. 1. 2, δτω? with a clause, iv. 7. 19, the inf., v. 2. 12, or Trpbs τοΰτο, vii. 2. 13. ΊΓ^νη?, ητοί, 6 [R. ίπτα], toiler, day-labourer, poor man, vii. 7. 28. wwtor-IUfrfm^m 174 175 «^ρ$ϊξ-^ριξ I ircvioi άί [R. 0Γ»α], poverty, narrow means, Lat. ρβηΰτΐα^ vii. 6. 20. ιτΙνομΑΐ [R. (|i» 176 177 IIcp(riKOs-ni [R. 2 Fip], overlook, ullow, suffer, permit, Lat. sino, with ace. of pers. and partic, vii. 3• 3, 7. 46. ircpitraros, ό [iraTos, 6, step, path, cf. Lat. passus, step, pace, perpe- tuus, uninterrupted, Eng. path, foot'PAB, peripatetic], a walking round, place for walking, walk, ii. 4. 15. «ιριντέτομίΗ [R. irfTJ, βι^ round, via I . ^tS. Ίκριπήγνϋμι [R. ιταγ], make freeze round; pass., be frozen round or on, iv. 5. 14. mpiirtirTtt» [R. ικτ], fall round, hence of persons, fall on to pro- tect, embrace, i. 8. 28 ; fall foul of, fall upon, vii. 3. 38. iTipiirXI» [R. trXcF], sail round, coast round, with dwo and elt, i. 2. 21» vii. I. 20. irfpiiroilw [iroUw], make remain over; mid., save for oneself, ac- quire, gain, v. 6. 17. «fpiirnkrorw (πτύσσω, wrvy-, •ΤΓτύξω, έπτυξα, -έτττυ^μΛΐ, -€πτύχθην, fold), fold round, enfold, outflank, i. 10. 9. ircpipp4i Ιβέω], flow round, en- circle, i. 5. 4 ; flow round and off, fall off from, of fetters, iv. 3. 8. ΊΓίρνσ-ταυρόω (σταυρόω, έσταύ- pioffa, -€σταύρωμαι, 4σταυρώθην [R. οΓτα], fence with pales), surround With a paling fence, plpf. pass., had been enclosed with a stockade, vii. 4. 14. ircpitrrcpii, m, dove, pigeon, Lat. columba, i. 4. 9. Ace. to the Syrian tradition the mythical queen Semir- amis, daughter of the Syrian god- dess Astarte, was changed into a dove. ι«ριτρ4χω Irpixio], run about, IV. 5. 8. ιηριττινω, iwepirTema [irep/], be over and above, of number, esp. as a military phrase, outnumber, out- flank, iv. 8. 11. iTipiTTdsi tJ, ov [τβρί], more than enough, superfluous, to spare, over and above, vii. 6. 31 ; subst., ol TtpiTToL, outflanking troops, iv. 8. 11; TO repiTTOv, surplus, v. 3. 13; τά ireptrrd, superfluous or unnec- essary articles, iii. 2. 28, 3. 1. ΐΓίρι,τυγχάνω [R. τακ], happen round, fall in with, meet, vi. 6. 7. ΐΓίριφανώδ, adv. [R. φα], visibly from every point, manifestly, nota- bly, iv. 5. 4. ιηριφ^ρω [R. φ«ρ], carry round, pass round, vii. 3. 24. ΐΓΐρ(ψοβο$, ov [0o/3o$], in great alarm, mtich frightened, iii. i. 12. nipXi|ftli• 180 irXovor((i»f, adv. [R. ιτλα], in wealth or riches, opulently, lit 2. 26; comp. πλουσιωτέρωί, i. 9. 16 (but some read the adj. in both passages). irXovrlt», χλοντ-ήσω, ίτΓλούτησα, τ€τ\ούτηκα [R. ιτλα], be rich, have richesr abs. or with gen., i. 9. 19, ii. 6.21, vii. 7. 28, 42. ΐΓλοιιτ(|α» (ιτλουτιδ-), τ€πλούτίκα [R. ιτλα], enrich, vii. 6. 9. trvfvpA, aros, to [iri'^ii;, cf. Eng. pneumatic, pneumonia^, vnnd, breeze, Lat. uentus, iv. 5. 4, vi. I. 14. W¥4m (rvv-), πνεν^ομαι and ri^i;- σοΰμαι, Ιττ^ευσ-α, ■r^wi'ci/ira [t/. Lat. jjuZmo, iuwijr], iiiow, of the wind, 1αΑ.βδ, iv. 5. 3, v. 7. 7. ιτνίγΜ (ΐΓΐ'ίγ-), -TTvt^w, ^in/tfa, ir^- πη-γμαι, -^τνί^ην, choke, strangle, pass., be drowned, v. 7, 25. iroSatros, ή, όν, of what country f where fromf where bornf Lat. cuius, iv. 4. 17. ιτοδήρΐ|ΐ, et [R. ireS + H. up], reaching to the feet, of shields, i. -iroSt^M (iroStS-), -τοίιώ, ire-ro- δισμαι, έτοδίσθην [R. ιηδ], ίί€ ίΑβ /eei, /eiier, hobble, of horses, iii. 4. 35. mB&Vf see irot/f . iroOiv, interr. adv., whence? where from? Lat. unde, v. 4. 7. ΊΓοθέν, indef. adv., enclitic, from somewhere or other, vi. 3. 15. iro04«», ττοθήσω, έιτόθ-ησα [iro'^of], long, yearn, with inf., vi. 4. 8. •irdOos, 0, longing, Lat. deside- riiim, with gen., iii. i. 3. «oi, indef. adv., enclitic, some- whither, somewhere or other, v. 1. 8, vi. 3. 10, vii. 2. 18. voiMi, ποιήσω, etc. [iroiiw], maJku, produce, create, construct, fashion, form, render, Lat. facid, i. 5. 5, 8. 18, 9. 19, ii. 2. 17, iii. i. 42, 2. 24, iv. I. 13, 5. 14, 8. 26, v. 2. 5, 3. 9, vi. 4. 9 ; with two aces., one of which may be an adj., i. i. 2, 7. 7, 9. 6, iii: I. 4, 5. 17, v. 4. 18, vii. 7. 47 ; bring about, effect, cause^ with inf., ώστ€ and inf., or ace. and inf., i. 6. 2, 6, 7. 4, ii. 6. 14, iv. i. 22, V. 7. 27, vii. 8. 14; suppose, imagine, Lat. facio, ρδηδ, with ace. and inf., v. 7. 9 ; do, act, per- form, accomplish, inflict, with ace. or freq. with an adv., i. i. 11, 4. 5, 5.8, ii. 5.33, 6.9, iii. i.28, iv.8.6, vi. 6. 18, vii. i. 8 ; with two aces., i. 9, 11, ii. ς. 5, iii. 2. 3, v. 7. 10, or an ace. and an adv., i. 4. 8, 6. 7, ii. 3. 23, V. 5. 9. Mid., in most of the above senses but denoting that one does a thing in his own interest or has it done for him by another, i. 10. 9, ii. 3. 18, iii. 2. 36, iv. 8. 15, V. 3. 5, 6, 5. 12, vi. 3. 21, vii. 8. 16 ; often with an obj. so used that it ft>rms one idea with the verb, as ri/y TTopeii» hroutro = iirop€U€To, i. 7. 20, cf. i. 1.6, 2. 9, 5. 9, iii. 3. 5, V. 4. 3, 8. 1. Phrases with the mid. : see esp. deivos, €υρημΛ, ό\1- yoi, vepl. ΐΓθΐητέο$) ο, 01», verbal [ιτοι^ω], to be done, or impers., one must do, the agent, when expressed, be- ing in the dat., i. 3. 15, iii. i. 18, 35, vi. 4. 12. itoikCXosi η, ov [root iriiCi cf Lat. pingd, paint), variegated, party- coloured, of many colours, Lat. uarius, i. 5. 8 ; of tattooing, v. 4. 32. iroKof, a, ov, interr. pron., of what nature? of what sort? what kind of a? what?, Lat. qudlis, used in dir. and indir. questions, ii. 5. 7, 13, iii. I. 14, vii. 6. 24. . iroXf μ^<ι>, 7ro\e/iiJi. Comp. irXeiwii, more, greater,wixh the same mean- ings, in general, as above, ii. i. 20, iv. I. 11, 6. 9, 7. 23, v. 6. 5, vii. 6. 16 ; with η, than, I 3. 7, 5. 13, vii. 7. 36 ; neut. as adv^, πλ€Ϊον or πλέον, more, more highly, in greater de- gree, 1 4. 14, V. 4. 31, vi. 3. 18 ; with gen. or η, than, i. 2. 11, iii. 2. 34, 3. 11, iv. 2. 28, 6. 11. Phrases: ix πλίΐονος or πλέονος ttfrnrfop, they fled when at a greater distance, I 10. 11 ; irepi ir\e/ows or πλέονοί ποΐ€Ϊσθαι, see π€ρΙ, Sup. πΤ^βΐστος, most, in greatest number, often strengthened by us or Urt, i. i. 6, Ii. 4. 6, iv. 6. 1 ; subst., oi πλ€Ϊστοι or πλείστοι, most, most of them, i. 5. 2, 13, y. 2. 14, vii. 4. 6 ; neut. as adv., πλ€ΐ<ττον, πλείστα, generally, mostly, chiefly, iii. 2. 31, vii. 6. 35. Phrases: ώ? πλείστον, as far as possible, ii. 2. 12; π€ρΙ πλείστου ποΐ€Ϊσθαι, see irepi. IIoXwTpaTos, ά, Polystratus, fa- ther of the AthenianLycius, iii. 3. 20. difficulty, Lat. moleste, iii. 4. 19. wdws, δ [R. oiro], hard work, labour, toil, hardship, Lat. labor, ii. 5. 18, iii. 1. 12, vi. 2. 10. Phrase : τού$ -ημετέρου πόνους ^χ€ί, he gets the benefits of all our toil, vii. 6. 9. irdvTos, δ, sea ; in Anab. always Iloirros, the Black or Euxine Sea, with or without Ei/|eiws (q.v.), iv. 8. 22, V. I. 16, 7. 7, vi. 4. 1, vii. ς. 12. t » :> IldvTos, 6, Pontus, v. 6. 15, a general term applied in the Anab. to the countries lying along the southern coast of the Euxine, esp. to those east of Paphlagonia. This part, with the northern half of Cap- padocia, after Alexander's time be- came a kingdom, and under the Romans a province. vopcta, OS [R. trip], a going, trav- elling, journey, march, i. 7. 20, ii. 2. 10, iii. I. 6, iv. 5. 35, pi, vii. 3. 37 ; with ^i and ace., iii. 4. 44. vopcvrlos, ά, ov, verbal [R. inp], that must be traversed or crossed. Ii. 5. 18; impers., πορευτίον, one must cross or traverse, Lat. eundum est, ii. 2. 12, iv. i. 2, 5. 1. iropcvw, πορεύσω, έπόρευσα [R. iKp], make go, but these act. forms are rare in prose, and in Anab. the verb is a pass, dep., πορεύομαι, πορεύ- σομαι, έπορεύθην, go, move, travel^ march, walk, march on, advance, Lat. iter facid, abs. and freq. with advs., i. 2. 1, 3. 4, 9. 28, ii. 2. 14, iii. I. 7, iv. 4. 16, v. 3. 1, vi. 3. 26, vii. I. 10; with «s, παρά, έπί, or irpos and ace. of pers., i. 2. 4, 3. 7, ii. I. 4, vi. 6. 19 ; with εΙς, έπί, παρά, or irpos and ace. of place, iii. 4. 41, V. 4. 30, 7. 6, vii. 8. 7 ; with άπό, έκ, διά, or παρά and gen., i. 5. 4, iv. 4. 17, 5. 10, V. 4. 2, vi. 2. 4 ; often with cognate ace, ii. 4. 13, iii. 4. 46, iv. 4. 1. tropO^o», πορθήσω, etc. [^πέρθω, sackl, ravage, waste, plunder, lay waste, Lat. depopulor, v. 7. 14, vii. 7. 3, 12. ΐΓθρ(ζω (ποριδ-), ποριω, έπόρισα, πεπόρικα, πεπόρισμαι, έπορίσθην [R. ΐΓ€ρ], bring, bring to, bring about, provide, supply, Lat. praebeo, ii. 3. δ, iii. 3. 20, 5. 8, v. 6. 5, vii. 3. 10 ; mid., supply oneself with, get, ob- tain, Lat. paro, ii. i. 6, iii. i. 20, V. I. 6. iropos, ό [R. irfp], means oj pass- ing, of a river, ford, Lat. uadum, iv. 3. 13, 20 ; means, \oqy in general, hence, πόρους προς τό ΰμΛν πολερχιν, means of waging war on you, ii. 5. 20. ιτόρρω, adv. [irpo], far off, afar; with gen. of pers., far from, Lat. procul, i. 3. 12, iii. 4. 35. 'rop4>vp€Os, Vt ov, contr. ιτορφυ- poOs, a, οΰν [cf. πορφύρα, purple- fish, Eng. porphyry], dark red, purple, i. 5. 8. iros, interr. adv. [πότερος^, in which of the two ways? followed by e/ . . . ^ εΐ, vii. 7. 30, 33, 34. ΊΓΟτήριον, TO [R. 1Γ0], drinking cup, beaker, vi. i. 4. iroTOv, TO [R. tro], drink, i. 10. 18, esp. in the phrase σΐτα καΐ ποτά^^ eatables and drinkables, food ana drink, ii. 3. 27, iii. 2. 28, vii. i. 33. ιτότοβ, δ [R. iro], a drinking, drinking party, symposium, ii. 3. 15, vii. 3. 26. iroO, interr. adv., where? Lat. ubi, ii. 4. 15, V. 8. 2. irov, indef. adv., enclitic, any- where, somewhere, of place, i. 2. 27, ii. 2. 15, iii. 4. 23, iv. 5. 8, v. 6. 17 ; to modify an assertion, as έπί- στασθέ που, you know, of course, Lat. opinor, v. 7. 13. irovSf τοδός, δ [R. treS], foot, Lat. pes, i. 5. 3, iv. 5. 12, v. 8. 15, vii. 4. 4; as a measure, shorter than the English foot, equal to .296 vp&Y|ui-^fiC7p^hn]t 184 185 irpCcurOai-«f»ocCtrov metiee, or about 11.65 inches, i. 2. 0| U• ^• l^f 111. 4• 7. The table of Attic linear meas- ure is as follows : iro^f li β 100 600 W^XVi 4 400 dfyyvia 16| 100 6 fmv Phrases: τά wpb xoSQvj Lat. ante pedesj what is right before one, iv. 6. 12; iwl roda, see άναχωρέω^ v. 2. ΟΛ, Ίτραγμα, ατοί, rrf [ιτράττω, cf. Fjng. pragmatic^, thing doiie, deed, action, fact, affair, business, Lat. rm, negotium, i. 5. 15, v. 6. 28, 7. 18, vii. I. .17; in a bad sense, troublesome matter, trouble, diffi- culty, annoyance, i. 3. 3, it. i. 16, iv. I. 17, V. 5. 8, vi. 3. 6; pi., gov- ernment, state, vii. 2. 32. Phrases : ιτρά-γματα ταρέχΐΐν with dat., give or cause trouble, Lat. negotium facessere, i. i. 11, iv. i. 22, 2. 27 ; ουδέν €ίη τραΎμα, nothing was the patter, vi. 6. 8. Ίτράγμα'ηνομαι,, έτρα-γματ^σά* μ^ν, ΊΓ€Τ(Μ.Ύμάτ€νμΛΐ, έΐΓράΎματ€ν- %F lΈ■payμa], busy oneself in; Ίτρά'γμΛΤΐυόμζνο^ ayaSbv ϋμΰν. Striv- ing to compass some ben^t for you, vii. 6. 35. Ίτράνής, ^5 [irpd], bent forward, Lat. pronus; of descents, head- long, steep, Lat. praeceps, i. 5. 8, V. 2. 28. Phrases: els τό -πρανές, straight down hill, iii. 4. 25 ; κατά TOW wpavom, down along the in- cline,^ iv. 8. 28, vi. 5. 31. irp&|is, cw5, ij [ιτράττω], a doing, undertaking, enterprise, business, i. 3. 16, 18, ii. 6. 17, vi. 2. 9 ; in a bad sense, scheme, collusion, vii. Ο• jL f • irp^LOS, €ia, ov, gen. pi. τραέων, mild, of fish, tame, i. 4. i). irpdrxtt {wpay-), πράξω, ίίτραξα, virpaya or ιτ^χραχα, ^ΓέΊrράyμa^^ έττράχθην [cf. Eng. practice}, bring to pass, carry out, perform, accom- plish, fulfil, do, act, negotiate, Lat. facio, abs. or with ace, ii. 2. 2, 18, 5. 21, iii. I. 14, v. 4. 20, 6. 28, vi. i. 18, vii. 6. 8, 32 ; with irepi and gen. of pers. or thing, i. 6. 0, v. 6. 28, vii. 2. 12 ; with ϋττέρ and gen. of pers., vi. 6. 18; effect, exact from some one, witli two aces., vii. 6. 17; intr., be in a state or condition, do, fare, esp. with, advs., as eiJ ττράτ- T€iv, be fortunate or successful, vii. 6.11, 7.42; koKws ιτράττειν, prosper, iii. 1.6, cf. i. 9. 10; ούτω Trpa^atn-es, with this result, iii. 4. 6 ; so with adjs., vi. 4. 8, and rels., as ά νράτ- Tot, how he fared, vii. 4. 21, cf. vii. 6.31. irp4ft»s, adv. [ttp^osJ, mildly, lightly, i. 5. 14. irpiiro», τρέψω, ΐ(πρ€φα, befitting, become, suit, with dat., iii. 2. 7; impers., it is fitting or proper, Lat. decet, with inf., iii. 2. 16, so in the phrase ^irci τ^ ifXiKig. iirpeve, when he loas of suitable age, i. 9. 6. irpccrp<(a, ay Ινρ€σβ€ύω'}, em- bassy, Lat. legatio, vii. 3. 21. vfMO-pc^w, τΓρ€σβ€Οσω, ένρ€σβ€υ- σάμην, π€ΊΓρέσβ€υκα [πρέσβυ^], he ambassador, go as envoy, vii. 2. 23, 7. 6 ; with παρά and gen. of pers., n. I. 18. ΐΓρ^σ-βυ$, €wi, ό [c/. Eng. presby- ter, priest], old, reverend, Lat. senex, poetic ; as adj. in Anab. only in comp. and sup., πρ€σβύτ€ροί, πρ€σβύτατο$, i. I. 1, ii. i. 10, 3. 12, iii. 2. 37, vii. 4. 5; as subst., in prose always pi., πρέσββίί, ol, am- bassadors, envoys, chosen for their age and standmg in a community, Lat. legdti, iii. i. 28, v. 5. 7, 6. 13, vi. 2. 5. Ίτρίσ-βύηΐζ, ου [πρέσβη'], old man, Lat. senex, vi. 3. 10. trpCoo-Oai, 2 aor. mid. inf., from indie, έπριάμην, buy, used in Attic for aor. of ωνέομαι, opt. πρίαίμην, partic. πpιάμevos, ii. 3. 20, iii. i. 20, vi. 4. 22; with gen. of price, i. 5.6. irpiv, temporal conj. [irpv-irp6s νρΜλαύνο» [AoiJw], intr. nde oeforcy march on before, push on, 1. lo. 16, vi. 3. 14, 22. «ρο€ργ45ομαι [R. ριργ], wjorA; or do beforehand. Phrase: ri^v τρο- €ΐρτ/ασμένιην δόξαν, glory already won, Lat. gldriam ante partam, vi I. 21. ^ΡΟ^Ρχομαι [άρχομαι], go before or flrsty advance before another, go forward, advance, march on, proceed, u. 3. 3, iii. 3. β, 4. 37: with ace. aradiovs, vii. 3. 7 ; with elf or κατά and ace., iv. 2. 16, vii. 2. 1. wpoipfi, used as fut. of τροΧ^ω [R. 1 Ftp], tell beforehand, tmrn, caution, vii. 7. 13, cf, 3. ιτροίχ» [R. ο-ιχ], have the ad- vantage of, iii. 2. 19. νροηγ&,^αι [R. ογ], lead for- ward, lead on, with cognate ace, VL 5. 10. ' «ροηγορ^ω [άγιίρω], speak for, be spokesman, v. 5. 7. ιτροβΙ» [^|ίω], r«» forward or aAead, v. 8. 13. ιτροίΚίμ^ομαι, ττροθνμήσομαι and ζροθνμηθήνομαι, νμουθνμήθην [R. 1 βν], δβ read!/, eager, zealous or earnest, desire, wish earnestly, Lat «ίικίβό, abs. or with inf., i. 9. 24, 11. 4• 7, iii. I. 9, 4. 15, vii. - ^7; flfire special attention, v. 4. 22 (but here probably read Toofft- €σ&αι). νροβΰμίο, as [R. 1 0v], readi- ness, eagerness, zeal, good will, Lat. studium, I 9. 18; with wepl and ace. of pers., vii. 6. 11, 7; 4o. ' νρόβίμοβ, 01^ [R. 1 9v], ready, willing, devoted, eager, zealous, well wishing, Lat. studiosus, i. 3. 19, 4. 15, 7. 8, iii. 2. 15. ^ ΐΓροβ^μ««, adv. [R. 1 fv], read- ily, wdlmgly, eagerly, zealously, 1. 4. 9, Hi. 1. δ, V. 2. 2, vii. 7. «L wpoWe» [R. 2 βυ], eacrOfce ft^. /ore; mid., offer a sacnUce before an event, as a battle or expedition offer a preliminary sacrifice, 1. 7. 18,vi. 4. 22. ' Ίτροίημι [Ϊι7/μ], send forth ; mid., fiTive oweee?/ wp, ^jrwe owr, entrust, surrender, abs., or with ace, i. o. 9, 12, V. 8. 14, vii. 3. 31. Phrase : του% σοι προ€μένους eoepyefflav, those who have bestowed kind offices on you, vii. 7. 47. ιτροίίΓτημι [R. στα], put at the head of; intr. in pf., 2 pf., and pipf. act., stand at the head of, command, be chief of Lat. prae- mm, with gen., i. 2. 1, vi. 2. 9, 6. . 12, vu. 2. 2. ιτροκαίω or -κάο> [κοίωΐ, burn in front of Yil 2. 18. w^oKoKim [R. καλ], call forth; mid., call forward to oneself, with iK and gen., vii. 7. 2. ιτροκαλύίΓΓω (καλύπτω, καλυβ-, καλύψω, έκάλυψα, κ€κάλνμμαι, 4κα- λύφθην, cover^, put a cover before, cover up, iii. 4. 8. ιτροκαταβί» {θέω'], run along in advance, vi. 3. 10. ΐΓροκατακα£» or -xd» [καίω] burn down before one, i. 6. 2. * ιτροκατολαμβάνω [λαμβάι^ω], oc- cupy or seize before another, pre- occupy, of strong positions, i. 3. 14, 11. 5. 18, iii. 4. 38, iv. I. 25. ΐΓρ6κ€ΐμαι [«ίμαι], lie in front, jut out, of a position on a coast, with iv and dat, vi. 4. 3. irp«Kiv8vv«v« [κ(νδννο«], bear the first risk, brave danger for an- other, vii. 3. 31. Προκλής, iovi, 6, Procles, gover- nor of Teuthrania, a descendant of Demaratus of Sparta, friendly to the Greeks, ii. i. 3, 2. 1, vii. 8. irpoicptvw [κρίνω'], choose before others, prefer, vi. i. 26. •Β-ρολέγαι [R. λ€γ], declare pub- licly, give public orders or warn- ing, with dat. and inf., vii. 7. 3. (As fut. τρο€ρω, aor. wpoeiwop, q.v.j ιτρομαχιών, Qvos, 6 [R. μαχΐ, rampart, battlement, Lat. prdpuq- ndculum, vii. 8. 13. νρομ«τωαΓί8ιον, τό [^R. oir] , front- let, armour worn on a horse*s fore- head, i. 8. 7. No. 58. νρομνάομαι (μνάομαι, έμνησάμην [R. μα], court), sue for one, solicit, vii. 3. 18. νρονο^ομαΐι νρονοήσομαι, τρουνοη- σάμηνΆΤΐά ιτρουνοήθηρ [Έ,.^νω], take thought for, provide for, vii. 7. 37 ; with gen., vii. 7. 33. ιτρόνοια, OS [R. ^νω], forethought, prudent care, vii. 7. 52. ιτρονομή, ^s [R. ν€μ], a foraging, foraging party, v. i. 7. ΐΓροξ€ν^ω, τΓροξ€ν'ήσω, Ίτρουξένησα [l^vos], be one^s irpo^epos, hence manage anything for one, bring about, in a bad sense, put upon, vi. 5. 14. irpo^vosi ό [l^vos], public ξένο^, the citizen of a state who was appointed by a foreign state to manage its business in his coun- try' and to protect such of its cit- izens as went thither, somewhat resembling our consul, but almost always, it should be observed, a citizen of the state where he per- formed his duties. The proxenus received many honours and dis- tinctions from the state which he represented, v. 4. 2, 6. 11. Πρό|€νο$,ό, Proa;ewM«, a Theban, ii. 1 . 10, pupil of Gorgias, ii. 6. 16, ξένο$ of Cyrus, i. i. 11, to whom he brought troops, i. 2. 3, and one of whose generals he was, command- ing the centre of the Greeks at Cunaxa, i. 8. 4. After the death of Cyrus, he v/as entrapped and killed with the other generals, ii. 5. 31 ff. Xenophon, his ξένοί, v. 3. 5, was induced by him to join the expedition, iii. i. 4 ff., and suc- ceeded to his command, iii. i. 47; his character, ii. 6. 16 ff. See also i. 5. 14, 10. 5, ii. 4. 15. ιτροιτέμπω [ττ^/χχω], send for- ward or ahead, send on, de- spatch, ii. 2. 15, iv. 4. 5, V. 8. 9 ; with έττί and ace, vii. 2. 8 ; con- duct, attend, vi. i. 23; mid., send on before oneself, vii. 2. 14. vpoirtv» [R. 1Γ0], drink before another, drink a health, pledge, the custom being that the person pledging should first himself drink, and then pass the cup, with dat. of pers., iv. 5. 32, vii. 2. 23, 3. 26, 27. trpoirov^» [R. onra], loork before or for another, toil for, iii. i. 37. trpds, prep, with gen., dat., and ace. , confronting, at, by. A sur- vival of its original adverbial use appears in irpos δ* in, besides, iii. 2. 2. "With gen., sometimes with pass, verbs much like ύνό, by, from, in the judgment of, i. 9. 20, ii. 3. 18, iii. i. 5, vii. 6. 33, 39, with adjs., in the sight of, i. 6. 6, ii. 5. 20, V. 7. 12 ; of place, on the side of, towards, Lat. ab, ii. 2. 4, iv. 3. 26 ; expressing what is nat- ural in some one, where the Greeks said from, from the point of view of the terminus d quo, illustrated in all of the above examples, as ούκ ^p vpbs τοΰ Ktpov τρόττου, it was not 188 in Oprm's character ^ i. 2. 11 ; in oaths, by, Lat. per, ii. i. 17, iii. i. 24, V. 7. 5, vii. 6. 33. With dat., facing, by^ near, beside, at, i. 2. 10, 8. 4, 14, ii. 3. 4, iv. 5. 9, 22, v. 4. 25, vii. 2. 14, 3. 21 ; besides, in addition to, iii. 2. 33, 4. 13, vii. 6. 32. With ace, with verbs of motion or im- plied motion, or of address, eic, to, towards, before, at, Lat. in, i. i. 3, 5, 2. 1, 5. 7, ii. 3. 9, 6. 12, iii. 3. 2, 4. 28, 5. 15, iv. 2. 25, v. 6. 31, vi. 4. 4 ; ma hostile sense, against, upon, i. 3. 21, 9. 6, ii. 6. 10, iv. 6* 11, 25, V. 4. 14 ; denoting inter- course or relation, with, i. i. 10, iii. 5. 16, vii. 3. 16; with regard to, about, touching, i. 4. 9, iv. 3. 10, vii. I. 9, 7. 30; in comparison to, vii. 7. 41 ; of purpose or end, for, i. 10. 19, ii. 3. 11, 5. 20, iv. 3. 31 ; of time, about, towards, iv. 5. 21. Plirases : irpos ταΟτα, in reply to this, thereupon, i. 3. 19, 20, ii. 3. 21, vii. 6. 23; irpos φιλίάν, in a friendly manner, i. 3. 19; irpbs αύλον, to the music of the flute, vi. i. 5, 8. In com- position wpos signifies to, towards, against, besides, in addition to. νροσ-άγο» [R. αγ], lead to, lead against, iv. 6.21 ; with els and ace, vi. I. 14 ; make approach, apply to, employ J iv. i. 23; intr., lead on^ march forward, advance, iv. 8. 11 ; with Tpds and ace, i. 10. 9, v. 2. 8. 'ΐΓ(κκΓαιτέω [alWw], ask in addi- tion, ask for more, i. 3. 21, vii. 6. 27 ; with two aces., vii. 3. 31. trpuaravakia-Kt» Γάνάλ/ο-κω], M>end besides, vi. 4. 8. trpoo-avitirov [cliroy], announce besides, command further, vii. i. 11. νροο-βαίνω [R. po], step to or upon, with tt/ws and ace, iv. 2. 28. irpoo*p4XXw [βάλλω], strike or throw against; intr., hurl (one- self) against, make an attack, charge, storm, abs. or with vpos and ace, iv. 2. 11, 6. 13, v. 2. 4, vi. 3. 7. νροο•βατ6§, τ}, oV [R. βα], that can be approached, accessible, iv. 3. 12, 8. 9. νροσ-βολή, ^s [βάλλω], assault, charge, in. 4. 2. ■ιτρο<τγ(γνομαι [R. γιν], come to, join, attach oneself to, as an ally, iv. 6. 9, vii. I. 28, 6. 29. 7τρθ(Γδαν€(ζομαι (δαν€ίξΌμΛΐ, Sa- ¥€ίδ-, δαν€ίσομΛΐ, έδανασάμην, δεδά- yei^/Mtt [R. δο], borrow), borrow besides, vii 5. δ. ιτροσδιΐ [R. δ«], there is nerd besides, there is still need, with gen. of thing and dat. of pers., iii. 2. 34, V. 6. 1. Ίτροσδ^ομαι [R. Bt], need or be in want of besides, with gen., vii. 6. 27 ; want, strive for, with gen., vi. I. 24. Ίτροσ-δίδωμι [R.eo], give besides, i. 9. 19. ιτροσ-δοκάω, προσΐδόκησα (the simple δοκάω does not occur), ex- pect, look for, with ace and inf., iii. I. 14, vi. i. 16, vii. 6. 11. ιτροσδοκβΐ [R. δοκ], it seems good or is approved besides, iii. 2. 34. irfMio-cifLi [ei/it], come to, come up, approach, advance, abs., i. 5. 14, 7. 5, ii. 2. 17, iv. i. 16, 8. 12, vii. 7. 67 ; with dat. or wpoi and ace of pers., ii. 4. 2, v. 6. 31, vi. i. 19; with els or Tpos and ace of place, iii. 4. 33, iv. 7. 7, vii. 6. 24. ΐΓροσ-€λαννω [^λαιίνω], drive towards; intr., ride towards, ride against, iii. 4. 39, iv. 4. 5, vi. 3. 7 ; march on, march against, i. 5. 12, 7. 16, iii, 5. 13. ιτροσφχομαι [άρχομαι'], come to, come up, approach, advance, draw near, abs., i. 8. 1, ii. i. 8, iv. 2. 7, vi. 1. 8, vii. I. 33 ; with dat. of pers., iii. 5. 8, iv. 3. 10, vii. 1.8; with et'y and ace, iv. 4. 5 ; of soldiers, go over to, with dat., i. 3. 9. ΐΓροσ«νχομαι [cSxo/iot], pray to, offer tip votes to, with dat., vi. 3. 21. Ίτροσ-έχω [R. σ•χ], hold ίο /"in Anab. always in the phrase τροσέ- Xeiv rbv νουν, apply the mind to, pay attention to, give heed to, be 189 ■ιτροο-ή κω -irpou t άτΐ)$ intent on (see wOs), Lat. animum intendere, abs. or with dat., i. 5. 9, ii. 4. 2, iv. 2. 2, vi. 3. 18, vii. 8. 16 ; without νουν, V. 6. 22, vii. 6. 5. ιτροσ-ήκω [^ica;], have come to, reach, with i-n-L and ace, iv. 3. 23 ; of persons, belong to, be related to, cf. Lat. prop'mquus, with dat., i. 6. 1 ; impers., it belongs to, it is fitting, proper, seemly, Lat. decet, with dat. or ace and inf., iii. 2. 11, 15, 16, vii. 7. 18. Phrase: τούτφ TTJs Βοιωτ /os προσ•ήκ€ΐ ουδέν, he has nothing to do with Boeotia, iii. i. 31. irpooq.ov, sup. 1>φστον, with inf., ii. 6. 24, iv. 6. 12, vi. 5. 29. ρ<Ι^8(ω$, adv. [βφ^ίοί], easily, with- out difficulty, iii. 5. 9, vii. 2. 34 ; sup. «s ρφστα, with the greatest of ease, iv. 6. 10. *Ραθίνη8, ου, Bhathiues, one of the officers of Pharnabazus, vi. 5. 7. ^θνμ^ω [Ι)4θυμΛ$, easy-going, cf ρφδιοί 4- R. 1 0v], take things easily, live in idleness, ii. 6. 6. ^^θνμ(ά, ά$ [cf Ιίς.θϋμέω'], easy- going ways, indifference, laziness, ii. 6. 5. ^^v, ^^xrroVf see p^Sios. ^(Γτώνη, Tjs [βφστος, cf pgStos], easiness of disposition, indolence, indifference, v. 8. 16. ^ω (^υ-), ρεύσομαι or ^υήσομΛΐ, poetic ίρρ€υσα, έρρύηκα, aor. pass, as act. έρρύην [cf. Eng. cata-rrh, rheum'], flow, run, of a stream, Lat. fluo, with άτό or διά and gen. or ^iri and dat., i. 2. 7, 23, 4. 4, 7. 15, vi. 4. 4. /λήτρα, as [R. 1 ψ^ρ], verbal agree- ment, compact, ordinance, vi. 6. 28, a word applied in Sparta to the laws of Lycurgus. ^t-yosi om, TO [cf. Lat. frlgus, cold], cold, frost, v. 8. 2. jitiTT» or in pres. and impf. ^ϊ- irWo» (}ίφ-)^ pH^^i ^ρρϊψα^ ίρρίφα, ip- ρϊμμαι, έρρίφθην and έρρίφ-ην, throw, cast, toss, Lat. iacid, iii. 3. 1, iv. 8. 3, vii. 3. 22 ; throw off or away, cast aside or down, hurl down, i. 5. 8, iv. 7. 13. ^it-o^vi'y{ 194 ^ts, ^ti^s, if [, ^φήσοβΜΐ, ίρρόφησα [root σ-ορφ, cf. Lat. sorbeo, suck wjp], sup upj lap, suck in, iv. 5. 32. H'iMif, ό [βέω, cf. Eng. rhythm], measured movement, musical time, rhythm, of singing, playing, and dancing, Lat. numerus; iv ρυθμψ, in time, v. 4. 14, vi. i. 8, 10; irpos TOP ivowXtov 1>υθμόν, in martial rhythm, vi. i. 11 ; βυθμoύs σαλτ/^ορ- Tcs, keeping time mth the trumpet, vii. 3. 32. ^Φμα, aros, τό [cf. έρύω, draw"], thing drawn, with τόξου, bow- string. Phrase: ^(ά, as, Selybria, a small town on the Propontis west of By- zantium and subject to that city, irii 2. 28, 5. 15. (SiUvri.) «τημιαίνω (σιιμαν-), σημΛρώ, ia-ff- μηνα, σεσήμχισμαι, έσημΛνθην [σ^/ΑΟ, sign], give or make a ngn, shoio by sign, vii. 2. 18, esp. in military phrases, give the signal, Lat. sig- num da, iv. 3. 32, vii. 4. 16, freq. without subj. (c/. σαλτί^ω), σημαί- νει, the signal is given,, abs., with inf., with σάλίΓίγγι for attack or recall, and κ4μάτι for *taps,' ii. 2. 4, iii. 4. 4, iv. 2. 1, v. 2. 12, 30, vi. f. 25, vii. 3. 32 ; indicate, make nown, inform, Lat. ostendd, vi. 3. 15, vii. 3-43; instruct, order, δ. I. 2 ; of the will of gods made known by signs, signify, declare, with dat. of pers. and inf., vi. i. 24, 2. 15. niiMtov, rh [οΓ^μα, sign'\, sign, token, mark, trace, Lat. slgnum, vi. 2. 2 ; signal to do a thing, ii. 5. 32 ; ensign, standard, i. 10. 12. «Ίί)04μινο«, 77, 0» [σήααμον], of sesame, made of sesame, iv. 4. 13. «τήσαμον, τ6 [cf Eng. $eaame'], sesame, pi. sesame seeds, i. 2. 22, vi. 4. 6. The sesame (sesamum orieMalisy is an oily plant, native of the East, from the seeds of which is made an oil that serves for food, medicine, and ointment. σΐγάζ» (σιγαδ-) [σϊγι}], make silent, silence, vi. i. 32. σ-ϊγάω, σϊ-γήσομαι, etc. [σίγι^], be silent, hold one's peace, v, 6. 27. σϊγή, ^$, silence, Lat. silentium, ii. 2. 20 ; dat. as adv., ffiyy, in si• lence, i. 8. 11, iv. 2. 7. o-CyXot, 6, sights, a silver coin, worth ^X^ of a Persian talent ; a Persian drachma, worth 7| Attic obols, i. ς. 6. See μνα and όβολόί. σίδ^ρ€(α, άί [c/. σιδηροΰί}, work- ing in iron, as a trade, v. 5. 1. σι8ήρ€0$, α, ov, contr. σι.8ηρον$, α, οΰν [opos, OP [R. οτκυ + R. φ«ρ]ί baggage-carrying, of persons, subst., o'l σκευοφόροι, carriers, por- ters, Lat. calones, iii. 2. 28 ; τά σκευοφόρα, the baggage train, i. 3. 7, iii. 2. 36, iv. 3. 25, vii. 2. 22_; pack animals, sumpters, Lat. iu- menta, iii. 3. 19. σκηνέω, σκηνήσω, έσκήρησα [R. σ-κα], be in tents, be in quarters or in camp, be quartered, abs. or with ip and dat., or with an adv., i. 4. 9, iv. 4. 14, 7. 27, 8. 25, vi. i. 1, 4. 7, vii. 4. 12 ; hence, be billeted, take one's meals, feast, iv. 5. 33 ; in the aor. go into camp, encamp, with εί$ or παρά and ace, ip with dat. , or with an adv., ii. 4. 14, iv. 2. 22, vi. 5. 21, vii. 3. 15, 7. 1. οΓκηνή, ^s [R. «Γκα], covered place, of soldiers, tent, Lat. tento- rium, made of hides (i. 5. 10) stretched on a wooden framework, i. 2. 17, 4. 3, 6. 4, iii. 2. 27, iv. 4. 21, vi. 4. 19 ; pi., sometimes, camp, quarters, bivouac, iii. 5. 7 (the tents had been burnt, iii. 2. 27, 3. 1)• ΟΓίαινόω, έσκήνωσα, -εσκ-ήρωκα [R. σ-κα], pitch tents, encamp, go into |ι> αηιήνιΐ|ΐαΓ-ΧόλΜ 198 199 0ΓΟβ-σΐΓον8ή ; quarters^ Lat. castra ρδηδ, abs. or with iv and dat, or κατά and ace, iv, 5. 2S, V. 7. 31, vii. 4. 11 ; also like «riciji^w, be in camp^ be quar- tered, with iv and dat., v. 5. 11, 20,21. (τκήν«ΐ|ΐΜλ, arof, ro [R. rica], tent, ii.'2. 17; pi., qtmrters, kousesy vii. 4. 16. σκηίΓΓύ?, ό, thunder-boU, Lat. fulmen, iii. i. 11. riai|irroi}xoS) ύ [σκητττον = (γ«^- iTT/wr, sceptre, cf. Eng. sceptre, + R. «xj, sceptre-bearer, wand- No. 63. bearer, a high officer in the Persian court, chamberlain, marshal, cf. the English Usher of the Black Rod, I 6.11, 8.28. Σκιλλοΰς, ovtrros, 6, Scillus, a town in the district of Triphylia in Elis, south of Olympia, detached from the territory of Elis by the Spar- tans in 394 B.C. Here Xenophoii {q.v.) had an estate, presented to him by the Spartans about 387 b.c. V. 3. 7, 8. «ΓκίμίΓους, oSos, d, a low bed 0Γ coMch, vi. I. 4. σ'κληρό$, d, OP [c/. Eng. scle- rotic], hard, rough, Lat. diirus. Phrase : ^i' σκΧηρψ, in a rough or uneven place, iv. 8. 26. ο-κληρ«*«, adv. [ir [δλί^ω], gather together, collect, vii. 3. 48. (τυναλλάττω (άλλάττω, άλλαγ-, αλλάξω, ^λλαξα, -ι/λλαχα, jjWay- μαι, -ηλΧάχθηρ οτ ήλλά-γηρ [oXXos], change), change so as to bring to- gether, reconcile; pass., be recon- ciled, come to terms mth, with irpos and ace, i. 2. 1. σνναναβα(νω [R. βα], go up with, V. 4. 16 ; march inland with, with dat., i. 3. 18. <ΓνναναΐΓραττω [tr ράττώ], help exact, with ττορά and gen. of pers., vii. 7. 14. σ-υναν£σ-τημι [R. στα], make stand up together; intrans. 2 aor., stand up with, rise icith, vii. 3. 35. συναντάω, συνήντ-ησα [αντί], meet icith, meet, abs. or with dat., i. 8. 15, vii. 2. 5. σννάΐΓϋμι. [e?AiOi 9^ away with, go off together, ii. 2. 1. συναίΓολαμβάνω [λαμβάνω], re- ceive in common, or at the same time, of what is due, vii. 7. 40. συνάιττω [άττω], join together; of battle, with μάχην and dat. of pers., engage in battle, Lat. proe- lium committd, i. 5. 16. συνάρχα» [άρχω], rule jointly with, command with, with dat. of pers. and gen. of thing, vi. i. 32. σνν8€ΐΐΓνος| ό [R. δα], companion at dinner, guest at dinner, Lat. conulua, ii. 5. 27, iv. 5. 28, vi. i. 30. συνδιαβαίνω [R. βα], cross over together, cross with others, vii. i. 4. σηινδιαιτράττω [πράττω], accom- plish with ; mid., negotiate loith at the same time, with ύιτέρ and gen., iv. 8. 24. συνδοκέω [R. δοκ], seem good also, be approved also, with dat. of pers., vi. 5. 9. σννδνο [δυο], two at once, two by two, vi. 3. 2. σνν^δραμον, see συρτρέχω. συν€θέλω [^^Αω], icish with one, consent, favour, with dat. of pers. and inf., vi. i. 32. σνν€ΐδον [R. Ρ^δ], see at once or ai a glaniCe, observe, mark, i. 5. 9. οηιν€ΐλ€-γμ4νοΐ| see συλλ^ω. σνν€ΐ.λημμ4νοι, σ-υν€ΐλήψάσι, see συΧΧα,μβάνω. (Γυν€ΐμι. [R. €σ], he mth; subst., ol avvovres, associates, acquaint- ances, ii. 6. 20, 23. Phrase : συνηρ ^Ιενοφωντι φιΧικωί, he was on friendly terms with Xenophon, vi. 6. 35. σηΙν€ΐμι [ei/Ai], go together, as- semble, iii. 5. 7 ; in a hostile sense, μαχούμενοί avvyei, he advanced to the encounter, i. 10. 10. συν€ί'ΐΓθντο, see συνέττομαί. συν€ΐσ4ρχομαι, [άρχομαι], enter with, go in together, with irpos and ace. of pers. and els and ace. of place, iv. 5. 10. συν6ΐσΐΓίΐΓτω [R. tnr], fall into a place together, rush in together^ plunge in, abs. or with είσω and gen., V. 7. 25, vii. 1. 18. συν€κβαίνω [R. βα], go out to- gether, with έττί and ace, iv. 3. 22. συν€κβιβάζω {βφάξω, βιβαδ-, -βι- βάσω or βιβω, -€βίβασα [R. βα], make go, causative to βαίνω), help draw out, help extricate, i. 5. 7. σνν€Κκ6ΐΓτω [κόπτω], help cut down, iv. 8. 8. - σνν€κΐΓΪνω [R. iro], help drink up, drain with, vii. 3. 32. συν€ΚΐΓθρ£ξω [R. ircp], help pro- cure, join in providing, v. 8. 25. συν€ληλνθατ€, see συνέρχομαι. σνν€λόντι, see σνναφέω. συν€ν€γκόντ€5, σνν6νην€γμίνα, see συμφέρω. συν€|^ρχομαι [^ίρχομαί], go out with, vii. 8. 11. συν€ΐΓαινέω [έπαινέω], join in praising or approving, agree to- gether, vii. 3. 36. συν€ΐΓ€νχομαι [ςυχομαί], VOW to- gether besides, with dat. of the god to whom and inf., iii. 2. 9. συν€'ΐΓΐμ€λέομαι [R. μ€λ], help take charge of, with gen., vi. i. 22. συν€ΐΓΐσΐΓέσβ€Μ,, see συν^φέπομοΑ, *ii l• ί inivfm [R, σ«χ], hold together, vii. 2. 8. ηινή8ομαι [R. oB], be glad with one, rejoice with, congratulate, Lat. gratulor, abs., with dat. of pers., and with dri and a clauee, V. 5. 8, vii. 7. 42, 8. 1. «Γνν0€(£ομαι [θ^ά], look at with, inspect together, vi. 4. Ιδ. vvvOημc^ ατοί, τό [R. Sc], thing agreed on, agreement, iv. 6. 20; signal, esp. the watchword, the word, Lat. signum, tessara, given out and passed through the ranks before a battle as a means by which friends might be distin- guished from foes, i. 8. 16, vi. 5. 25, or used at night iis a counter- sign^ vii. 3. 34. οηίν^ηράΜ [θηράύί], hunt tPt^A, join in the hunt, v. 3. 10. (TVveoiTO, see συντίθημι, (FunSitv, see συ»€Ϊ8ον. αηινίημι [ii?/ut], put together, un- derstand, Lat. intelligo, vii. 6. 8. σννίσ^μι [R. <Γτα], make stana together, of persons, bring together, introduce, with dat., iii. i. 8, vi. i. 23 ; intr. in mid. and pf . and 2 aor. act., stand together, get together, gather, combine, foiin together, esp. of troops, V. 7. 2, 16, vi. 2. 9, 5. 28, vii. 3. 47. Phrases: Ιττχικόν en συν€στηκ6ί, cavalry with ranks still unbroken, vi. 5. 30, cf. vii. 6. 26. (σφαλ-), σφαΧω, ΙίσφηΧα, $σφα\μαι, έσφάλην [R. οτφαλ], trip, trip up, make fall; mid. and pass., be balked, fall, fail, meet with a mischance, vii. 7. 42. o'lJKis» see ov. σφάττω, or (older but not in Anab.) σφάζ» (σφα'γ-), σφά^ω, Κο. 66. ίσφαξα, ίσφα'γμΛΐ, ίσφά^ην, slaugh- ter, slay, prop, by cutting the throat, Lat. iugulo, hence of vic- tims, sacrifice, as σφάξαντ€$ ταΰρον els άσνίδα, sacrificing a bull and catching the blood in a shield (see σφαΎΐά^ομαι), u. 2. 9 ; of persons, kill, slay, iv. 5. 16, 7. 16. 7(^Cst see οΰ. (Γφ€νδονάω, ^σφ€νδόντ)σα 1^σφ€ν• δόνη], use the sling, sling, iii. 3. 7, 15, 4. 15, iv. 3. 30. (Γφ€νδόνη, 7;s, sling, Lat. funda, made of leather or of leather and cords (see s.v. vevpov), iii. 3. 16, 4. 17, iv. 2. 27; of the stone or leaden ball used in the sling, mis- sile, iii. 4. 4, V. 2. 14, vii. 8. 18. For the form of the sling and the manner of using it, see the follow- ing illustration. σ'ψ4νδονήτη£» ov [σφevδovάω], slinger, Lat. funditor, without de- fensive armour, and carrying only his slmg and stones or leaden bul- lets. The σφevδovΎiτaι constituted one division of the Greek light-armed troops, iii. 4. 26, iv. 3. 27, V. 6. 15 {s.v. 7i;)ui^$), but they were relatively un- important, and were not organised until, under the pressure of neces- sity, the Greeks drafted men for the purpose, iii. 3. 16- 20. These were ex- pert Rhodians, who used leaden bullets, which carried twice as far as the big stones used by the Persians. The sling was, on the contrary, in great use among the barbarians, iii. 3. 6, cf. iii. 3. 15, iv. 2. 27, 3. 29, 30, vii. 8. 18. σφίσι, see ov. σφό8ρα, adv. \σφοδρ6{\, with vehemence, extremely, exceedingly, very, ii. 3. 16, 4. 18, 6. 11, iv. 8. 20, V. 4. 32, vi. 5. 28. σ-φοδρ6«, a, ov, vehement, violentt extreme, i. 10. 18. No. 67. crxcSCd, as, raβ, fioat, Lat. ratis, made of skins,* i. 5. 10, ii. 4. 28. Their construction is described in the first passage. σχ€δόν, adv. [R. σ€χ], near; of degree, nearly, closely, about, al- most, ihostly, chiefiy, Lat. fere, i. 8. 25, esp. with numerals, iv. 7. 6, 8. 15, vii. 6. 1 ; of time, about, just about, iii. i. 33, 2. 1, vi. 3. 25. Phrase : <Γχ€δόν τι ττασα η στρατιά, pretty nearly all the army, vi. 4. 20. ο•χ€Ϊν, see ^χω. σχέτλιοδ, ά, op [R. <Γ€χ], holding out, unfiinching, cruel, dreadful, vii. 6. 30. ατχήμια, ατο^, το [R. «τιχ], form, shape, of troops, formation, i. 10. 10. ττιρί8άβ, ου, JSoteridas, a hop- lite of Sicyon, punished by his comrades for impudence to Xeno- phon, iii. 4. 47, 49. σα»τήριο«ι oi^ [R. σαρ], deliver- ing, salutary, Lat. salutaris, ii. 6. 11 ; pi. subst., τά σωτήρια (sc. kpa), {λαηΑ; offerings for deliverance or /or α s«/e return, iii. 2. 9, v. i. 1. Phrase : σωτήρων τι βoυ\€voμiιfoυs, taking salutary measures, iii. 3. 2. σ«»ψρον4«ι>| σωφρονήσω, έσωφρ6• Μτμτα, σ€σωφρ6νηκα, σ€σωφρ6νημαι [R. (ταρ + φρή"], be of sound mind, be discreet, temperate, or moderate, be wise or prudent, v. 8. 24, vi. 2. 11, vii. 6. 41. Phrase: σωφρονίΐν τά wpot σέ, be self-controlled in their dealings toith you, vii. 7. 30. ΟΊιίφρονίζΜι έσωφράνισα, σ€σωφρ6- νικα, σ€σωφρ6νισμαι, έσωφρονίσθηρ [R. (ταρ + ψρήν], waie discreet, bring to reason or ίο one's sensee, reform, vii. 7. 24 ; pass., come to one^s senses, vi. i. 28. οτωψροσννη, η$ [R. σαΡ4- φρήν], soundness of mind, discretion, mod- eration, the highest quality recog- nised by the Greeks, denoting that aToidance of all extremes expressed by our word temperance when used in its proper sense, i. 9. 3. lip t", by elision for τ4. τ1γα04, crasis for rd άγαΜ. τάλαντον, το [Κ. ταλ], prop, that which supports, hence, balance, pi. pair of scales, by transfer the weight in the scales, and then any weight, and as a definite weight, talent. In historical times the tal- ent was both a weight and a sum of money, although the latter was never actually coined. The Attic talent in Xenophon's time weighed about 57.75 lbs. avoirdupois ; as a sum of money (vii. i. 27) it had the value of this amount of silver and was worth 6000 Attic drach- mas. See s.v. μνα. See also s.v. SipeiKOs. ii. 2. 20, iii. 5. 8, vii. 7. 25, 53. ταλλαι ταλλαι crasis for τά Αλλα. ΤΛμ.%Λνίθ$ ταμίΐύσω, τ€ταμί€υμαι [ταμίάί, carver, dispenser, steward, cf. τέμνω^, be comptroller or treas- urer ; mid., administer or measure out for oneself, of enemies, parcel out or deal with at one''8 pleasure, ii. ς. 18. jfe^r Tflip^Sy ύ. Tamos, an Egyptian ^ί**^ *' of Memphis, who at first served under Tissaphemes in Ionia, but afterwards he joined Cyrus and conducted his fleet to Cilicia, i. 2. 21, 4. 2. After the death of Cyrus he fled to Egypt, where he was killed by Psammetichus for his treasures and ships. His son was Glus, ii. I. 3. ravavrCa, crasis for τά εναντία. ταξίαρχος» ό [R. τακ + άρχω], commander of a τάζι%, taxiarch, iii. 1. 37, iv. I. 28. τάξις» €ωί, ή [R. τακ], arrange- ment, Lat. ordo, eSp. in a military sense, order, array, formation, i. 2. 18, iii. 2. 38, 4. 19, v. 2. 13 ; rank and file, line, line of battle, Lat. acies, i. 8. 10, 16, ii. 2. 14, 3. 2, iii. 2. 17 ; of individuals, place in line, post, station, iii. 4. 48, iv. 3. 29 ; any body of troops, division, corps, battalion, of no fixed number, i. 5. 14 (cf I 2. 3), 8. 3, iii. i. 32, or composed of two λόχοι of hoplites, t.e. 200 men, iv. 7. 2, vi. 5. 11 ; of peltasts, 100 men, iv. 3. 22 ; of cavalry, iv. 3. 17, 22, consisting of 600 men in i. 8. 21 ; of the Persians, division, corps, i. 2. 16, 8. 8, iii. 4. 14. Phrases : iv τάξ€ΐ, in line, in order, in the ranks, i. 7. 20, ii.*2. 8, V. 1. 2 ; τά άμφΐ Td^ets, tactics, ii. i. 7 ; els τάξιν τά 6v\a τίθ€σθαι, get under arms in line of battle, ii. 2. 21, cf v. 4. 11. Τάοχοι, ol, the Taochi, Taochi- ans, a barbarous and warlike tribe on the northern frontier of Arme- nia, iv. 4. 18, 6. 5, 7. 1, 17, inde- pendent of the Persians, v. 5. 17. Taircivos» ή-, όν, downcast, sub- missive, ii. 5. 13. Taircivow, έταττίίνωσα, Τ€τατ€ίνω- μαι, έτατΓ€ΐνώθην [raireivoi], lower, bnng down, humble, vi. 3. 18. Tarns» tSos, or ταιτ($, ίδοί, ή [cf Eng. tape, tapestry], carpet, rug, haX.^stragtdum, vii. 3. 18, 27. ταιτιτήδο,αι crasis for τά ίττιτή- δ€ΐα. ταράττω (ταροχ-), ταράξω, ετά- ραζα, τ€τάραΎμαι, έταράχθην, trou- ble, disturb, agitate, make disorder, hiit. perturbd, v. 7. 1, vi. 2. 9; of persons, disturb, embarrass, ii. 4. 18 ; of troops, pass., be thrown into confusion or disorder, iii. 4. 19, vi. 5.9. τάραχος» ό [ταράττω"], confusion, disorder, i. 8. 2. ταρϊχ€ν», τ€ταρίχ€υμαι, ίταρίχΐύ- θην [τάρϊχοί, ό, smoked meat, root ταρ<Γ» parch, cf. Lat. terra, dry land, torred, parch, Eng. thirst], preserve, pickle, v. 4. 28. Ταρσ-οί, ων. Tarsus, the ancient capital of Cilicia, founded by the Assyrian kings, on the Cydnus. It was an important commercial city and seat of learning even in the Roman period, and was the birthplace of St. Paul. The Cyre- ans plundered it, i. 2. 23, 25, 26. (Tersus.) τάττω (τα7-), τάζω, ίταξα, τέ- τάχα, τέτα-γμαι, έτάχθην, and rare poetic 4τάΎην [R. τακ], arrange, esp. as a military term, form, ar- ray, draw up into line of battle, marshal, assign to stations, Lat. instrud, i. 2. 15, 8. 23, 24, ii. 3. 12, 19, iii. 2. 17, iv. 2. 9, 8. 10; mid., draw up for oneself or one^s own, v. 4. 22 ; mid. intr. and pass., take one^s post, post oneself, be stationed, I 7. 9, 9. 31, vi. 3. 6, vii. I. 23; act. also assign, order, appoint, with ace. and inf., i. 5. 7, iii. I. 25, so in pass., ταχθεί, Lat. iussus, i. 6. 6, iv. 6. 22. Phrases : iv τφ τΐταΎμένψ, in the appointed place, iii. 3. 18 (but some read έντ€τα^μένω, see έντάττω). τανρος, ό [cf. Lat. tdurus, bull, Eng. steer], bull, ii. 2. 9. ταύτη, ^^^• ^^'^• ^^ ovTos, as adv. [ovTos], of place, in this direction or way, on this side, here, Lat. hac (sc. uid), i. 10. 6, iv. 2. 4, 3. 5, hence, ol τουττ; ϊνποι, the horses in this region, iv. 5. 36, cf vii. 4. 24 ; of manner, in this way, herein, in these regards, Lat. hdc ratione, ii. 6. 7, iii. 2. 32. τα4>€(ηαΓαν, see θάχτω. τάφος» ό [^άΐΓτω, cf Eng. ept- taph'\, burial, funeral, hence, bur- ial place, grave, i. 6. 11. τάφρος, ή [cf. - ^άΐΓτω], ditch, trench, Lat. fossa, for irrigation or defence, i. 7. 16, ii. 3. 10, 4. 13, v. 2. 5, vi. 5. 3 ; its artificial character emphasised by ορυκτή, i. 7. 14. τάχα, adv. [ταχύ?], quickly, pres- ently, soon, i. 8. 8, iv. 4. 12, v. 7. 21 ; perhaps, maybe, v. 2. 17. ταχέως, adv. [ταχύί'], quickly, swifily, speedily, ii. 2. 12, iii. 4. 15, iv. I. 17, V. I. 4. τάχιστα, see ταχύ?. τάχος, ous, TO [ταχύ{], swiftness, speed, ii. 5. 7. ταχνς, eta, υ, quick, swift, speedy, Lat. celer, iii. 3. 15, sup. τάχιστοι, i. 2. 20, ii. 6. 29. Phrases: τήν ταχίστην (sc. οδό ν), in the quickest manner, as soon as possible, i. 3. 14, iii. 3. 16, vii. i. 11 ; διά ταχ4ων, with speed, i. 5. 9. Neut. as adv., x' vi-Ttivm 214 215 TfixC^co-TCTpairXoos ί a I l.'f ταχύ J quickly y swiflly^ speedily, soon^ i. 5. 3, ii. 3. β, iii. 4. 27, iv. 6. 25, V. 2. 25, vi. i. 28, vii. 3. 42 ; comp. θαττον, more quickly , quicker^ faster, i. 2. 17, iii. 5. 6, iv. 3. 32, vii. 3. 45 J ^^ θαττον . . . θαττον^ the sooner . . . the sooner, Lat. si- mulatque . . . statim, vi. 5. 20 ; sup. τάχιστα, vii• 6. 12, freq. used in phrases meaning as quickly as pos- siblct as soon as one can, formed (with or without the appropriate forms of δύναμτ-ί) with the ad vs. ws, i. 3. 14, iii. 4. 44, iv. 2. 1, v. 7. 3, vii. 3. 44, δτι, iv. 3. 29, vii. 2. 8, §, h 2. 4, vi. 5. 18, δτΓί?, iv. 5. 1 ; iwetScLv τάχιστα, as soon as, iii. i. ble, i. I. 5, 2. 1, 9, 3. 1, 8. 5, 9. 1, iij. 2. 1, v. 4. 21, 5. 1, 13, vii. 5. 6; oiJtc . . . τέ, see οΰτ€ ; τ^ ... 5^ is generally used where the construc- tion is anacoluthic, v. 5. 8, vii. 8. 11. t4 is sometimes joined to rela- tive words to increase their relative force, see fire, olos, ωστ€, φτ€. TcOvoUri, τίθνατον, τ€θνηκ6τα, see βρίσκω. Τ€θραμμ^νου$, see τρέφω. τ^θριτητον, τό [Wrrapfs + R. ακ], team of four horses abreast, char- lot and four, four-in-hand, Lat. quadrigae, iii. 2. 24. The two mid- dle horses of the team pulled by the yoke (see s.v. tvyov); those on No. 68. 9, cf. iv. 6. 9, vi. 3. 21, so ws τά- χιστο, iv. 3. 9. ri, copulative conj., enclitic, and^ corresponding to και much as Lat. -que to et. It stands either alone, i 5. 14, 9. 5, iii. 2. 16, vii. 6. 3, or doubled, when it generally marks the balance or connexion either of clauses, on the one hand . . .on the other, i. 8. 3, iii. 2. 11, 39, 4. 35, or rarely of single wonls, iv. 5. 12 ; re- peated three and four times, vi. 5. 21, iv. 8. 13 ; τ4 . . . καΐ or τ€ και, not only . . . but also, both . . . and, Lat. cum . . . turn, or untranslata- the outside by means of a single trace (not represented in the ac- companying cut), attached at one end to the horse's collar and at the other to the άντυξ (see s.v. άρμΛ) of the chariot. For another illustration of the τέθριντον, see s.v. άρμα (No. 8). TtLvta (rev-), Τ€νω, Ιίτ€ΐνα, -τέτακα, τέταμαι, έτάθην [cf. Lat. tenuis, drawn out, thin, tendd, stretch, Eng. THIN, DANCE, tono, hypo-tenuse], stretch, extend; intrans., exert one- self, hasten, rush, Lat. contendoy with άνω, irp6s and ace, iv. 3. 21. rcixC|» (τ€ΐχιδ-), τ€ΐχιω, έτεί- χισα, Τ€τείχικα, τ€Τ€ίχισμαι, 4τ€ΐ- χίσθην [τεΓχο?], build α wall, for- tify, vii. 2. 30. TCiXOS, OUS, TO [cf. Eng. DIKE, DITCH, dig], wall, for defence, i. 4. 4, 7. ΐδ, ii. 4. 12, esp. city wall, rampart, Lat. miirus, moenia, iii. 4. 7, vi. 2. 8, vii. 2. 11 ; of the city itself, v. 5. 6, vii. i. 15; fortress, stronghold, iii. 4. 10, vii. 3. 19, 5. 8 ; forming the name of a place, see N^y τ€Ϊχο$. τ€κμα(ρομαι (τεκμαρ-'), Τ€κμαρου- μαι, έτ€κμηράμην [R. τοκ]. Settle by a mark, form a judgment, infer, iv. 2. 4. τ«κμ.ήρι.ον, TO [R. τακ], sign, token, proof, evidence, Lat. argu- mentum, i. 9. 29, 30, iii. 2. 13. T^Kvov, TO [R. τακ], child, pi-, of children with reference to their parents, Lat. Viber'i, i. 4. 8, iv. 5. 28, vi. 4. 8. τ€λ€θω [WXos], come into being, come out, become, iii. 2. 3 ; of sac- rifices, be favourable, vi. 6. 36. (Elsewhere poetic, and some editt. have other readings in both these passages.) TiXcvTatos, α,ον [r(ko^'],last, Lat. ultimus, of time, iv. i. 5; of order in a military sense, hindmost, at the rear, rear, Lat. nouissimiis, iv. 2. 10, vi. 5. 10, vii. 3. 39 ; subst., ol TcXevTaioi, the rear guard, iv. 1. 10, 3.24. Τ6뀕ϋτάω, τελΐύτησω, ίτεΚΐύτησα, Τ€Τ€\€ύτηκα, 4τ€λ€υτήθηρ [t^os] , bring to an end ; intr., finish, end one^s life, die, Lat. finid, i. i. 3, ii. I. 4, 6. 15, iii. 2. 7, vi. 3. 17, 4. 11 ; partic, τελευτών, used adv. like τέ\ο5, at last, finally, iv. 5. 16, vi. 3.8. τΛιυτή, ^s [t^os], end, Lat. β- nis, esp. euphemistically for death, with or without του βίου, i. i. 1, 9. 30, ii. 6. 29, iii. 2. 7. TcX^w, τ€\ω, rarely -τελέσω, έτέ- λεσα, τετέΧεκα, τετ έλεσμαι, έτελέσθην, [t^os], bring to completion, finish, fulfil an obligation, pay, iii. 3. 18, vii. 1.6, 6. 16. T^os, oi;s, TO [t^os], comple- tion, fulfilment, end, issue, result, Lat. exitus, i. 10. 18, v. 2. 9, vi. i. 13. Phrases: tAos, adv., at last, finally, to close, Lat. tandem, i. 9. 6, ii. 3. 26, vi. I. 5 ; δια τέλους, from beginning to end, constantly, vi. 6. 11 ; ηδη τέΧο^ εχόντων των Ιερων, as the sacrifice was nearing the end, vi. 5. 2. WXos, ous, t6 [R. ταλ], what is imposed on one, tax, outlay, task, office,, magistracy, supreme author- ity, plur., τά τέ\•η, the authorities, magistrates, of the Spartan ephors, ii. 6. 4. Phrase : tois οίκοι τέλεσι, the home government, vii. i. 34. τέμαχο$) ovs, τό [cf. τέμνω}, slice, of fish, V. 4. 28. Τ€μ€νίτη5, see Ύημ£νίτη$. τέμνω (τεμ-, τμε-), τεμω, ίτεμον 0Γ ίταμον, -τέτμηκα, τέτμημαι, έτμήθην [cf Lat. temnd, slight, ^cut,'' Eng. a-tom, epi-tome'\, cut, of surgeons, perform operations, v. 8. 18. τΙναγο5ι ous, τό, shoal Water, shallows, Lat. uadum, vii. 5. 12. TcpcpCvBivos or τιρμίνθινοβ» Vi ^^ [τερέβινθο% or τέρμινθοί, i], turpen- tine-tree, cf Eng. terebinth, tur- pentine'}, of the turpentine-tree, tur- pentine, iv. 4. 13. τίταρτοβ, ν, ov [τέτταρ€5],/θΜΓίΛ, Lat. quartus, iii. 4. 31, iv. 8. 21. τ€τρακισχέλιοι, ai, a [τέτταρ€5 + xi\ioi'\, four thousand, Lat. quat- tuor milia, i. i. 10, iii. 4. 2, vii. 7. 53. TCTpaKO(rioi| 01, α [τ4τταρ€5 + €κατόν],/θΜ»• hundred, Lat. quad- ringenti, i. 4. 3, iii. 3. 6, vi. 2. 16 ; with a collective, in sing., i. 7. 10. Τ€τραμοιρ£ά| as [τ4τταρ€5 + μοΐρα, portion, cf. μέρο$}, fourfold share, four times as much, vii. 2. 36, 6. 1. TCTpairXooSi v•) ov, contr. τετρα- ttXous, ij, οΰν [τ6τταρ€δ + R. ιτλα], quadruple; subst., τό τετραπλοΰν^ a fourfold share, Lat. quadruplum, vii. 6. 7. τΙ-τ«ί νο» 214 ταχν, qnicMify swifihj^ spcpuibj^ siHHij i. 5. ;>, ii. 3. »;, iii. 4. 'J7, iv. 6. 25, V. 2. 25, vi. I. 2.S, vii. 3. 42; conij». ΘΙττον, more guiekli/y qukkrr, furr . . . the sooiirr, L:n. si- miilatqne . . . statini, vi. 5. 20 ; siii>. τάχιστα, vii. 6. 12, inM{. ust-il in phrastis nu'iiniiiii as quickly as pos- sible., as soon as , vii. 2. 8, ]?, i. 2. 4, vi. 5. l;i, δτΓ)?, iv. 5. 1 ; eweidatf τάχιστα^ as soon «s, iii. I. I bk;, i. I. 5, 2. 1, 9, 3. 1, 8. 5, 9. 1, iii. 2. 1, V. 4. 21, 5. 1, 13, vii. 5. β; ovT€ . . . T^, Sfi' οΰτ€ ; re ... δ^ is generally used where the construc- tion is auacohithic, v. 5. 8, vii. 8. 11. T€ is souietinies joined to rela- tive words to increase their relative force, see are, oios, wVre, φτ€. τιθνάσ-ι, «θνατον, τ€θνηκότα, see θντ^σκω. τ€θραμμ€νους, see τρέφω. τίθριττίΓον, τό [WTTap€S + 1ϊ. ακ], trdia of fi>ni' horses ohritifit, char^ lot and four, fonr-in-haiid, Lat. qnadr'igae, iii, 2. 24. The two mid- dle horses of the team pulled by the yolve (see s.o. ξν^6ν)\ those oil No. C8. i), ef. iv. 6. 0, vi. 3. 21, so cJj ra- χκττα, iv. 3. 9. ri, copulative conj., enclitic, and, correspoiuling to και uuuii as Lat. -que to et. It .stands eitlier alone, i. 5. 14, 9. 5, iii. 2. K», vii. 6. 3, or doubled, when it ,c;enerally marks the balance or connexion eitlier of clauses, on the one hand . . . on the other, i. 8. 3, iii. 2. 11. -".l), 4. 35, or rarely of simile wonls, iv. 5. 12 ; re- peated tlu'ce and fnur times, vi. 5. 21, iv. 8. 13 ; τέ . . . και or tc και, not onhj . . . hut also, both . . . a)td, ! Lat. cum . . . tnm, or untranslata- ' the outside by means of a single trace (not representemi)anyin!j; cut), attached at one end to tlie horse's collar and at the other to the άΐ'τνξ (see s.v. άρμα) of the chariot. For another illustration of the τέΘριτητον, see s.v. άρμα (Xo. 8). Τ€£νω (t€u-), τ€Ρώ, €T€Lva, -τέτακα, τέταμαι, έτάΟημ [rf Lat. tenuis, drawn out, thin, tendft, stretch, Knic. THIN, ι>λ\(ί;, tone. h>/po-fenuse], stretch, extend; intrans., exert one- self, hasten, rush, Lat. contendo, with Ανω, TTpos and ace, iv. 3. 21. 215 Τ€ΐχίζω-τ€τρα'ΐΓλόθδ Τ€ΐχίζω (τειχιδ-), Τ€ίχιω, έτεί- χισα, τ€Τ€ίχικα, τετείχισμαι, έτ€ί- χίσθηρ [reixos], build a wall, for- tify, vii. 2. 30. Τ6ίχ05, OVS, TO [cf. Eng. DIKE, 1)11 cu, dig], wall, tor defence, i. 4. 4, 7. lo, ii. 4. 12, esp. city wall, rampart, Lat. mar us, ώκ tenia, iii. 4. 7, vi. 2. 8, vii. 2. 11 ; of the city itself, V. 5. 0, vii. i. 15 ; /or//*c.s.s•, stronyhold, iii. 4. 10, vii. 3. 1!), 5. 8 ; forming the name of a place, see ^έον retxos. Τ€κμα£ρομιαί (τ€κμαρ-^, τ€κμαροΰ- μαι, έτεκμηράμην [II. τακ], settle by a mark, form a judgment, infer, iv. 2. 4. τ€κμήριον, TO [R. τακ], sign, tftken, proof, evidence,^ Lat. argft- mentum, i. 9. 21), 30, iii. 2. 13. T€Kvov, TO [R. τακ], child, pi., of children with reference to tlieir parents, Lat. Uber'i, i. 4. 8, iv. 5. 28, vi. 4. 8. τ€λ€θω [WXos], come into being, come out, become, iii. 2. 3 ; of sac- riliccs, be facourtdde, vi. 6. 3(). (Elsewhere pi)elic, and some editt. have other readings in both these passages.) τ€λ€υταίθ5, a, ov [Ti\os,^,last, Lat. nlfimus, of lime, iv. i. 5; of order in a military sense, hindiuost, at the rear, rear, Lat. nouissimus, iv. 2. Ki, vi. 5. 10, vii. 3. 3i> ; subst., ol reXeuratot, the rear guard, iv. 1. 10, Τ£λ€υτάω, τελεύτησω, έτελεύτησα, Τ€Τ€\€ύτηκα, έτελεντήθην [t^Xos], bring to an end; intr., Jinish, end one''s I if', die, Lat. finio, i. i. 3, ii. 1. 4, 6. 15, iii. 2. 7, vi. 3. 17, 4. 11 ; partic, τελεντών, used adv. like TiXos, at last, tinalhf, iv. 5. 10, vi. 3.8. τ€λ£υτή, ^s [t€Xos], end, Lat. β- nis, esp. euphemistically for death, with or witliout του βίου, i. ι. 1, 9. 30, ii. 6. 29, iii. 2. 7. η\ίω, τελώ, rarely -τελέσω, έτέ- λεσα, τετέλεκα, τετέλεσ μαι, ετελέσθηρ, [tc'XosJ, bring to completion, Jinish, fulfil an obligation, pay, iii. 3. 18, vii. I. 0, 6. 10. Tc'Xos, ous, TO [t€Xos], comple- tion, fulfilment, end, issue, result, Lat. exitus, i. 10. 18, v. 2. 9, vi. i. 13. I'hrases: t^Xos, adv., at last, finedly, to close, Lat. tandem, i. 9. 0, ii. 3. 20, vi. 1.5; δια τέλους, from beginning to end, constantly, vi. 6. 11 ; ^δτ; τέλος έχ6ντων των ιερών, as the sacrifice was nearing the end, vi. 5. 2. Tc'Xos, ous, TO [Ii. ταλ], what is imposed on one, tax, outlay, task, office, magistracy, supirme author- ity, plur., τά τέλη, the authorities, magistrates, of the S])artan ephors, ii. 6. 4. l*hrase : tois οίκοι τέλεσι, the home government, vii. i. 34. τ€μαχο5, ους, τό [cf. τέμρωίι, slice, of iish, v. 4. 28. Τ€μ€νίτη5, see Ίημενιτης. Τ€μ.νω {τεμ-, τμε-), τεμώ, ^τεμον or εταμον, -τέτμηκα, τέτμημαι, έτμήθην [cf Lat. temno, slight, ^cut,'' Eng. a-tom, epi-tome], cut, of surgeons, perform oj^erations, v. 8. 18. τ€ναγο5ι ους, τό, shoal loater, shallows, Lat. nadum, vii. 5. 12. TCpePivBivos or τ€ρμίνθινο9, η, ov [τερέβινθος or τέρμινθος, η, turpen- tine-tree, cf Eng. terebinth, tur- pentine], of the turpentine-tree, tur- pentine, iv. 4. 13. TCTapTOS, η, ov [rirra.^isi], fourth, Lat. qmlrtus, iii. 4. 31, iv. 8. 21. τ€τρακισ-χίλιοι, ai, a [τ€τταρ€β + χίλιοι], four thou.'^and, Lat. quat- tuor m'llia, i. i. 10, iii. 4. 2, vii. 7. 53. τ€τρακόσ-ιοι, ai, a [τ€τταρ€5 + Ικατόν],/ί>ΜΓ hundred, Lat. quad- ringentl, i. 4. 3, iii. 3. G, vi. 2. 10 ; with a collective, in sing., i. 7. 10. Τ€τραμ,οιρία, as [TCTTapes + μοίρα, portion, cf. μέρος], fmrfdd share, four times as much, vii. 2. 3(ί, 6. 1. TCTpairXoos, η, ov, contr. τετρα- ττλους, η, ουν [τ^τταρίδ + R. ιτλα], quadruple ; subst., τό τετραττλουν, afourfddshare, Lat. quadruphim, vii. 6. 7. tvrrupamorrur-Tiypti^ 21T τ(Οημι-τ£$ i r: τνττβφάκοντΛ, indecl. [WrTopfs + iticeo-i], foHtj, Lat. quadrdginta, i. 5. 13, ii. 2. 7, vL 5. 4. τίτταρΗ, α [Wrrapcs], fouVy Lat. quattuor, i. 2. 12, 10. 1, ii. 4. 25, vii. 7. 12. Tcv0pdv(a, άί, Teuthraniay a dis- trict in the southwestern part of Mysia about the Calcus, contain- ing Pers:amus, ii. i. 3, vii. 8. 17. Tcvfc(r0€, see τυyχάvω. Tiwxos, ovs, t6 [R. τακ], tool ; rarely in prose, receptacle^ jar, chest, V. 4. 28, vii. 5. 14. Τίχι^ζω (τ€χναδ') [R. τακ], use art, employ cunning, deal subtly, vii. 6. 16, τ^χνη, 17? [R. τακ], art, crap, or more generally, means, ways, iv. 5. 16, vii. 2. 8. τ€χνικ««, adv. [R. τακ], in a sMlful manner; tcxvikQs irws, in an artful sort of way, vi. i. δ. r4ws, adv., the while, so long, meanwhile, as τέωί μ^ν αύτού$ άνα- βαίνοντα%, as long as they were as- cending, iv. 2. 12, cf. V. 4. 16, vi. 3. 5 ; for a time, up to this time, hith- erto, vii. 5. 8, 13, 6. 29, 7. 55. r%, dat. fem. of the art. as adv., here, used in the phrases, r^ βίέν . . . T^ δέ, on the one hand or side . . . on the other, in some re- spects . ,. in others, in. 1. 12, iv. 8. 10, 80 T§ μίν . . . 6r&T€ S4, vi. I. 20 (see ΐΓϊί). TflSf, see Wc, βη. τήκ» (τακ-), -τήξω, -έτηξα, Η- τηκα, έτάχθην and έτάκην [cf. Lat. tabes, decay, Eng. thaw], melt, intr., thaw, melt, of snow, iv. 5. 15. Τηλ<βάά$, ov or ά, the Teleboas, a branch of the Euphrates, in Ar- menia, west of Lake Thospitis, iv. 4. 3. Τημινίτη?, ov, a Temenian, a native of Temenium, iv. 4. 15, a town in Argolis ; others read Te/ie- ί4τψ, of Temenus, part of Syra- cuse; others again, ΎημΑτψ, of Temnus, in Aeolis, on the Her- mus. τήμιρον, adv. [Epic σήμερον, «•- or T-, demonstrative pronominal prefix, -f ίιμέρα'}, to-day, Lat. hodie, i. 9. 25, iv. 6. 8. Phrase : rijv τή- μβρορ ημέρα ν, the present day, iv. τηνικαντα, adv., at that time, just then, answering to ηνίκα and έπ€ί, iv. I. 5, 2. 3. Τήρη$, ovs, 0, Teres, founder of the kingdom of the Odrysae, vii. 2, 22. Τηρίβαΐ;ο$, see Ύφίβα^ος. nfya, as [cf Eng. tiara], tiara, a headdress worn by the l*ersians, No. 69. but especially the upright tiara, the peculiar badge of the Great King, ii. c. 23. τιάρθ€ΐ&ή$, έΐ [τιάρα + R. fiS], tiara-shaped, v. 4. 13. Τιβαρηνοί, ol, the Tibareni, an independent tribe in Pontus on the Black Sea, extending from the Chalybes to Cotyora, v. 5. 2, vii. 8. 25. Τ£γρη5, ητο^ [old Pers. Tigra, the pointed, tigri, arrow, applied to tlie river from its rapid course, Syrian Diglat, Diklat, Hebrew Chiddekel, the Hiddekel of Daniel X. 4], the Tigris, a great river formed by streams from Mt. Tau- rus in Armenia and flowing south- easterly to its junction with the Euphrates in Babylonia, i. 7. 15, ii. 2. 3, 4, 13, iii. 4. 6, iv. i. 2, 4. 3. τ(θημι (^e-), θήσώ, ίθηκα, τέθηκα, τέθαμαι, έτέθην, 2 aor. mid. έθέμην [R. 9i],.put, set, place, with κατά and ace, vii. 3. 22 ; get ready, in- stitute, i. 2. 10; mid., place for oneself, arrange, with έπί and ace., vii. 3. 23. Esp. in the military phrase θέσθαι τά 6ir\a, prop, either order arms, i.e. stand with one end of the shield and spear resting on the ground, i. 5. 14 {cf. i. 5. 13), 6. 4, ii. 2. 8, iv. 2. 16, 3. 26, or ground arms, i.e. lay shield and spear on the ground in front of one, i. 10. 16, iv. 3. 17, V. 2. 8, 19, vii. i. 22 (c/. vii. 1.24); but sometimes ap- pear or get under arms, take up a military position, ii. 2. 21, v. 4. 11, and in i. 5. 17, κατίι χώραν edevTo τά διτλα, they moved back to quar- ters. Τΐμασ-(ων, ωνο%, ό, Timasion, of Dardanus in the Troad, who had served with Clearchus and Der- cylidas against Phamabazus, v. 6. 24. Being in exile, v. 6. 23, he joined the army of Cyrus and was elected to succeed Clearchus, iii. i. 47. With Xenophon he was the youngest of the generals, iii. 2. 37. He engaged in designs against Xen- ophon, V. 6. 21 £E., but cf. vii. 5. 10. See also vi. 3. 14, 5. 28, vii. i. 40, 2. 1, 3. 18. τιμάω, τϊμ-ήσω, etc. [R. τι], value, esteem, honour, of persons, i. 3. 3, 9. 14, ii. 6. 21, iii. 2. 5, v. 5. 14, vii. 3. 29. τιμή, Tjs [R. Tt], value, worth, price, vii. 5. 2, 8. 6 ; of persons, honour, esteetn, i. 9. 29, ii. 1. 17, iii. I. 37, vi. I. 20, vii. 3. 28. Τϊμησ(θ€θ9» δ, Timesitheus, of Trapezus, irpbievos of the Mos- synoeci, and interpreter between them and the Greeks, v. 4. 2 fE. τίμιοβ, ο, ov [R. Ti], of things, valuable, precious, i. 2. 27 ; of per- sons, honoured, esteemed, i. 3. 6. τιμωράω, τϊμωρ-ήσω, etc, [R. n-f- R. 2 F«p]» help, avenge, mid., take vengeance on, punish, i. 9. 13, v. 4. 6, vii. 6. 7, 7. 17 ; with ace. of pers. and gen. of thing, vii. i. 25, 4. 23 : with ύττέρ and gen., for the sake of, i. 3. 4 ; pass., be punished, ii. 5. 27, 6. 29. τιμωρία, as [R. Ti + R.'2 F€p], help, vengeance, hence, punishment* with irapa and gen., ii. 6. 14. Τιρίβαζθ8 or Τηρίβαζοί, ό, TiH- bazus, governor of Western Arme- nia in the satrapy of Orontas, iv. 4. 4. He was a favourite of Arta- xerxes {ibid.), and made a treaty with the Cyreans, which he broke, iv. 4. 6, 18, 21. Transferred to the west of Asia, he was instrumental in promoting the Peace of Antal- cidas. He was afterwards killed while plotting to dethrone his mas- ter. tIs, tI, gen. Tivbs, indef. pron., enclitic, a, an, any, some, a sort of, a kind of, a certain, Lat. quis, i. 2. 20, 5. 8, 8. 8, iii. i. 4, 3. 18, 4. 23, iv. I. 17 ; subst., somebody, any- body, something, anything, pi., some, i. 8. 18, 9. 8, ii. i. 9, iii^4. 23, iv. I. 14, V. I. 8, 7. 10, 8. 25; esp. denoting a person whom one can but does not name, i. 4. 12, iii. 3. 3, V. 6. 33; one, iph, they, people, men, i. 5. 8, 9. 3, 11, iii. 3. 18, 5. 17, vii. 4. 8. With a limiting, modify- ing, or restrictive force, as in the phrases: oi δέ rtvcs, some few, y. 7. 16; μία ris, any single one, ii. i. 19, cf. vi. 6. 20 ; σχεδόι» τι, pretty nearly, vi. 4. 20 ; ττόση rts, about how large, ii. 4-21, cf. vi. 5. 20 ; όίΓΟίόΐ' Tt, whatsoever, what sort of a, ii. 2. 2, iii. i. 13, cf. v. 5. 15; τοιαύτη rts, something of this sort, V. 8. 7 ; see also iv. 8. 26, v. i. 6, 8. 11, vi. I. 26, vii. 6. 24. tCs, τ I, gen. tIvos, interr. pron., who? which? ichatf Lat. quis, in dir. and indir. questions, i. 4. 13, 14, ii. I. 11, 2. 10, iii. 2. 16, 36, iv. 8. 5, vi. 3. 23, vii. 2. 26 ; what kind Τισναφψη)ΐ-Τολ|ΐ($φ 218 219 τό^υμα-Π!ραν(ψαι Ι ι ο/, vii. 6. 4; neat, as adv., τί, wkyf what for? Lat. quid, ii. 4. 3, 5. 22, iii. 4. 39, vi. 3. 25. Plirasee: έκ rlmt, for what reason, on what grounds f v. 8. 4; τί yap, ri οΰν, what then? Lat. quid enimf v. 7. 10, 8. 11. Τΐ4ΠΓβιφ4ρνη$, oi/s, ό, Tissapher- nes, a famous Persian, as satrap of Lydia and Caria well known in Greece for the double part he played during the Peloponnesian war, now favouring Sparta and now Athens, but always extend- ing the Persian power. He be- came the jealous enemy of Cyrus the Younger on the latter' s ap- pointment to the government of Lydia in 407 n.c, i. i. 2, 3, 2. 4. He commanded a quarter of the Persian army, i. 7. 12, and distin- guished himself at Cunaxa, i. 10. 5 ft. After the death of Cyrus he pursued a course of treachery towards the Cyreans, ii. 3. 17 ff., 4. 1, 5. 2 ff., iii. 4. 2, and entrapped their generals, ii. 5. 31 ff., iii. 2. 4. He succeeded to the posts held by Cyrus, ii. c. 11, but in endeavour- ing to take possession of Ionia, which had revolted from him to Cyrus, i. i. 0, 7, 9. 9, he was op- posed by the Spartans under Thi- bron, vii. 6. 1, 7, 8. 24. Several campaigns followed, disastrous to the Persians, until Tissaphernes, through the influence of Parysa- tis, mother of Cyrus, was put to death. τιτρώσ-και (rpo-), τρώσω, ίτρωσα, τέτρωμαι, έτρώθην [cf. τραύμα], wound, inflict wounds, Lat. uol- nero, abs. or with ace, ii. 2. 14, iii. 3. 7, 4. 26, iv. 3. 33, V. 2. 17, vi. 3. 8, vii. 8. 19 ; with διά and gen. or €ls and ace, i. 8. 26, ii. 5. 33. τλή|Μ>ν, ο», gen. ovos [R. ταλ], enduring, suffering, wretched, iii. 1.29. ^ "ToC, intensive particle, post-posi- tive and enclitic, in truth, verily, surely, of a certainty, often best expressed by emphasis in English, ii. I. 19, 5. 19, in. i. 18, 37, v. 5. 24,6.34. ^ τοιγαροδν, inferential conj. [τοΙ + yap-\-oHv], therefore, accordingly, consequently, i. 9. 9, 15, 18, ii. 6. 20, V. 8. 22. to£ki»v, inferential conj., post- positive ΙτοΙ-{-νύν~\, therefore, ac- cordingly, then, further, also, ii. 5. 41, iii. 2. 39, v. i. 2, vii. 5. 3, 10; esp. with imvs., ii. i. 22, 3. 5, iii. i. 36, iv. 8. 5. Phrases : ττρωτον μέν Tolvvy, well then, first, iii. 2. 27 ; μ^ Toiwv μηδέ, nay then not even, vii. 6. 19. τοιόσ$€, τοιάδ€, τοώνδε, dem. pron. [rotos, «μοΛ, -|- -5c], such as this, of this kind, referring to what follows, as follows, v. 4. 31 ; esp. ^Xe^c τοιάδ€, he spoke as follows, i. 3. 3, 9, cf. 7. 2. TOioUTOSy τοιαύτη, τοιούτον, dem. pron., so constituted, of such a sort, kind, nature, character or position, such, Lat. talis, referring to what precedes, i. 3. 14, ii. i. 16, 6. 8, iii. I. 44, 2. 13, V. 7. 26, vii. 6. 35. Phrases : iv τοιούτφ του κινδύνου, at such a critical point of danger, i. 7. 5 ; τοιούτον ουδέν, nothing of the sort, ii. 5. 5 ; τούτων τοιούτων 6ντων, such being the case, ii. 5. 12 ; τοι- ούτων ημΐν els φιΧίαν υπαρχόντων, when we have such strong grounds for friendship, ii. 5. 24 ; eis τά τοι- αύτα, /or «ery/cee qjithis sort, iv. i. 28 ; iv τψ τοιούτφ, at such a junc- ture, v. 8. 20. τοίχοί, δ [cf, Tct^os], wall, of a building;, vii. 8. 14. τολμάω, τολμήσω, etc. [R. τολ], have the heart, have the courage, undertake, Lat. sustined, iii. 2. 32, iv. 4-12; venture, risk, dare, Lat. auded, ii. 2. 12, 3. 5, iii. 2. 11, v. 7. 19 ; in a bad sense, have the audacity or effrontery, vi. 4. 14, vii. 7. 46. Τολμίδηβ, ου, Tolmides, herald of the Greek army, an Elean, ii. 2. 20, iii. I. 46, V. 2. 18. τ6ξ€υμα, ατο5, τό [R. τακ], arrow, Lat. sagitta, i. 8. 19, iii. 4. 17, iv. 2. 28, v. 2. 14, vir. 8. 18. For illus- trations, see s.v. τόξον and φαρέτρα. τoξcvω, iτ6ξ€υσa, Τ€τ6ξ€υμαι, iTO- ξεύθην [ΐί.,τοκ], shoot with a bow, use one^s bow, shoot arrows, abs., iii. 3. 7, 10, 4. 14, iv. i. 16, 2. 28; pass., be hit with an arrow, be shot, abs. or with διά and els, i. 8. 20, iv. I. 18. τοξικός, ή, 6v [R. τακ], belong- ing to the bow ; subst., η τοξικ-ή (sc. τ^χΐ'τ;), archery, i. 9. 5. τό|ον, TO [Ii. τακ], bow, Lat. ar- cus, iii. 3. 15, 4. 17, iv. 2. 27, 28, 4. No. 70. 16. For additional illustrations, see s.v. ν€υρά and φapiτpa. τοξότηβ, ου [R. τακ], bowman, archer, Lat. Sagittarius, without defensive armour except on special occasions (the Cretans mentioned in V. 2. 29 were probably bowmen) , and carrying only his bow and quiver. The τοξόται were a divis- ion of the light-armed troops, iii. 4. 26, iv. 3. 27, 28, 8. 15, v. 2. 12, 4. 22, 6. 15, vi. 3. 7, being chiefly Cretans and Scythians, i. 2. 9, iii. 4. 15, and while of greater numbers than the σφ€νδονηται and than the άκονησταί as such (see s.v. ireX- τaστήs), they were still unimpor- tant relatively to the peltasts and hoplites (see s.v. yυμv'ήs). The bowmen among the barbarians whom the Ten Thousand encoun- tered were, on the contrary, im- portant and formidable, i. 8. 9, iii. 3. 6, 4. 2 (cf 17), 26. Totros, [cf Eng. topic, topo- graphy, U-top-ian], place, spot, Lat. locus, V. 7. 16, vii. 4. 12; region, district, quarter, Lat. regid, i. 5. 1, iv. 4. 4. το(ΓΟσ-δ€, τοσ•ήδ€, τoσόvδe, dem. pron. [τόσos, so great, -f- -5e], so many, so numerous, vi. 5. 19, but in ii. 4. 4 the context shows that τοσοίδ€ means so few. TOOOvros, τοσαυτι;, τοσούτον, dem. pron., so much, of size, number, amount, and time, so great or large, ii. 5. 18, iii. 4. 37, 5. 7, iv. i. 20, 8. 12 ; so long, i. 9. 11 ; so many, ii. i. 16, iii. i. 36; τοσούτφ with comps., so much, i. 5. 9 ; neut. as adv. τοσούτον, so far, in so far, only so much, i. 8. 13, iii. i. 45; with eiire, referring either to what precedes or what follows, thus much, so much only, i. 3. 15, ii. i. 9, 5. 15. TOTc, adv., at that time, then, i. i. 6, 4. 18, 6. 10, ii. 6. 5, iii. 2. 15, iv. 5. 35, v. 6. 19. Phrases: Ty Tore άκροβο\ίσ€ΐ, the late skinnish, iii. 4. 18 ; των τότ€, the {heralds of) that time, ii. 2. 20. ToW, adv., at times, in the phrase TOTk μέν . . . τοτέ δέ, now . . . then, at one time . . . at another, vi. i. 9. τράγημα, otos, to [cf. τpωκτόs], dainties toT eating, delicacies, sweet- meats, esp. dried fruits, eaten at dessert, Lat. bellaria, ii. 3. 15, v. 3• 9. TpdXXcis, €ων, ol, Tralles, a city in the northern part of Caria, in the plain of the Maeander, i. 4. 8. (Aidin.) Τραν(ψαι, ol, the Tranipsae, a tribe in the eastern part of Thrace, vii. 2. 32. τράιηΐΛ-τρφΙι 220 221 τριήρης-τρίνου$ Ι rpdirf|iH ψ [τΙττβφ€«+ R. ικδ], prop, tahle witli four legs, dining- iiiWe, Lilt. wi«;mi, iv. 5. 31, vii. 2. :i3 (see άτΓοβλ^ττω), 3. 22. But the Tpdwe^a might have only three legs, two at one end and one at the cen- tre of tlie other (see No. 73). It was low, and had a reetangnlar top. See also s.v. κλίνη. TpairctovvTiosi 6 [T/»oircfoOy], a Ttape2UHtian, native of Trapezus^ iv. 8. 23, V. 1. 11, 4. 2, 5. 10, vi. 6. 22. Tpairi^ovst oCvtos, -7, Trapezus^ a Greek city in the northeastern part of Pontus, lying on a high table-shaped plateau on the coast, a colony of Sinope, iv. 8. 22, and paying tribute to it, v. 5. 10. It was an important commercial town as early as when the Ten Thousand Greeks found hospitality there, v. I. 1, 2. 28, 5. 14, vi. 6. 5; it was favoured by the Romans, who made it the capital of Pontus Cap- padocius; and finally it became the seat of the Empire establislied by the Comneni. It was indepen- dent until its capture by the Turks in 1462 a.d. (Trebizond, Tara- buzum.) rpatroiTO, see τμ4τω, τραύμα, otos, to [cf, τιτρώσκω"]^ woundy hurt, Lat. uolnm, i. 8. 20, iv, 6. 10. ▼pdxi|Xost 0, neck, throaty Lat. coUum, of men, i. 5. 8, vii. 4. 9. τράχύ5, eta, ύ [f/ Eug. tracheal rugged, rcugh, Lat. asper, iv. 3. ; of the voice, harsh^ ii. 6. ϋ. Phrase: i^ rpaxeta (sc. yij), hard ground, uneOen country, iv. 6. 12. Tpctsi τρία, gen. τριωρ [rptis], three, Lat. tres, i. i. 10, 4. 19, 8. 12, iv. 4. 3, v. 6. 9, vii. 5. 2. rphem, τρέψω, Irpe^a and Irpa- ror, τέτροφα and τέτραφα, τέτραμ- μαι, έτρέφθην and έτράτη» [c/. Lat. torqueo, ttirn, twist, Eng. thread, THRONG, throw], tum, direct, di- vert, iii. I. 41 ; esp. as a military phrase, rout, put to flight, with e/s φίτ/ήν, Lat. in fugam uertd, i. 8. 24, cf. v. 4. 23 ; mid. and pass, in- trans., turn, set one^s face towards, have recourse to, indulge in, turn aside, abs., or with irpot or iwL and ace., ii. 6. 5, iii. 5. 13, iv. 5. 30, vi. 1. 19, vii. I. 18; take flight, abs. or with φυ-γ^, iv. 8. 19, v. 4. 24 ; of places, be turned towards, look in a certain direction, Lat. uergo, with irpo's and ace, iii. 5. 15 ; mid. trans., turn one^s enemy, rout, put to flight, V. 4. 16, vi. 3. 5. τρέψ«0, θρέψω, ίθρ€ψα, τέτροφα, ■ τέθραμμαι, ίτρέφθ-ην and έτράφ-ην^ nurture, nourish, in their widest sense, support, rnaintain, feed, of men and animals, Lat. aid, v. i. 12, 3. 11, 4. 26 ; pass., be supported or maintained, subsist, i. i. 9, vi. 5. 20, vii. 4. 11 ; be reared or raised, of men and animals, iii. 2. 13, iv. 5. 24; τ€θραμμ.ένου^, fed up, fat- tened, V. 4. 32. τρ4χω {τρ€χ-, δραμ-), 5ραμουμαι, Ιδραμον, -δ€δράμηκα., -δ€δράμημαι,, [c/. δρόμοϊ], run, Lat. curro, i. 5. 2, iv. 8. 26, vii. 3. 45 ; with wepl and gen., and eh or iwl and ace, i. 5. 8, iv. 3. 33, vi. 4. 27. (Fut. -θρέξομαι, aor. -idpe^a, poetic and rare.) rpm, irpetra [cf Lat. tremd, shake, terreo, frighten], tremble, quake, with ace, flee from for fear, i. 9. 6. (Rare in prose.) rpCo, see rpctt. τριάκοντα, indecl. [Tptis -f «l- KocTi], thirty, Lat. trlgintd, i. 2. 9, ii. 3. 12, iv. 6. 6, vii. 3. 7. TpldKOVTOpOSi 1^ [TpctS -f ctKOflTi -f R. ip], sc. vavi, thirty oared ship, V. I. 16, vii. 2. 8. See s.v. τ€»τη- KOVTOpOt. TpMuc07iOi| ai, α [Tpcts -f- Ικα- r6v], three hundred, Lat. trecenti, i. I. 2, ii. 5. 35, iii. 4. 43, vi. 2. 16. τριβή, 7)S [cf. τρίβω, rub, τρίβο$, if, foot-path], a rubbing, of troops, constant practice, service, Lat. usus, v. 6. 15. τριήρης, OuS, η [Tpfts + R. «p]» SC. vavs, trireme, galley, man-of- war (see S.v. vavs), often distin- guished from the ιτλοΓον (q.v.), i. 2. 21, 4. 8, V. I. 4, vi. 4. 18, 6. 1, 6, vii. I. 21, 2. 12 (c/. 13), 3. 3. The trireme had reached its most perfect form in the time of Xeno- phon. It was distinguished from the war vessels that preceded it in the development of shipbuilding by the number of its banks of oars. The ΊΓ€ντηκ6ντοροί (q.v.) had a single bank of oars on each side, the bireme had two banks on each side ranged one above the other, the trireme, as the name implies, had three. We have unfortunately no representations of triremes on Greek vases, but from inscriptions and from passages in ancient au- thors it is established that the tri- reme was long and narrow, that slie was a ram, that she was pro- pelled in action by rowers ranged obliquely one above another in banks, and that she was also pro- vided with two masts and with sails for voyaging. The position of the rowers, of whom it has been estimated there were 174 (31 in each of the highest banks, 29 in each of the middle banks, and 27 in each of tlie lowest banks) was probably that represented in the accompanying cut. According to this represen- tation each rower was al- lowed 8 square feet of space, but the oblique arrangement of the rowers above one an- other, the man in the highest bank being nearest the stern, made the perpendicular distance occupied by the three rowers in any oblique range only 8 feet. On the stroke the head and shoulders of the rower came No. 71. back between the legs of the man next above and behind him, on the recover he came to an upright position. The trireme was a wooden ves- sel, and when not in commission was hauled out of the water and housed, vii. i. 19, 27. Some con- clusions about the speed of the trireme can be gathered from vi. 4. 2, where it is stated that the distance from Byzantium to Hera- clea could be made by a trireme under oars (κώτταυ) in a day, but that it was a very long day's voy- age. This is a distance of about 150 nautical miles. If the day is reckoned at 15 hours, we get a pace of 10 knots an hour; but there is nothing in the language in the passage cited to preclude the supposition that the vessel had also set her sails. Since the tri- reme was a ram, the number of mariners or fighting men on board was small. In action her manoeu- vres were performed with great skill, the chief responsibility rest- ing on the κυβ€ρνήτψ (q-v.). The total crew, including rowers, ma- rines, sailors, and officers, is esti- mated at 220. τριηρίτης, ου [τρ€Ϊ5 + R• «p]» man-of-war^ s man, vi. 6. 7. TpCmjxvs, υ, [r^ls ■\- ττηχυ%], of three cubits, three cubits long, iv. 2. 28. τριπλάσ-ιος, ο, ο ν [TpeCs ^- R. Ίτλα], threefold, three times as large, Lat. triplus, vii. 4. 21. TpCirXiOpos, ov [Tpcts + R. ίτλα], of three plethra, three plethra wide, V. 6. 9. TpCirovs, ovv, gen. ttoSos [τρ€Ϊ5 -f- R. ircS], three-footed; as subst., tri- pod, any article of furniture sup- ported on three feet, as the metal frame on which the pot was set for boiling (see the illustration s.v. άμφορ€ύί), but commonly a table with three legs, vii. 3. 21 (see s.v. τ/)άΐΓ€^α). The three-legged table ψρ(%-τράνα»Λν 222 223 τροΐΓή-νγρότη« had a round top, and the legs were often handsomely carved. The material of which it was made was commonly wood. It was used as a support for vessels or other articles of household use, as in the accompany- ing cut (No. 72) where a κράτήρ rests upon the tri- pod; or like the τράτΓΡ^α (see No. 73) it mijEiht be employed at meals, being set in front of the couch of the feaster with the articles of food upon it. No. 72. No. 73. Tp£f, adv. [Tp€is], three times, Lat. ter. Phrase: els rplt, up to three times, even thrice, vi. 4. 1(3, 10. Tpiος, ά, οκ [u/icts], ^our, yours, Lat. Mav€p6v σ€ καταστήσαντα^, set you in a prominent position, vii. 7.22. φαν€ρώ5, adv. [R. φα], evidently, manifestly, i. 9. 19. φαρέτρα, ds, quiver, iv. 4. 16. Its form is sliown in the accompanying cut. See also 8.ν.ΆμΛξ^ών and τόξον. No. 75. It was supported by a strap which passed over the right shoulder, and across the breast and behind the back, so that the quiver rested on the left hip. The ξίφοί (g.t?.) was carried in the same manner. φάρμακο V| τό [cf. Eng. phar- macy], drug, noxious drug, poison. Phrase : φάρμακον τιών, taking med- icine, vi. 4. 11. φαρμακοίΓοσία, as [φάρμΛκον -f R. iro], a taking physic or poison, dose of physic or poison, drugging, iv. 8. 21. Φαρνάβαζος, ό, Pharnabazus, son of Pharnaces, and satrap of Lesser Phrygia and Bithynia under Darius Nothus and Artaxerxes Mnemon, v. 6. 24, vii. 1.2. He aided Sparta in the Peloponnesian war. His troops acted against the Cyreans, vi. 4. 24, ^.7, and for fear of the Greeks he mduced Anaxibius to help them out of Asia, vii. i. 2, 2. 12, 14. Later he was at war with Sparta. ΦόαχάνοΙ, ol [Φασ», cf. Eng. pheasanf}, the Phasidni, Phasi- ans, a tribe living on the banks of the Phasis in Colchis, v. 6. 36 ; also a different tribe on the Armenian Phasis, iv. 6. 5, vii. 8. 25. tcurCv, see φημί. cUris» los or tSos, b, the Phasis, a river in Colchis, flowing into the Pontus, and considered as the boundary between Asia and Eu- rope, V. 6.36, 7. 1, 5, 7 (Rioni); also the upper course of the Araxes in Armenia, iv. 6. 4 (Pasin Su). φάσκω [R. φα], say, assert, al- lege, with inf., iii. 5. 17, iv. 4. 21, 8. 4, V. 8. 1. φατ4, see φημί. φανλο$» η, ov, mean, trifling, com- mon^ of things, Lat. ullis, vi. 6. 11,12. φ4ρω (0€p-, ol-, iv€K-, iveyK-), οΐσω riveyKa and rjveyKov, ένήνοχα, ivijvey- μΛΐ, ήν^χθην [R. φ€ρ], bear, bring, carry, Lat./ero, i. 9. 26, ii. 1.6, iii. 4. 32, iv. 3. 6, V. I. 2, 4. 25, vii. i. 37 ; with irpbs and ace, vii. 3. 31 ; bear, produce, yield, of the earth, i. 2. 22, vi. 4. 6 ; carry off, receive, i. 3. 21, iv. I. 8, vii. 6. 7 ; bear, en- dure, iii. I. 23 ; bring, cause, ii. i. 17, of tribute, pay, v. 5. 7 ; of a road, bring, lead, with rrpos, ivl, or els and ace, iii. 5. 15, v. 2. 19, 22, cf V. 7. 7. Mid., bring for oneself, fetch, bring away, vi. 6. 1, vii. 4. 3. Pass., be borne, be hurled or thrown, of missiles, iv. 7. 6, 12, v. 2. 14, hence, carry, iii. 3. 16 ; be dashed, fly, rush, with διά or κατά and gen., or irpbs and ace, i. 8. 20, iv. 2. 3, 7. 14. Phrases : βapέωs or xaXeirtDs ίφΐρον, they took it ill, were annoyed or troubled, Lat. moleste ferebant, ii. I. 4, V. 7. 2, vii. 7. 2, with dat., i. 3. 3 ; Se^ttti €φ€ρον, they brought assurances, see de^ibs, ii. 4. 1 ; dyeiv καΐ φέρΐΐν, see Λyω, ii. 6. 5, v. 5. 13. φ€ύγω (φυy-), φεύξομχιι and φευξον- μαι, ίφυyov, ττ^^ευγα [R. φνγ], flee^ take flight, run away, fly, Lat. /m- gid, i, 2. 18, 3. 20, ii. i. 3, iii. 3. 9, iv. 2. 27, V. 4. 18, vi. 5. 27, vii. 3. 11 ; with 5t(i or έκ and gen., or cif, φΐ||ΐ(-φι4λΐ| 230 irphy or Λγ£ and ace, i. lo. 1, iii. 2. 17, iv. 1. 8, 3. 32, V. 7. 29 ; rarely with acc.j/ee /rom, run awapfrom^ m. 2. 3δ, yL 5. 23 ; /ee from one's country, he an exile, be banished, abs. or with οίκοθ€», iv. 8. 25, v. 3. 7 ; subst., ό φ€ύyωvy exile, Lat. exsul, i. I. 7, 9. 9, with έκ and gen., i. 3. 3. φίί|μ( (φα-), φήσω, ίφησα [R. φα], rare except in pres. and impf. (the other tenses being supplied by tiTnw and by the forms given under €Ϊρω\ declare, state, affirm, say, Lat. dtco, with inf., i. 3. 20, ii. i. 3, iii. 2. 24, iv. 2. 19, V. 2. 31, vi. 2. 8, vii. i. 16; with nom. and inf., i. 8. 26, iii. I. 4, iv. I. 24, vi. 2. 13, vii. 2. 20 ; with ace. and inf., i. 2. 25, ii. 6. 11, iii I. 29, iv. 4. 18, v. 5. 19, vi. 6. 15, vu. 6. 32 ; abs. or with dir. discourse, i. 6, 6, ii. i. 22, 3. 24, V. 4. 27, 6. 25, vii. 2. 24, 6. 23 ; very rarely with &n and a clause, vii. I. 5 ; the form ίφτ; (less com- monly ^φασαν) freq. follows one or two words of the dir. or indir. dis^ course, said he, quoth Λβ, Lat. in- qnU, L 3. 20, ii. 3. 7, iii. i. 7, iv. 4. 17, 8, 4, V. 6. 26, vi. i. 30, vii. 3. 6. In answers ίφη means, he said yes, he assented, i. 6. 7, with a neg., he said no, he denied, iv. i. 23, V. 8. 5, cf. vii. 7. 18. The neg. is regularly attached to φημί as the leading verb where we attach it to the depen- dent, cf. Lat. negd, as ούκ ίφασαν livat, they said they would not go, they refused to go, i. 3. 1, μισθωθΎΐνίί.ι ούκ $φα- ffuw, they said they had not been hired, ibid., cf. i. 2. 26, iv. 5. 15, vi. 6. 10, vii. 4. 23, 8. 4. Mh *M«nif Φήβ••! see φθάνω {φθα-), φθ-ήσομαι and rarely φθάσω^ Ιίφάην or έφθασα, get before, get the start of, be before- hand, anticipate, outstrip, abs., with ri or Tptaros, or with πριν and inf., ii. 5. 5, iii. 4. 20, iv. i. 4, 6. 11, vi, I. 18; with ace. of pers. (which may be omitted) and a partic. expressing the leading idea, as φθάνωσί έττΐ τψ άκρψ yevop^voi roifs xoKepiovs, they reached the height before the enemy, iii. 4. 49 ; δΐΓ«$ μ^ φθάσω<η κατα\αβ6ντ€ί, that they may not get possession before {us), i. 3. 14, cf. V. 6. 9 ; αυτό» φθάν€ΐ ημέρα 'γ€νομένη, the break of day surprised him, v. 7. 16. φθ^γγομαι, φθέ-γξομαι, έφθΓγξά- μην, ίφθΐ-γμαί \_cf. Eng. apo-thegm, di-phthong], titter, make a sound, make oneself heard, iv. 5. 18, vi. 6. 28 ; of the war cry, shout, i. 8. 18 ; of the eagle, scream, vi. i. 23; of the trumpet, sound, iv. 2. 7, v. 2. 14, vii. 4. 19. φβ€(ρ« {φθ€ρ), φθΐρω, ίφθ€ΐρα, ίφθαρκα and ίφθορα, Ιίφθαρμαι, έφθά- ρηρ, corrupt, of a country, destroy, lay waste, iv. 7. 20. φΟονέω, φθονήσω, έφθόνησα, έφθο- νήθην [φθόνοι, 6, envy^, envy, with dat. of pers., i. 9. 19, v. 7. 10. ψιΑλη, η$ [c/. Eng. phiat, vtat], a round shallow vessel like a large No. τβ. saucer, but deeper, Lat. patera, with neither stem, loase, nor han- dle, either earthenware or made 231 φιλαΙτ€ρον-φοβ€ρ<&$ of bronze, gold, or silver, iv. 7. 27, vii. 3. 27, and used as a drinking cup or in pouring libations. φιλα(τ€ρον, see φίλοί. φιλέω, φιλήσω, έφίλησα, ττεφίΧη- μαι, έφιλ-ήθην [φίλοβ], love, of the love of family and friends, Lat. diligo, i. i. 4, 9. 25, 28. Φιλήσιος,ό, Fhilesius, of Achaea, who succeeded Menon, iii. i. 47, and was one of the two oldest generals, V. 3. 1. He attacked Xenophon at Cotyora, V. 6. 27, and was there fined for failure in duty, v. 8. 1. See also vii. i. 32. φιλία, as [φίλος], affection, lik- ing, friendship, attachment, Lat. amicitia, i. 6. 3, ii. i. 10, v. 5. 15, vii. 3^ 16 ; with possessive or ob- jective gen., i. 3. 5, V. 6. 11, vii. 5. 6 ; ry σν φιλίφ, attachment to you, vii. 7. 29. Phrases: wpbs φιΚίαν άφιέναι, let depart in peace, i. 3. 19 ; ainoh διά φ^\ίάs Uvai, see διά, •• • g-% Ul. 2. 8. φιλικός, ή, 6v [φίλος], of or be- fitting a friend, friendly, amicable, iv. I. 9, V. 5. 25. φιλικώς, adv. [φίλος], amicably, like a friend, ii. 5. 27, vi. 6. 35. φίλιος, ά, ov [φίλος], fnendhj, amicable, at peace, of persons and places, abs. or with dat., i. 6. 3, ii. 5. 18, V. 7. 13, vi. 2. 6, 3. 22 ; esp. of a country, with or without χώρα, friendly country or power, i. 3. 14, ii. 3. 27, iii. 2. 9, iv. i. 8, v. 5. 3, vii. 3. 13. φίλιιπΓος, ov [φίλος -f R. ακ], fond of horses, sup. , i. 9. 5. φιλόθηρος, ov [φίλος -\- θήρα], fond of hunting, sup., i. 9. 6. φιλοκιρδέω ίφι\οκ€ρδ•ή$, greedy of gain, φίλος -|- κ^ρδο$], be greedy of gain, i. 9. 16. φιλοκίν$ννος, ov [φίλος + KivSv- νος], loving danger, adventurous, ii. 6. 7, sup., i. 9. 6. φιλομαθής, έί [φίλος +R• μα]> fond of knowledge, eager to learn, sup., i. 9. 5. φιλον€ΐκίόι, as ΐφι\6ν€ΐκο$, fond of strife, φίλος -f veiKos, τό, strife^, fondness of strife, rivalry, iv. 8. 27. φιλονικία, as [φίλος + νίκη], eagerness to win, rivalry, emula- tion, iv. 8. 27. Φιλόξ€νος, 6, Fhiloxenus, an Achaean, a brave soldier, v. 2. 15. φιλοΊτόλιμος, ov [φίλος -f ττόλε- /Ltos], fond of war, liking war, ii. 6.- 1, 6. φίλος, η, ov [φίλος], friendly, dear, attached to, kindly disposed, Lat. amicus, abs. or with dat., i. i. 5, 3. 19, 4. 2, vii. 6. 15, 8. 11; comp., φι\αίτ€ρον (some read φίΧ- repov), i. 9. 29; subst., 6 φί\os, friend, favourite, adherent, abs., with dat, or gen., i. i. 2, 3. 6, 7. 6, ii. I. 5, 4. 5, 5. 39, v. 4. 32, vi. 6. 4. φιλόσ-οφος, ό [φίλος + σo0όs], lover of knowledge, philosopher, ii. 1.13. φιλοστρατιώτης, ου [φίλος -f R. στρα], the soldier^ s friend, vii. 6. 4,39. φιλοτίμ^ομαι, φιλοτίμήσομαι, ve- φιΚοτίμημαι, έφιλοτϊμ'ήθην [φίλος -f- R. τι], love or seek honour, be am- bitious, feel piqued, with ΰτι and a clause, i. 4. 7. φιλοφρον^ομαι, έφίλοφρονησάμην and έφιΧοφρονήθην [φίλος + φρήν], be well disposed, show kindness or favour, act kindly, abs., ii. 5. 27, iv. 5. 29, 32 ; receive with kindness, greet with affection, with ace, iv. 5.34. Φλϊάσ-ιος, ό {^\lovs,Phlius'], Phli- asian, native of Phlius, vii. 8. 1, the chief city of Phliasia, the small- est of the Doric states, between Sicyonia and Argolis. φλναρ^ω, φλυαρήσω [^φλύαρος, ό, nonsense] , talk nonsense, talk bosh, iii. I. 26, 29. φλυαρία, 05 [^φλύάροί, δ, non- sense], babble, nonsense, pi., per- fect bosh, Lat. nugae, i. 3. 18. φοβ€ρός, i, 6v [00/Sos], fearful, causing fear, alarming, formida- ble, Lat. terribilis, ii. 5. 9, v. 2. 23, φοΡΐ«»-ψρ^νη|ΐα 232 ς. 17 ; with dat. of pers. and inf., ui. 4. 5; sup. as subst., φοβ€ρώ- Tarovy a most awful thing^ ii. 5. 9. Plirase : φοββροί ^σαν μ-ή, they felt afraid that^ v. 7. 2. ψοβέα», ψοβήσω^ έφόβησα [^o/3os], frighten^ terrify, frighten away, Lat. terreoy iv. 5. 17; usually de- ponent, φοβ4ομαι, φοβήσομΛΐ, ν€φ(>- βημαι, έφοβήθην, be frightened, fear, dread, be afraid, Lat. timeu, abs., with ace., or wepi and gen., i. 9. 9, ii. 4. 18, iii. i. 10, v. 5. 7, vii. 8.20; with μή and a clause, i 8. 13, iii. 4. 34, vii. I. 2, or with δτι, iii. 1. 12 ; hesitate, be doubtful about, with inf., i. 3. 17. 4άβθ9, 6 [root φ€β, tremble, cf Epic φέβομαι, flee, Eng. hydro- phobia], fear, dread, terror, fright, Lat. timor, i. 8. 18, ii. 3. 9, iii. i. 18, vi. 5. 29 ; alarm, panic, ii. 2. 19 ; pi., things causing fear, threats, iv. I. 23. Phrase: τόν 4κ των ΈλΧή- »ων €ts Toh βαρβάρου^ φόβον, the fear inspired in the barbarians by the Greeks, i. 2. 18, cf. vii. 2. 37. ^Oivficfos, ά, OP, contr. ψοινΐκοδ^, 7j, ovp [Φοίνιζ], purple-red, purple or dark red, so named because the discovery and earliest use of this colour were ascribed to the Phoe- nicians, i. 2. 16. Φοινίκη, ψ [Φοίνιξ], Phoenicia, the Greek name for the centre of the Syrian coast land, strictly ap- plied to the region west of Mt. Lebanon, and extending from Ara- dus to Mt. Carmel, i. 4. 5, 7. 12. After the conquests made by Is- raelites in the south and Ariimae- ans in the north, it still remained in possession of Canaanite, or, as they were called, Sidonian tribes. Its most famous cities were Tyre and Sidon. The inhabitants were noted navigators, traders, and col- onizers and were said to have in- vented the arts of writing, count- ing, and dyeing. The Greek alpha- bet is taken from the Phoenician. tjoearer of the purple, a title of rank at the Persian court ; ace. to others purple-dyer, the title of the officers in charge of the royal pur- ple fisheries, dyehouses, and ward- robe, i. 2. 20. Φοΐνι|, iKos, b, a Phoenician, native of Phoenicia, i. 4. C. φοίνιξ, iicoj, b, palm-tree, the date- palm, h^t. palma, ii. 3. 10, 15 ; oivot φοινίκων, palm icine, made of the sap flowing from the trunk when tapped, ii. 3. 14, but in i. 5. 10 a drink from pressed dates is meant ; the crown was edible, ii. 3. 10. Φολόη, ψ, Pholoe, a mountain range on the borders of Arcadia and Elis, v. 3. 10. (Xiria.) φορ^ω, φορήσω, iφbpη£ΐ;ομ.αι (χαριδ-), χαριοΰμαι, ίχαρισάμην, κεχάρκτμαι [R. χαρ], show kindness, gratify, favour, please, oblige, Lat. grdtificor, abs., with dat., or with dat. of pers. and ace. of thing, i. 9. 24, ii. i. 10, 3. 19, V. 3. 6, vii. 6. 2. Phrase: ην τψ θϋμψ χαριξ'ώμΐθα, if we indulge our anger, vii. i . 25. Xapis, tT05, ii [R-xap], gracious- ness, love, favour felt, thanks, gratitude, Lat. gratia. Phrases: χάριν €ΐδέναί, be grateful, feel thank- ful, Lat. gratids habere, abs., with dat. of pers., and gen. of cause, i. 4. 15, vii. 4. 9, 6. 32 ; so χάριν €χ€ΐν, ii. 5. 14, vi. I. 26; χάριν αποδώσει, he mil return the favour, Lat. gra- tids referet, i. 4. 15 ; rots OeoU xapis δη, thank the gods that, iii. 3. 14. Χαρμάνδη, ηί, Charmande, a large city in the northeastern part of Arabia, on the Euphrates, i. 5. 10. (Hit.) Xap^tvos, 6, Charminus, a Spar- tan sent by Thibron to ask the Cyreans to join him, vii. 6. 1, 7. 13,66. χ»|λών, Qvoi, 6 [cf. χιών], rain- storm, bad weather, storm, iv. i. 15, V. 8. 20 ; winter, the cold, Lat. hiems, i. 7. 6, v. 8. 14, vii. 6. 9, 24. X«ipi X"/t>os, η [R. xep], hand, Lat. manus, i. 5. 8, 10. 1, ii. 3. 11, 5. 33, iii. I. 17, 2. 33, v. 6. 33, vi. I. 8, vii. 3. 5. Phrases: eh χείρα? iXBeiv, Uvai, δέχεσθαι, see the verbs, i. 2. 26, iv. 3. 31, 7. 15 ; ol L• χβι- pbs βά\\οντ€ί, see βάλλω, iii. 3. 15 ; έκ των χειρών λίθοι. Stones thrown merely with the hand (i.e. without slings), V. 2. 14; έκ xeipos, hand to hand, Lat. comminus, v. 4. 25. Χ€ΐρ£(Γοφο$, δ, Chirisophus, a Spartan, sent by the Ephors to join Cyrus with 700 troops, i. 4. 3. After the death of Cyrus he was one of the envoys sent to offer the throne of Persia to Ariaeus, ii. i. 5, 2. 1. On the death of the gen- erals he encouraged the troops and was chosen to command the van, iii. 2. 1, 37, iv. 1,6. Although pre- viously unacquainted with Xeno- phon, iii. i. 45, he became very friendly. to him, iv. 5. 33, and they had but one disagreement during the retreat, iv. 6. 3. " From Trape- zus he went to ask Anaxibius for ships for the army, v. i. 3, 4, 3. 1, but Returned unsuccessful to Si- nope, vi. 1. 16, where he was chosen commander in chief, vi. i. 32, an oflSce which he held only a week, vi. 2. 12, 14. Thence with a small force he marched to Calpe, vi. 2. 14, 18, 3. 10, where he died, vi. 4. 11. χ€ΐρόομαι, χειρώσομαι, έχειρωσά- μην, κεχείρωμαι [R. χ€ρ], handle, get into one''s power, subdue, vii. 3. 11. χ^ροιτληθής, έ$ [R. χ€ρ -f- R. Ίτλα], hand-filling, as large as the hand will hold, iii. 3. 17. χϋροΊΓοίητος, ov [R. xcp -f- ιτοι^ω], made by the hand of man, artifi- cial, iv. 3. 5. XfCiMDv -χιών 236 χ€(ρωνι ον, gen. owj, used as comp. of κακ&$ [Η. χ€ρ], worse^ of persons, inferior, v. 2. 13. Phrase : χ€Ϊρ6ν έστι αύτψ, it is the worse for Am, vii. 6. 4, 3D. Χ€ρρόιτη<Γο«, η [x^ppos, ό, main- land -\- vavf], land-island J penin- sulay vi. 2. 2 ; without an explana- tory adj. the Chersonese ox Thracian Chersonesus is meant, a penin- sula stretching along the Helles- pont opposite the Asiatic coast, and consisting mostly of low hills. It contained Ionic cities which were founded in early times. The elder Miltiades formed it into ft Graeco-Thracian principality about 560 b.c, and after the Per- sian war it was administered as an Athenian possession until con- quered by Macedonia in 343 b.c. i I. 9, ii. 6. 2, v. 6. 26, vii. 6. 14. χηλή, ^5, hoof, cloven hoof; hence, from its projecting shape, breakwater, mole, vii. i. 17. χήν, xTfvfit, 6, η [c/. Lat. anser, goose, Eng. gander, goose], goose, i. 9. 26. x9h, adv. [c/. Lat. hen, yester- day, Eng. YESTER-dai^], yesterday, vi. 4. 18. XiXioi, tu, a, thousand, Lat. mille, 1 2. 3, iii 4. 2, vi. 1. 15. XiXds, h, green fodder, forage, provender, i. 5. 7, 9. 27, iv. 5. 26 ; with ξηρίη, hay, iv. 5. 38. Xtkoi» Γχ*λ6$]' fodder, feed, of horses^ vii. 2. 21. χίμαιρα, ay [c/. En^. chimwra], ^e-goat, Lat. capra, iii. 2. 12. XCoSf 6 [Χίοί, ^, Chios'], a Chian, native of Chios, iv. i. 28, 6. 20, an island in the Aegean west of Lydia, famous for the manufacture of wine and mastic. (Scio.) χιτών, wws, 0, under garment, chiton, corresponding in use to the Roman tunica. The garment in its simplest form was a double piece of cloth, oblong in shape, and somewhat wider than the breadth of the chest, one-half of which cov- ered the front of the body, the other the back. One side was closed by the fold of the cloth, the other was left open. The chiton was fastened on each shoulder by brooches, and the arms were thrust through the holes just beyond these, the sides of the garment dropping. But it might have either full or half -sleeves, and the open side was often closed by a seam. It was confined over the hips by the girdle, Ι^ώνη, q.v. This garment, coitc- sponding to the modem shirt or shift, was worn next the person by both men and women. But at Athens, the men^s chi- ton was of wool and came only to the knees, the woman's was of linen and reached to the feet. For the latter see s.v. φιάλη, the figures at the centre and at the left, and s,v. κλίνη, the woman's figure. The soldier wore it under his cuirass, v. 2. 15. See the illus- trations 8.V, άρμα (No. 8), aρ4», χωρήσω, έχώρησα, κβχώ- pijica, -Κ€χώρημαι, -€χωρ•ήθτ}ν [χώρο?], Srit?e pZace, withdraw, move, move on, advance, march, of persons, 1 10. 13, ii. 4. 10, iv. 7. 11, v. 4. 26 ; of missiles, with διά and gen., pen- etrate, iv. 2. 28 ; of measures, hold, contain, i. 5. 6. XMp(|«i, έχώρίσα, κ€χώρισμαι, έχω- ρίσθην [χωρΐ?], set apart, detach, vi. 5. 11 ; separate, pass., be remote, difer from, with gen., v. 4. 34. XwpCov, TO [dim. of χώρο$], space, gpot, place, iii. 3. 9, iv. i. 16, 2. 28, V. 2. 2, vii. I. 24 ; piece of land, emu, v. 3. 7 ; place, of towns and cities, i. 4. β, iii. 4. 24, v. 2. 3, vii 8. 15, esp. when fortified by nature or aH, hence, stronghold, fortress, i. 2. 24, ii. 5. 7, V. I. 17, 4. 31. Xa»p(St adv., separately, apart, by oneself or themselves, iii. 5. 17, vi. 6. 2, vii. 2. 11; as prep, with gen., apart or away from, i. 4. 13. X»pos, ό [cf. χώρα, Eng. an- choret], a particular place, piece of ground, estate, v. 3. 10, 11, 13; country, in the phrase κατά τούί χώρονί, up and down the country, vii. 2. 3. Ψ. Ψ4ρο$ι 6, the Psarus, a large river, rising in Cataonia, and flow- ing southwesterly through Cilicia into the Mediterranean, i. 4. 1. (Seihun.) ψέγ», >Ρ^ζ<ύ, <ίφ€ξα, blame, dis- parage, vii. 7. 43. ψΙλιον or ψΛ- Xtov, TO, armlet, bracelet, Lat. ar-^ milla, worn by men among the Persians as a mark of distinction, i. 2. 27, 5. 8, 8. 29. ifrcvocWSpo, at [^cuStJs + ii. OTiS], sham ambuscade, v. 2. 28. ψιυδής, es [t/'6i55wj, false, lying, untrue, Lat. falsus, li. 4. 24 ; subst., τά φ€υδη, lies, ii. 6. 26. ψ€ν8»| ψ€ύσω, t^€Vv [c/. ψάω, rub], stripped, naked, bare, i. 8. 6 ; of a country, barren, i. 5. 5; as subst., ol ψιλοί, light-armed soldiers, light troops, iii. 3. 7, v. 2. 16, see s.v. Ύνμνήζ and ιτίλτοστ^ϊ. ψϊλόω, ψϊΧώσω, ^ι/^ιλωσα, έψϊΧώ- θηρ [ftXos], strip, make bare, Lat. niidd ; pass., be deprived of, cleared of, or left by, with gen., i. 10. 13, iv. 3. 27. ψοφ^ω, έψόφησα [φόφos], make a sound, resound, ring, iv. 3. 29. ψόψο«ι δ, noise, iv. 2. 4. Ψ^χήι V^ [s, 0, price], buy, purchase, Lat. emd, ii. 3. 27, V. 3. 7, vii. 2. 38, 3. 13 ; with gen. of price, iii. i. 20, v. i. 6, vii. 6. 24. ώνήσατ€, see δρίρημι. eSvios, a, OP [«ΙΌ9, 0, price], pur- chaseable, for sale, Lat. uenalis; subst., τά ώρία, wares, goods, i. 2. 18,^ vii. 6. 24. ωοντο, see otopjai. *ftirts, tSos, ή. Opts, a city on the Physcus, near the Tigris, in As- syria, ii. 4. 25. wpd, as [c/. Eng. TEAR, hour, horoscope], fixed time, period; of the year, season, i. 4. 10, ii. 3. 13 ; of the day, time, hour, Lat. hdra, iii. 5. 18, iv. 8. 21, vi. 5. i ; in gen- eral, the right or proper time for doing anything, opportunity, abs., with inf., or dat. of pers. and inf., i. 3. 11, 12, iii, 4. 34, iv. 6. 16, v. 7. 12, vi. 3. 20, vii. 3. 34. V! 4 »paSof-ttr(t 240 241 4»ψcλc-ώφλt tt»paCosi af 09 [ωρά], €Λ the right time, seasonable, of fruits, in their season, v. 3. 12 ; of persons, in the bloom of youth, ii. 6. 28; subst., τά ωραία, fruits of the season, v. ββρμηντο, see δρμάω. MS) originally a rel. adv. of man- ner [<•/. &], but developed into a great variety of uses. Rel. adv., as, Lat. ut, with verbs, i. 4. 5, 6. 3, 9. 1, ii. 4. 23, iv. 8. 12, v. 8. 25, vi. 3. 25, 4. 18, vii. i. 27 ; with subst. or adj., i. i. 2, ii. 5. 3, iii. 3. 2, V. 3. 12, 5. 19 ; so with preps., i. 2. 1, 4, 8. 23, ii. 5. 30, iv. 3. 11, vi. 1. 9 ; with circumstantial parties. cJs shows that the partic. contains a thought or assertion of the sub- ject of the leading verb, or of some other person prominent in the sen- tence, without implying that it is the thought of the speaker or writer, and hence it may be rendered, ace. to the context and the kind of cir- cumstantial partic, as if, just as, thinking that, on the ground that, wUh the avowed intention, as though, etc., 1. 1. 3, 11, 2. 1, 19, ii. 3. 29, 4. 8, 6. 2, iii. i. 17, 2. 11, iv. 2. 5, vi. 5. 28, vii. i. 7, 8. 16, so with gen. or ace. abs., 1. 1.6, ii. i. 21, iii. 4. 3, V. 2. 12, vi. 4. 22 ; with the absolute inf., cJs συ»€Κ6ντι elweiv, to put it bri^y, iii. i. 38; with nu- merals, about, i. 2. 4, 6. 1, 7. 15, cf. vi. 5. 11, and the phrase ws hrl rb ΐΓολιί, for the most part, generally^ iii. I. 42, 43, 4. 35; of degree, with adjs. and advs., hmo, iii. i. 40, iv. 1. 20, vi. 6. 32, esp. with sups., Lat. quam, as ws μάλιστα, as much as possible, i. i. 6, cf 3. 14, ii. 2. 12, 5. 14, iii. I. 38, iv. 6. 1. As an im- proper prep., only of persons, to, i. 2. 4, ii. 3. 29, 6. 1, vii. 7. 55. Conj., of time, as, when, after, with indie, i. i. 4, 5. 12, 8. 18, iv. 3. 27, V. 2. 6, vii. I. 19, cJs τάχιστα, as soon as, iv. 3. 9 ; introducing in- dir. disc, like &ri, that, i. i. 3, 3. 5, 4. 8| ii. 1. 14, 5. 6, vi. 1. 30 ; causal, as, when, since, for, because, Lat. ut, with indie, ii. 4. 17, v. 8. 10, vi. i. 32 ; final, denoting purpose, that, in order that, Lat. ut, with subjv. or opt., i. 3. 14, 9. 28, ii. 4. 17, iii. I. 18, iv. 6. 15, V. 7. 18, once with indie, vii. 6. 23, with dv and subjv., ii. 5. 16, vi. 3. 18 ; consecutive, de- noting result, so as, so that, with inf., ii. 3. 10, iii. 5. 7, v. 6. 12, freq. of an intended result, i. 5. 10, 8. 10, 15, iv. 3. 29, 6. 13, v. 2. 12, so with COmps., as βραχύτ^ρα η ώ% 4ξικν€Ϊσθαι, too short to reach, iii. 3. 7, rarely with indie, vi. i. 5. (Ss, adv., thus, so, like οντω^ ; ούδ* ώί, JB^,ma,^indirJhese cir- cumstances, 1. 8721, m. 2. 23, vi. 4.22. wo-avTcof, adv. [ws + airds], in this same way, likewise, just so, iii. 2. 23, iv. 7. 13, v. 6. 9, vii. 3. 22. taa^f see ωστ€. wciv, see eipd. ώατίν, see ots. mrmpt rel. adv. of manner [ω?], like as, just as, even as, as it were, like, used like ηρ4-ω (= ^ωο-αγρβ-ω, see fcio-s, alive), take alive; άγ-ρό -s, b, field (place where cattle are driven); Αγρ-ιο-ι, ο, o-v, ranging the fields, 247 , \ \ - &-γ<((Μ• 248 wtM; 4γ-ό-$, 6, leader; στρατ-ηό-ί, b (cf. R. στρα), leader of an army, general; στραττ^γέ-ω, be general, command; συ-στράτττγο-ί, ό, fellow- general ; ύΊΓ(Ηττράτψ/ο-$, ό, under-general, lieutenant-general ; ιητοστρα- τττγέ-ω, be lieutenant-general; στρατψϊ-ίό., is, office of general, gener- alship; στρατττγιά-ω, wish to be general; Xox-ayo-s, ό (cf. R. λιχ), leader of a λόχο?, captain; λοχάγ^-ω, be captain; inro-\6xayo-i, 6, sub- captain, lieutenant; λοχόγ-ίά, ot, captaincy; ούρ-άγό-?, 6 (see ουρά, rear), leader of the rear; iiyi-o -μαι, lead, guide, command, infer, think ; άφ-ψ/έο-μαι, draw out, explain, recount; η^€-μών, 6ih>s, b, leader, guide; iiyepav-la, as, leadership, supremacy; η'^€μΐΗτυνα, τά, thank offerings for safe guidance. — άγ»γ-ή, ^s (αγ-α7, by reduplica- tion), a leading, carrying; aw-aywy^, ψ, leading off, removal; vap- αγατγτ}, ^s, transport; &yfay-6-9, b-v, guiding, leading; fflr-ayuiyb-s, b-v (see σϊτο -s, grain), corn-carrying; δημ-ayωyb•s, b (cf. R. δα), popular leader, demagogue ; δημay(ayέ^ω, play the demagogue ; άγώγ-ιμο-β, o-v, easily carried; aythytpjn, τά, freight, cargo, wares. — αξ-»ν» ov-os, b (ay + <Γ = αί), axle; ξμ-αξα, ψ (cf. ίψΜ.), wagon with two connected axles, prop., therefore, four-wheeled wagon ; άμαξ -iTb-s, b-v, passable by wag- ons; άμαξ-ιαΐσ-$, a, o-y, large enough to load a wagon; άρμ-άμαξα, η$ (cf R. op), closed carriage; o|-io-s, a, o-u, of equal iceight, worth as much, worthy; αξία, as, worth, value, deserts; d^ib-w, think worthy, claim, demand; άξίω-μα, ar-os, rb, worth, dignity, authority; άξιο- <ττράτψγο-9, o-v, worthy of being general. ag -δ, lead, drive; ag-men, in-is, n., multitude, band; ag-e-r, gri, wi., field; ag-ili-s, adj., easily moving, nimble; axi-e, is, wi., axle; S-la, ae, /., wing. ACORN, ACRE, AXLE; agony, awi-agonist, 8ar-agogic, jjed-agogue, syn-' agogue, axiom. wyeipm, collect (R. γαρ). 4-γ€(ρ« (theme άγβρ-), bring together, collect; &'yop-d, as, assembly, meeting, meeting-place, market; ayopa-vbpa-s, b (cf. R. ν*μ), market master; ayopcihu, speak in the assembly, harangue, say; Kar-^yopo-s, o-K, speaking against, accusing; κατ7τγορ4-ω, accuse; καττ^γορ-ία, as, accusation; jw7oX-ii7opo-$, o-v (cf. R. μακ), talking big, boastful; μ€7αλιηΌρ^-ω, boast, brag; xpo-^yopo-s, b, advocate; vporfyopi -ω, speak for, be spokesman ; άyopά^ω, go to market, buy. gre-z, gre-g-is, wi., flock, herd; S-greg-iu-s, adj., select, extraor- dinary. pan-egjTic, par-egorlc 249 R. a^ic-R. 1 aF R. ajK, anc, bend. άγκ-ών, ων -os, b, bend of the arm, elbow, bend; άγκ-νλη, ij$, loop, noose, thong of a javelin l'iv-ayκυ\ά-ω, fit thongs on, fit with a thong ; bi-ay κυΚίξο-μαι, bi-ayKv\b-o-pAi, hold by the thong (putting the finger through it) ; &γκ-νρα, ά$, anchor; αγκ -os, e-o$, τό, glen, valley ; δγκ- o-Si 0, barb of an arrow. anc-u-B, Ϊ, m., one who crouches, servant (cf. Ancus Martins, servant of Mars) ; ancil-la, ae, /., maidservant ; ang-u-lu-e, ϊ, m.y angle, corner; unc-u-s, ΐ, m., hook, barb. ANKLE, ANGLE (fish) ', anchor. R. αδ QapaK)^ suad, he sweet α-ν-8-άν-ω (theme db-), please; a-ν (cf rptis), thrice glad, very glad; ή8-ο-μαι, be glad, rejoice ; ή8-ονή| ^s, joy, pleasure, delight ; T|8;v-St eia, ύ, sweet, pleasant, acceptable; ηδ^ωί, adv., sweetly, cheerfully, with pleasure ; ηδύ -otvo-s, o-v (see olvo-s. Wine), producing sweet wine; ^5u-ira^i>s, is (cf. R. σίτο), experiencing pleasure; ηδυταθέ-ω, live pleasantly, be luxurious. sua-ui-s, adj., sweet, agreeable; Buad-u-s, adj., persuasive ; suftd• e-6, advise, persuade ; suaui-u-m or aaui-u-m, ϊ, η., love-kiss. sweet; hedon-ism. αβιρω^ raise, &€(ρω (theme aep-), Att. atp» (theme ap•), raise, lift; αρ-8ην, adv., raised up (' from the ground up '), wholly, quite; αρτά-ω (formed on a stem ap-To-), hang up, hang on to, fasten; αορ, Λορ -os, τό. Epic, hanger, sword; per-^op-o-s, Att. μeτ-4ωp^o-s, o-v, raised from the ground, in the air, on high. aorta, met-eor. R. 1 α/Γ, an, perceive, ά-ΐ-ω (for af -ιω), perceive, esp. by the ear, hear; οδβ, ώτ -bs, rb (of -ατ, ο-ατ, ώτ-), ear; αΐίτθ-άν-ο-μαι (αίσθ- for af-jO), perceive, ob- serve; aiσθη-τικb-s, ή, b-v, perceptive; αϊσθψσι -s, e-ws, η, perception. au-d-i-o, hear; au-r-i-e, is, /., ear; aus-cul-td, hear with atten- tion ; δ -meii, in-is, n., foreboding, sign. BAR ; aesthetic, an-aeethetic, otxi-logy. Ε. 2 aF-alp4(0 250 R. 2 ap^ au, blow, αδ-ρά, as (af-pa), breeze; α-ήρ, o-^p-os, 6, ή (of -«/)), air; αύ-λό -s, ό, toind ineimmeni, yfwie ; αύλ^-ω, play the flute ; αύ-λή, ^s, courtyard (open to the air); αύ\ί^ο-μαι^ lie in the open air^ bivouac; d-c-ro-s» al-€-T6-9t (stem of-t, cf. Lat. aui-s)^ eagle ('swift as the wind') ; ol-mvd-s, 6 (o/r-t), bird of prey ; άτ-μό -ti ό (α/:-τ), vapour^ steam; ά,τμΧζω^ steam. aui-s, is,/., 6ir^; Suu-m, i, n., egr^r; ue-nt-u-s, i, m., wind. WEATHER, WIND ; air, hydr-3i\uio, aethma, atmosphere. aihio^at^ he ashamed. αΙδ-Ι-ο-μΐΜ (theme αίδ€-), poetic atS-o -μαι (theme o/3-), be ashamed^ feary respect ; αΐδή-μων^ oy, gen. ov-os, respectful^ modest ; α(8-ώς, 6-os, 0V5, ^ (stem αίδ-οσ-), sense o/ shame, respect; αίδο -to-s, a, o-i', regarded with reverence or shame; αιδοία, τά, the private parts; aUr-xpo-s, i, 6-v (αιδ-χρο), shameful, base, infamous, disgraceful; αίσχρώί, adv., disgracefully, ignominiously ; αΙσ-χο5, €-os, τό (αιδ-χεσ), shame, dis- grace; αίσχ-ύν-η, ψ, shame, dishonour; αίσχϋνω, dishonour, disgrace. αϊθω, hum, αΐθ-Μ (theme aW-), set on fire, kindle, burn; αίθ-ήρ, 4ρ•α%, ό, bright upper air, ether; αΐθρ-ω -s, o-f (αίθρ-ιο- for aWep-to-), clear, bright; vw- αίθριο -f, a-v, under the open air; αίθρ-Ιά, as, clear sky; δι-αιθριά^ω, groio clear. aed -δ-β, ium, /., hearth, house; aedf-li-e, is, m., commissioner of buildings, aedile ; aes-tu-s, us, w., a raging (of fire or of waves) ; aes-tfl-B, atis, /., summer. ether, ether-ea2. αιρέω, take (prob. R. fapi), alp-i-m (theme alp€-), take, seize, capture; alpe -τό-ί, ή, ό•ν, that may be taken; aue-alpcro-s, o-p (cf. avrds), self-appointed; i^-alpero-s, o-v, Jacked out, selected; verbal alpe-rio-s, i, o-v, fnust be taken. — dX-o-v (theme i\-), 2 aor., / took; άλ-ίσ-κ-ο-μαι (theme αλ-, ά\ο-), be taken, be captured; αλω-το-5, ή, ό-ν, to be taken; a^χμ-ά\ωro-s, o-v (cf. R. ακ), captured by the spear; ά»-ά\ωτο-ί, o-v, not to be taken, invincible; άΧω-ϋ-ι-ί, €-ws, ij, capture ; άΧώσι-μο-ί, o-v, easy to capture. op-haeresia, di-aereein, syn-Amenim, heresy, heretic. 251 α(τέ»-αλλο$ αΐτίω, ask for, αΙτ-4-ω, ask for, claim, demand; αΐτη-σι-^, c-ws, η, request, demand; alT-Cd,as, ong.' demand, then cause, blame, censure; αίηά-ο-μαι, blame, reproach; αϊτ -io-s, i, o-v, causing, to Maine, culpable; iir-alno-i, o-v, blamed for, blameworthy; συν-αίτιο-^, o-v, jointly guilty; ύττ-αίπο-ί, o-v, under a charge, accountable. R. a/c, ac, sharp, pointed, swift, &K-«v, ovT-os, 0, javelin, dart; άκόντ-ιο-ν, τό, javelin, dart; ακοντίζω, hurl the javelin; άκόντι-σί -s, β-ω?, ή, javelin-throwing; άκοντισ-τή-^, οΰ, javelin-thrower; άκ-μή, ^5, point, edge, highest point; άκμή-ν, adv. (ace. of ακμή), on the point, just; ακμάζω, be at the highest point; αΙχμή, ^s (for ακ-ψη), spear -point ; αίχμ-άλωτο -s, o-v (cf. α1ρ4ω), cap- tured by the spear; ακ -po-s, a, o-v, pointed, at the point, highest; άκρο-ν, τό, height; άκρο-βο\ίζο-μαι (cf βάλλω), throw from a distance or height; άκροβό\ι-σι-ί, β-ω?, ή, skirmish; άκρό-τολί-^, e-ws, η (cf R. Ίτλο), upper city, citadel ; άκρ-ωνυχίά, 5s (6νυξ, υχ -os, nail), nail-tip, spur, crest; &κρά, as, height, citadel — ώκ-ύ -s, eta, ύ, swi/i. — Ijiriro-s, 0, ii (stem iK-fo), horse ('the swift one'); ϊΐΓπ-αρχο-$, ό (cf άρχω), cavalry commander; Ιτπό-δρομο-ί, 6 (see δρόμο -s, a running), race- course; φί\-L7rτo-s, o-v (cf φίλο?), fond of horses ; ΙτηΓ-ικό -s, ή, ό-ν, of a horse or of cavalry ; Ιτητάζο-μαι, drive or ride a horse; imra -σίά, as, a riding; Ivr-eu-s, ar-allel, par-aXiaM. αμα^ together, Αμα, adv. (for σα/χα), at the same time, together; άμπιξα, ηί (cf. R. ογ), wagon with two connected axles, prop., therefore, four-wheeled wagon; άμαξ-ιτό -'s, ό-ν, passable by wagons; άμαξ-ιαΐο -s, a, o-v, fit for a wagon, large enough to load a wagon; άρμ-άμΛξα, ηί (cf R. op), closed carriage. — 6μό-ί, -ή, ό-ν. Epic, one and the same; ομού, adv., together, at once; ομ4-σ€, to the same spot; δμωί, conj., all the same, still, nevertheless; όμό-\oyo-ί, o-y (cf ll.Xty), agreeing; όβΑο\<τγέ-ω, agree, confess; ομολογουμένως, avowedly, by common consent; όμο-μήτριο-ς, ά, o-v (see μήτηρ, mother), born of the same mother; 6po-xirpio-i, ά, o-v (see πατήρ, father), begot by the same father; όμο -Tpaireto-s, o-v (cf τίτταρ€5 and R. irtS), at the same table; 6μ-ηρο-ς, ό (cf. R. op), pledge of unity, hostage; δμ-ϊλο-ί, ό (see ίλη, troop), crowd, throng; όμίλέ-ω, be in company with; 8μο-ιο-ς, ά, o-v, like, similar, resembling; όμοιων, adv., in like manner, alike; άν-όμοιο -s, o-v, unlike, different; άνομοίωί, adv., differently; όμα-\ό-5, ή, όν, even, level; 6μα\ώ$, adv., evenly; όμαλ-ής, h, even, level. aem-per, adv., always; eln-guIT, adj., one at a time, single; seme-l, adv., once; eimu-l, ado., at the same time; aimi-U-e, adj., like, resem- bling. iAME, SOME ; Hama-dryad, hom-ily, homo-geneous, homo-logous, homoeo-pathy, an-omaly. αρηρ^ man. άνήρ, άνδρ -os, 6 (stem avep-), man, Lat. uir; dv«p-eto-y, ά, o-v, manly, brave; άνδραό-τψί, ητ -os, η, manliness, valour; άνδρΙΙ^ω, make a man of, mid., act bravely; άν-ανδρ -o-s, o-v, unmanly; άνδρ-α^αθίά, as (see ayaeo-s, good), manly virtue, valour; άνθρ-ωτΓο -s, ό, η (cf R. oir), man (* man-face ^, Lat. homo; άνθρώτ-ινο-%, -η, o-v, human; roXv- άνθρωτο -s, o-v (cf R. irXo), thickly populated. andi-oid, poly-andxy, anttr-opology, mis-antbi-ope, phil-anthi- opy. 253 dvrC-R. opK αντί, over against αντί, prep., over against, against, instead of; avrl-o-s, a, o-v, set against, opposite; έν-αντίο-$, ά, o-v, opposite, in the opposite direction; ivavTio-0 -μαι, set oneself against ; άντιά-ω, άντίάζω, meet face to face; άντά-ω, go opposite, go to meet. ante, adv. and prep., before; ant§-s, ium, m., rows (of vines); anti-quu-B, adj., old, ancient. x-long. Answer; antidote, ant-agonist, etc. R. ap, ar, fit. άρ-αρ-(σ-κ-ω (theme dp-), fit or join together, suit; ά,ρ-€-(ων, ov, comp., fitter, better; op-i-crro-s, η, o-v, sup., fittest, bravest, best; &p- Tt, exactly, just, just now; άρθ-μό-ς, ό (αρ-{-θ), league, bond; άριθ- μό -s, ό (αρ-ι-θ), series, number; άριθμέ-ω, number, count; αριθμψτό-%, ■)}, 6-v, easily counted, few; άν-αρίθμητο -s, o-v, not to be counted, in- numerable; &ρ-μα, ar-os, το', team, chariot; άρμ-άμαξα, ψ (cf &μα and R. ογ), closed carriage (* chariot- wagon') ; αρμόζω (from a stem dp -μο-), fit together, set in order, control; άρμοσ-τή -s, οΰ, organizer, harmost; άρμον-ία, as (stem άρ-μον-), means of fastening, framework, harmony ; δμ-ηρ-0-ί, 6 (cf. &μα), pledge of unity, hostage; νοδ-ήρ-ψ, es (cf. R. irc8), joined or reaching to the feet; άρ-έ-σκ-ω, suit, please ; ap-c -τή, ^s, fitness, goodness, bravery, valour. ar-B, ar-ti-s, /., skill, art; in-er-B, adj., unskilful; Boll-er-B, αφ*., quite skilful, clever; ar-tu-B, adj., close, narrow; ar-tuB, uura, m., joints, limbs; ar-ma, Oram, n., armour, arms; ar-mu-B, i, m., shoul- der. ARM, RIME (misspelt r%me) ; axiato-cracy, arithmetic, log-axithm, harmony. ' R. apKy axe, keep off. &ρκ4-ο), f ut. άρκέ-σω, keep off, be enough, suffice. — άρήγ-ω (αρ-α-κ, αρ-η -y), ward off, help. — άλκ-ή, ijs (α\κ = αρκ), defence, prowess; άΧκ-ιμο-ί, o-v, able to defend, brave, warlike. — άλφω (aX-e -κ-σ) , ward off, mid., defend oneself from, repulse. arc-e -δ, shut up, keep aioay ; &rc-a, ae, /., chest, box; Surc-SLnu-s, αφ., secret; anc, arc-i-s, /., stronghold, citadel; arc-u-B, us, m., bow. ARROW. H. aiMr-a^-os 254 R. άρτΓ, rapy snatch, seize, a(m-i\, Ψ, bird of prey^ kite ; "Αριτ-υιαι, al, the Snatchers ; &pir-a|, «7-0$, by ^, rapacious; dprdi^uty Epic fut. άρ-η-άξ-ω (theme οριταγ-), Att. άρτάσω (theme άρτοδ-), snatch, plunder ^ pillage ; άρταγ-τ}, ^s, α «eiz- ing, plundering, pillage. rap-i-o, seize, tear; rap-Iz, αφ'., tearing, furious ; rap-ina, ae, /., robbery, plunder; rapi-du-s, αφ., tearing away, impetuous. Harpy. άρχω, he first, &PX-«, δβ ^rai, in point of time, begin, in point of station, rule; part. Αρχων, om-os, o, leader, ruler ; ύπ-άρχ-ω, be under as a founda- tion, support, exist, be; άρχ-ή, ψ, beginning, rule, dominion; άρχα- to-$, a, o-v, from the beginning, ancient, old; ένωμοτ-άρχη^, ου (see ένωμοτία, enomoty), commander of an enomoty ; κωμ-άρχψ$, ου {cf. Kfifuu), village chief; άρχ -iKd-s, -ή, ό-ν, fit to command; άρχ-ό -s, ό, leader; υτ-αρχο -s, 6, under officer, lieutenant; άν-αρχο -s, o-v, without leaders; άναρχ-ίά, as, lack of leaders, anarchy; Jfinr-apxo-s, ό (c/. R. aic), cavalry commander; μόναρχο-^, 6 (see μΜνο-^, alone), one who rules alone; μοναρχ-ίά, as, rule of one, monarchy; ραύ-αρχο -s, ό (cf voOs), commander of a fieet, admiral; ναυαρχέ-ω, be admiral; veie- αρχο-ί, O'V {cf R. Ίπ,θ), obeying authority, obedient; ττ^ίθαρχέ-ω, obey a superior, defer to; το\υ-αρχ-ίά, as (cf. R. ιτλα), command vested in many persons; συμποσί-αρχο-ί, ό (cf. R. iro), president of a drinking- party; ταξί-αρχο-ς, 6 {cf. R. τακ), commander of a τάξα, taxiarch; φρούρ-αρχο -s, 6 {cf. irpo and R. 2 ftp), commander of a garrison. arch-bishop, aich-angel, axchi-episcopal, a.Tche-type, archaic, archaeo-;o|/|/, archives, an-archy, Λίer-archy, mon-archy, hept- archy, ieir-archy, etc αυτός., self J same. a^T^-f, ojJtiJ, αύτ6, self, same, in derivatives and compounds, self, same, very; αύτοΰ, adv., in the very place, here, there; αύτ6-θ€ν, adv., from the very spot, hence, thence; αύτ6-θι, adv., in this or that very place ; eiVo-fff, adv., to the place itself, thither ; αυτω^, adv., in the very man- ner; ωσ-αύτωί (see ω$, thus), in this same icay, likewise, just so; αύθ- ήμ^ρο-ί, o-v (see ^μέρα, day), on the same day; αύθημερ6-ν, adv., on the same day; αύθημχρίξω, return on the same day; αύθ -aipero-s, o-v {cf. alpltt), self-appointed; aoro-KiKevaro-t, o-v {cf. R. kcX), self-directed, of one's own accord; αύτο-κράτωρ, op-o^, 6, η {cf. R. 1 κμα), being one^s 255 R. βα-βάλλ» own master, absolute; αύτ6-ματο-ί, η, o-v (cf. R. μα), self-impelled, spontaneously; αύτ6-μο\ο-ί, 6 (see βλώσκω, go), deserter; αύτομο\έ•ω, desert; αύτ6•νομο-$, o-v {cf R. ve^i), under one^s own laws, independent; i-avrov, contr. αύτοΰ, etc. (see ου, of him), of himself, etc.; έμ•αυτοΰ, etc. (see ^γώ, I), of myself, etc. ; σ€-αυτοΰ, contr. σαυτοΰ, etc. (see σύ, you), of yourself, etc. axLth-entic, axLto-biography, auto-crai, auto-graph, auto-maton, auto-nomous, aut-opsy, taxito-logy. R. βα, ba, ua, go, βα(νω (for /Say-iw), fut. βή-σο-μαι, etc. (theme βαν-, βα-), go, walk; βα-τ6-ί, ή, ό-ν, passable; Λ-βατο -s, o-v, impassable, not fordable ; δύσ- βατο -s, o-v, hard to travel ; δια-/3ατο-$, -ή, ό-ν, that can be crossed, ford- able; ά-δίάβατο-ί, o-v, not to be crossed; δυσ-διάβατο -s, o-v, hard to cross; δια-βα-τ4ο-ί, a, o-v, that must be crossed; προσ-βατό -s, ή, of, that can be approached, accessible ; βά-σι-$, e-ws, ή, a going, stepping, step; άνά-βασι-^, €-ω$, η, a going up, ascent, expedition into the interior; 5ta-/3aat-$, e-ws, η, a crossing, passage ; ίκ-βασι-^, e-ws, ή, way out, egress ; κατά-βασι-^, e-ws, ^, a going down, descent, march from the interior; βάσί-μο-$, o-v, passable; βά-δην, adv., at a walk; βή-μα, ατ -os, το, step, stride; βω-μό-$ι ό, elevation, altar; β^-βα-ιο-ς, α, o-v (reduplicated perf. stem β€-βα-), standing fast (cf. βέβηκα, stand fast), trusty, con- stant; β€βαώ-ω, make sure; βακ-τηρ-ίά, as (/3a -f κ), walking-stick, staff; βάΖ-ο-ί, 6 (βα + δ), a going, walk; βαδίζω, go on foot, walk, march; βι-βάζω (theme βιβαδ-), make go. ua-d-u-m, ϊ, η., ford ; u§d-5, go, walk ; ue-n-i-o, come ; ar-bi-ter, tri, m., spectator, judge; am-bu -ΐδ, walk about; ba-c-ulu-m, i, n., staff. COME ; basis, base, bacteria. βάΧΚω, throw (R. βαΧ). βάλλο» (for βα\-ιω, theme βάλ-), throw, throw at, hit; δια-βά\\ω, throw across at with words, slander; β^λ-ος, e-os, τό, thing thrown, missile; βολ-ή, ^s, a throxo ; άνα-βολή, ijs, that which is thrown up, earthwork; δια-βο\ή, ijs, slander; €ΐσ-βο\ή, rjs, invasion, entrance, pass; έμ-βολή, ψ, invasion ; ττρο-βολή, ijs, a throwing forward ; ιτροσ-βοΧή, ijs, assault, charge ; συμ-βοΧ-ή, ijs, a hurtling together, encounter ; uwep- βοΧή, ψ, a throwing over, crossing; '7Γ€τρο-βοΧ-ίά, as (see πέτρο -s, stone), stone-throwing; άκρο-βοΧίζο-μαι (cf. R. ακ), throio from a dis- tance ; άκροβόΧι-σι-ί, e-w$, ή, throwing from a distance, skirmish. ^m-blem, ^ro-blem, dia-hoUc, devil, para-ble, sywi-bol. R. poF-R- Yw>-t'ico-s, t}, o-v, well-disposed; €ύνοΐκ^, adv., with good will or affec- tion; KaKO-voo-s, oo-v (see koko-s, bad), ill-disposed; κακ6-νο-ια, as, ill- will; διά-νοία, OS, way of thinking, purpose; ey-wto, 0$, thought, inspi- ration ; rp6-voia, as, forethought. gnfl-ni-s, adj., knowing, skilled; nar-r -δ, make known, tell; nS- uu-s (gna-uu-s), adj., diligent; ηδ-βο-δ, learn•; ηδ -bili-s, adj., well- known; ηδ -meii, inis, n., name; i-gnδrδ, not know; no-ta, ae, /., mark, sign. CAN, CUNNING, KEN, KEEN, KNOW, NAME, Wn-COUTH ; dia-gnOBlB, gnome, gnostic, a-gnostio, physio-gnomy, onomato-poeia, an- on3rmou8, met-onymy, patr-onymic, pseud-onym, syn-onym. R. Sa-R. 2 δακ 258 R. δα, da, divide, share. &ή.|ΐο-$, ό, divided land, community^ people; δημ•αΎωη^6-%, 6 (cf. R. ογ), popular leader, demagogue; δημ-α-^ω^^-ω, play the demagogue; δημό-σω -Sf i, o-v, belonging to the community; άΐΓΟ-δημΛ-$, o-v, away from one's country, abroad; ά-κοδημέ-ω, be from home, go abroad; ly-Sty/io-s, o-v, at home, ηαίΐϋβ. — δασ•-μό-5, ό (δα + σ), division, tax; δάσμ-€υ'σι-$, c-ws, ή, distribution. — Βαιτ-άνη, ηί (δα +ir), dividing of one's fortune, expense; δαιτανά-ω, expend; δαψιλ-ή$, ^s (for 5air-ri- \-Vs), liberal, plentiful; Sftirvo-v, το (for δ€τ-ινο-ν), orig. distribution, hence, dinner; δ€ίΤΓν4-ω, dine; d-Sctirw-s, o-v, without dinner; σύν- δ€ίννο-%, h, companion at dinner; Scirw-iroi^-w (c/. iroi4-R• F«r 264 R. 1 f e/3, uer, speak, ffp« (theme ip-), fut. ipQ,, pf. €ίρηκα, apeaky say; βη-τ6-$, -ή, ό -r, eatd, ioW; άχ6-ρ-ρητο-$, ο-κ, ηοί ίο 6e ioW, secret; ιΐρή-νη, i^y (for e-fpiy-Mj), agreement, peace ; ^ή-τβ»ρ, op-oy, ά, speaker, orator; ^-τρά, Of, υβΓδαί d^reemen/, compact. uer-ba-m, ΐ, «., word; uerb-5su-i, ac{)., wordy. word; irenics, Irene. R. 2 f ep, uer, protect, watch over, fp-K-os, e-os, t6, defence, wall; 2ρν.μα, or-oj, τ6 (stem /pu- for e-/r€/>-i;, €-fpv), safeguard, protection; έρυ-μν6-$, -ή, 6-y, defended, forti- fied; ipt -κ-ω, hold back, keep off; o^p-o-s, 6 (for fop-o-s), watcher, guardian; ίφ -op-o-s, 6, one who watches over, overseer ; φρουρ-6 -s, ό (for vpo-fop-o-s, cf irp-os, ό, sacrificer ; θυ-σ-ίά, ij, sam- ^ce; 6ν-μαι or-oy, το, victim^ sacrifice; θυ-μ-έ\η^ ?;$, place for sacrifice^ altar; θϋμ-ιά-ω, burn incense; θϋμΐά-μα, ατ -os, ro, incense; θΰμχά- τ-ήριο-ν^ roy vessel for burning incense^ censer; θν-ο-ν, τό, a tree the fragrant wood of which was burnt in sacrifice ; θνό-€ΐ$, «σσα, ev, fra- grant; θυ-ώδψ^ €s (ifw, smell) i sweet-smelling; 0ν-μΛ-ν, τ6, thyme. fu-mu-B, Ϊ, m., smoke ; fu-n-us, er-is, «., funeral rites ; fu-li-g5, in-is, /., soot; fi-mu-B, ϊ, w., filth; foe-du-e (ioTfoui-dU'S)^ adj., filthy. DUST ; th3rme. καίω^ hum. κά-ΐΜ, κά-ω (theme καυ-), burn; καν-σι-$ι β-ω?, ή, α burning ; καύσι- μθ'$, o-y, ίΛαί can δβ ftwrwi, combustible; καυ-τό -Sy καυ-σ-το-?, ij, ο'-ΐ', burnt; 4-«αι/στο-5, o-f, «wftwrni; όλο-καυτ^-ω (see βλο -s, whole) ^ bring a whole burnt offering ; καν-μα, ατ-ο$, το, Aeoi. caustic, cauterise, Ao^o-cauBt, calm. R. /ταλ, cal, call. καλ-4-Μ| pf. it^-•ν, τό (cf. ■Ml α R. 2 Kpa-R. λιγ 270 was), complete contest^ in which, combining both wrestling and boxing, all the powers of the fighter were called into action. Cer-Ss, er-is, /., Ceres ('goddess of creation'); pro-cSru-B, adj.^ high, tall; caeri-mon-ia, ae, /., religious rite; cor-p-ue, or- is, «., body; ΟΓβ-δ, produce, create; crfi-sc-d, come into being; in-crS- mentu-m, ϊ, »., growth. HARD ; awio-crat, amio-cracy, (iemo-cracy, demo-ciat, etc. R. 2 Kpaj car, mix^ eeoJc, icpa-in-s, €-ω5, 17, a mixing, crasis ; κ(κΙ-τήρ, ^p-os, ό, mixing bowl; &-Kpu-To-s, O'V, unmixed; iccpd-vvv -μι, mix; ά-κέρα -tO'S, o-p, unmixed, pure; κ^ρα-|Α0-$, ό, earth for mixing atid baking, potter'' s clay; κίράμ^ to-v, TO, earthen jar; κ€ραμ-€οΰί, a, οΰν, of earth or clay. car-b -δ, δη -is, m., charcoal; cul-Ina, ae, /., kitchen; cro-md, burn; crem-or, or-is, m., broth. HEARTH ; crasie, tdto^n-crasy, crater. R. λα^, lat, conceal. λα-ν-Ο-άν -w, lie hid, escape the notice of; λάθ-ρ^., adv., secretly; λήθ-η, ψ, forgetfulness ; ά-\ηθφ, ^s, unconcealed, true; ά\ήθ€-ια, ay, truth, candour; ά\ηθ-ίνό-$, -ή, ό-ν, genuine; άΧηθεύ-ω, speak the truth. la-te-5, lie hid; late-bra, ae, /., hiding-place; latebr-dsu-s, adj., abounding in coverts, secret, lethargy, Lethe. R. λβγ, leg, gather. λίγ-ω, gather, count, tell, say; Xck-to-s, ή, 6-v, selected; άΐΓΟ-\€κτο-9, O'V, selected; iwl-XeKTo-s, o-v, selected; verbal \€k-t4o-s, a, o-y, to be said; λόγ-ο-?, ό, word, saying, reason; άτο-Χο^έ-ο-μΛΐ, say in defence; στουδαιοΛοηίέ-ω (-ια), sword; μαχαίρ-ιο-ν, τό, dagger. R. /i€\, mer, mind., regard. μΐλ -fi, impers., it is a care, it concerns; ά-μ^Χ-ήί, 4s, without con- cern, heedless; άμ£\α^, adv., heedlessly; άμ4\€-ια, as, carelessness; άμΛ\4-ω, be careless; ήμe\ημ4vωs, adv. (from the pf. mid. partic. of άμ£\4ω), carelessly ; i^Γι-μe\-ήs, 4s, careful; 4χίμ4\€-ια, os, care; 4'Wip£\4- ο-μαι or 4ΐΓΐμ4\-ο-μΛΐ, take care of; με\4-τη, 77$, care, attention, practice ; Ι*6λ€τά-ω, attend to, practise ; pjeKeryi-po-s, a, o-v, well trained; μέλ-λω, bethink oneself, hesitate, be on the point of. mora, ae, /., delay; me-mor, adj., mindful; memor-ia, ae, /., memory. , R. /χ^γ, mic, mix. μίγ-νν-μι, μίγ-νύ-ω, mix, mingle; pak-to-s, -fi, o-v, mixed, to be mixed; A-p^kto-s, o-v, unmixed; μCγ-o, μίγ-δα, μίγ-δην, adv., mixedly ; μSξi-s, c-«i (for piy-ais), η, a mingling, intercourse; μχ^ο-βάρβαρο -s, o-v (see βάρ-βαρο -s, foreign), half barbarian, half Greek. mi-BC-e -δ, mix; mix-tu-s, adj., mixed; pro-misc-uu-s, adj., mixed, indiscriminate. MIX. MASH. i/aO?, ship (R. va, vv, flow, swim). ναΰ -s, v€-os, η, ship ('swimmer'); ναύ-αρχο -s, & (cf &ρχω), com- mander of a fleet, admiral; ναυαρχ4-ω, be admiral; vav-K\iipo-s, ό {K\ijpo-s, lot, share), ship-owner; ναυ-ντηο-^, 6 {cf. R. ιταγ), ship- builder; ναυτΓ7Γϊ4-ω, build ships ; vavTrtaii-iTipA-s, o-v, fit for ship-build- ing ; ναύ-τη -s, ου, seaman, sailor; ναυτ-ικό -s, ή, o-v, belonging to ships, naval; ναν-λο-ν, τό, money for passage by ship; ναΰ-σθλο-ν, τό (for ναυ-στο\ο-ν, see στ4\\ω, send), fare; ναυσί -vopo-s, o-v {cf. R. irep), that can be traversed in ships; ναυ-σ£ά, as, sea-sickness; v€-ωpό^s, ό {cf. R. 2 F«p), superintendent of the dock-yard; νεώριο-ν, τό, dock-yard; vo-To-s, 0, southwest wind (which brings wet weather); νή-σ -o-s, 17, island ('swimming in the sea'); ϋβλοιτο-ν-ι^σο-ί, ^ {114\οψ, Pelops), Peloponnesus ('Pelops's Island'); Π€λοΐΓοΐΊη>σ-ιο-$, ά, o-v, Peloponne- sian; X.€pa6-v^ao-s, Att. Xeppo-vriffo-s, ij {x4p-o5o-j, η, way to, approach; τάρ-οδο-ί, ij, way along, pas- sage; ν€μΙ-οδο-ί, η, way round, circuit; πρόσ-οδο-%, η, way to, approach; eo-irpoVo5o-s, o-v, easy to approach; σύν-οδο -s, ij, meeting, encounter; W-io-s, o-v, belonging to a journey ; έφ-όδιο-ν, τά, provision for a jour- ney; όδ-€ύ-ω, go one's way; όδοι-πόρο -s, 6 {cf. R. inp), one who goes by road or by land; όδοιπορέ-ω, go by land; o5o-iroto-5, 6 (cf. woUu), one who makes a road; οδοττοιέ-ω, make a road. eol-n-m, Ϊ, n., ground; sol-ea, ae, /., sole, sandal; eSd-ulu-e, αφ'., persistent, diligent. epis-ode, eac-odue, meth-od, peri-od, syn-od. οκτώ., eight. Φκτώ, eight; όκτω-καΙ-δ€κα (cf. WKa), eighteen; oktu-kis, adv., eight times; άκτακισ-χιλιοι, at, a (see χίλιοι, thousand), eight thousand; όκτα-κόσιοι, οι, α (cf Ικα,τόν), eight hundred; liy8o-o-s, η, o-v (for οκτο- ©-f), eighth; ay δοή- κοντά (cf Λκοα-ι), eighty. I octo, eight; octS-uu-e, eighth; Octo-ber, adj., of the eighth month (the year beginning with March); oct-iSn-s, adv., eight times; octo-ginta, eighty; octin-genti, eight hundred. EIGHT ; octsi-gon, QCta.-hedron, octxt- syllabic. R. 07Γ, oc, see, ίψο-μαν (οτΓ-σο-μΛΐ), fut., δττ-ωιτ-α, 2 pf., etc., see; ot-to-s, -ή, ό-ν, seen, visible; υπ-οττο -s, o-v, looked at from beneath the brows, viewed with suspicion ; ύττοτττβν-ω, suspect; ύττοψίά, as (for ύιτ-οπ-σια), suspicion; έίψι -s, €-ωs, η (for ott-^i-s), aspect, look; δμ-μ», ar-os, τ6, eye, — όφθ.αλμό-8, ό (oT + tf), eye. — ώψ, ώττ-ο'?, ή, face, countenance; καλΧ-ωπίζω (stem if άλλο-, see KaU-s, beautiful), give a fine appearance or look to, adorn; κα\\ωχισ-μΛ-$, 6, adornment; άνθρ-ωτΓ -o-s, ό (cf. όνήρ), man ('man-face'); άνθρώΐΓ -ivo-s, η, o-v, human; ττοΧυ-άνθρωπο-ί, O'V (cf R. πλα), thickly populated; μέτ-ωττο-ν, το, forehead (the space between the eyes); ττρο-μ^τω-κ-Ιδιο-^, ά, o-v, before or on the forehead; ιτρομ^τωττίδιο-ν, τό, frontlet (armour on horse's forehead) ; τρόσ-ωπο-ν, TO, face, countenance. oc-u-lu-B, Ϊ, m., eye. EYE, OGLE ; autopsy, optic, syn-opaiB, ophthalmia, antel-ope, anthr-opo-logy, misanthr-ope, philanthr- opy, pros-opo-poeia. R. τταγ, pag, fix. ΐΓάγ -os, e-05, TO, what is fixed, mountain-peak or rocky hill, also frost; ιτήγ-νϋ-μι, make solid, freeze; vav-Tvy-o-s, ό (cf. vaOs), ship- builder; vavwriyi-w, build ships; vaυ^Γ■ηy■ή.σιμo-s, -η, o-v, or o-s, o-v, fit for ship-building. — ναχ.ν-ζ, «α, ύ, firm, thick; , 6-v, o/ even/ sori, manifold; iroi^o-to-s, o, o-v, o/ all sorts; «■arra-irofft(i'), adv., altogether, entirely; τάν-ν, adv., αίίοί^βίΛβΓ, very; »α7-«ράτιο-Μ, t6 (c/. E. 1 κρα), all-round contest, pancratium; ταγ- χάλ«Γο-$, o-y (see χαλ€ΐΓά-$, ΛαΓίί), very hard; ΐΓογχολ^τω?, adv., ven/ Aaniiy; ταμ-πληθή^, 4s (c/. R. ιτλα), in full numbers, multUudinous ; ιτάΜ-ίΓολυ-ϊ, τόλλτ;, ιτολυ (c/. R. -τλα), very numerous; ταμ-χόνηρο-^, g.w (cf R. «nra), wAoZZy δα(2; xoi'-oOpTo-s, o-p {cf R. FtpY), ίΑαί w»« do anything, villainous; xavovpy-la, as, knavishness; τav-r€\'ήs, is (cf r{kos), all complete, perfect; TravreWs, adv., perfectly, wholly, utterly; &-was, ά'Ίτάσα, &-τάν, all together; σύμ'was, άσα, αν, all taken collec- tively, all together. dia-pason, pan-acea, pan-iiewiowiMm, pan-opZy, pan-orama, pan- theism, pan-theon, panto-mime. R. τΓβδ, ped, tread. «{8-o-v, TO, ground (that which is trod on); χίδ-ίο-ν, το, level ground, plain ; ir€«Hw'-s, ή, 6-p, flat, level ; δά-τ€δο-ν, τό (intensive prefix δα-), solid ground; στρατό-ηδο-ν, τό (cf R. στρ»), campil^g- ground, camp; στρατοτ€δ€ύ-ω, encamp; l/i-ircSo-s, o-v, in the ground, firm; έμΐΓ€δ6-ω, make firm, holdfast; ι«ζό-ι, ή, ό-ν (for irei-to-s), on foot; ircfi, adv., on foot; τβ^ύ-ω, travel on foot or by land; ίγΙ^ο, t^s (for T€i.to), /ooi, bottom; τρά -irefa, 17s (c/. τίτταρϋ), *able with four legs; oMo-rpairefo-s, o-v (cf 4μα), αί iAe same table; ffw-Tpaweto-s, 6, table-^mpanion ; ιτ<δ-η, ψ, fetter for the foot; ιτ^δά-ω, fetter, bind; irnS-^-v, TO, bottom or blade of an oar; τηδ-ά\ω-ν, τό, rudder; πηδά-ω, spring, leap; ΐΓθύ-«, ΐΓοδ-ό$, ό, foot; lΓoδ-ήpηs, es (cf R. op), reacAmflr to the feet ; ττοδί^ω, tie the feet ; dpyvpo-irovs, οδ -os, 6, ^ (see apyupeos, of silver), silver- footed ; τρί -irovs, οδ -os (cf rptSs), three-footed, tHpod; iμ-^Γόδ-ιo-s, o-v, at the feet, in the way ; ίμιτοδίζω, be in the way, hinder; έμτοδών, adv., in the way, hindering; έκ-τοδών, adv., out of the way. ρδ-8, ped-is, m., foot; com-ped -δΒ, plur., f, shackles; pede-s, i-t-is, m., foot-soldier ; pedes-ter, adj., on foot; im-ped-i-o, hinder; oppidu-m, i, n., town; ρδ -ior, adj., lower, worse; pee-simu-e, adj., icorst. FETCH, FETTER, FIT, FOOT, VAT; parallelopl•peάon, tra-pesiiim, tra-pez-oid, anti-podea, tri-pod. TreVre, five, irivrt,five; ΐΓ€ντ€-καί-δ€κα and δ€κα-πέντ€ (cf. ^έκα), fifteen; xevrd' Kis, adv., ^ve times; τ€ντή-κοντα (cftlKoa-*.), fifty ; ττεντηκον-τήρ, ijp-os, commander of fifty men; τ€vτηκόvτ^opo-s, η (cf. R. cp), fifty-oared ship; irevTriKoc-To-s, ή, 6-v, fiftieth ; v€vrηκoστ-ύ-s, ύ -os, ή, the number fifiy, body of fifty men; τεντα-κόσιοι, ai, a (cf Uarov), five hundred; ττέμν- To-s, 17, o-v (cf. Aeolic νέμιτΐ, five), fifth; ιτεμιττ-οΓο-?, ά, o-v, on the fifth day. qmnque,^ve; quin-tu-e, adj., fifth; quinqu-i6ne, arfv., ^ve times; quin-decim, fifieen ; quinqua-ginta, fifty; quin-gentl, five hundred. FIVE ; penta-grow, penta-weier, penta-iewcA, pente-cost. R. irep, per, press through, mLfm (theme vep-), pierce; ικρ-όνη, vs, tongue of a brooch, pin; 'π€ρονά-ω, pierce ; δι-aμ-v€p^έs, adv., through and through ; xcpd-w, pass through, cross; ir«£pa, as (for vep-ia), trial, proof ('probing ') ; ireipa- ο-μαι, try, attempt; a-ireipo-s, o-v, not having tried, without experience, unskilled; ^μ -Tetpo-s, o-v, acquainted with; iμΊΓeίpωs, adv., by experi- ence; trop-o-s, o, means of passing ; ίμ -vopo-s, 6, one who travels, mer- chant; έμτόρ-ω-ν, τ6, trading-place, market; 6δoί-^Γopo-s, o-v (cf. 6Ws), going by land; όδοιτορέ-ω, go by land; άντί -vopo-s, o-v, on the other side of the way, opposite; &-iropo-s, o-v, without ways and means; &τΓορέ-ω, be without ways and means, be perplexed; άνορ-ία, ay, lack of means, embarrassment; βoυ-v6po^s, o-v (cf R. poF), ox-piercing j δύσ-ΊΓορο -s, o-v, hard to travel; δυσνορ-ία, as, difficulty of passing ; ev- vopo-s, o-v, easy to travel through; €ύτΓορ-ίά, άί, facility of obtaining ; wavffl-iropo-s, o-v (cf. ναΰβ), that can be traversed in ships, navigable; wop€v-w, make a way for, make go; Topev-ro-s, ή, ό-ν, passable; δυσ- wopevTo-s, o-v, hard to get through; verbal vopev-Tio-s, a, o-v, that must be traversed; vope-la, 0$, a going, journey, march; πορί^ω, cause to go, carry, bring, supply; ιτέρ-ό, adv., through, beyond; Ίτέρα-ν (prop. κ. ΊητΊν. νλα 278 279 R. ir\€F acc.), on the further side; άντι-τίράν or άι^ι-τ^ρο$, Kar-avrttripav or «βτ-ακτιΐΓ^/)ά?, adv., over against; χβρα-ιο-ί, 5, o-i», on the other side, opposite ; wepaio.w, carry to the other side, transport ; π€βαίνω (theme wfpav-), bring to the other side, bring to an end, accomplish. perl-tu-B, adj., experienced; peri-culu-m, ϊ, η., trial, risk, danger; por-ta, ae, /., gate; por-tu-a, us, m., harbour; porti-cu-a, us, /., covered walk ; pard, make ready ; pir, αφ., equal ; peren-diS, adv., on the day after to-morrow. FARE, FAB, F£KRT, FRITH, FEAR, FRESH, FRISK ; em-pizlcal, plratO, pore, em-porimn. R. 7Γ€τ, pet, y?y, fall. wir-O'^aif fly ; irra-io», stumble, dash; irt-irr-w (for Ti-irer-ui), fall; wih-wer-iis, is, falling well, easy, without trouble ; eihreTtas, adv., easily ; wn-po'V, TO, feather, wing; wrip-vii, vy-os, ij, wing. pet -δ, strive for, seek; im-petu-a, us, m., attack; pen-na, ae, /., feather; acci-piter, tris, m., hawk (' swift of wing'). FEATHER, find; osym-ptoto, coieo-ptera, di-pteia, lepido-ptera, ortho-ptexoxm. R. τΓΐθ, fid, bind. ιηίΒ-ω (theme τηθ-), bind to oneself, persuade, mid., let oneself be bound, obey ; verbal ireia-rio-v, one must obey ; d-weie-T^s, is, disobedient ; &v€tei'W, disobey; weiff-apxo-s, o-v (cf &ρχ«), obedient; weiOapxi-ut, obey authority, defer to ; ww-ro-i, ή, ο-», that does obey, trusty, faith- ful; TUTTO-Tn-s, ητ -os, η, faithfulness; A-iriffro-s, not to be trusted, faithless; άτισΗ-ω, distrust, stispect; άτηστ-Ιά, as, suspicion; irCo•- Ti-s, €-ωs, i}, trust, confluence; Ίπστΐύ-ω, have confidence in, believe. lid-e-a, /, trust, faith; fid-u-a, adj., trusty; fld -δ, trust; foed- u-B, er-is, n., league. BIND, BOND, BAND, BUNDLE, BODY, BED. R. ττλα, 'pla^filL «(-μ-νλη-μι, fut. τ\ή'<τω, fltt; ιτλή-ρ^ηι, cf, full; ΐΓλή-0-«, be full; irX^^-o$, e-os, ro, multitude; waμ•w\ηθήs, is {cf. iras), in full num- bers, multitudinous; χ€ιρo-'lΓ\ηθήs, is (cf. R. xtp), hand-filling ; irXI- •po-v, TO, extent, measure, plethron; St-wXeepo-s, o-v {cf. δνο), of two plethra; ijpU-irXeepo-p, το, half a plethron ; Tpl'T\e$po-s, o-f {cf TptCt), of three plethra; trXetfpi-a?o.s, 5, o-v, of a plethron; A-xXe-ro-s, o-v, not to be filled or measured; irX^-«-s, ω-ρ, full; ^κ-χλβω-?, ω-ν, filled up- iM-'Xeca-s, ω-ρ, quite full; σύμ-χ\€ω^, ω-ν, quite full; ΐΓλ€-ίων, o.,'comp., more, greater; 7r\eov-iKTr,-s, ου {cf R. «χ), one who has or claims more than he ought; 7r\eopeκτi•ω, claim too large a part, get the better; ιτλήν, adv. and prep., except (orig. 'more than ); ΐΓλ€ίστο-$, η, o-v (for TrXe-t^ro-s), sup., most; tro\-v-s, €-ω5, η, city, state (orig. 'press,' 'crowd'); xoXi-r^-s, ov, citizen; ιτοΧϊτβύ-ω, be a citizen; ',τολί^ω, found a city; 7Γθλ*σ-/«ι, ατ -os, τό, town; πo\L-opκi-ω (see etpyω, hem in), hem in a city, besiege; aKpo-rroXt-s, e-ws, ή {cf R. ακ), upper city, citadel; ^T/rpo'-^oXt-s, e-<.s, ή (see μι/ιτηρ, mother), mother cUy, capital; irXo«-TO-s, 0, fullness, plenty, riches; ir\oCvi-ω, be a busybody; ^oXv-reX^s, is {cf R. ταλ), requiring much outlay, costly; a-TcXO-o-s, V, o-v, simple, frank; δ.-χΧοΌ -s, v, o-v {cf 8ύο), two-fold, double; rerpa-irXoO-s, .;, o-v {cf r^ap^s), four-fold, quadruple ; h.• ΐΓλάσιο.5, ά, o-v {cf δύο), two-fold; τpi-τXάσLO-s, a, o-v {cf rpcis), three-fold; iroXXa-irXatrio-s, i, o-v, many times as many. im-ple-6, fill up; ρΐδ -nu-e, adj., full; plg-rua-que, adj., the most; locu-pl6-B, adj., rich in lands, rich; plua, adj., more; plS-b-a, is, /., the common people ; po-pulu-a, i, m., people, nation; pu-bli-cu-a, adj., of the people; am-plu-a, adj., of large extent. FILL, FULL ; plethora, pleio-cene, pleonaam, acro-poUe, metro- poUa, cosmo-poUte, polj-gamy, polyglot, polygon, polyhedron, ροΐγ -nomial, polysyllable, poly-theism, di-ploma. R. irXef, plu, flow, sail, rain. ,Γλέ-ω, float, sail; irXo-o-s, contr. ttXovs, 6, a sailing, voyage; άπό- ^Xovs, 6, a sailing back, homeward voyage; irepi-rrXovs, 6, voyage round; νλο-ΐο-ν, TO, vessel, boat. plu -δ, rain; ρΐδτδ, weep; pW-ma, ^, f, feather, plume ; plaua- tru-m, Ϊ, «., wagon. FLY, FLOW, FLEE, FLIT, FLEET, FLUTTER, FLOAT, FLOOD, FLEA. I i t κ. ψά 280 281 κ. reF-R. σ•€χ R. 7Γ0, ρο, drifiL• v^-To-Si ό, α drinking^ drinking -party ; ιτο-τΛ-ν, το, ίΛαί wAicA is drunk, drink; irvp-ei5-j, 4-ω$, δ, man at the bow, lookotU. pT6,prep., before; prae, pre/)., before; pr-ior, adj., former; pris- cu-B, adj., of old; pris-tinu-s, adj., primitive; pri-mu-s, adj., first; por-ro, adv., forward; pr5-nu-e, adj., bent forward; pxi-uu-s, adj., distinguished, peculiar. lOR, FORK. R. σα/Γ, sa, sound, healthy. ^«.0^, a, o-v (for σαρο-Ο, or σώ-,, aa, σώ-., safe and ^ound; .<^^ξ^ (for σ'Χ), make safe, save; σα,-χ^ρ, Hp-o., 6, prese.-ver saviour ^Ζζ-Λ U saving, salutary; ..r.p-ia, a., safety; ..-ΦΡ^^.ο. lZo.-os (cf φρήν), of sound mind, sensible, self-controlled; σ.^ρο. -«, lTo7sound mUilbe discreet; ..φρονί^^. ^naJce discreet; ..φρο-.ν.,, ψ, soundness of mind, moderation. sa-nu-e, adj., sound, healthy; βδβ -pe-e, adj., saved, unhurt. R. σ€δ, sed, sit. ηο.μα. (for iδ-.o-μ.O. poetic, seat oneself sit; καθ-^ο-η. sitdownj^ » nL L seat • ένέδρά, as, a sitting in wait, ambush; ^..δρβιζ-ω. Hem Ιδ-ρα, as, seat, iv ^opa, , y ambuscade; *'"led-e-6, sit; eel-la, ae, /., seat; eol-iu-m, i, «., seat, throne; Βδά-δ-β, is, /., bench ; sid-o, sit down. SIT, SET, SE.T, SADDLE, SETTLE ; cae^-edral, chair, chaiBe, deca- hedron, tetra-hedron, san-hedrim. R. σετΓ, sec, follow. Iw.« be about, be busy with, mid. Iir^.|.at, busy oneself about. acL7anl, tnow; δ^Λο-ν, τ6, implement, tool, ^l.r implements :; Jr, Ar, arms, armour; A-oxXo-s, o-., '7-^^/ ^^^/^'^ well a^med; M^X.^-s, 0-., in or with arn^sj ^^^-'^^.^r^'/j/i^^ ..av^ nahting in heavy arms; 6τ\ομαχ-ίά, as, heavy infantry tactics ΐ:^ΙτΖ^^^^^^ soldier; 6.Xire^, serve as a heavy-armed ^ \.^r.Js, ,, 6-., composed of ^^^^r^^^^f'^'u^^^ . ly xfj. «*~m Λ/77Μ • i?oir\i-aia, as, state of being juuy arm, equip ; έ^07Γλίfω, arm fully , ίξοττΛΐ σι», «>, aimed; δπλι-σι-ί, e-cs, ή, equipment, accoutrements. sequ-o-r, /o^Zot.; Bec-u-ndu-B, αφ. /oZZoi^wflr ; eoc-lu-s, 1, m., comrade. pan-oplj. R. σεχ, hold, have. hi ω fut Ηω or σχτί-σω, 2 aor. Ιί-<τχ-ον, have, hold; t-^-^ («or ...ex %, ΛΟΜ ΛΟΖ. /..t; ^-c^x-v.-o-.ac, hold oneself --der,enga^l ^omise ;.XeoU-r,-s, ov (cf R. irXa), one t.Ao has or dα^m. r^ore Ά. (Γκα— Η. 282 283 Β. στ<ι-Κ. στρα than he ought; ν\€ον€κτέ'ω, claim too large a part, get the better; kx-vpo-it ά, ό -Pj tenable, strong; έν-έχυρο-ρ, τό, that which holds one fast, pledge; όχ-ή, ψ, that which supports, nourishment; €ύ-ωχ4-ω, nourish well, entertain; €ύωχ4ά, as, feast; οχ-νρό -s, if, ό-ν, (enable, strong ; ηνί-οχο-^, ό (see ηνία, reins), one who holds the reins, driver; σκηΊΓτοΰχο -s, 6 (σκηττο-ν, σκητ-τρο-ν, staff, sceptre), sceptre-bearer; ΜΓ-οχο-ϊ, o-v, under control, subject to; σχ€-8ό-ν, adv., holding on, nearly; «τχί-τλ-ιο-δ, ά, o-v, holding out, unflinching, cruel; ατχή.μα, ατ -os, TO, way of holding oneself , form ; οχο-λ•ί\, ijs, a holding up, leis- ure; (τχολα-ιο-ί, ά, o-v, leisurely, slow; σχοΧαΙωί, adv., slowly ; σχολάζω, be at leisure; (ϊ-σχολο -s, o-v, without leisure, busy; άσχο\-ίά, os, lack of leisure, business. SAIL ; ep-och, etin-uch, hectic, hector, scheme, school, scho- lastic, scholiast. R. afcuy sea, cover^ dark, νκι-ά, ay, shadow, shade; σ-κη-νή, ^s, covered place, tent; σν-σκηνο -s, δ, tent-companion; σκηνό-ω, pitch tents, encamp; σκήνω-μα, ot-oj, to, tent, plur., quarters; aKijv-os, c-os, τ6, tent; σκηνέ-ω, be quartered; δια- σκηνέ-ω, be in quarters apart; verbal διασκηνη-τέο-ν, must encamp apart; o-ko-to-Si 6, darkness; σκοτ-αΐο -s, a, o-v, in the dark; σκ6τ-οί, f-os, TO, darkness. cae-cu-s, adj., blind; co-cl6-s, αφ'., one-eyed. SHADBi SHADOW, SHED ; sceiie, pro-sceiiiuiii. R. σ«ι/, sen, cover, hide. σκΰ-τ -os, €-05, TO, hide, leather; <τκύτ-ινο-ι, η, o-v, of leather, leath- ern; σ•κ9-λο-ν, TO, armour, plur., arms stript from a dead enemy; σκΰ\€ν-ω, strip, spoil ; «τΰ-λο-ν, τό = σκΰλον ; σϋ\ά-ω, strip off, spoil ; σ*κ€ν-ή, ψ, attire, dress; χαρα-σκ€υή, ijs, preparation; a-xapdaKevo-s, o-v, unprepared; irm^-os, e-os, τό, utensil, gear; σκ€νο-φόρο•$, o-v (<•/, K. φιρ), baggage-carrying ; σκ€νοφορ4-ω, carry baggage; σκ€υάζω, use utensils, make ready, attire. scu-ti-ca, ae,/., whip; cu-ti-s, is, /., skin; scfi-tu-m, ϊ, η., shield; ob-scu-m-s, adj., dark; cfl-ii-a, ae, /., house, senate-house. • HIDE, HOUSE, HOABD, SCUM, SCOWL, SKULK, SKT, SHOWER ; a-Sylum. R. σττα, spa, draw, stretch, onrd-w, draw; Α-σττά^ο-μαι, draw to oneself, embrace; στά-8 -to-v, TO (for σιτα-δ-ιο-ν), extended space, stadium; σιτά-ν-ι-ι, e-w$, i), scarce- ness, lack ('straining'); στάν -io-s, o, o-v, scanty; σττανί^ω, lack, needj ιτέν-ο-μοι (for στ€-ν-ο-μαι), strain or exert oneself, toil, be poor; ircv-td, as, poverty; ττίν-η-β, vr-os, 6, day-labourer, poor man; irciva, ψ (for TTcv-ta), hunger, famine; π€ΐνά-ω, be hungry; ιτόν-ο-β, ό, labour j έτί-τΓονο-^, o-v, laborious, painful; τνονέ-ω, work hard; ιτονη-ρό-ί, ά, ό-ν, troublesome, bad; πονηρών, adv., with diMcuUy ; ταμ-πόνηρο -s, o-v {cf. tras), wholly bad; ιτά-σ-χ-ω (for ιτα-θ-σκ-ω), be drawn tight, suffer, experience; ιτάθ-οί, c-os, τό, experience, accident; ά-ιταθ-ή^, 4s, icithout experience of, free from; ηδυ-παθ-ίι^, is (c/. R. o&), experienc- ing pleasure ; ηδυτταθέ-ω, live pleasantly, be luxurious ; πάθη-μχι, ατ -os, τό, anything that is experienced, misfortune, wretchedness. spa-t-iu-m, ϊ, η., room, space; pa-ti-o-r, bear, suffer; sp5-s, spel, /, hope; pro-spe-r-u-s, adj., according to hope, favourable ; ρδη -ur-ia, ae, /., destitution; pann-u-s, ϊ, m., piece of cloth; pal-la, ae, /., mantle. SPAN, SPIN, SPINDLE, SPIDER, SPEED, SPADE ; spasm, pathos, allo- pathy, Aomoeo-pathy, αηίι -pathy, a-pathy, si/m-pathy. R. στα, sta, stand, set, Ι-στη-μι (for σι-στη-μι), make stand; <Γτά-σ•ι-5, €-ωs, η, a standing, band, faction ; έτΓί-στασι -s, e-ws, η, a stopping, halt; κατά-στασι -s, e-ojs, ή, an establishing, state, condition; στασιάζω, stand against, form a faction, revolt ; άντι-στασιά^ω, form a faction against ; άντιστασιώ-τη -s, ου, one of the opposite faction ; i7n-στά-τψs, ov, one who stands over or has charge of; έττιστατ^-ω, exercise command ; τρο-στά-τη -s, ου, one who stands before, leader; ττροστατέ-ω, be leader or manager of; τροστατ€ύ-ω, be at the head, take charge; rri-ap, ατ -os, τό, stiff fat, suet; l-o-TO-s, d (for σι-στο -s), mast; Ιστ-Ιο-ν, τό, sail; <Γταυ-ρό-8, έ, stake, palisade; σταυρό-ω, fence with pales; σταύρω-μα, ατ -os, τό, stocks ode ; <Γτα-θ-|«$-β, ό, standing-place, stall, station. si-st5, make stand, set; sta-tu-s, adj., fixed; sta-ti-m, adv., on the spot, immediately; sta-ti-o, on-is,/., a standing; sta-bulu-m, Ϊ, n., stall; in-stau-r-S, establish; st5, sta-re, stand; sta-men, in-is, n., warp, thread. STAND, STEAD, STUD, STEED, STOW ; i7i>o-stasy, opo-state, ec-stasy, laAto-logy, /tydro-statics, sy-stem, stoic. R. στρα, stra, strew, «Γτρα-τό -s, ό, that which is spread out, encamped army ; στρατό-ΊΓ€δο-ν, τό (cf. η. in%), camping-ground, camp; στ ρατοΐΓ€δ€ύ-ω, encamp ; στρατ- R. σφαλ-Β. τακ 284 285 R. τ<ιλ-τΑ.ο« iryj-s, ό (c/. R. αγ), leader of an army, general; 44 / . f , / ff ^-*c t„„«j /.-ts ^ Λ ^....j./-/- , V'"/•-- ν 0-4,^ «Ϊ jH* ^' : /J". J, \„r"' ., 6 J /i> f 1. ' > .0 i-it 4 t -• Κ^ ^ Α-ίΛ4,ι . is- » "I ■'■'1 (t 1 1 crj ;-■ ^p c υς i-'t #< c f*"•'*' ■■•^ Μ ■ί. / » ί* t *' L^ C-.GP• i:^cv.'i^'••»-" 'i « «•■fc. 3 Ύ 2.-*/x f C 't, 19 Tl'l^ I ^^ ^ C 'Ir €iMrt? :»-c-t TTji.,. >^1i„.,*4i^ ^,. ■• ivl '^' /••■^L. 4. -#"«rv' JPip' j^'v *^ jP ιί^••|. ilV' ί ( ) .f<|, J τ "I* f t' "Γ" •<*-■■ Τ ♦ kiri.,ry X^^i'f.'l t '■ Λ" ^ .< t ff f ^^ Γ #fi, Λ # ό <4,?"' '/C' Λ u •Z>v'' ■-^ r«•. iCfc JflU'• J. k: c-c / 'i^,^ cX 'Γ'..ΐί -'V' K- Ji τ T-1 ; y ^ ύ^ V I**•*!•,,, ' ■i"' X -i Γ I" ,,»^ /-I T" VU I» ^ f \ ■ ( fmfyC jdK. ■■■ c **■•" ίίη^*•"• y «. ■c'l I COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY "^^^^^^ [ ™s boou .3 due on the ^'^'^^ί::ί^::ίζ^':ΐ,'^^ expiration of a '^^^Z^XSL•T.L•,er...t with provided by the library rules or oy «p the Librarian in charge. ,Γ 3 , I / ί,Λ, ί- :^ -J . t- i.e. ι' . 'J- ^ COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY 0026054914 I / ^^^^^^^^^yL it; .1 f ft- iiBW«iSSft«^m'3